Af 3260C PDF

B132/B200
SERVICE MANUAL
002446MIU

B
1
3
2
/
B
2
0
0

S
E
R
V
I
C
E

M
A
N
U
A
L

B132/B200
SERVICE MANUAL
002446MIU

It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained
within this document to maintain a level of confidentiality that is in the best
interest of Ricoh Corporation and its member companies.

NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY
FASHION AND DISTRIBUTED WITHOUT THE PRIOR
PERMISSION OF RICOH CORPORATION.

All product names, domain names or product illustrations, including
desktop images, used in this document are trademarks, registered
trademarks or the property of their respective companies.
They are used throughout this book in an informational or editorial fashion
only and for the benefit of such companies. No such use, or the use of
any trade name, or web site is intended to convey endorsement or other
affiliation with Ricoh products.
! 2005 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.

The Service Manual contains information
regarding service techniques, procedures,
processes and spare parts of office equipment
distributed by Ricoh Corporation. Users of this
manual should be either service trained or
certified by successfully completing a Ricoh
Technical Training Program.
Untrained and uncertified users utilizing
information contained in this service manual to
repair or modify Ricoh equipment risk personal
injury, damage to property or loss of warranty
protection.

Ricoh Corporation
WARNING

LEGEND
PRODUCT CODE COMPANY

GESTETNER LANIER RICOH SAVIN
B132 DSc460 LD160c Aficio 3260C C6045
B200 CS555 LC155 Aficio Color 5560 SDC555

DOCUMENTATION HISTORY

REV. NO. DATE COMMENTS
* 07/2005 Original Printing

Rev. 06/2006

SM i B132/B200
B132/B200
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALLATION............................................................................ 1-1
1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ...........................................................1-1
1.1.1 OPERATING ENVIRONMENT.........................................................1-1
1.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL.............................................................................1-2
1.1.3 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS...............................................1-3
1.1.4 DIMENSIONS...................................................................................1-4
1.1.5 POWER REQUIREMENTS ..............................................................1-5
1.2 COPIER AND PERIPHERALS..................................................................1-6
1.3 COPIER B132/B181/B200.........................................................................1-7
1.3.1 ACCESSORIES................................................................................1-7
1.3.2 INSTALLATION................................................................................1-8
Tapes and packing material ..................................................................1-8
Shipping Retainer Removal ................................................................1-12
Developer Cartridge Installation..........................................................1-15
Reassemble the PCU .........................................................................1-20
Reattach the Face Plate .....................................................................1-22
Remove the Retainers in the Drawer Unit...........................................1-23
Reinstall the Toner Hopper .................................................................1-26
STC (Soft Toner Cartridge) Installation...............................................1-27
Make the Machine Level .....................................................................1-28
Attach the PCU Stand Rack................................................................1-29
Attach Decals......................................................................................1-30
Initializing Developer and Toner .........................................................1-31
Load the Paper Trays .........................................................................1-33
Make a Test Color Print ......................................................................1-33
ACC (Automatic Color Calibration) Adjustment ..................................1-33
Counter Display Setting ......................................................................1-35
Print an SMC Report...........................................................................1-35
Connect the Upper and Lower Tray Heaters ......................................1-36
1.4 COPY TRAY (B756) ................................................................................1-37
1.4.1 ACCESSORIES..............................................................................1-37
1.4.2 INSTALLATION..............................................................................1-38
1.5 A3/11" X 17" PAPER SIZE TRAY (B331) ................................................1-41
1.5.1 ACCESSORIES..............................................................................1-41
1.5.2 INSTALLATION..............................................................................1-42
1.6 KEY CARD BRACKET (B498), KEY COUNTER BRACKET (B452) .......1-47
1.6.1 KEY CARD BRACKET B498 ACCESSORIES ...............................1-47
1.6.2 KEY COUNTER BRACKET B452 ACCESSORIES........................1-48
1.6.3 INSTALLATION..............................................................................1-49
Assemble the Key Counter Bracket ....................................................1-49

B132/B200 ii SM
Install the Key Card Bracket and Assembled Key Counter .................1-50
1.7 LCT (B473), LCT ADAPTER (B699)........................................................1-52
1.7.1 ACCESSORIES..............................................................................1-52
LCT (B473) .........................................................................................1-52
LCT Adapter (B699)............................................................................1-53
1.7.2 INSTALLATION..............................................................................1-54
Removing Tape and Accessories .......................................................1-54
LCT Adapter (B699) Installation..........................................................1-55
LCT Installation...................................................................................1-56
1.8 81/2" X 14"/B4 PAPER SIZE TRAY (B474) .............................................1-59
1.8.1 ACCESSORIES..............................................................................1-59
1.8.2 INSTALLATION..............................................................................1-60
LCT Connected to the Machine ..........................................................1-60
1.9 2000/3000 SHEET FINISHERS (B700/B701) .........................................1-63
1.9.1 ACCESSORIES..............................................................................1-63
1.9.2 INSTALLATION..............................................................................1-64
Removing Tapes and Packing Materials.............................................1-64
Docking the Finisher to the Copier......................................................1-67
Attaching the Trays.............................................................................1-70
Leveling the Finisher...........................................................................1-71
De-curler Plate....................................................................................1-72
Selecting the Staple Supply Name .....................................................1-73
Enabling Booklet Binding (B700 Only) ................................................1-73
1.10 PUNCH UNIT (B702).............................................................................1-74
1.10.1 ACCESSORIES............................................................................1-74
1.10.2 INSTALLATION............................................................................1-75
1.11 MAIL BOX (B762)..................................................................................1-78
1.11.1 ACCESSORIES............................................................................1-78
1.11.2 INSTALLATION............................................................................1-79
1.12 3000-SHEET FINISHER (B706), FINISHER ADAPTER (B698)............1-82
1.12.1 ACCESSORIES............................................................................1-82
3000-Sheet Finisher B706 Accessories..............................................1-82
Finisher Adapter Kit B698 Accessories...............................................1-83
1.12.2 INSTALLATION............................................................................1-84
Shipping tape and retainers................................................................1-84
Finisher Adapter Kit B698 Installation.................................................1-86
Finisher Installation.............................................................................1-90
Selecting the Staple Supply Name .....................................................1-93
1.13 PUNCH UNIT B531/A821......................................................................1-94
1.13.1 ACCESSORIES............................................................................1-94
1.13.2 INSTALLATION............................................................................1-95
1.14 OUTPUT JOGGER UNIT (B703/B513) .................................................1-99
1.14.1 ACCESSORIES............................................................................1-99
1.14.2 INSTALLATION..........................................................................1-100
1.15 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B704) .................................................1-102
1.15.1 ACCESSORIES..........................................................................1-102
1.15.2 INSTALLATION..........................................................................1-103
Removing Tapes and Packing Materials...........................................1-103
Preparing the Finisher (B700/B701/B706) ........................................1-104

SM iii B132/B200
Attaching the Extensions for the B706..............................................1-105
Attaching the Extensions for the B700/B701.....................................1-108
Attaching the Interposer Tray (B700/B701/B706) .............................1-109
Attaching the Corner Plates for the B706..........................................1-110
Docking Finisher/Interposer with the Machine (B700/B701/B706)....1-112
1.16 MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS ..........................................................1-114
1.16.1 OVERVIEW................................................................................1-114
1.16.2 ACCESSORY CARDS................................................................1-115
1.16.3 APPLICATIONS PROVIDED ON SD CARDS............................1-116
1.16.4 HANDLING DIMMS AND SD CARDS........................................1-117
DIMMs ..............................................................................................1-117
SD cards...........................................................................................1-117
1.16.5 MERGING APPLICATIONS ON ONE SD CARD .......................1-118
Overview...........................................................................................1-118
Merging Applications.........................................................................1-119
Undo Exec ........................................................................................1-120
Storing SD Application Cards on Site ...............................................1-121
1.16.6 PRINTER/SCANNER B737 AND INTERFACE UNIT.................1-122
Accessories ......................................................................................1-122
Installation.........................................................................................1-123
USB SP Settings...............................................................................1-125
1.16.7 IEEE 1284 INTERFACE BOARD B679 (CENTRONICS) ...........1-126
Accessories ......................................................................................1-126
1.16.8 IEEE 1394 INTERFACE BOARD B581 (FIREWIRE) .................1-127
Accessories ......................................................................................1-127
UP Mode Settings for IEEE 1394......................................................1-128
SP Mode Settings for IEEE 1394......................................................1-129
1.16.9 BLUETOOTH INTERFACE UNIT B736-11.................................1-130
Accessories ......................................................................................1-130
Installation Procedure .......................................................................1-131
1.16.10 IEEE 802.11B INTERFACE UNIT G813-04, -05.......................1-132
Accessories ......................................................................................1-132
Installation.........................................................................................1-133
UP Mode Settings for Wireless LAN.................................................1-134
SP Mode Settings for 802.11b Wireless LAN ...................................1-136
1.16.11 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER B609 .........................................1-137
Accessory Check ..............................................................................1-137
Installation.........................................................................................1-137
1.16.12 POSTSCRIPT3 B761 ...............................................................1-138
1.16.13 DOS UNIT TYPE C (B735).......................................................1-139
Accessory Check ..............................................................................1-139
Before You Begin..........................................................................1-139
Seal Check And Removal .................................................................1-140
Installation Procedure .......................................................................1-141
1.16.14 COPIER CONNECTION KIT B328...........................................1-143
1.16.15 EFI V G815 EXTERNAL CONTROLLER..................................1-145

B132/B200 iv SM
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE.................................................... 2-1
2.1 OVERVIEW...............................................................................................2-1
2.2 PM COUNTER ..........................................................................................2-2
2.2.1 DISPLAYING THE PM COUNTER...................................................2-2
2.2.2 PM PARTS SCREEN DETAILS .......................................................2-3
All PM Parts list: Main Menu.................................................................2-3
Number button submenu ......................................................................2-4
Parts list for PM yield indicator..............................................................2-5
2.3 PM TABLES ..............................................................................................2-6
2.3.1 MAIN MACHINE...............................................................................2-6
Copier PM Parts ...................................................................................2-6
ARDF PM Parts ..................................................................................2-10
2.3.2 2000/3000-SHEET BOOKLET FINISHER B700/B701 ...................2-11
2.3.3 PUNCH B702 .................................................................................2-11
2.3.4 3000-SHEET FINISHER B706 .......................................................2-11
2.3.5 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY B704...............................................2-12
2.3.6 LCT B473 .......................................................................................2-12
2.4 LUBRICATION POINTS..........................................................................2-13
2.4.1 COPIER..........................................................................................2-13
OPC, ITB Replacement ......................................................................2-13
Fusing Unit..........................................................................................2-14

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................ 3-1
3.1 GENERAL CAUTIONS..............................................................................3-1
3.1.1 DRUM...............................................................................................3-1
3.1.2 PCU UNIT.........................................................................................3-1
3.1.3 TRANSFER BELT UNIT...................................................................3-2
3.1.4 SCANNER UNIT...............................................................................3-2
3.1.5 LASER UNIT ....................................................................................3-2
3.1.6 DEVELOPMENT...............................................................................3-3
3.1.7 CLEANING.......................................................................................3-4
3.1.8 FUSING UNIT...................................................................................3-4
3.1.9 PAPER FEED...................................................................................3-4
3.1.10 USED TONER................................................................................3-4
3.2 COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES.....................................................3-5
3.2.1 ARDF................................................................................................3-5
3.2.2 OPERATION PANEL, TOP COVERS ..............................................3-6
3.2.3 LEFT COVERS.................................................................................3-7
3.2.4 FRONT DOOR .................................................................................3-8
3.2.5 RIGHT COVERS ..............................................................................3-9
3.2.6 REAR COVERS..............................................................................3-10
3.2.7 TONER HOPPER, FACEPLATE, PCU...........................................3-11
Removing Hopper, Faceplate, PCU....................................................3-11

SM v B132/B200
Reinstalling PCU, Faceplate, Toner Hopper .......................................3-15
3.2.8 IMAGE TRANSFER UNIT ..............................................................3-18
3.2.9 DRAWER UNIT ..............................................................................3-20
3.2.10 DUPLEX UNIT..............................................................................3-22
3.2.11 OPENING AND LOCKING THE CONTROLLER BOX COVER....3-23
3.2.12 SD CARD STORAGE...................................................................3-24
3.3 SCANNER UNIT......................................................................................3-25
3.3.1 EXPOSURE GLASS.......................................................................3-25
3.3.2 LENS BLOCK, PAPER SIZE SENSORS........................................3-26
3.3.3 EXPOSURE LAMP.........................................................................3-27
3.3.4 SCANNER MOTOR........................................................................3-28
3.3.5 SCANNER HP SENSOR................................................................3-29
3.3.6 SCANNER INTERFACE BOARD (SIOB) .......................................3-30
3.3.7 SCANNER WIRE............................................................................3-31
Scanner Wire Removal .......................................................................3-31
Scanner Wire Reinstallation and Scanner Position Adjustment ..........3-32
3.4 LASER UNIT ...........................................................................................3-34
3.4.1 CAUTION DECALS........................................................................3-34
3.4.2 POLYGON MOTOR........................................................................3-35
3.4.3 LASER UNIT ..................................................................................3-36
Adjustments After Laser Unit Replacement ........................................3-39
3.4.4 LASER SYNCHRONIZATION DETECTOR....................................3-40
3.5 PCU.........................................................................................................3-41
3.5.1 DEVELOPER REPLACEMENT......................................................3-41
3.5.2 DEVELOPMENT GEARS...............................................................3-49
3.5.3 CHARGE ROLLER UNIT................................................................3-50
3.5.4 DRUM AND CLEANING BLADE ....................................................3-51
Removing the OPC Drum...................................................................3-51
Removing the Cleaning Blade ............................................................3-52
3.5.5 PCU CLEANING UNIT ...................................................................3-54
3.5.6 TD SENSOR...................................................................................3-56
3.5.7 AFTER REPLACING THE PCU COMPONENTS
AND DEVELOPER.........................................................................3-57
3.6 TONER SUPPLY.....................................................................................3-59
3.6.1 STC PORT CLEANING..................................................................3-59
3.6.2 CONNECTOR BOARD (CNB) ........................................................3-60
3.6.3 TONER PUMP................................................................................3-61
3.6.4 TONER END SENSOR ..................................................................3-62
3.6.5 TONER SUPPLY MOTOR..............................................................3-63
3.7 PAPER TRANSFER UNIT.......................................................................3-64
3.7.1 RELAY SENSOR............................................................................3-64
3.7.2 DOUBLE-FEED SENSORS, REGISTRATION SENSORS ............3-65
3.7.3 PAPER TRANSFER UNIT..............................................................3-66
3.7.4 PAPER TRANSFER ROLLER, DISCHARGE PLATE ....................3-68
3.7.5 LUBRICANT BAR...........................................................................3-69
3.7.6 CLEANING BLADE.........................................................................3-70
3.7.7 CLEANING BRUSH ROLLER ........................................................3-71
3.7.8 PAPER TRANSPORT BELT, PAPER SEPARATION POWER PACK
........................................................................................................3-72

B132/B200 vi SM
3.7.9 REGISTRATION MOTOR ..............................................................3-73
3.7.10 DOUBLE-FEED DETECTION LED...............................................3-74
3.8 IMAGE TRANSFER UNIT .......................................................................3-75
3.8.1 ITB, BELT CLEANING UNIT ..........................................................3-75
Disassembly and ITB Replacement ....................................................3-75
Reassembly of the Image ITB Unit and Belt Cleaning Unit.................3-77
Dusting the ITB with Lubricant Powder ...............................................3-79
3.8.2 ITB CLEANING BLADE, DUST COLLECTION UNIT.....................3-81
3.8.3 ITB CLEANING ROLLER, SCRAPER BLADE ...............................3-82
3.8.4 MUSIC AND ID SENSORS ............................................................3-83
3.8.5 IMAGE TRANSFER POWER PACK...............................................3-84
3.8.6 BELT POSITION SENSORS..........................................................3-85
3.9 FUSING UNIT..........................................................................................3-86
3.9.1 FUSING BELT STRIPPERS...........................................................3-86
3.9.2 FUSING UNIT.................................................................................3-87
3.9.3 FUSING EXIT SENSOR, ACCORDION JAM SENSOR.................3-88
3.9.4 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMOSTATS, THERMISTOR...............3-89
3.9.5 FUSING CLEANING UNIT .............................................................3-90
3.9.6 FUSING BELT THERMOSTATS....................................................3-91
3.9.7 FUSING THERMISTORS, HEATING ROLLER
TEMPERATURE SENSOR .............................................................3-92
3.9.8 FUSING BELT OIL SUPPLY ROLLER, CLEANING ROLLERS.....3-93
3.9.9 PRESSURE ROLLER CLEANING FELT ROLLER ........................3-94
3.9.10 HOT ROLLER, HEATING ROLLER FUSING LAMPS..................3-95
3.9.11 PRESSURE ROLLER FUSING LAMP .........................................3-97
3.9.12 HEATING ROLLER, FUSING BELT, HOT ROLLER....................3-98
3.9.13 PRESSURE ROLLER.................................................................3-100
3.9.14 PRESSURE ROLLER SEPARATION PAWLS...........................3-101
3.10 DUPLEX UNIT.....................................................................................3-102
3.10.1 DUPLEX INVERTER MOTOR....................................................3-102
3.10.2 DUPLEX TRANSPORT MOTOR................................................3-103
3.10.3 DUPLEX UNIT SENSORS .........................................................3-104
Duplex Entrance Sensor ...................................................................3-104
Transport Sensors 1, 2 .....................................................................3-105
Transport Sensor 3 ...........................................................................3-107
3.10.4 DUPLEX JOGGER MOTOR.......................................................3-108
3.10.5 DUPLEX JOGGER BELT ...........................................................3-109
3.11 TANDEM TRAY (TRAY 1) ...................................................................3-110
3.11.1 TANDEM TRAY..........................................................................3-110
3.11.2 REAR FENCE RETURN SENSOR REPLACEMENT.................3-112
3.11.3 REAR FENCE HP SENSOR REPLACEMENT...........................3-113
3.11.4 TANDEM RIGHT TRAY PAPER SENSOR REPLACEMENT.....3-114
3.11.5 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT WIRE REPLACEMENT..........................3-115
3.11.6 TANDEM TRAY PAPER SIZE CHANGE....................................3-117
3.12 PAPER FEED (TRAYS 2, 3)................................................................3-120
3.12.1 PICKUP, FEED, REVERSE ROLLERS......................................3-120
3.12.2 PAPER FEED UNIT....................................................................3-121
3.12.3 SEPARATION ROLLER PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT................3-123
3.12.4 PAPER END, TRAY LIFT, PAPER FEED SENSORS................3-124

SM vii B132/B200
3.12.5 VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR...........................................3-125
3.13 BYPASS UNIT.....................................................................................3-126
3.13.1 BYPASS PICKUP, FEED, REVERSE ROLLERS.......................3-126
3.13.2 BYPASS AUTO PAPER SIZE DETECTION SWITCHES...........3-127
3.13.3 BYPASS UNIT............................................................................3-128
3.13.4 BYPASS PAPER END SENSOR, FEED SENSOR....................3-129
3.13.5 BYPASS FEED CLUTCH...........................................................3-130
3.14 BOARDS .............................................................................................3-131
3.14.1 CONTROLLER UNIT..................................................................3-131
3.14.2 CONTROLLER BOARD, 256 MB MEMORY, NVRAM...............3-132
3.14.3 NVRAM REPLACEMENT...........................................................3-133
Upload NVRAM Data SD Card ......................................................3-133
Replace NVRAM...............................................................................3-133
Restore NVRAM Data to the New NVRAM.......................................3-133
3.14.4 CONTROLLER BOX COVER, BICU, IOB..................................3-134
3.14.5 RDS BOARD JUMPER...............................................................3-135
3.14.6 INTERFACE BOARD, MOTHER BOARD ..................................3-136
3.14.7 HVPS, PFC BOARD...................................................................3-137
3.14.8 PSU............................................................................................3-138
3.14.9 AC DRIVE BOARD.....................................................................3-139
3.14.10 TRANSFER MOTOR, DRIVE, DRIVE MOTOR BOARDS........3-140
3.15 HDD UNIT ...........................................................................................3-141
Disposal of HDD Units ......................................................................3-142
Reinstallation ....................................................................................3-142
3.16 MOTORS.............................................................................................3-143
3.16.1 PCU MOTOR, DRUM MOTOR...................................................3-143
3.16.2 PAPER TRANSFER MOTOR.....................................................3-145
3.16.3 IMAGE TRANSFER MOTOR .....................................................3-146
3.16.4 USED TONER MOTOR, TRANSPORT MOTOR........................3-147
3.16.5 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT MOTOR (TRAYS 2, 3) ...........................3-148
3.16.6 ITB DRIVE MOTOR....................................................................3-149
3.17 AIR FILTERS.......................................................................................3-150
3.17.1 TONER HOPPER FILTER..........................................................3-150
3.17.2 OZONE FILTER, AIR FILTERS..................................................3-151
3.17.3 SCANNER FILTER.....................................................................3-152
3.18 ARDF...................................................................................................3-153
3.18.1 ARDF COVERS..........................................................................3-153
3.18.2 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT...............................................................3-154
3.18.3 FEED BELT, PICKUP ROLLER .................................................3-155
3.18.4 BOTTOM PLATE POSITION SENSOR......................................3-156
3.18.5 INTERVAL, ORIGINAL WIDTH, SKEW
CORRECTION SEPARATION SENSORS................................3-157
3.18.6 ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS.................................................3-158
3.18.7 COVER OPEN, ORIGINAL SET, BOTTOM PLATE,
PICKUP ROLLER HP, FEED-OUT SENSORS ..........................3-159
3.18.8 ARDF POSITION SENSOR, APS START SENSOR..................3-161
3.18.9 ORIGINAL REGISTRATION, EXIT SENSORS ..........................3-162
3.18.10 ARDF SEPARATION ROLLER ................................................3-164

B132/B200 viii SM
3.18.11 ARDF TRANSPORT BELT.......................................................3-165
Removing the ARDF Transport Belt Assembly .................................3-165
Removing the Belt.............................................................................3-166
Reinstalling the Belt ..........................................................................3-168
Reattaching the White Cover ............................................................3-169
3.18.12 ARDF CONTROL BOARD........................................................3-170
3.18.13 ARDF BOTTOM PLATE LIFT MOTOR.....................................3-171
3.18.14 ARDF FEED MOTOR, ARDF TRANSPORT MOTOR..............3-172
3.18.15 ARDF PICKUP ROLLER LIFT MOTOR....................................3-173
3.19 IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS .....................................................................3-174
3.19.1 SCANNING.................................................................................3-174
Scanner sub-scan magnification.......................................................3-174
Scanner leading edge and side-to-side registration..........................3-174
Main scan dot position correction .....................................................3-175
3.19.2 ARDF..........................................................................................3-176
ARDF side-to-side and leading edge registration .............................3-176
3.19.3 REGISTRATION.........................................................................3-177
Image Area .......................................................................................3-177
Leading Edge....................................................................................3-177
Side to Side ......................................................................................3-177
Adjustment Standards.......................................................................3-177
Paper Registration Standard.............................................................3-177
Adjustment Procedure ......................................................................3-178
3.19.4 COLOR REGISTRATION...........................................................3-179
Forced MUSIC Adjustment ...............................................................3-179
Adjustment of Line Speed for Thick Paper........................................3-179
Color Registration Test and Error Adjustment ..................................3-179
3.19.5 SKEW ADJUSTMENT AFTER LASER UNIT REPLACEMENT .3-180
3.19.6 PRINTER GAMMA CORRECTION ............................................3-182
Copy Mode .......................................................................................3-182
Printer Mode .....................................................................................3-186
Adjustment Reference For Gamma Correction.................................3-187
3.20 TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION.......................................................3-188

TROUBLESHOOTING
4. TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................. 4-1
4.1 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD..........................................................................4-1
4.1.1 OVERVIEW......................................................................................4-1
4.1.2 RECOVERY METHODS...................................................................4-1
4.1.3 DOWNLOAD ERROR CODES.........................................................4-2
4.1.4 IMPORTANT SP CODES.................................................................4-5
4.2 SPECIAL PROCEDURES.........................................................................4-6
4.2.1 SP2181 030 (ALIGNMENT RESULT) ERRORS ..............................4-6
4.2.2 COLOR REGISTRATION ERROR ADJUSTMENT..........................4-9
Color Registration Error Correction.......................................................4-9
Color Skew Error Correction...............................................................4-11
Overall Check .....................................................................................4-12

SM ix B132/B200
Color Registration at the Left and Right Folds of the Test Pattern......4-12
4.2.3 SP3812 001 (DEVSETUP EXECUTE) ERRORS...........................4-14
4.2.4 PROCESS CONTROL TROUBLESHOOTING...............................4-15
Summary of Process Control SC Codes.............................................4-15
Process Control Self-Check: SP3821 .................................................4-16
4.2.5 COLOR ADJUSTMENT FOR CONNECTED COPIERS.................4-22
4.3 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS ...............................................................4-24
4.3.1 SERVICE MODE LOCK/UNLOCK..................................................4-24
4.3.2 SERIES SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS ........................................4-25
4.3.3 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS ...........................................................4-26
SC codes Group 1: Scanning .............................................................4-27
SC codes Group 2: Exposure .............................................................4-29
SC Codes Group 3: Image Development 1......................................4-36
SC codes Group 4: Image Development - 2 .......................................4-41
SC codes Group 5: Paper Feed..........................................................4-46
SC codes Group 6: Device Communication........................................4-54
SC codes Group 7: Peripherals ..........................................................4-57
SC800: Overall System.......................................................................4-64
SC900: Miscellaneous ........................................................................4-70
4.3.4 ADDITIONAL SC CODES PRINTED IN SMC REPORTS..............4-74
4.4 ELECTRICAL BREAKER SWITCH TEST...............................................4-75
4.4.1 HOW TO TEST THE ELECTRICAL BREAKER SWITCH ..............4-75
SERVICE TABLES
5. SERVICE TABLES....................................................................... 5-1
5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE....................................................................5-1
5.1.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION.....................................5-1
Service Mode Lock/Unlock ...................................................................5-1
To Enter and Exit the Service Mode .....................................................5-2
To Switch to the Copy Window for Test Printing...................................5-2
Using the SP Mode...............................................................................5-2
SP Mode Button Summary ...................................................................5-4
SP Mode Print (SMC Print) ...................................................................5-5
5.2 RESETS....................................................................................................5-6
5.2.1 MEMORY ALL CLEAR: SP5801 ......................................................5-6
5.2.2 SOFTWARE AND SETTING RESET ...............................................5-8
Software Reset .....................................................................................5-8
Resetting the User Tool Settings ..........................................................5-8
Resetting Copy/Document Server Features Only .................................5-8
Resetting Scanner Features Only.........................................................5-8
5.3 TEST PATTERN PRINTING......................................................................5-9
5.3.1 PRINTING TEST PATTERN: SP2109 002.......................................5-9
Test Pattern Table ................................................................................5-9
5.3.2 IPU TEST PATTERNS: SP4417.....................................................5-10
5.4 FIRMWARE UPDATE .............................................................................5-11
5.4.1 FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE.............................................5-11
Firmware Update Procedure...............................................................5-12
Verifying the Firmware Update ...........................................................5-15
5.4.2 DOWNLOADING STAMP DATA ....................................................5-17
Rev. 07/2005

B132/B200 x SM
5.4.3 UPLOADING AND DOWNLOADING NVRAM DATA.....................5-18
Uploading NVRAM Data to an SD card ..............................................5-18
Downloading an SD Card to NVRAM..................................................5-19
5.5 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES...............................................................5-20
5.5.1 SERVICE TABLE KEY ...................................................................5-20
5.5.2 COPIER SERVICE TABLES ..........................................................5-22
Group 1000.........................................................................................5-22
Group 2000.........................................................................................5-33
Group 3000.........................................................................................5-80
Group 4000.........................................................................................5-96
Group 5000.......................................................................................5-106
Group 6000.......................................................................................5-132
Group 7000.......................................................................................5-141
Group 8000.......................................................................................5-151
5.5.3 PRINTER SERVICE TABLE.........................................................5-186
Group 1 (Printer) ...............................................................................5-186
5.5.4 SCANNER SERVICE TABLE.......................................................5-188
Group 1 (Scanner) ............................................................................5-188
Group 2 (Scanner) ............................................................................5-188
5.6 COPIER INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK........................................................5-189
5.6.1 COPIER INPUT CHECK: SP5803................................................5-189
5.6.2 COPIER OUTPUT CHECK: SP5804............................................5-198

5.7 ARDF INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK............................................................5-200
5.7.1 ADF INPUT CHECK: SP6007 ......................................................5-200
5.7.2 ADF OUTPUT CHECK: SP6008 ..................................................5-201
5.8 FINISHER 1 (B700/B701) INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK.............................5-202
5.8.1 INPUT CHECK: FINISHER 1 (B700/B701) SP6121.....................5-202
5.8.2 OUTPUT CHECK FINISHER 1: (B700/B701) SP6123.................5-203
5.9 FINISHER 2 (B706) INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK......................................5-204
5.9.1 INPUT CHECK FINISHER 2: (B706) SP6122 ..............................5-204
5.9.2 OUTPUT CHECK FINISHER 2 (B706) SP6125 ...........................5-205
5.10 USING THE DEBUG LOG...................................................................5-206
5.10.1 SWITCHING ON AND SETTING UP SAVE DEBUG LOG.........5-206
5.10.2 RETRIEVING THE DEBUG LOG FROM THE HDD................... 5-209
5.10.3 RECORDING ERRORS MANUALLY.........................................5-210
5.10.4 NEW DEBUG LOG CODES .......................................................5-211
SP5857-015 Copy SD Card-to-SD Card: Any Desired Key .............5-211
SP5857-016 Create a File on HDD to Store a Log ..........................5-211
SP5857-017 Create a File on SD Card to Store a Log ....................5-211
5.11 USER TOOLS .....................................................................................5-212
5.11.1 OVERVIEW................................................................................5-212
5.11.2 SYSTEM SETTINGS..................................................................5-213
5.11.3 MAINTENANCE..........................................................................5-215
5.11.4 COPIER/DOCUMENT SERVER FEATURES ............................5-216
5.11.5 PRINTER FEATURES................................................................5-219
5.11.6 SCANNER FEATURES..............................................................5-221
5.11.7 INQUIRY.....................................................................................5-222
5.11.8 COUNTER..................................................................................5-222

SM xi B132/B200
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
6. DETAILS....................................................................................... 6-1
6.1 GENERAL OVERVIEW.............................................................................6-1
6.1.1 MAIN MACHINE...............................................................................6-1
6.1.2 PAPER PATH: COVER INTERPOSER TRAY .................................6-3
6.1.3 PAPER PATH: 9-BIN MAILBOX.......................................................6-4
6.1.4 DRIVE LAYOUT ...............................................................................6-5
6.2 BOARDS ...................................................................................................6-6
6.2.1 BLOCK DIAGRAM............................................................................6-6
6.2.2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS ......................................................6-7
6.2.3 CONTROLLER BOX VENTILATION................................................6-9
6.3 COPY PROCESS OVERVIEW................................................................6-10
6.4 ARDF.......................................................................................................6-13
6.4.1 OVERVIEW....................................................................................6-13
6.4.2 ARDF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS............................................6-14
Components View 1: Sensors.............................................................6-14
Components View 2: Motors, Sensors, Other.....................................6-15
ARDF Components View 3: Drive Motors...........................................6-16
6.4.3 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION........................................................6-17
6.4.4 PICK-UP ROLLER..........................................................................6-20
6.4.5 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT....................................................................6-21
6.4.6 ORIGINAL FEED AND SEPARATION ...........................................6-22
6.4.7 ORIGINAL FEED AND SKEW CORRECTION...............................6-23
6.4.8 SLIP DETECTION..........................................................................6-24
6.4.9 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT (ONE-SIDED) ........................................6-25
6.4.10 DUPLEX SCANNING ...................................................................6-26
6.4.11 ARDF JAM DETECTION..............................................................6-28
Jam Detection Sensor Layout .............................................................6-28
Jam Detection Table...........................................................................6-29
6.5 SCANNER UNIT......................................................................................6-30
6.5.1 OVERVIEW....................................................................................6-30
6.5.2 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION........................................................6-31
Detection Timing.................................................................................6-33
6.5.3 SCANNER DRIVE..........................................................................6-34
6.5.4 SCANNER UNIT FANS AND ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER...6-35
6.5.5 DUST DETECTION........................................................................6-36
Overview.............................................................................................6-36
What Happens if Dust is Detected? ....................................................6-37
How is the Dust Detected? .................................................................6-38
The Effects of SP Mode Settings on Dust Detection...........................6-39
6.6 IMAGE PROCESSING............................................................................6-40
6.6.1 OVERVIEW....................................................................................6-40
6.6.2 SBU (SENSOR BOARD UNIT).......................................................6-41
SBU ....................................................................................................6-41
Operation Summary............................................................................6-41
Storing Operation Settings..................................................................6-41
SBU Test Mode ..................................................................................6-41

B132/B200 xii SM
6.6.3 IPU (IMAGE PROCESSING UNIT).................................................6-42
6.7 LASER UNIT ...........................................................................................6-43
6.7.1 OVERVIEW....................................................................................6-43
6.7.2 LD UNIT..........................................................................................6-44
Dual Beam Writing..............................................................................6-44
LD Safety Switches.............................................................................6-44
6.7.3 OPTICAL PATHS ...........................................................................6-45
Optical Path ........................................................................................6-46
6.7.4 IMAGE POSITION CORRECTION (MUSIC) ..................................6-47
What does MUSIC do? .......................................................................6-47
When is MUSIC done? .......................................................................6-47
Location of the MUSIC Sensors..........................................................6-48
How is MUSIC Done?.........................................................................6-49
3rd Mirror Position Adjustment............................................................6-51
Exposure Unit Temperature Sensors..................................................6-51
6.8 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS (PCU)......................................................6-52
6.8.1 OVERVIEW OF TANDEM PCU UNITS..........................................6-52
6.8.2 AROUND THE DRUM....................................................................6-53
Drum Drive..........................................................................................6-54
Drum Charge ......................................................................................6-55
Drum Cleaning....................................................................................6-56
Drum Ventilation .................................................................................6-57
Ozone Ventilation ...............................................................................6-59
6.8.3 DEVELOPMENT UNIT ...................................................................6-60
Overview.............................................................................................6-60
Development Unit Operation...............................................................6-61
Development, PCU Unit Drive ............................................................6-62
6.9 TONER SUPPLY.....................................................................................6-63
6.9.1 OVERVIEW....................................................................................6-63
6.9.2 TONER SUPPLY MECHANISM.....................................................6-65
6.9.3 TONER CARTRIDGE.....................................................................6-66
6.9.4 TONER END SENSORS................................................................6-68
Toner near-end...................................................................................6-68
Toner end ...........................................................................................6-69
Toner End Recovery...........................................................................6-69
6.10 WASTE TONER COLLECTION ............................................................6-70
6.10.1 WASTE TONER PATH.................................................................6-70
6.10.2 WASTE TONER UNIT MOTORS .................................................6-72
6.10.3 WASTE TONER COLLECTION UNIT SENSORS........................6-73
6.11 PROCESS CONTROL ..........................................................................6-75
6.11.1 OVERVIEW..................................................................................6-75
6.11.2 COMPONENTS USED DURING PROCESS CONTROL.............6-76
Potential Sensor .................................................................................6-76
ID Sensors..........................................................................................6-77
TD Sensor...........................................................................................6-79
Temperature/Humidity Sensors ..........................................................6-79
List of Process Control Acronyms.......................................................6-80
Important SP Codes Related to Process Control ................................6-81

SM xiii B132/B200
6.11.3 POTENTIAL CONTROL ...............................................................6-82
When is Potential Control Done?........................................................6-82
What is Done During Potential Control? .............................................6-83
6.11.4 TONER SUPPLY CONTROL .......................................................6-87
Overview.............................................................................................6-87
Toner Supply Operation Flow.............................................................6-89
6.12 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSFER.....................................6-90
6.12.1 OVERVIEW..................................................................................6-90
6.12.2 ITB DRIVE....................................................................................6-93
6.12.3 ITB LIFT........................................................................................6-94
6.12.4 TRANSFER POWER PACK.........................................................6-96
6.12.5 PAPER TRANSFER AND SEPARATION.....................................6-97
6.12.6 PTR CLEANING...........................................................................6-98
6.12.7 ITB CLEANING.............................................................................6-99
6.12.8 ITB SPEED CONTROL ..............................................................6-100
6.12.9 ITB VENTILATION......................................................................6-101
6.13 PAPER FEED......................................................................................6-102
6.13.1 OVERVIEW................................................................................6-102
6.13.2 DRIVE.........................................................................................6-104
6.13.3 TRAY AND PAPER LIFT MECHANISM TRAY 2,3..................6-105
Bottom Plate Lift ...............................................................................6-105
Lift Sensor.........................................................................................6-106
6.13.4 PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION MECHANISM......................6-107
Feed and Separation at Standby: No Paper Present ........................6-107
Paper Feed and Separation..............................................................6-108
Separation Roller Release Mechanism.............................................6-109
6.13.5 PAPER NEAR-END AND PAPER END TRAYS 2 AND 3 .......6-110
6.13.6 PAPER SIZE DETECTION.........................................................6-111
Tandem Tray (Tray 1) .......................................................................6-111
Universal Cassettes (Tray 2, 3) ........................................................6-111
6.13.7 PAPER TRAY HEATERS...........................................................6-113
6.13.8 TANDEM TRAY TRAY 1 .........................................................6-114
Overview...........................................................................................6-114
Connecting the Left and Right Sides of the Tray ..............................6-115
Paper Lift/Remaining Paper Detection..............................................6-116
Fence Drive ......................................................................................6-118
Rear Fence Drive..............................................................................6-119
Tray Side-to-side Positioning............................................................6-120
6.13.9 TRAY POSITIONING MECHANISM TRAYS 1 TO 3...............6-121
6.13.10 BY-PASS TRAY........................................................................6-122
By-pass Feed and Separation ..........................................................6-122
By-pass Tray Paper End Detection...................................................6-123
By-pass Paper Size Detection ..........................................................6-124
6.13.11 PAPER REGISTRATION..........................................................6-126
Overview...........................................................................................6-126
Paper Registration Drive...................................................................6-127
Jam Removal at Paper Registration .................................................6-128
6.13.12 PAPER TYPE AND DOUBLE-FEED DETECTION...................6-129

B132/B200 xiv SM
6.14 FUSING, PAPER EXIT........................................................................6-132
6.14.1 OVERVIEW................................................................................6-132
6.15 THERMISTORS, THERMOSTATS .....................................................6-134
6.15.1 FUSING UNIT DRIVE.................................................................6-135
6.15.2 LUBRICATION AND CLEANING................................................6-136
Stripper Retraction............................................................................6-137
6.15.3 FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL........................................6-138
Basic Temperature Control ...............................................................6-138
Correction for Machine Internal Temperature ...................................6-140
Copy Speed Reduction (CPM Down Mode)......................................6-140
6.15.4 FUSING UNIT VENTILATION....................................................6-141
6.16 DUPLEX UNIT.....................................................................................6-142
6.16.1 OVERVIEW................................................................................6-142
6.16.2 DUPLEX DRIVE .........................................................................6-143
6.16.3 INVERTER OPERATION ...........................................................6-144
Inverter Feed-in and Jogging............................................................6-144
Inverter Feed-out ..............................................................................6-145
6.16.4 DUPLEX TRAY FEED................................................................6-146
6.16.5 DUPLEX INTERLEAVE FEED ...................................................6-147
6.16.6 DUPLEX UNIT VENTILATION ...................................................6-149
6.17 PAPER EXIT .......................................................................................6-150
6.17.1 FACE UP EXIT MECHANISM....................................................6-150
6.17.2 DE-CURL MECHANISM.............................................................6-151
6.17.3 PAPER EXIT COOLING.............................................................6-152
6.17.4 ENERGY SAVER MODES .........................................................6-153

SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS............................................................................. 7-1
1. MAINFRAME...............................................................................................7-1
1.1 COPYING............................................................................................7-1
Paper Sizes ..........................................................................................7-3
1.2 PRINTING ...........................................................................................7-4
1.3 SCANNER...........................................................................................7-5
2. ARDF B652 .................................................................................................7-6
3. OPTIONAL PERIPHERALS ........................................................................7-7
3.1 LARGE CAPACITY TRAY B473..........................................................7-7
3.2 8 X 14" PAPER SIZE TRAY B474....................................................7-7
3.3 9-BIN MAILBOX B762 .........................................................................7-8
3.4 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY B704....................................................7-8
3.5 3000-SHEET FINISHER B706 ............................................................7-9
3.6 PUNCH UNIT B531 ...........................................................................7-10
3.7 3000-SHEET FINISHER B701 ..........................................................7-11
3.8 2000-SHEET FINISHER B700 ..........................................................7-13
3.9 PUNCH UNIT B702 ...........................................................................7-15
3.10 A3/11" X 17" TRAY B331 ................................................................7-16
3.11 COPY TRAY B476...........................................................................7-16

SM xv B132/B200
4. MACHINE CONFIGURATION...................................................................7-17
4.1 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS..........................................................7-18
4.2 COPIER.............................................................................................7-18
5. ARDF........................................................................................................7-31

LARGE CAPACITY TRAY B473
SEE SECTION B473 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS

2000/3000-SHEET FINISHER B700/B701
SEE SECTION B700/B701 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS

COVER INTERPOSER TRAY B704

3000-SHEET FINISHER B706

9-BIN MAILBOX B762

Conventions Used in this Manual
This manual uses several symbols.

Symbol What it means
! Refer to section number
!
See Core Tech Manual for
details
" Screw
# Connector
$ E-ring
% Clip ring
& Clamp

Cautions, Notes, etc.
The following headings provide special information:

!WARNING
FAILURE TO OBEY WARNING INFORMATION COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR
DEATH.

!CAUTION
Obey these guidelines to ensure safe operation and prevent minor injuries.

Important
Obey these guidelines to avoid problems such as misfeeds, damage to originals,
loss of valuable data and to prevent damage to the machine.
IMPORTANT
ALWAYS OBEY THESE GUIDELINES TO AVOID SERIOUS PROBLEMS SUCH AS MISFEEDS,
DAMAGE TO ORIGINALS, LOSS OF VALUABLE DATA AND TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE
MACHINE. BOLD IS ADDED FOR EMPHASIS.

NOTE: This information provides tips and advice about how to best service the
machine.

Lengthwise, SEF
(Short Edge Feed)
Sideways, LEF
(Long Edge Feed)

Commonly Used Terms
In the SP tables, the finishers are referred to by number (1, 2, 3), and some
devices that appear in the SP tables are not supported overseas:

Finisher 1 3000/2000-Sheet Finisher B700/B701. The B700 supports corner stapling,
booklet stapling and booklet folding. The B701 supports corner stapling only.
Finisher 2 3000-Sheet Finisher B706.
Z-Fold This refers to the Z-Folding unit. The copier does not support this peripheral
device at this time. Please ignore references to "Z-Fold" in the SP tables.
ITB Image Transfer Belt
PTR Paper Transfer Roller

2. GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
For your safety, please read this manual carefully before you use this product.
Keep this manual handy for future reference.
Safety Information
Always obey the following safety precautions when using this product.
Safety During Operation
In this manual, the following important symbols and notations are used.

! WARNING
A Warning indicates a potentially hazardous situation. Failure to obey a Warning
could result in death or serious injury.

!CAUTION
A Caution indicates a potentially hazardous situation. Failure to obey a Caution
could result in minor or moderate injury or damage to the machine or other
property.

Switches and Symbols
Where symbols are used on or near switches on machines for Europe and other
areas, the meaning of each symbol conforms with IEC60417.

SAFE-SYM.WMF
ON
OFF
Push ON/Push OFF
STANDBY

2.1 RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE CUSTOMER ENGINEER
2.1.1 CUSTOMER ENGINEER
Maintenance shall be done only by trained customer engineers who have
completed service training for the machine and all optional devices designed for
use with the machine.

2.1.2 REFERENCE MATERIAL FOR MAINTENANCE
Maintenance shall be done using the special tools and procedures prescribed for
maintenance of the machine described in the reference materials (service manuals,
technical bulletins, operating instructions, and safety guidelines for customer
engineers).
In regard to other safety issues not described in this document, all customer
engineers shall strictly obey procedures and recommendations described the CE
Safety Guide.
Use only consumable supplies and replacement parts designed for use of the
machine.

2.2 BEFORE INSTALLATION, MAINTENANCE
2.2.1 SHIPPING AND MOVING THE MACHINE
!CAUTION
1. Work carefully when lifting or moving the machine. If the machine is heavy,
two or more customer engineers may be required to prevent injuries (muscle
strains, spinal injuries, etc.) or damage to the machine if it is dropped or
tipped over.
2. Personnel moving or working around the machine should always wear proper
clothing and footwear. Never wear loose fitting clothing or accessories
(neckties, loose sweaters, bracelets, etc. ) or casual footwear (slippers,
sandals, etc.) when lifting or moving the machine.
3. Always unplug the power cord from the power source before you move the
product. Before you move the product, arrange the power cord so it will not
fall under the product.

2.2.2 POWER
!Warning
1. Always disconnect the power plug before doing any maintenance procedure.
After switching off the machine, power is still supplied to the main machine
and other devices. To prevent electrical shock, switch the machine off, wait
for a few seconds, then unplug the machine from the power source.
2. Before you do any checks or adjustments after turning the machine off, work
carefully to avoid injury. After removing covers or opening the machine to do
checks or adjustments, never touch electrical components or moving parts
(gears, timing belts, etc.).
3. After turning the machine on with any cover removed, keep your hands away
from electrical components and moving parts. Never touch the cover of the
fusing unit, gears, timing belts, etc.

2.2.3 INSTALLATION, DISASSEMBLY, AND ADJUSTMENTS
!CAUTION
1. After installation, maintenance, or adjustment, always check the operation of
the machine to make sure that it is operating normally. This ensures that all
shipping materials, protective materials, wires and tags, metal brackets, etc.,
removed for installation, have been removed and that no tools remain inside
the machine. This also ensures that all release interlock switches have been
restored to normal operation.
2. Never use your fingers to check moving parts causing spurious noise. Never
use your fingers to lubricate moving parts while the machine is operating.

2.2.4 SPECIAL TOOLS
!CAUTION
1. Use only standard tools approved for machine maintenance.
2. For special adjustments, use only the special tools and lubricants described
in the service manual. Using tools incorrectly, or using tools that could
damage parts, could damage the machine or cause injuries.

2.3 DURING MAINTENANCE
2.3.1 GENERAL
!CAUTION
1. Before you begin a maintenance procedure:
Switch the machine off.
Disconnect the power plug from the power source.
Allow the machine to cool for at least 10 minutes.
2. Avoid touching the components inside the machine that are labeled as hot
surfaces.

2.3.2 SAFETY DEVICES
! WARNING
1. Never remove any safety device unless it requires replacement. Always
replace safety devices immediately.
2. Never do any procedure that defeats the function of any safety device.
Modification or removal of a safety device (fuse, switch, etc.) could lead to a
fire and personal injury. Always test the operation of the machine to ensure
that it is operating normally and safely after removal and replacement of any
safety device.
3. For replacements use only the correct fuses or circuit breakers rated for use
with the machine. Using replacement devices not designed for use with the
machine could lead to a fire and personal injuries.

2.3.3 ORGANIC CLEANERS
!CAUTION
1. During preventive maintenance, never use any organic cleaners (alcohol,
etc.) other than those described in the service manual.
2. Make sure the room is well ventilated before using any organic cleaner. Use
organic solvents in small amounts to avoid breathing the fumes and
becoming nauseous.
3. Switch the machine off, unplug it, and allow it to cool before doing preventive
maintenance. To avoid fire or explosion, never use an organic cleaner near
any part that generates heat.
4. Wash your hands thoroughly after cleaning parts with an organic cleaner to
contamination of food, drinks, etc. which could cause illness.
5. Clean the floor completely after accidental spillage of silicone oil or other
materials to prevent slippery surfaces that could cause accidents leading to
hand or leg injuries. Use My Ace Silicone Oil Remover (or dry rags) to soak
up spills. For more details, please refer to Technical Bulletin Silicone Oil
Removal (A024-50).

2.3.4 LITHIUM BATTERIES
!WARNING
1. Always replace a lithium battery on a PCB with the same type of battery
prescribed for use on that board. Replacing a lithium battery with any type
other than the one prescribed for use on the board could lead to an explosion
or damage to the PCB.
2. Never discard used batteries by mixing them with other trash. Remove them
from the work site and dispose of them in accordance with local laws and
regulations regarding the disposal of such items.

2.3.5 OZONE FILTERS
!CAUTION
1. Always replace ozone filters as soon as their service life expires (as
described in the service manual). An excessive amount of ozone can build up
around machines that use ozone filters if they are not replaced at the
prescribed time. Excessive ozone could cause personnel working around the
machine to feel unwell.

2.3.6 POWER PLUG AND POWER CORD
!WARNING
1. Before serving the machine (especially when responding to a service call),
always make sure that the power plug has been inserted completely into the
power source. A partially inserted plug could lead to heat generation (due to
a power surge caused by high resistance) and cause a fire or other problems.
2. Always check the power plug and make sure that it is free of dust and lint.
Clean it if necessary. A dirty plug can generate heat which could cause a fire.
3. Inspect the length of the power cord for cuts or other damage. Replace the
power cord if necessary. A frayed or otherwise damaged power cord can
cause a short circuit which could lead to a fire or personal injury from
electrical shock.
4. Check the length of the power cord between the machine and power supply.
Make sure the power cord is not coiled or wrapped around any object such
as a table leg. Coiling the power cord can cause excessive heat to build up
and could cause a fire.
5. Make sure that the area around the power source is free of obstacles so the
power cord can be removed quickly in case of an emergency.
6. Make sure that the power cord is grounded (earthed) at the power source
with the ground wire on the plug.
7. Connect the power cord directly into the power source. Never use an
extension cord.
8. When you disconnect the power plug from the power source, always pull on
the plug, not the cable.

2.4 AFTER INSTALLATION, SERVICING
2.4.1 DISPOSAL OF USED ITEMS
!WARNING
Never incinerate used toner or toner cartridges. Toner or toner cartridges thrown
into a fire can ignite or explode and cause serious injury. At the work site always
carefully wrap used toner and toner cartridges with plastic bags to avoid spillage
before disposal or removal.

!CAUTION
1. Always dispose of used items (developer, toner, toner cartridges, OPC
drums, etc.) in accordance with the local laws and regulations regarding the
disposal of such items.
2. To protect the environment, never dispose of this product or any kind of
waste from consumables at a household waste collection point. Dispose of
these items at one of our dealers or at an authorized collection site.
3. Return used selenium drums to the service center for handling in accordance
with company policy regarding the recycling or disposal of such items.

2.4.2 POINTS TO CONFIRM WITH OPERATORS
At the end of installation or a service call, instruct the user about use of the
machine. Emphasize the following points.
Show operators how to remove jammed paper and troubleshoot other minor
problems by following the procedures described in the operating instructions.
Point out the parts inside the machine that they should never touch or attempt to
remove.
Confirm that operators know how to store and dispose of consumables.
Make sure that all operators have access to an operating instruction manual for
the machine.
Confirm that operators have read and understand all the safety instructions
described in the operating instructions.
Demonstrate how to turn off the power and disconnect the power plug (by pulling
the plug, not the cord) if any of the following events occur:
1) Something has spilled into the product.
2) Service or repair of the product is necessary.
3) The product cover has been damaged.
Caution operators about removing paper fasteners around the machine. They
should never allow paper clips, staples, or any other small metallic objects to fall
into the machine.

2.5 SPECIAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FOR TONER
This section describes information for users in regard to the use of toner.
2.6 ACCIDENTAL PHYSICAL EXPOSURE
!CAUTION
1. Work carefully when removing paper jams or replacing toner bottles or
cartridges to avoid spilling toner on clothing or the hands.
2. If toner is inhaled, immediately gargle with large amounts of cold water and
move to a well ventilated location. If there are signs of irritation or other
problems, seek medical attention.
3. If toner gets on the skin, wash immediately with soap and cold running water.
4. If toner gets into the eyes, flush the eyes with cold running water or eye
wash. If there are signs of irritation or other problems, seek medical attention.
5. If toner is swallowed, drink a large amount of cold water to dilute the ingested
toner. If there are signs of any problem, seek medical attention.
6. If toner spills on clothing, wash the affected area immediately with soap and
cold water. Never use hot water! Hot water can cause toner to set and
permanently stain fabric.

2.7 HANDLING AND STORING TONER
!WARNING
Toner, used toner, and developer are extremely flammable. Never store toner,
developer, toner cartridges, or toner bottles (including empty toner bottles or
cartridges) in a location where they will be exposed to high temperature or an
open flame.

!CAUTION
1. Always store toner and developer supplies such as toner and developer
packages, cartridges, and bottles (including used toner and empty bottles
and cartridges) out of the reach of children.
2. Always store fresh toner supplies or empty bottles or cartridges in a cool, dry
location that is not exposed to direct sunlight.

2.8 TONER DISPOSAL
!WARNING
1. Never attempt to incinerate toner, used toner, or empty toner containers
(bottles or cartridges). Burning toner can explode and scatter, causing
serious burns.
2. Always wrap used toner and empty toner bottles and cartridges in plastic
bags to avoid spillage. Follow the local laws and regulations regarding the
3. Dispose of used toner and toner cartridges at one of our dealers or at an
authorized collection site. Always dispose of used toner cartridges and toner
bottles in accordance with the local laws and regulations regarding the

2.8.1 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FOR THIS MACHINE
!IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICES

PREVENTION OF PHYSICAL INJURY
1. Before disassembling or assembling parts of the copier and peripherals,
make sure that the copier power cord is unplugged.
2. The wall outlet should be near the copier and easily accessible.
3. Note that some components of the copier and the paper tray unit are
supplied with electrical voltage even if the main power switch is turned off.
4. If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers off
or open while the main switch is turned on, keep hands away from electrified
or mechanically driven components.
5. The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while
the copier is operating. Be careful to avoid touching those components with
your bare hands.

HEALTH SAFETY CONDITIONS
1. Never operate the copier without the ozone filters installed.
2. Toner and developer are non-toxic, but if you get either of them in your eyes
by accident, it may cause temporary eye discomfort. Try to remove with eye
drops or flush with water as first aid. If unsuccessful, get medical attention.

OBSERVANCE OF ELECTRICAL SAFETY STANDARDS
1. The copier and its peripherals must be installed and maintained by a
customer service representative who has completed the training course on
those models.
2. The NVRAM on the system control board has a lithium battery which can
explode if replaced incorrectly. Replace the NVRAM only with an identical
one. The manufacturer recommends replacing the entire NVRAM. Do not
recharge or burn this battery. Used NVRAM must be handled in accordance
with local regulations.

SAFETY AND ECOLOGICAL NOTES FOR DISPOSAL
1. Do not incinerate toner bottles or used toner. Toner dust may ignite suddenly
when exposed to an open flame.
2. Dispose of used toner, developer, and organic photoconductors in
accordance with local regulations. (These are non-toxic supplies.)
3. Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations.
4. When keeping used lithium batteries in order to dispose of them later, do not
put more than 100 batteries per sealed box. Storing larger numbers or not
sealing them apart may lead to chemical reactions and heat build-up.

LASER SAFETY
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of
laser-based optical units in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired
in a factory or at a location with the requisite equipment. The laser subsystem is
replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer. The laser chassis is not
repairable in the field. Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all
chassis and laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement of
the optical subsystem is required.

!WARNING
Use of controls, or adjustment, or performance of procedures other than
those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

!WARNING
WARNING: Turn off the main switch before attempting any of the
procedures in the Laser Unit section. Laser beams can
seriously damage your eyes.

Caution Label:

INSTALLATION


B473 LARGE CAPACITY TRAY

TROUBLESHOOTING
B700/B701 2000/3000-SHEET FINISHER
B706 3000-SHEET FINISHER
B762 9-BIN MAILBOX

SERVICE TABLES


SPECIFICATIONS
B704 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY

T
A
B

P
O
S
I
T
I
O
N

2

T
A
B

P
O
S
I
T
I
O
N

1

T
A
B

P
O
S
I
T
I
O
N

3

T
A
B

P
O
S
I
T
I
O
N

4

T
A
B

P
O
S
I
T
I
O
N

6

T
A
B

P
O
S
I
T
I
O
N

5

T
A
B

P
O
S
I
T
I
O
N

8

T
A
B

P
O
S
I
T
I
O
N

7

INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
SM 1-1 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

1. INSTALLATION
1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
1.1.1 OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
1. Temperature Range: Recommended Temp.: 23C (73.4)
Allowed Temp.: 10C to 32C (50F to 90F) *
1

2. Humidity Range: 15% to 80% Rh
3. Ambient Illumination: Less than 1,500 lux (do not expose to direct sunlight or
strong light.)
4. Ventilation: Air must be replaced a minimum of 3 times per hour
5. Ambient Dust: Less than 0.10 mg/m
3

*
1
If the machine is installed in a location where the ambient temperature is more
that 30
o
C (86
o
F):
Do not run full color copying longer than 2 hours.
Never turn the main power switch off immediately after a long copy job.
Leave the machine on so the fans can expel the hot air from the machine
and cool the electronic components.

90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
10
20
30
27C (80.6F) 80%Rh
25C (77F) 70%Rh
32C (89.6F) 54%Rh
15C (59F) 30%Rh
%Rh
o
C
10C (50F) 15%Rh
B132I900.WMF
Temperature and Humidity for Operation
Allowed Range
Office
Recommended Temp., Humidity: 23C (73.4F) 50% Rh
B132/B200 1-2 SM

6. If the installation area has air-conditioners or heaters, put the machine in a
location that agrees with these conditions:
a) Where there are no sudden temperature changes from low to high, or
high to low.
b) Where it will not be directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner in
the summer.
c) Where it will not be directly exposed to reflected heat from a heater in the
winter
7. Do not put the machine where it will be exposed to gases that can cause
corrosion.
8. Put the copier on a strong and level surface. The front and rear of the machine
must be less than 5 mm (0.2") away from level.
9. Do not put the machine where there could be strong vibrations.
10. Do not connect the machine to the same power source as other electrical
devices.
11. The machine can make an electromagnetic field, and this can cause
interference with radio or television reception.

1.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL
1. Front to rear: Less than 5 mm (0.2") away from level
2. Right to left: Less than 5 mm (0.2") away from level

The machine legs can be turned to adjust them up or down, to make the machine
level. Put a carpenters level on the exposure glass.

SM 1-3 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

1.1.3 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS
Put the copier near the power source. Minimum clearance must be as shown
below. The same amount of clearance is necessary when optional peripheral
devices are installed.

B132I111.WMF
110 mm (4.3) Rear
750 mm (29.5") Front
110 mm (4.3") Right
160 mm (6.3")
B132/B200 1-4 SM

1.1.4 DIMENSIONS

B132I112.WMF

B132I113.WMF
480 mm (18.9")
480 mm (18.9")
1,230 mm (48.4")
354 mm (13.9") 750 mm (29.5") 657 mm (25.9")
90 mm (3.5")
1,014 mm (39.9")
1,198 mm (43.2")
850 mm (33.5")
458 mm (18")
613 mm (24.1")
SM 1-5 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

1.1.5 POWER REQUIREMENTS
!WARNING!
1. Make sure that the wall outlet is near the main machine and that you can
get access to it easily. Make sure the plug is tightly connected to the
outlet.
2. Do not connect more than one electrical device to the same power
outlet.
3. Be sure to ground the machine.
4. Do not put objects on the power cord.

North America 120 V, 60 Hz: More than 20 A Input voltage level
Europe/Asia 220 V ~ 240 V, 50/60 Hz: more than 10 A
Permissible voltage fluctuation 10%

!CAUTION
Do not turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or
flashing. To prevent damage to the hard disk or memory, push the
operation switch to turn the power off, then do nothing until the power LED
goes off, and then turn the main power switch off.

There are two power switches on the machine:
Main Power Switch.
This is located on the front left corner of the machine and has a plastic cover.
This switch must always be on unless a technician does work on the machine.

Operation switch.
This is located on the right side of the operation panel. This is the switch that the
customer uses to turn the machine on and off.

COPIER AND PERIPHERALS
B132/B200 1-6 SM

1.2 COPIER AND PERIPHERALS
This is a list of the peripheral devices that can be installed with the copier.
No. Model Name Comments
1 B132/B200 Copier Main machine
2 B756 Copy Tray Attached to main machine
3 B473 LCT Large capacity tray
4 B699 LCT Adapter Required for LCT
5 B474 81/2" x 14"/B4 Paper Size Tray LCT Option
6 B706 3000-Sheet Finisher No saddle-stitching (100-sheet stapling)
7 B698 Finisher Adapter Replacement motor for B706
8 B531/A821 Punch Unit For B706 only
9 B513 Output Jogger Unit For B706 only.
10 B704 Cover Interposer Tray For B700, B701, B706
11 B762 Mail Box For B700, B701 only
12 B701 3000-Sheet Finisher No saddle-stitching, Tray x1, 50-sheet stapling
13 B702 Punch Unit For B700, B701
14 B700 2000-Sheet Booklet Finisher Saddle-stitching, Trays x2, 50-sheet stapling
15 B703 Output Jogger Unit For B700, B701
16 B331 A3 /11"x17" Paper Size Tray For Tandem Tray (Tray 1)
17 B452 Key Counter Bracket
18 B498 Key Card Bracket
19 B499 Tab Sheet Holder

B132I116.WMF
11
13
14
3
4
5
9
2
1
6
7
8
10
12
15
16
17, 18
19
COPIER B132/B200
SM 1-7 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

1.3 COPIER B132/B200
1.3.1 ACCESSORIES
Check the accessories and their quantities against this list.

Description Qty
1. Instructions Pocket .............................................................. 1
2. Exposure glass cloth holder................................................. 1
3. Exposure glass cloth............................................................ 1
4. Leveling Shoes ................................................................... 4
5. PCU stand ........................................................................... 1
6. PCU Caps Set (Not Used)*
1
................................................ 1
7. Lock Plate: Development Roller........................................... 1
8. Development Roller Gear .................................................... 1
9. Lock Plate: Drum Shaft........................................................ 1
10. PCU Stand Holder ............................................................. 1
11. Decal: Paper Loading ........................................................ 1
12. Decal: Paper Size.............................................................. 1
*
1
Attach the PCU caps to the PCU toner ports before you return PCUs to the factory. They are not
used during installation or servicing.

B132I001.WMF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 9
10
11 12
COPIER B132/B200
B132/B200 1-8 SM

1.3.2 INSTALLATION
Tapes and packing material

!WARNING!
Always turn the machine off and disconnect the machine power cord
before you do these procedures.

Remove all tapes and packing material from the outside of the main machine:
[A]: ARDF, right side
[B]: Packing block inside ARDF
[C]: Accessories bag. Remove other accessory bags from Tray 2, Tray 3.
[D]: ARDF, left side
[E]: ARDF connector cord. Remove tape and connect the cord
[F]: Power cord

B132I703.WMF

B132I004.WMF
[D]
[E]
[F]
[A]
[B]
[C]
COPIER B132/B200
SM 1-9 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

[A]: Under ARDF
[B]: Operation panel film

B132I002.WMF
[A]
[B]
COPIER B132/B200
B132/B200 1-10 SM

1. Open the front door and, and remove the transfer belt release lever [A](1 tape).
We will install this in the correct location later.
IMPORTANT!
DO NOT TOUCH [B], [C], OR [D] AT THIS TIME. THESE ITEMS ARE REMOVED AFTER YOU
REMOVE THE FACEPLATE.
TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE ITB, NEVER TURN DOWN LEVER [D] TO PULL OUT THE DRAWER
UNIT UNTIL AFTER YOU HAVE REMOVED THE ROD WITH THE RED TAG AND WIRE [B]. THE
DRAWER MUST REMAIN INSIDE THE MACHINE UNTIL AFTER THE DEVELOPER IS INSTALLED IN
THE DEVELOPER CARTRIDGES OF THE PCUS.
THE ROD IS REMOVED AFTER THE FACE PLATE IS REMOVED TO INSTALL THE DEVELOPER
CARTRIDGES. (!PG.1-12)

B132I005.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
COPIER B132/B200
SM 1-11 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

2. From Tray 1 remove:
[A]: Block, tape
[B]: Retainer, tag, wire (! x1)
3. Remove all retainers and accessories from Trays 2, Tray 3.

B132I102.WMF
[A]
[B]
COPIER B132/B200
B132/B200 1-12 SM

Shipping Retainer Removal

1. Prepare an open space on the floor for the hopper.
2. Remove the screws of the toner hopper cover [A] (" x 3).
3. Put your hands under the left and right corners of the toner hopper, and slowly
pull it out on its rails until it stops.
4. Push the lock [B] then pull down the support leg [C].
5. Make sure that the support leg is down and locked.

!CAUTION
Always make sure that the support leg is down and locked before
you remove the hopper.

6. Hold the toner hopper using the handles at the top left and right sides. Then lift
the toner hopper off its rails and set it on the floor.

!CAUTION
The hopper is heavy! Lift it carefully. Make sure that it disengages
fully from the rails on the left and right, and then set it on the floor.

7. Push the hopper rails into the machine.
NOTE: Push in the rails until approximately an inch is out of the machine. If
you push the rails in fully, you must use a pair of needle-nose (radio)
pliers to pull them out again.
B132I006A.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
COPIER B132/B200
SM 1-13 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

8. Remove the tag, and rod [A] (" x 1).
9. Disconnect the fan connector [B].
10. Remove the face plate [C] (" x 5).
11. Put the PCU stand [D] on a flat, clean surface.
12. Use a clean cloth to remove dust from the surface of the stand.

B132I715.WMF

B132I902.WMFF
[D]
[A]
[B]
[C]
COPIER B132/B200
B132/B200 1-14 SM

IMPORTANT!
DO NOT TRY TO PULL OUT THE DRAWER UNIT UNTIL AFTER YOU REMOVE THE FOLLOWING
RETAINERS.
13. Remove the tape [A].
14. Pull on the reinforced part [B] on tag [C] to remove the stabilizing rod [D].
NOTE: If you do not pull on the reinforced part [B], you will tear the tag or pull
the wire off.
15. Remove the bracket [E], red tag, and wire (" x1).
NOTE: DO NOT REMOVE BRACKET [F].

B132I723.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
COPIER B132/B200
SM 1-15 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

Developer Cartridge Installation

Important
The OPC drum is exposed on the bottom of the PCU.
Do not put your hand under the PCU when you hold the PCU.
Always use the PCU stand. Do not put the PCU on other surfaces.
1. Push down the tab [A] above the Yellow PCU.
2. Hold the Yellow PCU [B] by its sides, and pull it out of the machine.
3. Set the PCU on the PCU stand [C]. (In the diagram, F is front, R is rear.)
4. Put a piece of clean paper on top of the PCU to protect the drum from light.

B132I903.WMF
F
R

B132R214.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
COPIER B132/B200
B132/B200 1-16 SM

5. On the front end of the PCU, remove the shaft cap [A] and lock plate [B] (" x 3).
Important: After you remove the shaft cap, make sure that you do not turn the
shaft [C] of the development roller.
6. On the rear end of the PCU, remove the lock plate [D] (" x 4).
7. Remove the development unit [E] from the PCU.

B132R210.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
COPIER B132/B200
SM 1-17 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

8. Place the development unit [A] on a clean sheet of A3/DLT paper [B].
9. Remove the screws from the dummy cartridge [B] (" x 2).
10. With a fingernail, release the tabs on the left [C] and right [D].
Important: The development unit is top-heavy and falls easily. Hold it on the
left side.
11. While holding the unit steady with one hand on the left [E], remove the dummy
cartridge [F] from the development unit.
12. Shake the new yellow developer cartridge [G] from side to side about 6 times.

B132I105.WMF

B132I105A.WMF
[A]
[B]
[B]
[C]
[G
[D]
[E]
[F]
COPIER B132/B200
B132/B200 1-18 SM

13. Thread the film seal [A] through hole [B].
14. Slide the developer cartridge down [C] on the left so the holes and tabs [D] are
aligned.
15. Press in on the middle of the developer cartridge [E] to lock the tabs inside [F].
16. Press down on the right end of the developer cartridge until the tabs [G] on the
right lock.

B132I106.WMF

B132I106A.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
COPIER B132/B200
SM 1-19 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

17. Check the following to points to be sure that the developer cartridge is set
properly.
Tabs [A] and [B] should be locked.
The developer cartridge edge [C] should be flat and not bulging or floating
away from the side of the development unit
Pull gently on the developer cartridge at [D] to make sure that it does not part
from the development unit.
18. Fasten the cartridge [E] (" x2).
IMPORTANT: DO NOT REMOVE THE FILM SEAL [F] ON THE DEVELOPER CARTRIDGE AT THIS
TIME.

B132I106B.WMF

B132I106C.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[F]
[E]
COPIER B132/B200
B132/B200 1-20 SM

Reassemble the PCU
19. Reattach the development unit to the PCU.
IMPORTANT!
HANDLE THE DEVELOPMENT UNIT CAREFULLY WHEN YOU REATTACH IT TO THE PCU TO
AVOID DAMAGING THE DRUM INSIDE THE PCU.
20. Attach the front and rear lock plates (refer to p. 1-16).
21. Attach the shaft cap [A].
If you cannot attach the cap, then check the end of the development roller shaft
[B]. The flat side of the shaft must point up and must be level.
IMPORTANT!
When you turn the shaft:
a) Use your fingers to turn the front and rear ends of the development roller
shaft until the end of the shaft is as shown [C].
b) Make sure that you hold the shaft and not the sleeve (the sleeve does not
turn).
c) To prevent damage to the shaft, do not hold the end of the shaft with
pliers.

B132R222.WMF
[A]
[B] [C]
COPIER B132/B200
SM 1-21 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

22. Hold the PCU [A] in front of the slot where you
removed it.
23. Engage the rails [B] with the slots in the sides of
the PCU.
24. Slowly push the PCU into the slot. Make sure
the tab [C] above the PCU is locked.
NOTE: If the PCU does not go in smoothly,
make sure the rails [B] and grooves are
engaged correctly.

25. To release the developer into the PCU,
pull out the film seal [D].
NOTE: Put your other hand on the
PCU [E] to keep it stable it while you
pull on the film seal.
26. Repeat Steps 1 to 25 for the other
PCUs (Cyan, Magenta, Black).
B132I114.WMF

B132I905.WMF

B132I101.WMF
[A]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[B]
COPIER B132/B200
B132/B200 1-22 SM

Reattach the Face Plate

1. Attach the face plate [A] with the screws in the sequence shown by the
numbers above (" x 5).
Important:
Do not tighten these screws too much.
Make sure the fan connector [B] is not pinched behind the face plate.
2. Connect the fan again [B] (! x 1).

1 4 2
5
3

B132I716.WMF
[A]
[B]
COPIER B132/B200
SM 1-23 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

Remove the Retainers in the Drawer Unit

1. Turn the lever [A] down to the left, and pull the drawer unit [B] out of the
machine until it stops.
2. Remove the instruction sheets [C] and [D].
3. Remove the bracket and tag [E] at the rear.
4. Remove the bracket and tag [F] at the front.
Important
A sheet of paper protects the ITB if you accidentally pull the drawer out
without first removing the rod. Do not push the drawer into the machine.
Follow the procedure on the instruction sheet to remove the rod and paper.

B132I709.WMF
[A]
[B]
[E]
[F]
[C]
[D]
COPIER B132/B200
B132/B200 1-24 SM

5. Raise lever D2 [A].
6. Turn knob D1 [B] in the direction shown by the arrow.
7. Remove protective sheet [C].
8. Lower lever D2 [A].
9. Push the drawer into the machine until it stops.
10. Rotate handle B2 up and to the right until it stops.

B132I722.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
COPIER B132/B200
SM 1-25 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

11. Locate the transfer belt release lever [A]. It was removed earlier with the
shipping tape.
12. Attach the transfer belt release lever.
13. Turn it to the vertical position and make sure that it locks.
Important:
The transfer belt release lever must be turned up and locked in position
before you install the toner hopper.
IF YOU FORGET TO ATTACH THE TRANSFER BELT RELEASE LEVER [A], THIS WILL
CAUSE AN ID SENSOR ERROR (SC410 TO SC413).

B132I707.WMF
[A]
COPIER B132/B200
B132/B200 1-26 SM

Reinstall the Toner Hopper

1. Make sure that the transfer belt release lever [A] is up and locked before you
attach the hopper.
2. Pull the toner hopper left rail [B] and right rail [C] until they are fully extended.
NOTE: If the rails were pushed in fully, it could be necessary to use a pair of
needle-nose pliers to pull them out of the machine.
3. Set the toner hopper [D] on the rails.
Important: Make sure the steel tabs [E] of the hopper are put fully into the left
rail hole and the right rail hole [F].
4. Push the lock [G] and push the support leg up [H].
Important: Make sure that the support leg is up and locked before you push
the toner hopper into the machine.
5. Put your hands at the bottom of the toner hopper at " and # and then push
the hopper into the machine against the face plate.
Important: To prevent damage to the hopper, do not push the top of the toner
hopper when you do this step.
6. Make sure that the hopper is flat against the face plate on the right side.
NOTE: If the toner hopper [D] is not flat against the face plate on the right side,
pull it out a short distance and make sure that the transfer belt release
lever is turned up fully.
7. Attach the toner hopper (" x 3). Attach the screws in this sequence: $%&

B132I006.WMF
[A] [D]
[G]
#
[C]
[B]
[H]
"
$
%
&
[E]
[F]
COPIER B132/B200
SM 1-27 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

STC (Soft Toner Cartridge) Installation
Important:
Make sure that you install each STC in the correct bin.
The label on the toner cartridge must face the front of the machine.
From left to right, the bins are for Yellow Cyan Magenta Black.
The name of the color for each bin is on the decals that are attached to the bin
release levers.

1. Push down the lock lever ' on the top edge of the Yellow bin (the bin at the far
left) to release it. Then pull the bin ( in the direction of the front to open it.
Important: To prevent damage to the bin door, do not try to pull a bin directly
out. Push down on its top edge first to release it, then pull it to open it.
2. Remove the Yellow STC (Soft Toner Cartridge) from its box.
3. Shake the STC [A] up and down about 10 times. Do not squeeze or knead the
toner cartridge (this will make clumps in the toner).
NOTE: The bottom of the cartridge [C] must face down.
4. Set the Yellow STC in the bin [B].
NOTE: Make sure that the color ID label [C] and ID chip terminals [D] are
facing toward you.
5. Push the Yellow STC bin to close and lock it.
6. Do Steps 1 to 6 for the other three STCs (C, M, K)
Important: Make sure that the color of each STC agrees with the label on the
bin door before you install it.
1
2

B132I107.WMF

B132I108.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
COPIER B132/B200
B132/B200 1-28 SM

Make the Machine Level

1. Attach the leveling shoes [A] to the machine.
2. Place a level on the exposure glass.
3. Use a wrench to lift or lower the nuts [B] on the leveling shoes until the machine
is less than 5 mm from level (measure it from front to rear and from left to right).

B132I717.WMF
[A]
[B]
COPIER B132/B200
SM 1-29 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

Attach the PCU Stand Rack

1. Hold the PCU stand rack [A] with its open end pointed as shown, and put it
below the machine.
2. Attach the rack to the bottom of the machine with the magnets on the rack.
3. Make sure that the following accessories are attached to the bottom of the PCU
stand [B]. Then they will be available for the next servicing:
[C] Lock plate (short): Necessary for drum motor replacement
[D] Lock plate (long): Necessary for developer replacement to lock the front
side of the development roller.
[E] Development roller gear: Necessary for developer replacement to turn the
development gears.
4. Put the PCU stand in the rack below the copier.

B132I718.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
COPIER B132/B200
B132/B200 1-30 SM

Attach Decals
1. Attach the paper-installation decals to
the trays. These tell you how to add
new paper.
Front set decal: Attach this decal to
the LCT if it is installed. Front set
means that the paper should be face
up in the tray.
Back set decal: Attach these decals
to the trays of the copier. Back set
means that the paper should be face
down in the tray.

2. Attach exposure-glass-cleaning decal [A] at the
front edge of the ARDF exposure glass.

3. Attach the original-caution decal [B], and the
silicone cloth holder [C].
4. Put the silicone cloth [D] in the holder.

B132I910.BMP
B132I911.BMP
B132I912.BMP

B132I913.BMP
Front Set
Back Set
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
COPIER B132/B200
SM 1-31 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

Initializing Developer and Toner
1. At the left rear corner of the machine, make
sure that the manual breaker switch [A] is
UP.
Important: When the breaker switch is UP,
the copier is ready to be turned ON. The "|"
mark can be seen.
Important: Before you turn the copier ON,
make sure that you test the Electrical
Breaker Switch. (! 4.4 ELECTRICAL
BREAKER SWITCH TEST)

Important: Before you turn the copier ON,
make sure that the ARDF [B] is connected
to the copier at the left rear corner.
2. Connect the power cord of the copier to a
power outlet.

3. Open the front door [C].
Important!
TURN ON THE MACHINE WITH THE FRONT
DOOR OPEN TO PREVENT THE MACHINE
FROM PERFORMING THE INITIAL PROCESS
CONTROL SELF-CHECK.
IF THE FRONT DOOR IS NOT OPEN, THE
DRUMS WILL TURN WITH NO TONER IN THE
PCUS.
IF THE DRUMS TURN WITH NO TONER IN THE
PCUS, THIS CAN CAUSE THE CLEANING
BLADES TO CATCH ON A DRY DRUM AND
DAMAGE THE DRUM SURFACES.
4. With the front door open, turn ON the
main power switch.

B132I719.WMF

B132I720.WMF

B132I721.WMF
Open Door Before Power ON!
[B]
[C]
[A]
!
Rev. 07/2005
COPIER B132/B200
B132/B200 1-32 SM

5. Close the front door after "Open Cover" appears on the display.
6. Enter the SP mode and do 3811 001 (Execute Developer Setup).
7. Push [Execute]. Approximately 4 minutes is necessary for this operation.

SP3811 001 does these tasks:
Makes sure that all the seals are removed from each developer cartridge and
that there is developer in each PCU.
Turns toner supply on, and sends toner to the sub hopper of each PCU.
Sends toner to the PCU to give the drum a layer of toner. If this is not done,
the cleaning blades will bend and scratch the drums.
Initializes the TD sensor.
Starts the process control self-check to set the target for development
gamma, and adjusts toner density.
VERY IMPORTANT:
ONLY INITIALIZE THE TD SENSOR ONE TIME. DO NOT DO IT MORE THAN ONE TIME.
Only initialize the TD sensor at the following times:
At installation, exactly as explained in the installation procedure.
NEVER DO TD SENSOR INITIALIZATION SP3801 001~006 AFTER SP3811-001.
SP3811-001 DOES NOT ONLY INITIALIZE THE DEVELOPER, IT ALSO INITIALIZES THE
TD SENSOR. IF YOU DO SP3801 AFTER SP3811, TD SENSOR INITIALIZATION WILL
BE DONE TWICE. THIS CAN CAUSE A FATAL ERROR IN TONER SUPPLY CONTROL.
After you replace developer (only initialize the TD sensor for the color that you
replaced)
As instructed in specific troubleshooting procedures.
If you do not obey the above instructions, you will get toner scattering inside the
machine.
8. When the message tells you that the initialization is completed, touch [Close].
9. Do SP3812 001 to make sure that SP3811 001 was done correctly.
The operation panel shows "1111". A "1" indicates that each PCU has been
initialized correctly.
NOTE: If "1111" is not shown, see section 4.2.3 in, "4. Troubleshooting".
IMPORTANT: From left to right, each "1" indicates the status of each PCU in
the following sequence: KMCY.
10. Do SP2111 001 to force correct color toner position alignment (MUSIC). This
operation requires about 65 seconds to finish.
11. Do SP2181 030 to make sure that SP2111 001 was done correctly.
The operation panel shows "1". This shows that the position of each color
toner is aligned correctly.
NOTE: If "1" is not shown, see "4.4.2 Color Registration Error Adjustment".
COPIER B132/B200
SM 1-33 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

Load the Paper Trays
For each paper cassette tray:
1. Move the side fence and bottom fence to the correct positions for the paper.
2. Add paper to the trays.
3. Attach the paper size decals to the front of the paper cassette trays and the
tandem tray.
NOTE: It is not necessary to input the paper size setting for trays 2 and 3. This
is detected automatically.

Make a Test Color Print
1. Make sure that A3 or DLT paper is put in one of the trays.
NOTE: Use the same type of paper that the customer normally uses for color
outputs.
2. Put a "Color Chart C-4" on the exposure glass.
3. Select full color mode and print one copy of the chart. You will use this in the
ACC procedure, if ACC is necessary.
4. Check the results of the copy with the customer.
If the quality of the color is satisfactory, ACC adjustment is not necessary.
If the quality of the color is not satisfactory, do the ACC adjustment described
below.

ACC (Automatic Color Calibration) Adjustment
Automatic color calibration is done at the factory with the procedure given below.
Do this procedure only if the color quality is not satisfactory for the customer.
1. Push [User Tools] (#).
2. To print a color pattern, select Maintenance> Auto Color Calibration
3. Touch "Start".
Machine will start self-check before
printing test pattern
Press [Start Printing].
4. Touch "Start Printing".
Now self-checking.
Test pattern will be printed.
Please wait.
The machine does process control, then it prints a test pattern.
Place Test Pattern on the exposure glass correctly.
Then press [Start Scanning]
COPIER B132/B200
B132/B200 1-34 SM

5. Remove the C-4 test chart from the exposure glass (this was put on the
exposure glass during the previous procedure Make a Test Color Print).
6. Place the color test pattern face-down (this is the test pattern that you made in
step 4). The arrow and notation (Face down and align the arrow with the rear
left corner of the exposure glass.) must be at the rear left corner.
7. Touch [Start Scanning] on the display. The machine scans the pattern one time.
Scanning
Please wait.
If you see this error:
Scanning failed.
Place test pattern on the exposure glass correctly.
Then press [Start Scanning].
Make sure that the arrow on the test pattern is in the upper left corner of the
exposure glass.
8. Remove the pattern from the exposure glass and replace it with the Color Chart
C-4.
9. Touch "Exit" three times to return to the Copy mode screen.
10. Make a full-color copy of the test chart.
11. Compare the results of the 1st copy (made in step 3 of Make a Test Color
Print) and the 2nd copy (made in step 10 above):
If the results of the 2nd copy are better than the results of the 1st copy, you are
finished.
-or-
If the results of the 2nd copy are worse than the results of the 1st copy:
Push the [User Tools] key
Touch Maintenance> Auto Color Calibration> Previous Setting.
12. Remove the color chart from the exposure glass.
13. If the customer is not satisfied with the 1st copy or the 2nd copy, you must do
the printer gamma adjustment (see section 3.20.5).

COPIER B132/B200
SM 1-35 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

Counter Display Setting
The default setting for the counter is "0" (development). Do the SP setting below to
set the counter for copy/print (paper count).
1. Enter the SP mode.
2. Do SP5045 001 (Counter Display Setting).
3. Select the counter to use:

0 Development counter (Default)
1 Page counter

Important!
THIS SETTING CAN BE DONE ONLY ONCE. AFTER IT IS SET TO "1", THE COUNTER
SETTING CANNOT BE CHANGED. IF THE WRONG SETTING IS SELECTED BY MISTAKE,
CONTACT YOUR TECHNICAL SUPERVISOR.

Print an SMC Report
1. Go into the SP mode.
2. Do SP5990 001 to print a full SMC report. Keep it in a safe location, with the
factory setting sheet.

COPIER B132/B200
B132/B200 1-36 SM

Connect the Upper and Lower Tray Heaters

The machine comes from the factory with the tray heaters disconnected.
NOTE: Heater connection is optional, but the heaters must be connected if the
location has high humidity. Speak with the customer before you connect
the tray heaters.
1. Remove the left lower cover [A] (" x 5).
2. Attach the connectors HT5 [B] and HT6 [C] ($ x 1, ! x 2)

B132I009.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
COPY TRAY (B756)
SM 1-37 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

1.4 COPY TRAY (B756)
1.4.1 ACCESSORIES

Description Qty
1. Copy Tray ............................................................................ 1
2. Actuator Arm and Bracket (not used)...................................1
3. Tapping Screw (not used).................................................... 2
4. Large Cap............................................................................ 1
5. Small Cap............................................................................ 4
6. Tapping Screw (M4 x 8)....................................................... 1
7. Harness Clamp.................................................................... 1
8. Paper Height Sensor ........................................................... 1
9. Actuator Arm Bracket........................................................... 1
10. Sensor Bracket .................................................................. 1
11. Actuator Arm...................................................................... 1

B756I001.WMF
10
11
1 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
COPY TRAY (B756)
B132/B200 1-38 SM

1.4.2 INSTALLATION

1. Remove the left upper cover [A] (" x 2).

B756I101.WMF
[A]
COPY TRAY (B756)
SM 1-39 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

2. Attach the paper height sensor [A] and harness clamp [B] to the sensor bracket
[C].
3. Attach the sensor bracket and actuator arm bracket [D] to the copier (" x3).
4. Attach the sensor harness [E] (! x1, $ x4).
5. Attach the actuator [F] to the arms of the actuator arm bracket.

B756I003.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
COPY TRAY (B756)
B132/B200 1-40 SM

6. Reattach the left upper cover [A] (" x2).
7. Attach the tray [B].
8. Attach the small caps [C] to the holes ", #, $, %.
9. Install the large cap [D] in the finisher power connection point.

B756I002.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
"
#
$
%
A3/11" X 17" PAPER SIZE TRAY (B331)
SM 1-41 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

1.5 A3/11" X 17" PAPER SIZE TRAY (B331)
The A3/11" x 17" Paper Size Tray is installed in tray 1 of the B132/B181/B200
copier.

1.5.1 ACCESSORIES

Description Qty
1. A3/DLT Tray .............................................................................. 1
2. Short Connector......................................................................... 1
3. Paper Size Decal ....................................................................... 1

B331I001.WMF
1
2
3
B132/B200 1-42 SM

1.5.2 INSTALLATION

!WARNING!
before you do the following procedure.

1. Remove the metal retainer [A] and packing material [B] (" x 1).
2. Check the position of the front and rear fences, and make sure that they are set
for DLT or A3.

B331I011.WMF
[A]
[B]
SM 1-43 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

3. Open the front doors.
4. Pull out the tandem feed tray [A] fully.
5. Push the right tandem tray [B] into the machine.
6. Remove the left tandem tray [C] (" x 2 left, " x 3 right).

B331I707.WMF

B331I708.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
B132/B200 1-44 SM

7. From the left tandem tray, remove the front cover [A] (" x 2).
8. Pull out the right tandem tray [B], then remove it. (" x 2).

B331I102.WMF
B331I709.WMF
[A]
[B]
SM 1-45 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

9. Put the short connector [A] into the socket in the machine [B].
NOTE: Hold the connector as shown in the illustration.
10. Install the A3/DLT tray [C] on the right rail [D], center rail [E], and left rail [F].
Use the screws that you removed in Steps 6 and 8.
NOTE: You must use the short, silver screws on the left and right rails. If you
use one of the longer screws, it will stop the movement of the tray on
the rails.

B331I004.WMF
B331I003.WMF
[C]
[D]
[E] [F]
[A]
[B]
B132/B200 1-46 SM

11. Install the front cover [A] (" x 2) that was removed from the left tandem tray.
12. Use SP5959 001 to select the paper size for Tray 1 (A3 or DLT).
13. After you select the paper size, turn the machine off and on to change the
indicator on the operation panel.

B331I105.WMF
[A]
KEY CARD BRACKET (B498), KEY COUNTER BRACKET (B452)
SM 1-47 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

1.6 KEY CARD BRACKET (B498), KEY COUNTER
BRACKET (B452)
1.6.1 KEY CARD BRACKET B498 ACCESSORIES

Description Qty
1. Key Card Table.................................................................... 1
2. Harness Clamp.................................................................... 1
3. Tapping Screws (M3 x 8)..................................................... 4
4. Tapping Screws (M4 x 14)................................................... 2
5. Stud .................................................................................... 1
6. Decal ................................................................................... 1
7. Key Card Table Support ...................................................... 1

B498I001.WMF
1
2 3 4
5
6
7
B132/B200 1-48 SM

1.6.2 KEY COUNTER BRACKET B452 ACCESSORIES

Description Qty
1. Plate nuts............................................................................. 2
2. Rear Bracket........................................................................ 1
3. Front Bracket ....................................................................... 1
6. Tapping Screws (M4 x 16)................................................... 2
7. Harness .............................................................................. 1
8. Shoulder Screw .................................................................. 1
9. Key Counter Bracket Cover ................................................. 1
10. Key Counter Bracket.......................................................... 1

B452I001.WMF
1 2 3
4 5 6
7
8
9
10
SM 1-49 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

1.6.3 INSTALLATION
Assemble the Key Counter Bracket

1. Hold the key counter plate nuts [A] on the inner surface of the key counter
bracket [B].
2. Attach the key counter holder [C] to the key counter bracket (" x2).
3. Attach the key counter bracket cover [D] (" x2).

B452I002.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
B132/B200 1-50 SM

Install the Key Card Bracket and Assembled Key Counter

1. Remove the cover [A] ( x2).
2. Remove the right upper cover [B] (
x2).
3. Remove the three caps [C].
4. Attach the stud [D].
5. Reattach the right upper cover [B].

6. Put the keyholes [E] of the key card
table [F] over the heads of the
shoulder screws, as shown above.
Then tighten the screws to attach the
table (M4 x 14, x2).

7. Replace the cover [A] ( x 2).

8. Attach the key counter bracket [G]
or the Key Card ( x 2).
9. If you are installing the Key Counter
Bracket:
Connect one end of the harness [H]
to the Key Counter Bracket [A] (
x 1), and the other end to the 4-pin
connector on the right side of the
copier. Then attach the bracket
support [I] to the side of the copier
( x 2).

WARNING!
before you do this procedure.

B498I002.WMF

B498I003.WMF
B498I004.WMF
[F]
[E]
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[I]
[H]
[G]
Rev. 07/2007
SM 1-51 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

10. If you are installing the Key Card:
Remove the rear cover and the cover of the Control Box.
11. Remove the cutout [J] on the rear cover.
12. Pass the harness of the Key Card through the hole [K] in the C/T Box.
13. Clamp the harness in three places [L].
14. Connect the harness to CN220 [M] on the IOB. Then connect the grounding
cable to the bracket [N] ( x 1).
15. Reattach the Control Box cover and rear cover.

[J]
[K]
[L]
[M]
[N]
Rev. 07/2007
LCT (B473), LCT ADAPTER (B699)

B132/B200 1-52 SM

1.7 LCT (B473), LCT ADAPTER (B699)
1.7.1 ACCESSORIES
LCT (B473)
Description Qty
1. Upper docking pins (grooved) .................................................... 2
2. Lower docking pin (not grooved, not for B132/B181/B200)........ 1
3. Flat-head shoulder screw - M4x6............................................... 1
4. Paper Set Decal ......................................................................... 1

B473I101.WMF
1
2
3
4
SM 1-53 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

LCT Adapter (B699)
Description Qty
1. Brackets................................................................................. 2
2. Supports................................................................................. 3
3. Machine Screws (M3x8) ........................................................ 3
4. Machine Screws (M4x8) ....................................................... 6

B699I101.WMF
1
2
3
4
B132/B200 1-54 SM

1.7.2 INSTALLATION
Removing Tape and Accessories

!WARNING!
1. Remove the filament tape [A].
2. Remove the decals [B].
3. Remove the tape under the lid [C].
4. Remove the docking pins [D] (attached to the rear with tape).
5. Remove the docking pins [E].

B473I001.WMF

B473I002.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[A]
[D]
SM 1-55 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

LCT Adapter (B699) Installation
The LCT Adapter Kit B699 must be installed before you install the LCT.

1. Put the LCT [A] on its front side.
Important! Do not put the LCT on its right side (the open side), or you will
bend the ground plate [B].
2. Remove the 3 casters [C] (" x 3 each).
3. Attach the 3 supports [D] (" x 1 each M3x8 thin screws).
4. Set the LCT in a vertical position.
5. Remove the stay [E] (" x 4).
6. Attach the stay at [F] (" x 4).

B699I103.WMF
[E]
[F]
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
B132/B200 1-56 SM
LCT Installation

1. Remove the LCT installation cover [A] from the right side of the machine.
(" x 2).
2. Remove the upper covers [B].
3. Remove the lower covers [C].
4. Attach the brackets [D] that are supplied with the LCT Adapter (B699) (" x 2
each M4 x 8).
5. Attach the two grooved docking pins [E].
NOTE: The docking pin without a groove is not necessary for this installation.

B699I104.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[D]
[E
SM 1-57 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

6. Remove the connector cover [A].
7. Align the holes on the side of the LCT [B] with the docking pins [C] on the side
of the machine.
8. Slowly push the LCT onto the pins.
NOTE: The release button [D] is used to unlock the LCT.
9. Connect the plug [E] of the LCT power connector to the side of the machine.

B699I115.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
B132/B200 1-58 SM

10. Open the upper cover [A].
11. Remove the cover [B] (" x 2).
12. Attach screws [C] to the brackets on the side of the machine.
13. Attach the cover [B] with the screw that you removed in Step 11.
14. Turn the machine on.
16. Do SP5959 005.
NOTE: The side fences of the NA model are set for 81/2 x 11 paper and the EU
model for A4 paper. You must select the paper size with this SP.
17. Input "0" for A4 LEF or "4" for 81/2" x 11" LEF.
18. Turn the machine off and on to enable the setting.

B699I107.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
81/2" X 14"/B4 PAPER SIZE TRAY (B474)
SM 1-59 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

1.8 81/2" X 14"/B4 PAPER SIZE TRAY (B474)
The 81/2" x 14"/B4 (B474) is installed in the LCT (B473).
1.8.1 ACCESSORIES

Description Qty
1. Tapping screws - M4x8.......................................................... 4
2. Tapping hex screws - M4x8................................................... 6
3. Harness clamp....................................................................... 1
4. B4/LG frame .......................................................................... 1
5. Front bracket.......................................................................... 1
6. Rear bracket .......................................................................... 1
7. Bottom plate extension .......................................................... 1
8. Cover ..................................................................................... 1

B132/B200 1-60 SM

1.8.2 INSTALLATION
LCT Connected to the Machine

!WARNING!
Turn the machine off and disconnect the machine power cord before you
start this procedure.

1. If the LCT is connected to the copier:
Open the cover and remove the paper.
Close the cover.
Turn the main power switch off.
Disconnect the LCT from the copier.
2. Remove the LCT cover [A] (" x 1).
3. Remove the right cover [B] (" x 2).
4. Remove the right stay [C] and attach it below (" x 2).
5. Change the position of the lower limit sensor [D] (" x 1).
6. Attach the harness clamp (not shown) to the rear of the plate. Use this clamp to
hold the sensor connector wire.

B474I001.WMF

B474I508.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
SM 1-61 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

7. Attach the front bracket [A] with the
beveled corner down (" x 2).
NOTE: If the brackets are not easy to
install, lift the bottom plate with your hand.
8. Attach the rear bracket [B] with the
beveled corner down (" x 2).
9. Attach the bottom plate extension [C] with
the hex screws (" x 4).

10. Remove the casters from the bottom of
the B4/LG frame [D]
11. Align the positioning pin [E].
12. Attach the B4/LG frame [F] with the hex
screws (" x 2).

13. Move the front side fence [G] and rear
side fence [H] to the B4 or 81/2" position
and attach it (" x 1).

B474I502.WMF

B474I553.WMF

B474I555.WMF
[H]
[G]
[F]
[E]
[D]
[A]
[B]
[C]
B132/B200 1-62 SM

14. Attach the cover [A] (81/2" x 14"/B4) (" x 1).
15. Attach the right cover [B] (" x 2).
16. Connect the LCT to the machine.
17. Turn the machine on.
19. Do SP5959 005.
20. Input 5 for B4 SEF or 6 for 81/2" x 14" SEF.

B474I506.WMF
[A]
[B]
2000/3000 SHEET FINISHERS (B700/B701)
SM 1-63 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

1.9 2000/3000 SHEET FINISHERS (B700/B701)
1.9.1 ACCESSORIES
Description Qty
1. Cushion (with double-sided tape) .......................................... 1
2. Ground (earth) plate .............................................................. 1
3. Tapping screws - M4 x16...................................................... 4
4. Tapping screws - M4 x 8....................................................... 2
5. Leveling Shoes ...................................................................... 3
6. Upper output tray................................................................... 1
7. Lower output tray (B700 Only) ............................................... 1
8. Front joint bracket .................................................................. 1
9. Rear joint bracket................................................................... 1
10. Gasket Seal ........................................................................... 1
11. Support Plate......................................................................... 1

B700I201.WMF
1
2
3 4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
B132/B200 1-64 SM

1.9.2 INSTALLATION
This section shows the installation instructions for two finishers:
B700 Booklet Finisher: This can do punching, shifting, stapling, and saddle-
stitching with staples. This booklet finisher can be used with the B132, B181, or
B200.
B701 Finisher, capable of punching, shifting, and stapling but with no saddle-
stitching unit. This finisher can be used with the B132, B181, or B200.

NOTE: Differences in the installation procedures are shown as B700 or B701.

Removing Tapes and Packing Materials

!WARNING!
before you do these procedures.
1. Remove the machine from its box, and remove all the wrapping.
2. Remove all filament tape and packing material from the finisher.

B700I102.WMF

B701I102.WMF
B700 B701
SM 1-65 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

3. Open the front door.
4. Remove all tapes and packing materials inside the finisher.

B700I202.WMF

B701I202.WMF
B700
B701
B132/B200 1-66 SM

5. Pull the jogger unit [A] out of the finisher.
6. Remove the tapes and retainers.

B700I204.WMF

B701I204.WMF
B700
B701
[A]
[A]
SM 1-67 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

Docking the Finisher to the Copier

1. If you will not install the Cover Interposer B704:
Remove the strip from the sponge cushion [A] and
attach it to the finisher, then go to Step 2.
Important! Do not put the sponge in a position that will
prevent air flow through the air duct [B] on the copier
after the finisher is connected to the copier.
Use a short screwdriver to attach the grounding plate [C]
(" x 2, M3 x 6).
If you will install the Cover Interposer B704:
Do not attach the sponge cushion to the finisher. It must be attached to the
cover interposer.
Do not attach the grounding plate [C] to the finisher. It must be attached to
the cover interposer.
Install the interposer on the finisher before you dock the finisher to the copier.
(!1.15: do the complete procedure.) Then come back to the procedure for
the B700/B701 finisher, and continue from Attaching the Trays.

B700I106.WMF

B132R734.WMF
[A]
[C]
[B]
B132/B200 1-68 SM

2. Attach the rear bracket [A] (" x 2, M4 x 14).
3. Attach the front bracket [B] (" x 2, M4 x 14).

B700I105.WMF
[A]
[B]
SM 1-69 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

4. Remove the screw [A] to release the lock lever [B] (" x 1).
5. Slowly push the finisher against the side of the machine until the brackets [D]
go into their slots. If you do this too quickly, you will bend and cause damage to
the paper-entrance guide plates [C].
6. Attach and tighten the screw removed in Step 5.
7. Connect finisher connector [E] to the main frame.
8. Attach the gasket seal [F] as shown.

Important! Check the duct " on the left side of the
machine. Make sure that the sponge does not block this
duct.

B700I107.WMF

B132R734.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
"
B132/B200 1-70 SM

Attaching the Trays

B700
1. Attach the upper output tray [A] (" x 1, M3 x 6).
NOTE: Make sure that the metal plate [B] is on the top of the tray.
2. Attach the lower output tray [C].

B701
1. Attach the output tray [A].
NOTE: Make sure that the metal plate [B] is on the top of the tray.

B700I208.WMF

B701I208.WMF
B700
B701
[A]
[B]
[C]
[A]
[B]
SM 1-71 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

Leveling the Finisher

1. Put the leveling shoes [A] (x 3) below the feet [B].
2. Use a wrench to adjust the height of the screws [C] to make the machine level.

B701I109.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
B132/B200 1-72 SM

Support Tray

Take the following steps if the "Exit Tray Full" message displays even though the
exit tray is not full. (The message is caused by the trailing edges of excessively
curled paper activating the tray full sensor [A] before the tray is actually full.)
1. Remove the paper form the paper feed tray, turn it upside down, then print.
2. If Step 1 does not solve the problem, place the support tray [B] on the exit tray
with the >PP< mark positioned as shown at [C].
3. If Step 2 does not solve the problem, place the support tray on the exit tray with
the >PP< mark positioned as shown at [D].

>PP<
> P P <
B700I110.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
SM 1-73 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

Selecting the Staple Supply Name
Go into the SP mode and input this information.

5841 Supply Name Setting These names show when the user prints the Inquiry List
Push the Counter key, then push Print Inquiry List.
Push the Inquiry button on the initial User Tools screen.
013 Staple Std3 Input the name of the staples that are used for standard
stapling (not booklet stapling). This setting should be
done for the B700 and B701.
022 Staple Bind2 Input the name of the staples that are used for booklet
stapling (saddle-stitching). This setting is necessary only
for the B700.

Enabling Booklet Binding (B700 Only)
To enable booklet binding (saddle-stitching) for the B700, you must select the
center stapling position.
1. Push the User Tools key.
2. Touch Copier/Document Server Features.
3. Touch the Input/Output tab.
4. Touch a Stapling Position button and touch the center (saddle-stitch) stapling
symbol.
5. Go out from the User Tools mode. Set the number of copies, touch the center
stapling symbol on the operation panel, then start the print job.

PUNCH UNIT (B702)
B132/B200 1-74 SM

1.10 PUNCH UNIT (B702)
The Punch Unit B702 is installed in the 2000/3000 Sheet Finisher B700/B701.
1.10.1 ACCESSORIES

Description Qty
1. Punchout Waste Unit ........................................................... 1
2. Slide Drive Unit .................................................................... 1
3. Punch Waste Hopper........................................................... 1
4. Screws (M3 x 6)................................................................... 5
5. Side-to-Side Detection Unit ................................................. 1
6. Punching Unit ...................................................................... 1

!WARNING!

B702I101.WMF
1
2
3
4
5
6
PUNCH UNIT (B702)
SM 1-75 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

1.10.2 INSTALLATION

1. If the finisher is connected to the copier, disconnect the power connector [A]
and move the finisher away from the copier.
2. Remove the rear cover [B] (" x 2) and open the front door.
NOTE: At the bottom of the rear cover, make sure to disconnect the tabs that
attach the cover to the frame.
3. Remove the guide plate [C] (" x 2).
4. Remove the shipping retainer bracket [G] (screws [H]). Move the punch unit
along its rails into the finisher. Make sure that the pin engages correctly at the
front and rear.
5. Connect and attach the punch unit [E] (! x 2, $ x 1).
" The cables [F] are coiled and attached to the PCB.
" Attach connectors to CN601 and CN602.

B702I103.WMF
[D]
[E]
Rear
Front
[F]
[A]
[B]
[C]

[G]
[H]
%
Rev. 09/05/2006
PUNCH UNIT (B702)
B132/B200 1-76 SM

6. Attach the slide drive unit [A] to the finisher and connect it to the punch unit
(" x 2, ! x 1). Push in the slide drive unit at ) when you attach screw *.
7. Make sure that the punch unit moves freely and is not blocked by the screws.
8. Put the side-to-side detection unit [B] in the machine. Make sure that the two
pins are engaged correctly at the front.
9. Make sure that the side-to-side detection unit moves smoothly on its rails. If it
does not, make sure that the rails are aligned with their grooves.
10. Attach the side-to-side detection unit and connect it at the rear (" x 2, $ x 1,
! x 1).
11. Pull the short connector out of the connector [C] then connect the cable (! x
1).
NOTE: This is the 3-pin connector.

B702I104.WMF

B702I105.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
) *
3-pin connector
PUNCH UNIT (B702)
SM 1-77 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

12. At the front, use a pair of wire cutters to remove the part [A] of the cover.
13. Install the punch-waste transport unit [B] in the finisher.
NOTE: Make sure that the punch-waste transport unit moves smoothly on its
rails. If it does not, make sure that the rails are aligned with the grooves.
14. Remove the short connector from the connector [C].
NOTE: This is the 4-pin connector.
15. Connect the cable and attach the punch-waste transport unit
(! x 1, $ x 1, " x 1).
16. Set the hopper [D] in its holder.

B702I106.WMF

B702I107.WMF
[A]
[B]
[D]
4-pin Connector
[C]
MAIL BOX (B762)
B132/B200 1-78 SM

1.11 MAIL BOX (B762)
The Mail Box B762 is installed on the 2000/3000 Sheet Finisher B700/B701.
1.11.1 ACCESSORIES

Description Qty
1. Trays...................................................................................... 9
2. Guide plate ............................................................................ 1
3. Decals (bin display) ............................................................... 1
4. Tapping screws - M3x8.......................................................... 6

MAIL BOX (B762)
SM 1-79 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

1.11.2 INSTALLATION

!WARNING!

1. Remove the filament tape [A].
Important: Move the mailbox carefully. It is easy to cause damage to the
corner leaf plate [B].

B762I101.WMF
[A]
[B]
MAIL BOX (B762)
B132/B200 1-80 SM

2. If the Cover Interposer Tray B704 is installed on the B700/B701, remove it.
NOTE: The cover interposer tray and mailbox cannot be installed on the
finisher at the same time.
3. Remove the top cover [A] of the finisher (! x1).
4. Remove the bracket [B] (! x1).

B762I102.WMF
[A]
[B]
MAIL BOX (B762)
SM 1-81 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

5. Attach the guide plate [A] to the top of the finisher (! x2, M3x8).
6. Attach the mailbox [B] to the top of the finisher (! x4, M3x8).
7. Attach the 9 trays [C] to the mailbox.
8. Give the decals [D] to the customer. The customer will write on these and
attach them at the correct location.

B762I103.WMF

B762I104.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
3000-SHEET FINISHER (B706), FINISHER ADAPTER (B698)
B132/B200 1-82 SM

1.12 3000-SHEET FINISHER (B706), FINISHER ADAPTER
(B698)
1.12.1 ACCESSORIES
3000-Sheet Finisher B706 Accessories

Description Qty
1. Table Extension..................................................................... 1
2. Leveling Shoes ...................................................................... 4
3. Rear Joint Bracket ................................................................. 1
4. Front Joint Bracket................................................................. 1
5. Entrance Guide Plate............................................................. 1
6. Ground (Earth) Plate.............................................................. 1
7. Tray Holder (Not used for B132/B181/B200) ......................... 1
8. Auxiliary Tray (Proof Tray) (Not used for B132/B181/B200) .. 1
9. Auxiliary Tray (Shift Tray) (Not used for B132/B181/B200) ... 1
10. Phillips Screws w/washer - M4 x 14....................................... 4
11. Tapping Screws - M4 x 8....................................................... 2
14. Shift Tray ............................................................................... 1
15. Sponge Cushion .................................................................... 1

B706I201A.WMF
10
11
12
13
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
14
15
SM 1-83 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

Finisher Adapter Kit B698 Accessories

Description Qty
1. Upper Transport Motor Bracket ............................................. 1
2. Timing Belt............................................................................. 1
3. Short Connector..................................................................... 1
4. Harness ................................................................................. 1
5. Gasket Seal ........................................................................... 1
6. EPROM ................................................................................. 1
7. Harness Clamps .................................................................... 2
8. Serial Number Seal................................................................ 1

B698I101.WMF
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
7
B132/B200 1-84 SM

1.12.2 INSTALLATION

!WARNING!
do this procedure.

Shipping tape and retainers

1. Remove the finisher from its box. Remove all tapes and packing materials.

B706I002.WMF
SM 1-85 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

2. Open the front door [A] and remove tape and packing materials.
3. Pull the jogger unit [B] out of the finisher.
4. Remove brackets [C], [D], and [E] (! x 2 each) with their red tags and wires,
and all tapes and packing materials.

B706I102.WMF

B706I101.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
B132/B200 1-86 SM

Finisher Adapter Kit B698 Installation

1. Remove the finisher rear cover [A] (! x2).
2. Connect the short connector [B] to CN137 on the finisher main board.
3. Remove the upper transport motor mount [C] (" x1, ! x3, spring x1).

B698I102.WMF

B698I103.WMF
[A]
[C]
[B]
SM 1-87 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

4. Remove the transport motor [A] from the original bracket [B] (! x4).
5. Set the motor on the new bracket [C] supplied with the Finisher Adapter Kit
B698.
6. Attach the timing belt [D].
7. Use the same screws to attach the transport motor to the new bracket (! x4).

B698I104.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
B132/B200 1-88 SM

8. Remove the harness clamp [A].
9. Use wire cutters or radio pliers to remove harness clamp [B].
10. Attach the transport motor assembly [C]. (! x3, " x2, spring x1).
The harness [D] is supplied with the Finisher Adapter B698.
Attach the screws but do not tighten. Pull the spring slightly to apply tension,
then tighten the screws.
11. Remove EPROM [E] and replace it with EPROM [F] that is supplied with the
Finisher Adapter B698.

B698I105.WMF
[C]
[A]
[B]
[D]
[E]
[F]
SM 1-89 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

12. Put the harness clamps [A] and [B] (supplied with the B698 Kit) in the holes (#
x2).
Important: Be sure to put the harness clamps in the holes as shown.
13. Install the harnesses through the clamps and close the clamps.
14. Make sure that the harnesses do not touch the motor.
15. Attach the finisher rear cover.
16. Open the front door. Attach the serial number decal [C] below the finisher-
serial-number [D] decal that is attached to the front, bottom support of the
finisher frame.

B698I106.WMF

B698I107.WMF
[C]
[D]
[A]
[B]
B132/B200 1-90 SM

Finisher Installation

1. Attach the rear joint bracket [A] (! x 2).
2. Attach the front joint bracket [B] (! x 2).
3. Remove the connector cover [C].
4. Attach the grounding plate [E] (! x 2) (M3 x 6).
Important: Set the grounding plate so there is no gap [E] between the
grounding plate and the bottom frame of the finisher.

B698I108.WMF

B706I004.WMF
[D]
[E]
[A]
[B]
[C]
SM 1-91 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

5. Install the table extension [A] (! x 2) (M4 x 8).
6. Make sure that the edge of the table extension is aligned with the edge of the
finisher [B].
7. If you will not install the Cover Interposer B704:
Remove the strip from the sponge cushion [C], and attach it to the finisher.
Attach the entrance guide plate [D] (! x 2) (M3 x 6).
If you are going to install the Cover Interposer B704:
Do not attach the sponge cushion.
Do not attach the entrance guide plate [D] to the finisher.
Install the interposer before you dock the finisher to the copier. Then come
back to the procedure for the B706 finisher, and continue from Selecting
the Staple Supply Name.

B706I005.WMF

B706I207.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
B132/B200 1-92 SM

8. Attach the tray [A] (! x 4) (M3 x 8).
9. Open the front door [B] of the finisher.
10. Remove the screw [C] from the lock lever [D], then pull out the locking lever.
11. Align the finisher on the joint brackets [E] and push the finisher against the side
of the copier.
12. Make sure that the top edges of the finisher and the copier are parallel from
front to rear as shown below:

13. Set the leveling shoes [F] (x4) below the feet [G].
14. Use a wrench to adjust the height of the feet [G] to make the machine level.
15. Push in the lock lever [D], attach it (! x 1), then close the front door.
16. Connect the finisher cable [H] to the copier.

B706I006.WMF
B706I534.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
[F]
[H]
SM 1-93 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

Selecting the Staple Supply Name
Go into the SP mode and input this information
5841 Supply Name Setting These names show when the user prints the Inquiry List.
To print this list push User Tools> [Inquiry]> [Print Inquiry
List]> [Start].
012 Staple Std Input the name of the staples that are used for corner
stapling. This setting should be done for the B706 with
B698.

PUNCH UNIT B531/A821
B132/B200 1-94 SM

1.13 PUNCH UNIT B531/A821
The Punch Unit B531/A821 is installed in the 3000-Sheet Finisher B706.
1.13.1 ACCESSORIES

Description Qty
1. Punch unit.................................................................................. 1
2. Punch Waste Hopper................................................................. 1
3. Sensor Arm and Sensor ............................................................ 1
4. Spacer (2 mm) ........................................................................... 1
5. Spacer (1 mm) ........................................................................... 2
6. Spring ........................................................................................ 1
7. Step Screw (large) (M4 x 11) ..................................................... 1
8. Tapping Screw (M4 x 10)........................................................... 2
9. Step Screw (small) (M3 x 4)....................................................... 1
10. Machine Screw, Washer (M4 x 6).............................................. 1
11. Knob .......................................................................................... 1

B531I001.WMF
10
11
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SM 1-95 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

1.13.2 INSTALLATION

!WARNING!

1. If the finisher is connected to the machine, disconnect it.
2. Open the front door and remove the rear cover (! x 2).
3. Remove the punch unit from its packing materials. Remove the motor protector
plate [A] (! x 4) and the cam lock plate [B] (! x 1).
4. Remove the inner cover [C] (! x 3).
5. Behind the inner cover at [D] and [E], push the lock tabs to the right to release
the inner cover from the frame.
6. Remove the plastic sections [F] from the cover.

B531I002.WMF

B531I09.WMF
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[A]
[B]
B132/B200 1-96 SM

7. Remove the paper guide [A] (! x 4).
8. Install the sensor arm [B] (! x 1, small step screw (M3 x 4).
NOTE: Make sure that the sensor arm turns freely on the step screw.
9. Attach the spring [C].

B531I003.WMF

B531I004.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
SM 1-97 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

10. At the rear of the rear of the finisher, put the punch unit [A] in the finisher.
11. At the front, attach the punch unit [B] with the large step screw (! x 1, M4 x 10).
12. At the rear, attach the 2 mm spacer [C] and attach the screws [D] to the punch
unit (! x 2, M4 x 10).
NOTE: At the hole immediately above the lock lever, use one of the screws
from the paper guide removed above to attach the remaining two
spacers to the frame. These two spacers are used to adjust the
horizontal position of the punch holes.
13. At the front, attach the punch unit knob [E] (! x 1).

B531I006.WMF

B531I005.WMF
[D]
[B]
[C]
[A]
[E]
B132/B200 1-98 SM

14. Connect the PCB harness connector [A] to CN129 of the finisher PCB and to
CN600 of the punch unit PCB.
15. Connect the HP Sensor 2 harness connector [B] to CN130 of the finisher PCB
and to HP Sensor 2.
16. Connect the end of the hopper-full-sensor cable that has one connector [C] to
the hopper full sensor on the arm (" x 1, clamp x 1). Then connect the other
two connectors to HP Sensor 1 [D] and CN620 [E] of the punch PCB.
NOTE: No special DIP switch settings are necessary for this punch unit. The
punch unit sends an identification signal to the machine. Then the
machine knows the type of punch unit that is installed.

17. Put the hopper [F] in the finisher.
18. Attach the inner cover and rear cover.
19. Close the front door and connect the finisher to the machine.

B531I007.WMF

B531I008.WMF
[F]
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
OUTPUT JOGGER UNIT (B703/B513)
SM 1-99 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

1.14 OUTPUT JOGGER UNIT (B703/B513)
The Output Jogger Unit B703 is installed in the 2000/3000 Sheet Finisher
B700/B701.
The Output Jogger Unit B513 is installed in the 3000-Sheet Finisher B706.

1.14.1 ACCESSORIES

Description Qty
1. Jogger Unit .................................................................................... 1
2. Tapping Screws - M3 x 6 ............................................................... 2

!WARNING!

B703I101.WMF
1
2
B132/B200 1-100 SM

1.14.2 INSTALLATION

1. Turn the main machine switch off.
2. Disconnect the finisher from the main frame.
3. Use the flat head of a screwdriver to remove the left upper cover [A].
4. Remove the cover plate [B] (! x 2). Keep the screws.

B703I103.WMF

B703I102.WMF
[A]
[B]
SM 1-101 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

5. While you hold the jogger unit with the connector on the left, put the hooks of
the frame of the jogger unit [A] into the holes in the left and right side of the
finisher frame.
6. Fasten connector [B] to the socket (" x 1).
7. Attach the jogger unit to the finisher (! x 2).
8. Reattach the jogger unit cover [C] to the jogger unit (! x 2).

B703I104.WMF [A]
[B]
[C]
COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B704)
B132/B200 1-102 SM

1.15 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B704)
1.15.1 ACCESSORIES
Description Qty
1. Front door extension (top) ..................................................... 1
2. Rear cover extension (bottom) .............................................. 1
3. Shoulder screws .................................................................... 3
4. Tapping screws M4 x 8....................................................... 9
7. Adjuster plates (B706 Only)................................................... 2
8. Hinge Bracket (B706 Only) .................................................... 1
9. Plate Extension (bottom) ....................................................... 1
10. Gasket Seals ......................................................................... 2
11. Right Rear Cover Plate (B706 only) ...................................... 1
12. Anti-Static Brush.................................................................... 1
13. Spacer (B706 only) ................................................................ 1
14. Spacer*
1
(B468/B469 only).................................................... 1
15. Right front corner plate (for B706) only)................................. 2
16. Front door extension (bottom) ............................................... 1

B704I101.WMF
10
11
12
13
1
2
3 4
5
6
7
8
9
14
16
15
SM 1-103 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

1.15.2 INSTALLATION
You can install the Cover Interposer Tray B704 on these finishers:
2000-Sheet Booklet Finisher B700
3000-Sheet Finisher B701

Removing Tapes and Packing Materials

!WARNING!
Make sure that the finisher is disconnected from the main machine, and
that the copier is turned off and the power cord is disconnected, before you

1. If the finisher is connected to the machine, disconnect it.

!CAUTION
After disconnecting the finisher, for safety remove the front and rear
finisher connectors from the copier. Reattach them just before docking
the finisher to the copier.

2. Remove all tape and retainers from the cover interposer tray [A].
3. Remove the tape and packing material [B] from the ground connector.

B704I102.WMF
[A]
[B]
B132/B200 1-104 SM

Preparing the Finisher (B700/B701/B706)

1. Remove the cover [A] of the relay connector.
2. Loosen the screw of the bracket [B] (! x 1) then remove the bracket.
3. Remove the guide plate [C]. (You will attach this guide plate to the cover
interposer. Do not discard it.)
Important: If you will install the cover interposer tray on a B700/B701/B706
finisher that was installed on the machine before this time, remove the sponge
strip from the finisher. Keep this strip, because you will attach it later to the
interposer tray.
4. If you will install the B700/B701, attach the extensions to the finisher without
modification. Go to "Attaching the Extensions for the B700/B701" on page 1-
108.
-or-
If you will install the B706, modify the extensions and attach them to the
finisher. Go to "Attaching the Extensions for the B706" on page 1-105.

B704I103.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
SM 1-105 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

Attaching the Extensions for the B706
Important!
The procedures in this section are for installation of the cover interposer with the
B706 only.
If you will install the cover interposer with the B700/B701, go to the next section.

Modify the Attachments for the B706

Front Door Extension:
1. Attach spacer [A] to the front door extension (top) (! x 2).
2. Remove the lower hinge [B] and replace it with [C] (! x 2).

Rear Cover Extension (Bottom):
3. Remove [D] and replace it with [E] (! x 1).
4. Remove [F] and replace it with [G] (! x 1).

Plate Extension (Bottom):
5. Remove bracket [H] and attach it to the end of the bottom plate extension
(! x 2).

B704I108.WMF
Front Door Extension (Top) Rear Cover Extension (Bottom)
Bottom Plate Extension
[A]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
[H]
[B]
[C]
B132/B200 1-106 SM

Prepare the Cover Interposer for the B706
1. Remove spacer [A] (! x1).
2. Attach spacer [B] (! x1).
3. Remove the screws from the connector casing [C] (! x2).
4. Push the connector casing in the direction of the arrow until the second set of
holes is aligned with the holes below, then attach the screws.

B706I900.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
SM 1-107 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

Attach the Extensions to the B706
1. Attach the three shoulder screws [A] !"# (! x 3).
2. If the finisher was previously installed, remove the ground plate [B] from the
finisher and keep the screws.
3. Attach the bottom plate [C] (! x 2, M3 x 6).
4. Attach the ground plate to the bottom plate (! x 2).
5. Attach the bottom front cover extension [D] (! x 2, M4 x 8).
NOTE: Attach this cover first.
6. Attach the top front cover extension [E] (! x 2, M4 x 8).
7. Attach the rear cover extension [F] to the finisher (! x 2, M3 x 6).
8. Push up the bottom of the rear cover extension to close the gap at the top of
the cover, then tighten the screws.

B704I110.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
!
"
#
B132/B200 1-108 SM

Attaching the Extensions for the B700/B701

1. Attach the three shoulder screws [A] !"# (! x 3).
2. If the finisher was previously installed, remove the ground plate [B] from the
finisher and keep the screws.
3. Attach the bottom plate [C] (! x 2, M3 x 6) then attach the ground plate to the
bottom plate (! x 2).
4. Attach the bottom front cover extension [D] (! x 2, M4 x 8).
5. Attach the top front cover extension [E] (! x 2, M4 x 8).
6. Attach the rear cover extension [F] (! x 2, M3 x 6).

B704I104.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
!
"
#
SM 1-109 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

Attaching the Interposer Tray (B700/B701/B706)

1. Lift the cover interposer tray. Then, align the keyholes [A] with the shoulder
screws [B], and move the cover interposer down onto the screws.
2. Attach the cover interposer with the screw [C] (! x 1, M3 x 6).
3. If you will install the cover interposer tray on the B700/B701, do not do the next
section. Go directly to Docking Finisher/Interposer on page 1-112.
-or-
If you will install the cover interposer tray on the B706, go to the next section,
install the corner plates on the B706, then go to Docking Finisher/Interposer
on page 1-112.

B704I105.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
B132/B200 1-110 SM

Attaching the Corner Plates for the B706
Important:
The corner plates are installed on the B706 only.

Right Rear Corner Plate (B706 only)

1. Temporarily attach the screws [A] (with approximately two turns) to the right
end of the finisher extension table [B] (! x 2, tapping M4 x 8)
NOTE: You cannot see the holes, because they have tape on them. You can
punch the screws through the tape.
2. Align the notches [C] in the right rear corner plate [D] with the screws and
attach the plate.
3. Put a long screwdriver through the notches in the right rear corner plate [D].
Then, tighten the screws to attach the right rear corner plate to the table
extension [B].
NG OK
B704I112.WMF
[A] [B]
[C]
[D]
SM 1-111 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

4. Temporarily attach the screw [A] (M4 x 8) with approximately two turns, to
fasten to the panel at the right front corner.
NOTE: You cannot see the hole, because it has tape on it. You can punch the
screw through the tape.
5. With the clamp [B] below the edge of the corner, align the notch [C] in the right
front corner plate with the screw, then put the panel into its position. You will
hear a click when it is in the correct position.
6. Put a long screwdriver in the notch [C], and tighten the screw to attach the right
front corner plate.

B704I111.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
B132/B200 1-112 SM

Docking Finisher/Interposer with the Machine (B700/B701/B706)

1. Attach the rear bracket [A] (! x 2, M4 x14).
2. Attach the front bracket [B] (! x 2, M4 x14).
3. Attach the gasket seals [C] and [D].

B704I121.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
SM 1-113 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

4. Attach the sponge strip [A] that is supplied with the finisher.
5. Attach the guide plate (removed from the finisher) to the cover interposer.
Attach the front end [B] of the plate (! x 1).
Attach the rear end of the plate with the anti-static brush [C] (! x 1).
Important: Use the two small tapping screws that are supplied, and not the
machine screws removed from the finisher guide plate.
6. Release the lock lever [D] (! x 1).
7. Attach the pad [E]. (This pad is provided with the finisher.)
8. Slowly push the finisher against the side of the
machine until the brackets [F] go into the slots.
!WARNING!
Move the finisher carefully, or you will bend the
entrance guide plates.
9. Attach the lock lever [D] (! x 1).
10. Connect the connector [G] to the copier.
Important! Check the duct $ on the left side of the
machine. Make sure that the sponge does not prevent air
flow through this duct.

B704I106.WMF

B132I734.WMF
[A]
[G]
[F]
[B]
[C]
[E]
[D]
$
MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS
B132/B200 1-114 SM

1.16 MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS
1.16.1 OVERVIEW
The machine controller box has five board slots and 3 SD cards. Make sure that
each board and SD card is put in the correct slot. For more, please see the decal
on the controller box.

Board Slots
A File Format Converter Type B B609
B Copy Connector Type 2105 B328
C EFI-V G815
D IEEE1284 B679 (Centronics), IEEE1394 B581 (FireWire), IEEE802.11b
B736-06, -07 (Wireless LAN), Bluetooth B736-11
E Combo NIC B763 (10/100 BaseT Ethernet & USB 2.0)
SD Card Slots
3 Version updates, moving applications to other SD Cards.
2 Applications (1 or several applications combined on 1 SD Card).
1 System Controller SD Card. Never remove!

Important!
Only one SD Card slot (Slot 2) is available for applications. To install more than
one application, they must be copied on the same SD Card. (%1.16.5)

L-ADP
NEXT
COPIER
KEY
CARD
B
A
C D
E
A
B
C
D
E
File Format Converter
Tandem
External CTL
Option
Ethernet & USB (Ver. 2.0)
SD Card Slot
3
2
1
Service
Option
System
A
B
C
D
E
Tandem
External CTL
Option
SD Card Slot
3
2
1
Service
Option
System
I/F Card Slot
B132I907.WMF
SD Card Slot 1: System
Do not remove!
SD Card Slot 2: Options (Applications)
SD Card Slot 3: Service (Firmware Update)
SM 1-115 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n
1.16.2 ACCESSORY CARDS

No. Code Name Slot Page
$
B609 File Format Converter A 1-137
&
B328 Copier Connection Kit B 1-143
'
EFI-V G815 External Controller C 1-145
(
B679 IEEE1284 Interface Board Type A D 1-126
)
B581 IEEE1394 Interface Board Type B D 1-127
*
B736-11 Bluetooth Interface Unit Type 3260 D 1-130
+
B736-06, -07 IEEE802.11b Interface Type D D 1-132
,
B736-01 Combo NIC (Ethernet & USB 2.0) E 1-122
Note: Items (, ), *, +, must be in the same slot. Because of this, only one of
these cards can be installed at the same time.
Important!
The B181 is supplied with the printer/scanner kit installed at the factory.

B737I102.WMF
$
&
'
(
)
*
+
,
B132/B200 1-116 SM
1.16.3 APPLICATIONS PROVIDED ON SD CARDS

These applications are available on SD cards [A]. You install them in Slot 2:
Printer/Scanner Unit Type 3260 B737
PostScript3 Unit Type 3260 B761
Data Overwrite Security Unit Type C B735-17
Slot 2 is the only slot available for these application SD cards.
If the customer must use more than one application, then the applications must be
put together on one SD card. (%1.16.5)
Important
Slot 1 (the lower slot) is for the system SD card only. The system SD card must
not be removed. The machine will show SC732 if a different SC card is put in
Slot 1.
Slot 2 holds the application SD card. It also holds the target SD card when
applications are put together on one card.
Slot 3 (the top slot) is used to update the machine firmware. It also holds the
source SD card when applications are put together on one card.

B132I909.WMF
[A]
SM 1-117 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

1.16.4 HANDLING DIMMS AND SD CARDS
!WARNING!
before you install a controller option.

Important!
To prevent damage to the controller box, always do your work carefully. Do not
put your hand or a tool into the box when you remove the controller box or install
an option.
To prevent damage to the circuits on the boards, always touch a metal surface to
remove static charge from your hands before you touch electronic components.

DIMMs
1. Hold the ROM DIMM. The edge connector
[A] must point toward the slot and the notch
[B] in the DIMM must be in the top right
corner.
2. Put the edge connector [C] in the slot at a
30-degree angle from the surface of the
board. If the angle is too low, the upper
contact could bend.
3. Carefully move the outer edge of the ROM
DIMM up and down slightly until it goes into
the connector. Then carefully push it down
level with the controller board.
Important: If the upper contact is pushed in
with force, and becomes bent, the
connection will be defective, and the
machine could stop.

SD cards
To install and remove an SD Card:
SD cards are held in position by a small spring-lock mechanism.
1. To install an SD card, push it into the slot until it stops, then release it.
2. To remove an SD card, push the SD card in carefully to release it, and then
remove it from the slot.
Important: To prevent damage to the SD card or the slot lock, always push the
card in, to release it, before you try to remove it.
G338I901.WMF
[B]
[C]
[A]
B132/B200 1-118 SM

1.16.5 MERGING APPLICATIONS ON ONE SD CARD
Overview
Only one SD card slot is available for SD
card applications.
The machine has three SD card slots. Slot
1 is used for the system card. Slot 2 is
used for application programs, and Slot 3
is used for servicing only.
If the customer wants to use more than
one application SD card, the applications
must be put together on the same SD card.

Important
The data necessary for authentication is transferred with the application program
to the target SD card.
Do not use an SD card if it was used with a computer before this time. Correct
operation is not guaranteed if this type of SD card is used.
The SD card is the only evidence that the customer is licensed to use the
application program. The service technician may occasionally need to check the
SD card and its data to solve problems. SD cards must be stored in the cover on
the door of the copier. (%Pg. 1-121)
A licensing agreement prohibits copying of the PostScript SD card. However, you
can copy an application from another SD card to the PS SD card.
If an SD card was used to combine applications on that card, that SD card
cannot be used for a different function.
NEVER REMOVE THE SYSTEM SD CARD FROM SLOT 1.

L-ADP
NEXT
COPIER
KEY
CARD
B
A
C D
E
A
B
C
D
E
Tandem
External CTL
Option
SD Card Slot
3
2
1
Service
Option
System
A
B
C
D
E
Tandem
External CTL
Option
SD Card Slot
3
2
1
Service
Option
System
I/F Card Slot

B132I907.WMF
SM 1-119 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

Merging Applications
Do this procedure to put more than one application on one SD card.
1. Turn off the copier.
2. Remove the SD card slot cover (! x2).
3. Put the Source SD card in Slot 3 (top slot). This card contains the application
that you want to copy.
NOTE: The PS SD card cannot be the source card, because it cannot be
copied.
4. Put the Target SD card in Slot 2 (middle slot). The application on the card in
Slot 3 will be copied to this card.
6. Turn the copier on.
7. Enter the SP mode and select SP5873 001.
8. Touch "Execute".
9. Read the instructions on the display and touch "Execute" to start copying.
10. When the display tells you copying is completed, touch "Exit".
11. Turn the copier off.
12. Remove the Source SD card from Slot 3. Keep the target SD card in Slot 2.
13. Turn the copier on.
14. Enter the User Tools mode and check that all the applications on the SD card
in Slot 2 are enabled:
User Tools> System Settings> Administrator Tools> Firmware Version> Next
(5/5)
15. Turn the copier off again, then:
Attach the SD card slot cover.
Attach the rear cover of the machine.
Remove the cover from the front door, and store the SD card that was
copied. (%Pg.1-121)
Important!
After an SD card is copied, it cannot be used. But it must be stored in the
front door, to serve as proof of purchase by the customer.
The original card can also be used to perform an undo procedure (SP 5873
002). Before you put the card in the front cover, label it carefully so that you
can identify it easily if you need to do the undo procedure (see the next page).

B132/B200 1-120 SM

Undo Exec
1. Turn the main switch OFF.
2. Put the SD card with the merged applications in SD Card Slot 2.
3. Put the original destination SD card (the one stored in the front door) into Slot 3.
NOTE: The SD card in Slot 3 must be the original SD card of the application
you want to move from Slot 2 to Slot 3. You cannot use any blank SD
card in Slot 3.
4. Turn the main switch ON.
NOTE: Do Not Open the Door!!
5. Go into the SP mode and do SP5873-002 (Undo Exec)
6. Follow the messages on the operation panel to complete the procedure.
7. Turn the main switch OFF.
8. Remove the SD cards from the slots.
9. Turn the main switch ON.

SM 1-121 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

Storing SD Application Cards on Site

2. Remove the cover [A] on the door (! x2).
3. Remove the block [B].
4. Store the SD cards [C] inside the cover.
5. Attach the cover to the machine.

B132I728.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
B132/B200 1-122 SM

1.16.6 PRINTER/SCANNER B737 AND INTERFACE UNIT
Accessories
Description Qty
1. Scanner/Printer DIMM (G338) or Printer DIMM (G339) ........ 1
2. Centronics Interface .............................................................. 1
3. NIB........................................................................................ 1
4. Screws - M3x8....................................................................... 2
5. Ferrite Core ........................................................................... 1
6. Key Top Assembly ................................................................ 1
7. Operating Instructions Printer............................................. 1
8. Installation Instructions.......................................................... 1
9. FCC Label ............................................................................ 1
10. Software CD-ROM ................................................................ 3

SM 1-123 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

Installation
!WARNING!

NOTE: For the printer/scanner unit, the machine must have a minimum of 128 MB
of memory (more is recommended). Memory chips are not supplied with
this option.

1. Disconnect the ARDF cable [A] ("
x1).
2. Remove the controller board [B] (! x3).
3. Connect the SDRAM DIMM (128 MB expansion memory) into RAM slot CN501
on the controller board.
4. Attach the controller board (! x3).
5. Remove the I/F Slot Cover E [C] (! x2).
6. Install the Interface Unit Board [D] (NIC/USB) B763 in Slot E.
7. Remove the SD card slot cover [E] (! x2)
8. Install the Printer/Scanner SD card [F] in SD Card Slot 2 (middle slot).
9. Attach the SD card slot cover (! x2).

B132I710.WMF

B737I107.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
B132/B200 1-124 SM

10. Wind the Ethernet cable [A] around
the ferrite core [B] as shown.
11. Make sure there is a minimum of 150
mm (6 in.) between the ferrite core
and the end of the cable.
12. Close the ferrite core.
13. Connect the RJ45 plug [C] on the
Ethernet cable to the NIB.

14. Replace the old key top assembly [D]
with the new key tops [E].
15. Do the procedures in the operating
instructions to make the user settings
(for example, the IP address).

16. Do the color calibration for the printer:
User Tools> Maintenance> Auto Color Calibration> Printer Function:
Do all three test patterns.

B737I900.WMF

B737I115.WMF
[A]
[B]
150 mm (6 in.)
[C]
[E]
[D]
SM 1-125 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

USB SP Settings
The following SP commands are available. But, only one setting can be adjusted,
and this must only be done if the customer has USB data transmission errors.
NOTE: Do not change the settings marked DFU. These settings are for design
and factory use only.

To go into the SP mode:
1. Push Clear Modes "
2. On the operation panel keypad, input 107.
3. Hold down [Clear/Stop] (#) for more than 3 seconds.
4. Push Copy SP on the touch-panel to open the SP command selection screen.

5. Input 5844.

SP No. Name Function
Adjusts the USB transfer rate. Do not change the setting
unless there is a data transfer error with the USB high
speed mode.
HS/FS: High speed/Full speed auto adjust
(480Mbps/12Mbps)
5844 001 Transfer Rate
FS: Full speed (12Mbps fixed)
5844 002 Vendor ID Displays the vendor ID. DFU
5844 003 Product ID Displays the product ID. DFU
5844 004 Dev. Release Num Displays the development release version number. DFU

Exit
SP Mode (Service) Close All Copy Window SP Direct Open All X-XXX-XXX
SP2XXX
SP3XXX
SP5XXX
SP6XXX
SP7XXX
SP8XXX
SP4XXX
SP1XXX Group
Page
Line
Page
Line
Group
21
COPY: SP1-001-001
Initial 0
Prev Page Next Page
14APR 2002 03:25
Feed
Drum
Process
Data Log2
Scanner
Mode
Periphs
Data Log
B064I999.WMF
B132/B200 1-126 SM

1.16.7 IEEE 1284 INTERFACE BOARD B679 (CENTRONICS)
Accessories
Description Qty
1. IEEE 1284 ............................................................................. 1
2. Conversion Plug IEEE 1284 Type C ..................................... 1
Only one interface slot is available for one of these options. Because of this, only
one board can be installed at the same time:
IEEE 1284 Interface Board B679 (Centronics)
IEEE 1394 Interface Board B581 (FireWire)
Bluetooth Interface Board B763
IEEE 802.11b Interface Unit B736 (Wireless LAN)

1. Remove the I/F cover slot [A] of Slot D (! x2).
2. Touch a metal surface to remove static charge from your hands before you
touch the interface card.
3. Put the interface board [B] in Slot D and attach it (! x2).
4. Turn the machine off and on. Then do SP5990 to print an SMC Report to check
that the interface board is installed correctly.

B737I902.WMF
[A]
[B]
SM 1-127 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

1.16.8 IEEE 1394 INTERFACE BOARD B581 (FIREWIRE)

Accessories
Description Qty
3. IEEE-1394 Cable 2M 4-Pin ................................................... 1
4. IEEE-1394 Cable 2M 6-Pine ................................................. 1
5. PCB GW1394........................................................................ 1

3. Put the interface board [B] in Slot D and attach it (! x2).

B737I903.WMF
[A]
[B]
B132/B200 1-128 SM

UP Mode Settings for IEEE 1394
Go into the UP mode and do the procedure below to make the initial interface
settings for IEEE 1394. These settings are used each time that the machine is
turned on.
1. Push User Tools/Counter.
2. On the touch panel, push System Settings.
3. Push Interface Settings.

4. Push each key to input the following settings:
IP Address
Subnet Mask
IP Over 1394. Enable or disable this setting as necessary. This setting
enables IP Over 1394 as the default setting for the printing method.
SCSI Print. Enable or disable this setting as necessary. This setting
enables SCSI Print as the default setting for the printing method.
SCSI Print Bi-directional. Switch bi-directional printing on or off for SCSI
print.

Network Parallel Interface IEEE 1394 IEEE 802.1b
IP Address
Subnet Mask
IP Over 1394
SCSI Print
0000.0000.0000.0000
0000.0000.0000.0000
Enabled
Enabled
SCSI Print Bi-directional On
Select the desired settings.
System Intialization Settings End

B064I998.WMF
SM 1-129 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

SP Mode Settings for IEEE 1394
The following SP commands can be set for IEEE 1394.
To go into the SP mode:
2. On the operation panel keypad, push 107.
3. Hold down Clear/Stop # for more than 3 seconds.

5. Do the following settings in either User Tools or SP mode.

5839 004 Device Name Sets the names for all the physical devices connected to
the IEEE 1394 firewire network.
5839 007 Cycle Master Enables or disables cycle master function of the IEEE 1394
standard bus.
5839 008 BCR Mode Sets the BCR (Broadcast Channel Register) setting for the
Auto Node operation for the standard IEEE1394 bus for
when IRM is not in use. Three settings are available: 00,
01, 11.
5839 009 IRM 1394a Check Determines whether an IRM check for IEEE 1394 is
conducted for the Auto Node when IRM is not used.
5839 010 Unique ID Enables the Node_Unique_Id setting for enumeration on
the standard IEEE 1394 bus.
5839 011 Logout Determines how successive initiator login requests are
handled during login for SBP-2.
5839 012 Login Enables or disables exclusive login for SBP-2.
5839 013 Login MAX Sets the limit for the number of logins for SBP-2. Range: 1
~ 62.

Exit
SP2XXX
SP3XXX
SP5XXX
SP6XXX
SP7XXX
SP8XXX
SP4XXX
SP1XXX Group
Page
Line
Page
Line
Group
21
COPY: SP1-001-001
Initial 0
Prev Page Next Page
14APR 2002 03:25
Feed
Drum
Process
Data Log2
Scanner
Mode
Periphs
Data Log
B064I999.WMF
B132/B200 1-130 SM

1.16.9 BLUETOOTH INTERFACE UNIT B736-11
Accessories
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories.

No. Description Qty
1 Bluetooth card 1
2 Bluetooth card cover 1
3 Bluetooth board 1
Only one PCI slot is available for one of these options:
IEEE 801.11b (Wireless LAN)
IEEE 1394 (FireWire)
IEEE 1284
Bluetooth

SM 1-131 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

Installation Procedure

3. Put the interface board [B] in Slot D.
4. Check that the board is fully in the slot, then attach it (! x2).
5. Put the Bluetooth card [C] in the slot of the interface board.
6. Push the antenna cap [D] to extend it.
7. Attach the card cover [E] (used to prevent static electricity).

B737I104.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
B132/B200 1-132 SM

1.16.10 IEEE 802.11B INTERFACE UNIT G813-04, -05
Accessories

Description Qty
1. Wireless LAN PCB (GW-WLAN) ........................................... 1
2. Card (GW-WLAN) ................................................................. 1
3. Wireless LAN Instructions ..................................................... 1

SM 1-133 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

Installation

3. Put the interface board [B] in Slot D.
5. Remove the cap [C] and discard it.
6. Put the card [D] in the slot of the interface card.

B737I105.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
B132/B200 1-134 SM

UP Mode Settings for Wireless LAN
Enter the UP mode and follow the procedure below to perform the initial interface
settings for IEEE 802.11. These settings take effect every time the machine is
powered on.
NOTE: The wireless LAN cannot be used if Ethernet is being used.

1. Press the User Tools/Counter key.
2. On the touch panel, press System Settings.
NOTE: The Network I/F (default: Ethernet) must be set for either Ethernet or
wireless LAN.
3. Select Interface Settings ! Network (tab) ! Network I/F Settting
4. Select either Ethernet or IEEE 802.11b.
5. Press IEEE 802.11b. Only the wireless LAN options are displayed.

6. Transmission Mode. Select either Ad Hoc Mode or Infrastructure Mode.
7. SSID Setting. Enter the SSID setting. (The setting is case sensitive.)
8. Channel. This setting is required when Ad Hoc Mode is selected.
Range: 1 ~ 14 (default: 11)
NOTE: The allowed range for the channel settings may vary for different
countries.
9. WEP (Privacy) Setting. The WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) setting is
designed to protect wireless data transmission. In order to unlock encoded
data, the same WEP key is required on the receiving side. There are 64 bit and
128 bit WEP keys.

Range of Allowed Settings:
64 bit 10 characters
128 bit 26 characters
Network Parallel Interface IEEE 1394 IEEE 802.1b
Transmission Speed
SSID Setting
Channel
WEP (Privacy) Setting
802.11 Ad Hoc Mode
ASSID
11
Disabled
Select the desired settings.
System Intialization Settings End
Bandwidth Status
Next Previous 1/2

B064I997.WMF
SM 1-135 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

10. Bandwidth Status. This setting is enabled only for the Infrastructure Mode.
Press here to display the current status of the bandwidth. One of the following
is displayed to reflect the reception status of the wireless LAN:

Good 76 ~ 100%
Fair 41 ~ 75%
Poor 21 ~ 40%
Unavailable 0 ~ 20%
11. Transmission Speed. Press the Next button to display more settings, then
select the transmission speed for the mode: Auto, 11 Mbps, 5.5 Mbps, 2 Mbps,
1 Mbps (default: Auto). This setting should match the distance between the
closest machine or access point, depending on which mode is selected.
NOTE: For the Ad Hoc Mode, this is the distance between the machine and
the closest PC in the network. For the Infrastructure Mode, this is the
distance between the machine and the closest access point.

11 Mbps 140 m (153 yd.)
5.5 Mbps 200 m (219 yd.)
2 Mbps 270 m (295 yd.)
1 Mbps 400 m (437 yd.)
12. To initialize the wireless LAN settings, use page 2/2. Press Execute to initialize
the following settings:
Transmission mode
Channel
Transmission Speed
WEP
SSID
WEP Key

B132/B200 1-136 SM

SP Mode Settings for 802.11b Wireless LAN
The following SP commands can be set for 802.11b
2. On the operation panel keypad, push 107.
3. Hold down Clear/Stop # for more than 3 seconds.

5. Input 5840.

5840 004 SSID Used to confirm the current SSID setting.
5840 006 Channel MAX Sets the maximum range of the channel settings for the
country.
5840 007 Channel MIN Sets the minimum range of the channels settings allowed
for your country.
5840 010 WEP Key Used to confirm the current WEP key setting.
5840 011 WEP Key Select Used to select the WEP key (Default: 00).
5840 020 WEP Mode Used to display the maximum length of the string that can
be used for the WEP Key entry.

Exit
SP2XXX
SP3XXX
SP5XXX
SP6XXX
SP7XXX
SP8XXX
SP4XXX
SP1XXX Group
Page
Line
Page
Line
Group
21
COPY: SP1-001-001
Initial 0
Prev Page Next Page
14APR 2002 03:25
Feed
Drum
Process
Data Log2
Scanner
Mode
Periphs
Data Log
B064I999.WMF
SM 1-137 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

1.16.11 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER B609
Accessory Check
Check the accessories and their quantities against this list:

Description Qty
1. File Format Converter (MLB: Media Link Board) ................... 1

Installation
1. Remove the I/F cover slot [A] of Slot A (! x2).
3. Put the interface board [B] in Slot A.

B737I108.WMF
[A]
[B]
B132/B200 1-138 SM

1.16.12 POSTSCRIPT3 B761

1. Remove the slot cover [A].
2. Put the PostScript3 SD card [B] in SD card slot 2 (middle slot).
Important
Only one SD card slot is available for applications.
If the customer wants to use one more application that must go in slot 2
(Printer/Scanner B737, for example), you must copy the contents of the
printer/scanner SD card to the PostScript3 SD card. (%1.16.5)
The scanner/printer application must be copied to the PostScript3 SD card,
because the PostScript3 SD card cannot be copied for copyright reasons.
After you copy the printer/scanner SD card, store it behind the door.
(%Pg.1-121) The application SD cards are the property of the customer and
should remain at the site.

B132I909.WMF
[A]
[B]
SM 1-139 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n
1.16.13 DOS UNIT TYPE C (B735)
BEFORE YOU BEGIN THE PROCEDURE

1. Make sure that the following settings are not at their factory default values:
Supervisor login password
Administrator login name
Administrator login password

If any of these settings is at a factory default value, tell the customer these settings
must be changed before you do the installation procedure.

IMPORTANT NOTE
If the Customer forgets the Supervisor login password after changing it
from the default setting, a service call is required and the NVRAM must be
replaced to reset the Supervisor login and password.

2. Make sure that Admin. Authentication Machine Management is ON.
[System Settings] [Administrator Tools] [Administrator Authentication
Management] - [Machine Management]

If this setting is OFF, tell the customer this setting must be ON before you do the
installation procedure.

3. Make sure that under Machine Management Administrator Tools is enabled
(selected).
[System Settings] [Administrator Tools] [Administrator Authentication
Management] [Machine Management] - [Available Settings]

If this setting is disabled (not selected), tell the customer this setting must be
enabled (selected) before you do the installation procedure.

ACCESSORY CHECK
The B132/B200 uses a Type C Data Overwrite Security Unit. Check the
accessories and their quantities against this list:

Description Qty
1. SD Card ............................................................................... 1
Rev. 06/2006

B132/B200 1-140 SM

1.16.1 SEAL CHECK AND REMOVAL

1. Ensure a customer witness is present when opening the DOSS option.
2. Make sure that:
1) The box has two pieces of tape [A] attached to the corners in the photo,
AND
2) These two tapes are blank.
If you can see VOID on the surface of the tape, DO NOT install the
components in the box. Stop this procedure and contact the Technical Hotline
via the e-Lert form on the TSC Website. Retain the box and its contents. Any
tampering of the DOSS option will need to be investigated.

3. If the results of Step 1 are OK, remove the two pieces of tape from the box.
Note: After you remove the tapes, you will see VOID written on the box under
the tape [B]. This is normal.
4. The procedures outline in this bulletin needs to be followed if the DOSS option
is replaced due to a failure.

CAUTION
Before you begin any procedure, always turn OFF the machine main power
switch and unplug the power cord.

B735I901.WMF

B735I903.WMF
[B]
[A]
Rev. 06/2006

SM 1-141 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

Installation Procedure
1. If the machine is ON, turn the
operation switch and the main power
switch OFF.
2. If the NIB is installed, disconnect the
network cable.
3. Remove the SD card slot cover [A]
(x1).
4. With the printed side of the SD card [B]
facing the rear of the machine, install
the DOS SD card in SD card slot 2.
5. If the NIB is installed, reconnect the
network cable.
6. Turn the main power switch ON.
7. Do SP5878 (Option Setup).
8. Exit SP mode.
9. Turn the operation switch OFF, and
then turn the main power switch OFF.
10. Turn the main power switch ON.
11. Do SP5990-005 (SP print mode Diagnostic Report).
12. Make sure the ROM number and firmware version on the diagnostic report are
the same as those in the chart below .
[A]: ROM Number/Firmware Version HDD Format Option
[B]: Loading Program GW1a_zoffy (Data Overwrite Security Unit Type C)
Loading Program GW2a_zoffy (Data Overwrite Security Unit Type D)
Diagnostic Report: ROM No. / Firmware
Version [A]
Loading Program [B]
Data Overwrite Security
Unit Type C
HDD Format Option:
B7355050 / 0.04
GW1a_zoffy:
B7355050 / 0.04
Data Overwrite Security
Unit Type D
HDD Format Option:
B7355060 / 0.03
GW2a_zoffy:
B7355060 / 0.03

B132I909.WMF
[A]
[B]
Rev. 06/2006

B132/B200 1-142 SM
The ROM number and firmware version number change when the firmware is
upgraded.

If the ROM numbers are not the same, or the version numbers are not the same,
this means the unit was not installed correctly.

If this happens:
Make sure the MFP model and unit type match (Type C or D).
The B132/B200 uses a Data Overwrite Security Unit Type C.
If they do not match:
1) Do the installation procedure again, from Step 1.
2) Replace the Data Overwrite Security Unit (SD card) with the correct
type. Redo installation procedure.
3) Replace the NV-RAM. Redo installation procedure.

13. Turn Auto Erase Memory Setting ON:
User Tools >>System Settings >>Administrator Tools >>Auto Erase Memory
Setting >>ON
If the customer has enabled Administrator Authentication Management -
Machine Management they will have to log in to change this User Tool
setting.
14. Exit User Tools.
15. Power the machine OFF/ON.

16. Make sure the overwrite erase icon [A] is displayed on the operation panel.
If it is not displayed, do Step 7 again.
17. Make a sample copy.
18. Make sure the overwrite icon changes as follows:
The bottom of the icon (white part) becomes thicker [B].
Next Copy is displayed for a short time under the icon.
The icon returns to its usual shape [C].

[B]
[C]
Copies Total Origi.
0 1 0
09/09/2003 14:13
[A]
Rev. 06/2006
SM 1-143 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

1.16.14 COPIER CONNECTION KIT B328

1. Turn the machine off and unplug the machine before starting the following
procedure.
2. Remove the cover [A] of Slot B (! x 2).
3. Install the Copier Connection Kit Board B328 [B] in Slot B and attach it with the
screws.
4. Remove the rear upper cover. (%See 3.3.6)

B737I904.WMF
[A]
[B]
B132/B200 1-144 SM

5. Remove the controller box cover [C] (! x3).
6. Connect the power repeater cable [B] to:
$ CN594
& CN4
7. Reattach the controller box cover and rear upper cover.
8. Repeat Steps 1 to 7 to install the connection kit on the second machine.
9. Insert the end of the interface cable [C] to the connection PCB.
10. If additional cable is required, connect the cables [E] with repeater hubs [D].
11. On the operation panel of each machine, remove the second cover [F] from the
bottom ("Printer").
12. Install the appropriate key on each machine.
Attach the "Printer/Other Function" key [G] (or its equivalent symbol for EU) if
the printer/scanner option is installed.
-or-
Attach the "Other Function" key [G] (or its equivalent symbol for EU) if the
printer/scanner option is not installed.
13. Attach the other end of the connection cable to the connection PCB installed in
the other machine.

B737I112A.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
$
&
SM 1-145 B132/B200
I
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n

1.16.15 EFI V G815 EXTERNAL CONTROLLER

1. Turn the machine off.
2. Remove the cover [A] of Slot C (! x 2).
3. Install the EFI-V G815 board [B] in Slot C and attach it with the screws.

B737I905.WMF
[A]
[B]

OVERVIEW
SM 2-1 B132/B200
P
r
e
v
e
n
t
i
v
e

M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e

2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
2.1 OVERVIEW
The amounts mentioned (K=1,000) as the PM interval indicate the number of prints
or copies unless stated otherwise. These numbers are based on the PM counter.
Required Materials

Item No.
Optical Cloth A0129111
Alcohol ---
Exposure Glass Cleaner A1939310
Lubricant Powder B1329700

Important
The Lubricant Powder (B1329700) (composed of Zinc Stearate) is specially
designed for this machine (B132/B181/B200). If this lubricant powder is not
available, please use this machines yellow toner.
Always use this lubricant powder to lubricate the drum and ITB during servicing.
Never use the previous Setting Powder (54429101) in any service procedure for
the B132/B181/B200. The composition of this Setting Powder and the Lubricant
Powder is completely different.
If you use Setting Powder (5442910) to service this machine, you will damage
the drum charge roller and cause problems with image quality.

!WARNING
Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before performing
any procedure in this section. Laser beams can seriously damage the eyes.

Important!
DO THE FORCED MUSIC ADJUSTMENT WITH SP 2111 001 (! 3.19.4).

PM COUNTER
B132/B200 2-2 SM

2.2 PM COUNTER
The PM Counter main menu and submenu allows you to review the PM counts for
both units and individual components.
2.2.1 DISPLAYING THE PM COUNTER
1. Push [Clear Modes] (!)> "107"> [Clear/Stop] (").

2. Touch [PM Counter].

"
All PM Parts List. Displays all PM items (all PM items, not only PM units). Lists all PM
items regardless of PM yield indicator settings. (!Pg.2-4)
#
Parts list for PM yield indicator. Displays on the items with their PM yield indicator
settings set to "Yes". (!Pg.2-4)
$
Clear all PM settings. Resets all PM counter settings to "0" at the same time. PM
items can be reset one by one with the [Clear] button. (!Pg.2-4)
%
Counter list print out. Prints the PM counter on paper.

B132P901.BMP
B132P902.BMP
"
# $
%
PM COUNTER
SM 2-3 B132/B200
P
r
e
v
e
n
t
i
v
e

M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e

2.2.2 PM PARTS SCREEN DETAILS
All PM Parts list: Main Menu
The "All PM Parts list" displays all PM units and individual items. This list shows all
PM items, regardless of their "PM yield indicator settings". (!Pg.2-4)

[A]: Number buttons. Pressing a number button opens a submenu. (!Pg.2-4)
[B]: Descriptions. The # mark denotes a "unit" (not individual item).
[C]: PM yield buttons. Function is the same as the "PM yield indicator settings"
button. (!Pg.2-4).
[D]: Current PM counter value.
[E]: Target PM interval. This can be changed by pressing a number button [A].
[F]: PM counter clear button. Function is the same as the [Clear current counter]
button.

B132P903.BMP
[A] [B] [C] [D] [E] [F]
PM COUNTER
B132/B200 2-4 SM

Number button submenu
Press any number button to open the submenu for a part. In the example below,
the number button [001] #K:PCU was pressed.

[A]: Clear current counter. Press to reset the selected PM counter (in this
example 001 #K:PCU) to "0". You can also clear the settings by pressing the
[Clear] button on the right side of the PM Counter Main Menu ([F] on the
previous page).
[B]: Change target yield. Press the change the target PM yield. To change the
setting:
Press [Change target yield]
Enter the number for the new target with the 10-key pad.
Press [#] on the operation panel.
[C]: PM yield indicator settings. [Yes] is the default. Press [No] to remove the
current item from the "Parts list for PM yield indicator".
When set to "Yes", items marked with the # mark (# = a unit) will not have
their individual items displayed automatically in the "Parts list for PM yield
indicator list".
When set to "No", items marked with the # mark (# = a unit) only the
individual components will appear in the list (the units will not appear).
[D]: PM counter history. This is a summary of the most recent counts
Latest 1. The latest PM count since the unit (or part) was replaced.
Latest 2. The previous PM count since the unit (or part) was replaced.
Latest 3. The previous but one PM count since the unit (or part) was
replaced.

B132P904.BMP
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
PM COUNTER
SM 2-5 B132/B200
P
r
e
v
e
n
t
i
v
e

M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e

Parts list for PM yield indicator
This list shows the PM Parts Main Menu with only items set to "Yes" displayed.

Note the following:
The # mark denotes a unit.
Items without the # (065 ITB) denote individual components.
An asterisk & will appear in the Exceed column [A] to show items that that have
exceeded their target PM yields.

B132P905.BMP
[A]
PM TABLES
B132/B200 2-6 SM

2.3 PM TABLES
2.3.1 MAIN MACHINE
Symbol Key for PM Tables
I: Inspect. Clean, replace, or lubricate as needed.
C: Cleaning required.
R: Replacement required.
L: Lubrication required.
Silicone Grease 501 (52039502)

Grease Barrierta S552R (A2579300)

Grease KS660 SHIN-ETSU

Heat Resisting Grease MT-78

Launa Oil 40
Copier PM Parts
150K 300K 600K EM Note
OPTICS
Reflector C Optical cloth
1st Mirror C Optical cloth
2nd Mirror C Optical cloth
3rd Mirror C Optical cloth
Scanner Rails C Alcohol then dry cloth
Exposure Glass C Exposure glass cleaner
Toner Shield Glass C Optical cloth
APS Sensor C Dry cloth
ARDF Exposure Glass C Exposure glass cleaner
Dust Filters C Blow brush

PM TABLES
SM 2-7 B132/B200
P
r
e
v
e
n
t
i
v
e

M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e

PCU
Charge Roller Unit R
Drum Cleaning Blade R
Lubricant Bar R
Lubricant Brush R PCU Cleaning Unit
(!3.5.5)
Toner Brush R PCU Cleaning Unit
(!3.5.5)
PCU Coupler R PCU Cleaning Unit
(!3.5.5)
Quenching LED C C C
Potential Sensor C C C Blower brush.
Note: Never use a vacuum
cleaner around this sensor.
Developer K R
Developer Y, M, C R
Development Roller Gear C Service Life: 1200K
Blower brush
Development Roller Idle
Gear
R Service Life: 600K
Blower brush (!3.5.2)
Development Unit C Service Life: 3000K
Blower brush, dry cloth

TONER SUPPLY
Toner Supply Unit C Blower brush, dry cloth

TRANSFER UNIT
ITB R
ITB Internal Rollers C Dry cloth
ITB Encoder Sensor C Alcohol then dry cloth
ID and MUSIC Sensors C Alcohol then dry cloth
ITB Cleaning Roller R
ITB Cleaning Scraper Blade R
ITB Cleaning Blade R

PTR UNIT
Paper Transfer Cleaning
Blade
R
Paper Transfer Cleaning
Brush Roller
R
Paper Transfer Lubricant Bar R
Paper Transfer Discharge
Plate
R
PTR (Paper Transfer Roller) R

PM TABLES
B132/B200 2-8 SM

FUSING UNIT
Fusing Belt R
Hot Roller R
Pressure Roller R
Hot Roller Cleaning Roller R
Pressure Roller Cleaning Felt Roller R (!3.9.9)
Oil Supply Roller R
Heating Roller C, L
Heating Roller Shaft Bearings Service Life: 1200K
Hot Roller Shaft Bearings C, L Service Life: 1200K
Pressure Roller Shaft Bearings R
Hot Roller Cleaning Roller Shaft Bearings C, L Service Life: 1200K
Stripper Pawls (Hot Roller/Pressure
Roller)
C, L Dry Cloth
Thermistors C

OTHER
Circuit Breaker Check the operation
one a year.
Dust Filters R
Ozone Filters Service Life: 1200K
Waste toner bottle IR IR IR Empty and clean
every inspection.

PAPER FEED (Copier)
Registration Rollers C Alcohol, dry cloth
Paper Dust Removal Unit C Dry cloth
Registration Sensor C Blower brush
Vertical Transport Roller
Sensors
C Blower brush
LCT Relay Sensor C Blower brush
Bypass Feed Sensor C Blower brush
Bypass Paper End Sensor C Blower brush
Double-Feed Sensor 1
(Receptor)
C Blower brush
Double-Feed Sensor 2 (LED) C Blower brush

Rev. 04/2006
"
PM TABLES
SM 2-9 B132/B200
P
r
e
v
e
n
t
i
v
e

M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e

PAPER FEED (Trays)
Feed Guide Plate C Dry cloth
Grip Rollers (Drive & Idle) C Alcohol, dry cloth
Pick-up Rollers (Tray 1 to Tray 3)
Paper Feed Rollers (Tray 1 to Tray
3)

Separation Rollers (Tray 1 to Tray 3)
Service Life: 1000K
Replace if jams,
double-feeds occur
with increasing
frequency.
Grip Roller (Drive Roller) C Dry cloth
Paper Feed Sensor C Blower brush
Vertical Feed Sensors C Blower brush
Paper-End Sensor C Blower brush

DUPLEX UNIT
Inverter Roller C Blower brush
Reverse Rollers (Drive & Idle) C Alcohol, dry cloth
Duplex Rollers C Dry cloth
Transport Rollers (x4) C Dry cloth
Duplex Entrance Anti-Static Brush C Dry cloth
Inverter Junction Gate C Dry cloth
Inverter Roller C Dry cloth

PAPER EXIT
Heat Dissipation Roller C Alcohol, dry cloth
Exit Anti-Static Brush C Inspect, replace if
deformed.
Paper Exit Rollers (Upper, Lower) C Alcohol, dry cloth
Paper Exit Sensor C Blower brush
Transport Rollers C Blower brush

PM TABLES
B132/B200 2-10 SM

ARDF PM Parts
NOTE: The "K" number in the table below is the number of originals that have
been fed.

Every PM
Visit
Every
120K
EM Note
External Covers I, C
Feed Belt C R R
Pick-up Roller C R R
Separation Roller C R R
Alcohol or water, dry
cloth
Original Length Sensors
Skew Correction Sensor
Interval Sensor
Registration Sensor
Paper Exit Sensor
Lower Inverter Sensor
Separation Sensor
Upper Inverter Sensor

C

C
Blower brush
White Cover C C
Transport Belt C R C
cloth
Feed Drive Gears L G501 Grease
Grip Roller C
Transport Rollers C
Scanner Rollers (Entrance/Exit) C
Exit Rollers C
Inverter Rollers (Lower, Exit,
Upper)
C
Idle Rollers C
cloth

PM TABLES
SM 2-11 B132/B200
P
r
e
v
e
n
t
i
v
e

M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e

2.3.2 2000/3000-SHEET BOOKLET FINISHER B700/B701
300K 2400K 3000K 4000K EM Note
FINISHER
Covers I,C Alcohol or water, dry cloth
Drive Rollers C Damp cloth, dry cloth
Idle Rollers C Damp cloth, dry cloth
Anti-Static Brush C Dry cloth
Sensors C Blower brush
Corner Stapler R Print an SMC report with
SP5990. Replace the unit if
the staple count is 500K.
Booklet Stapler R Print an SMC report with
SP5990. Replace the unit if
the staple count is 200K.

2.3.3 PUNCH B702
PUNCH 300K 2400K 3000K 4000K EM
Punch Waste Hopper I I I I I Remove and empty
Punch Unit Replace after 1000k
punches.

2.3.4 3000-SHEET FINISHER B706
350K 700K 1050K Note
FINISHER
Driver rollers I I I
Idle rollers I I I
Discharge brush I I I
Alcohol
Shaft Bearings I I I Lubricate with silicone oil if noisy.
Sensors I I I Blower brush.
Jogger fences I I I Make sure that the screws are tight.
Staple waste hopper C C C Empty staple waste.

PUNCH B531/A821 EM 300K 450K 600K Note
Punch Waste Hopper I I I Remove and empty

PM TABLES
B132/B200 2-12 SM

2.3.5 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY B704
EM 60K 120K 180K Note
The PM interval is for the number of sheets that have been fed.
Feed Belt R R R
Pick-up Roller R R R
Separation Roller
R R R
Replace as a set.
Driver Rollers C C C
Idle Rollers C C C
Discharge Brush C C C
Damp clean cloth.
Sensors C C C Blower brush.

2.3.6 LCT B473
1000K 2000K 3000K Expected Note
Paper feed roller R R R
Pick-up roller R R R
Separation roller R R R
Transport guide plate
Grip roller
Inspect and clean every 350K.

LUBRICATION POINTS
SM 2-13 B132/B200
P
r
e
v
e
n
t
i
v
e

M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e

2.4 LUBRICATION POINTS
2.4.1 COPIER
OPC, ITB Replacement

Be sure to apply Lubricant Powder B1329700 when re-installing the drum[A] or
ITB [B].
For more, please refer to section "3. Replacement and Adjustment".

B023R960.WMF

B132R319.WMF
[A]
[B]
LUBRICATION POINTS
B132/B200 2-14 SM

Fusing Unit

Part Name Lubricant Comment
[A] Hot Roller Drive Gear
[B] Exit Idle Gear
[C] Upper Gear
[D] Lower Gear
Barrierta S552R Brush all gear teeth
[E] Bearing Race 20 x 32 x 7 Barrierta S552R
[F] Hot Roller Sleeve
[G] Bearing Race 25 x 37 x 7
[H] Hot Roller Sleeve
[I] Bearing Race
Be sure to brush both ends.

B132P906.WMF

B132P907.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C
[H]
[G]
[I
[G]
[I
[D
[E]
[F]

GENERAL CAUTIONS
SM 3-1 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
3.1 GENERAL CAUTIONS
Never switch off either power switch while any of the electrical components are
operating. Doing so might cause damage to units such as the transfer belt, drum,
and development unit when they are pulled out of or put back into the copier.

3.1.1 DRUM
An organic photoconductor (OPC) drums are more sensitive to light and ammonia
gas than a selenium drum. Follow the cautions below when handling an OPC
drum.
1. When a PCU unit is removed from the machine, always place it on the PCU
stand provided with the machine.
2. Never expose a drum to direct sunlight.
3. Never expose a drum to direct light of more than 1,000 Lux for more than a
minute.
4. Never touch a drum surface with bare hands. If the drum surface is touched
with a finger or becomes dirty, wipe it with a dry cloth or clean it with wet cotton.
Wipe with a dry cloth after cleaning with wet cotton.
5. Never use alcohol to clean the drum (alcohol dissolves the drum surface).
6. Store drums in a cool, dry place away from heat.
7. Take care not to scratch the drum as the drum layer is thin and is easily
damaged.
8. Never expose a drum to corrosive gases such as ammonia gas.
9. Dispose of used drums in accordance with local regulations.

3.1.2 PCU UNIT
1. The PCU stand is stored in a rack attached to the bottom of the machine with
strong magnets.
2. Before pulling a PCU unit out of the machine, spread some clean paper to
catch spilt toner, remove the PCU stand from the bottom of the machine, clean
it with a clean cloth, and then set the PCU stand on the paper to hold the PCU
as soon as it is removed from the machine.
3. To prevent drum scratches, always set the PCU on the stand and leave it there
as long as it is out of the machine.
4. Remove only one PCU at a time for servicing. Only one PCU stand is provided
with the machine.

GENERAL CAUTIONS
B132/B200 3-2 SM

3.1.3 TRANSFER BELT UNIT
1. Never touch the transfer belt surface with bare hands.
2. Take care not to scratch the transfer belt, as the surface is easily damaged.
3. Before installing a new transfer belt, clean all the rollers and the inner part of
the transfer belt with a dry cloth to prevent the belt from slipping.

3.1.4 SCANNER UNIT
1. When installing a new exposure glass, make sure that the white paint mark is
at the rear left corner.
2. Clean the exposure glass with alcohol or glass cleaner to reduce the amount of
static electricity on the glass surface.
3. Use a cotton pad with water or a blower brush to clean the mirrors and lenses.
4. Never bend or crease the exposure lamp cables.
5. Never disassemble the lens unit. Doing so will throw the lens and the copy
image out of focus.
6. Never adjust any CCD positioning screw. Doing so will throw the CCD out of
position.

3.1.5 LASER UNIT
1. Never loosen the screws that secure the LD drive board to the laser diode
casing. Doing so would throw the LD unit out of adjustment.
2. Never adjust the variable resistors on the LD unit, as they are adjusted in the
factory.
3. Never open the optical housing unit. The polygon mirror and lenses are
sensitive to dust.
4. Never touch the glass surface of the polygon mirror motor unit with bare hands.

GENERAL CAUTIONS
SM 3-3 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.1.6 DEVELOPMENT
1. Avoid nicking or scratching the development roller.
2. Place a development unit on a sheet of paper after removing it from a PCU.
3. Always clean the drive gears after removing used developer.
4. Always dispose of used developer in accordance with local regulations.
5. Never load types of developer and toner into the development unit other than
specified for this model. Doing so will cause poor copy quality and toner
scattering.
6. Immediately after installing new developer during the machine installation
procedure, do SP3811 001.
7. Immediately after replacing the developer, see section 3.5.7 for the correct SPs
to do.
8. Never do SP 3801 or 3811 with used developer.
9. When using a vacuum cleaner to clean the development unit casing, always
ground the casing with your fingers to avoid damaging the toner density sensor
with static electricity.
10. After replacing the TD sensor:
Replace the developer in the PCU where the TD sensor was replaced.
Then do SP3801 001~006 only for the PCU where the TD sensor was
replaced.

Very Important:
After you replace developer (only initialize the TD sensor for the colour that you
replaced)
If you do not obey the above instructions, you will get toner scattering inside the
machine.

GENERAL CAUTIONS
B132/B200 3-4 SM

3.1.7 CLEANING
1. When servicing cleaning components, avoid nicking the edges of the cleaning
blades.
2. Never handle a cleaning blade with bare hands.
3. Before disassembling a cleaning section, place a sheet of paper under it to
catch any toner falling.

3.1.8 FUSING UNIT
1. Never handle fusing lamps and rollers with bare hands.
2. Make sure that the fusing lamps are positioned correctly and do not touch the
inner surface of the rollers.

3.1.9 PAPER FEED
1. Do not touch the surfaces of the pick-up, feed, and separation rollers.
2. To avoid paper misfeeds, the side fences and end fence of the paper trays
must be positioned correctly to align with the actual paper size.

3.1.10 USED TONER
1. We recommend checking the amount of used toner at every EM.
2. Always dispose of used toner in accordance with local regulations.
3. Never throw toner into an open flame.

COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES
SM 3-5 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.2 COMMON REMOVAL PROCEDURES
3.2.1 ARDF

1. Raise the ARDF [A] to the vertical position.
2. At the rear, left corner of the machine, disconnect the ARDF cable.
3. Remove the left screw [B] and right screw [C].
4. Slide the ARDF back until the heads of the screws are in the large end of the
keyholes, then lift the ARDF off the machine.

!CAUTION
The ARDF is very heavy. Remove it carefully.

B132R101.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
B132/B200 3-6 SM

3.2.2 OPERATION PANEL, TOP COVERS

Remove the ARDF (! x1, " x2).
Open the front door.
Remove:
[A]: Operation panel (! x1, " x2)
[B]: Top rear cover (" x2)
[C]: Left top cover (" x1)
[D]: Right top cover (" x1)

B132R701.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
SM 3-7 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.2.3 LEFT COVERS

If a finisher is connected, disconnect it. Then remove the front and back finisher
connection brackets.
Remove:
[A]: Left upper cover (" x2)
[B]: Left lower cover (" x5)
Reinstallation
Make sure all the cover tabs are inserted correctly before you fasten the screws.

B132R702.WMF
[A]
[B]
B132/B200 3-8 SM

3.2.4 FRONT DOOR

1. Grip the front door [A] with one hand.
2. Press down the hinge bracket [B].
3. Lift the front door slightly to remove it.

Important: If you must replace the front door, make sure that you put the SD cards
from the storage location in the old front door into the storage location in the new
front door. (! 3.2.12)

B132R703.WMF
[A]
[B]
SM 3-9 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.2.5 RIGHT COVERS

Remove:
Disconnect and separate the LCT if it is installed.
[A]: Knockout (" x2). This has been removed already if the LCT has been
installed.
[B]: Open the bypass tray.
[C]: Right upper cover (" x2). Pull the bottom of the cover down and toward you
as you remove it.
[D]: Right lower cover (" x5). Pull the bottom of the cover down and toward you as
you remove it.
Reinstallation
Make sure all the cover tabs are inserted correctly before you fasten the screws.

B132R704.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
B132/B200 3-10 SM

3.2.6 REAR COVERS

Remove:
[A]: ARDF connector (! x1)
[B]: Rear upper cover (" x3)
[C]: Rear lower cover (" x2)
Remove the bottom screws
Do not remove the shoulder screws.

B132R705.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
SM 3-11 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.2.7 TONER HOPPER, FACEPLATE, PCU
Removing Hopper, Faceplate, PCU

Important: To avoid damaging the toner end sensor, make sure that the main
power switch is turned off and that the power cord is disconnected from the power
source before you remove the hopper.
To remove the hopper:
1. Prepare an open space on the floor for the hopper.
2. Remove the screws of the toner hopper [A] (" x3).
3. Place your hands under the left and right corners of the toner hopper and
slowly pull it out on its rails until it stops.
IMPORTANT: THE HOPPER CAN EASILY SLIP OFF ITS RAILS.
4. Press the release [B] to drop the support leg [C].
5. Confirm that the support leg is down and locked.
IMPORTANT: ALWAYS MAKE SURE THAT THE SUPPORT LEG IS DOWN AND LOCKED
BEFORE YOU REMOVE THE HOPPER.
6. Lift the toner hopper off its rails and set it on the floor.

!CAUTION
The hopper is heavy! Lift it carefully, make sure that it disengages
completely from the rails on the left and right, and then set it on
the floor.

7. Push the hopper rails into the machine.

B132I006A.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
B132/B200 3-12 SM

To remove the faceplate

8. Rotate the transfer belt release lever [A] counter-clockwise until it stops
9. Disconnect the fan connector [B].
10. Remove the face plate [C] (" x5).
11. Place the PCU stand [D] on a flat surface.
NOTE: The PCU stand is mounted on a rack attached to the bottom of the
copier with magnets.
12. Wipe the surface of the stand with a clean cloth to remove dust.

B132R201.WMF

B132I902.WMF
[D]
[A]
[B]
[C]
SM 3-13 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

To remove a PCU

Important: To prevent damage to the drum potential sensor and its relay board,
always make sure that the machine is turned off and that the power cord is
disconnected from the power source before you remove a PCU.
13. While pressing down the release tab [A] above the PCU, pull the PCU [B] out of
the machine.

B132R202A.WMF
[A]
[B]
B132/B200 3-14 SM

IMPORTANT
THE OPC DRUM IS EXPOSED ON THE BOTTOM OF THE PCU.
NEVER PLACE YOUR HAND UNDER THE PCU.
NEVER PLACE THE PCU ON ANY SURFACE OTHER THAN THE PCU STAND.
14. Set the PCU [A] on the PCU stand [B].
NOTE: In the diagram, F is the front, and R is the rear.

F
R

B132R214.WMF
[A]
[B]
SM 3-15 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

Reinstalling PCU, Faceplate, Toner Hopper
To reinstall a PCU:

1. Hold the PCU [A] in front of the slot where you removed it
2. Engage the rails [B] with the slots in the sides of the PCU.
3. Slowly push the PCU into the slot. Make sure the
release tab [C] above the PCU is locked.
NOTE: If the PCU does not go in smoothly, make
sure the rails [B] and grooves are
engaged correctly.

Important!
If you have replaced a developer
cartridge in a PCU, be sure to remove
the film seals [D] of every replaced
developer cartridge after you reinstall it
in the machine.
To release the developer into the PCU,
pull out the film seal [D].
NOTE: Put your other hand on the
PCU [E] to keep it stable it while you
pull on the film seal.

B132I114.WMF

B132I905.WMF

B132I101.WMF
[B]
[D]
[E]
[A]
[B]
B132/B200 3-16 SM

To reinstall the faceplate:
1. When you reattach the face plate [A] , fasten the screws in the order shown by
the numbers above (" x5).
Important: Do not over tighten these screws.
2. Rotate the transfer belt release lever [B] clockwise to lock it.
3. Reconnect the fan connector [C] (! x1).

1 4 2
5
3

B132I115.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
SM 3-17 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

To reinstall the hopper:
1. Confirm that the transfer belt release lever [A] is up and locked before you
reattach the hopper.
2. Make sure the hopper rails are fully extended, then set the toner hopper [B] on
the rails,
3. Make sure the steel tabs of the hopper are inserted into the holes on the left rail
[C] and right rail [D].
4. Push up the release [E] and support leg [F].
Important: Make sure that the support leg is up and locked before you push
the toner hopper into the machine.
5. Place your hands at the bottom of the toner hopper at " and # and then push
the hopper into the machine against the face plate.
Important: To avoid damaging the hopper, never press in on the top of the
toner hopper.
6. Make sure that the hopper is flat against the face plate on the right side.
NOTE: If the toner hopper [B] is not flat against the face plate on the right side,
pull it out slightly and make sure that the transfer belt release lever is
rotated up completely and locked.
7. Fasten the toner hopper to the face plate (" x3).

B132R908.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
"
#
[E]
[E]
B132/B200 3-18 SM

3.2.8 IMAGE TRANSFER UNIT

1. Cover the floor or a table with paper to prepare a place to put the image
transfer unit.
3. Remove the toner hopper then push the hopper rails into the machine.
(!3.2.7)
4. Rotate the transfer belt release lever [A] down to the left until it stops.
5. Remove the faceplate [B] (! x1, " x5).
6. Rotate the lever B2 [C] on the drawer unit counter-clockwise to separate the
transfer roller from the ITB.

B132R201.WMF [C]
[A]
[B]
SM 3-19 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

7. Slowly and carefully pull the image transfer unit [A] out of the machine.

Important!
Remove carefully. The ITB unit is
heavy and not attached to the rails
with screws.
To prevent toner scattering inside
and outside the unit, keep the unit
[B] flat when you remove it, lift it,
carry it, and put it down.
Never stand the ITB unit [C] on its
edge before you remove the
cleaning unit from the ITB (! 3.8.1).
Never place the ITB unit on a carpet
where toner may scatter or the unit
will collect dust.
Reinstallation
Re-insert the image transfer unit slowly and carefully to avoid snagging the belt
on the frame of the machine.
Make sure that the image transfer unit does not snag on the toner cap of the
yellow PCU on the far left.

1

B132R309.WMF

B132R309B.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
B132/B200 3-20 SM

3.2.9 DRAWER UNIT

To pull out the drawer unit:
1. Remove the front door. (!3.2.4)
2. Rotate the lever [A] down to left until it stops.
3. Grip the lever to pull the unit [B] out of the machine until it stops.

To remove the drawer unit:
4. Disconnect the left rail [C] (" x2).
5. Disconnect the right rail [D] (" x2).
6. Lift the unit off the rails.

!CAUTION
The drawer unit is very heavy (30 kg/66lb.). After removing it, push the rails
into the machine.

B132R900.WMF

B132R301.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
SM 3-21 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

To re-install the drawer unit

1. Remove the right upper cover and the left upper cover. (!3.2.3, 3.2.5,)
3. Pull out the left rail and right rail.
4. Set the unit on the rails.

!CAUTION
The drawer unit is very heavy (30 kg/66lb.). Make sure that hooks are
engaged with the holes on the rails.

5. Slowly push the unit into the machine until it stops.
6. Rotate the lever [A] to the vertical position.
7. Fasten the screws to the left rail [B] (" x2).
8. Fasten the screws to the right rail [C] (" x2).
Important! Make sure these screws are fastened and tight. This ensures that
the unit is positioned correctly.

B132R617.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
B132/B200 3-22 SM

3.2.10 DUPLEX UNIT

2. Pull the duplex unit [A] out until it stops.
3. Remove the Teflon ring [B] from the left, rear corner (# x1).
4. Remove the Teflon ring [C] from the right, rear corner (# x1).
5. Lift the duplex unit from the rails and place it on a flat, level surface.

B132R501.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
SM 3-23 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.2.11 OPENING AND LOCKING THE CONTROLLER BOX COVER

CAUTION: 1) Before you start this procedure, turn off the main power
switch and disconnect the power cord.
2) To prevent personal injury and damage to the controller box,
when the controller box is open, it should always be locked as
described below.
1. Remove the rear covers (!3.2.6)
2. Remove controller box screws " # $.
3. Open the controller box [A] to the left until it stops.
Important! Obey the warning on the decal to avoid touching the fan blades
when you open and close the controller box.
4. Remove the left screw [B] of the plastic stopper arm [C].
5. Rotate the plastic stopper counter-clockwise until it is aligned with the hole
below and its tip [D] is touching the machine frame.
6. Reattach the screw removed in Step 4 to lock the arm in position.

Reinstallation
Be sure to reattach the stopper arm at its original position before you close the
controller box.

B132R715.WMF
#
[A]
[B]
[C] [D]
$
"
B132/B200 3-24 SM

3.2.12 SD CARD STORAGE

2. Remove the cover [A] on the door (" x2).
3. Remove the block [B].
4. Store extra SD cards [C] inside the cover.
5. Reattach the cover to the machine
Important
When you replace the door, confirm whether SD cards are stored here.
Remove any SD cards and store them in the new door. These SD cards serve as
prove of purchase of MFP options by the customer.

B132R728.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
SCANNER UNIT
SM 3-25 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.3 SCANNER UNIT
3.3.1 EXPOSURE GLASS

Remove:
[A]: Rear scale (" x3)
[B]: Left glass cover (" x3)
[C]: Exposure glass

B132R128.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
SCANNER UNIT
B132/B200 3-26 SM

3.3.2 LENS BLOCK, PAPER SIZE SENSORS

Before you remove the lens block, note the settings of SP4800 001 to 003 (ARDF
density adjustments for R, G, B).
SP4800 001 DF Density Adj: R ARDF Density Adjustment - Red
SP4800 002 DF Density Adj: G ARDF Density Adjustment - Green
SP4800 003 DF Density Adj: B ARDF Density Adjustment - Blue
Remove:
Exposure glass. (!3.3.1)
[A]: Lens cover (" x8)
[B]: Lens block (" x4, ! x3)
Important: Remove the lens block carefully to avoid damaging the attached
PCB. Do not touch the paint-locked screws on the lens block.
[C]: Original width sensor (! x1, " x1)
[D]: Original length sensors x2 (! x1 each, " x1 each)

After replacing the lens block, do the following SP codes.

SP4008 001 Sub Scan Mag Sub Scan Magnification Adjustment
SP4010 001 Sub Scan Reg Sub Scan Registration Adjustment
SP4011 001 Main Scan Reg Main Scan Registration Adjustment
After lens block replacement, do some copy samples with the ARDF. Check these
points:
Do the copies have background?
Is the copy output of the ARDF and platen mode different?
If these problems occur, change SP4800 001 to 003 to their previous settings, or
adjust these SPs until the background is acceptable.

B132R130.WMF

B132R141.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
SCANNER UNIT
SM 3-27 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.3.3 EXPOSURE LAMP

Remove:
Exposure glass (!3.3.1)
Operation panel (!3.2.2)
1. Slide the 1st scanner [A] to the cutout in the frame.
2. Remove the exposure lamp [B] ($ x1, ! x1, " x1)

Important:
Never touch the surface of the exposure lamp with bare fingers.
Work carefully to avoid damaging the relay plugs attached to the rear ends of the
lamp.

B132R129.WMF
[A]
[B]
SCANNER UNIT
B132/B200 3-28 SM

3.3.4 SCANNER MOTOR

Remove:
[A]: Lens cover (" x4)
[B]: Right lens cover (" x3)
[C]: Top right cover (" x1)
[D]: Bracket (" x5)
[E]: Scanner motor (Timing belt x1, $ x1, ! x1, " x3)

B132R132A.WMF

B132R133.WMF
[E]
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
SCANNER UNIT
SM 3-29 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.3.5 SCANNER HP SENSOR

Remove:
ARDF (!3.2.1)
Top rear, left, right covers (!3.2.5)
[A]: Ground plate (" x1)
[B]: Left stay (" x3)
[C]: Right stay (" x5)
[D]: Rear stay (" x4)
[E]: Scanner HP sensor (! x1)

B132R134A.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
SCANNER UNIT
B132/B200 3-30 SM

3.3.6 SCANNER INTERFACE BOARD (SIOB)

Remove:
ARDF (!3.2.1)
Top, rear, left, right covers (!3.2.5)
Right stay, rear stay (!3.3.5)
Lens cover (!3.3.2)
[A]: Scanner interface board (! x6, " x2)

B132R133A.WMF
[A]
SCANNER UNIT
SM 3-31 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.3.7 SCANNER WIRE
Scanner Wire Removal

1. Remove wire ground % (" x1)
2. Disconnect the head of wire & from tension bracket 1.
3. Remove spring '.
4. Loosen the screw ( of tension bracket 1.
5. Disconnect the end of wire at ).
6. Remove lock bracket * of the 1st scanner (" x1).
7. Disconnect the wire from the pulley + (" x1).
8. Remove the wire from the scanner.

B132R137.WMF
)
*
+
SCANNER UNIT
B132/B200 3-32 SM

Scanner Wire Reinstallation and Scanner Position Adjustment

1. Place the beads [A] on the middle of the wire on the pulley openings.
2. Wind the ball end of the wire [B] 4 times.
3. Wind the other end of the wire [C] 5 times.
4. Attach tape [D] across the pulley to temporarily hold the wires in place.

5
4

B132R136.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
SCANNER UNIT
SM 3-33 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

5. Position the 1st scanner [A] so the holes are aligned and insert the positioning
pins [B] (x4).
6. Position the 2nd scanner [C] so its holes are aligned and insert the positioning
pins [D].
7. Attach the lock bracket [E] to fasten the wire to the 1st scanner.
8. Tighten the screw of tension bracket (!(,Pg. 3.3.7).
9. Attach the pulley and tighten it lock screw (!+,Pg. 3.3.7).
10. Remove the positioning pins (x4).
11. Remove the tape from the pulley.
12. Slowly push the scanner left and right to confirm that the wires are engaged
correctly. The 1st and 2nd scanners should move smoothly.

B132R138.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
LASER UNIT
B132/B200 3-34 SM
3.4 LASER UNIT

!WARNING
This laser unit employs two laser beams produced by a Class III LD with
a wavelength of 648 to 660 nm and intensity of 7 mW. Direct exposure to
the eyes could cause permanent blindness.
Before any performing any replacement or adjustment of the laser unit,
press the main power switch to power the machine off then unplug the
machine from the power source. Allow the machine to cool for a few
minutes. The polygon motor continues to rotate for approximately one to
three minutes.
Never power on the machine with any of these components removed: 1)
LD unit, 2) polygon motor cover, 3) synchronization detector.

3.4.1 CAUTION DECALS

B132R003.WMF

CDRHLBL
LASER UNIT
SM 3-35 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.4.2 POLYGON MOTOR

!WARNING
Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before performing
any procedure in this section. Laser beams can seriously damage the eyes.

Important!
An accidental static discharge could damage the laser diode board attached to
the lens block unit.
Touch a metal surface to discharge any static electricity from your hands.
The polygon motor rotates at extremely high speed and continues to rotate after
you switch the machine off. To avoid damaging the motor, never remove the
polygon motor within three minutes of switching off the main power and
disconnecting the power plug.

Remove:
Exposure glass (! 3.3.1)
Lens block (! 3.3.2)
[A]: Top cover (" x2)
[B]: Middle cover (" x2)
[C]: Polygon motor (" x3, ! x1, $ x1)
Important!
Do not attempt to remove the paint-lock screws on top of the lens block unit.
Do not touch the glass covers of the laser ports on the sides of the polygon
motor [C]

B132R131.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
LASER UNIT
B132/B200 3-36 SM

3.4.3 LASER UNIT

Remove:
[A]: ARDF (! x,1 " x2)
[B]: Left top cover (" x1)
[C]: Rear top cover (" x2)
[D]: Right top cover (" x1)
[E]: Operation panel (" x2, ! x1)

B132R101.WMF

B132R701.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
LASER UNIT
SM 3-37 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

Remove:
[A]: Left plate (" x4)
[B]: Right plate (" x4)
[C]: Ground wire (" x1)
[D]: Cross piece (" x4)
Before going to the next step,
disconnect the connector [*].
[E]: Detach the support rod from the
rubber clamps.
[F]: Raise the scanner unit. (" x 2)
[G]: Set the support rod at the base
% then under the front, right
corner & of the scanner unit.

!CAUTION
The scanner unit is very heavy. Never remove the support rod during
servicing.

Reinstallation
Be sure to reconnect ground wire [C].

B132R001.WMF
1
2

B132R002.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
[*]
LASER UNIT
B132/B200 3-38 SM

Remove:
[A]: Laser unit (" x4, ! x6)
NOTE: The laser unit includes four LD sub units. However, the LD sub units cannot
be replaced separately because factory adjustment is required.
Reinstallation
Make sure that the four tapes ", #, $, , are set correctly in the holes.
Be sure to reconnect the ground wire ([C] on the previous page).

B132R003.WMF
[A]
" # $ ,
LASER UNIT
SM 3-39 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

Adjustments After Laser Unit Replacement
SP Adjustments

1. SP codes are written on an A5 provided with the laser unit. These SP codes
must be done after the laser unit is replaced.
SP2154 001 (K)
SP2154 002 (M)
SP2154 003 (C)
SP2154 004 (Y)
Only the settings shown with the first barcode [A] (2-Point Target) are
necessary. The other information on the sheet can be ignored.
NOTE: Enter the values printed on the A5 sheet. Do not enter the values
shown in the sample above.
2. Make a test copy (!3.19.4)
Color Registration Errors
In addition to the SP adjustments printed on the seal attached to the LD unit, if
color registration errors occur immediately after you change the laser unit, an
additional adjustment is required.
This additional adjustment is normally not required in the field. Do it only if you
see color registration errors in test prints.
See Color Registration Test and Error Adjustment in section for instructions on
how to do this adjustment.
Skew
If skew occurs immediately after you change the laser unit, do the Skew
Adjustment in section 3.19.5.

B132R904.WMF
[A]
LASER UNIT
B132/B200 3-40 SM

3.4.4 LASER SYNCHRONIZATION DETECTOR

Remove:
[A]: Laser unit (!3.4.3)
[B]: Laser synchronization detector (" x2, ! x1)
NOTE: In the figure above, note the locations of the 8 laser synchronization
detectors (shown within the circles).

B132R004.WMF
[A]
[B]
PCU
SM 3-41 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.5 PCU
3.5.1 DEVELOPER REPLACEMENT

1. Spread some paper on a flat surface to hold developer that will be dumped
from the development unit.
2. Remove the toner hopper and faceplate. (!3.2.7)
3. Remove the PCU stand [A] from bottom of the machine.
4. From the bottom of the PCU stand, remove the long special tool [B] and gear
lock [C].
5. Lay the PCU stand [A] on a flat surface.
6. Remove the PCU. (!3.2.7)
7. Position the front and rear of the PCU [D] so it matches the F (front) and R
(rear) markings on the stand, then place the PCU on the stand.
Important:
The front-rear alignment aligns the shape of the stand with the contours of
the PCU bottom. This ensures that the exposed drum on the bottom of the
PCU is completely protected during servicing.

B132R220.WMF
F
R

B132R214.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[A]
[D]
PCU
B132/B200 3-42 SM

8. Remove the drum (! 3.5.4). Cover it with a sheet of A3/DLT paper to protect it
from light.
9. Vacuum inside the PCU.
NOTE: Do not vacuum around the brush roller (in the PCU cleaning unit) and
around the drum potential sensor.
10. On the front end of the PCU, remove the shaft cap [A] and lock plate [B] (" x 3).
Important:
After you remove the shaft cap, never turn the shaft [C] of the development
roller.
11. On the rear end of the PCU, remove the lock plate [D] (" x 4).
NOTE: The long screws for the plates [A], [B], and [D] have washers.
12. Remove the development unit [E] from the PCU.

B132R210.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
PCU
SM 3-43 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

13. Place the development unit [A] on a clean sheet of A3/DLT paper [B].
14. With a fingernail release the tabs [C] on the left.
15. Hold the development cartridge steady with one hand [D] as you remove the
old cartridge [E] from the development unit.
Important:
The development unit is top heavy, and it tips easily. Be sure to steady it with
one hand as you remove the old cartridge.
Discard the old cartridge. Please obey the local laws and regulations
regarding the disposal of such items.
The screws removed from the cartridge do not have washers. (Do not
confuse these screws for the plate screws that were removed in the previous
step.)

B132I105.WMF
[A]
[B]
[E]
[C]
[D]
PCU
B132/B200 3-44 SM

16. At the rear of the development unit, attach the lock gear [A] to the development
roller shaft.
17. At the front, attach the special tool [B].
Important
The D-shaped hole of the special tool [C] must fit over the D-shaped shaft tip
[D].
18. If the hole of the special tool and shaft are not aligned, rotate the D-shaped
shaft tip [D] in the direction of the arrow to position the shaft so the special tool
can be attached.
Important
Always rotate the shaft in the direction of the arrow [E]. To avoid damaging
the entrance seal, never rotate the lock gear in the opposite direction.

B132R219.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
PCU
SM 3-45 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

19. Place the development unit [A] inside
the disposal bag [B] provided.
20. Rotate the development unit down,
then rotate the lock gear [A] in the
direction of the arrow to dump the
developer/toner onto the paper.
Important
Rotate the lock gear in the direction
indicated by the arrow. To avoid
damaging the entrance seal, do not
rotate the lock gear in the opposite
direction.
21. After dumping as much developer as possible, vacuum the remaining
developer and toner.
Important: Be sure to vacuum completely, especially around the
development roller.
22. Remove the lock gear and long special tool from the PCU.
23. Shake the new developer cartridge [F] from side to side about 6 times.

B132R218.WMF

B132I105A.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
PCU
B132/B200 3-46 SM

24. Thread the film seal [A] through hole [B].
25. Slide the developer cartridge down [C] on the left so the holes and tabs [D] are
aligned.
26. Press in on the middle of the developer cartridge [E] to lock the tabs inside [F].
27. Press down on the left end [D] and right end [G] to lock the tabs.

B132I106.WMF

B132I106A.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
PCU
SM 3-47 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

28. Check the following to points to be sure that the developer cartridge is set
properly.
Tabs [A] and [B] should be locked.
The developer cartridge edge [C] should be flat and not bulging or floating
away from the side of the development unit
Pull gently on the developer cartridge at [D] to make sure that it does not
part from the development unit.
29. Attach the cartridge [E] (! x2).
IMPORTANT: DO NOT REMOVE THE FILM SEAL [F] ON THE DEVELOPER CARTRIDGE AT THIS
TIME.

B132I106B.WMF

B132I106C.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[F]
[E]
PCU
B132/B200 3-48 SM

30. Re-install the development unit in the PCU.
31. Reattach the small and large plate at the front and rear.
32. Push the PCU fully into the slot to reinstall it.
33. To release the developer in the PCU,
pull out the film seal [A].
NOTE: Place your other hand on the
PCU [B] to steady it while you pull on
the film seal.

Reinstallation
Important! YOU MUST DO SOME SPS, OR A FATAL ERROR WILL OCCUR. (!3.5.7)

B132I101.WMF
[A]
[B]
PCU
SM 3-49 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.5.2 DEVELOPMENT GEARS

PCU (!3.2.7)
Development unit (!3.5.1)
[A]: TD sensor connector (" x1; this is a tapping screw)
[B]: Development gear cover (" x1)
[C]: Development roller idle gear
[D]: Development roller gear (C-ring x1)

B132R225.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
PCU
B132/B200 3-50 SM

3.5.3 CHARGE ROLLER UNIT

Remove the PCU. (!3.2.7)
[A]: Charge roller unit (" x2).
This unit contains the charge roller
and charge roller cleaning roller

[B]: Weight
NOTE: The weight must be used
during the full service life of the
machine. Be sure to reinstall it.
[C]: Lubricant bar

B132R203.WMF

B132R224.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
PCU
SM 3-51 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.5.4 DRUM AND CLEANING BLADE

Removing the OPC Drum
Remove:
PCU (!3.2.7)
Charge roller unit (!3.5.3)
[A]: Rear bracket (" x1)
[B]: Front bracket (" x1)
[C]: Rotate the cleaning unit to the right 90 degrees.
[D]: OPC drum. Slide to the front to remove.
Important
Set the OPC drum on a clean piece of paper and cover it to protect it from light.
Always replace the drum and cleaning blade together.
Reinstallation
Do the forced MUSIC adjustment with SP 2111 001 (! 3.19.4).

B132R205.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
PCU
B132/B200 3-52 SM

Removing the Cleaning Blade
Remove:
PCU (!3.2.7)
Drum (!3.5.4)
Open the upper cover of the cleaning unit 90 degrees to the right.
[A]: Bracket
[B]: Cleaning blade (" x2)
Important
After you replace the cleaning blade, always coat the drum with Lubricant
Powder B1329700. (For more, see the next page.) This must be done even if the
drum is not replaced.

B132R206.WMF
[A]
[B]
PCU
SM 3-53 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

Reinstallation of the drum
To prevent scouring a new drum when the machine
is turned on, coat the new drum [A] with Lubricant
Powder (B1329700) before you install it.
Important
THE LUBRICANT POWDER (B1329700) (COMPOSED OF
ZINC STEARATE) IS SPECIALLY DESIGNED FOR THIS
MACHINE (B132/ B200).
NEVER USE SETTING POWDER (54429101) FOR THIS
MACHINE, OR YOU WILL DAMAGE THE DRUM CHARGE
ROLLER AND CAUSE PROBLEMS WITH IMAGE QUALITY.
YOU MUST DO SOME SPS, OR A FATAL ERROR WILL
OCCUR. (!3.5.7)

Reinstallation
Always reinstall the front end of the drum first.
Never rotate the drum after reinstalling it.
Always dust the drum before reinstallation after it was removed to replace or
service other parts in the PCU.

If the Lubricant Powder (B1329700) is not available
If the lubricant powder is not available, coat the drum with this models Yellow toner.
Important
NEVER USE THE YELLOW TONER OF ANOTHER MODEL.
NEVER USE TONER TAKEN FROM THE YELLOW PCU TONER SUPPLY PORT, BECAUSE THIS
TONER HAS DEVELOPER MIXED WITH IT.
To dust the drum with yellow toner:
1. Spread a small amount of fresh yellow toner on a clean sheet of paper.
2. Locate a clean, dry piece of cloth.
3. Touch the yellow toner with the surface of the cloth.
4. Dust the surface of the drum with the cloth until the entire surface is covered.

B023R960.WMF
[A]
PCU
B132/B200 3-54 SM

3.5.5 PCU CLEANING UNIT

Remove:
PCU (!3.2.7)
Drum (!3.5.4)
[A]: PCU Coupler
[B]: Rear bracket (" x1)
[C]: Long sleeve
[D]: Leaf spring
[E]: Short sleeve
[F]: Bracket and 2 gears (" x1)
[G]: Cleaning unit
When you remove the cleaning unit, the mylar can catch on the PCU frame
and will scatter toner. To prevent this, rotate " then lift #
The cleaning unit contains these PM parts: lubricant brush, toner brush.

2
1
B132R208.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
PCU
SM 3-55 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

Reinstallation
1. Install the new cleaning unit [A] in the PCU.
2. Check the positions of the seals at the rear and front:
There must be no gap [B] between the edge of a seal and the edge of the
cleaning blade.
There must be no overlap [C] at the edge of the seal and the edge of the
cleaning blade.
Check that the cleaning blade does not catch on the edges of the seals as
shown in the drawing at "OK".

B132R208C.WMF
OK NG
NG

B132R208B.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
PCU
B132/B200 3-56 SM

3.5.6 TD SENSOR

Remove the PCU from the machine.
[A]: Connector bracket
[B]: TD sensor

Reinstallation
After replacing the TD sensor:
Replace the developer in the PCU where the TD sensor was replaced. (!3.5.1)
Do SP3801 001~006 only for the PCU where the TD sensor was replaced.

B132R223.WMF
[A]
[B]
PCU
SM 3-57 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.5.7 AFTER REPLACING THE PCU COMPONENTS AND
DEVELOPER
Do the following procedure after you replace the PCU, development, or any related
parts. Pay attention to the combination of replaced parts in the table below (require
procedures are different). Any SPs described in this table should be performed
according to the steps below.
1. Open the front cover, then turn on the main power.
2. After the "Open Cover" message is shown on the display, close the front cover.
3. Do the required SP.

Combination of Replaced Parts
No.
Drum Developer
Drum
Cleaning
Blade
Drum
Cleaning
Brush
Required SPs
After
Replacement
Comments
1
-

2
-

-

SP3820 002
(Manual Procon)
3
-

-
4
-

- -
SP3810 001-005
(ClngInitSetExe)
-and-
SP3820 002
(Manual Procon)
Before reinstallation, cover the
drum completely with Lubricant
Powder.
Do NOT do these SPs which
initialize the TD sensor:
SP3801 001 to 006
SP3811 001 to 006
5
- -
SP3801 001-006
(Init TD Sensor)
Powder. Do these SPs to
initialize the TD sensor only for
the color(s) that were replaced.
6
- - -

7
- - - -
SP3811 001-006
(Dev Setup Exe)
Powder.
Do these SPs to initialize the
developer only for the color(s)
that were replaced.
8
-
SP3801 001-006
(Init TD Sensor)
Do these SPs to initialize the TD
sensor only for the color(s) that
were replaced.
9
- -

10
- - -
SP3811 001-006
(Dev Setup Exe)
Do these SPs to initialize the
developer only for the color(s)
that were replaced.

PCU
B132/B200 3-58 SM

Important!
After you replace developer (only initialize the TD sensor for the colour that you
replaced)
IF YOU DO NOT OBEY THESE INSTRUCTIONS, YOU WILL GET TONER SCATTERING INSIDE THE
MACHINE.
Here is a summary of the important difference between SP3801 001-006 (Init TD
sensor) and SP3811 001-006 (Dev Setup Exe):
SP3801 001-006 (Init TD sensor) only initializes the TD sensor.
SP3811 001-006 (Dev Setup Exe) initializes the TD sensor and sends toner to
the sub hopper of each PCU. This covers the PCU drum with a layer of toner.
Covering the drum with toner prevents the cleaning blades from scratching or
bending the drums. SP3811 is necessary only when both the developer and
cleaning blade are replaced together. For the other procedures, if you send toner
to the PCU, that toner is wasted.

TONER SUPPLY
SM 3-59 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.6 TONER SUPPLY
3.6.1 STC PORT CLEANING

2. Remove the STC holder front cover [A] (" x2)
3. Remove the STC bottom cover [B] (Pawls x2)
4. Wrap a clean cloth around the tip of a small screwdriver then scrape away any
toner that has collected inside the bottom cover.
5. Use a clean cloth to clean the bottom of the holder cover [C] and the bottom of
the holder [D].

B132R215.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
TONER SUPPLY
B132/B200 3-60 SM

3.6.2 CONNECTOR BOARD (CNB)

Remove the toner hopper (!3.2.7)
Remove:
[A]: Support bracket (" x2)
[B]: CNB (! x8, " x1). Slide the PCB assembly to the right and remove it.

B132R216.WMF
[A]
[B]
TONER SUPPLY
SM 3-61 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.6.3 TONER PUMP

Remove:
Toner hopper (!3.2.7)
Support bracket (!3.7.2)
Connector Board (!3.6.2)

[A]: Toner pump assembly (! x3, " x3, Bushing x1, # x1).
Pull the assembly straight down and remove it.

B132R217.WMF
[A]
TONER SUPPLY
B132/B200 3-62 SM

3.6.4 TONER END SENSOR

Remove:

[A]: Toner end sensor (! x1, " x2)

B132R213.WMF
[A]
TONER SUPPLY
SM 3-63 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.6.5 TONER SUPPLY MOTOR

Remove:
[A]: Motor cover (" x1)
[B]: Toner supply motor (" x4, ! x1)

B132R211.WMF
[A]
[B]
PAPER TRANSFER UNIT
B132/B200 3-64 SM

3.7 PAPER TRANSFER UNIT
3.7.1 RELAY SENSOR

Pull out the drawer unit. (!3.2.9)
[A]: Sensor bracket (" x1)
[B]: Relay sensor (! x1)
Reinstallation

B132R615.WMF
[A]
[B]
PAPER TRANSFER UNIT
SM 3-65 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.7.2 DOUBLE-FEED SENSORS, REGISTRATION SENSORS

Open the guide plate [A].
Remove:
[B]: Sensor support plate (" x2)
[C]: Double-feed detection sensor (! x1, " x1)
[D]: Registration sensor (! x1)
Reinstallation

B132R616.WMF
[B]
[C]
[D]
[A]
PAPER TRANSFER UNIT
B132/B200 3-66 SM

3.7.3 PAPER TRANSFER UNIT

Remove:
[A]: Paper transport unit cover (" x2)
[B]: Timing belt, gear (# x1)
NOTE: Do not loosen or remove the paint-locked screws.
[C]: Press the release forward
[D]: Raise the handle to the vertical position.

B132R302.WMF

B132R302A.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
PAPER TRANSFER UNIT
SM 3-67 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

Change the position of:
[A]: Spring
[B]: Spring
Remove:
[C]: Spring
[D]: Connector (! x1) (use a pair of small pliers to remove the connector)
[E]: Bracket (" x2)
[F]: PTR Unit
The handle should be up.
Raise the front ".
Pull the rear #

Reinstallation
Be sure to set springs [A], [B], and [C] in their original positions before you re-
install the PTR unit.

1
2
B132R303.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
PAPER TRANSFER UNIT
B132/B200 3-68 SM

3.7.4 PAPER TRANSFER ROLLER, DISCHARGE PLATE

Remove:
Paper transfer unit (!3.7.3)
[A]: Paper transfer discharge plate (" x2)
[B]: Paper transfer roller (% x2, Gear x1, Shaft bearings x2)

Reinstallation
When you install the roller, the long end [C] is at the rear.

B132R304.WMF
[A]
[C]
[B]
PAPER TRANSFER UNIT
SM 3-69 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.7.5 LUBRICANT BAR

Remove:
[A]: Entrance guide plate (" x2)
[B]: Lubrication bar (" x2)
Important! Work carefully to avoid scratching the paper transfer roller.
Reinstallation

B132R305.WMF
[A]
[B]
PAPER TRANSFER UNIT
B132/B200 3-70 SM

3.7.6 CLEANING BLADE

Remove:
Lubrication bar (!3.7.5)
[A]: Cleaning blade (" x2)
Reinstallation

B132R306.WMF
[A]
PAPER TRANSFER UNIT
SM 3-71 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.7.7 CLEANING BRUSH ROLLER

Remove:
Transfer exit guide, paper transfer roller (!3.7.4)
[A]: Gear (# x1, Gear x1)
[B]: Brush roller cover (" x3)
[C]: Cleaning brush roller (Gear x1, Washer x1, Shaft bearing x1)
Reinstallation

B132R307.WMF
[B]
[A]
[C]
PAPER TRANSFER UNIT
B132/B200 3-72 SM

3.7.8 PAPER TRANSPORT BELT, PAPER SEPARATION POWER
PACK

Pull out the drawer unit (!3.2.9)
Remove:
Paper transport unit lever and cover (!3.7.3)
Fusing unit (!3.9.2)

[A]: Timing belt x1, Gear x1, Shaft bearing x1
[B]: Snap ring x1, Shaft bearing
[C]: Paper transport belt (" x2, ! x2)
[D]: Cover
[E]: Separation power pack (" x6, ! x2)
Reinstallation

B132R308.WMF

B132R308A.WMF
[B]
[C]
[A]
[D]
[E]
PAPER TRANSFER UNIT
SM 3-73 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.7.9 REGISTRATION MOTOR

Remove:
Drawer unit (!3.2.9)
[A]: Drawer unit connector bracket (" x1, ! x3, $ x2)
[B]: Gear cover (" x1)
[C]: Registration gear (% x1, Spring pin x1)
[D]: Registration motor assembly (" x3, ! x1)
Reinstallation

B132R618.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
PAPER TRANSFER UNIT
B132/B200 3-74 SM

3.7.10 DOUBLE-FEED DETECTION LED

Remove:
Drawer unit (!3.2.9)
Drawer unit connector bracket (!3.7.9)
Registration motor (!3.7.9)
Sensor support plate (!3.7.2)
Registration motor inner cover (" x4)

[A]: Upper stay (" x2)
[B]: Lower stay (" x2, ! x1)
[C]: Sensor bracket (" x2)
[D]: Double-feed detection LED (" x1, ! x1)
Reinstallation

B132R619.WMF

B132R620.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
IMAGE TRANSFER UNIT
SM 3-75 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.8 IMAGE TRANSFER UNIT
3.8.1 ITB, BELT CLEANING UNIT

Disassembly and ITB Replacement
1. Put a clean sheet of paper on a flat surface.
2. Remove the ITB unit from the machine (!3.2.8). Put the ITB unit on the sheet
of paper.
NOTE: Keep the unit flat when you remove it, lift it, carry it, and put it down.
Otherwise, waste toner will spill out, and will spill inside the unit, and
this can cause copying problems.
3. Disconnect the image transfer belt unit connector and screw [A] (" x1, ! 1x)
4. Push the image transfer unit to the rear to disengage the front pins [B].
5. Pull the unit to the front to disengage the rear pin [C].
6. Lift the image transfer unit to separate it from the belt cleaning unit [D].

B132R310.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
IMAGE TRANSFER UNIT
B132/B200 3-76 SM

[A]: Encoder sensor bracket (" x1)
[B]: Set the image transfer unit on its front side up.
[C]: ID sensor/MUSIC sensor plate (" x2, ! x1)
[D]: ITB
Important
When you install the new belt, the
edge of the belt with the encoder film
strip must be at [E]. The encoder
must be at the rear side.
The encoder edge of the ITB is silver.
Be sure to reattach the ID
sensor/MUSIC sensor plate [C]
before you reassemble the ITB (" x2,
! x1).
Make sure that the belt flange [F]
does not touch the roller edge.

B132R314.WMF

B132R317A.WMF
[C]
[A]
[D]
[B]
[E]
[F]
IMAGE TRANSFER UNIT
SM 3-77 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

Reassembly of the Image ITB Unit and Belt Cleaning Unit

1. Insert one sheet of A4/LT paper
[A] at the corner as shown.
NOTE: The paper protects the
corner seal [B] of the belt
cleaning unit.
2. Lower the belt unit [C] onto the
cleaning unit [D].
3. Push the belt unit " and belt
cleaning unit # together.
4. Connect the belt unit and belt
cleaning unit (" x1, ! x1).

B132R315.WMF

B132R316.WMF
[B]
[A]
[C]
[D]
"
&
IMAGE TRANSFER UNIT
B132/B200 3-78 SM

5. Pull out the paper [A] slowly.
6. Check the paper.
If the paper is unmarked, go to the next step.
-or-
If the paper is creased or torn, separate the image transfer belt and cleaning
unit. Inspect the seal. If the seal is damaged, replace it.

NG OK

B132R317.WMF [A]
IMAGE TRANSFER UNIT
SM 3-79 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

Dusting the ITB with Lubricant Powder
1. Get a pack of Lubricant Powder B1329700.
Important!
THE ITB MUST BE COATED WITH LUBRICANT POWDER B1329700) BEFORE INSTALLING
A NEW ITB.
THE LUBRICANT POWDER (B1329700) (COMPOSED OF ZINC STEARATE) IS SPECIALLY
DESIGNED FOR THIS MACHINE (B132/B181/B200).
NEVER USE SETTING POWDER (54429101) FOR THIS MACHINE, OR YOU MAY DAMAGE
THE DRUM CHARGE ROLLER AND CAUSE PROBLEMS WITH IMAGE QUALITY.
NEVER USE TONER TAKEN FROM THE TONER SUPPLY PORT OF THE YELLOW PCU
BECAUSE THIS TONER HAS DEVELOPER MIXED WITH IT.
IF THE LUBRICANT POWDER (B1329700) IS NOT AVAILABLE, COAT THE ITB WITH THIS
MACHINES YELLOW TONER. DO NOT USE ANOTHER MODELS YELLOW TONER.

2. While rotating the knob [A] in the direction indicated by the arrow [B], apply
Lubricant Powder B1329700 at [C] with a soft dry cloth.
3. Rotate the ITB indicated by the arrow [B] through one full rotation. This allows
the lubricant powder to be spread completely on the ITB.
4. Turn the lever [D] to the up position.
5. After the ITB is completely covered with powder, rotate the knob [E] in the
direction indicated by the arrow [F].

B132R318.WMF
[A]
[C]
[E]
[B]
[F]
[D]
IMAGE TRANSFER UNIT
B132/B200 3-80 SM

Important
Be sure to apply powder until the ITB is
completely covered.

After covering the surface of the ITB
with lubricant power, be sure to rotate
the ITB through one full rotation in the
opposite direction. This allows the
cleaning blade edge [F] to be covered
with sufficient lubricant powder.
Turn the transfer belt release lever back
down before sliding the unit into the
machine.

Reinstallation

B132R319.WMF

B132R320.WMF
[F]
IMAGE TRANSFER UNIT
SM 3-81 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.8.2 ITB CLEANING BLADE, DUST COLLECTION UNIT

Remove:
Image transfer unit (!3.2.8)
Belt cleaning unit (!3.8.1)
[A]: ITB cleaning blade (" x2)
[B]: Dust collection unit (" x3)

Reinstallation
After reinstallation of the dust collection unit, confirm that the seal [C] is covered
by the bracket [D].

B132R311.WMF
OK NG

B132R312A.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
IMAGE TRANSFER UNIT
B132/B200 3-82 SM

3.8.3 ITB CLEANING ROLLER, SCRAPER BLADE

Remove:
Image transfer unit, ITB cleaning unit (!3.8.1)
ITB cleaning blade, dust collection unit (!3.8.2)

[A]: Rear bracket, coupling (" x1)
[B]: Front bracket (# x1, Gear x1)
[C]: ITB cleaning roller
[D]: ITB cleaning scraper blade (" x2)
Reinstallation

B132R313.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
IMAGE TRANSFER UNIT
SM 3-83 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.8.4 MUSIC AND ID SENSORS

Remove the ID sensor/music sensor plate (!3.8.1)
[A]: Cover (" x2)
[B]: Music and ID sensors (" x4, ! x1)
Reinstallation

B132R332.WMF
[A]
[B]
IMAGE TRANSFER UNIT
B132/B200 3-84 SM

3.8.5 IMAGE TRANSFER POWER PACK

Remove the ITB (!3.8.1)
[A]: Support bracket (" x1)
[B]: Small idle roller plate
[C]: Large idle roller plate
[D]: Image transfer power pack (" x6, ! x6)

Reinstallation
Connect the color coded connectors at
the correction positions.
$ Red
, Blue
. Yellow
When you reattach the support bracket
[A] rotate the screw [E] up as shown,
then tighten it.

Reinstallation

1
2
2

B132R333.WMF

B132R334.WMF
$
,
.
[E]
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
IMAGE TRANSFER UNIT
SM 3-85 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.8.6 BELT POSITION SENSORS

Remove the ITB (!3.8.1)
[A]: Belt position sensor assembly (" x3, ! x2)
Reinstallation

B132R335.WMF
[A]
FUSING UNIT
B132/B200 3-86 SM

3.9 FUSING UNIT
3.9.1 FUSING BELT STRIPPERS

Pull out the drawer unit (!3.2.9)
[A]: Raise lever until it stops.
[B]: Fusing cleaning unit cover (" x2)
[C]: Fusing unit exit guide (" x2)
[D]: Hot roller stripper
Press the sides in to disconnect the pawls and remove.

B132R403.WMF

B132R402.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
FUSING UNIT
SM 3-87 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.9.2 FUSING UNIT

1. Turn off the copier and disconnect the power cord at the power source.
3. Pull out the drawer unit. (!3.2.9)
4. Allow the machine to cool for at least 10 minutes.
5. Loosen the fusing unit screw [A] (" x1)
6. Grip the fusing unit at [B] and [C] and lift the unit to remove it.
Important
Do not touch the reference pin [D] when lifting the fusing unit.

B132R401.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
FUSING UNIT
B132/B200 3-88 SM

3.9.3 FUSING EXIT SENSOR, ACCORDION JAM SENSOR

Remove:
[A]: Sensor bracket (" x2)
[B]: Fusing exit sensor (! x1)
[C]: Accordion jam sensor (! x1)

B132R405.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
FUSING UNIT
SM 3-89 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.9.4 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMOSTATS, THERMISTOR

Remove:
[A]: Lower entrance guide cover (" x2)
[B]: Pressure roller thermostats (" x4)
[C]: Pressure roller thermistor (" x1, ! x1)

B132R407.WMF

B132R410.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
FUSING UNIT
B132/B200 3-90 SM

3.9.5 FUSING CLEANING UNIT

Remove:
[A]: Fusing unit upper cover (" x3)
[B]: Fusing cleaning unit (Spring x1)

B132R408.WMF
[A]
[B]
FUSING UNIT
SM 3-91 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.9.6 FUSING BELT THERMOSTATS

Remove:
Fusing cleaning unit (!3.9.5)
[A]: Two left thermostats (" x4)
[B]: Two right thermostats (" x4)
NOTE: The thermostats, installed in line with one another, are of two types.
One is marked with a red mark, but their order of installation is not
important.

B132R411.WMF
[A]
[B]
FUSING UNIT
B132/B200 3-92 SM

3.9.7 FUSING THERMISTORS, HEATING ROLLER TEMPERATURE
SENSOR

Remove:
Fusing unit upper cover (!3.9.1)
[A]: Fusing unit belt cover (" x2)
[B]: Hot roller thermistor (" x1)
[C]: Heating roller thermistor (" x1)
[D]: Heating roller temperature sensor (" x2, Spring plates x2)
[E]: Wire (" x1)
[F]: Connector leads. Pull through the frame.

B132R409.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
FUSING UNIT
SM 3-93 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.9.8 FUSING BELT OIL SUPPLY ROLLER, CLEANING ROLLERS

Remove:
! Fusing unit (!3.9.2)
! Fusing cleaning unit (!3.9.5)
1. Remove the oil supply roller [A] (Springs x 2, Bushing x2, % x2).
2. Remove the oil supply cleaning roller [B].
NOTE: Press on each end of the roller to release the springs [C].

Reinstallation
! When you install the oil supply roller, the end with the serial number must be
toward the rear of the machine.

B132R404.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
FUSING UNIT
B132/B200 3-94 SM

3.9.9 PRESSURE ROLLER CLEANING FELT ROLLER

Remove:
Fusing unit (see 3.9.2)
[A]: Exit sensor bracket (" x2, ! x2)
[B]: Lower exit guide assembly (" x2)
[C]: Lower exit guide (" x2)
[D]: Separation pawl Assy x 7
[E]: Cleaning felt roller Assy
[F]: Cleaning felt roller
[G]: Bracket
[H]: Springs
[I]: Bushing
[C]
[D]
[E]

[E]
[F]
[G]
[H]
[H]
[I]
[I]
Rev. 04/2006
"
FUSING UNIT
SM 3-95 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.9.10 HOT ROLLER, HEATING ROLLER FUSING LAMPS

Remove:
[A]: Bracket
[B]: Rear lamp bracket (" x2)
[C]: Front lamp brackets (" x1 each)

B132R413.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
FUSING UNIT
B132/B200 3-96 SM

Important! Before disconnecting the lamps, mark the connectors to ensure that
you match their connection points correctly at reinstallation.
Disconnect at front and rear:
[A]: Heating roller fusing lamp connectors (! x4)
[B]: Hot roller fusing lamp connectors (! x2)
Remove:
[C]: Heating roller lamps x2
[D]: Hot roller lamp x1

B132R414.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
FUSING UNIT
SM 3-97 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.9.11 PRESSURE ROLLER FUSING LAMP

Remove:
Form bracket (!3.9.10)
[A]: Pressure roller lamp front bracket (" x1)
[B]: Pressure roller lamp rear bracket (" x1)
[C]: Pressure roller lamp (! x2)

B132R412.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
FUSING UNIT
B132/B200 3-98 SM

3.9.12 HEATING ROLLER, FUSING BELT, HOT ROLLER

Remove:
Hot roller, heating roller lamps (x3) (!3.9.10)
[A]: Release levers. Press down to release.

B132R415.WMF
[A]
FUSING UNIT
SM 3-99 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

Disassembly Reassembly

VENUS_05072524.WMF

2
5
6
7
5
6
7
1
12
13
9
11
10
9
8
10
11
3
4
[A]
[B]
1. Remove screws [1], [2], [3] ( x3).
2. Rotate the frame [4] to the right.
3. At the front and rear of the heating roller,
remove:
[5] Lock rings
[6] Bushings
[7] Bearings
4. Remove the heating roller [8]
5. At the front and rear of the hot roller, remove:
[9] Lock rings
[10] Shaft bearings
[11] Gears
6. Remove the fusing belt [12] and hot roller [13].

1. Attach the fusing belt [12] and hot roller [13].
2. Attach the lock rings [9], shaft bearings [10],
and gears [11] to the front and rear of the
heating roller.
IMPORTANT: Make sure the bearing flange
is on the outside.
3. Attach the heating roller [8]
(Length [A] is greater then [B]).
IMPORTANT: Make sure that the roller
shaft end [A] (the longer end) is facing
towards the front of the machine. Refer to
the direction of the arrow on the heating
roller [8] in the illustration above.
4. Attach the lock rings [5], bushings [6] and
bearings [7] to the front and rear of the
heating roller.
IMPORTANT: Make sure the bearing flange
is on the outside.
5. Rotate the frame [4] to the left.
6. Tighten the three screws [1], [2], [3] ( x3).
Rev. 09/2006
FUSING UNIT
B132/B200 3-100 SM

3.9.13 PRESSURE ROLLER

Remove:
Pressure roller lamp (x1) (!3.9.11)
[A]: Lower fusing entrance guide (" x2)
[B]: Front screw (" x2)
[C]: Rear screw (" x1)
[D]: Hot roller lamps (! x1), heating roller lamps (! x2)
[E]: Rotate the frame to the right, in the direction shown by the arrow.
[F]: Pressure roller.
NOTE: Lift pressure roller and remove without detaching shaft bearing and
gears.

B132R417.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[F]
[E]
[D]
FUSING UNIT
SM 3-101 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.9.14 PRESSURE ROLLER SEPARATION PAWLS

Remove:
Fusing unit (3.9.2)
Pressure roller cleaning roller unit (3.9.9)

[A]: Pressure roller separation pawls

3.9.15 NIP WIDTH ADJUSTMENT
This manual shows you how to measure and adjust the nip width (3.21 Nip Width
Adjustment Procedure).

IMPORTANT: If a finisher is installed on the machine, remove it before you
begin these procedures.

B132R418.WMF
[A]
Rev. 10/2006
DUPLEX UNIT
B132/B200 3-102 SM

3.10 DUPLEX UNIT
3.10.1 DUPLEX INVERTER MOTOR

Pull out the duplex unit.

[A]: Duplex unit front cover (! x3)
[B]: Duplex inverter motor (! x3, " x1, Timing belt x1, Gear x1)

B132R500.WMF

B132R504.WMF
[A]
[B]
DUPLEX UNIT
SM 3-103 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.10.2 DUPLEX TRANSPORT MOTOR

Release the lower guide plate with knob F.
Remove:
Duplex inner cover
[A]: Duplex transport motor (! x3, " x1, Timing belt x 1)

B132R506.WMF
[A]
DUPLEX UNIT
B132/B200 3-104 SM

3.10.3 DUPLEX UNIT SENSORS
Duplex Entrance Sensor

Remove:
[A]: Bracket (! x 2)
[B]: Release harness clamp
[C]: Duplex entrance sensor (" x 1)

Reinstallation
Insert the anti-static brushes into the roller holes.

B132R502.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
DUPLEX UNIT
SM 3-105 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

Transport Sensors 1, 2

Remove the duplex unit (!3.3.10)
[A]: Inverter unit (! x1 front, # x1 rear, " x1)
[B]: Reverse trigger roller assembly (Rear: $ x1, Shaft bushing x1) (Front: # x1,
Link gear x1, Spring x1, Shaft bushing x1)
[C]: Plate (! x2)
[D]: Cross-stay (! x 4)

B132R503.WMF
[A]
[B]
[D]
[C]
DUPLEX UNIT
B132/B200 3-106 SM

[A]: Jogger fences (! x 1 ea.)
[B]: Left transport cover (! x 2)
The front screw is a shoulder screw. Insert the screws in the correct holes
when re-attaching.
To avoid breaking the tabs under the left edge of the table, pull the table to
the right to disengage the tabs and then remove.
[C]: Transport sensor 1 (%x 1, " x 1)
[D]: Transport sensor 2 (%x 1, " x 1)
[E]: Inverter exit sensor (! x 1, % x 1, " x 1)

Reinstallation
Make sure the end tabs [F] of the left transport cover are engaged correctly.

B132R507.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[F]
DUPLEX UNIT
SM 3-107 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

Transport Sensor 3

Remove:
Duplex unit, inner cover (!3.3.10)
[A]: Cross stay (! x 1)
[B]: Right transport cover (! x 2, " x 1)
NOTE: The front screw is a shoulder screw. Insert the screws in the correct
holes when re-attaching.
[C]: Transport sensor bracket (! x 2)
[D]: Transport sensor 3 (" x 1)

B132R508.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
DUPLEX UNIT
B132/B200 3-108 SM

3.10.4 DUPLEX JOGGER MOTOR

Remove:
Duplex unit, inner cover (!3.3.10)
[A]: Jogger motor (! x2, " x1)

B132R505.WMF
[A]
DUPLEX UNIT
SM 3-109 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.10.5 DUPLEX JOGGER BELT

Remove:
Remove the inverter unit (!3.10.3)
Cross stay (!3.10.3)
Reverse trigger roller assembly (!3.10.3)
Jogger fences (!3.10.3)
Left transport cover (!3.10.3)
Jogger motor assembly (!3.10.4).
1. If you are replacing the belt, set both jogger fence brackets at the center of the
belt and tighten the screw [A].
2. If you are adjusting the belt, loosen the screw and slide the plastic piece [B] on
the belt to the left or right to adjust the position of the front fence, then tighten
the screw.

B140R819.WMF
[A]
[B]
TANDEM TRAY (TRAY 1)
B132/B200 3-110 SM

3.11 TANDEM TRAY (TRAY 1)
3.11.1 TANDEM TRAY

2. Pull out the tandem tray drawer [A] completely to separate the left [B] and right
[C] sides of the tandem tray.
3. Remove the left tandem tray [D] (! x 5).

B140R820.WMF
B140R821.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
SM 3-111 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

[A]: Right tandem tray (! x 2).
NOTE: 1) When re-installing the right tandem tray, make sure that the wheels [B]
ride on the slide rail [C].
2) When re-installing the right tandem tray, make sure that the tandem tray
stopper [D] is set behind the stopper [E] on the frame.

B140R822.WMF
B140R823.WMF
[A]
[E]
[D]
[C]
[B]
[B]
B132/B200 3-112 SM

3.11.2 REAR FENCE RETURN SENSOR REPLACEMENT

Pull out the tandem feed tray.
[A]: Return sensor assembly (" x 1, ! x1).

B132R623.WMF
[A]
SM 3-113 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.11.3 REAR FENCE HP SENSOR REPLACEMENT

Pull out the tandem feed tray.
[A]: Rear bottom plate (! x 1).
[B]: Back fence transport gear (! x 1)
[C]: Move the back fence to the right.
[D]: Rear HP sensor (" x 1)

B140R825.WMF
[D]
[C]
[A]
[B]
B132/B200 3-114 SM

3.11.4 TANDEM RIGHT TRAY PAPER SENSOR REPLACEMENT

Remove the right tandem tray (! 3.11.1)
[A]: Inner cover (! x 2)
[B]: Side fences (! x 1 each)
[C]: Bottom plate (! x 4)
[D]: Connector (" x 1)
[E]: Sensor (! x 1)

B140R826.WMF
B140R827.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[E]
[D]
SM 3-115 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.11.5 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT WIRE REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Before replacing the rear bottom plate lift wire, remove the front bottom
plate lift wire. It is necessary to remove the shaft for replacing the rear
bottom plate lift wire.

Remove the right tandem tray. (Refer to Paper Tray Removal.)
[A]: Remove the inner cover (! x 2)
[B]: Remove the left stay.
[C]: Wire stoppers
Slightly lift the front bottom plate and unhook.
[D]: Wire covers ($ x 1 each)
[E]: Bracket (! x 1, $ x 1, bushing x 1)
[F]: Gear
[G]: Bottom plate lift wire

B140R828.WMF

B140R829.WMF
[A]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
[C]
[B]
B132/B200 3-116 SM

NOTE: When re-installing the bottom plate lift wire:
1) Set the positioning pin [A] in the hole [B], and set the projection [C] in
the hole [D].
2) Position the wire as shown [E].
3) Do not cross the wires.

B140R830.WMF
[E]
[D]
[B]
[A]
[C]
SM 3-117 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.11.6 TANDEM TRAY PAPER SIZE CHANGE
At the factory, this tray is set up for A4 or LT LEF. Only A4 or LT LEF paper can be
used for tandem feed.

1. Open the front cover.
2. Completely pull out the tandem feed tray [A] to separate the right tandem tray
[B] from the left tandem tray.

Right Tray
3. Remove the right tandem inner cover [C] (! x 2).
4. Re-position the side fences [D] (! x 1 each).
A4: Outer slot position
LT: Inner slot position
5. Re-install the right tandem inner cover.

B140R831.WMF
B140R832.WMF
[D]
[C]
[A]
[B]
B132/B200 3-118 SM

Left Tray
6. Remove the tray cover [A] (! x 2).
7. Remove the DC motor cover [B] (! x 5).
8. Remove the rear side fence [C] and front side fence [D] (! x 4 ea.)
9. Re-position the side fences (! x 4 ea.).
A4: Outer slot position
LT: Inner slot position
10. Re-install the DC motor cover and the tray cover.

B132R624.WMF

B140R834.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
SM 3-119 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

11. Re-position the return position sensor bracket [A] (! x 1).
For A4 set the screw in the left hole [B].
For LT set the screw in the right hole [C].
12. Input the new paper size into SP5959 001.
Reinstallation
Do the scanner and registration adjustments (see section 3.19).

B132R836.WMF
[A]
A4 LT
[B]
[C]
PAPER FEED (TRAYS 2, 3)
B132/B200 3-120 SM

3.12 PAPER FEED (TRAYS 2, 3)
3.12.1 PICKUP, FEED, REVERSE ROLLERS

[A]: Remove the tray.
[B]: Feed roller (# x 1)
[C]: Pick-up roller (# x 1)
[D]: Separation roller (# x 1)
Important
The operation of the FRR mechanisms for the tandem tray (Tray 1), universal
trays (Tray 2, Tray 3), by-pass tray, and ARDF are similar. However, the only
rollers that are interchangeable are the tandem and universal tray rollers (Trays 1,
2, 3).
Do not touch the surface of new rollers during replacement.

B132R601.WMF
[A]
[B]
[D]
[C]
SM 3-121 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.12.2 PAPER FEED UNIT

Remove:
Front door (!1.3.4)
If the LCT is connected, disconnect it and pull it away from the machine.
LCT entrance guide cover and right lower cover
Pull out all three trays (do not remove).
[A]: Toner collection bottle
[B]: Vertical transport guide
[C]: Inner cover (! x 2)

NOTE: When re-installing the vertical transport guide, remove the lower right cover
then insert from it.

B132R602A.WMF

B132R603A.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
B132/B200 3-122 SM

[A]: Guide plate (! x 1)
1st feed unit only.
[B]: Feed unit (! x 1, " x 3)
Insert your hand from the right and pull the feed unit forward.
NOTE: To avoid hitting the unit on the sides of the machine, remove it
carefully and slowly.

Important: If the paper feed motor must be replaced, replace the paper feed unit.

B132R625.WMF
B132R604.WMF
[A]
[B]
SM 3-123 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.12.3 SEPARATION ROLLER PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT
The position of the drive gear for the separation roller can be changed in order to
change the amount of pressure exerted by the separation roller. This adjustment
can be done:
When feeding special paper, especially thick paper
When the customer is experiencing feed problems

1. Remove the feed unit (!3.12.2)
2. Loosen the hex screw [A].
3. The separation roller gear [B] is positioned at the groove before shipping.
To adjust for thick paper, move the separation roller gear to the left to
decrease the pressure.
-or-
To correct misfeeds, move the separation roller gear to the right to increase
the pressure.

B132R605.WMF
[A]
[B]
B132/B200 3-124 SM

3.12.4 PAPER END, TRAY LIFT, PAPER FEED SENSORS

Remove:
Paper feed unit (!3.12.2)
[A]: Sensor bracket (! x1)
[B]: Paper end sensor (" x1)
[C]: Tray lift sensor (" x1)
[D]: Sensor bracket (! x1)
[E]: Paper feed sensor (" x1)

B132R606.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
SM 3-125 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.12.5 VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR

Remove:
Paper feed unit (!3.12.2)
[A]: Bracket (! x1)
[B]: Upper unit (! x4)
[C]: Vertical transport sensor (" x1)

B132R607.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
BYPASS UNIT
B132/B200 3-126 SM

3.13 BYPASS UNIT
3.13.1 BYPASS PICKUP, FEED, REVERSE ROLLERS

Remove right covers (!1.3.5)
Open the bypass tray
Remove the bypass unit (!3.13.3)
Remove the upper unit cover (!3.13.4)
Remove:
[A]: Pickup roller (# x1)
[B]: Feed roller (# x1)
[C]: Reverse roller (# x1)

B132R601A.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
BYPASS UNIT
SM 3-127 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.13.2 BYPASS AUTO PAPER SIZE DETECTION SWITCHES

Remove right covers
(!1.3.5)

Disconnect:
[A]: Front hinge
[B]: Rear hinge
Remove:
[C]: Bypass tray (" x1)
[D]: Bypass table (! x2,
Pawls x2)
[E]: Paper size detection board (Pawl x1, ! x1)

B132R610.WMF

B132R611.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
BYPASS UNIT
B132/B200 3-128 SM

3.13.3 BYPASS UNIT

Remove right covers (!1.3.5)
Remove:
[A]: Bypass unit (! x4, " x2)

B132R626.WMF
[A]
BYPASS UNIT
SM 3-129 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.13.4 BYPASS PAPER END SENSOR, FEED SENSOR

Remove:
Bypass unit (!3.13.3)
[A]: Unit upper cover (Release x1)
[B]: Paper end sensor (" x1)
[C]: Feed sensor (! x1, " x1)

B132R613.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
BYPASS UNIT
B132/B200 3-130 SM

3.13.5 BYPASS FEED CLUTCH

Remove:
Bypass unit (!3.13.3)
[A]: Bypass feed clutch (# x1, " x1)

Reinstallation
Make sure the arm [B] fits correctly into the notch bracket [C] of the clutch.

B132R614.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
BOARDS
SM 3-131 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.14 BOARDS
3.14.1 CONTROLLER UNIT

Remove
[A]: Disconnect the ARDF
[B]: Controller board (! x3)

B132R710.WMF
[A]
[B]
BOARDS
B132/B200 3-132 SM

3.14.2 CONTROLLER BOARD, 256 MB MEMORY, NVRAM

Important:
If you are going to replace the NVRAM, follow the procedure on the next page
and refer to these illustrations as necessary.
Do not remove the NVRAM until you have uploaded is contents. (For more, see
the procedures on the following page.)
Always touch a metal surface to discharge any static on your hands before you
touch the controller board.
Work carefully when removing the NVRAM to avoid damaging other components
on the controller board or short circuiting the pins of other chips.

[A]: Options slot covers ", #, $ (! x 2 each)
[B]: Controller board (! x 2) (!3.14.1)
[C]: NVRAM (Pawls x2)
[D]: 256 MB memory

Reinstallation
If you replace the controller board, put the memory and NVRAM from the old
controller board onto the new controller board.

B132R711.WMF

B132R712.WMF
"
#
$
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
BOARDS
SM 3-133 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.14.3 NVRAM REPLACEMENT
Upload NVRAM Data ! SD Card
1. Do SP5990 001 to print the SMC report.
2. Turn the copier main power switch off.
3. Insert an SD card in Slot 3
4. Execute SP5824 to upload the data to the SD card.
5. Switch the machine off and disconnect the power cord.
Replace NVRAM
1. Remove the NVRAM (!3.14.2).
2. Install the new NVRAM.
Restore NVRAM Data to the New NVRAM
2. Put the SD card with the NVRAM data into Slot 3.
3. Open the front door of the copier and keep it open.
4. Turn the copier main power switch on.
If the NVRAM is new, SC195 (Machine Serial Number Error) may appear. If
this occurs:
Enter the SP mode and do SP5801 001 to reset the memory to the defaults
(All).
Switch the machine off/on and start from Step 1.
Important! WHEN SC195 OCCURS, THE SERIAL NUMBER MUST BE INPUT.
PLEASE CONTACT YOUR TECHNICAL SUPERVISOR.
5. Execute SP5825 to download the data uploaded from the old NVRAM.
NOTE: If the machine returns SC195 (Machine Serial Number Error), ignore it.
6. Switch the machine off and remove the SD card from Slot 3.
7. Switch the machine on, then do SP5990 001 to print another SMC report.
8. Compare this new SMC report with the report you printed in Step 1. If any of the
SP settings are different, enter the SP settings of the first report.
9. Execute SP5907 and enter the brand and model name of the machine for
Windows Plug & Play capability.

BOARDS
B132/B200 3-134 SM

3.14.4 CONTROLLER BOX COVER, BICU, IOB

Remove:
Rear covers (!1.3.6)
[A]: Controller box cover (! x17)
[B]: IOB (" x20, ! x9)
[C]: BICU (" x11, ! x9)

1
2

B132R706.WMF

B132R714.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
BOARDS
SM 3-135 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.14.5 RDS BOARD JUMPER

Remove:
Controller box cover (!3.14.1)
Interface board (!3.14.6)
[A]: RDS board (! x, " x)
[B]: Jumper

B132R709.WMF
[A]
[B]
BOARDS
B132/B200 3-136 SM

3.14.6 INTERFACE BOARD, MOTHER BOARD

1. Remove the controller box cover. (!3.14.4)
2. Remove the interface board (! x4)
3. Remove the HDD. (!3.15)
4. Remove the mother board (! x5, " x12)

B132R708.WMF

B132R713.WMF
[A]
[B]
BOARDS
SM 3-137 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.14.7 HVPS, PFC BOARD

Remove the rear lower cover (!1.3.6)
Remove:
[A]: HVPS and PFC board assembly (" x22, ! x10, % x23)
[B]: HVPS (! x8)
[C]: PFC board (! x6)

B132R720.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
BOARDS
B132/B200 3-138 SM

3.14.8 PSU

Remove the rear covers (!1.3.6)
Remove:
HVPS, PFC board assembly (!3.14.7)
[A]: PSU (" x7, ! x8)

B132R722.WMF
[A]
BOARDS
SM 3-139 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.14.9 AC DRIVE BOARD

Remove left, lower cover.
[A]: AC drive board (! x8, " x6)

B132R727.WMF
[A]
BOARDS
B132/B200 3-140 SM

3.14.10 TRANSFER MOTOR, DRIVE, DRIVE MOTOR BOARDS

Remove rear covers (!1.3.6)
Open and lock controller box (!1.3.11)
[A]: Board assembly (% x5, " x21, ! x2)
[B]: DRB (Drive Board)
[C]: TMB (Transfer Motor Board)
[D]: DMB (Drive Motor Board)

B132R716.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C] [D]
HDD UNIT
SM 3-141 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.15 HDD UNIT

Important
The HDD contains four separate hard disks. However, the four disks are always
replaced together as a unit. Never attempt to replace a single disk.
Remove:
Rear covers (!1.3.6)
Controller box cover (!3.14.4)
[A]: HDD unit (" x8, ! x4)
Important
Mark the harness connectors before you disconnect them. They must be
reconnected at their connection points.
1. Reassemble the machine.
2. Enter the SP mode and do SP5832 001 to format the hard disks. Formatting on
the machine partitions the hard disks properly.
3. Do SP5853 001 to download the fixed stamps from the ROM to the HDD.
4. Switch the machine off and on to enable the fixed stamps for use.

B132R707.WMF
[A]
HDD UNIT
B132/B200 3-142 SM

Disposal of HDD Units
Never remove an HDD unit from the work site without the consent of the client.
If the customer has any concerns about the security of any information on the
HDD, the HDD must remain with the customer for disposal or safe keeping.
The HDD may contain proprietary or classified (Confidential, Secret) information.
Specifically, the HDD contains document server documents and data stored in
temporary files created automatically during copy job sorting and jam recovery.
Such data is stored on the HDD in a special format so it cannot normally be read
but can be recovered with illegal methods.
Reinstallation
Explain to the customer that the following information stored on the HDD is lost
when the HDD is replaced:
Document server documents
Fixed stamps
Document server Address book
The address book and document server documents (if needed) must be input
again.
If the customer is using the Data Overwrite Security feature, the DOS function must
be set up again. For more, see Section "1. Installation".

MOTORS
SM 3-143 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.16 MOTORS
3.16.1 PCU MOTOR, DRUM MOTOR

1. Remove the rear covers. (!1.3.6)
2. Open and lock the controller box. (!1.3.11)
3. Remove the PCU stand [A] stored under the machine.
4. Remove the drum motor shaft tool [B] (shorter tool) from the bottom of the PCU
stand.

B132I718A.WMF
[A]
[B]
MOTORS
B132/B200 3-144 SM

5. Remove the PCU motor [A] (" x1, ! x4).
7. Remove the toner hopper unit. (!1.3.7)
Important: Make sure the toner hopper slide rails are pushed into the machine.
8. At the front of the machine, attach the short tool [B] to the shaft of the drum
motor to be removed.
9. Rotate the tool in the direction of the embossed arrow [C] on the tool (counter-
clockwise) until the holes are aligned.
NOTE: You must fasten the tool.
10. Use the M39 screw to fasten the screws to lock the shaft [D].
11. Remove the drum motor screws [E] (! x3)
12. Turn the drum-motor hub [F] counter-clockwise % and remove the drum motor
shaft.
13. Remove the drum motor & (" x1)
Reinstallation
1. Attach the tool to the drum shaft and fasten it with the screw.
2. Attach the drum motor.
3. Rotate the drum motor clockwise until it stops.
4. Fasten the three screws to the drum motor.

1
2
B132R724.WMF
[A]
[B]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[C]
MOTORS
SM 3-145 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.16.2 PAPER TRANSFER MOTOR

[A]: Paper transfer motor (" x1, ! x4)

B132R717.WMF
[A]
MOTORS
B132/B200 3-146 SM

3.16.3 IMAGE TRANSFER MOTOR

Remove the image transfer board assembly (!3.14.10)
[A]: Image transfer motor (Spring x1, " x1, ! x3, Timing belt x1, Gear x1)

B132R718.WMF
[A]
MOTORS
SM 3-147 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.16.4 USED TONER MOTOR, TRANSPORT MOTOR

Open and lock the controller box (!1.3.11)
Remove the HVPS, PFC boards (!3.14.7)
[A]: Used toner transport motor assembly (! x4)
[B]: Used toner motor (" x1, ! x2)
[C]: Used toner transport motor (! x2, " x1)

B132R721.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
MOTORS
B132/B200 3-148 SM

3.16.5 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT MOTOR (TRAYS 2, 3)

Remove the rear covers (!1.3.6)
Open the controller box and lock it (!1.3.11)
HVPS, PFC board (!3.14.7)
PSU (!3.14.8)
Tray 1
[A]: Bracket (! x1)
[B]: Bottom plate lift motor Tray 1 (! x3, " x1)
Trays 2, 3
Remove HVPS/PFC board unit (!3.14.7)
Remove PSU (!3.14.8)
Remove:
[C]: Bottom plate lift motor Tray 2, 3 (" x1, ! x2)

B132R723A.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
MOTORS
SM 3-149 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.16.6 ITB DRIVE MOTOR

Open and lock the controller box (!1.3.11)
Remove the image transfer motor control board bracket (!3.14.10)
[A]: Support stay (% x21, " x1, ! x4)
[B]: ITB driver motor (! x3, " x1)

B132R719A.WMF

B132R725.WMF
[A]
[B]
AIR FILTERS
B132/B200 3-150 SM

3.17 AIR FILTERS
3.17.1 TONER HOPPER FILTER

Remove:
Motor cover (!3.8.5)

[A]: Hopper filter

B132R212.WMF
[A]
AIR FILTERS
SM 3-151 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.17.2 OZONE FILTER, AIR FILTERS

Remove:
[A]: Cover (! x1)
[B]: Inner cover
[C]: Dust filters x3
[D]: Ozone filter

Reinstallation
Make sure you install the filters as shown. If you do not, you cannot reattach the
cover [B].

B132R729.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
AIR FILTERS
B132/B200 3-152 SM

3.17.3 SCANNER FILTER

Remove:
[A]: Top left cover (! x1)
[B]: Scanner filter

B132R730.WMF
[A]
[B]
ARDF
SM 3-153 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.18 ARDF
3.18.1 ARDF COVERS

[A]: Open the feed cover.
[B]: Front cover (! x 3, Tabs x4). Press down the tabs.
[C]: Rear cover (! x 2, Tabs x2). Press down the tabs.

B132R104.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
ARDF
B132/B200 3-154 SM

3.18.2 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT

[B]: Remove the snap fitting.
[C]: Pull toward you slightly to disconnect the rear end of the shaft
[D]: Disconnect the front end of the shaft.

B132R105.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
ARDF
SM 3-155 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.18.3 FEED BELT, PICKUP ROLLER
Remove:
Original Feed unit (!3.18.2)
[A]: E-ring.
[B]: Cover
[C]: Slide bushings out

Reassembly
Make sure that the tab " on the front
guide plate is above the pick-up
roller unit.

[D]: Feed belt holder
[E]: Feed belt
NOTE: Remove slowly. Do not let
the springs ", # fall.

[F]: ARDF pickup roller

B132R106.WMF

B132R107.WMF

B132R106A.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
"
#
"
[F]
ARDF
B132/B200 3-156 SM

3.18.4 BOTTOM PLATE POSITION SENSOR

Remove:
Remove front cover (!3.18.1)
Original feed unit (!3.18.2)
[A]: Pin screw x1
[B]: Raise the bottom plate
[C]: Bottom plate position sensor (" x1).

B132R117.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
ARDF
SM 3-157 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.18.5 INTERVAL, ORIGINAL WIDTH, SKEW CORRECTION
SEPARATION SENSORS

[B]: Guide plate (! x 3).
[C]: Width sensor bracket (! x 2)
[D]: Original width sensors ("x 5)
[E]: Interval sensor (" x 1)
[F]: Skew correction sensor (" x 1)
[G]: Separation sensor (" x 1)

B132R110.WMF

B132R111.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
ARDF
B132/B200 3-158 SM

3.18.6 ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS

Remove:
Front, rear covers (!3.18.1)
Snap rings

[A]: Remove the original tray
[B]: Lower cover (! x4)
[C]: Sensors:
" B5 original length (" x1)
# A4 original length (" x1)
$ LG original length (" x1)

B132R109A.WMF

B132R109B.WMF
[A]
[B]
"
#
$
[C]
ARDF
SM 3-159 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.18.7 COVER OPEN, ORIGINAL SET, BOTTOM PLATE, PICKUP
ROLLER HP, FEED-OUT SENSORS

Remove:
Front, rear covers (!3.18.1)
[A]: Original tray (" x1, # x2, Bushings x2)
[B]: Lift tray (" x1, Pin screw x1)

B132R116.WMF
[A]
[B]
ARDF
B132/B200 3-160 SM

[A]: Original set sensor (" x1, ! x1)
[B]: Upper inverter sensor (! x1, " x1)
[C]: Feed cover sensor (" x1)
[D]: Pickup roller HP sensor (" x1)
[E]: Bottom plate position sensor (" x1)

B132R118.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
ARDF
SM 3-161 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.18.8 ARDF POSITION SENSOR, APS START SENSOR

[A]: Raise the ARDF to the vertical position.
Remove:
[B]: APS bracket (! x1)
[C]: ARDF position and APS start [D] sensors (% x1, " x2)

B132R125.WMF
[A]
[B]
[D]
[C]
ARDF
B132/B200 3-162 SM

3.18.9 ORIGINAL REGISTRATION, EXIT SENSORS

Remove:
Remove the front and rear covers (!3.18.1)
Feed cover (!3.18.1)
Remove the original feed unit (!3.18.2)

[A]: Rotate the inverter guide 180 degrees.
[B]: Original guide plate (! x4).

B132R112.WMF
[A]
[B]
ARDF
SM 3-163 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

Remove:
[A]: Bracket (! x1)
[B]: Registration sensor (" x1)
[C]: Bracket (! x1)
[D]: Original exit sensor (" x1)

B132R113.WMF

B132R115.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
ARDF
B132/B200 3-164 SM

3.18.10 ARDF SEPARATION ROLLER

Open the feed cover
Remove the original feed unit. (!3.18.2)
Remove:
[A]: Separation roller cover. Use the tip of a small flathead screwdriver.
[B]: Separation roller (# x 1)
[C]: Torque limiter

B132R108.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
ARDF
SM 3-165 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.18.11 ARDF TRANSPORT BELT
Removing the ARDF Transport Belt Assembly

1. Open the feed cover. (!3.18.1)
2. Remove the ARDF front cover. (!3.18.1)
3. Raise the ARDF [A] to the vertical position.
4. Pull off the white cover [B] (Velcro fasteners)
5. Release the stopper pin [C] of the transport guide [D].
6. Remove the transport belt unit [E] (Pin screw ! x1, Timing belt x1)
Reinstallation
Attach the timing belt as shown then insert the pin screw [F] as shown.

B132R102.WMF

B132R126.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
ARDF
B132/B200 3-166 SM
Removing the Belt

1. Remove the front plastic cover [A] (! x1)
2. Remove the rear plastic cover [B] (! x1)
3. Loosen front lock screw [C]. Do not remove.
4. Loosen rear lock screw [D]. Do not remove. This releases the spring-loaded
tension on the belt.
5. Grip the roller in the center [E] then squeeze the belt to bring the rollers
together.
6. While squeezing the belt and rollers together in the center, tighten screws [C]
and [D]. This compresses the spring and releases tension on the belt.
Important
To avoid stripping the threads of the screws, do not apply excessive torque to
these screws!
7. Release the belt and make sure that the belt is loose and that the rollers do not
move. Repeat Steps 5 and 6 if the rollers expand and tighten the belt.

B132R127.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
ARDF
SM 3-167 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

8. Remove the Teflon sleeve [A].
9. Push the rear shaft bearing [B] out of its bracket.
10. Push the front shaft bearing [C] out of its bracket.
11. Push the front end of the shaft [D] over the top of the bracket.
12. Push the rear end of the shaft [E] over the top of the bracket.
13. Pull the shaft [F] out of the belt.
14. Pull the belt [G] toward the front to remove it.
15. Slide the new belt over the assembly.
16. Insert the shaft [F] into the new belt,
snap the shaft into its brackets, and
push in the shaft bearings.
17. Make sure that studs on the underside
of the belt [H] are aligned with the
grooves of the Teflon rollers on each
end of the shaft below.

B132R139.WMF

ORGB536.BMP
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
[H]
ARDF
B132/B200 3-168 SM

Reinstalling the Belt
1. Remove the ARDF front cover [A]
2. Take out the special tool [B].
NOTE: The special tool [B] is attached to
the front side plate. It is used to
adjust the tension on the belt on
both ends of the shaft.

3. Fit the special tool onto the FRONT.
4. Slowly loosen the front lock screw [C] until you see the tip of the shaft "
aligned with the hole #, then tighten the screw.
Important
To avoid stripping the threads of the screws, do not apply excessive torque.
5. Remove the special tool and fit it onto the REAR.
NOTE: If the Teflon sleeve has been reattached at [D], remove it. Do not
reattach the sleeve until after adjusting the belt tension. (The special
tool does not fit over the rear end with the Teflon sleeve attached.)
6. Slowly loosen the rear lock screw [E] until you see the tip of the shaft $ aligned
with the hole ' then tighten the screw.
7. Re-install the Teflon sleeve.
8. Re-install the front and rear plastic cover.
9. Reinstall the transport belt assembly in the ARDF.

B132R104A.WMF
FRONT REAR
B132R140.WMF
"
#
$
'
[C]
[D]
[E]
[A]
[B]
ARDF
SM 3-169 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

Reattaching the White Cover
1. With its white side down, set the cover [A] on the exposure glass.
2. Make sure the upper left corner is aligned with the arrow at the corner of the
exposure glass.
3. Close the ARDF [B] on top of the cover.

B132R103.WMF
[A]
[B]
ARDF
B132/B200 3-170 SM

3.18.12 ARDF CONTROL BOARD

Remove:
ARDF Rear cover (!3.18.1)
[A]: ARDF control board (" x17, ! x4)

B132R124.WMF
[A]
ARDF
SM 3-171 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.18.13 ARDF BOTTOM PLATE LIFT MOTOR

Open the feed cover.
Remove:
ARDF rear cover (!3.18.1)
[A]: ARDF bottom plate lift motor (" x1, ! x2, Timing belt x1)

B132R121.WMF
[A]
ARDF
B132/B200 3-172 SM

3.18.14 ARDF FEED MOTOR, ARDF TRANSPORT MOTOR

Open the feed cover
Remove the ARDF rear cover (!3.18.1)
Important! The right motor must be removed before the left motor.
[A]: Screw (! x1)
[B]: Feed motor bracket (! x4, " x1, Timing belt x1, Spring x1)
[C]: Feed motor (! x2)
[D]: Transport motor bracket (! x2, " x1, Timing belt x1, Spring x1)
[E]: Transport motor (! x2)

Reinstallation
Reinstallation is easier if you first set the spring tension with the screws and then
fasten the motor bracket with screws.

B132R123.WMF
[A]
[D]
[E]
[B]
[C]
ARDF
SM 3-173 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.18.15 ARDF PICKUP ROLLER LIFT MOTOR

Remove:
ARDF rear cover (!3.18.1)
[A]: Pickup roller lift motor (! x2, " x1, Timing belt x1)

B132R120.WMF
[A]
IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS
B132/B200 3-174 SM

3.19 IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS
3.19.1 SCANNING
Before doing the following scanner adjustments, perform or check the printing
registration/side-to-side adjustment and the blank margin adjustment. Use a C4
test chart to perform the following adjustments.
Scanner sub-scan magnification
1. Place the test chart on the exposure glass and
make a copy.
2. Check the magnification ratio. Use SP4008 (Sub
Scan Mag) to adjust if necessary. Standard: 1.0%.

Scanner leading edge and side-to-side registration
1. Place the test chart on the exposure glass and make
a copy.
2. Check the leading edge and side-to-side registration.
3. Adjust with the following SP modes if necessary.
Standard: 0 2mm.

SP mode
Sub Scan Reg SP4010 001
Main Scan Reg SP4011 001

A
B146R962.WMF
B
A
B146R963.WMF
A: Sub-scan magnification
A: Leading Edge Registration
B: Side-to-side Registration
IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS
SM 3-175 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

Main scan dot position correction
Adjust the printer registration before adjusting the scanner.
2. Open SP4010 and SP4011.
3. Make sure that each value is equal to the factory default.
4. Touch [COPY Window] and copy the C-4 chart in the full-color photo mode.
NOTE: Be sure to copy in the photo mode. Color displacement cannot be
checked correctly in text mode.
5. Use a magnification scope to check the yellow and cyan vertical lines.
If they exactly overwrite the black line at the edges of the copy, exit the SP
mode. No adjustment is necessary
If the yellow and cyan lines significantly extend beyond the black lines, go
to the next step.
6. Touch [SP Mode] to return to the SP mode.
7. Do SP4932. (Main Scan Dot Adj) Compare the current values against the table.

SP4932 001 R:Left
SP4932 002 R:Right
SP4932 003 B:Left
SP4932 004 B:Right

IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS
B132/B200 3-176 SM

3.19.2 ARDF
ARDF side-to-side and leading edge registration

Make a temporary test chart as shown above using A3/DLT paper.
1. Place the temporary test chart on the ARDF table and make a copy.
2. Check the registration, and adjust using the following SP modes if necessary.

SP Code What It Does Adjustment Range
SP6006 001 ADF Main Reg Adj 3.0 mm
SP6006 003 ADF Sub Reg Adj 42 steps
SP6006 005 ADF Buck Adj:Front 42 steps
SP6006 006 ADF Buck Adj:Back 45 steps
SP6006 006 ADF TEdge EMargin

B146R964.WMF
B
A
B146R965.WMF
A: Leading edge registration
B: Side-to-side registration
IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS
SM 3-177 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.19.3 REGISTRATION
Image Area
The image area must be configured
correctly. Adjust the registration within
the adjustment standard range as
described below.

Leading Edge
Adjusts the leading edge registration for each paper type and process line speed.
Side to Side
Adjusts the side-to-side registration for each paper feed station. The side-to-side
registration for the LCT can be adjusted with SP1002 006.
Adjustment Standards
Leading edge (sub-scan direction): 3 0 mm
Side to side (main-scan direction): 2 0 mm
Paper Registration Standard
The registration in both main- and sub-scan directions may fluctuate within the
following tolerance.
1st side
Sub-scan direction: 0 1.5 mm
Main-scan direction: 0 2 mm
2nd side in duplex
Sub-scan direction: 0 3 mm
Main-scan direction: 0 4 mm

A
B
C
B146R966.WMF
Feed direction
Image Area
A = B = C = 4.2 mm (1.6")
IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS
B132/B200 3-178 SM

Adjustment Procedure
1. Enter SP mode and open SP2109.
2. Print Pattern 10.
NOTE: Print several printing patterns and average the measured values of the
leading edge and side-to-side registration values.
3. Do the leading edge registration adjustment.
Check the leading edge registration and adjust it with SP1001.
Select the adjustment conditions (paper type and process line speed).
Input the value and press the [#] key.
Check the leading edge adjustment by printing Pattern 10 with SP2109.
4. Do the side to side registration adjustment.
Check the side-to-side registration and adjust it with SP1002.
Select the adjustment conditions for the paper feed station.
Input the value and press the [#] key.
Check the side-to-side adjustment by printing Pattern 10 with SP2109.

IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS
SM 3-179 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.19.4 COLOR REGISTRATION
Forced MUSIC Adjustment
The line position adjustment optimizes the quality of color prints. You can do forced
MUSIC adjustment with SP 2111 001:
We recommend that you do the forced MUSIC adjustment at the customer location
immediately after installation, or after servicing or adjusting any parts or
components of the following units:
Around the drum
ITB unit (especially after belt replacement)
Paper Transfer Roller
Laser unit
Adjustment of Line Speed for Thick Paper
Adjust the line speed of the fusing unit (the speed of the K development motor)
when:
Color shift corrected with the line position adjustment.
Color registration shifts more at the trailing edge than at the leading edge.

Color Registration Test and Error Adjustment
Before you start this procedure, make sure that the exposure glass is clean. Also,
make sure that the ITB is installed correctly, especially at the edge.
1. Load A3/DLT paper and select full-color mode.
2. Start SP2109 002 and select pattern 1 (1-dot line), then push the OK button.
3. Push the Copy Window button. Then select A3/DLT paper, and push the
Start button to print the pattern.
NOTE: Make sure that Full Color Mode is selected before you push the Start
button.
4. Look at the printout. The horizontal and vertical lines must show no color (must
be black). In that condition, the K, C, M, and Y images are deposited exactly on
top of each other.
5. If there is color on the printout, there is a color registration error, and we must
correct the problem. To correct the problem, do the MUSIC process with
SP2111 001. This takes about 50 seconds.
6. Do step 2 again.
7. If there are color registration errors, then do the procedure described in Section
4 "4.2.2 Color Registration Error Adjustments".

IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS
B132/B200 3-180 SM

3.19.5 SKEW ADJUSTMENT AFTER LASER UNIT REPLACEMENT
To Print the Trim Pattern:
1. Do SP2109 002 (Test Pattern Select Pattern) and select pattern 10.
2. Touch [Execute] on the display.
3. Touch [Copy Screen] on the display to switch to the normal copier screen.
4. Select the paper size and color then press the [Start] key to print the pattern.
5. Touch [SP Screen].
6. Do SP2109 002 and select pattern 0 and touch the [Execute] button.
7. Check the test pattern to determine whether the image is perpendicular at the
corners.
If the image pattern is correct, no further adjustment is necessary.
-or-
If the pattern is not correct (a skewed parallelogram), go to the next step.

IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS
SM 3-181 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

To Adjust the Pattern Output:
1. Remove the exposure glass. (!3.3.1)
2. Remove the lens cover and lens block. (!3.3.2)
3. Loosen the screws of the laser unit ", #, $, '(! x4).
4. Determine the direction of skew in the printed pattern.
5. Refer to the illustration, then shift the LD unit toward the rear (A) or toward the
front (B) to adjust the skew.
If the skew resembles the left pattern [1], turn the LD unit slightly counter-
clockwise in the B direction.
If the skew resembles the right pattern [2], turn the LD unit slightly
clockwise in the A direction.
Boss 1, Boss 2 provide the reference points for correct alignment.
6. Reassemble the copier and print another trim pattern to confirm that the skew
has been corrected.

A
B
B132R902.WMF
TE
TE TE
LE
LE
LE
Correct Pattern
Laser Unit (Front View)
Laser Unit (Top View)
Left Right
Right
Rear
Front
Top
Bottom
LE: Leading Edge
TE: Trailing Edge
[1]
[2]
Left
Boss 1 Boss 2
" #
$
'
IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS
B132/B200 3-182 SM

3.19.6 PRINTER GAMMA CORRECTION
ACC adjustment done at installation is usually sufficient to adjust the color balance
for optimum performance. Printer gamma correction is required for fine adjustment
to meet a customer requirement.
The printer gamma curve created during ACC can be modified with SP modes. The
gamma data for highlight, middle, shadow areas, and IDmax can be adjusted. The
adjustable range is from 0 to 30 (31 steps).
Copy Mode
KCMY Color Balance Adjustment
The adjustment uses only Offset values.
Important: Never change Option values (default value is 0).

Highlight (Low ID) Levels 2 through 5 in the C4 chart 10-level scale
Middle (Middle ID) Levels 3 through 7 in the C4 chart 10-level scale
Shadow (High ID) Levels 6 through 9 in the C4 chart 10-level scale
ID max
Level 10 in the C4 chart 10-level scale (affects the entire image
density.)
Offset
The higher the number in the range associated with the low ID,
middle ID, high ID, and ID max, the greater the density.

There are four adjustable modes. You can get access to these with SP4918 009:
Copy Photo mode
Copy Text mode
Copy Text (Single Color) mode
Copy Photo (Single Color) mode

B146R967.WMF
IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS
SM 3-183 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

1. Copy the C-4 chart in mode that you want to adjust.
3. Touch Copy SP.
4. Open SP4918 009.
5. Adjust the offset values until the copy quality conforms to the standard. (Refer
the tables below.)
Important
Never change Option value (default value is 0).
Always adjust the density in order: ID Max! Middle! Shadow! Highlight

- Photo Mode, Full Colour -
Step Item to Adjust Level on the C-4 chart Adjustment Standard
1
ID max:
(K, C, M, and Y)
Adjust the offset value so that
the density of level 10 matches
that of level 10 on the C-4 chart.
2
Middle (Middle ID)
(K, C, M, and Y)
3
Shadow (High ID)
(K, C, M, and Y)
4
Highlight (Low ID)
(K, C, M, and Y)
dirty background is not visible on
the copy and the density of level
3 is slightly lighter that of level 3
on the C-4 chart.
5
K Highlight (Low ID)
(C,M, and Y)
<on the full color
copy>
the color balance of black scale
levels 3 through 5 in the copy is
seen as gray (no C, M, or Y
should be visible). If the black
scale contains C, M, or Y, redo
step 1 to 4.

IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS
B132/B200 3-184 SM

- Photo Mode, Single Colour -
Step Item to Adjust Level on the C-4 chart Adjustment Standard
1
ID max:
(K)
2
Middle (Middle ID)
(K)
3
Shadow (High ID)
(K)
4
Highlight (Low ID)
(K)
on the C-4 chart.

- Text (Letter) Mode, Full Colour -

Step Item to Adjust Level on the C-4 chart (K) Adjustment Standard
1
ID max:
(K, C, M, and Y)
2
Middle (Middle ID)
(K, C, M, and Y)
3
Shadow (High ID)
(K, C, M, and Y)
4
Highlight (Low ID)
(K, C, M, and Y)
on the C-4 chart.

IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS
SM 3-185 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

- Text (Letter) Mode, Single Colour -

Step Item to Adjust Level on the C-4 chart (K) Adjustment Standard
1
ID max:
(K)
2
Middle (Middle ID)
(K)
3
Shadow (High ID)
(K)
4
Highlight (Low ID)
(K)
on the C-4 chart.

After "Shadow" adjustment, if text in the test pattern does not print clearly:
Check to determine whether the 5 line/mm pattern at each corner is printed
clearly.
If it is not, adjust the offset value of shadow again until the pattern prints clearly.

IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS
B132/B200 3-186 SM

Printer Mode
There are six adjustable modes. Select these modes with in the Printer SP mode
with SP1102 001:
1200 x 1200 photo mode
600 x 600 text mode
1800 x 600 text mode
1200 x 1200 text mode

K C M Y
Highlight
Middle
Shadow
IDmax
SP1104 001
SP1104 002
SP1104 003
SP1104 004
SP1104 021
SP1104 022
SP1104 023
SP1104 024
SP1104 041
SP1104 042
SP1104 043
SP1104 044
SP1104 061
SP1104 062
SP1104 063
SP1104 064

1. Do the ACC adjustment for the printer mode.
2. Turn the main power off and on.
3. Enter SP mode.
4. Touch Printer SP.
5. Select SP1102 001 and select the print mode that you want to adjust.
6. To review the image quality for these settings, do SP1103 001 to print out a
tone control test sheet.
7. Adjust the color density with SP1104 as shown below while comparing the tone
control test sheet with the C4 test chart.
Important: Always adjust the density in order: ID Max! Middle! Shadow!
Highlight
8. Save the adjusted settings with SP1105 001.

IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS
SM 3-187 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

Adjustment Reference For Gamma Correction
The following tables show the adjustment reference for gamma correction. The
tables show the level of the color scale on the C4 test chart and on the tone control
test sheet printed in the printer SP mode. For example, for K at text mode, grade
12 on the tone control test sheet should be the same as grade 7 on the C4 chart.
Normally, it is not necessary to adjust the gamma data as shown in the table since
ACC adjusts the gamma curve automatically. The fine-tuning of color balance by
gamma data adjustment is necessary only when the results of ACC and Color
Calibration do not meet customer requirements.

C4 test chart 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
600 x 600 - 1 3 5 6 9 10 11 16 -
1800 x 600 - 1 3 5 6 8 10 11 16 - Photo
1200 x 1200 - 1 3 4 6 8 10 12 15 16
600 x 600 - 1 3 5 6 9 10 11 16 -
1800 x 600 - 1 3 5 6 9 10 12 16 -
K
Test
sheet
Text
1200 x 1200 - 1 3 5 6 9 11 12 15 16

C4 test chart 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
600 x 600 - 1 3 5 6 9 10 12 13 14
1800 x 600 - 1 3 5 6 8 10 11 12 13 Photo
1200 x 1200 - 1 3 4 5 8 10 11 12 13
600 x 600 - 1 3 4 5 8 10 11 12 13
1800 x 600 - 1 3 5 6 9 10 11 12 14
C
Test
sheet
Text
1200 x 1200 - 1 3 4 5 9 10 11 12 13

C4 test chart 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
600 x 600 - 1 4 6 8 11 12 14 16 -
1800 x 600 - 1 4 6 8 11 12 15 16 - Photo
1200 x 1200 - 1 4 6 7 10 12 14 16 -
600 x 600 - 1 4 6 7 10 12 14 16 -
1800 x 600 - 1 4 6 8 11 13 14 16 -
M
Test
sheet
Text
1200 x 1200 - 1 4 6 7 10 12 13 16 -

C4 test chart 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
600 x 600 1 3 4 9 11 12 14 15 16 -
1800 x 600 1 3 5 8 10 11 14 15 16 - Photo
1200 x 1200 1 3 5 8 10 11 14 15 16 -
600 x 600 1 2 5 8 10 11 14
14/
15
15 16
1800 x 600 1 3 6 9 10 12 14 15 16 -
Y
Test
sheet
Text
1200 x 1200 1 2 4 7 9 10 13 15 16 -

TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION
B132/B200 3-188 SM

3.20 TOUCH SCREEN CALIBRATION
After clearing memory, or if the touch screen detection function is not working
correctly, calibrate the touch screen.
Important
Do not attempt to use items [2] to [9] on the Self-Diagnostic Menu. These items
are for design use only.
To avoid causing an error, do not touch the Reset key while doing this procedure.

1. Push [Clear] (!, push 1993 press, and then press [Clear/Stop] (") 5 times.

2. Push Touch Screen Adjust (or push "1").

3. Use a pointed (not sharp!) tool to press the upper left mark .
4. Press the lower right mark after it appears.
5. Touch a few spots on the touch screen to confirm that the marker (+) appears
exactly where the screen is touched. If the + mark does not appear where the
screen is touched, push [Cancel] and repeat from Step 2.
6. When you are finished, touch [#] OK on the screen (or push [#] on the
operation panel).
7. Touch [#] Exit on the screen to close the Self-Diagnostic menu and save the
settings.

B140R892.WMF

B140R893.WMF
NIP WIDTH ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE
SM 3-189 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.21 NIP WIDTH ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE
IMPORTANT: If a finisher is installed on the machine, remove it before you
begin these procedures.

3.21.1 MEASURING THE NIP WIDTH:

1. Load one OHP sheet (3M PP2500 Transparency Film) in the bypass tray.
2. Turn OFF Paper Type Detect and Double Feed Detect for the bypass tray.

NOTE: Please refer to Technical Service Bulletin B132/B200 004 PAPER
MISFEED (J098 / J099).
3. Make sure the following SP modes are set to their defaults:
SP1111-002 (Stop Time) Default: 60
SP1111-003 (Stop Interval) Default: 200

4. Access SP1111-001 (Nip Width Mode Execute).
5. Measure the nip width on the OHP sheet and make sure it is within
specification.
NOTE: See Nip Width Specifications on page 2.

Rev. 10/2006
B132/B200 3-190 SM

3.21.2 NIP WIDTH SPECIFICATIONS:

Feed
Direction
[A]
[B]
[C] [D]
[E]
[F]
OHP sheet
Center of OHP
sheet

All of the following must be true.

1. ([E] + [F]) / 2 = 11.1 +/- 0.3 mm

and

2. The difference between [A] and [C] is
0.5 mm or smaller

and

3. The difference between [B] and [D] is
0.5 mm or smaller

Rev. 10/2006
SM 3-191 B132/B200
R
e
p
l
a
c
e
m
e
n
t

&

A
d
j
u
s
t
m
e
n
t

3.21.3 ADJUSTING THE NIP WIDTH:
1. Remove the fusing unit from the copier and place it on the table.

2. Make sure the pressure levers ([I], [J]) are in the upper position as shown in
Photo A.
NOTE: If the levers are not in the upper position, pressure will not be applied
between the fusing belt and pressure roller.

3. Turn screws [G] and [H] to bring the nip width to within specification.
To increase the nip width, turn the screws clockwise.
To decrease the nip width, turn the screws counter-clockwise.
NOTE: One turn of the screw changes the nip width about 0.3 mm.

[G] [H]

[G]
[H]
Clockwise direction
Clockwise direction
[I] [J]
Photo A: OK
[I]
[J]
Photo B: NG

Rev. 10/2006

TROUBLESHOOTING
PROGRAM DOWNLOAD
SM 4-1 B132/B200
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
-
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g

4. TROUBLESHOOTING
4.1 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD
4.1.1 OVERVIEW
Here are some important points to keep in mind when downloading software:
If an error interrupts download processing, the machine cannot operate normally
with the program software only partially downloaded.
When download processing execution starts, Downloading is displayed and
when downloading has completed successfully, the message is cleared.
If the download is interrupted when the Downloading message is displayed,
the machine does not attempt a re-try.
The program that downloads firmware from an SD card is part of the GW
controller software. If downloading this software is interrupted, the program
stored in the machine may be corrupted. Because of this, it may not be possible
to restart the downloading program. (In addition, if the GW controller software
cannot be downloaded, other software on other SD cards cannot be
downloaded.) However, it may be possible to restart the program without
replacing the board by setting DIP SW 1 on the controller to ON, and re-starting.

4.1.2 RECOVERY METHODS
When an error occurs during downloading, an error code is displayed on the
operation panel.
If the download procedure can be re-started, re-start the download procedure.
If the download procedure cannot be downloaded for other than the GW
controller, replace the board where the downloaded program is stored.
If the download procedure cannot be downloaded for the GW controller, set DIP
SW 1 to ON. Power the machine off and on to start the downloading program.
After downloading has completed, set the DIP SW to OFF then power the
machine off and on again.

PROGRAM DOWNLOAD
B132/B200 4-2 SM

4.1.3 DOWNLOAD ERROR CODES

Display Details Recovery
Controller ROM update error 1 01 Reboot after
card insert E01

Module ID
Card No. xx/xx
When the update break data is stored in
NVRAM, the break module information and
the decompression module capable of
writing do not match.
Use the correct card
Controller ROM update error 2. 02 Download Error E02
Power off/on
Error occurs during ROM update program
initialization.
Cycle the machine
off/on to rewrite
Controller ROM update error 3 03 Download Error E03
Power off/on
The ROM for the write operation does not
exist.
Cycle the machine
off/on
Install the missing ROM
DIMM
Power off/on
GZIP data confirmation fails. (CRC value
check)
Cycle the machine
off/on
Set DIP SW 1 to ON
and retry
Replace RAM DIMM
Replace controller board
Power off/on
Error occurs when writing to the device.
Cycle the machine
off/on
Set DIP SW 1 to ON
and retry
Replace RAM DIMM
Power off/on
CPU clock error.
Turn the machine power
off/on.
Set controller DIPSW-1
to ON to force the
machine to write to
ROM.
If you cannot force the
machine to write,
replace the controller
board.
Power off/on
Schedule data is unclear.
Software defective
System error 1 (+SC991) 20 Down Error E20
Power Off/On
The physical address cannot be mapped.
Software/hardware is defective
Cycle the machine
off/on and re-try
System error 2 (+SC991) 21 Download Error E21
Power Off/On
There is not sufficient memory to
download.
Cycle the machine
off/on and re-try.
Replace RAM
Replace the controller
board

PROGRAM DOWNLOAD
SM 4-3 B132/B200
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
-
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g

System error 3 (+SC991) Download Error E22
Module ID
Card No xx/xx
Data fails to decompress. Card
defective.
Cycle the machine
off/on and re-try.
Replace card
Replace controller
board
System error 4
22
SC991
Selfupdate does not execute.
Software defective.
Cycle the machine
off/on and re-try
board
System error 5 23 Download Error E24
Power Off/On
Card read/write error. Software or card
defective.
Cycle the machine
off/on and re-try
Replace the card
board
Download dysfunction 1 30 No Valid Data E30
Print download is not possible. Cannot
download to HDD because HDD not
installed or defective.
HDD defective
HDD harness
disconnected,
defective
Download dysfunction 2 31 Reboot After Card
Insert E31
Module ID
Card No. xx/xx
Download continuity error with more
than one card. The second or later
card is not compatible.
Set the correct cards
in the correct order
Download dysfunction 3 32 Reboot After Card
Insert E32
Module ID
Card No. xx/xx
Download interrupted because card is
not correct, or power failure interrupted
download.
If power failure
caused the failure,
remove the card and
insert another.
Card version error. Attempted to
download program using a card with
the wrong version number.
Specification error. DOM card set in
EXP machine, or vice versa.
Wrong model. The inserted card is for
another model.
Module error. The program that you
are attempting to download does not
exist on the machine, or the contact
points at the card and the machine slot
are not connected.
Use the correct card,
inserted correctly
Install a ROM DIMM if
none is installed
Edit option card error. You attempted
to employ a used card.
Use an unused card
Download result failure 1 40 Download Error E40
Module ID
Card No. xx/xx
Engine download failure.
Cycle the machine
off/on and re-try
Module ID
Card No. xx/xx
Fax download failure.
Cycle the machine
off/on and re-try

Rev. 09/2005
PROGRAM DOWNLOAD
B132/B200 4-4 SM
Module ID
Card No. xx/xx
Operation panel or language download
failed. For this error, sometimes the
message may not be displayed.
Cycle the machine
OFF/ON and re-try.
Module ID
Card No. xx/xx
Print download failed.
Cycle the machine
OFF/ON and re-try.
Module ID Card No. The data targeted for the write
operation could not be accessed.
Turn the machine
power OFF. Then,
install a new System
SD card into Slot #1.
(P/N- SD-Card: Copy
- B1325730)
Download invalid 50 No Valid Data E50
The source data for the update could
not be authenticated.
Use the correct SD
card.
Remote ROM update failure 1 51 (no display)
The source data for the ROM update is
corrupted because the machine is
operating and an SC code has been
issued.
Turn the machine
power OFF/ON and
try again.
Remote ROM update failure 2 52 (no display)
The source data received for the ROM
update is corrupted; it failed a SUM
check due to its abnormal length.
Try again with the
correct data.
Download result failure 6 53 (no display)
The previous download in progress
was cancelled.
Do the download
procedure again.

Rev. 10/2005
PROGRAM DOWNLOAD
SM 4-5 B132/B200
T
r
o
u
b
l
e
-
s
h
o
o
t
i
n
g

4.1.4 IMPORTANT SP CODES
Here is a list of important SP codes that you may need during troubleshooting.

SP5802 Free Run Mode Execute this SP to force base engine to run in the
free run mode for testing.
SP5803 Input Check Displays the signals received from sensors and
switches. Refer to the detailed tables in 4. Service
Tables.
SP5804 Output Check Switches electrical components one by one for
testing. Refer to the detailed tables in 4. Service
Tables.
SP5810 Cancel Fusing SC
Code
Use this to cancel a fusing unit SC code to return
the machine to normal operation after you repair the
machine.
SP5990 SMC Printout Prints the SMC Report. Some SC codes (logged
SPs) are listed only in the SMC Report and do not
appear on the operation panel display.
SP7401 SC Codes Displays the total number of SCs logged.
SP7403 SC History Displays information about the 10 most recent
service calls (Code, Total, Date, and Details).
SP7801 ROM Ver Displays the ROM version numbers of the main
machine and connected peripheral devices.
SP7832 Self-Diagnostic
Report Details
Push [#] to display a list of error codes. Nothing is
displayed if no errors have occurred.

NOTE: For more information about these and other SP codes, see 4. Service
Tables.

SPECIAL PROCEDURES
B132/B200 4-6 SM

4.2 SPECIAL PROCEDURES
4.2.1 SP2181 030 (ALIGNMENT RESULT) ERRORS
After SP2181 030 executes normally, you should see:
1
If you see any number other than a "1", this indicates an error.
Code Error Problem Recovery
0 None Default display.
1 None No action required.
Large amount of skew.
Large amount of K skew.
Large amount of skew in every color.
Print a trim pattern with SP2109 002 Pattern 10.
Density too light. Print a coverage pattern with SP2109 002 Pattern 1.
Check the images.
2 Failure
ITB scratched. Replace the ITB.
ITB misaligned. Reinstall ITB.
SP2153 023 set to 1 (OFF). Set SP2153 023 to 0 (ON).
Image density too light. Output a coverage pattern with SP2109 002 Pattern
1. Check the images.
12 Abnormal detection pattern
Dirty, abnormal images. Output Pattern 1, 18, or 20 with SP2109 002 and
check the images.
ITB misaligned Reinstall ITB.
Image density too light, uneven. Output a coverage pattern with SP2109 002 Pattern
21-23 Auto density out of range (over
or lower)
Connector loose.
Connector dirty.
Harness defective.
Other
Check the ID sensor and its connection.

Rev. 02/2007
SPECIAL PROCEDURES
SM 4-7 B132/B200

Large amount of K skew. Print a trim pattern with SP2109 002 Patten 10.
31-33 Amount of skew calculated in
the coverage pattern abnormal.
Image density too light, uneven. Output a coverage pattern with SP2109 002 Pattern
ITB misaligned.
Image density too light. Output a coverage pattern with SP2109 002 Pattern
41-43 Intersecting lines of the grid
pattern.
check the images.
The settings of sensor lights 1, 2, 3 are different from
the default setting, which is 2050. (These settings are
done with SP2153 020~022.)
check the images.
51-53
Connector loose.
Connector dirty.
Harness defective.
Other
60 Communication error Communication error Turn OFF and turn ON the main switch.
The settings of sensor lights 1, 2, 3 are different from
the default setting, which is 2050. (These settings are
done with SP2153 020~022.)
check the images.
61 Time out of detecting MUSIC
pattern.
Connector loose.
Connector dirty.
Harness defective.
Other

Rev. 02/2007
SPECIAL PROCEDURES
B132/B200 4-8 SM

Image Position Adjustment
A MUSIC error occurs when a large amount of skew occurs beyond the acceptable
range, or when the K sensor is out of position. Such errors can be corrected
manually to correct skew. However, these adjustments cannot correct problems
caused by physical damage to the ITB, filming, density degradation, or a dirty
sensor.
1. Load some A3 paper in Tray 1. Make sure that the side and bottom fences are
set properly.
2. Do SP1002 001 (Side-to-Side Reg Tray 1) and set it to "0".
3. Do SP2109 002 (Test Pattern) then select and print pattern 10: Trim Area.
4. Do SP2101 001 so the left and right margins are 1.5 mm. If the image is cut off
at the edge, use the 1-dot pattern.
5. If any color is separated from black more than 1 mm, do SP2101 002~004 to
bring each color closer to K.
Important
Black skew can cause part of the image to shift off the paper.
Normally, the settings of SP2102 001~004 should be reset to the values in the
SMC report or the values printed on the A5 sheet provided with a new laser unit.
Normally, these values do not change unless the NVRAM becomes corrupted.
Most machines can be adjusted with these values: K: -40, M:-20, C:-10, Y: -5.
Use these values if other information is not available.

SPECIAL PROCEDURES
SM 4-9 B132/B200

4.2.2 COLOR REGISTRATION ERROR ADJUSTMENT
Color Registration Error Correction
1. Start SP 2109 002 and select pattern 1 (1-dot line), then push the OK button.
button.

In the example above, the dotted lines are magenta, cyan, or yellow, and the
solid lines are black.
3. Lay the test pattern flat, and use a lupe to examine the grid patterns.

B132R930.WMF
G NG
B132R942.WMF
Paper Feed Direction
SPECIAL PROCEDURES
B132/B200 4-10 SM
4. Correct the errors in the vertical lines (this corrects errors in the main scan
direction). See the following table for how to do this.
NOTE: In the table, a dotted line indicates a colored line (C, M, or Y). For
example, the first row of the table shows you how to adjust the machine
if a colored line is to the right of the black line on the test pattern.

SP Action

Decrease the value

2101 002 (M)
2101 003 (C)
2101 004 (Y)

Unit of adjustment: One dot (43.2 m)
Increase the value

5. Correct the errors in the horizontal lines (this corrects errors in the sub scan
direction). See the following table for how to do this.

SP Action

Increase the value

2101 013 (M)
2101 014 (C)
2101 015 (Y)

Unit of adjustment: One line (84.6 m)
Decrease the value

6. Do steps 1 and 2 again.
7. If there are color registration errors, then do steps 1 through 6 again.

SPECIAL PROCEDURES
SM 4-11 B132/B200

Color Skew Error Correction
1. Start SP 2109 002 and select pattern 1 (1-dot line), then push the OK button.
button.

In the example above, the dotted lines are magenta, cyan, or yellow, and the
solid lines are black.
3. Correct the skew. See the following table for how to do this

Right SP Action

Increase the value

2104 001 (M)
2104 002 (C)
2104 003 (Y)
Decrease the value

B132R931.WMF

Paper Feed Direction
SPECIAL PROCEDURES
B132/B200 4-12 SM

Overall Check
1. After you do the color registration error and color skew corrections, do a forced
MUSIC again, with SP 2111 001.
2. Do SP 2109 002 and print pattern 1 (1-dot line) on A3/DLT paper again. Check
the skew and color registration. If they are still not acceptable, do the forced
MUSIC again.
3. Do SP 2181-030 to make sure that the forced MUSIC was done correctly. If the
result is 1, then each color was aligned correctly.
If "1" is not shown, then please see section 4.2.1.

Color Registration at the Left and Right Folds of the Test Pattern
Do this procedure after you complete Color Registration Error Correction and
Color Skew Error Correction.
1. Do SP 2109 002 and print pattern 1 (1-dot line) on A3/DLT paper.
button.
2. Fold the test pattern lengthways in half, then fold it in half again as shown
above.
3. Lay the test pattern flat, and use a lupe to examine the grid patterns at the first
crease [A] and third crease [B].
B132R921.WMF
Left Right
Leading Edge
[A]
[B]
SPECIAL PROCEDURES
SM 4-13 B132/B200
When viewed through the lupe, the grid lines on the left and right side should
be perfectly aligned (G) and not misaligned (NG).
4. If the lines are misaligned (NG), use the lupe to measure distance between the
black vertical lines and each of the colored vertical lines (C, M, Y). Measure this
on the left and right folds:
If there is a gap between the black lines and a colored line, measure it and
correct it with SPs as shown in the tables below.

Left Right Remarks SP Action

Gap on the left
is different from
the gap on the
right

Gaps are the
same or
different.
2112 001 (M) Left Fold
2112 002 (M) Right Fold
2112 003 (C) Left Fold
2112 004 (C) Right Fold
2112 005 (Y) Left Fold
2112 006 (Y) Right Fold

Unit of adjustment: 50 m
To move a color toward
the left edge, decrease
the SP value.
To move a color toward
the right edge, increase
the SP value.

G NG
B132R942.WMF
SPECIAL PROCEDURES
B132/B200 4-14 SM

4.2.3 SP3812 001 (DevSetup Execute) ERRORS
After SP3812 001 executes normally, you should see four 1s:
1111
Reading from left to right, each "1" indicates the status of the PCUs: K, M, C, Y.
If you see any number other than a "1", this indicates an error.
SP3812 001 Error Codes
2 Execution
Interrupted
Door was opened, or
another color returned
an error. Execution halts
at the first error
encountered or if the
front door is opened
during execution.
Check the preceding error codes. Never
open the front door during execution.
3 Vt Abnormal The reading of Vt (TD
sensor output) is less
than 5 V.
Check the operation panel for a developer
set error (SC336~SC339). Check the
PCUs and confirm that all the film seals
have been removed to release the
developer from the developer cartridge.
4 Did Not Execute SP Default Displayed when you open this SP code.
No action is necessary.
8 Toner Supply
Abnormal
At the end of the toner
filling cycle, the toner
end sensor detected no
toner.
Check the toner supply unit.
9 Vtcnt Abnormal Vtref (control reference
voltage) could not be
adjusted to within 0.2 V
of Vt (TD sensor output).
This is a TD sensor adjustment error
(SC372~sC375). Execute SP3801 again
for the PCU that returned the error. If this
does not recover operation, check the
following:
Film seal not removed from a new
developer pack
TD harness sensor disconnected, loose
or defective
TD sensor defective
Harness between TD sensor and
drawer disconnected, defective

SPECIAL PROCEDURES
SM 4-15 B132/B200

4.2.4 PROCESS CONTROL TROUBLESHOOTING
Summary of Process Control SC Codes
This is a list of SC codes that may occur during process control. For more, please
refer to the process control tables on the following pages.
Pre-Processing Check
SC316 to SC319 Vpp is not within the normal range (Vpp: the AC current applied to the
charge roller to compensate for changes in the ambient temperature and
humidity). Insufficient charge causes white spotting and too much charge
causes toner to film on the surface of the drum. Vpp must be > 2.8 kV.
SC400 ID sensor could not be calibrated. An abnormal ID sensor condition is
detected when before calibration begins, Vsg < 0.5V or after calibration, Vsg
cannot be adjusted to 4.00.2V.
SC418 Correct current could not be supplied to the ID sensor.
SC436 to SC439 A problem is detected with a potential sensor during calibration.
Potential Control
SC410 to SC413 The development gamma is out of range (not between 0.3 and 6.0) for a
color.
SC414 to SC417 Vk is out of range (not within 150V) for a color. If the development potential
is less than Vk, toner is not applied to the drum.
SC420 to SC423 Vd cannot be adjusted to the target voltage for a drum.
SC424 to SC427 The potential sensor detects that Vpl is not 10V of the target Vpl after
exposure of the ID sensor patterns.
SC432 to SC435 The residual voltage on a drum is greater than -200V.
TD Sensor Output Calibration
SC360 to SC367 An abnormal condition is detected when output of one of the TD sensors
fails to fall within the range of 0.5V to 4.5V.
Process Control Gamma Correction
SC410 to SC413 The development gamma for black, magenta, cyan, or yellow is not within
range (0.3 to 6.0).
SC414 to SC417 The development start voltage (Vk) for black, magenta, cyan, or yellow PCU
is not within range (150V)

SPECIAL PROCEDURES
B132/B200 4-16 SM

Process Control Self-Check: SP3821
After the process control self-check is executed manually with SP3820, you can
execute SP3821 to check the results of the self-check. The possible error codes are
listed in the "Displayed Code" column in the table below.
When you do SP3821, the normal display (no errors) will look like this:
10101010
Reading from left to right each "10" represents a color: K, M, C, Y.
If a problem occurs, the code will appear in the column for the color PCU where the
error has occurred. For example, If a Vdhome error (Code 15) (see table below)
occurs in the M PCU, the display will look like this:
10151010
Or if an ID sensor error (Code 21) (see table below) occurs in the Y PCU:
10101021
NOTE: "99" displays while SP3821 executes.
Important: Noise and static electricity can damage the many sensors that are used
during the process control self-check. Because of this, always turn the machine off
before doing any procedure described below that requires disassembly.

SPECIAL PROCEDURES
SM 4-17 B132/B200

General Displayed
Code
Item Major Cause Action
Normal 10 Successful --- ---
15 VdHome Error
1
V0 (SP3571) above 700V, or
VdHome (SP3572) above 700V.
The window of the potential
sensor probe fouled with toner
Potential sensor damaged
Do SP2260 001 to check the function of the potential sensor.
Do SP2261 to check the Vd, Voffset readings. For more, see
Section 6. Development has recovered if the Vd is -700V and offset
is -10V.
Remove the PCU. Use a blower brush to clean the window of the
potential sensor probe, then check the sensor again with SP2601.
If normal operation cannot be restored, replace the potential sensor
probe.
16 VdHome Error
2
V0 (SP3571) below 700V, or
VdHome (SP3772) below 500V.
Potential sensor relay board
damaged
Drum abnormal
Charge roller damaged
Drum motor not operating
Do SP2260 001 to check the function of the potential sensor.
Do SP2261 to check the Vd reading. For more, see Section 6.
Development has recovered if the Vd is -700V.
Remove the malfunctioning PCU with an functioning PCU, turn the
machine off then on, then do the potential sensor check again.
If the replaced PCU does not function normally, then the problem is
on the machine side, or the potential sensor relay board is
malfunctioning.
If the replaced PCU functions normally, then there may be a
problem with the drum or the charge unit. Replace the PCU.
Potential
Sensors
17 VdHome
Calculation
Error
VdHome could not be calculated.
This is a software calculation error
(not a hardware problem)
Switch the machine off/on then execute SP3820 001.
21 ID Sensor Vsg
Adjust Error
Vsg_reg (SP3121) is out of range
(not within 4.00.2V).
ID sensor fouled with dust,
toner
ITB undulating or out of
position
Remove the ITB unit.
Make sure the belt is mounted correctly.
Clean the windows of the ID sensors with alcohol and a clean cloth.
Be sure to wipe the sensor apertures with a wet cloth. A dry cloth
may generate static which can attract dust.
ID Sensors
22 ID Sensor LED
Current Error
LED PWM (SP3131) greater than
3000.
ID sensor fouled with dust,
toner
ID sensor deteriorated
Remove the ITB unit and check the ID sensors.
Clean the windows of the ID sensors with alcohol and a clean cloth.
Be sure to wipe the sensor apertures with a wet cloth. A dry cloth
may generate static which can attract dust.
If the apertures are clean, then the LED of an ID sensor may have
deteriorated. Replace the ID sensor plate.
SPECIAL PROCEDURES
B132/B200 4-18 SM
General Displayed
Code
23 ID Sensor
Output Error
Vsg_reg (SP3121) less than 0.5V.
ID sensor harness loose,
disconnected, damaged
ID sensor damaged
Note: Vsg_reg refers to the
reading of the drum surface done
with the direct reflection sensors
in both the color and black ID
sensors.
Remove the ITB unit.
Check the ID sensor harness connections and make sure that they
are tight.
Check the harnesses for breaks.
If the harnesses are undamaged and tightening the connections
does not solve the problem, replace the ID sensor plate.
31 AC Charge
Adjust Error 1
Vpp could not be adjusted after
20 attempts.
Bias path defective
Charge gap abnormal (too
large)
Charge roller dirty
Drum coated with film

Make sure that the bias path and drum are grounded correctly.
Check the drum and both ends of the charger roller for any foreign
matter.
Check the gap between the charge roller and the drum to confirm
that it is not too large.
If the grounds and gap is normal, clean the charger roller or replace
it.
AC Charge
32 AC Charge
Adjust Error 2
Vpp greater than 2.80 kV.
Bias path defective
Charge gap abnormal
Charge roller dirty, defective

Make sure that the bias path and drum are grounded correctly.
Check the drum and both ends of the charger roller for any foreign
matter.
Check the gap between the charge roller and the drum to confirm
that it is not too large.
If the grounds and gap is normal, clean the charger roller or replace
it.
SPECIAL PROCEDURES
SM 4-19 B132/B200
General Displayed
Code
ID Sensor
Pattern
Detection
55 Development
Gamma Error
1
Development gamma (SP3561)
greater than 6.0 (mg/cm
2
/-kV).
Switch the machine off and on then do SP3820 002.
Do SP3561 005 to 008 to confirm that development gamma is within
the target range (-0.15 to +0.25)
If not within the target range, do the procedure again.
If the machine returns SC410 to SC413 and process control does not
end normally, do this procedure:
1. Change the settings for SP3301 001~004 from "1" (PID) to "0"
(Fixed).
2. Do SP2109 002 and select Pattern 12.
3. Change the settings of SP2109 005 to 008 from 63 to 0, except for
the color which showed a development gamma error.
4. Return to the copy window and do the test print at least 10
patterns.
5. Do SP3820 002.
If the patterns are normal, do Steps 2 and 3.
If the patterns are not normal, repeat Steps 2 to 5.
6. Do SP3301 001 to restore PID toner supply.
SPECIAL PROCEDURES
B132/B200 4-20 SM
General Displayed
Code
56 Development
Gamma Error
2
Development gamma (SP3561)
less than 0.3 (mg/cm
2
/-kV)
Toner supply abnormal
Image transfer power pack
defective
Toner shield glass dirty
1. Do SP2109 002 and select Pattern 12.
2. Do SP2109 005 to 008 and change the settings of these SP codes
from 63 (default) to 0.
3. Return to the copy window and do the test print 1 pattern.
4. Check the pattern to determine whether the image density is
extremely light.
6. Open the front door, remove the toner supply unit and check the
toner shield glass for dirt.
7. Remove the face plate, replace the malfunctioning PCU with a
functioning PCU, then turn the machine on and repeat Steps 1 to 3
to print the coverage test pattern.
8. If normal operation cannot be recovered:
Replace the image transfer power pack.
Open the development unit to see if there is too much or too little
developer.
If the developer supply is normal, remove the toner end sensor to
see if there is toner in the sub hopper.
If the sub hopper is empty, the powder pump is defective.
Replace the toner supply unit.
If the sub hopper is full, the toner end sensor is defective.
Replace the toner supply unit.
If the level of developer is either too high or too low, replace the
developer.
57 Vk Error 1 Vk (development start voltage)
greater than 150V.
Replace the developer.
58 Vk Error 2 Vk (development start voltage)
less than
150V.
Replace the developer.
59 Insufficient
Active Data
Not enough active data to
calculate development gamma
(only "0" or "1").

Do the "Action" procedure for no. "55" described above.
SPECIAL PROCEDURES
SM 4-21 B132/B200
General Displayed
Code
61 LD Failure A laser diode failed to fire and
write the ID sensor pattern.
PCU set incorrectly
Laser diode defective
1. Copy the color test pattern to determine which color is abnormal.
3. Open the front door, remove the toner supply unit and check the
4. Reassemble the machine, switch the machine on, then do SP3820
001.
Notes
The probes of the potential sensors of each PCU are located at
different positions. This failure can be caused by installing a
potential sensor at the incorrect position. However, you can
eliminate this as a cause if a new PCU is installed. (A guide ensures
prevents a PCU from being installed at the wrong location.)
If the machine fails to return SC240~SC243, you can eliminate a
defective LD as the cause of the problem.
62 Vr Error Vr (residual voltage) greater than
200V.
Drum deteriorated
Open the front door, remove the toner supply unit, and check the
Clean the glass then do SP3820 001.
If this does not solve the problem, replace the drum.
63 Vd Adjust
Error
Vd could not be adjusted within
10V.
Charge roller dirty
Drum defective
Replace the charge roller
Replace the drum.
Potential
Adjustment
64 Vpl Adjust
Error
Vpl could not be adjusted within
5V.
Drum deteriorated due to
filming
Charge roller dirty
Replace the charge roller
Replace the drum.
90 Potential
Adjust Error
SP3501 (potential control method)
is set to 1 (Fixed).
Do SP3501 001 and select "0" (Auto). Abnormal
End
99 Forced
Termination
Door open, power off, or other
problem interfering with process
control self-check.
Make sure the machine is turned on.
Make sure the front door is closed completely.
SPECIAL PROCEDURES
B132/B200 4-22 SM

4.2.5 COLOR ADJUSTMENT FOR CONNECTED COPIERS
This procedure may be required for copiers after they are connected with the
Copier Connection Kit B328. Do this procedure only if you or the customer notices
that the color quality between the two copiers is different.
The scanner gamma curve and printer gamma curve are adjusted at the factory for
each machine. However, small differences between machines may arise due to
fluctuations in the tolerances of scanner or image processing components.
The following two adjustments calibrate these differences to within acceptable
standards.
1. Color Adjustment with Connection Kit Color Test Chart (P/N VSST9501)
This adjusts the scanner gamma curve of each machine [A], [B] connected with the
Copier Connection Kit B328. The scanner gamma curve is adjusted to equalize the
scanner input with the scanner output.
2. ACC (Auto Color Calibration)
This adjusts the printer gamma curves [E], [F] of each machine connected with the
Copier Connection Kit B328.

[A]: Scanner gamma curve Machine 1
[B]: Scanner gamma curve Machine 2
[C]: HDD Machine 1
[D]: HDD Machine 2
[E]: Printer gamma curve Machine 1
[F]: Printer gamma curve Machine 2

B132D100.WMF
[A] [B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
SPECIAL PROCEDURES
SM 4-23 B132/B200
To adjust the main machine:
1. Place the test charge Connection Kit Color Test Chart (P/N VSST9501) on the
exposure glass, with the arrow mark on the chart aligned with the left rear
corner.
2. Do SP4954 001 (Read/Restore Std) and touch [Execute].
After about 10 seconds, the "Completed" message appears.
Important: If "Completed" appears immediately after touching [Execute], the
adjustment may have failed. Do the procedure again.
3. After doing SP4954 001, do the ACC procedure. For more, see Section "1.
Installation"

To adjust the sub machine:
4. Do Steps 1 to 3 for the sub machine.

Compare the results
5. Set the two machines for full color, and do some sample color copies.
6. Compare the results from the two copiers. If the results are not good, do the
procedure again from step 1.

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
B132/B200 4-24 SM

4.3 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
4.3.1 SERVICE MODE LOCK/UNLOCK
At locations where the machine contains sensitive data, the customer engineer
cannot operate the machine until the Administrator turns the service mode lock off.
This function makes sure that work on the machine is always done with the
permission of the Administrator.
1. If you cannot go into the SP mode, ask the Administrator to log in with the
Operator Tool and then set Service Mode Lock to OFF. After he or she logs
in:
Operator Tools > System Settings > Administrator Tools > Service Mode Lock
> OFF
This unlocks the machine and lets you get access to all the SP codes.
The CE can do servicing on the machine and turn the machine off and on. It
is not necessary to ask the Administrator to log in again each time the
machine is turned on.
2. If you must use the printer bit switches, go into the SP mode and set SP 5169
to 1.
3. After machine servicing is completed:
Change SP 5169 from 1 to 0.
Turn the machine off and on. Tell the administrator that you completed
servicing the machine.
The Administrator will then set the Service Mode Lock to ON.

SM 4-25 B132/B200
4.3.2 SERIES SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
There are 4 levels of service call conditions.
Level Definition Reset Procedure
A
Fusing unit SCs displayed on the operation
panel. The machine is disabled. The operator
cannot reset the SC.
Enter SP mode, execute 5810
then turn the main power
switch off and on.
B
SCs that disable only the features that use the
defective item. These SCs are not shown to the
operator under normal conditions. They are
displayed on the operation panel only when the
defective feature is selected.
Turn the main power switch off
and on.
C
SCs that are not shown on the operation panel.
They are internally logged.
Logging only
D
Turning the operation switch (or main power
switch) off then on resets these SCs. These SCs
are displayed on the operation panel and
displayed again if the error reoccurs.
Turn the operation switch (or
main power switch) off and on,
or the machine reboots
automatically. (See below.)

When a Level D SC code occurs
When a Level D SC occurs, a screen opens on the operation panel to tell the
operator:
An error occurred
The job in progress will be erased
The machine will reboot automatically after approximately 30 seconds.
The operator can wait until the machine reboots automatically or touch Reset on
the screen to reset the machine immediately and go back to the copy screen.
If the operator does not touch Reset
The next message tells the operator that the machine will reset automatically and
that the previous job was lost and must be started again. After reading the
message, the operator touches Confirm on the screen. The next screen shows
the number and title of the SC code, and stops until the operator turns the machine
off and on.
If the operator touches Reset
If the operator touches "Reset" to bypass the 30-second interval for the machine to
reboot, the machine reboots immediately and the operation panel displays the copy
screen.
Important
Do not try to use the operation panel during an automatic reboot.
If the Remote Service System is in use, the SC code is sent immediately to the
Service Center

B132/B200 4-26 SM

4.3.3 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS
Important
If a problem concerns a circuit board, disconnect and reconnect the connectors
and then test the machine. Often a loose or disconnected harness is the cause
of the problem. Always do this before you decide to replace the PCB.
If a motor lock error occurs, check the mechanical load before you decide to
replace the motor or sensors.
When a Level A or B SC occurs while in an SP mode, the machine cannot
display the SC number. If this occurs, check the SC number after leaving the SP
mode.
The machine reboots automatically when the machine issues a Level D SC
code. This is done for Level D SC codes only. (4.3.2)

CAUTION
Never turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing.
To avoid damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation switch to
switch the power off, wait for the power LED to go off, and then switch the
main power switch off.

NOTE: The main power LED ( ) lights or flashes while the platen cover or
ARDF is open, while the main machine is communicating with a facsimile
or the network server, or while the machine is accessing the hard disk or
memory for reading or writing data.

SM 4-27 B132/B200

SC codes Group 1: Scanning
Exposure lamp error SC101 D
The white level peak did not
reach the prescribed threshold
when the white plate was
scanned.
Dirty optics
Exposure lamp defective
Exposure lamp does not turn on
Lamp stabilizer defective
High voltage line leak
Power/signal harness defective

Scanner home position error 1 SC120 D
The scanner home position
sensor did not detect the home
position (did not go OFF) after
the scanner moved forward 20
mm..
Scanner motor driver board defective
Scanner motor defective
Scanner HP sensor defective
Harness between scanner motor and
scanner I/O board disconnected or
broken.

Scanner home position error 2 SC121 D
The scanner home position
sensor did not go ON after the
scanner moved forward 1 mm
and the feeler entered the HP
sensor.
Scanner motor defective
Scanner HP sensor disconnected,
defective

Black level detection error SC141 D
During AGC the value for black
level was not within 2 of the
prescribed value. The copier can
reproduce monochrome, but not
color.
SBU defective
Harness defective

White level detection error SC142 D
During AGC the value for white
level was not within 7 of the
prescribed value.
Exposure lamp defective
Harness disconnected, damaged
Dirty exposure glass, optics
Scanner motor, drive assembly defective
SBU board defective

B132/B200 4-28 SM

SBU communication error SC144 D
When the machine is switched
on, or when the machine returns
to full operation from the energy
save mode, the machine can not
access the SBU register, or the
SBU register values are
abnormal.
Dirty exposure glass or optics
SBU board defective
SBU harness disconnected, defective

IDU error SC161 D
After the command is written into the DFID
self-diagnosis startup register, the correct
value is not stored in the register for the
prescribed length of time after power on.
-or-
After the negate interruption of FGATE
occurs, IDU is not recognized within the
prescribed time during scanning.
IPU board defective
(defective connection
between ASIC and DFID,
defective LSYNC)

Scanner fan lock
001 One of the fan motors next to the
exposure lamp did not switch on
within 0.5 sec after the CPU issued
the ON signal.
SC180 D
002 The scanner fan motor next to the
SIOB did not switch on within 0.5 sec.
after the CPU issued the ON signal.
Fan defective
Foreign object interfering
with operation of fan
Motor harness loose,
disconnected, or broken
SIOB defective
SBU defective

Machine serial number error SC195 D
The number registered for the machine
serial number does not match.
Confirm the correct serial
number of the machine in the
specifications
IMPORTANT!
WHEN SC195 OCCURS, THE
SERIAL NUMBER MUST BE
INPUT. PLEASE CONTACT
YOUR TECHNICAL
SUPERVISOR.
IF THE CONTROL BOARD HAS
BEEN REPLACED, ENSURE
THAT THE NVRAM FROM THE
OLD BOARD IS INSTALLED ON
THE REPLACEMENT BOARD.
.

Rev. 08/2007
SM 4-29 B132/B200

SC codes Group 2: Exposure
Polygon motor error 1: ON timeout SC202 D
The polygon mirror motor does
not reach the targeted operating
speed:
Within 10 seconds after
turning on.
Within 10 sec. after changing
speed
Harness to polygon motor driver board
disconnected, defective
Polygon motor defective
Polygon motor driver board defective
Polygon motor defective.

Polygon motor error 2: OFF timeout SC203 D
The polygon mirror motor does
leave the READY status within
10 seconds after the polygon
motor switches off.
Polygon motor defective.

Polygon motor error 3: XSCRDY signal error SC204 D
The SCRDY_N signal goes
HIGH (inactive) while the laser
diode is firing.

Polygon motor error 4: XSCRDY signal unstable SC205 D
When the polygon motor
switches on, or after the speed
of the motor changes, the
SCRDY_N signal goes HIGH
(inactive).

SC210 D Laser beam detection error 1: K (Black)
SC211 D Laser beam detection error 1: Y (Yellow)
SC212 D Laser beam detection error 1: M (Magenta)
SC213 D Laser beam detection error 1: C (Cyan)
The laser synchronization sensor
failed to detect the beginning and end
of the laser beam flash for the
designated color onto the polygon
mirror while the mirror is rotating at
the prescribed number of revolutions.
Laser synchronization
detector sensor connection
loose, not connected
Laser synchronization
detector sensor defective

B132/B200 4-30 SM

Laser Synchronization Detector Error 1: K Leading Edge: LD0 SC220 D
While the polygon motor is
rotating normally, no
synchronizing detection signal is
output for LD0 black, or leading
edge, even after the laser diode
has been firing for 2 sec.
Harness between the laser synchronizing
detector and I/F unit is disconnected,
defective
Laser synchronizing detector defective
Beam not reflected in photo detection
GAVD on the BICU is defective
LD driver board defective
LDB defective
BICU defective
Check board connections, replace

Laser Synchronization Detector Error 2: K Leading Edge (Other than LD0) SC221 D
output for black, leading edge for
any LD other than LD0, even
after the laser diode has been
firing for 2 sec.
GAVD on the BICU defective
LD driver defective
LDB defective
BICU defective

Laser Synchronization Detector Error 1: Y Leading Edge: LD0 SC222 D
output for LD0 yellow, leading
defective
LDB defective
BICU defective

Laser Synchronization Detector Error 2: Y Leading Edge (Other than LD0) SC223 D
output for yellow, leading edge
for any LD other than LD0, even
firing for 2 sec.
LD driver defective
LDB defective
BICU defective

SM 4-31 B132/B200

Laser Synchronization Detector Error 1: M Leading Edge: LD0 SC224 D
output for LD0 magenta, leading
defective
LDB defective
BICU defective

Laser Synchronization Detector Error 2: M Leading Edge (Other than LD0) SC225 D
output for magenta, leading
edge for any LD other than LD0,
even after the laser diode has
been firing for 2 sec.
LD driver defective
LDB defective
BICU defective

Laser Synchronization Detector Error 1: C Leading Edge: LD0 SC226 D
output for LD0 cyan, leading
defective
LDB defective
BICU defective

Laser Synchronization Detector Error 2: C Leading Edge (Other than LD0) SC227 D
output for cyan, leading edge for
any LD other than LD0, even
firing for 2 sec.
LD driver defective
LDB defective
BICU defective

B132/B200 4-32 SM

FGATE error 1: Feedback remains HIGH for K write SC230 D
After the start of timing to create
the black image, the PFGATE
register of the GAVD does not
assert, even after 5 sec. when:
Images are created on the
drum.
MUSIC patterns are created
on the transfer belt.
The BICU received no feedback
(LOW signal) from the LD unit to
indicate that the lasers started
firing at the prescribed time to
create the patterns.
PCI I/F on the IPU defective
ASIC on the IOB defective
Controller board disconnected, defective
Harness between the BICU and LDB unit
disconnected, loose, or defective.

FGATE error 1: Feedback remains LOW for K write SC231 D
the black image, the PFGATE
drum.
The BICU received a LOW
feedback signal, but the signal
remained LOW (indicating the
lasers were still operating), even
after creation of the next image
should have started.

FGATE error 1: Feedback remains HIGH for Y write SC232 D
the yellow image, the PFGATE
drum.

SM 4-33 B132/B200

FGATE error 1: Feedback remains LOW for Y write SC233 D
the yellow image, the PFGATE
drum.

FGATE error 1: Feedback remains HIGH for M write SC234 D
the magenta image, the
PFGATE register of the GAVD
does not assert, even after 5
sec. when:
drum.
Harness between the BICU LDB unit

FGATE error 1: Feedback remains LOW for M write SC235 D
the magenta image, the
PFGATE register of the GAVD
does not assert, even after 5
sec. when:
drum.

B132/B200 4-34 SM

FGATE error 1: Feedback remains HIGH for C write SC236 D
the cyan image, the PFGATE
drum.

FGATE error 1: Feedback remains LOW for C write SC237
the cyan image, the PFGATE
drum.

SC240 C LD error 1: K
SC241 C LD error 1: Y
SC242 C LD error 1: M
SC243 C LD error 1: C
An error is asserted at the LD
error terminal of the black,
yellow, magenta, or cyan LD
driver after initialization of the LD
because the power to the LD
was higher or lower than the
prescribed limit.
LD defective due to wear, damage, short
circuit
LDB harness disconnected, loose or
defective

SM 4-35 B132/B200

Optical unit sensor error SC268 C
At power on, one of the two
temperature sensors in the
optics unit detected a
temperature lower than 0C for
more than 1 sec.
-or-
It detected a temperature higher
than 100C for more than 1 sec.
Thermistor disconnected (causes
extremely low temperature reading)
Thermistor damaged and short circuited
(causes extremely high temperature
reading)
BICU defective

Exposure thermistor 2 error SC269 C
At power on, exposure
thermistor 2 detected a
temperature lower than 0C for
more than 1 sec.
-or-
It detected a temperature higher
than 100C for more than 1 sec.
Thermistor disconnected (causes
extremely low temperature reading)
Thermistor damaged and short circuited
(causes extremely high temperature
reading)
BICU defective

SC270 C Mirror motor upper/lower limit: Y (Yellow)
SC271 C Mirror motor upper/lower limit: M (Magenta)
SC272 C Mirror motor upper/lower limit: C (Cyan)
The pulse rate of the mirror motor reaches
the upper or lower limit.
Note: SP2182 displays the pulse rate for
each motor.
3
rd
mirror motor is defective.
3
rd
mirror motor connecter is
not connected correctly.

MUSIC error SC285 D
An error with the MUSIC occurs
four times since the last time the
main power was turned ON.
ITB defective
MUSIC sensors are dirty
MUSIC sensors are defective

Rev. 07/2005
B132/B200 4-36 SM

SC Codes Group 3: Image Development 1
SC300 D AC charge output error 1: K
SC301 D AC charge output error 2: M
SC302 D AC charge output error 3: C
SC303 D AC charge output error 4: Y
An interrupt checks the status of
the power pack every 2 ms. This
SC is issued if the BICU detects
a short in the AC charge for
black, magenta, cyan, or yellow
(V = 0, for example) for 500 ms
(250 times).
High voltage power supply
BICU defective
OPC unit defective

1. Disconnect the high voltage cable from Terminal C of the multiple high-
voltage supply board.
2. Attach a voltmeter to the terminal.
3. If there is no output from the terminal, replace the high voltage power
supply.
-or-
If there is output from the terminal, test the resistance between the high
voltage cable and the ground. If resistance is nearly "0", check the high-
voltage harness for defects and replace it if necessary.
4. Test the conductivity between the OPC unit and the ground. If there is no
conductivity between the OPC unit and ground, replace the OPC unit.
5. If there is no charge PWM signal, replace the harness and/or BICU.

SC312 D Charge, development error 1: K
SC313 D Charge, development error 2: M
SC314 D Charge, development error 3: C
SC315 D Charge, development error 4: Y
500 ms after the black, magenta, cyan, and
yellow drums start to rotate, the machine
starts to monitor the AC current feedback at
8 ms intervals. This is SC is issued if the
feedback for the charge unit of any color
drops below 0.5V for 400 ms (50
consecutive readings).
Make sure that the settings
of SP2202 are at the
defaults.
Defective charge roller
Defective power pack

SC316 D AC bias charge adjustment error 1: K
SC317 D AC bias charge adjustment error 2: M
SC318 D AC bias charge adjustment error 3: C
SC319 D AC bias charge adjustment error 4: Y
An average value of 8 ms/cycle could
not be attained for Vpp (AC charge
bias) within 15 attempts.
-or-
The output of the AC charge boosted
Vpp over 2.8 kV.
Charge roller dirty
Charge roller defective
Bias terminal connection at
the PCU receptacle is dirty or
defective

SM 4-37 B132/B200

SC320 D Development power pack error 1: K
SC321 D Development power pack error 2: M
SC322 D Development power pack error 3: C
SC323 D Development power pack error 4: Y
the each power pack every 2
ms. This SC is issued if the
BICU detects a short in the
development DC charge for
black, magenta, cyan, or yellow
(or V = 0) for 500 ms (250
times).
Development power pack defective
High voltage power supply defective
High voltage power supply harness
defective
Development unit defective
IOB harness disconnected or defective
IOB defective

1. Disconnect the high voltage cable from Terminal B of the high-voltage
supply board.
2. Attach a voltmeter to the terminal.
3. If there is no output from the terminal, replace the high voltage power
supply.
-or-
If there is output from the terminal, test the resistance between the high
voltage cable and the ground.
If resistance is "0" or nearly "0", check the high-voltage harness for defects
and replace it if necessary.
If replacing the harness does not solve the problem,
4. Test the resistance between the development unit terminal and the ground.
If there is no resistance (0) between the development unit and the ground,
replace the development unit.
5. If there is no development PWM signal, replace the harness and/or IOB.

SC324 D Development motor error 1: K
SC325 D Development motor error 2: M
SC326 D Development motor error 3: C
SC327 D Development motor error 4: Y
The PLL lock signal remained
HIGH or LOW for longer than
the prescribed time for the
development motor of the
affected color.
Development motor shaft locked, blocked
by and obstruction
DRB (Drive Board) defective

B132/B200 4-38 SM

SC336 D Developer set error 1: K
SC337 D Developer set error 2: M
SC338 D Developer set error 3: C
SC339 D Developer set error 4: Y
The value of Vcnt is set at the
maximum or minimum setting
when the TD sensor is
initialized.
Film seal not removed from the black,
magenta, cyan, or yellow developer case
Pull out the film seal from the black, magenta, cyan, or yellow developer case.
Be sure to do the correct SP for the affected color:
SP3801 003 to initialize the TD sensor for black.
SP3801 004 to initialize the TD sensor for magenta.
SP3801 005 to initialize the TD sensor for cyan.
SP3801 006 to initialize the TD sensor for yellow.

SC340 D Toner cartridge set error 1: K
SC341 D Toner cartridge set error 2: M
SC342 D Toner cartridge set error 3: C
SC343 D Toner cartridge set error 4: Y
The machine cannot read the ID
chip of the black, magenta,
cyan, or yellow toner cartridge.
Black, magenta, cyan, or yellow toner
cartridge set incorrectly
2. Press down the release lever on the top edge of the toner bin to of the affect
toner cartridge to release it, then pull the bin out to open it.
3. Remove the toner cartridge and set it again.

Toner supply motor error SC348 D
2 sec. after the motor START signal is
output, a LOCK signal cannot be detected.
Motor harness disconnected,
loose, or defective
Powder pump overload
Sub hopper overload
Toner hopper motor
defective

SM 4-39 B132/B200

SC360 D TD sensor (Vt high) error 1: K
SC361 D TD sensor (Vt high) error 2: M
SC362 D TD sensor (Vt high) error 3: C
SC363 D TD sensor (Vt high) error 4: Y
The Vt value of the black,
magenta, cyan, or yellow TD
sensor exceeds 4.5V for two
counts.
Black, magenta, cyan, or yellow TD
sensor disconnected
Harness between TD sensor and PCU
defective
Defective TD sensor.

1. Turn the machine off and on.
2. Check the black, magenta, cyan, or yellow TD sensor connector and
harness between the TD sensor and PCU for damage.
3. Check the drawer connector.
4. Replace the TD sensor.
5. After replacing the black TD sensor:
Do SP3801 003-006 to initialize the new black, magenta, cyan, or yellow
TD sensor.
Execute SP3820 001 to do auto process control manually.

SC364 D TD sensor (Vt low) error 1: K
SC365 D TD sensor (Vt low) error 2: M
SC366 D TD sensor (Vt low) error 3: C
SC367 D TD sensor (Vt low) error 4: Y
The Vt value of the black,
magenta, cyan, or yellow TD
sensor is below 0.5V for 10
counts.
TD sensor harness disconnected, loose,
defective
A drawer connector (located on the rear
of a development unit) disconnected,
loose, defective
TD sensor defective

2. Check the TD sensor connector and harness between the TD sensor and
PCU for damage. Replace it if necessary.
3. Check the drawer connector.
TD sensor.

B132/B200 4-40 SM

SC372 D TD sensor adjustment error 1: K
SC373 D TD sensor adjustment error 2: M
SC374 D TD sensor adjustment error 3: C
SC375 D TD sensor adjustment error 4: Y
During TD sensor initialization
with SP3801, the output value of
the black, magenta, cyan, or
yellow TD sensor is not within
the range of 3.20.2V
Film seal not removed from a new
developer pack
TD harness sensor disconnected, loose
or defective
TD sensor defective
Harness between TD sensor and drawer
2. Pull out the film seal from the black, magenta, cyan, or yellow PCU.
3. Do SP3812 001 to confirm that the developer was initialized correctly. The
display should show "1111" if developer initialized correctly.
4. Check the TD sensor connector.
5. Check the TD sensor connector and harness between the TD sensor and
PCU for damage. Replace it if necessary.
6. Check the drawer PCU connector.
TD sensor.

SC396 D Drum motor error 1: K
SC397 D Drum motor error 2: M
SC398 D Drum motor error 3: C
SC399 D Drum motor error 4: Y
When the drum motor of the black,
magenta, cyan, or yellow PCU
starts, the machine cannot detect a
LOCK signal within two sec. The
motor is trying to rotate but there is
an excessive load on the drum
shaft. The motor has no traction
(due to a bent cleaning blade, for
example).
PCU drum dirty
PCU defective
Motor harness defective
Motor control board defective
Drum motor defective
Insufficient lubrication on a drum.
Open PCU and apply toner to the
drum surface

SM 4-41 B132/B200

SC codes Group 4: Image Development - 2
ID sensor error 1: Calibration SC400 D
Before adjustment Vsg_reg<0.5 but
Vsg_reg could not be adjusted to the
target Vsg_reg = 4.00.2V during
process control.
ID sensor harness disconnected,
loose, defective
ID sensor dirty
ID sensor defective
ITB unit drawer connector dirty
Note: Vsg_reg is the voltage reading of the light reflected directly from the bare
surface of the ITB. The color ID sensor is provided with one additional receptor
to read diffuse light reflected from the colors of ID sensor patterns. The
additional receptor on the color sensor is not used to read the bare surface of
the belt. For more, see Section "6. Details".

SC410 D ID sensor error 2: Development K
SC411 D ID sensor error 3: Development M
SC412 D ID sensor error 4: Development C
SC413 D ID sensor error 5: Development Y
Development gamma for black,
magenta, cyan, or yellow is not
within range (0.3 to 6.0).
Process control halts when this
SC is issued.
Toner density not normal: Refer to the
procedure for process control self-check
error codes 55 to 59 to 59, and 61
(section 4.2.4)
Potential sensor defective
Laser diode not firing
ITB separation for CMY abnormal
Transfer power pack defective
ID sensor defective
If after service or installation, check ITB
release lever.

SC414 D ID sensor error 6: Development start voltage K
SC415 D ID sensor error 7: Development start voltage M
SC416 D ID sensor error 8: Development start voltage C
SC417 D ID sensor error 9: Development start voltage Y
The development start voltage
in the development of the
black, magenta, cyan, or
yellow PCU is not within the
correct range (150V)
Toner density not normal: Refer to the
procedure for process control self-check
error codes 55 to 59, and 61 (section
4.2.4)
LD not firing correctly
ITB separation for CMY abnormal
Transfer power pack defective
ID sensor defective

LED error during Vsg adjustment SC418 C
PWM value: Ifsg>2000
This means the current to the LED of the
ID sensor is abnormal.
ID sensor dirty
ID sensor defective

B132/B200 4-42 SM

SC420 C Potential sensor error 1: Vd Adjustment K
SC421 C Potential sensor error 2: Vd Adjustment M
SC422 C Potential sensor error 3: Vd Adjustment C
SC423 C Potential sensor error 4: Vd Adjustment Y
The development potential of
the drum before exposure (Vd)
cannot be adjusted to within
10 V of the target voltage (-
900V).
Toner density low

SC424 C Potential sensor error 5: Vl adjustment K
SC425 C Potential sensor error 6: Vl adjustment M
SC426 C Potential sensor error 7: Vl adjustment C
SC427 C Potential sensor error 8: Vl adjustment Y
Vpl could not be adjusted to
within 10V of the target Vpl
after exposure of the ID sensor
patterns.
Toner density low

SC432 C Potential sensor error 1: Vr K
SC433 C Potential sensor error 2: Vr M
SC434 C Potential sensor error 3: Vr C
SC435 C Potential sensor error 4: Vr Y
Vr > 200V
The residual voltage (Vr), the amount
of voltage that remains on the surface
of the drum after the QL fires is
greater than 200V.
Toner density low

SC436 D Potential sensor error 5: Vd K
SC437 D Potential sensor error 6: Vd M
SC438 D Potential sensor error 7: Vd C
SC439 D Potential sensor error 8: Vd Y
The VdHome reading, the first step of
the process control self-check,
detected that the development
potential of the unexposed areas of
the drum are not within the prescribed
range (-500 to -700)
Potential sensor dirty
Charge roller defective
Charge power pack defective
OPC defective

SM 4-43 B132/B200

SC440 D Image transfer power pack error 1: K
SC441 D Image transfer power pack error 2: M
SC442 D Image transfer power pack error 3: C
SC443 D Image transfer power pack error 4: Y
a short in the power pack for K,
M, C, or Y 250 times within 500
ms.
Transfer belt damaged, insulation
damaged
Insulation on high voltage cable
damaged
Another hot point inside the machine has
damaged insulation
Insulation around high-voltage power
supply damaged
IOB damaged

Image transfer motor error SC445 D
The control board of the ITB
motor belt generated signals that
indicate there is problem with
the image transfer belt motor.
ITB motor defective
ITB control board defective
ITB overloaded
Encoder strip on the front edge of the
belt damaged.

ITB lift motor error SC446 D
The state of the ITB lift sensor
does not change its state
(switching from off to on or vice
versa), even after the ITB lift
motor starts rotating.
ITB lift sensor dirty, disconnected,
defective
ITB lift motor disconnected, defective

Transfer power pack output error SC450 D
a short in the power pack 250
times at T2 within 500 ms.
Damaged insulation on the high-voltage
supply cable
Damaged insulation around the high-
voltage power supply.

PTR motor error SC455 D
The lock signal from the paper
transfer motor is not detected
within 1 sec. after the motor
switched on.
Motor disconnected
PTR shaft locked, needs cleaning,
blocked by obstruction
Drive shaft of the ITB locked and
overloaded, needs cleaning, or blocked
by obstruction
DRB (motor drive board) disconnected,
defective

B132/B200 4-44 SM

Separation power pack output error SC460 D
a short in the power pack 250
times at D(ac) within 500 ms.
Damaged insulation on the high-voltage
supply cable
Damaged insulation around the high-
voltage power supply.
1. Replace the high-voltage supply cable.
2. Replace the high-voltage power supply unit.
3. Replace the IOB.

Waste toner bottle full SC484 D
The toner full sensor goes HIGH
for more than 500 ms, indicating
that the waste toner bottle is full.
Remove waste toner bottle, empty it

Waste toner bottle motor error SC485 D
The lock signal of the waste
toner bottle motor remains HIGH
for more than 600 ms.
Waste toner bottle motor defective

Waste toner bottle set error SC487 D
The set sensor of the waste
toner bottle remains LOW for
more than 500 ms. (The sensor
goes HIGH when the bottle is
installed correctly.)
Install the waste toner bottle
Remove waste toner bottle and reinstall
correctly

Waste toner transport lock SC488 D
Waste toner cannot be
transported to the waste toner
bottle.
Blockage in the line to the waste toner
bottle

Peltier Unit error SC490 C
The Abnormal Condition signal
for the Peltier Unit is received 10
times.
Peltier Unit is defective

Rev. 07/2005
SM 4-45 B132/B200

MUSIC sensor error SC496 C
The MUSIC sensor detected an
abnormal pattern on the ITB
because:
ADC exceeded upper or lower
limit.
The pattern used to calculate
the amount of skew is
abnormal.
The reading of the pattern
exceeded the length of time
the LED projected light.
LED light could not be
adjusted correctly.
MUSIC sensor defective or disconnected
MUSIC pattern abnormal; do a forced
process control (SP3821) and check the
result (section 4.2.4).

Temperature and humidity sensor error 1: PCU SC497 C
The thermistor output of the
temperature and humidity
sensor above the black PCU
was not within the prescribed
range (0.5V to 4.2V)
Temperature and humidity sensor
harness disconnected, loose, defective
defective

Temperature and humidity sensor error 2 SC498 C
The thermistor output of the
temperature and humidity
sensor at below the waste toner
bottle was not within the
prescribed range (0.5V to 4.2V)
harness disconnected, loose, defective
defective

ITB Position Sensor error SC499 C
Abnormal ITB Position Sensor
output.
ITB Position Sensor 1 or 2 is dirty.
ITB Position Sensor 1 or 2 is defective.
ITB encoder strip is dirty,
ITB encoder strip is damaged.
ITB movement error (e.g. the belt cannot
rotate correctly due to friction).
Connectors for ITB Position Sensor 1 or
2 are not connected correctly.

Rev. 07/2005

B132/B200 4-46 SM

SC codes Group 5: Paper Feed
Tray 1 (tandem tray) feed error (Japan Only) SC501 B
The tray 1 lift sensor does not
switch on 10 s after the tray
lift motor switches on and
starts lifting the bottom plate.
When the tray lowers, the tray
lift sensor does not go off
within 1.5 sec.
The lower limit sensor of the
tandem tray does not detect
the lower limit within 10 sec.
Tray lift motor harness disconnected,
loose, defective
Paper or other obstacle trapped between
tray and motor
Tray lift sensor disconnected, damaged
Lower limit sensor disconnected,
damaged
Pick-up solenoid disconnected, blocked
by an obstacle

Tray 2 (paper cassette) feed error (Japan Only) SC502 B
The lift sensor is not activated
within 10 seconds after the
tray lift motor starts lifting the
bottom plate.
within 1.5 sec.
The lower limit sensor of the
tandem tray does not detect
the lower limit within 10 sec.
Tray lift motor defective or disconnected
tray and motor
Pick-up solenoid disconnected or
blocked by an obstacle

Tray 1 feed error SC503 B
bottom plate.
within 1.5 sec.
tray and motor

Tray 2 feed error SC504 B
bottom plate.
within 1.5 sec.
tray and motor

SM 4-47 B132/B200

Tandem tray rear fence motor error SC505 C
The return sensor does not
switch on within 10 sec. after
the rear fence motor switches
on.
The HP sensor does not
switch on 10 sec. after the
rear fence motor switches on.
The HP sensor and return
sensor switch on at the same
time.
Rear fence motor defective or poor
connection
Paper or other obstacle interfering with
operation of the sensors
tray and motor
Motor mechanical overload due to
obstruction
Return sensor or HP sensor defective or
dirty

Tandem tray back fence motor error SC506 B
The back fence should be
closed but the fence was not
detected in the closed position
within 500 ms.
-or-
The back fence should be open
but the fence was not detected
in the open within 500 ms.
Paper loaded incorrectly
Back fence motor harness disconnected,
loose, defective
Back fence motor defective
Paper blocking sensors
Paper stuck between tray and motor
Back fence close, back fence open
sensor harnesses disconnected, loose,
or defective.
Back fence close, back fence open
sensor defective
Paper or other obstacle is interfering with
movement of the fence

LCT tray error SC510 B
When the bottom plate is
lifted, the upper limit sensor
does not come on for 30 sec.
When the bottom plate is
lowered, the lower limit sensor
does not come on for 30 sec.
After lift begins, the upper limit
sensor does not switch on
before the pick-up solenoid
switches on.
The paper end sensor
switches on during lift and the
upper limit sensor does not
switch on for 2.5 s, and a
message prompts user to
reset paper.
Tray lift motor harness, disconnected,
loose, or defective
Tray lift motor defective
Lift sensor defective or disconnected
Pick-up solenoid defective or
disconnected
Paper end sensor defective

B132/B200 4-48 SM

Duplex jogger motor error 1 SC515 C
When the jogger fence moves to
the home position, the jogger
fence HP sensor does not switch
on even after the jogger motor
has moved the jogger fence
153.5 mm.
Rear fence motor defective or poor
connection
Paper or other obstacle interfering with
operation of the sensors or motor
Return sensor or HP sensor defective or
dirty

Duplex jogger motor error 2 SC516 B
When the jogger fence moves
from the home position, the
jogger fence HP sensor does not
turn off even if the jogger motor
has moved the jogger fence
153.5 mm.
Paper or other obstacle has jammed
mechanism
HP sensor connector disconnected or
defective
HP sensor defective

Fusing/Exit Motor error SC520 A
The Fusing/Exit Motor LOCK
signal is not detected for the
duration of one second after the
motor START signal is sent.
Fusing/Exit Motor connecter is not
connected correctly.
Fusing/Exit Motor torque is too high or
too low.
Fusing/Exit Motor is defective.

Fan error 1: fusing fan motor SC530 D
The BICU does not receive the
lock signal 5 seconds after the
fusing unit fan switches on.
Fusing unit cooling fan disconnected,
defective
BICU defective

Fan error 2: fusing fan motor SC531 D
The lock signal remained HIGH for 5 sec.
while the fan at the front of the fusing unit
near the heat dissipation fins was operating.
Motor overload due to
obstacle interfering with
operation of the fan
Fan harness loose,
Fan defective

Fan error 3: PCB box fan SC532 D
while the fan that cools the printed circuit
boards was operating.
Fan harness loose,
Fan defective

Fan error 4: fusing exhaust fan SC533 D
while the fan that draws air out of the fusing
unit was operating.
Fan harness loose,
Fan defective

Rev. 07/2005
SM 4-49 B132/B200

Fan error 5: duplex exhaust fan SC534 D
while the fan that draws air out of the duplex
unit was operating.
Fan harness loose,
Fan defective

Temperature/Humidity control abnormal SC535 C
The output of the
temperature/humidity sensor
reaches the upper or lower limit,
even after the Peltier unit has
been ON for 3 hours.
Peltier Cooling Fan Motor is defective.

Heating roller thermistor 1 error 1: Poor connection SC541 A
The temperature measured by
the heating roller thermistor
does not reach 130C after 10
tries and 65 sec. have elapsed.
Heating roller thermistor harness
connection loose, disconnected,
defective
Defective heating roller thermistor

Heating roller thermistor 1 error 2: No warmup SC542 A
After the main switch is turned
on or the cover is closed, the
heating roller temperature does
not reach the ready temperature
within 2 sec. after the heater
switches on.
-or-
If the roller was below 45C, the
heating roller did not reach the
ready temperature 2 sec. after
reaching 45C.
NOTE: Thermistor 2 stops
monitoring the temperature once
Thermistor 1 detects ready
temperature.
Thermistor is bent, installed incorrectly
Heating roller fusing lamp broken
Check to see if the Thermostats are
broken (Parts Catalog page 108, items 6,
7, 9, and 10)
Check to see if the screws for the
Thermostats are tightened correctly
Do SP5810 to cancel the SC fusing code.

Heating roller thermistor 1 error 3: Software - High temperature SC543 A
The thermistor detected a
temperature over 230C times
within 1 sec.
TRIAC short, IOB defective
BICU defective
Fusing temperature out of control

Heating roller thermistor 1 error 4: Hardware - High temperature SC544 A
temperature over 260C.
TRIAC short
IOB defective
BICU defective
Fusing temperature control is erratic

Rev. 11/2007
B132/B200 4-50 SM

Heating roller thermistor 1 error 5: Lamp remains on SC545 A
After hot roller reaches warmup
temperature, the fusing lamps
remained on at full capacity for
25 sec. after reaching the
warmup temperature while the
hot roller was not rotating.
Thermistor damaged, or out of position
Fusing lamp disconnected, broken

Heating roller thermistor 2 error 1: Thermistor disconnected SC546 A
The temperature measured by
the heating roller thermistor
does not reach 0C after 45 sec.
and remains over this
temperature for 10 readings.
Loose connection of the heating roller
thermistor

Zero cross error SC547 A
When the main switch is turned on, the
machine checks how many zero-cross
signals are generated within 500 ms. This
SC code is issued if the number of zero-
cross signals detected is either more than 66
or less than 45 for 10 readings.
NOTE: Zero cross signals, generated from
an ac power supply, are used to generate a
trigger pulses to control the applied power
accurately.
Electrical noise on the power
supply line
Fusing relay damaged:
replace the PSU.
Normally, this SC is cancelled if you do SP5810 to cancel the SC fusing code.

Heating roller thermistor 2 error 2: Failed to reach warmup temperature SC548 A
After the main switch is turned on or
the cover is closed, the heating roller
temperature does not reach the ready
temperature within 2 sec. after the
heater switches on.
-or-
If the roller was below 45C, the
heating roller did not reach the ready
temperature 2 sec. after reaching
45C.
NOTE: Thermistor 2 stops monitoring
the temperature once Thermistor 1
detects warmup temperature.
Thermistor is bent, installed
incorrectly
Heating roller fusing lamp broken
Defective BICU
Check to see if the Thermostats
are broken (Parts Catalog page
108, items 6, 7, 9, and 10)
Check to see if the screws for the
Thermostats are tightened correctly

Rev. 11/2007
SM 4-51 B132/B200

Heating roller thermistor 2 error 3: Software - High Temperature SC549 A
within 1 sec.
TRIAC short
IOB defective
BICU defective

Heating roller thermistor 2 error 4: Hardware - High Temperature SC550 A
TRIAC short
IOB defective
BICU defective

Pressure roller thermistor error 1 SC551 A
The temperature measured by the pressure
roller thermistor does not reach 0C for 200
sec.
Loose connection of the
pressure roller thermistor
Defective pressure roller
thermistor
Defective BICU

Pressure roller thermistor error 2 SC552 A
After the main switch is turned on or the
cover is closed, the heating roller
temperature within 2 sec. after the heater
switches on.
-or-
If the roller was below 45C, the heating
roller did not reach the ready temperature 2
sec. after reaching 45C.
NOTE: Thermistor 2 stops monitoring the
temperature once Thermistor 1 detects
ready temperature.
Pressure roller thermistor
harness loose, disconnected,
defective
Pressure roller thermistor
defective
Check to see if the
Thermostats are broken
(Parts Catalog page 108,
items 6, 7, 9, and 10)
Check to see if the screws for
the Thermostats are tightened
correctly

Pressure roller thermistor error 3: Software - High temperature SC553 A
within 1 sec.
TRIAC short
IOB defective
BICU defective

Rev. 11/2007

B132/B200 4-52 SM

Pressure roller thermistor error 4: Hardware - High temperature SC554 A
TRIAC short
IOB defective
BICU defective

Pressure roller thermistor error 5: Lamp remains on SC555 A
temperature, the pressure roller
fusing lamp remains for 6 sec.
while the hot roller is not
rotating.

Heating roller thermistor 2 error 5: Lamp remains on SC556 A
temperature, the pressure roller
fusing lamp remains for 6 sec.
while the hot roller is not rotating.

Hot roller thermistor error 1: Thermistor disconnected SC561 A
The temperature measured by the hot roller
thermistor does not reach the prescribed
warm-up temperature within 100 sec.
Loose connection of the hot
roller thermistor
Defective hot roller
thermistor
Defective BICU

Hot roller thermistor error 2: Failure to reach warmup temperature SC562 A
After the main switch is turned on or the
cover is closed, the heating roller
temperature within 2 sec. after the heater
switches on.
-or-
If the roller was below 45C, the heating
roller did not reach the ready temperature 2
sec. after reaching 45C.
NOTE: Thermistor 2 stops monitoring the
temperature once Thermistor 1 detects
ready temperature.
Hot roller fusing lamp broken
Defective hot roller
thermistor
Defective BICU
Check to see if the
Thermostats are broken
(Parts Catalog page 108,
items 6, 7, 9, and 10)
Check to see if the screws
for the Thermostats are
tightened correctly

Rev. 11/2007
SM 4-53 B132/B200

Hot roller thermistor error 3: Software - High Temperature SC563 A
temperature over 250C 10
times within 1 sec.
TRIAC short
IOB defective
BICU defective

Hot roller thermistor error 4: Hardware - High Temperature SC564 A
TRIAC short
IOB defective
BICU defective

Hot roller thermistor error 5: Lamp remains on SC565 A
temperature, the hot roller fusing
lamp remains for 6300 sec.
while the hot roller is not
rotating.

Double-feed sensor error SC585 C
The output of the double-feed
sensor reaches the upper or
lower limit
Double-feed sensor connector is not
connected correctly.
Double-feed sensor is dirty with paper
dust.
There is paper or foreign material
between the receptor and LED of the
double-feed sensor.

Rev. 07/2005
B132/B200 4-54 SM

SC codes Group 6: Device Communication
ARDF communication error SC620 D
A BREAK signal occurs after the
machine detects the ARDF, or a
communication timeout occurs.
ARDF disconnected
IPU board harness disconnected,
defective
IPU board defective
Spurious noise from the power supply
line
ARDF control board defective

Mailbox-to-Finisher communication error SC621 D
Communication between the
mailbox and finisher is
interrupted. An ACK/NCK signal
was not received within 100 ms
after a data frame is sent and 3
retries failed.
Connection cable between mailbox and
finisher disconnected, defective
Finisher main board defective
BICU defective
PSU defective

LCT communication error SC622 D
copier and LCT is interrupted.
An ACK/NCK signal was not
received within 100 ms after a
data frame is sent and 3 retries
failed.
Connection cable between the LCT and
copier is disconnected, defective
LCT main board defective
BICU defective
PSU defective

Mailbox-to-copier communication error SC624 D
mailbox and copier is
interrupted. An ACK/NCK signal
was not received within 100 ms
after a data frame is sent and 3
retries failed.
Mailbox cable disconnected, defective
Mailbox main board defective
BICU defective
PSU defective

SM 4-55 B132/B200

RSS communication error SC630 C
An error was detected in
communication via RSS between
the machine and the RSS center.
Error occurred on a public line at
the RSS terminal.
No action required

Key/card counter device error 1 SC632 B
After 1 data frame is sent to the
device, an ACK signal is not
received within 100 ms, and is not
received after 3 retries.
The serial line from the device to the
copier is unstable, disconnected, or
defective.

During communication with the
device, the BICU received a break
(Low) signal.
The serial line from the device to the
copier is unstable, disconnected, or
defective.

After installation of the device, a
message alerts user to a backup
RAM error.
Device control board defective
Device control board backup battery
defective

After installation of the device a
message alerts user to a battery
voltage abnormal error.
Device control board defective
Device control board backup battery
defective

Engine startup error SC670 D
Engine does not respond within
30 s after power on.
Engine down detected suddenly
during power on and warmup.
BICU installation incorrect
BICU defective
Sudden communication reset occurred
between the BICU and the controller.

Controller startup error SC672 D
After power on, the line between
the controller and the operation
panel did not open for normal
operation.
After normal startup,
communication with the
controller stopped.
Controller stalled
Controller installed incorrectly
Controller board defective
Operation panel harness disconnected or
defective

B132/B200 4-56 SM

BICU-MUSIC communication error SC680 D
The main CPU fails to
communicate with the MUSIC
CPU within 5 sec. and three
attempts failed.
UART communication failure; replace the
BICU

Memory address command error SC687 D
The BICU does not receive a
memory address command from
the controller 120 seconds after
paper is in the position for
registration.
BICU-Controller connection loose,
defective
BICU defective
Controller defective

Rev. 03/2007
SM 4-57 B132/B200

SC codes Group 7: Peripherals
Original pickup operation error SC701 D
Even though the pickup motor is rotating
clock-wise, the pickup roller home position
sensor cannot detect the position of the
pickup roller.
Pickup roller HP sensor
harness loose, disconnected,
defective
Pickup roller HP sensor
defective
Pickup motor harness loose,
Pickup motor defective
ARDF control board
defective

ARDF bottom plate lift motor SC705 D
The bottom plate HP sensor
did not detect the home
position of the bottom plate
after the bottom plate lift
motor switches on and lowers
the bottom plate.
The bottom plate position
sensor does not detect the
position of the plate after the
lift motor switches on and
raises the bottom plate.
ARDF feed motor disconnected,
defective
Bottom plate HP sensor disconnected,
defective
ARDF main board defective

Finisher lower transport motor error SC720 D
No encoder pulse signal is
detected for the transport motor
within the prescribed time.
The 1st failure issues an original
jam message, and the 2nd
failure issues this SC code.
Lower transport motor disconnected,
defective
Finisher connection to transport motor
loose, defective
Lower transport motor defective

Finisher jogger motor error SC721 B
The jogger fences move out of
the home position but the HP
sensor output does not change
within the specified number of
pulses. The 1st failure issues an
original jam message, and the
2nd failure issues this SC code.
Jogger HP sensor disconnected,
defective
Jogger motor disconnected, defective
Jogger motor overloaded due to
obstruction
Finisher main board and jogger motor
connection loose, defective

B132/B200 4-58 SM

Finisher feed-out motor SC723 B
The stack feed-out belt HP
sensor does not activate within
the specified time after the stack
feed-out belt motor turns on. The
1st detection failure issues a jam
error, and the 2nd failure issues
this SC code.
Stack feed-out HP sensor disconnected,
defective
Feed-out motor disconnected, defective
Finisher main board connection to feed
out motor disconnected, defective
Motor overload due to obstruction

Finisher stapler hammer motor error SC724 D
Stapling does not finish within
the prescribed time after the
staple hammer motor turns on.
The 1st detection failure issues
a jam error, and the 2nd failure
issues this SC code.
Stapler hammer motor overloaded due to
obstruction, jammed staple, number of
sheets exceeds limit for stapling
Stapler hammer motor disconnected,
defective
Staple hammer motor HP sensor

Finisher exit guide plate motor error SC725 D
After moving away from the
guide plate position sensor, the
exit guide is not detected at the
home position within the
prescribed time. The 1st
detection failure issues a jam
this SC code.
Guide plate motor disconnected,
defective
Guide plate motor overloaded due to
obstruction
Guide plate position sensor

Shift jogger motor 1 error SC726 B
The sides fences do not retract
within the prescribed time after
the shift jogger motor switches
on. The 1st detection failure
issues a jam error, and the 2nd
Shift jogger motor disconnected,
defective
Shift jogger motor overloaded due to
obstruction
Shift jogger HP sensor disconnected,
defective

Shift jogger motor 2 error SC727 B
The side fences do not retract
the shift jogger motor switches
on. The 1st detection failure
Motor harness disconnected, loose,
defective
Motor defective
Motor overload
HP defective

SM 4-59 B132/B200

Shift jogger retraction motor error SC728 B
The side fences do not retract within the
prescribed time after the retraction motor
switches on. The 1st detection failure issues
a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this
SC code.
loose, defective
Motor defective
Motor overload
HP defective

Finisher Tray 1 shift motor error SC730 B
The shift roller HP sensor of the
upper tray does not activate
the shift tray starts to move
toward or away from the home
position. The 1st detection
failure issues a jam error, and
the 2nd failure issues this SC
code.
Shift tray HP sensor of the upper tray
Shift tray motor of the upper tray is
Shift tray motor of the upper tray
overloaded due to obstruction

Finisher corner stapler motor error SC740 B
The stapler motor does not
switch off within the prescribed
time after operating. The 1st
this SC code.
Staple jam
Number of sheets in the stack exceeds
the limit for stapling
Stapler motor disconnected, defective

Finisher corner stapler rotation motor error SC741 B
The stapler does not return to its
home position within the
specified time after stapling. The
1st detection failure issues a jam
this SC code.
Stapler rotation motor disconnected,
defective
Stapler rotation motor overloaded due to
obstruction
Stapler rotation HP sensor disconnected,
defective

Finisher stapler movement motor error SC742 B
The stapler HP sensor is not
activated within the specified
time after the stapler motor
turned on. The 1st detection
code.
Stapler movement motor disconnected,
defective
Stapler movement motor overloaded due
to obstruction
Stapler HP sensor disconnected,
defective

B132/B200 4-60 SM

Booklet stapler motor error 1 SC743 B
The front stapler unit saddle-
stitch motor does not start
operation within the specified
time. The 1st detection failure
Front motor disconnected, defective
Front motor overloaded due to
obstruction

Booklet stapler motor error 2 SC744 B
The rear stapler unit saddle-
stitch motor does not start
operation within the specified
time. The 1st detection failure
Rear motor disconnected, defective
Rear motor overloaded due to
obstruction

Finisher tray 1 (upper tray lift) motor error SC750 B
The upper tray paper height
sensor does not change its
status with the specified time
after the tray raises or lowers.
Tray lift motor disconnected, defective
Upper tray paper height sensor
Finisher main board connection to motor
loose

Finisher tray 2 (lower tray lift) motor error SC751 B
The lower tray paper height
sensor does not change its
status with the specified time
after the tray raises or lowers.
Tray lift motor disconnected, defective
Upper tray paper height sensor
Finisher main board connection to motor
loose

Finisher pressure plate motor error SC752 B
Pressure plate motor operating
but the plate is not detected at
the home position within the
specified time. The 1st detection
code.
Pressure plate HP sensor disconnected,
defective
Pressure plate motor disconnected,
defective
Pressure plate motor overloaded due to
obstruction

SM 4-61 B132/B200

Return roller motor error SC753 B
Occurs during the operation of the lower tray
pressure motor.
loose, defective
Motor overloaded
Home position sensor
harness disconnected, loose,
defective
Home position defective

Finisher punch motor error SC760 D
The punch HP sensor is not
activated within the specified
time after the punch motor
turned on. The 1st detection
code.
Punch HP sensor disconnected,
defective
Punch motor disconnected, defective
Punch motor overload due to obstruction

Finisher folder plate motor error SC761 B
The folder plate moves but is not
detected at the home position
within the specified time. The 1st
this SC code.
Folder plate HP sensor disconnected,
defective
Folder plate motor disconnected,
defective
Folder plate motor overloaded due to
obstruction.

Finisher pressure plate motor error SC762 B
Pressure plate motor operating
but the plate is not detected at
the home position within the
specified time. The 1st detection
code.
Pressure plate HP sensor disconnected,
defective
Pressure plate motor disconnected,
defective
Pressure plate motor overloaded due to
obstruction

Punch movement motor error SC763 D
Occurs during operation of the punch
unit. The 1st detection failure issues a
jam error, and the 2nd failure issues
this SC code.
loose, defective
Motor defective

Paper position sensor slide motor error SC764 D
this SC code.
loose, defective
Motor defective

B132/B200 4-62 SM

Folding unit bottom fence lift motor SC765 B
The 1st detection failure issues a jam
error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC
code.
loose, defective
Motor defective

Clamp roller retraction motor error SC766 B
The 1st detection failure issues a jam
error, and the 2nd failure issues this
SC code.
loose, defective
Motor defective

Stack junction gate motor error SC767 B
this SC code.
loose, defective
Motor overload
Motor defective

Cover interposer tray bottom plate motor error SC770 B
After the motor starts to raise
the bottom plate, the bottom
plate position sensor does not
detect the plate at the
specified time (3 s).
After the motor starts to lower
the bottom plate, the bottom
plate HP sensor does not
detect the bottom plate.
Bottom plate position sensor,
Bottom plate HP sensor disconnected,
defective

Cover interposer tray feed motor SC775 D
Motor harness disconnected, loose,
defective
Motor overload
Motor defective

Z-Fold feed motor error Japan Only SC780 B
The feed motor does not attain
the prescribed speed within the
specified time.
Feed motor disconnected, defective
Feed motor overloaded due to
obstruction
Feed motor lock

SM 4-63 B132/B200

Z-Fold lower stopper motor Japan Only SC781 B
The lower stopper motor does
not attain the prescribed speed
within the specified time.
Lower stopper motor disconnected,
defective
Lower stopper motor overloaded due to
obstruction
Lower stopper HP sensor disconnected,
defective

Z-Fold upper stopper motor Japan Only SC782 B
The upper stopper motor does
not attain the prescribed speed
within the specified time.
Upper stopper motor disconnected,
defective
Upper stopper motor overloaded due to
obstruction
Upper stopper HP sensor disconnected,
defective

Finisher staple waste hopper full SC790 B
The staple waste hopper is full
of cut staples.
If the hopper is full, empty the hopper
If the hopper is not full, the hopper full
sensor is disconnected, defective

B132/B200 4-64 SM

SC800: Overall System
Boot loader error SC817 C
The boot loader cannot read one of the
following: self-diagnostic module, kernel, or one
of the files of the root file system, or the check
of one of these items on the system SD card
failed.
File or module on the system
SD card is corrupted
File or module on the system
SD card is illegal
Make sure that the system
SD card is the one designed
for the machine
Replace system ROM on the
controller board

Watchdog error SC818 C
While the system program is
running, a bus hold or interrupt
program goes into an endless loop,
preventing any other programs from
executing.
System program defective; switch off/on,
or change the controller firmware if the
problem cannot be solved
Controller option malfunction

Fatal kernel error
Due to a control error, a RAM
overflow occurred during system
processing. One of the following
messages was displayed on the
operation panel.
System program defective
Optional board defective
Replace controller firmware
0x696e init died
0x766d vm_page out: VM is full
4361 Cache Error
SC819 C
Other

NOTE: For more details about this SC code error, execute SP5990 to print an SMC
report so you can read the error code. The error code is not displayed on the
operation panel.
SM 4-65 B132/B200

Self-diagnostic error 2: ASIC
The ASIC provides the central point for the control of bus arbitration for CPU
access, for option bus and SDRAM access, for SDRAM refresh, and for
management of the internal bus gate.
0B00 Error code 0xffff ffff is
returned when the register
Write & Verify check is
executed on the ASIC
mounted on the controller
board. The ASIC controls
the ROM and buses for
other devices.
ASIC (controller board defective)

0B06 ASIC not detected ASIC (controller board defective)
Poor connection between North Bridge
and PCI I/F: Replace controller board
SC821 C

0B10 Failed to initialize or could
not read connection bus.
Data in SHM register
incorrect.

NOTE: For more details about this SC code error, execute SP5990 to print an SMC
report so you can read the error code. The error code is not displayed on the
operation panel.

SC822 C Self-diagnostic error 3: HDD
3003 Check performed when HDD
is installed:
HDD device busy for over
31 s.
After a diagnostic
command is set for Sthe
HDD, but the device
remains busy for over 6 s.
A diagnostic command is
issued to the HDD device but
the result is an erro
HDD defective
HDD harness disconnected, defective
3004 No response to the self-
diagnostic command from the
ASIC to the HDDs
HDD defective
3013 Mandolin does not respond,
the HDD device remains
BUSY for more than 31 s, or
the BUSY signal does not
drop within 6 s after the
diagnostic command is
issued to the HDDs.
HDD defective
HDD connector loose or defective

3014 Error returned from HDD in
response to the self-
diagnostic command,
Mandolin could not be located
due to a read/write error at
the HDD register.
HDD defective

B132/B200 4-66 SM

Self-diagnostic error 4: NVRAM SC824 C
NVRAM device does not exist,
NVRAM device is damaged, NVRAM
socket damaged
NVRAM defective
NVRAM backup battery exhausted
NVRAM socket damaged

Self-diagnostic error 6: NVRAM (option NVRAM)
1501 The difference between the 1
s measured for RTC in the
NVRAM and the 1 s timeout
of the CPU is out of range, or
the NVRAM is not detected.
NVRAM defective
NVRAM installed incorrectly
Replace RTC backup battery

SC826 C
15FE Backup battery error. Battery
is exhausted or not within
rated specification.
Replace RTC backup battery

Self-diagnostic error 7: ROM SC828 C
Measuring the CRC for the boot
monitor and operating system
program results in an error.
A check of the CRC value for
ROMFS of the entire ROM area
results in an error.
Software defective
ROM defective

NOTE: For more details about this SC 833, SC834 error, execute SP5990 to print an
SMC report so you can read the error code. The error code is not displayed on
the operation panel. The additional error codes (0F30, 0F31, etc. are listed in the
SMC report.

SC833 D Self-diagnostic error 8: Engine I/F ASIC
0F30
0F31
ASIC (Mandolin) for system control
could not be detected. After the PCI
configuration, the device ID for the
ASIC could not be checked.
Replace the mother board
0F41 The read/write check done for
resident RAM on the mother board
could not be done correctly.
50B1 Could not initialize or read the bus
connection.
Check for loose connections at the
mother board.
50B2 Value of the SSCG register is
incorrect.
Check for loose connections at the
mother board.

SC834 D Self-diagnostic error 9: Optional Memory RAM DIMM
5101 The write/verify check for the
optional RAM chip on the engine
mother board gave an error.
Mother board defective

SM 4-67 B132/B200

Net I/F error SC850 B
Duplicate IP addresses.
Illegal IP address.
Driver unstable and cannot be
used on the network.
IP address setting incorrect
Ethernet board defective

IEEE 1394 I/F error SC851 B
Driver setting incorrect and cannot
be used by the 1394 I/F.
NIB (PHY), LINK module defective;
change the Interface Board

Wireless LAN Error 1 SC853 B
During machine start-up, the
machine can get access to the
board that holds the wireless LAN,
but not to the wireless LAN card
(802.11b or Bluetooth).
Wireless LAN card missing (was
removed)

Wireless LAN Error 2 SC854 B
During machine operation, the
machine can get access to the
board that holds the wireless LAN,
but not to the wireless LAN card
(802.11b or Bluetooth).
Wireless LAN card missing (was
removed)

Wireless LAN error 3 SC855 B
An error was detected on the
wireless LAN card (802.11b or
Bluetooth).
Wireless LAN card defective
Wireless LAN card connection incorrect

Wireless LAN error 4 SC856 B
An error was detected on the
wireless LAN card (802.11b or
Bluetooth).
Wireless LAN card defective
PCI connector (to the mother board)
loose

USB I/F Error SC857 B
The USB driver is not stable and
caused an error.
Bad USB card connection
Replace the controller board

HDD startup error at main power on SC860 B
HDD is connected but a driver
error is detected.
The driver does not respond with
the status of the HDD within 30
s.
HDD is not formatted
Label name input during formatting is
corrupted; format the hard disk again
HDD is defective

B132/B200 4-68 SM

HDD re-try failure SC861 D
At power on with the HDD detected,
power supply to the HDD is
interrupted, after the HDD is
awakened from the sleep mode, the
HDD is not ready within 30 s.
Harness between HDD and board
HDD power connector disconnected
HDD defective

HDD data read failure SC863 D
The data written to the HDD cannot
be read normally, due to bad
sectors generated during operation.
HDD defective
Note: If the bad sectors are generated at
the image partition, the bad sector
information is written to NVRAM, and the
next time the HDD is accessed, these bad
sectors will not be accessed for read/write
operation.

HDD data CRC error SC864 D
During HDD operation, the HDD
cannot respond to an CRC error
query. Data transfer did not execute
normally while data was being
written to the HDD.
HDD defective

HDD access error SC865 D
HDD responded to an error during
operation for a condition other than
those for SC863, 864.
HDD defective.

SD card error 1: Confirmation SC866 B
The machine detects an electronic
license error in the application on
the SD card in the controller slot
immediately after the machine is
turned on.
The program on the SD card
contains electronic confirmation
license data. If the program does
not contain this license data, or if
the result of the check shows that
the license data in the program on
the SD card is incorrect, then the
checked program cannot execute
and this SC code is displayed.
Program missing from the SD card
Download the correct program for the
machine to the SD card

SD card error 2: SD card removed SC867 D
The SD card in the boot slot when
the machine was turned on was
removed while the machine was on.
Insert the SD card, then turn the machine
off and on.

SM 4-69 B132/B200

SD card error 3: SC card access SC868 D
An error occurred while an SD card
was used.
SD card not inserted correctly
SD card defective
Note: If you want to try to reformat the SC
card, use SD Formatter Ver 1.1.

Address book data error
Address book data on the hard
disk was detected as abnormal
when it was accessed from either
the operation panel or the
network. The address book data
cannot be read from the HDD or
SD card where it is stored, or the
data read from the media is
defective.
Software defective. Turn the machine
off/on. If this is not the solution for the
problem, then replace the controller
firmware.
HDD defective.
SC870 B
More Details
Do SP5846 050 (UCS Settings Initialize all Directory Info.) to reset all
address book data.
Reset the user information with SP5832 006 (HDD Formatting User
Information).
Replace the HDDs.
Boot the machine from the SD card.

HDD mail send data error SC873 B
An error was detected on the HDD
immediately after the machine was
turned on, or power was turned off
while the machine used the HDD.
Do SP5832-007 (Format HDD Mail TX
Data) to initialize the HDD.
Replace the HDD

Delete All error 1: HDD SC874 D
A data error was detected for the
HDD/NVRAM after the Delete All
option was used.
Note: The source of this error is the
Data Overwrite Security Unit B660
running from an SD card.
Turn the main switch off/on and try the
operation again.
Install the Data Overwrite Security Unit
again. For more, see section 1.
Installation.
HDD defective

Delete All error 2: Data area SC875 D
An error occurred while the
machine deleted data from the
HDD.
Note: The source of this error is the
Data Overwrite Security Unit B660
running from an SD card.
Turn the main switch off/on and try the
operation again.

File Format Converter (MLB) error SC880 D
A request to get access to the MLB
was not answered within the
specified time.
MLB defective, replace the MLB
B132/B200 4-70 SM
SC900: Miscellaneous
Electrical total counter error SC900 D
The total counter contains
something that is not a number.
NVRAM incorrect type
NVRAM defective
NVRAM data scrambled
Unexpected error from external source

SC910 External controller error 1

B
The external controller (Fiery) sends
an error message.
Turn the machine power
off/on

External controller error 5 SC914 B
The external controller (Fiery) sends
an error message.
Turn the machine power off/on

External controller down SC919 D
The EAC received an interrupt signal
from the FLUTE serial driver during
print jobs in progress and the
connection between the copier and
external controller was broken.
Note: The EAC is the External Api
Converter.
Switch the machine off and on.

Printer error 1 SC920 B
An internal application error was
detected and operation cannot
continue.
Software defective; turn the machine
off/on, or change the controller firmware
Insufficient memory

Printer error 2 SC921 B
When the application started, the
necessary font was not on the SD
card.
Font not on the SC card

SM 4-71 B132/B200

Net File function error SC925 B
The NetFile file management on the
HDD cannot be used, or a NetFile
management file is corrupted and
operation cannot continue. The
HDDs are defective and they
cannot be debugged or partitioned,
so the Scan Router functions
(delivery of received faxes,
document capture, etc.), Web
services, and other network
functions cannot be used.
HDD status codes are displayed
below the SC code:
Refer to the four procedures below
(Recovery from SC 925).

Here is a list of HDD status codes:

Display Meaning
(-1) HDD not connected
(-2) HDD not ready
(-3) No label
(-4) Partition type incorrect
(-5) Error returned during label read or check
(-6) Error returned during label read or check
(-7) filesystem repair failed
(-8) filesystem mount failed
(-9) Drive does not answer command
(-10) Internal kernel error
(-11) Size of drive is too small
(-12) Specified partition does not exist
(-13) Device file does not exist

B132/B200 4-72 SM
Recovery from SC 925
Procedure 1
If the machine shows SC codes for HDD errors (SC860 ~ SC865) with SC 925, do
the recovery procedures for SC860 ~ SC865.
Procedure 2
If the machine does not show one of the five HDD errors (SC860 ~ SC865), turn
the machine power off and on. If this is not the solution for the problem, then
initialize the NetFile partition on the HDD with SP5832-011 (HDD Formatting
Ridoc I/F).
NetFiles: Jobs printed from the document server using a PC and DeskTopBinder
Before you initialize the NetFile partition on the HDD, tell the customer that:
Received faxes on the delivery server will be erased
All captured documents will be erased
DeskTopBinder/Print Job Manager/Desk Top Editor job history will be
erased
Documents on the document server, and scanned documents, will not be
erased.
The first time that the network gets access to the machine, the management
information must be configured again (this will use a lot of time).

Before you initialize the Netfile partition with SP5832-011, do these steps:
1. Go into the User Tools mode and do Delivery Settings to print all received fax
documents that are scheduled for delivery. Then erase them.
2. In the User Tools mode, do Document Management> Batch Delete Transfer
Documents.
3. Do SP5832-011, then turn the machine power off and on.

Procedure 3
If Procedure 2 is not the solution for the problem, do SP5832-001 (HDD
Formatting All), then turn the machine power off and on.
SP5832-001 erases all document and address book data on the hard disks. Ask
the customer before you do this SP code.

Procedure 4
If Procedure 3 is not the solution for the problem, replace the HDD.
SM 4-73 B132/B200

Software error 2 SC990 D
The software performs an
unexpected function and the
program cannot continue.
Software defective, re-boot
*1

Software error 3 SC991 C
The software performs an
unexpected function and the
program cannot continue. However,
unlike SC990, recovery processing
allows the program to continue.
Software defective, re-boot
*1

*1
: In order to get more details about SC990 and SC991:
1) Execute SP7403 or print an SMC Report (SP5990) to read the history of the 10 most recent
logged errors.
2) If you press the zero key on the operation panel with the SP selection menu displayed, you
will see detailed information about the recently logged SC990 or SC991, including the
software file name, line number, and so on. 1) is the recommended method, because
another SC could write over the information for the previous SC.

Software error 4: Undefined SC992 C
An error not controlled by the
system occurred (the error does not
come under any other SC code).
Software defective
Turn the machine power off and on. The
machine cannot be used until this error is
cleared.

Cannot select application function SC997 B
An application does not start after
the user pushed the correct key on
the operation panel.
Software bug
A RAM or DIMM option necessary for the
application is not installed or not installed
correctly.

Application cannot start SC998 D
Register processing does not
operate for an application within 60
s after the machine power is turned
on. No applications not start
correctly, and all end abnormally.
Software bug
A RAM or DIMM option necessary for the
application is not installed or not installed
correctly.

B132/B200 4-74 SM
4.3.4 ADDITIONAL SC CODES PRINTED IN SMC REPORTS
These codes are also used in the SMC report.
Codes that have the same number in this series are identified by an additional 4-
digit hexadecimal number.
SC No. Symptom Possible Cause
IEEE802 11b card startup error 853 D
Not used.
IEEE802 11b card access error 854 D
Not used.
IEEE802 11b card error 855 D
Not used.
IEEE802 11b card connection board error 856 D
Not used.
Address book data error 870 B
The address book in the hard disk is
accessed. An error is detected in
the address book data; address book
data is not read; or data is not written
into the address book.

Data corruption
Defective hard disk
Defective software

NOTE: To recover from the error, do any of the following countermeasures:
Format the address book by using SP5-832-008 (all data in the address book
including the user codes and countersis initialized)
Initialize the user data by using SP5-832-006 and -007 (the user codes and
counters are recovered when the main switch is turned on).
Replace the hard disk (the user codes and counters are recovered when the main
switch is turned on).
Printer error 920 D
The printer program cannot be
continued.
Defective hardware
Data corruption
Defective software
Net file error 925 D
The management file for net files is
corrupted; net files are not normally
read.
Netfiles: Jobs to be printed from the
document server using a PC and the
DeskTopBinder software
Defective hardware
Data corruption
Defective software
Other system SCs 992 C
The controller received an unknown
SC code from the engine.
Contact your product specialist.
Network error 993 D
The ASIC program of GW controller
cannot be continued.
Defective GW controller

ELECTRICAL BREAKER SWITCH TEST
SM 4-75 B132/B200

4.4 ELECTRICAL BREAKER SWITCH TEST
4.4.1 HOW TO TEST THE ELECTRICAL BREAKER SWITCH
NOTE:
The breaker switch is located at the left rear corner of the machine.
When the switch is in the ON position, you can see the "|" mark on the lower
part of the switch.

1. Connect the power plug. Then, push the test button [A] with the tip of a pen.
If the switch [B] is functioning normally, it will automatically move to the
middle position. You will see the "|" mark and the o mark.

[A]
[B]
Rev. 07/2005
ELECTRICAL BREAKER SWITCH TEST
B132/B200 4-76 SM

To return the switch to the ON position:
(Perform following 2 steps)

1. Push the switch down to the lower (OFF) position [C].
You will see the o mark.

2. Push the switch up to the upper (ON) position [D].
You will see the "|" mark.

[C]
[D]
Rev. 07/2005

SERVICE TABLES
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
SM 5-1 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

5. SERVICE TABLES
5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
5.1.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION
The service program (SP) mode is used to check electrical data, change modes,
and adjust values.

!CAUTION
Never turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing.
To avoid damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation switch to
switch the power off, wait for the power LED to go off, and then switch the
main power switch off.

Service Mode Lock/Unlock
At locations where the machine contains sensitive data, the customer engineer
cannot operate the machine until the Administrator turns the service mode lock off.
This function makes sure that work on the machine is always done with the
permission of the Administrator.
1. If you cannot go into the SP mode, ask the Administrator to log in with the User
Tool and then set Service Mode Lock to OFF. After he or she logs in:
[User Tools] > System Settings > Administrator Tools > Service Mode Lock > OFF
This unlocks the machine and lets you get access to all the SP codes.
The service technician can do servicing on the machine and turn the
machine off and on. It is not necessary to ask the Administrator to log in
again each time the machine is turned on.
2. If you must use the printer bit switches, go into the SP mode and set SP5169 to
1.
3. After machine servicing is completed:
Change SP5169 from 1 to 0.
Turn the machine off and on.
Tell the administrator that you completed servicing the machine.
The administrator will then set the Service Mode Lock to ON.

B132/B200 5-2 SM
To Enter and Exit the Service Mode
1. Press the [Clear Modes] (")key.
2. On the operation panel keypad, press "107".
3. Hold down the Clear/Stop (#) key for more than 3 seconds.
The Copy SP or PM Counter items are displayed. If the printer or
scanner/printer option is installed, the Printer SP and Scanner SP items are
also displayed.
To enter normal Copy SP mode, touch Copy SP.
4. When you are finished, press Exit to exit the SP mode, then press again to
return to the Copier Window.

To Switch to the Copy Window for Test Printing
1. In the SP mode display, touch "Copy Window" to switch to the copy operation
screen when you need to select paper for a test print.
2. Use the copy window (copier mode) to select the appropriate settings (paper
size, etc.) for the test print.
3. Press the [Start] ($) key to execute the test print.
4. Touch "SP Mode" (highlighted) to return to the SP mode screen and repeat
from step 1.

Using the SP Mode
SP command numbers can be entered directly (if you know the number) or the
command can be selected from the menus.
Direct Entry
SP5831 an executable SP that initializes the User Tools settings, can be executed
immediately by just entering the numbers.
1. On the keypad press "5831".
2. Press [#] (Enter).
3. Touch Execute on the touch panel.

If you know all seven digits of the SP code, enter the seven numbers and press
Execute.
If you do not know all the numbers, enter only the first four numbers of the seven-
digits and press [#]. The display goes immediately to the first SP of that group.
Then you can use the buttons to browse to the desired selection.
SM 5-3 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

Button Selection Entry
1. Refer to the SP Mode Tables in this section to find the SP that you want to
adjust.
2. Press the Group number on the left side of the SP Mode window that contains
the SP that you want to adjust.
3. Use the scrolling buttons in the center of the SP mode window to display the
SP number that you want to open, then press that number to expand the list.
4. Use the center touch-panel buttons to scroll to the number and title of the item
that you want to set, and press [#]. The small entry box on the right is activated
and displays the default or the current setting below.
5. To enter a setting
Press [#] to enter a minus sign. Then use the keypad to enter the
appropriate number. The number you enter will write over the previous
setting.
Press [#] to enter the setting. (If you enter a number that is out of range, the
key press is ignored.)
When you are prompted to complete the selection, press Yes.
6. If you need to perform a test print, touch "Copy Window" to open the copy
window and select the settings for the test print. Press the [Start] ($) key
twice, then touch "SP Mode" (highlighted) in the copy window to return to the
SP mode display.
7. When you are finished, touch "Exit" twice to return to the copy window.

B132/B200 5-4 SM
SP Mode Button Summary
Here is a short summary of the touch-panel buttons.

(1): Open All.
Opens all SP groups and sublevels.
(2): Close All.
Closes all open groups and sublevels and restores the initial SP mode display.
(3): Copy Window.
Opens the copy window (copy mode) so you can make test copies. To return to the SP
mode screen, press SP Mode (highlighted) in the copy window.
(4): SP Direct.
Enter the SP code directly with the number keys if you know the SP number, then press
[#]. (SP Direct must be highlighted before you can enter the number. Just press SP
Direct if it is not highlighted.)
(5): Exit.
Press twice to leave the SP mode and return to the copy window to resume normal
operation.
(6): SPnxxx.
Press any group number to open a list of SP codes and titles for that group. For
example, to open the SP code list for SP1-nnn, touch "SP1XXX". If an SP has sublevels,
it is marked with a right pointing triangle.
(7): Group.
Press to scroll the display to the previous or next group.
(8): Page.
Press to scroll to the previous or next display in segments the size of the screen display
(page).
(9): Line.
Press to scroll the display to the previous or next line, line by line.
(10): Prev Page or Next Page.
Press to move the highlight on the left to the previous or next selection in the list.

Exit
SP2XXX
SP3XXX
SP5XXX
SP6XXX
SP7XXX
SP8XXX
SP4XXX
SP1XXX Group
Page
Line
Page
Line
Group
21
COPY: SP1-001-001
Initial 0
Prev Page Next Page
14APR 2002 03:25
(2) (1) (3) (4) (5)
(6) (7) (8) (9)
(10)
B140S907.WMF
SM 5-5 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

SP Mode Print (SMC Print)
You can print an SMC Report to check the machines condition. The SMC Report is
a list of the SP commands and their settings.

5990 SP Print Mode (SMC Print)
In the SP mode, push Copy Window to move to the copy screen, select the
paper size, then push Start. Select A4/LT (Sideways) or larger to make sure that
all the information is printed. Push SP Window to go back to the SP mode, select
the necessary SP Print Mode, and push Execute.
001 All (Data List)
002 SP (Mode Data List)
003 User Program
004 Logging Data
005 Diagnostic Report
006 Non-Default (Prints only SPs that are set to values other than defaults.)
007 NIB Summary (Configuration, Systemlog, Nvramlog)
008 Capture Log
021 Copier User Program (Copy Management Report)
022 Scanner SP
023 Scanner User Program (Scanner Management Report)

RESETS
B132/B200 5-6 SM

5.2 RESETS
5.2.1 MEMORY ALL CLEAR: SP5801
Before shipping, the SP mode data settings are printed in an SMC Report and
attached to the exposure glass of the machine for your reference. Store this report
in a safe place (next to the toner collection bottle, for example). It is a list of all the
SP initial settings. Refer to this list if you need to initialize one or more SPs. The
initial SP settings are also written in the SP mode tables at the end of this section.
As a rule, you should always print an SMC Report before initializing or adjusting
the SP settings. The SMC Report provides a concise list of all the SP commands
and their current settings. The report can be used for reference if the service
manual is not available.
Executing Memory All Clear resets all the settings stored in the NVRAM to their
default settings except the following:

SP8381 Electrical total counter value
SP5811-002: Machine serial number
SP5907: Plug & Play Brand Name and Production Name Setting

1. Execute SP5990 to print out all SMC Data Lists.
2. Open SP5801.
3. Press the number for the item that you want to initialize. The number you select
determines which application is initialized. For example, press 1 if you want to
initialize all modules.
RESETS
SM 5-7 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

No. What It Initializes Comments
1 All Clear Initializes items 2 ~ 15 below.
2 Engine Initializes all registration settings for the engine and copy
process settings.
3 SCS Initializes default system settings, SCS (System Control
Service) settings, operation display coordinates, and ROM
update information.
4 IMH Memory Initializes the image file system.
(IMH: Image Memory Handler)
5 MCS Initializes the automatic delete time setting for stored
documents.
(MCS: Memory Control Service)
6 Copier application Initializes all copier application settings.
7 Fax application Not used.
8 Printer application Initializes the printer defaults, programs registered, the printer
SP bit switches, and the printer CSS counter.
9 Scanner application Initializes the defaults for the scanner and all the scanner SP
modes.
10 Web Service/
Network application
Deletes the Netfile (NFA) management files and thumbnails,
and initializes the Job login ID.
Netfiles: Jobs to be printed from the document server using a
PC and the DeskTopBinder software
11 NCS Initializes the system defaults and interface settings (IP
addresses also), the SmartNetMonitor for Admin settings,
WebStatusMonitor settings, and the TELNET settings.
(NCS: Network Control Service)
14 Clear DCS Setting Initializes the DCS (Delivery Control Service) settings.
15 Clear UCS Setting Initializes the UCS (User Information Control Service) settings.
16 MIRS Setting Initializes the MIRS (Machine Information Report Service)
settings.
17 CCS Initializes the CCS (Certification and Charge-control Service)
settings.

4. Touch "Execute", then follow the prompts on the display to complete the
procedure.
5. Make sure that you perform the following settings:
Do the printer and scanner registration and magnification adjustments (!
3-19-1 to 3-19-3)
Do the touch screen calibration (! 3-20).
Refer to the SMC data lists and re-enter any values which had been
changed from their factory settings.
Execute SP3820-001 Manual Process Control Self Check
6. Check the copy quality and the paper path, and do any necessary adjustments.

RESETS
B132/B200 5-8 SM

5.2.2 SOFTWARE AND SETTING RESET
Software Reset
The software can be rebooted when the machine hangs up.
To do a software reset:
Turn the main power switch off and on.
-or-
Push and hold down [/] and [#] together for at least 10 seconds.
When the machine beeps once, release both buttons. After Now loading. Please
wait is displayed for a few seconds, the copy window will open. The machine is
ready for operation.
Resetting the User Tool Settings
The system settings in the UP mode can be reset to their defaults with this
procedure.
1. Make sure that the machine is in the copier standby mode.
2. Press the [User Tools] key.
3. Hold down the [#] key and touch System Setting on the display.
4. A confirmation message will be displayed, then press Yes.

Resetting Copy/Document Server Features Only
The copy/document server settings in the UP mode can be reset to their defaults
with this procedure.
2. Push the [User Tools] key.
3. Hold down the [#] key and touch Copy/Document Server Features on the
display.
4. When the message appears, touch Yes.

Resetting Scanner Features Only
The scanner settings in the UP mode can be reset to their defaults with this
procedure
2. Push the [User Tools] key.
3. Hold down the [#] key and touch Scanner Features key.
4. When the message appears, touch Yes
TEST PATTERN PRINTING
SM 5-9 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

5.3 TEST PATTERN PRINTING
5.3.1 PRINTING TEST PATTERN: SP2109 002
Some of these test patterns are used for copy image adjustments but most are
used primarily for design testing. These test patterns do not use the IPU.
NOTE: Do not operate the machine until the test pattern is printed out completely.
Otherwise, an SC may occur.
1. Enter the SP mode and select SP2109 002
2. Enter the number for the test pattern that you want to print and press [#].
3. When you are prompted to confirm your selection, touch "Yes" to select the test
pattern for printing.
4. Touch "Copy Window" to open the copy window, then select the settings for the
test print (paper size, etc.)
5. Press the [Start] ($) key twice (ignore the Place Original messages) to start
the test print.
6. After checking the test pattern, press SP Mode (highlighted) to return to the SP
mode display.
7. Touch "Exit" twice to exit the SP mode.

Test Pattern Table
These patterns can be selected with SP2109 002.

0 Off 14 Horizontal Cross-Stitch
1 1-Dot Line 15 Crop Marks
2 1-Dot Slant Cross-Stripe 16 Vertical Belt
3 2-Dot Horizontal Line 17 Checkered Flag
4 2-Dot Vertical Line 18 1-Dot 20 mm Grid
5 1-Dot Horizontal Line 19 1-Dot 20 mm Slant Grid
6 1-Dot Vertical Line 20 Horizontal Grayscale
7 1-Dot Independent 21 Horizontal Grayscale-White Stripes
8 2-Dot Independent
9 4-Dot Independent
10 Trim Area
11 Belt Pattern
12 100% Coverage
13 Vertical Cross-Stitch
TEST PATTERN PRINTING
B132/B200 5-10 SM

5.3.2 IPU TEST PATTERNS: SP4417

The IPU test patterns are primarily used for design purposes. However, they can
be used as follows:
To confirm that the IPU is processing images correctly.
To fine tune image processing
To trace the causes of poor images. For example, if the IPU test patterns are
normal when the machine is producing poor quality images, then the problem
must be after the IPU if the flow of image processing.

1. Enter the SP mode, select SP4417.
2. Scroll then select the number of the test pattern that you want to print.
3. Press [#].
4. Touch "Copy Window" to open the copy window, then select the settings for the
test print (paper size, etc.)
5. Press the [Start] ($) key to start the test print.
6. Touch "SP Mode" (highlighted) to return to the SP mode display.
Here is a list of the text patterns you can select.
0 Scanned Image 13 Grid Pattern CMYK
1 Gradation Main Scan A 14 Color Patch CMYK
2 Gradation Main Scan B 15 Gray Pattern (1)
3 Gradation Main Scan C 16 Gray Pattern (2)
4 Gradation Main Scan D 17 Gray Pattern (3)
5 Gradation Sub Scan (1) 18 Shading Pattern
6 Grid Pattern 19 Thin Line Pattern
7 Slant Grid Pattern 20 Scanned + Grid Pattern
8 Gradation RGBCMYK 21 Scanned +Gray Scale
9 UCR Pattern 22 Scanned + Color Patch
10 Color Patch 16 (1) 23 Scanned + Slant Grid C
11 Color Patch 16 (2) 24 Scanned + Grid D
12 Color Patch 64

FIRMWARE UPDATE
SM 5-11 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

5.4 FIRMWARE UPDATE
5.4.1 FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE
SD cards are used to update the software and to back up important data. Here is a
list of the firmware modules that can be updated or restored from an SD card:
GW controller software
BICU software
LCDC (operation panel) software
Network Sys (network) software
Web Sys (Web Image Monitor)
Document Server software
NFA (Net File) software
Printer application software
Scanner application software
DESS (encryption module) software
ARDF
Finishers
Important: Always obey these rules when handling and using SD cards:
Never connect or remove an SD card with the machine powered on.
Never turn the power off while the machine is downloading data from an SD
card.
The SD card is a precision item. Use it carefully. Do not keep the card in a
location where there is high temperature, high humidity, or light from the sun.
Never bend an SD card, make scratches on it, or apply strong shock or vibration
to it.

FIRMWARE UPDATE
B132/B200 5-12 SM

Firmware Update Procedure
1. Disconnect these items if they are installed:
Network cable
Interface cable
NOTE: This prevents outside interference from data transfers to the machine
while the software is being uploaded.
2. Obtain the SD card (P/N B1325730).
3. Turn the main switch off.
4. Remove the SD card slot cover [A] from the controller (! x2).
5. Hold the SD card [B] (the surface with printing must be away from the front of
the machine), and insert the SD card in Slot 3 [B].
6. Open the front door of the copier.
7. Turn the main power switch on. You see "Please Wait.
NOTE: Opening the front door during the firmware update prevents motor
rotation and the generation of any electrical noise.
The first screen appears after about 10 sec.

B132S801.WMF
[A]
[B]
FIRMWARE UPDATE
SM 5-13 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

Using the Screen:
To select the item for upgrade, touch the selection on the touch panel, or
push the corresponding key on the 10-key pad (1 to 5) of the operation
panel. The number in parentheses tells you which key to push. When you
make a selection, the [Verify(./)] and [Update(#)] buttons appear on the
screen.
If you push [Exit] (or the [0] key), you go back to the usual operation screen.
Push the [Start] key on the operation panel to select and download all the
options shown on the screen.
Push the [Clear] key on the operation panel if you want to cancel your
selections and make new ones.
While the Update Is in Progress
Remain with the machine. Do not leave it unattended.
The [Start] key flashes RED during firmware update, and then lights GREEN
when the update is finished.
Never switch the machine off while the [Start] key is flashing RED. If the
machine is switched off or accidentally unplugged before the update is
finished, do not remove the SD card. Just switch the machine on again. The
firmware update should restart automatically. If the firmware update does
not recover, order another SD card (P/N B1325730).
Never close the front door during firmware update.

PCcard -> ROM Page01
Engine (1)
System (2)
Exit (0)
NA
RO M : 00000000
RO M : 0.01
RO M : 60705254
RO M : 12.16:16
RO M : B 0705370
RO M : 11.22
N EW : G 0000000
N EW : 0.08
N EW : 60705254
N EW : 12.16:16
N EW : B 0705370
N EW : 12.31
EU

B132S901.WMF
FIRMWARE UPDATE
B132/B200 5-14 SM

8. Check the notations to the right.
"ROM" tells you the module number and version of the currently installed
software.
"NEW" tells you the module number and version of software on the SD card
in Slot 3.
9. Touch the names of the items on the left that you want to update (Engine,
System, or Operation Panel). The items you select change to dark gray.
Recommended: If you intend to update all the modules, select "Engine" and
"System" for the first update. After this is completed, do the "Opeation Panel"
update. (The screen goes off during the operation panel update. If a problem
occurs, you will not be aware of it.)
10. Touch "Update" or push [#] on the 10-key pad.

Here is what happens on the screen:
The top bar tells you what the machine is doing ("Loading")
The middle bar shows the name of the module that the machine is presently
updating. (The example above shows that the machine is updating the
Printer module.)
The bottom bar is a progress bar. The _ marks in the progress bar are
replaced by marks as uploading progresses.
When the update is completed, you will see the message "Update done."
Immediately below the message you will see the name of the SD card and
a notation for the number of cards ("1/1", "1/2")
PCcard -> ROM
System
Loading
*****________
B132S903.WMF
FIRMWARE UPDATE
SM 5-15 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

NOTE: During operation panel update the screen is blank and the progress bar
is not displayed. To monitor the progress of the operation panel update watch
the [Start] key. While opeation panel update is in progress, the [Start] key LED
flashes RED. The [Start] key lights GREEN when the operation panel update
has completed.
11. Turn the power off and on.
12. Remove the SD card.
This completes the update procedure, but you should do the next procedure to
verify that the update was successful.

Verifying the Firmware Update
This Verify procedure is not necessary but is strongly recommended.
1. Open the front door of the copier.
2. With the SD card in Slot 3, turn the main power switch on. You see "Please
Wait" and then the door-open alert. The first screen appears after about 10 sec.
3. Touch "Firmware".
4. Select the items that you updated, and then push the [Verify] button.
5. If there are no errors the machine displays the "Verify done" message for each
updated item. Go to the next step.
-or-
If you see Verify Error in the first bar on the screen, then you must do the
procedure again for the module shown in the bottom bar. For more details, see
"Errors During Firmware Update" below.
6. After the firmware is correctly updated, turn the main power switch off.
7. Push the SD card in a small distance to release it, then pull it out of the slot.
8. Turn the main power switch on, and confirm that the machine operates
correctly.

FIRMWARE UPDATE
B132/B200 5-16 SM
Errors During Firmware Update
If an error occurs during a download, an error message will be shown in the first
line. The error code consists of the letter E and a number (E20, for example).
Error Message Table
NO. MEANING SOLUTION
20 Cannot map logical address Make sure the SD card is installed correctly, or use a
different SD card.
21 Cannot access memory HDD connection not correct, or replace hard disk.
22 Cannot decompress
compressed data
The ROM data on the SD card is not correct, or data
is damaged.
23 Error occurred when ROM
update program started
Controller program defective. If the second attempt
fails, replace the controller board.
24 SD card access error Make sure the SD card is installed correctly, or use a
different SD card.
30 No HDD available for stamp
data download
HDD connection not correct or replace hard disks.
31 Data incorrect for continuous
download
Install the SD card with the remaining data necessary
for the download, then re-start the procedure.
32 Data incorrect after download
interrupted
Do the recovery procedure for the module, then
repeat the installation procedure.
33 Incorrect SD card version The ROM data on the SD card is not correct, or data
is damaged.
34 Module mismatch - Correct
module is not on the SD card
The data on the SD is not correct. Get the correct
data (Japan, Overseas, OEM, etc.) then install again.
35 Module mismatch Module on
SD card is not for this machine
SD update data is not correct. The data on the SD
card is for a different machine. Get the correct data
then install again.
36 Cannot write module Cause
other than E34, E35
then install again.
40 Engine module download failed Replace the data for the module on the SD card and
try again, or replace the BICU board.
42 Operation panel module
download failed
Replace the data for the module on the SD card and
try again, or replace the LCDC.
43 Stamp data module download
failed
try again, or replace the hard disk.
44 Controller module download
failed
tray again, or replace the controller board. Write
Protect switch on SD card is set ON.
50 Electronic confirmation check
failed
then install again.

Rev. 12/2005
FIRMWARE UPDATE
SM 5-17 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

5.4.2 DOWNLOADING STAMP DATA
You must download the fixed stamp data from the machine ROM onto the hard
disk after the HDD has been formatted or has been replaced and formatted. Then
these stamps can be used by the system. If this is not done, the user will not have
access to the fixed stamps (Confidential, Secret, etc.).
1. Select SP5853 then press Execute.
2. Obey the instructions on the screen to complete the procedure.
3. Switch the machine off and remove the SD card.

FIRMWARE UPDATE
B132/B200 5-18 SM

5.4.3 UPLOADING AND DOWNLOADING NVRAM DATA
Uploading NVRAM Data to an SD card
Always upload the NVRAM data to an SD card before you repolace the NVRAM.
1. Before you turn the machine off, do SP5990 001 (SMC Print). This gives you a
record of the NVRAM settings if the upload fails and tells you the serial number
of the machine.
3. Put the SD card into Slot 3, then turn the copier on.
4. Do SP5824 001 then push the Execute key
When uploading is completed, a file is coped to the NVRAM folder on the SD
card. The file is saved to this path and filename:
NVRAM\<serial number>.NV
Here is an example for Serial Number B0700017:
NVRAM\B0700017.NV
5. To prevent an error during the download, write the serial number of the
machine on the SD card.

FIRMWARE UPDATE
SM 5-19 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

Downloading an SD Card to NVRAM
Do this procedure to take the data uploaded from the NVRAM and download it to
the new NVRAM.
If the SD card with the NVRAM data is damaged, or if the connection between
the controller and BICU is defective, the NVRAM data download will not
complete correctly.
If the download does not complete correctly, do the download procedure again.
If this does not complete correctly, input the NVRAM data manually from the
SMC print that you made before you uploaded the NVRAM data.
2. Put the SD card with the NVRAM data into Slot 3.
3. Open the front door of the copier and keep it open.
4. Turn the copier main power switch on.
If the NVRAM is new, SC195 (Machine Serial Number Error) may appear. If
this occurs:
Enter the SP mode and do SP5801 001 to set the memory to the defaults
(All).
Switch the machine off/on and start from Step 1.
Important! WHEN SC195 OCCURS, THE SERIAL NUMBER MUST BE INPUT.
PLEASE CONTACT THE TECHNICAL SUPPORT HOTLINE.
5. Do SP5825-001 (NVRAM Data Download) and push the Execute key.
NOTE: The serial number of the file on the SD card must match the serial
number of the machine. If the serial numbers do not match, the
download will not complete correctly.
6. Turn the copier main power switch off and close the front door.
7. Remove the SD card from Slot 3.
Important: This procedure does not download the following data to the NVRAM:
Total Count
C/O Count

SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES
B132/B200 5-20 SM

5.5 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES
5.5.1 SERVICE TABLE KEY
Notation What it means
[range/step] Example: [9~+9/0.1 mm]
The default setting can be adjusted in 0.1mm steps in the range 9.
Note: The default setting for each SP mode is shown on the screen in
the Initial box immediately below the entry box. Some of the default
settings for the B064 Series and B140 Series are slightly different, so be
sure to check the Initial box on the SP mode screen.
DFU Denotes Design or Factory Use. Do not change this value.
Japan only The feature or item is for Japan only. Do not change this value.
LEF Long Edge Feed
SEF Short Edge Feed

SM 5-21 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

Abbreviations for Venus-C1 SP Service Tables
The SP titles are abbreviated so they can be used in smaller the 2-line displays of future printer
models. Refer to this list if you do not understand the meaning of an abbreviation.
Code Meaning Code Meaning Code Meaning
1/3S One-third Speed HS Half Speed Recov Recovery
1C One Color Htg Htg Reg Registration
1Op 1 Operation (execution
cycle)
Htg Roll Heating Roller Reps Repetitions
1-S 1-Side (Simplex) I/O Input/Output Rev Reverse
2-S 2-Side (Duplex) Init Initial power on Roll Roller
Abs Absolute Int Interval Rot Rotation
Adj Adjustment IntCnt Interval Count s seconds
Agi Agitation Inv Inverter S Sideways (LEF)
Amt Amount ITR Image Transfer SApli Scanner Application
B/W Black-and-White (2-Color) JG Junction Gate Sep Separation
BotPlt Bottom Plate (Tray) K Black, BK Shts Sheets
C Cyan L Lengthways (SEF) Sn Sensor
Calib Calibration LEdge Leading Edge Sp1 Special Paper 1
Chg Change LL Lowest (Low Low) SS Saddle-Stitch
Chk Check Lvl Level Std Standard
Chrg Charge M Motor Stp Staple
Cir. Circulation M Magenta StrTemp Start Temperature
Cnt Count Meas Measurement Sub Sub Hopper
Coeff Coefficient Mem Memory SWT Switch Timing
Col Color MH Medium High Syn Synchronization
Cont Continuous Operation ML Medium Low T1 Tray 1
Cor Correction MM Medium (Medium Medium) T2 Tray 2
Ctrl Control Norm Normal Paper T3 Tray 3
Den Density NS Normal Speed T4 Tray 4
Dev Development Opt. Optical Tan Tandem
Devr Developer Patt Pattern TC Toner Control
Disp Display PE Paper End TE Toner End
Dupx Duplex Pgs Pages TE Sn Toner End Sensor
EMargin Erase Margin Photo Pht TEdge Trailing Edge
EngSave Energy Save PM Pulse Modulation Temp Temperature
Ent Entrance PolyM Polygon Motor Temp Chg Temperature
Change
Env Environment Pos Position Thk Thick (Paper)
Err Error Poten Potential Thresh Threshold
Exe Execute PPr Photo Paper Tmg Timing
FC Full Color Press Pressure TNE Toner Near End
Fin1 Euphrates Prior Priority Tnr Toner
Fin2 Victoria-D Prmr Parameter Tnr M Toner Motor
Fin3 Zaire (!") ProCon Process Control Tra Trace (thin) Paper
Fwd Forward Pt Point TxtOCR Text (OCR)
Gray Grayscale PT Paper Transfer TxtPrt Text (Print)
Haf Half Speed PTR Paper Transfer Roller Usd Tnr Used Toners
Height Hgt Ptype Paper Type Vert Vertical
HH Highest (High High) Pwr Power Y Yellow

B132/B200 5-22 SM

5.5.2 COPIER SERVICE TABLES
Group 1000
1001 Lead Edge Reg Leading Edge Regisration Adjustment
001 Adjusts the printing leading edge registration using the trimming area pattern
(SP2109, Pattern No. 10).
[9~+9/0.1mm]
Specification: 32mm

1002 Side-to-Side Reg Side-to-Side Registration Adjustment
Adjusts printing side-to-side registration for each feed station, using the test
pattern (SP2109, Pattern No. 10).
These SPs should be adjusted after replacing the laser synchronization detector or
the laser optical unit.
001 Tray 1 [9~+9/0.1 mm]
002 Tray 2
003 Tray 3
004 Tray 4 Japan Only
005 Bypass Tray
006 LCT
007 Dupx Tray

1003 Reg Buckle Adj Registration Buckle Adjustment
Adjusts the registration motor timing. This timing determines the amount of paper
buckle at registration. (A higher setting causes more buckling.)
001 Trays & LCT [9~+9/1 mm]
002 Dupx Tray [9~+9/1 mm]
003 Bypass Tray [9~+9/1 mm]

1007 Bypass Size Disp Bypass Paper Size Detection Display
Use this SP to display and confirm the size of the paper detected in the by-pass tray
if paper is skewing during feeding.
[0~255/1 mm]

1008 Duplex Fence Adj Duplex Side Fence Position Adjustment
Allows fine adjustment of the distance between the edges of the sheet and the
jogger fences when the fences come together to position the sheet in the duplex
unit.
[-3~+3/0.1 mm]

SM 5-23 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

1009 Fine Adj Reg Spd Fine Adjust Registration Line Speed
The SP allows fine adjustment fine adjustment of the registration roller speed to
adjust the line speed.
001 Reg. Roller Registration Roller: Fine Adjust Speed
Allows fine adjustment of the registration roller line
speed.
[-3~+3/0.1%]
Motor Adj:Norm Motor Speed Fine Adjustment (Normal)

002 Drum Motor:K
003 Drum Motor:M
004 Drum Motor:C
005 Drum Motor: K
006 PCU Motor:K
007 PCU Motor:M
008 PCU Motor:C
009 PCU Motor:Y
010 ITB Motor
011 PTR Motor
"Normal" is normal speed for copying.
[-3 ~ +3/ 0.1%]
012 Fusing Motor [-5 ~ +5/ 0.1%]
Motor Adj:Half Motor Speed Fine Adjustment (Half-Speed)
013 Drum Motor:K
014 Drum Motor:M
015 Drum Motor:C
016 Drum Motor:Y
017 PCU Motor:K
018 PCU Motor:M
019 PCU Motor:C
020 PCU Motor:Y
021 ITB Motor
022 PTR Motor
023 Fusing Motor
"Half-Speed" is the half-speed mode.
[-3 ~ +3/ 0.1%]
Motor Adj: 1/3 Motor Speed Fine Adjustment (One-Third
Speed)
024 Fusing Exit Motor "One-Third Speed" is the one-third speed mode.
The one-third speed mode is used when OHP
goes through the fusing unit.
[-5 ~ +5/ 0.1%]
Registration Roller Speed
025 Reg. Roller This SP allows fine adjustment of the registration
roller speed.
[-3 ~ +3/ 0.1%]

B132/B200 5-24 SM

1105 Htg Roll Sn1:Ctr Heating Roller: Sensor 1 (Center)
Htg Roll Sn1:Ctr Heating Roller: Sensor 1 (Center)
SP codes 001 to 027 control the temperature of the
heating roller.
001 Prefeed Temp Free-rotation start time.
[60~200/1 deg.]
002 Reload Temp At normal standby temperature.
[130~200/1 deg.]
003 Wait Temp:Norm At normal standby temperature.
[50~200/1 deg.]
004 Wait Temp:Low At low standby temperature.
[50~200/1 deg.]
005 Wait Temp:High At high standby temperature.
[50~200/1 deg.]
006 1-S Norm:1Col During copying.
[130~20/1 deg.]
007 1-S:Norm :FC During copying.
[130~200/1 deg.]
008 1-S:Trace:1C During copying.
[130~200/1 deg.]
009 1-S:Trace:FC During copying.
[130~200/1 deg.]
010 1-S:Thk1:1C:HS During copying in half-speed mode.
[130~200/1 deg.]
011 1-S:Thk1:FC:HS During copying in half-speed mode.
[130~200/1 deg.]
012 1-S:Thk3:1C:NS:CPM During copying in normal speed mode on thick paper in
black-and-white.
[130~200/1 deg.]
013 1-S:Thk3:FC:NS:CPM During copying in normal speed mode on thick paper in
full color.
[130~200/1 deg.]
014 2-S:Norm:1C During normal speed copying.
[130~200/1 deg.]
015 2-S:Norm:FC During normal speed copying.
[130~200/1 deg.]
016 2-S:Trace:1C During normal speed copying (paper setting).
[130~200/1 deg.]
017 2-S:Trace:FC During normal speed coyping (paper setting).
[130~200/1 deg.]
018 2-S:Thk1:1C:HS During half-speed copying (paper setting).
[130~200/1 deg.]
019 2-S:Thk1:FC:HS During half-speed copying (paper setting)
[130~200/1 deg.]
020 2-S:Thk3:1C:NS:CPM During half-speed copying (paper setting)
[130~200/1 deg.]
021 2-S:Thk3:FC:NS:CPM During half-speed copying (paper setting)
[130~200/1 deg.]

SM 5-25 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

022 Thk2:1C:HS During half-speed copying (paper setting).
[130~200/1 deg.]
023 Thk2:FC:HS During half-speed copying (paper setting).
[130~200/1 deg.]
024 Cont OHP:1C During half-speed copying (paper setting).
[130~200/1 deg.]
025 Cont OHO:FC During half-speed copying (paper setting).
[130~200/1 deg.]
026 OHP:1C:100mm/s During 100 mm/s copying (paper setting).
[130~200/1 deg.]
027 OHP:FC:100mm/s During 100 mm/s copying (paper setting).
[130~200/1 deg.]
PressRoll Pressure Roller
028 Reload Temp Until warmup (reload) ends.
[70~180/1 deg.]
029 Wait Temp:Norm At normal standby temperature.
[50~180/1 deg.]
030 Wait:Temp:Low At low standby temperature.
[50~180/1 deg.]
031 Wait:Temp:High At hight standby temperature.
[50~180/1 deg.]
032 1-S Norm Target temperature.
[70~180/1 deg.]
033 2-S Norm Target temperature.
[70~180/1 deg.]
034 Cont OHP During continuous OHP copying.
[130~200/1 deg.]
035 SemiT OHP:100mm/s Target temperature (paper setting).
[70~180/1 deg.]
HotRoll Hot Roller
036 Wait Temp: Norm Normal standby temperature.
[50~170/1 deg.]
037 Wait Temp: Low Low standby temperature.
[50~170/1 deg.]
038 Wait Temp: High High standby temperature.
[50~170/1 deg.]

B132/B200 5-26 SM

1106 Fusing Temp Disp Fusing Lamp Control Method/Temperature Display
These SP codes control the temperature control of the hot roller and display the
temperatures of the hot roller, pressure roller, heating roller, and heating roller
lamps.
001 Temp Ctrl On/Off Hot roller fusing lamp control switch
0: OFF, 1: PID
002 Phase Ctrl On/Off Hot roller phase control
0:OFF 1:ON
003 Htg Roll Ctr Temp Displays the temperature in centigrade of the fusing lamp
(center) in the heating roller. Range: 0 to 230
004 Htg Roll End Temp Displays the temperature in centigrade of the fusing lamp
(ends) in the heating roller. Range: 0 to 230
005 Press Roll Temp Displays the temperature in centigrade of the pressure
roller. Range: 0 to 230
006 Hot Roll Temp Displays the temperature in centigrade of the hot roller.
Range: 0 to 230

1107 Mode Shift Setting Mode Shift Setting
Mode Shift Mode Shift Setting
001 Low Temp SW The calculated value for the specified temperatures when
the readings of the environmental sensors are low.
[0~20/1 deg.]
002 High Temp SW The calculated value for the specified temperatures when
the readings of the environmental sensors are high.
[-20~0/1 deg.]
003 Pres Roll Reload Press Roll Reload
004 Idle Temp On/Off The hot roller temperature that determines whether the
fusing unit rollers are rotated freely during warmup.
[80~200/1 deg.]
005 Idle Time:Extend The length of time the fusing/exit motor remains on after
the fusing unit has reached the warmup temperature.
[0~10/1 min.]
006 Feed Norm Temp Determines whether fusing exit motor remains before
feeding plain paper after warmup temperature for the
heating roller has been reached.
0: No 1: Yes
007 Press Temp:Norm The temperature calculated for the specified temperature
when the fusing/exit motor starts to rotate when plain
paper starts to feed.
[0~20/1 deg.]
008 Press Time:Norm The time calculated to be added to the rotation time of the
fusing/exit motor at the start of plain paper feed, based on
the temperature specified temperature.
009 Fuse Exit M Cycles The cycles of the fusing/exit motor at standby.
[10~240/1 min. ]
010 Fuse Exit M Rot The time the fusing exit motor rotates at standby.
[0~1/1 ]

SM 5-27 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

011 Fuse Exit Temp The temperature used to calculate the temperature
specified for the hot roller at the end of fusing/exit motor
rotation when the warmup temperature has been reached.
[0~30/1 deg. ]
012 Add Rot Time The amount of time added to the rotation time of the
fusing/exit motor after warmup temperture has been
reached, based on the temperature specified for the hot
roller at standby.
[0~90/10]
Stand Cool On/Off Standby Ventilation Cooling: On/Off
013 Thk2 (0:Off 1:On) Switches on/off standby for cooling after printing thick
paper.
0: Off 1: On
To Cooling Mode Standby Ventilation Cooling: Setting
014 Thk2/OHP Cool End Sets the temperature to end the cool down period after
printing with thick paper or OHP.
[0~40/1 deg. ]
015 Trace Cool End Sets the temperature to end the cool down period after
printing with tracing (thin) paper.
[0~40/1 deg. ]
Edge Cool On/Off Standby Ventilation Cooling: On/Off High Edge Temp.
016 Start (0:No 1:Yes) Switches on/off standby for cooling for the ends of the
fusing rollers after printing on wide paper.
0: Off 1: On

B132/B200 5-28 SM

1108 Htg Roll Lamp 1 Heating Roller: Fusing Lamps
Controls the level of the power (percentage) supplied to the heating rollers (Watts)
when the machine is in the specified mode.
At Reload During warmup after the machine is switched or returns from
and energy save mode.
Wait Time While the machine is in the standby mode and ready for
operation.
Norm:1C Normal operation for black-and-white copying and printing.
Norm:FC Normal operation for full color copying and printing
Scan:Norm:1C Black-and-white scanning.
Scan:Norm:FC Full color scanning.
At ProCon Reload Reload temperature after completing the process control
cycle.
Heating Roller: Fusing Lamp 1
001 At Reload [ 0~100 / 100 /0.1%]
002 Wait Time
003 Norm:1C
004 Norm:FC
005 Wait Time [ 0~1000 /0.1%]

006 Norm:1C [ 0~1000 / 1000 /0.1%]
007 Scan:Norm:1C [ 0~100 /0.1%]
008 Norm:FC
009 Scan:Norm:FC [ 0~1000 /0.1%]
Pressure Roller Fusing Lamp
010 At Reload [ 0~100 / 100 /0.1%]
011 At ProCon Reload [ 0~100 /0.1%]
012 Wait Time [ 0~100 / 100 /0.1%]
013 Norm:1C
014 Norm:FC
Hot Roller Fusing Lamp
015 At Reload [ 0~100 / 100 /0.1%]
016 Wait Time
017 At Reload [ 0~100 / 100 /0.1%]

SM 5-29 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

1110 Paper Type Selet Paper Type Select
These SP settings switch the on/off the paper type type detection and double-feed
functions.
[0~1/1]
0: Enable
1: Disable
Two sensors, one mounted above and one below the paper at the registration
rollers, detect the opacity of the first sheet and compares this reading for every
subsequent sheet. If the reading is higher (thicker paper) or lower (thinner paper)
the sensor triggers an error.
Paper Type
001 Tray 1
002 Tray 2
003 Tray 3
005 Bypass
006 LCT
Double-Feed
007 Tray 1
008 Tray 2
009 Tray 3
011 Bypass
002 LCT

1111 Nip Width Mode Nip Width Measurement Setting Mode
001 Execute Determines whether the nip at the hot roller and pressure
roller is calibrated. Touch [Execute].
002 Stop Time Determines the down time of the fusing/exit motor in the
fusing nip band calibration mode.
[1~100/1 sec.]
003 Stop Interval Determines the intervals between the down times of the
fusing/exit motor in the nip band calibration mode.
[0~2000/100 msec.]

1112 Fuser Unit In/Out Fusing Unit: In/Out Start Fusing Unit
Determines whether the fusing unit operates during the copy cycle for image
creation and paper feed.
0:OFF, 1:ON

B132/B200 5-30 SM

1200 1st CMP Down
This SP adjusts the temperature of the heating roller at the start of the CMP down
modes for black-and-white copying in normal/high temperature environments.
1st CPM Down 1st CMP Down (Heating Roller Temperature)
001 StrTemp:Low/Hi:1C
002 StrTemp:Low/Hi:FC
Normal temperature, high temperature environment
[20~0/1 deg.]
003 StrTemp:Low:1C
004 StrTemp:Low:FC
Low temperature environment
[20~0/1 deg.]
005 CPM Norm/Hi:1C Normal, high temperature environment, A4 SEF
[10~60/5 cpm]
006 CPM Norm/Hi:FC Normal, high temperature environment, A4 SEF
[10~60/5 cpm]
007 CPM Low Temp:1C Low temperature environment, A4 SEF
[10~60/5 cpm]
008 CPM Low Temp:FC Low temperature environment, A4 SEF
[10~60/5 cpm]
2nd CPM Down 2nd CPM Down
009 CPM Norm/Hi:1C Normal, high temperature environment, A4 SEF
[10~60/5 cpm]
010 CPM Norm/Hi:FC Normal, high temperature environment, A4 SEF
[10~60/5 cpm]
011 CPM Low:1C Low temperature environment, A4 SEF
[10~60/5 cpm]
012 CPM Low:FC Low temperature environment, A4 SEF
[10~60/5 cpm]
3rd CPM Down:Thk 3rd CPM Down: Thick Paper
013 1C:60/45/30cpm CPM down settings (based on A4 SEF) for black and white.
[0~4/1]
0#60 cpm 1#50 cpm 2#45 cpm 3#30 cpm$
014 FC:45/25/15cpm CPM down settings (based on A4 SEF) for full color.
[0~4/1]
0#60 cpm 1#50 cpm 2#45 cpm 3#30 cpm$
015 (0:Yes 1:No) Switches the CPM down feature on/off
0:OFF 1:ON

1201 HtgRoll L2:Hys Heating Roller 2: Hysterisis On/Off
This SP adjusts the control temperature of the heating roller when Lamp 2 in the
heating roller is switched on.
001 On [-5.-~+5.0/0.5]
Note: Every 0.1 increment adjusts temperature 0.1 deg.
002 Off Switches off Lamp 2, no adjust allowed.

SM 5-31 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

1202 Set Fusing Temp Set Fusing Temperature (for shift to low power mode)
This SP sets the time interval for the machine to remain idle to trigger lower power
mode 1.
Set Fusing Temp
001 EngSave Time 1 [0~60/1 deg.]
002 EngSave Time 2
003 EngSave Time 3
Heating Roller
004 Energy Save 1
005 Energy Save 2
006 Energy Save 3
Pressure Roller
007 Energy Save 1
008 Energy Save 2
009 Energy Save 3
Hot Roller
010 Energy Save 1
011 Energy Save 2
012 Energy Save 3

1203 Fusing:I/O Fusing Input/Output
This SP adjusts the operation of the fusing exit sensor.
001 FuseExitSn:On/Off Display indicates whether the fusing exit sensor is on or off.
0: OFF 1:ON
002 FuseExitSn Timing Displays the time interval from when the registration motor
goes off to when it restarts.
[0~5000/1 msec.]
003 FuseExitSn ON Display indicates whether the fusing paper remains sensor is
on or off.
[0~5000/1 msec.]
004 FuseExitSn Disp Dsiplays whether the paper remains sensor is on or off from
when the registration motor goes off until it restarts.
0: OFF 1:ON
005 FuseExit M ON Switches forced rotation of the fusing/exit motor on/off.
[0~1/1]

1901 CPM Down:Thk CPM Down Mode: Thick Paper
This SP adjusts the CPM down time for thick paper and tab sheets.
001 CPM Down:Thk Special CPM Down Setting: Thick Paper
[0~4/1]
002 CPM Down:Tab Special CPM Down Setting: Index Tabs
[0~4/1]

B132/B200 5-32 SM

1905 Bypass Thk Bypass Tray: Thick Paper
This SP switches the thick paper mode on and off for thick paper and index sheet
feed from the bypass tray.
001 0:No 1:Yes Bypass Feed: Thick Paper Mode
Switches the thick paper mode on/off for feed from the bypass
tray.
0:OFF 1:ON
002 0:No 1:Yes Bypass Feed: Thick Paper Mode
Switches the thick paper mode on/off for feed of index sheets
from the bypass tray.
0:OFF 1:ON

SM 5-33 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

Group 2000

2101 Reg Col Interval Color Interval Registration Adjustment
Use these SPs to correct problems with color registration. Color registration
problems can be detected by checking the results of 2901 002 Pattern 1. Before
doing these adjustments, try to solve the problem by doing SP2111. For more, see
Section "4. Troubleshooting".
001 Main Scan Dot:K [-99~+99/1 dot]
002 Main Scan Dot:M
003 Main Scan Dot:C
004 Main Scan Dot:Y
005 MainScan Dot:K [-31~+31/1 sub dot]
006 MainScan Dot:K-M
007 MainScan Dot:K-C
008 MainScan Dot:K-Y
009 MainScan Dot:K 0-1 [-63~+63/1 line]
010 MainScan Dot:M 0-1
011 MainScan Dot:C 0-1
012 MainScan Dot:Y 0-1
013 SubScan Line:K-M [-63~+63/1 sub dot]
014 SubScan Line:K-C
015 SubScan Line:K-Y
016 SubScan M Adj:K-M [-33~+33/ 1 step]
017 SubScan M Adj:K-C
018 SubScan M Adj:K-Y

2102 Prt Mag Adj Print Magnification Adjustment
No information is available at this time.
001 Main Scan Mag [-100~+100/0.01%]
005 Mag Rate:K 0-1
006 Mag Rate:M 0-1
007 Mag Rate:C 0-1
008 Mag Rate:Y 0-1
[-63~+63/1 sub dot]

2103 Prt Erase Margin Print Erase Width Adjustment
Adjusts the white space at the leading edge.
001 Adj LEdge Margin [-50~+50/0.1 mm]
002 Adj TEdge Margin [-20+20/1 mm]
003 Adj Left Margin
004 Adj Right Margin
005 TEdge Margin:Tra [0~20/0.1 mm]

2104 Skew Adj Skew Adjustment
Use these SP to correct skew in color registration. For more, see Section "4.
Troubleshooting".
001 Skew Adj K-M [-75~+75/1 pulse]
002 Skew Adj K-C [-50~+50/1 pulse]
003 Test Pattern K-Y [-75~+75/1 pulse]

B132/B200 5-34 SM
2105 LD Syn PM Adj LD Pulse Modulation Synchronization Adjustment
001 K0 [-117~127/]
002 M0
003 C0
004 Y0
005 K1
006 M1
007 C1
008 Y1

2106 Poly Mtr OFF Polygon Motor Off Setting
The polygon mirror motor turns off if the machine receives no print job for the time
specified in this SP mode after the previous job was completed.
[0~180/1 sec]

2107 Prt Param On/Off Printer Parameter Settings: On/Off
005 Shade Corr Flag [0~1/1]
006 Phase Ctrl Flage

2108 Col Prt Stop Specify Color to Stop Printing
This SP switches off printing of a color.
001 K [0~1/1] 0:Off (Color prints), 1:On (Color does not print)
002 M
003 C
004 Y

SM 5-35 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

2109 Test Pattern Write Test Pattern
Some of these test patterns are used for copy image adjustments but most are used
primarily for design testing. These test patterns do not use the IPU.
001 Image Add Select "1" to have the patterns selected with
SP2109 002 print overlapped on one another.
[0~1/1] 0:Off, 1:On
002 Select Pattern Allows you to select the pattern to print.
[0~21/1]
0 Off 14 Horizontal Cross-Stitch
1 1-Dot Line 15 Crop Marks
2 1-Dot Slant Cross-Stripe 16 Vertical Belt
3 2-Dot Horizontal Line 17 Checkered Flag
4 2-Dot Vertical Line 18 1-Dot 20 mm Grid
5 1-Dot Horizontal Line 19 1-Dot 20 mm Slant Grid
6 1-Dot Vertical Line 20 Horizontal Grayscale
7 1-Dot Independent 21 Horizontal Grayscale-White Stripes
8 2-Dot Independent 22 --- Not Used ---
9 4-Dot Independent 23 --- Not Used ---
10 Trim Area 24 --- Not Used ---
11 Belt Pattern 25 --- Not Used ---
12 100% Coverage 26 --- Not Used ---
13 Vertical Cross-Stitch 27 --- Not Used ---
004 Col Select:YCMK [0~255/1]
005 Density:K [0~63/1]
006 Density:M
007 Density:C
008 Density:Y
011 Gray Density 1 [0~63/1]
012 Gray Density 2
013 Gray Density 3
014 Gray Density 4
015 Gray Density 5
016 Gray Density 6
017 Gray Density 7
018 Gray Density 8
019 Gray Density 9
020 Gray Density 10
021 Gray Density 11
022 Gray Density 12
023 Gray Density 13
024 Gray Density 14
025 Gray Density 15

B132/B200 5-36 SM

2110 Force Tnr Cycle Force Toner Supply Cycle
001 Forces 2-Point interval correction.

2111 Force Tnr Pos Force Toner Position Alignment
Executes the MUSIC feature. MUSIC is the "Mirror Unit for Skew and Interval
Correction". Three MUSIC sensors mounted above the ITB read three MUSIC
sensor patterns developed on the ITB. The sensors read the patterns and the
machine uses this feedback to adjust 1) the positions of the 3rd scanner mirrors to
correct skew (main scan), and 2) the speed of the drum motors to correct the
intervals (sub scan) between the patterns. If the vertical alignment of the patterns or
the intervals are not correct, this causes color offset. This adjustment is done for
each color (Y, M, C, K).
Normally, MUSIC executes automatically:
When the machine is turned on or returns from an energy save mode.
At the interval prescribed by SP2153 015 (Default: 8 min.)
After completion of the process control cycle.
When the machine receives a job after remaining idle for a long period.
After the fusing unit exceeds the prescribed temperature.

2112 Mag Point Adj Maginification Point Adjustment
Corrects the difference in magnification for each color in the left and right direction.
[-4~+4/1 (50m)]
Do SP2109 002 and print Pattern 1 on A3 size paper. Examine the pattern with a
scaled lupe. For every 50m adjust the setting in the left or right direction. A 1 step
correction corrects 50m. For more, see Section "4. Troubleshooting".
001 M Left
002 M Right
003 C Left
004 C Right
005 Y Left
006 Y Right

2150 Prt Area Pulse Pulse Setting: Print Area Only DFU
These SPs fine adjust magnification in the main scan direction in increments
of 1/32 dots.
001-010 K Area 0 Area 9 [-120~+120/32 sub dot]
011-020 M Area0 Area 9
021 - 029 C Area0 Area 9
031 - 040 Y Area0 Area 9

SM 5-37 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

2151 Prt Area Coeff Coefficient Setting: Print Area Only DFU
These SPs adjust the magnification coefficient for each color in these areas:
Mid Area 0-3
Small Area 1-3
Small Area 5-8
001 K MidArea0 [1~99/0.01] 021 C MidArea0 [1~99/0.01]
002 K MidArea3 022 C MidArea3
003 K SmallArea1 [1~99/0.01] 023 C SmallArea1 [1~99/0.01]
004 K SmallArea2 024 C SmallArea2
011 M MidArea0 [1~99/0.01] 031 Y MidArea0 [1~99/0.01]
012 M MidArea3 032 Y MidArea3
013 M SmallArea1 [1~99/0.01] 033 Y SmallArea1 [1~99/0.01]
014 M SmallArea2 034 Y SmallArea2

2152 Shading Coeff Shading Correction Coefficient DFU
These SPs set the shading correction coefficient for Areas 01 to 19 for each
color. For a list of the ranges and default settings, print the SMC report with
SP5990.
001 - 019 K Area01 - Area19
021 -039 M Area01 - Area19
041 - 058 C Area01 - Area19
061 - 079 Y Area01 - Area19

2153 MUSIC Settings MUSIC Condition Settings
These SPs determine how MUSIC executes.
In the settings below 0: OFF, 1:ON.
001 Auto Execute Sets MUSIC to execute automatically.
[0~1/1]
002 During ProCon Sets MUSIC to execute after completion of the process
control self-check.
[0~1/1]
003 Initialization Sets MUSIC to execute after the machine is switched on.
[0~1/1]
004 During Data In Sets MUSIC to execute before image data output.
[0~1/1]
005 Writing Sets MUSIC to execute during long print jobs.
[0~1/1]
NOTE: Use SP2153 010 to set the number of pages
between MUSIC executions (Default: 100 pages).

Rev. 02/2007
B132/B200 5-38 SM
007 PaperInt:2Pt Meas Sets MUSIC to execute with 2-point measurement of
image page intervals.
[0~1/1]
008 JobInt:2Pt Meas Sets MUSIC to execute with 2-point measurements
immediately before image output.
[0~1/1]
010 Interrupt Int Sets the page interval beween MUSIC executions during
long jobs print jobs.
[10~300/1 page]
Note: This SP is effective only when SP2153 005 is
switched on.
012 MUSIC:Temp Chg Prescribes the exposure unit temperature change at which
MUSIC executes at the start of a job.
[1~300/0.1 deg]
013 MUSIC:2Pt TempChg Sets MUSIC to execute with 2-point measurement of the
room temperature change.
[1~300/0.1 deg]
014 MUSIC Density Lvl Sets the density of the MUSIC test patterns. Note that the
default is set at the maximum setting.
[0~63/1]
015 Door Open:Wait Sets the time interval for MUSIC to execute after the front
door is opened and then closed to remove a paper jam or
perform some other task.
[2~99/1 min.]
016 Clear Main Slip Clears the skew correction amount for MUSIC in the main
scan direction.
[0~1/1]
020 Sensor Light 1 Sets the light intensity of MUSIC sensor 1.
[0~65535/1]
[0~65535/1]
[0~65535/1]
023 AutoLight:PreAdj Executes automatic adjustment of the light emitted from
the MUSIC sensors.
[0~1/1]
025 AdjCoeff:FrontKf Sets the value of the coefficient of the front MUSIC
sensor.
[0~100/0.1]
026 AdjCoeff:CtrKc Sets the value of the coefficient for the center MUSIC
sensor.
[0~100/0.1]
027 AdjCoeff:RearKr Sets the value of the coefficient of the center MUSIC
sensor.
[0~100/0.1]

028 Min Patch Fine Sets the minimum amount of patch shift for MUSIC fine
adjustment.
[0~100/0.1]
029 Min Patch:Rough Sets the minimum amount of patch shift for MUSIC rough
adjustment.
[0~100/0.1]
SM 5-39 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

030 CMY:LowMin. No information is available at this time.
[0~50/0.1V]
031 CMY:MidMin. No information is available at this time.
[0~50/0.1V]
032 Base MaxDiff No information is available at this time.
[0~50/0.1V]
033 Patch Mini Gap No information is available at this time.
[0~50/0.1V]
034 Light Target Adj Sets the target value for the intensity of the MUSIC sensor
lights.
[0~50/0.1V]
035 MY Light Max Sets the maximum value for the intensity of the MUSIC
sensor lights.
[0~255/0.1V]
036 Add Upper Limit
037 Add Lower Limit
038 LaserX:FrontXf
039 LaserX:CenterXc
040 LaserX: RearXr
041 LaserX: TempCoeff

2154 2-Point Target 2-Point Interval Target Setting
These 2-point target settings done at the factory affect the characteristics of the
lenses. These target values must be entered when when the laser unit is replaced.
The correct settings are printed below the first barcode on one A5 sheet of paper
provided with the replacement laser unit.
001 K [60700~63230/61984/1]
002 M
003 C
004 Y

2155 2-Point Int Set 2-Point Interval Target Setting DFU
These SPs adjust the difference in the position of color registration for MUSIC in
the main scan direction, using K (black) as the reference point.
Do SP2109 002 and print Pattern 1 on A3 size paper. Examine the pattern with a
scaled lupe. For every 43.2m adjust the setting in the left or right direction. A 1
step correction corrects 50m. For more, please refer to Section "3.
Replacement and Adjustment".
001 M Main Scan
002 C Main Scan
003 Y Main Scan
[-5~+5/1 (43.2m)

B132/B200 5-40 SM

2180 Lens Temp Lens Temperature Monitor
These SPs display the measured temperatures of the optical lenses for each color.
001 M-K Displays the measured temperature of the magenta and
black lenses (in the laser optics).
[0~999/0.1 deg]
002 Y-C Displays the measured temperature of the yellow and
cyan lenses (in the laser optics).
[0~999/0.1 deg]

2181 Alignment Result Position Alignment Result
These SPs display the amount of shift correction for each color, the amount of
correction done at each sensor in both the main scan and sub scan direction.
[-2000~+2000/1]
001 M Skew Amt The amount of skew correction for magenta.
002 M Main Skew 1 Amount of shift correction for magenta in the main scan
direction at sensor 1.
005 M Sub Skew 1 Amount of shift correction for magenta in the sub scan
011 C Skew Amt The amount of skew correction for cyan.
012 C Main Skew 1 Amount of shift correction for cyan in the main scan
015 C Sub Skew 1 Amount of shift correction for cyan in the sub scan
021 Y Skew Amt The amount of skew correction for yellow.
022 Y Main Skew 1 Amount of shift correction for yellow in the main scan
025 Y Sub Skew 1 Amount of shift correction for yellow in the sub scan
SM 5-41 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

030 MUSIC Result Displays the result of MUSIC adjustment

2182 Skew Corr Total Skew Correction Total
These SPs display the total skew correction for magenta, cyan, and yellow.
001 M [-50~+50/1 pulse]
002 C [-33~+33/1 pulse]
003 Y [-50~+50/1 pulse]

2183 2-Point Measure 2-Point Interval Measurement Monitor
These SPs allow you to set the focal points for the execution of 2-point
measurement of each color.
001 Focus Value:K [-100~+100/0.01%]
002 Focus Value:M
003 Focus Value:C
004 Focus Value:Y

2201 Set DC Charge Fixed DC Charge Setting
These SPs set the dc bias for the standard speed and low speed mode, but take
effect only when SP3501 001 is set to "1" (Fixed). The dc bias (an absolute value)
is set to +200, making the default values for each color 700. The dc bias is
normally adjusted by the process control self-check, but when automatic process
control is switched off (by setting SP3501 001 to "1"), these values are used for the
charge potential.
001 Std Speed:K [-999 to 200/1V]
002 Std Speed:M
003 Std Speed: C
004 Std Speed: Y
006 Low Speed:K
007 Low Speed: M
008 Low Speed: C
009 Low Speed: Y

2202 Set AC Charge Fixed DC Charge Setting
These SPs set the AC bias for the standard speed mode and low speed mode,
but take effect only when SP3501 001 is set to "1" (Fixed). The default ac bias for
each color is 2.2 kV (220) The ac bias is normally adjusted by process control
self-check, but when automatic process control is switched off (by setting SP3501
001 to "1"), these values are used for the charge potential.
001 Std Speed: K [0~300/1 kV]
002 Std Speed: M
003 Std Speed: C
004 Std Speed: Y
006 Low Speed: K
007 Low Speed: M
008 Low Speed: C
009 Low Speed: Y

B132/B200 5-42 SM

2204 AC Charge Corr AC Charge: Setting for Ambient Correction
These SPs adjust the target ac current for each operating environment (LL, ML,
etc.). The process control self-check adjusts the ac current to achieve the target
voltage. SP2901 003 (PCU) displays the most recent absolute temperature. If the
auto process control self-check fails to achieve the threshold value, then the target
selected with these SPs is used.
001 LL:Target:K
002 LL:Target:M
003 LL:Target:C
004 LL:Target:Y
006 ML:Target:K
007 ML:Target:M
008 ML:Target:C
009 ML:Target:Y
011 MM:Target:K
012 MM:Target:M
013 MM:Target:C
014 MM:Target:Y
016 MH:Target:K
017 MH:Target:M
018 MH:Target:C
019 MH:Target:Y
021 HH:Target:K
022 HH:Target:M
023 HH:Target:C
024 HH:Target:Y
[100~350/0 mA]

2211 Set LD Power LD Power: Fixed Setting
These SPs set the power levels of the laser diodes in the exposure unit for the
standard speed mode and low speed mode for each color, but take effect only
when SP3501 001 is set to "1" (Fixed). With the setting at "0" the LD output is
100%. This can be adjusted in the range 117 to +127 (44% to 160%). The "0"
setting is equivalent to 0.171 mW exposed on the surface of the drum. The LD
power level is normally adjusted during the process control self-check. These
values are used only when automatic process control is switched off (by setting
SP3501 001 to "1").
001 Std Speed:K [-117~+127/1]
002 Std Speed:M
003 Std Speed:C
004 Std Speed:Y
005 Low Speed:K [-117~+127/1]
006 Low Speed:M
007 Low Speed:C
008 Low Speed:Y

SM 5-43 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

2212 Set Dev DC Development DC: Fixed Setting
These SPs set the development dc bias for the standard speed mode and low
speed mode for each color, but take effect only when SP3501 001 is set to "1"
(Fixed). The dc development bias (absolute value) is set to 200 V, and the default
for each color is set to 500 V. These values are used only when automatic
process control is switched off (by setting SP3501 001 to "1").
001 Std Speed:K [-800~0/1 V]
002 Std Speed:M
003 Std Speed:C
004 Std Speed:Y
005 Low Speed:K [-800~0/1 V]
006 Low Speed:M
007 Low Speed:C
008 Low Speed:Y

2251 Force Tnr Supply Forced Toner Supply: Manual Execution
Use SPs to increase manually the supply of toner to the sub hopper of the
development unit to determine if toner supply is abnormal or to recover normal
operation of a color toner supply when image density becomes light. After you
touch "Execute" the toner supply switches on for 0.1 sec. and then off for 0.45 sec.
four times for the select color or colors.
001 Execute:K
002 Execute:M
003 Execute:C
004 Execute:Y
Executes forced toner supply to the selected
development unit.
[0~1/1]
005 Execute:Col Executes forced toner supply to the Y, M, C development
units only.
[0~1/1]
006 Execute:All Col Executes forced toner supply to all development units (Y,
M, C, K).
[0~1/1]

2252 Set Tnr Supply Forced Toner Supply: Setting
Use these SPs to adjust the number of rotations done by the toner supply clutch
when SP2251 001~006 is executed manually. The number of toner supply cluth
rotations can be adjusted for each color. A high setting increases the number of
rotations and increases the amount of toner supply to the development unit,
resulting in a darker image for the selected color.
001 Supply Times:K [0~30/1]
002 Supply Times:M
003 Supply Times:C
004 Supply Times:Y

B132/B200 5-44 SM

2253 Manual Tnr Fill Manually Fill Development Unit Sub Hoppers
Use SPs to increase manually the supply of toner to the sub hopper of the
development unit to determine if toner supply is abnormal or to recover normal
operation of a color toner supply when image density becomes light. After you
touch "Execute" the toner supply cluth switches on for 2 sec. and then off for 0.1
sec. to fill the sub hopper of the development unit. This on/off sequence is
repeated up to 20 times or until the toner end sensor detects that toner is present
in the sub hopper.
001 Execute:K
002 Execute:M
003 Execute:C
004 Execute:Y
Executes forced filling of the selected development unit.
[0~1/1]
005 Execute:Col Executes forced filling of the Y, M, C development units
only.
[0~1/1]
006 Execute:All Col Executes forced filling of all development units (Y, M, C,
K).
[0~1/1]

2260 Pot.Sn Check Potential Sensor Check
This SP executes a check of all or one selected potential sensor.
001 All Colors Select and touch "Execute".
002 K Display the results with SP2261 001 to 012
003 M
004 C
005 Y

2261 Pot.Sn Chk Disp Potential Sensor Check Results Display
Displays results of the potential sensor check executed with 2260.
001 Vd:K 007 Vr:C
002 Vd:M 008 Vr:Y
003 Vd:C 009 Voffset:K
004 Vd:Y 010 Voffset:M
005 Vr:K 011 Voffset:C
006 Vr:M 012 Voffset:Y
Notes for SP2261
Reading Definition Abnormal Reading
Vd Charge bias (Cdc). This is the output
of the potential sensor after 700V is
applied to the drum.
Range: -500 to 700 V
If the reading is out of range:
Potential sensor damaged
Charge unit malfunction
Charge power pack malfunction
Vr Residual voltage. This is the output of
the potential sensor after the LD fires
at full power.
Normal: -200 V
If above 200V:
Drum deteriorated
Potential sensor out of position
Voffset This is the reading of the potential
sensor with no charge applied to the
drum.
Normal: 010V
If reading is out of range:
Potential sensor dirty
Potential sensor out of position
SM 5-45 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

2262 TD Sn Chk TD (toner density) Sensor Check Execution
This SP executes a check of all or one selected TD sensor.
001 All Colors Select and touch "Execute".
002 K Display the results with SP2663 001 to 004
003 M
004 C
005 Y

2263 TD Sn Chk Disp Toner Density Sensor Check Execution Display
Displays results of 2262. Vt is the most recent output of the TD sensor.
001 Vt:K
002 Vt:M
003 Vt:C
004 Vt:Y

2264 ID Sn Chk ID Sensor Check Execution
This SP executes a check of the ID sensors.
2265 ID Sn Chk Disp
Displays the most recent ID sensor Vsg and Voffset readings.
Notes:
Vsg_reg is the reading of the direct sensors in the black and color ID sensors
that detect the reflectivity of the bare surface of ITB. If Vsg_reg is less than 3.8V,
the ID sensor may be dirty, damaged, or disconnected
F (Front) refers to the color ID sensor.
R (Rear) refers to the black ID sensor.
If Voffset_reg is less greater than 0.15, the ID sensor should be replaced. (The
ID sensors are replaced as a unit.)
001 Vsg_reg F
002 Vsg_reg R
003 Voffset_reg F
004 Voffset_reg R

2301 Apply Oil Not Used

B132/B200 5-46 SM

2302 Temp/Humid Disp Temperature/Humidity Display
This SP displays the current temperature and humidity. These readings are output
by the temperature humidity display located on the bottom of the machine below the
waste toner bottle.
001 Temp Disp Room temperature (
o
C).
[0~100/1 deg.]
002 Rel Humidity Disp Relative humidity (saturation point at current temperature).
[0~100/1 %rh.]
003 Abs Humidity Disp Absolute humidity.
[0~1000/m
2
]
004 Current Env Disp Displays the current environment control mode. The
control modes are divided into 5 levels: LL, ML, MM, MH,
HH. These levels are determined by thresholds
determined for the other readings of this SP and the
reading of the absolute humidity (SP2301 003).

2303 Force Temp Corr Force Ambient Temperature Correction DFU
The temperature/humidity sensor reading is used to adjust settings during process
control when this SP is set to zero (the default). The value of the absolute humidity
reading displayed by SP2302 003, as well as the other readings of the conditions
around the machine displayed with SP2302, are used in the process control
calculations. If you touch any key (1 to 5) below, the value you select is used and the
readings of the temperature/humidity sensor are ignored.
Note: After you press any key (1 to 5), the setting you select remains in effect only
while the machine is in the SP mode. Once you leave the SP mode, this SP is reset
to zero automatically.
0 Sensor Detect
1 LL
2 ML
3 MM
4 MH

5 HH

2304 Set Humid Thresh Ambient HumidityThreshold Setting
Sets the threshold values for the absolute humidity of the current LL and ML settings
for the main machine in the present environment.
001 Abs Humid:Thresh1 [0~1000/gm]

2306 Vd Link Corr Vd Link Correction
001 Set [0~1/1] 0:Off, 1: On
002 Correction Coeff [1~250/100]

SM 5-47 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

2307 Set Ptype Link Paper Type Link Setting
For the copy mode selected, these SPs 1) switch the image transfer bias for each
color and 2) switch the paper transfer and separation bias
001 Norm
002 Recycled Paper
003 Special Paper
004 Color 1
005 Color 2
006 OHP
007 Thick
008 Letterhead
009 Tab Sheet
010 Labels
011 Preprinted
012 Prepunched
013 Bond
014 Custom 1
015 Custom 2
016 Custom 3
[0~5/1]
0: Normal Paper
1: Thick Paper
2: OHP
3: Special Paper 1
4: Special Paper 2
5: Special Paper 3

2308 Set Psize Thresh Set Paper Size Thresholds
Sets the correction values (Threshold 1, 2, 3, 4) for paper size.
001 Thresh 1 [0~25-/1 mm]
002 Thresh 2 [0~25-/1 mm]
003 Thresh 3 [0~25-/1 mm]
004 Thresh 4 [0~25-/1 mm]

2312 Margin K Bias Margin K Bias: Setting

Full Speed: 52 to 128 g/m (normal paper)
Half Speed: 128 to 256 g/m (thick paper)
005 Full Spd:ITB Sets the value of image transfer bias for K in the areas of
the image where nothing is printed.
[0~500/0.1]
006 Full Spd:PTR [-100 to 6/1 a]
007 Full Spd:SepDC [0~100/0.1 a]
008 Full Spd:SepAC [80~120/0.1 kV]]
009 Half Spd:ITB [0~500/0.1 a]
010 Half Spd:PTR [-100~0/1 a]
011 Half Spd:SepDC [0~100/0.1 a]
012 Half Spd:SepAC [80~120/0.1 kV]]

B132/B200 5-48 SM

2313 Margin FC Bias Margin FC Bias: Setting for K
This SP sets the image transfer bias for each in areas of the image where nothing
is printed in the full-color mode.
2314 Set ProCon Bias Process Control: Bias Setting for K
This SP sets the image transfer bias for each color during the process control self-
check.
2315 Set MUSIC Bias MUSIC Bias Setting
This SP sets the image transfer bias for each color during MUSIC.
Note:
Full Speed: 52 to 128 g/m (normal paper)
Half Speed: 128 to 256 g/m (thick paper)
2313 2314 2315
011 Full Spd:ITB:K [0~500/0.1a] [0~500/0.1a] [0~500/0.1a]
012 Full Spd:ITB:M [0~500/0.1a] [0~500/0.1a] [0~500/0.1a]
013 Full Spd:ITB:C [0~500/0.1a] [0~500/0.1a] [0~500/0.1a]
014 Full Spd:ITB:Y [0~500/0.1a] [0~500/0.1a] [0~500/0.1a]
016 Full Spd:PTR [-6~0/1a] [-6~0/1a] [-6~0/1a]
017 Full Spd:SepDC [0~100/0.1a] [0~100/0.1a] [0~100/0.1a]
018 Full Spd:SepAC [80~120/0.1a] [70~100/0.1a] [80~120/0.1a]
020 Half Spd:ITB:K [0~500/0.1a] [0~500/0.1a] [0~500/0.1a]
021 Half Spd:ITB:M [0~500/0.1a] [0~500/0.1a] [0~500/0.1a]
022 Half Spd:ITB:C [0~500/0.1a] [0~500/0.1a] [0~500/0.1a]
023 Half Spd:ITB:Y [0~500/0.1a] [0~500/0.1a] [0~500/0.1a]
025 Half Spd:PTR [-100~0/1a] [-100~0/1a] [-100~0/1a]
026 Half Spd:SepDC [0~100/0.1a] [0~100/0.1a] [0~100/0.1a]
027 Half Spd:SepAC [80~20/0.1kV] [80~20/0.1kV] [80~20/0.1kV]

2316 Pwr On Jam Bias Power On/Jam Recovery: Bias Setting
Sets the image development bias to be applied for each color after recovery from a
paper jam at power on.
002 ITB:K [0 to 50/0.1 A]
003 ITB:M
004 ITB:C
005 ITB:Y
007 PTR

2381 Ptype K:LL Paper Type K: LL
This SP sets image transfer bias for LL (lowest) speed during black-and-white
copying in areas where black is used to develop the image.
006 Full Spd:ITB [10~250/1%]
011 Half Spd:ITB [10~250/1%]

SM 5-49 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

2382 Ptype K:ML Paper Type K: ML
This SP sets image transfer bias for ML (Medium Low) speed during black-and-
white copying in areas where black is used to develop the image.
006 Full Spd:ITB [10~250/1%]
011 Half Spd:ITB [10~250/1%]

2383 Ptype K:MM Paper Type K: MM
This SP sets image transfer bias for MM (Medium) speed during black-and-white
006 Full Spd:ITB [10~250/1%]
011 Half Spd:ITB [10~250/1%]

2384 Ptype K:MH Paper Type K:MH
This SP sets image transfer bias for MH (Medium High) speed during black-and-
white copying in areas where black is used to develop the image.
006 Full Spd:ITB [10~250/1%]
011 Half Spd:ITB [10~250/1%]

2385 Ptype K:HH Paper Type K:HH
This SP sets image transfer bias for HH (Highest) speed during black-and-white
006 Full Spd:ITB [10~250/1%]
011 Half Spd:ITB [10~250/1%]

2391 Ptype FC:LL Paper Type FC:LL
This SP sets image transfer bias for LL (Lowest) speed during full-color copying in
areas where each color is used to develop the image.
2392 Ptype FC:ML Paper Type FC:ML
This SP sets image transfer bias for ML (Medium Low) speed during full-color
copying in areas where each color is used to develop the image.
2393 Ptype FC:MM Paper Type FC:MM
This SP sets image transfer bias for MM (Medium) speed during full-color copying in
2391 2392 2393
012 Full Spd:ITB:K [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%]
013 Full Spd:ITB:M
014 Full Spd:ITB:C
015 Full Spd:ITB:Y
022 Half Spd:ITB:K
023 Half Spd:ITB:K
024 Half Spd:ITB:C
025 Half Spd:ITB:Y

B132/B200 5-50 SM

2394 Ptype FC:MH Paper Type FC:MH
This SP sets image transfer bias for MH (Medium High) speed during full-color
copying in areas where each color is used to develop the image.
2395 Ptype FC:HH Paper Type FC:HH
This SP sets image transfer bias for HH (Highest) speed during full-color copying in
012 Full Spd:ITB:K 2394 2395
013 Full Spd:ITB:M [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%]
014 Full Spd:ITB:C
015 Full Spd:ITB:Y
022 Half Spd:ITB:K
023 Half Spd:ITB:K
024 Half Spd:ITB:C
025 Half Spd:ITB:Y

2401 Norm K Bias
Sets the standard value of bias voltages at image transfer, and paper separation in
areas where black is used on plain paper during black-and-white printing.
001 ITB [0~500/0.1 A]
007 Side1:PTR [-100~0/0.1 A]
008 Side1:SepDC [0~100/0.1 A]
009 Side1:SepAC [80~120/0.1 kV]
012 Side2:PTR [-100~0/1 A]
013 Side2:SepDC [0~100/0.1 A]
014 Side2:SepAC [80~120/0.1 kV]

2406 Norm FC Bias Set Bias for Plain Paper: FC
Sets the standard value of bias voltages at image transfer, and paper separation in
areas the four colors are used on plain paper during full color printing.
001 ITB:K [0~500/0.1 A]
002 ITB:M [0~500/0.1 A]
003 ITB:C [0~500/0.1 A]
004 ITM:Y [0~500/0.1 A]
013 Side1:PTR [-100~0/1 A]
014 Side1:SepDC [0~100/0.1 A]
015 Side1:SepAC [80~120/0.1 A]
021 Side1:PTR [-100~0/1 A]
022 Side1:SepDC [0~100/0.1 A]
023 Side1:SepAC [80~120/1 A]

SM 5-51 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

2411 Size Coeff:Norm Size Correction Coefficient for Plain Paper: Size 1
These settings apply to paper sizes wider than the paper size of SP2308 001
(Threshold 1) and are applied only to 1) areas where image is created, 2) plain
paper at full speed only, 3) both black-and-white or full color mode
007 Side1:Size%:PTR Applies to Side 1 of duplex page.
[100~600/1%]
012 Side2:Size%:PTR Applies to Side 2 of duplex page.
[100~600/1%]

007 Side1:Size2:PTR Applies to Side 1 of duplex page.
[100~600/1%]
[100~600/1%]

[100~600/1%]
[100~600/1%]

[100~600/1%]
[100~600/1%]

(Threshold 4), or narrower than the paper size of SP2308 003 (Threshold 3), and are
applied only to 1) areas where image is created, 2) plain paper at full speed only, 3)
both black-and-white or full color mode.
[100~600/1%]
[100~600/1%]

B132/B200 5-52 SM

2421 LEdge Cor:Norm K Leading Edge Correction for Plain Paper: K
This SP sets the coefficient used to 1) correct bias at the leading edge for black
image transfer (ITB) 2) bias at image to paper transfer, and 3) correct the dc and ac
voltages applied at paper separation.
Notes: These settings apply:
To the distance from the leading edge set with SP2422
Only to black printing on plain paper at full speed (even when full-color is
selected).
001 ITB [0~400/1%]
007 Side1:PTR Note: ITB applies to both sides.
008 Side1:SepDC
009 Side1:SepAC
012 Side2:PTR
013 Side2:SepDC
014 Side2:SepAC

2422 LEdge SWT:Norm K Leading Edge Switch Timing for Plain Paper: K
Sets the switch off timing SP2421. The value selected is the number of mm from the
leading edge of the paper. These settings 1) apply only to black printing on plain
paper at full speed (even when full-color is selected), and 2) apply to to both sides of
a duplex page.
001 ITB [0~30/1 mm]
002 PTR [0/1 mm]
003 SepDC [0~30/1 mm]
004 SepAC

2423 TEdgeCor:Norm K Trailing Edge Correction for Plain Paper: K
This SP sets the coefficient used to correct bias at image to paper transfer for each
side of the paper. These settings are applied to the trailing edge for black printing
on plain paper at full speed and apply to black, even when printing in full color
mode.
007 Side1:PTR [0~400/1%]
012 Side2:PTR

2424 TEdgeSWT:Norm K PTR Trailing Edge Switch Timing for Plain Paper: K
This setting sets the start timing for application of SP2423 at the trailing edge of
each sheet (Side 1, Side 2). This setting is applied to the trailing edge for black
printing on plain paper at full speed and apply to black, even when printing in full
color mode.
[-100~0/1 mm]
The mm distance is measured away from the trailing edge of the image.

SM 5-53 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

2426 LEdgeCor:Norm FC Leading Edge Correction for Plain Paper: FC
This SP sets the coefficient used to 1) correct bias at the leading edge for full-color
image transfer (ITB) bias at image to paper transfer when using plain paper, and 3)
correct the dc and ac voltages applied at paper separation.
Only the distance from the leading edge set with SP2427.
Only to full color printing on plain paper at full speed.
001
ITB
[0~400/1%]
007
Side1:PTR
[0~400/1%]
008
Side1:SepDC
[0~400/1%]
009
Side1:SepAC
[0~400/1%]
012
Side2:PTR
[0~400/1%]
013
Side2:SepDC
[0~400/1%]
014
Side2:SepAC
[0~400/1%]

2427 LEdgeSWT:Norm FC Leading Edge Switch Timing for Plain Paper: FC
This SP sets switch timing that sets the distance from the leading edge where the
settings of SP2426 001 are to apply. The value selected is the number of mm from
the leading edge of the paper. These settings 1) apply only full-color printing on
plain paper at full speed, and 2) apply to to both sides of a duplex page.
001 ITB [0~30/1 mm]
002 PTR [0~30/1 mm]
003 SepDC [0~30/1 mm]
004 SepAC [0~30/1 mm]

2428 TEdgeCor:Norm FC Trailing Edge Correction for Plain Paper: FC
side of the paper. These settings are applied to the trailing edge for full-color
printing on plain paper at full speed as far as where SP2429 002 takes effect.
007 Side1:PTR [0~400/1%]
012 Side2:PTR

2429 TEdgeSWT:Norm FC PTR Switch Timing for Plain Paper: FC
This setting sets the start timing for application of SP2428 007, 2428 012 at the
trailing edge of each sheet (Side 1, Side 2). These settings are applied to the
trailing edge for black printing on plain paper at full speed and apply to black, even
when printing in full color mode.
[-100~0/1 mm]

B132/B200 5-54 SM

2431 Norm:K:LL Plain Paper: K Low
2432 Norm:K:ML Plain Paper: K Medium Low
2433 Norm:K:MM Plain Paper: K Medium
These SPs set the paper size correction coefficient for the image to paper transfer
bias threshold values calculated based on the reading of the absolute humidity from
the temperature/humidity sensor and the thresholds set with SP2304.
SP2431 Up to SP2304 001: Threshold 1
SP2432 More than SP2304 001 Threshold 1, up to SP23204 002 Threshold 2.
SP2433 More than SP2304 002 Threshold 2, up to SP2304 003 Threshold 3
These settings apply 1) only where the image is created in black (in either black-
and-white or full-color mode) on plain paper at full speed.
2431 2432 2433
007 Side1:PTR [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%]
008 Side1:SepDC [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%]
009 Side1:SepAC [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%]
012 Side2:PTR [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%]
013 Side2:SepDC [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%]
014 Side2:SepAC [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%]

2434 Norm:K:MH Plain Paper: K Medium High
2435 Norm:K:HH Plain Paper: K High
SP2435 More than SP2304 004 Threshold 4
and-white or full-color mode) on plain paper.
SP2432 SP2432
007 Side1:PTR [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%]
008 Side1:SepDC [10~250/1%]
009 Side1:SepAC [10~250/1%]
012 Side2:PTR [10~250/1%]
013 Side2:SepDC [10~250/1%]
014 Side2:SepAC [10~250/1%]

SM 5-55 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

2441 Norm:FC:LL Plain Paper: FC Low
2442 Norm:FC:ML Plain Paper: FC Medium Low
2443 Norm:FC:MM Plain Paper: FC Medium Medium
These settings apply 1) only where the image is created in full-color on plain paper
at full speed.
SP2441 SP2442 SP2443
017 Side1:PTR [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%]
018 Side1:SepDC [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%]
019 Side1:SepAC [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%]
027 Side2:PTR [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%]
028 Side2:SepDC [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%]
029 Side2:SepAC [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%]

2444 Norm:FC:MH Plain Paper: FC Medium High
2445 Norm:FC:HH Plain Paper: FC High
and-white or full-color mode) on plain paper.
SP2444 SP2445
017 Side1:PTR [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%]
018 Side1:SepDC [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%]
019 Side1:SepAC [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%]
027 Side2:PTR [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%]
028 Side2:SepDC [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%]
029 Side2:SepAC [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%]

2501 Set Bias:Thk:K Set Bias for Thick Paper: K
This SP sets the image transfer bias for the drum to ITB image transfer at the black
PCU when using thick paper and printing in black-and-white mode.
001 ITB [-100~0/1 A]
007 Side1:PTR [0~100/0.1 A]
008 Side1:SepDC [0~100/0.1 A]
009 Side1:SepAC [80~120/0.1 A]
012 Side2:PTR [-100~0/1 A]
013 Side2:SepDC [0~100/0.1 A]
014 Side2:SepAC [80~120/0.1 A]

B132/B200 5-56 SM

2506 Set Bias:Thk:FC Set Bias for Thick Paper: FC
This SP sets the following items with printing full-color on thick paper: 1) the image
transfer bias for the drum to ITB image transfer for each color, 2) the ITB image to
paper transfer, 3) dc/ac paper separation voltages for both sides duplex sheets.
001 ITB:K [0~500/0.1 A]
002 ITB:M [0~500/0.1 A]
003 ITB:C [0~500/0.1 A]
004 ITB:Y [0~500/0.1 A]
013 Side1:PTR [-100~0/1 A]
014 Side1:SepDC [0~100/0.1 A]
015 Side1:SepAC [80~120/0.1 kV
021 Side2:PTR [-100~0/1 A]
022 Side2:SepDC [0~100/0.1 A]
023 Side2:SepAC [80~120/0.1 kV

2511 Size Coeff:Thk Size Correction Coefficient: Thick Paper
These settings 1) apply to thick paper sizes wider than the paper size of 2308 001
Threshold 1, 2) apply to image areas only, 3) apply to thick paper mode (1/2 speed:
128 to 256 g/m).
007 Side1:Size%:PTR [100~600/1%]
012 Side2:Size%:PTR

These settings 1) apply to above 2308 002 Threshold 2, and below SP2308 003
128 to 256 g/m).
007 Side1:Size2:PTR [100~600/1%]
012 Side2:Size2:PTR [100~600/1%]

These settings 1) apply to above 2308 003 Threshold 3, and less than SP2308 002
128 to 256 g/m).
007 Side1:Size3:PTR [100~600/1%]
012 Side2:Size3:PTR [100~600/1%]

These settings 1) apply to above 2308 004 Threshold 4, and less than SP2308 003
128 to 256 g/m).
007 Side1:Size4:PTR [100~600/1%]
012 Side2:Size4:PTR [100~600/1%]

SM 5-57 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

These settings 1) apply to paper widths up to SP2308 004 Threshold 4, 2) apply to
image areas only, 3) apply to thick paper mode (1/2 speed: 128 to 256 g/m).
007 Side1:Size5:PTR [100~600/1%]
012 Side2:Size5:PTR [100~400/1%]

2521 LEdge Cor:Thk:K Leading Edge Correction: Thick Paper: K
This SP sets the coefficient used to 1) correct bias at the leading edge for black
image transfer (ITB), 2) bias at image to paper transfer on thick paper, and 3) correct
the dc and ac voltages applied at paper separation.
To the distance from the leading edge set with SP2522 001
Only to black printing on plain paper at half-speed (128~256 g/m), regardless
of whether black-and-white or full-color is selected.
001 ITB [0~400/1%]
007 Side1:PTR [0~400/1%]
008 Side1:SepDC [0~400/1%]
009 Side1:SepAC [0~400/1%]
012 Side2:PTR [0~400/1%]
013 Side2:SepDC [0~400/1%]
014 Side2:SepAC [0~400/1%]

2522 LEdge SWT:Thk:K Leading Edge Switch Timing for Thick Paper: K
This SP sets switch timing that switches off the application of SP2521 for thick
paper. The value selected is the number of mm from the leading edge of the paper.
These settings 1) apply only to black printing on thick paper at half-speed (128~256
g/m
2
). and 2) apply to to both sides of a duplex page.
001 ITB [0~30/1 mm]
002 PTR [0/1 mm]
003 SepDC [0~30/1 mm]
004 SepAC

2523 TEdge Cor:Thk K Trailing Edge Correction for Thick Paper: K
side of the paper. These settings are applied to the trailing edge for black printing on
thick paper (128~256 g/m
2
) at half-speed and apply to black, even when printing in
full color mode.
007 Side1:PTR [0~400/1%]
012 Side2:PTR

2524 TEdge Cor:Thk:K PTR Trailing Edge Correction for Thick Paper: K
This setting sets the start timing for application of SP2523 012 at the trailing edge of
each sheet (Side 1, Side 2). This setting is applied to the trailing edge for black
printing on thick paper (128~256 g/m
2
) at half-speed and applies to black, even
when printing in full color mode.
[-100~0/1 mm]

B132/B200 5-58 SM

2526 LEdge Cor:Thk:FC Leading Edge Correction for Thick Paper: K
This SP sets the coefficient used to 1) correct bias at the leading edge for full-color
image transfer (ITB) bias at image to paper transfer when using thick paper
(128~256 g/m
2
), and 3) correct the dc and ac voltages applied at paper separation.
Only the distance from the leading edge set with SP2527.
Only to full color printing on thick paper at half speed.
001 ITB [0~400/1%]
007 Side1:PTR [0~400/1%]
008 Side1:SepDC [0~400/1%]
009 Side1:SepAC
012 Side2:PTR [0~400/1%]
013 Side2:SepDC [0~400/1%]
014 Side2:SepAC

2527 LEdge SWT:Thk:FC Leading Edge Switch Timing for Thick Paper: FC
This SP sets switch timing that sets the distance from the leading edge where the
settings of SP2526 001 are to apply. The value selected is the number of mm from
the leading edge of the paper. These settings 1) apply only full-color printing on thick
paper (128~256 g/m
2
) at half speed, and 2) apply to to both sides of a duplex page.
001 ITB [0~30/1 mm]
002 PTR [0~30/1 mm]
003 SepDC [0~30/1 mm]
004 SepAC

2528 TEdge Cor:Thk FC Trailing Edge Correction for Thick Paper: FC
side of the paper. These settings are applied to the trailing edge for full-color printing
on thick paper (128~256 g/m
2
) at half speed as far as where SP2529 002 takes
effect.
007 Side1:PTR [0~400/1%]
012 Side2:PTR

2529 TEdge Cor:Thk:FC PTR Trailing Edge Correction for Thick Paper: FC
This setting sets the start timing for application of SP2528 007, 2528 012 at the
trailing edge of each sheet (Side 1, Side 2). These settings are applied to the trailing
edge for black printing on plain paper at full speed and apply to black, even when
printing in full color mode.
[-100~0/1 mm]

SM 5-59 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

2531 Thk:K:LL Thick Paper: K Low
2532 Thk:K:ML Thick Paper: K Medium Low
2533 Thk:K:MM Thick Paper: K Medium
the temperature/humidity sensor and the thresholds set with SP2304 001
These settings apply only to the image area printed on thick paper in black-and-
white mode at half-speed (128~256 g/m
2
).
SP2531 SP2532 SP2533
007 Side1:PTR [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%]
008 Side1:SepDC [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%]
009 Side1:SepAC [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%]
012 Side2:PTR [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%]
013 Side2:SepDC [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%]
014 Side2:SepAC [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%]

2534 Thk:K:MH Thick Paper: K Medium High
2535 Thk:K:HH Thick Paper: K High
These settings apply 1) only where the image is created in black (in either black-and-
white or full-color mode) on plain paper.
SP2534 SP2535
007 Side1:PTR [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%]
008 Side1:SepDC [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%]
009 Side1:SepAC [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%]
012 Side2:PTR [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%]
013 Side2:SepDC [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%]
014 Side2:SepAC [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%]

B132/B200 5-60 SM

2541 Thk:FC:LL Thick Paper: FC Low
2542 Thk:FC:ML Thick Paper: FC Medium Low
2543 Thk:FC:MM Thick Paper: FC Medium
These settings apply 1) only where the image is created in full-color on thick paper
(128~256 g/m
2
) at full speed.
2541 2542 2543
017 Side1:PTR [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%]
018 Side1:SepDC [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%]
019 Side1:SepAC [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%]
027 Side2:PTR [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%]
028 Side2:SepDC [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%]
029 Side2:SepAC [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%]

2544 Thk:FC:MH Thick Paper: FC Medium High
2545 Thk:FC:HH Thick Paper: FC High
These settings apply 1) only where the image is created in full-color on thick paper
(128~256 g/m
2
) at full speed.
SP2544 SP2545
017 Side1:PTR [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%]
018 Side1:SepDC [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%]
019 Side1:SepAC [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%]
027 Side2:PTR [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%]
028 Side2:SepDC [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%]
029 Side2:SepAC [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%]

2601 OHP K Bias Set Bias for Transparency: K
This SP sets the following standard bias voltages applied for the image area on OHP
in the black-and-white mode at 1) image transfer from drum to ITB, 2) image transfer
from ITB to paper, and 3) at paper separation from the ITB.
001 ITB [0~500/0.1 A]
002 PTR [-100~0/0.1 A]
003 SepDC [0~100/0.1 A]
004 SepAC [80~120/0.1 A]

SM 5-61 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

2606 OHP FC Bias Set Bias for Transparency: K
This SP sets the following standard bias voltages applied for the image area on OHP
in the full-color mode at 1) image transfer from drum to ITB for each color, 2) image
transfer from ITB to paper, and 3) at paper separation from the ITB.
001 ITB:K [0~500/0.1 A]
002 ITB:& [0~500/0.1 A]
003 ITB:' [0~500/0.1 A]
004 ITB:( [-100~0/0.1 A]
005 PTR [0~100/0.1 A]
006 SepDC [0~100/0.1 A]
007 SepAC [80~120/0.1 A]

2611 Size Coeff:OHP Size Correction Coefficient for Transparency
This SP setting applies to 1) OHP widths above Threshold 1 (SP2308 001), 2) the
image area only, 3) OHP only, 4) either black-and-white or full-color mode.
002 Size%:PTR [100~600/1%]

2613 Size Coeff:OHP Size Correction Coefficient for Transparency
This SP setting applies to 1) OHP widths larger Threshold 3 (SP2308 002) and
smaller than Threshold , 2) the image area only, 3) OHP only, 4) either black-and-
white or full-color mode.
[100~600/1%]

2621 LEdge Cor:OHP K Leading Edge Correction for Transparency: K
These SPs do the following settings when printing on OHP in the black-and-white
mode at half-speed (128~256 g/m2):
1) ITB: Sets strength/timing of the correction coefficient for the application of bias
when the image is transferred from the drum to the ITB.
2) PTR: Sets the strength/timing correction coefficient for the application of bias
when the image is transferred from ITB.
3) SepDC, SepAC: Set the strength/timing of the dc and ac charges applied to
neutralize the charges on the belt and paper so they will separate more easily.
Note: SP2621 selects the strength of the bias coefficient, and SP2622 sets the start
timing of the bias application.
2622 LEdge SWT:OHP K Leading Edge Switch Timing for Transparency: K
Sets the switch off timing of SP2626. The selected value is the number of mm from
the leading edge. Applies only to printing in black-and-white mode on OHP in half-
speed mode (128~256 g/m
2
).
2621 2622
001 ITB [0~400/1%] [0~30/1 mm]
002 PTR [0~400/1%] [0~30/1 mm]
003 SepDC [0~400/1%] [0~30/1 mm]
004 SepAC [0~400/1%] [0~30/1 mm]

B132/B200 5-62 SM

2623 TEdge Cor:OHP K PTR Trailing Edge Correction for Transparency: K
Sets the strength of the bias coefficient for the bias applied at the trailing edge when
the image is transferred from ITB to paper. Applied when printing in black-and-white
mode on OHP at half-speed (128~256 g/m
2
).
2624 TEdge SWT:OHP K PTR Trailing Edge Switch Timing for Transparency: K
Sets the switch timing that determines the distance from the leading edge where the
SP2623 002 setting is applied during image transfer from ITB to paper. Applied only
when printing in black-and-white mode on OHP at half speed (128~256 g/m
2
).
2623 2624
[0~400/1%] [-100~0/1%]

2626 LEdge Cor:OHP FC Leading Edge Correction for Transparency: FC
These SPs do the following settings when printing on OHP in the full-color mode at
half-speed (128~256 g/m
2
):
1) ITB: Sets the correction coefficient for the application of bias when the image is
transferred from the drum to the ITB. The selected value is the distance in mm from
the leading edge.
2) PTR: Sets the correction coefficient for the application of bias when the image is
transferred from ITB.
3) SepDC, SepAC: Set the dc/ac charges applied to neutralize the charges on the
belt and paper so they will separate more easily.
2627 LEdge SWT:OHP FC Leading Edge Switch Timing for Transparency: FC
the leading edge. Applies only to printing in full-color mode on OHP in half-speed
mode (128~256 g/m
2
).
2626 2627
001 ITB [0~400/1%] [0~30/1 mm]
002 PTR [0~400/1%] [0~30/1 mm]
003 SepDC [0~400/1%] [0~30/1 mm]
004 SepAC [0~400/1%] [0~30/1 mm]

2628 TEdge Cor:OHP FC PTR Trailing Edge Correction for Transparency: FC
Sets the start timing for SP2629 002 at the trailing edge. Applied to the trailing edge
for full-color printing on OHP at half-speed (128~256 g/m
2
).
2629 TEdge SWT:Thk FC PTR Switch Timing for Transparency: FC
settings of SP2628 002 are applied during image transfer from ITB to OHP during
full-color printing at half-speed (128~256 g/m
2
).
2628 2629
[0~400/1%] [-100~0/1%]

SM 5-63 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

2631 OHP:K:LL Transparency: K Low
2632 OHP:K:ML Transparency: K Medium Low
2633 OHP:K:MM Transparency: K Medium
the temperature/humidity sensor and the thresholds set with SP2304 001.
SP2634 More than 2304 003 Threshold 3, up to SP2304 004 Threshold 4.
SP2635 More than 2304 004 Threshold 4
These settings apply only to the image area printed on OHP in black-and-white
mode at half-speed (128~256 g/m
2
).
2631 2632 2633
002 PTR [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%]
003 SepDC [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%]
004 SepAC [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%]
2634 OHP:K:MH Transparency: K Medium High
2635 OHP:K:HH Transparency: K High
2634 2635
002 PTR
[10~250/1%] [10~250/1%]
003 SepDC
[10~250/1%] [10~250/1%]
004 SepAC
[10~250/1%] [10~250/1%]

2641 OHP:FC:LL Transparency: FC Low
2642 OHP:FC:ML Transparency: FC Medium Low
2643 OHP:FC:MM Transparency: FC Medium
2644 OHP:FC:MH Transparency: FC Medium High
2645 OHP:FC:HH Transparency: FC High
These settings apply only to the image area printed on OHP in full-color mode at
half-speed (128~256 g/m
2
).
2641 2642 2643
007 PTR [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%]
008 SepDC [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%]
009 SepAC [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%]
2644 2645
007 PTR [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%]
008 SepDC [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%]
009 SepAC [10~250/1%] [10~250/1%]

B132/B200 5-64 SM
2751 Sp1 K Bias Set Bias for Special Paper 1: K
These SPs set the standard values of the electrical charges that are applied to 1)
create bias for image transfer from drum to ITB, 2) create bias for image transfer
from ITB to paper (PTR), and 3) neutralize the charges on the both sides of the
paper to separate the paper from the ITB (SepDC, SepAC). These settings are used
when printing on Special Paper 1 in the black-and-white mode and are applied only
to the image area.
001 ITB [0~500/0.1 a]
007 Side1:PTR [-100~0/1 a]
008 Side1:SepDC [0~100/0.1 a]
009 Side1:SepAC [80~120/0.1 kV]
012 Side2:PTR [-100~0/0.1 a]
013 Side2:SepDC [0~100/0.1 a]
014 Side2:SepAC [80~120/0.1 kV]

create bias for image transfer from drum of each color (Y, M, C, K) to the ITB, 2)
create bias for image transfer from ITB to paper (PTR), and 3) neutralize the charges
on the both sides of the paper to separate the paper from the ITB (SepDC, SepAC).
These settings are used only for Y, M, C, K when printing on Special Paper 1 in the
full-color mode and are applied only to the image area.
001 ITB:K [0~500/0.1 a]
002 ITB:M [0~500/0.1 a]
003 ITB:C [0~500/0.1 a]
004 ITB:Y [0~500/0.1 a]
013 Side1:PTR [-100~0/1 a]
014 Side1:SepDC [0~100/0.1 a]
015 Side1:SepAC [80~120/0.1 kV]
021 Side2:PTR [-100~0/1 a]
022 Side2:SepDC [200~1000/0.1 a]
023 Side1:SepAC [80~120/0.1 kV]

SM 5-65 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

These SPs (SP2761~SP2765) set the paper size correction coefficients for Special
Paper 1 relative to the settings done with SP2308 (Set Psize Thresh). All of hese
settings:
Apply to printing on Special Paper 1 in the black-and-white mode
Apply only to the image area
The title of each SP tells you the side and size where the setting is applied at ITB-
to-paper transfer, for example: "Side1:Size1:PTR" means the setting applies to
only the first side of Size 1 when the image is transferred from belt to paper.
2761 Size Coeff:Sp1 Size Correction Coefficient for Special Paper 1
007 Side1:Size1:PTR
012 Side2:Size1:PTR
SP2308 001 Threshold 1
[100~600/5%]
007 Side1:Size2:PTR
012 Side2:Size2:PTR
SP2308 002 Threshold 2, < SP2308 001 Threshold 1
[100~600/5%]
007 Side1:Size3:PTR
012 Side2:Size3:PTR
[100~600/5%]
007 Side1:Size4:PTR
012 Side2:Size4:PTR
[100~600/5%]
007 Side1:Size5:PTR
012 Side2:Size5:PTR
Up to SP2308 004 Threshold 4
[100~600/5%]

2771 LEdge Cor:Sp1:K Leading Edge Correction for Special Paper 1: K
Sets the leading edge correction coefficient when bias is applied as far as allowed
by the seting of SP2772 for drum to image transfer of the image during black and
white copying on Special Paper 1.
001 ITB [0~400/5%]
007 Side1:PTR
008 Side1:SepDC
009 Side1:SepAC
012 Side2:PTR
013 Side2:SepDC
014 Side2:SepAC
2772 LEdge SWT:Sp1:K Leading Edge Switch Timing for Special Paper 1: K
Sets the switch off timing of SP2771 . The selected value is the number of mm from
the leading edge. Applies only to printing in black-and-white mode on Special Paper
1.
001 ITB [0~30/1 mm]
002 PTR
003 SepDC
004 SepAC

B132/B200 5-66 SM

2773 TEdge Cor:Sp1 K Trailing Edge Correction for Special Paper 1: K
Sets the bias applied at the trailing edge when the image is transferred from ITB to
paper by setting the start timing for SP2774 002 at the trailing edge. Applied to the
trailing edge for black-and-white mode on Special Paper 1 only.
007 Side1:PTR [0~400/5%]
012 Side2:PTR
2774 TEdge SWT:Sp1 K Trailing Edge Switch Timing for Special Paper 1: K
Sets the switch timing that determines the distance from the leading edge where
the settings of SP2773 is applied during image transfer from ITB to paper. Applied
only when in black-and-white mode on Special Paper 1.
002 PTR [-100~0/1 mm]

2776 LEdge Cor:Sp1 FC Leading Edge Correction for Special Paper 1: FC
These SPs do the following settings when printing on Special Paper 1 in the full-
color mode:
2) PTR: Sets the strength/timing of thecorrection coefficient for the application of
bias when the image is transferred from ITB.
001 ITB [0~400/5%]
007 Side1:PTR
008 Side1:SepDC
009 Side1:SepAC
012 Side2:PTR
013 Side2:SepDC
014 Side2:SepAC
2777 LEdge SWT:Sp1 FC Leading Edge Switch Timing for Special Paper 1: FC
the leading edge. Applies only to printing in full-color mode on Special Paper 1.
001 ITB [0~30/1 mm]
002 PTR
003 SepDC
004 SepAC

SM 5-67 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

2778 TEdge Cor:Sp1 FC PTR Trailing Edge Correction for Special Paper 1: FC
the image is transferred from ITB to paper. Applied when printing in full-color mode
on Special Paper 1.
007 Side1:PTR [0~400/5%]
012 Side2:PTR
2779 TEdge SWT:Sp1 FC
PTR
Switch Timing for Special Paper 1: FC
SP2778 settings are applied during image transfer from ITB to paper. Applied only
when printing in full-color mode on Special Paper 1.
[-100~0/1 mm]

2781 Sp1:K:LL Special Paper 1: K Low
2782 Sp1:K:ML Special Paper 1: K Medium Low
2783 Sp1:K:MM Special Paper 1: K Medium
These settings apply only to the image area printed on Special Paper 1 in black-and-
white mode.
2781 2782 2783
007 Side1:PTR [10~250/5%] [10~250/5%] [10~250/5%]
008 Side1:SepDC
009 Side1:SepAC
012 Side2:PTR [10~250/5%]
013 Side2:SepDC [10~250/5%]
014 Side2:SepAC
2784 Sp1:K:MH Special Paper 1: K Medium High
2785 Sp1:K:HH Special Paper 1: K High
2784 2785
007 Side1:PTR [10~250/5%] [10~250/5%]
008 Side1:SepDC [10~250/5%]
009 Side1:SepAC [10~250/5%] [10~250/5%]
012 Side2:PTR [10~250/5%] [10~250/5%]
013 Side2:SepDC
014 Side2:SepAC

B132/B200 5-68 SM

2791 Sp1:FC:LL Special Paper 1: FC Low
2792 Sp1:FC:ML Special Paper 1: FC Medium Low
2973 Sp1:FC:MM Special Paper 1: FC Medium
These settings apply only to the image area printed on Special Paper 1 in full-color
mode.
2791 2792 2973
007 Side1:PTR [10~250/5%] [10~250/5%] [10~250/5%]
008 Side1:SepDC
009 Side1:SepAC
012 Side2:PTR
013 Side2:SepDC
014 Side2:SepAC
2794 Sp1:FC:MH Special Paper 1: FC Medium High
2795 Sp1:FC:HH Special Paper 1: FC High
2794 2795
017 Side1:PTR [10~250/5%] [10~250/5%]
018 Side1:SepDC [10~250/5%]
019 Side1:SepAC [10~250/5%] [10~250/5%]
027 Side2:PTR
028 Side2:SepDC
029 Side2:SepAC

paper to separate the paper from the ITB (SepDC, SepAC). These settings are
used when printing on Special Paper 2 in the black-and-white mode and are applied
only to the image area.
001 ITB [0~500/0.1 a]
007 Side1:PTR [-100~0/1 a]
008 Side1:SepDC [0~100/0.1 a]
009 Side1:SepAC [80~120/0.1 kV]
012 Side2:PTR [-100~0/1 a]
013 Side2:SepDC [0~100/0.1 a]
014 Side2:SepAC [80~120/0.1 kV]

SM 5-69 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

2806 Sp2 FC Bias Set Bias for Special Paper 2: K
create bias for image transfer from ITB to paper (PTR), and 3) neutralize the
charges on the both sides of the paper to separate the paper from the ITB (SepDC,
SepAC). These settings are used only for Y, M, C, K when printing on Special
Paper 1 in the full-color mode and are applied only to the image area.
001 ITB:K [0~500/0.1 a]
002 ITB:& [0~500/0.1 a]
003 ITB:' [0~500/0.1 a]
004 ITB:( [0~500/0.1 a]
013 Side1:PTR [-100~0/1 a]
014 Side1:SepDC [0~100/0.1 a]
015 Side1:SepAC [80~120/0.1 kV]
021 Side2:PTR [-100~0/1 a]
022 Side2:SepDC [0~1000/0.1 a]
023 Side2:SepAC [80~120/0.1 kV]

settings:
only Side 1 of Size 1 when the image is transferred from belt to paper at the PTR.

007 Side1:Size%:PTR
012 Side2:Size%:PTR
[100~600/5%]
007 Side1:Size2:PTR
012 Side2:Size2:PTR
[100~600/5%]
007 Side1:Size3:PTR
012 Side2:Size3:PTR
[100~600/5%]
007 Side1:Size4:PTR
012 Side2:Size4:PTR
[100~600/5%]
007 Side1:Size5:PTR
012 Side2:Size5:PTR
[100~600/5%]

B132/B200 5-70 SM

001 ITB [0~400/5%]
007 Side1:PTR
008 Side1:SepDC
009 Side1:SepAC
012 Side2:PTR
013 Side2:SepDC
014 Side2:SepAC
2.
001 ITB [0~30/1 mm]
002 PTR
003 SepDC
004 SepAC

2823 TEdge Cor:Sp2 K PTR Trailing Edge Correction for Special Paper 2: K
007 Side1:PTR [0~400/5%]
012 Side2:PTR
2824 TEdge SWT:Sp2 K PTR Trailing Edge Switch Timing for Special Paper 2: K
the settings of SP2823 is applied during image transfer from ITB to paper. Applied
[-100~0/5%]

SM 5-71 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

color mode:
001 ITB [0~400/5%]
007 Side1:PTR
008 Side1:SepDC
009 Side1:SepAC
012 Side2:PTR
013 Side2:SepDC
014 Side2:SepAC
001 ITB [0~30/1 mm]
002 PTR
003 SepDC
004 SepAC

the image is transferred from ITB to paper. Applied when printing in full-color mode
on Special Paper 2.
007 Side1:PTR [0~400/5%]
012 Side2:PTR
2829 TEdge SWT:Sp2 FC PTR Switch Timing for Special Paper 2: FC
SP2828 settings are applied during image transfer from ITB to paper. Applied only
when printing in full-color mode on Special Paper 2.
[-100~0/1 mm]

B132/B200 5-72 SM

These settings apply only to the image area printed on Special Paper 2 in black-and-
white mode.
2831 2832 2833
007 Side1:PTR [10~250/5%] [10~250/5%] [10~250/5%]
008 Side1:SepDC
009 Side1:SepAC
012 Side2:PTR
013 Side2:SepDC
014 Side2:SepAC
2834 2835
007 Side1:PTR [10~250/5%] [10~250/5%]
008 Side1:SepDC
009 Side1:SepAC
012 Side2:PTR
013 Side2:SepDC
014 Side2:SepAC

SM 5-73 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

used when printing on Special Paper 2 in the full-color mode and are applied only to
the image area.
2841 2842 2843
017 Side1:PTR [10~250/5%] [10~250/5%] [10~250/5%]
018 Side1:SepDC
019 Side1:SepAC
027 Side2:PTR
028 Side2:SepDC
029 Side2:SepAC
2844 2845
017 Side1:PTR [10~250/5%] [10~250/5%]
018 Side1:SepDC [10~250/5%]
019 Side1:SepAC [10~250/5%] [10~250/5%]
027 Side2:PTR [10~250/5%]
028 Side2:SepDC
029 Side2:SepAC

used when printing on Special Paper 3 in the black-and-white mode and are applied
only to the image area.
001 ITB [0~500/0.1 a]
007 Side1:PTR [-100~0/1 a]
008 Side1:SepDC [0~100/0.1 a]
009 Side1:SepAC [80~120/0.1 kV]
012 Side2:PTR [-100~0/1 a]
013 Side2:SepDC [0~100/0.1 a]
014 Side2:SepAC [80~120/0.1 kV]

B132/B200 5-74 SM

2856 Sp3 FC Bias Set Bias for Special Paper 3: K
create bias for image transfer from ITB to paper (PTR), and 3) neutralize the
charges on the both sides of the paper to separate the paper from the ITB (SepDC,
SepAC). These settings are used only for Y, M, C, K when printing on Special
Paper 3 in the full-color mode and are applied only to the image area.
001 ITB:K [0~500/0.1 a]
002 ITB:M [0~500/0.1 a]
003 ITB:C [0~500/0.1 a]
004 ITB:Y [0~500/0.1 a]
013 Side1:PTR [-100~0/1 a]
014 Side1:SepDC [0~100/0.1 a]
015 Side1:SepAC [80~120/0.1 kV]
021 Side2:PTR [-100~0/1 a]
022 Side2:SepDC [0~1000/0.1 a]
023 Side2:SepAC [80~120/0.1 kV]

settings:
only Side 1 of Size 1 when the image is transferred from belt to paper at the PTR.

007 Side1:Size%:PTR
012 Side2:Size%:PTR
[100~600/5%]
007 Side1:Size2:PTR
012 Side2:Size2:PTR
[100~600/5%]
007 Side1:Size3:PTR
012 Side2:Size3:PTR
[100~600/5%]
007 Side1:Size4:PTR
012 Side2:Size4:PTR
[100~600/5%]
007 Side1:Size5:PTR
012 Side2:Size5:PTR
[100~600/5%]

SM 5-75 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

001 ITB [0~400/5%]
007 Side1:PTR
008 Side1:SepDC
009 Side1:SepAC
012 Side2:PTR
013 Side2:SepDC
014 Side2:SepAC
3.
001 ITB [0~30/1 mm]
002 PTR
003 SepDC
004 SepAC

2873 TEdge Cor:Sp3 K PTR Trailing Edge Correction for Special Paper 3: K
007 Side1:PTR
012 Side2:PTR
[0~400/5%]
2874 TEdge SWT:Sp3 K
PTR
Trailing Edge Switch Timing for Special Paper 3: K
the settings of SP2873 are applied during image transfer from ITB to paper. Applied
[-100~0/1 mm]

B132/B200 5-76 SM

color mode:
001 ITB [0~400/5%]
007 Side1:PTR
008 Side1:SepDC
009 Side1:SepAC
012 Side2:PTR
013 Side2:SepDC
014 Side2:SepAC

001 ITB [0~30/1 mm]
002 PTR
003 SepDC
004 SepAC

Sets the strength of the bias coefficient for the bias applied at the trailing edge
when the image is transferred from ITB to paper. Applied when printing in full-color
mode on Special Paper 3.
007 Side1:PTR
012 Side2:PTR
[0~400/5%]
2879 TEdge SWT:Sp3 FC
PTR
Switch Timing for Special Paper 3: FC
the SP2878 settings are applied during image transfer from ITB to paper. Applied
only when printing in full-color mode on Special Paper 3.
[-100~0/1 mm]

SM 5-77 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

These settings apply only to the image area printed on Special Paper 3 in black-
and-white mode.
2881 2882 2883
007 Side1:PTR [10~250/5%] [10~250/5%] [10~250/5%]
008 Side1:SepDC [10~250/5%]
009 Side1:SepAC
012 Side2:PTR [10~250/5%] [10~250/5%]
013 Side2:SepDC [10~250/5%] [10~250/5%]
014 Side2:SepAC
2884 2885
007 Side1:PTR
008 Side1:SepDC
[10~250/5%] [10~250/5%]

009 Side1:SepAC [10~250/5%] [10~250/5%]
012 Side2:PTR
013 Side2:SepDC
014 Side2:SepAC
[10~250/5%] [10~250/5%]

B132/B200 5-78 SM

These settings apply only to the image area printed on Special Paper 3 in full-color
mode.
2891 2892 2893
017 Side1:PTR [10~250/5%] [10~250/5%]
018 Side1:SepDC [10~250/5%]
019 Side1:SepAC
[10~250/5%]
[10~250/5%]
027 Side2:PTR [10~250/5%]
028 Side2:SepDC [10~250/5%]
029 Side2:SepAC
[10~250/5%]
[10~250/5%]
2894 2895
017 Side1:PTR [10~250/5%] [10~250/5%]
018 Side1:SepDC [10~250/5%] [10~250/5%]
019 Side1:SepAC [10~250/5%] [10~250/5%]
027 Side2:PTR [10~250/5%]
028 Side2:SepDC
029 Side2:SepAC
[10~250/5%]

2901 Disp T/H Sn:K_PCU Temperature/Humidity Sensor: PCU
This SPs display the the temperature (oC) and humidity (both relative and absolute)
readings of the temperature and humidity sensor located at the black PCU on the
right side of the machine. These readings are updated every 60 sec.
001~004 display the current readings.
005~008 display the previous readings.
001 Temp Disp 005 Temp:Prev Range: 0~100/1 deg.
002 Rel Humidity Disp 006 Rel Humid:Prev Range: 0~100/1% RH.
003 Abs Humidity Disp 007 Abs Humid:Prev Range: 0~1000 g/m
3

004 Env Disp:Current 008 Env Disp:Prev

2902 Set Temp: K_PCU Set Temperature: PCU: Forced Setting
Use these settings to turn off the temperature/humidity sensor, or set its level of
detection.
[0~5/1]
0: Sensor Detect 3 MM:
1: LL 4 MH:
2: ML 5 HH:

SM 5-79 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

2903 Env Thresh:K_PCU Room Temperature Correction Threshold: PCU
This SP sets the threshold value of LL and ML for the current room temperature.
001 Abs Humid:Thresh1 [0~10000/0 g/m
3
]
002 Abs Humid:Thresh2 [0~10000/m
3
]
3
]
3
]

2904 Blade Bend Ctrl Blade Bend Prevention Pattern Control
A blade-bend prevention pattern is created with K toner on the ITB between every
copy image to lubricate the ITB cleaning blade so it will not bend or scour the surface
of the ITB. These SPs set 1) pattern creation interval, 2) density of the pattern, 3)
whether the pattern is displayed.
Note: This function is OFF. Changing this setting is normally not required for this
machine.
001 Pattern Interval Sets the number of pages between patterns.
[0~200/1 pg.]
002 Pattern Light Sets the density of the pattern.
[0~63/1]
003 Page Cnt Disp Displays the count for the number of blade prevention
patterns.
[0~200/1 pg.]

2905 Used Toner Mtr 2 Used Toner Motor 2 Control
The waste toner bottle is provided with a near-full sensor and an augur that evenly
distributes the used toner inside the bottle. To extend the life of the waste toner bottle
near-full motor that rotates this augur, the motor and augur do not operate
continuously. The motor is turned on only after a prescribed amout of toner has been
consumed.
001 Toner Consumed Sets the amount of toner to be used before the toner
[1~10/1 g]
002 Waste Tnr M Time Sets the amount of time the motor remains on.
[1~10/1 sec.]

B132/B200 5-80 SM

Group 3000
3001 TD Sn:Vt Display TD Sensor: Vt Display
Displays the current value of Vt (output voltage of the TD sensor). This is the value
that the machine uses to calculate the density of the toner in each development unit.
The toner density is checked after every page prints. The TD sensor output voltage is
inversely proportional to the toner density:
If toner density is high, the voltage is low.
If toner density is low, the voltage is high.
Note: These readings are used to control toner supply. When the machine uses PID
logic to control the machine (the default method selected with SP3301 001). The
difference between Vt and Vtref is calculated and this result is used to control the on
time of the subhopper clutches that control the supply of toner to the PCUs. For more
see "Toner Supply Control" in Section "6. Details" of the Service Manual.
001 Current Val:K [0.00~5.00/00.00/0.1 V]
002 Current Val:M
003 Current Val:C
004 Current Val:Y

3002 Vtcnt:Disp/Set Display Vtcnt (TD Sensor Control Voltage)
Use SP 3002-001 to 004 to display and confirm the present Vtcnt setting. Vtcnt is the
TD sensor control voltage. If there is a large difference between this value and the
value of SP3002-005 to 008 (Initial Vtcnt), this means that over time Vtcnt will require
large adjustments due to environmental conditions. The initial value of Vtcnt is
determined when the developer is initialized. This value is used as a reference to
adjust Vt during the auto process control self check and when the TD sensor checks
the toner density between pages.
001 Current Val:K
002 Current Val:M
003 Current Val:C
004 Current Val:Y
[0~1200/0 V]
005 Initial Val:K
006 Initial Val:M
007 Initial Val:C
008 Initial Val:Y
[0~1200/0 V]

SM 5-81 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

3003 Vtref:Disp/Set Set/Display Vtref
This SP displays the TD sensor target voltage. This target voltage is inversely
proportional to the density of the toner:
If the target is high, toner density is lowered.
If the target is low, toner density is raised.
The machine uses readings of the ID sensor patterns between pages to determine
the amount of toner coverage and compared with the threhold values for the upper
and lower limit of coverate. The result of this calculation is used to calculate Vtref.
Note: Vtref is the TD sensor reference voltage. It is frequently updated to stabilize
the toner concentration in the development unit.
001 Current Val:K
002 Current Val:M
003 Current Val:C
004 Current Val:Y
[0~5.00/0 V]
005 Initial Val:K
006 Initial Val:M
007 Initial Val:C
008 Initial Val:Y
[0~5.00/0 V]

3021 Set Vt Shift Set Vt Shift Amount
Use this SP to correct Vt (TD sensor output voltage) in the low speed mode (128~256
g/m
2
). The machine then uses this value to calculate Vt for low speed mode.
001 Shift (Low Spd):K
002 Shift (Low Spd):M
003 Shift (Low Spd):C
004 Shift (Low Spd):Y
[0~500/0 V]

B132/B200 5-82 SM

3042 Set Vtref Cor Set Vtref Correction
Vtref is frequently updated in the toner supply cycle to stabiize the concentration of
toner in the developer. Vtref is corrected between every printed page in the paper path
using the correction amounts listed below for each color. This is the default setting (0)
for SP3042 001. However, you can use this SP to switch this function off.
Vtref (TD sensor reference voltage). It is frequently updated to stabilize the toner
concentration in the development unit.
001 Vtref Corr Mode [0~1/1] 0:On, 1:Off
Setting this SP to 1 switches of Vtref correction between
pages.
002 Corr Amt(+):k
003 Corr Amt(+):M
004 Corr Amt(+):C
005 Corr Amt(+):Y
[0~100/0 V]
006 Corr Amt(-):k
007 Corr Amt(-):M
008 Corr Amt)-$:C
009 Corr Amt(-):Y
[0~100/0 V]
010 Vtref Corr Target:K
011 Vtref Corr Target:M
012 Vtref Corr Target:C
013 Vtref Corr Target:Y
[-100~0/cm
2
]
014 Corr Thresh:M
015 Corr Thresh:C
016 Corr Thresh:Y
017 Corr Thresh:K
[-100~0/cm
2
]

3101 ID Pattern:Disp ID Sensor Pattern Coverage Display
Displays the amount toner to be used (coverage) to create the ID sensor patterns
between pages. The ID sensors cannot accurately detect the patterns if there is too
much reflectivity from the black toner. This SP changes the solid ID sensor pattern to a
hatched pattern.
Note: SP3171 001 sets detection and update timing for the creation of the ID sensor
patterns.
001 Applied:K
002 Applied:M
003 Applied:C
004 Applied:Y
[0~2000/cm
2
]

SM 5-83 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

3111 ID Sn:Voffset Voffset Value Detected by ID Sensor DFU
Displays the output voltage of the directly reflected light when the LED of the ID
sensor is switched off.
001 Voffset_Reg:Col:F
002 Voffset_Dif:Col:F
003 Voffset_Reg:K:R
[0~500/0 V]

3121 Adjusted Vsg Vsg Reading After Vsg Adjustment
This SP displays the 1) results of the most recent Vsg adjustment, 2) averaged value
of recent Vsg adjustments. This can be done for both ID sensors. The rear sensor is
the black ID sensor (K) and the front sensor is the color ID sensor (Y,M,C).
001 Vsg_Reg:Col:Last
002 Vsg_Dif:Col:Last
003 Vsg_Reg:K:Last
004 Vsg_Dif:K:Last
005 Vsg_Reg:Col:Ave
006 Vsg_Dif:Col:Ave
007 Vsg_Reg:K:Ave
[0~500/0 V]

3131 lsfg After Vsg lfsg After Reading Adjusted Vsg
Displays as a PWM value (pulse width modulation) the level of the ID sensor LED after
Vsg has been adjusted. Normal Vsg readings of the ITB bare surface reflectivity
should be in the range 4.00.2V.
001 lfsg:Col:Ctr
002 lfsg:K:Last
[0~4096/1]
003 lfsg:Col:Ave Not used
004 lfsg:K:Ave Not used

3141 ID Sn:Vmin Vmin Value Read by ID Sensor
Displays the minimum values read from the 10-grade patterns read by the ID sensors
during process control. The "Front" is the color ID sensor (Y,M,C), and the "Rear" is
the black ID sensor.
001 Vmin:Col(Front)
002 Vmin:K(Rear)
[0~500/0 V]

3161 Set ID Pattern Set ID Sensor Pattern
Sets the toner coverage of black ID sensor pattern between sheets. During toner
control the ID sensor pattern is created between the prescribed number of sheets
(SP3171 001).
[0~2/0.001 mg]

3171 ID Pattern:Int ID Sensor Pattern: Black Interval
Sets the number of pages between which the ID sensor patterns are created on the
ITB. Normally, the ID sensor patterns are created and read every 10 pages.
001 Create Int:K
002 Create Int:M
003 Create Int:C
004 Create Int:Y
[0~100/1]
B132/B200 5-84 SM

3194 ID Coeff Display ID Sensor Sensitivity Coefficient Display
Displays the most recent and averaged readings of the sensitivity correction coeffients
(K2 and K5).
001 K2:Col:Last
002 K5:Col:Last
005 K2:Col:Ave
006 K5:Col:Ave
[0~10000/0]

3251 Tnr Supply Time Toner Calibration Time: Display
Displays for confirmation the length of time the sub hopper clutch remained on to send
toner to the sub hopper after a new toner cartridge was installed.
001 K
002 M
003 C
004 Y
[0~10000/1 sec.]
005 Toner Pump CL:K
006 Toner Pump CL:M
007 Toner Pump CL:C
008 Toner Pump CL:Y
Use these SPs to display the accumulated drive time for
each powder pump clutch before installing a new one.
These SPs are reset to zero after the clutches are replaced.

3301 Tnr Supply Select Toner Supply Method
001 K
002 M
003 C
004 Y
[0~2/1]
0: Fixed toner supply
1: PID Toner Supply
Only use this for specified troubleshooting procedures in Section "4
Troubleshooting".

3302 Tnr Supply Select Toner Supply Rate
Sets the toner supply rate for fixed toner supply mode. The rate is set by adjusting the
on time of the toner supply clutch. This setting is used only if SP3301 is set to "0".
001 Supply Rate:K
002 Supply Rate:M
003 Supply Rate:C
004 Supply Rate:Y
[0~100/1%]

SM 5-85 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

3303 Tnr Supply Rate Toner Supply Rate: Display
Displays for confirmation the toner supply rate of toner supply control using the PID
method. The toner supply rate is calculated as:
Toner Supply Rate = Toner Supply Time/Time Allowed for Toner Supply x 100
where:
Time is measured in msec.
"Time Allowed for Toner Supply (ms)" = Length of the paper (mm) + Width of the
gap between sheets (mm)/Drum speed (mm/s) x 1000.
Note: The toner supply control method is selected with SP3301.
001 Last Val:K
002 Last Val:M
003 Last Val:C
004 Last Val:Y
005 Last 10 Ave:K
006 Last 10 Ave:M
007 Last 10 Ave:C
008 Last 10 Ave:Y
[0~100/1%]

3304 Tnr SupplyLimits Set Upper/Lower Limits for Toner Supply
Sets the upper and lower limits for toner supply supply rate with the fuzzy logic (PID)
used as the toner supply control method. This SP takes effect only if 1 or 2 is selected
for SP3301 to enable fuzzy logic as the toner supply method.
The machine reads 1) the maximum and minimum settings of this SP and 2) the toner
consumption of the output image surface (pixel count data). Then it calculates the
maximum and minimum amount of toner for that image. After this is done, toner supply
amount will not change during the job, even if Vt or any other measurement
determines that more toner is necessary.
001 Max Supply Rate:K
002 Max Supply Rate:M
003 Max Supply Rate:C
004 Max Supply Rate:Y
[0~100/1%]
005 Min Supply Time:K
006 Min Supply Time:M
007 Min Supply Time:C
008 Min Supply Time:Y
[0~1000/1 ms]

3306 Tnr Supply Coeff Set Toner Supply Coefficient
These SPs set the toner supply coefficients for the fuzzy logic method of toner
supply control.
Note: These SP codes operate only when 1 or 2 is selected for SP3301.
001 004 Ratio Coeff1:K, M, C, Y [0~4300/1]
021 024 P_Vt_Coeff:K, M, C, Y [0~100/1%]
025 028 I_Vt_Coeff:K, M, C, Y [0~1000/1]
029 032 Si:K, M, C, Y [-500~500/0]
033 036 P_Px1_Coeff1:K, M, C, Y [0~100/1%]
037 040 P_Px1_Coeff3:K, M, C, Y [0~255/100]

B132/B200 5-86 SM

3401 TE Detect Set Detect/No Setting DFU
These SP codes modify the operation of the toner end sensor. Switches toner end off
and on.
[0~1/1] 0:Detect, 1: No Detect

3411 TE Pgs Min:K
Use this SP to set the number of pages to print after the toner near-end alert has been
issued. Once the specified number of pages have printed, the machine issues the
toner-end alert, and the machine will not operate until the toner supply has been
replenished.
Note:
There are two counters for toner end, page count (003~4) and pixel count
(005~006).
The toner end alert is issued by whichever limit is exceed first, page count
(003~004) or coverage (005~006).
001 TE Sheets Min:K
002 TE Sheets Min:Col
Sets the minimum number of pages to print (black or color)
after the toner near-end alert until toner end.
[0~50/1]
003 TE Sheets Max:K
004 TE Sheets Max:Col
Sets the maximum number of pages to print (black-and-white,
or full-color) after the toner near-end alert until toner end,
based on page count (regardless of coverage).
[0~1000/1]
005 TE:Pixels:K
006 TE:Pixels:Col
Sets the number of images to print (black-and-white or full-
color) after the toner near-end alert until toner end based on
coverage (30 A4 pages at 100% coverage).
[0~100/1]
007 TNE:Sheets:K
008 TNE:Sheets:Col
Sets the number of times that the toner supply clutch is
activated when toner is low, to detect the toner end condition.
[0~30/1]

SM 5-87 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

3501 Select ProCon Select Process Control Method
The settings of these SP codes modify the operation of the automatic process control
self-check. Automatic process control is done at these times:
When the machine is turned on
At the end of the job, if the number of pages since the previous process contro,
exceeds the value of SP 3551
Before ACC adjustment
When the developer is initialized with SP3811.
For more about process control, see "Process Control" in Section "6. Details" of the
service manual.
001 Potential Control
[0~2/1] 0:Auto, 1:Fixed
When the machine starts (with the front door closed), the process control self-check
begins using as referernce bias voltages set with the Group 3 SP codes. The
referenced voltages are different, depending on whether "Auto" or "Fixed" is set:
Referenced SPs with "Auto" Selected
SP3575 000~008 Dev DC Control
SP3576 000~008 Chrg DC Control
SP3577 000~008 Chrg AC Control
SP3581 000~008 LD Power Control
SP3551 001, 002 Procon Int
SP3554 001 Init ProCon Set
SP3801 001 DevSetup Execute
SP3811 001~006 DevSetup Execute
Reference SPs with "Fixed" Selected
SP2201 001~009 Set DC Charge
SP2202 001~009 Set AC Charge
SP2211 001~009 Set LD Power
SP2212 001~009 Set Dev DC
002 Potential Ctrl Switches process control gamma correction off (0) and on
(1).
[0~1/1]
003 Density Adj Mode Sets the execution timing of toner density adjustment with
the automatic process control self-check.
[0~2/1]
0: Do not execute, 1: 1st Power On, 2:1st Power On & Job
End
004 ACC Before ProCon Determines whether process control is executed before a
gradation test pattern is printed using the operation panel
with:
[User Tools]> Maintenance> Auto Color Calibration
[0~2/2]
0:Do not execute
1:Execute Potential Control
2:Execute Potential Control and Toner Density Adjustment
005 DnstyAdjTimes Sets the upper limit of the loop wherein density is adjusted
during process control. Default: 10
B132/B200 5-88 SM
006 DevGamma(EnvCorrct) Switches correction of the development gamma adjustment
with the readings of the temperature/humidity sensor off
and on. Touch either the "OFF" or "ON" button to toggle
the setting.
007 DevGamma(TimeCorrct) Switches the timing of the development gamma adjustment
during process control off and on. Touch either the "OFF"
or "ON" button to toggle the setting.

3511 Poten Tbl:Disp Display Potential Table
Displays the numbers in the Potential Table selected for process control.
The Potential Table is the lookup table that contains the potential target values (Vd,
Vb, Vl) for adjustment of the development potential.
Vd: Initial charge applied to the drum by the charge roller.
Vb: Development bias
Vl: Value used to correct the strength of the lasers.
A 10-grade pattern is first created on the drum and then transferred to the ITB:
On the drum, the potential sensor uses their readings of this pattern to determine
development potential.
On the ITB, the ID sensors use their readings of this pattern to determine the
amount of toner coverage necessary.
For more about process control, see "Process Control" in Section "6. Details" of the
Service Manual
001 K Value
002 M Value
003 C Value
004 Y Value
Displays the current numbers in the Potential Table for each color.
[1~99/1]
005 Target: K
006 Target: M
007 Target: C
008 Target: Y
Displays the target values for Vd", Vb", Vl" after measurements of
ambient conditions and compensating for residual charge on the drum
(Vr).
If the actual development gamma is less than the target development
gamma, this SP shows a smaller value than the selected pointer table
value.
If the actual development gamma is greater than the target
development gamma, this SP shows a larger value than the selected
pointer table value.
[1~99/1]
009 Initial: K
010 Initial: M
011 Initial: C
012 Initial: Y
Not used at this time (March 2005).

SM 5-89 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

3531 ProCon Target Set Target Amount for Process Control
This SP sets the value for the maximum coverage to be achieved by the process
control self-check. Process control then analyzes the readings of the 10-grade pattern,
calculates the potentials required for develoment gamma and Vk (starting voltage),
and then determines the drum charge levels, development biases, and LD power
levels necessary to achieve the target coverage.
Note
This SP can be used to darken printed images.
After this SP is changed, process control must be executed manually with SP3820.
001 Max Tnr Amt:K
002 Max Tnr Amt:M
003 Max Tnr Amt:C
004 Max Tnr Amt:Y
[0~1000/cm
2
]

3551 ProCon Int Set Interval Between Process Control Executions
This SP sets timing of the process control self-check for job end. Normally, process
control executes automatically after 250 jobs. The process control self-check never
interrupts a job to execute, even if it is time for the next self-check.
001 B/W Mode [0~2000/1]
002 Color Mode [0~2000/1]

3554 Init ProCon Set Set Process Control for 1st Power On
Sets fusing temperature threshold for execution of the process control self-check
execution after a cold start. If the machine is switched off and then switched on
again, the automatic process control self-check will not execute if the fusing
temperature remains above 100C (default).
Note: Use SP3554 001 to display the results of the process control self-check.
[0~150/1 deg C]

3561 Dev !:Disp/Set Set/Display Gamma Value for Development
Displays the value of development gamma, an indicator of development capacity. In
order for the machine to determine the development potential to obtain the target
coverage. During processing control the 10-grade patterns are created first on the
drums and then on the ITB. The potential sensors read the development potential,
and the ID sensors read the amount of coverage on the ITB.
Plotting the development potential on the X axis against coverage on the Y-axis
results in the development gamma curve. For more, see "Process Control" in Section
"6. Details".
The normal range for development gamma is greater than 0.3 and less than 6.0.
001 Actual Val:K
002 Actual Val:M
003 Actual Val:C
004 Actual Val:Y
005 Target Val:K
006 Target Val:M
007 Target Val:C
008 Target Val:Y
009 Initial Val: K
010 Initial Val: M
011 Initial Val: C
012 Initial Val: Y
[0.00~6.00/0.1]

B132/B200 5-90 SM

3562 Display Vk Display Vk (Development Start Voltage)
Displays Vk, the development start voltage. This development start voltage is used
to indicate whether the developer has deteriorated. However, this is only a rough
measurement due to other factors:
A low threshold setting for the target development gamma.
Operational variations between machines
Precision of the ID sensor measurements
Normal range for Vk: -150V to +150V
3563 Display Vr Display Vr (Residual Potential)
Vr is the potential that remains on the surface of the drum after full exposure to the
laser. The existence of this residual voltage is used as an indicator to determine the
level of deterioration of the drum. Vr becomes larger as the drum deteriorates.
Normal range for Vr: -200V to 0V
001 K
002 M
003 C
004 Y
[-300 to +300/1 V]

3571 Display V0 Display Vd (Value for Control of Charge Potential)
Displays the value for V0, the measure of drum potential on dark areas of the drum
before laser exposure.
Normal range: -700 V to 500 V
001 K
002 M
003 C
004 Y
[-999~0/1 V]

3572 Display Vdhome Display Vl (Value for Control of Halftone Drum Potential)
Displays the value for Vdhome, the electrical potential of the drum after a fixed dc
bias (dc 700V) is applied by the drum charge roller.
Normal range: -700V to 500V
001 Vl Ctrl:Half:K
002 Vl Ctrl:Half:M
003 Vl Ctrl:Half:C
004 Vl Ctrl:Half:Y
[-999~0/1 V]

SM 5-91 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

3573 Target Poten:Vd Display Target Potential (VdDisplay)
Vd (read by the potential sensor) is the potential of dark areas of a drum before full
laser exposure. This SP displays the value of Vd used by processing control to
determine the target potential (Vd). The machine performs a calculation using
development gamma, Vk and the maximum coverage, and then uses the result to
lookup and retrieve the correct voltage from the Potential Table. This retrieved value
is used to raise the charge of the charge roller that charges the drums.
3574 Target Poten:Vl Display Target Potential (VlDisplay)
Vl (read by the potential sensor) is the potential of the exposed areas after full laser
exposure. This SP displays the value of Vl used by processing control to determine
the target potential (Vl). The machine performs a calculation using development
gamma, Vk and the maximum coverage, and then uses the result to lookup and
retrieve the correct voltage from the Potential Table. This retrieved value is used to
raise the input current of the laser diode..
001 K
002 M
003 C
004 Y
[-999~0/1 V]

3575 Dev DC Control Display Value for Control of Development DC
Displays the deveopment bias that was referenced duing processing control and
used in the the previous jobs (Process control is set for Auto with SP3501 001.)
001 Std Spd:K
002 Std Spd:M
003 Std Spd:C
004 Std Spd:Y
[-800~0/1 V]
Std Spd (normal speed): 52 to 128 g/m
2

005 Low Spd:K
006 Low Spd:M
007 Low Spd:C
008 Low Spd:Y
[-800~0/1 V]
Low Spd (half-speed): Paper weight 128 o 256 g/m
2

3576 Chrg DC Control Display Value for Control of Development DC
001 Std Spd:K
002 Std Spd:M
003 Std Spd:C
004 Std Spd:Y
[-999 to 200/1 V]
2

006 Low Spd:K
007 Low Spd:M
008 Low Spd:C
009 Low Spd:Y
[-999 to 200/1 V]
2

B132/B200 5-92 SM

3577 Chrg AC Control Display Value for Control of Development AC
Displays the ac bias that was referenced during processing control and used in the
previous jobs. (Process control is set for Auto with SP3501 001.)
001 Std Spd:K
002 Std Spd:M
003 Std Spd:C
004 Std Spd:Y
[0~300/0 kV]
2

006 Low Spd:K
007 Low Spd:M
008 Low Spd:C
009 Low Spd:Y
[0~300/0 kV]
2

3581 LD Power Control Display Value for Control of LD Power
Displays the LD power that was referenced during processing control and used in
the previous jobs. (Process control is set for Auto with SP3501 001.)
001 Std Spd:K
002 Std Spd:M
003 Std Spd:C
004 Std Spd:Y
[-117~127/1]
2

006 Low Spd:K
007 Low Spd:M
008 Low Spd:C
009 Low Spd:Y
[-117~127/1]
2

3605 Factory Files Set Up Developer DFU

3701 Small Img Mode Set Small Image Mode
This feature is not presently not used in process control (March 2005)
[0~1/1]

SM 5-93 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

3801 Init TD Sensor Execute Developer Setup
Do this SP after replacing the developer in one or more of the PCUs when servicing
the machine. This SP:
Checks for the presence of developer in the development unit. (This ensures that
the film seal has been removed from the developer pack.)
Initializes TD sensor. (Calibrates Vtcnt).
Calibrates development gamma and calibrates toner density. Also does the
MUSIC check and correction.
Note: Do SP3811 after drum and cleaning blade replacement. SP3811 should
always be done at the following times:
1) During the machine installation procedure after the developer and toner have
been installed, and
2) During machine maintenance after a drum and cleaning blade have been
replaced.
In both cases, SP3811 prevents the blade from scouring a dry drum.
001 All Colors [0~1/1]
002 Col (Y, M, C not K)
003 K
004 M
005 C
006 Y

3802 TD Sn Init OK? Display Result of TD Sensor Initialization
This SP displays the results of the TD sensor initialization with SP3801 001~006.
The machine returns the status of the previous initialization with numbers, 1 digit for
each PCU. The numbers are read in order as "K, M, C, Y".
Four numbers are used to indicate the status of the execution.
1: OK (success)
2: Cancelled (door opened, etc.)
4: Not executed (not selected for execution; this is not an error)
9: Vtcnt abnormal. Vtcnt (TD sensor control voltage) could not be adjusted to within
2.50.2V. The machine issued a TD sensor error for the PCU where there is a
problem (SC372~SC375).

3810 ClngInitSetExe Initial Cleaning After Replacement
These SPs should be executed after replacement of the drum cleaning roller or
cleaning blade.
001 All Colors
002 Col Excludes K (Black)
003 K
004 M
005 C
006 Y
Allows adjusment of colors separately.

B132/B200 5-94 SM

3811 DevSetup Execute Execute Developer Setup
Do this SP during the installation procedure after the developer and toner cartridges
have been installed in the machine, or after the drum and cleaning blade have been
replaced. This SP:
Confirms that all the seals have been removed from each developer cartridge and
developer is present in each PCU.
Switches on toner supply and sends toner to the sub hopper of each PCU.
Sends toner to the PCU to coat the drum with toner. This prevents the cleaning
blades from bending and scouring the drums.
Initializes the TD sensor.
Starts the process control self-check to set the target for development gamma and
adjusts toner density.
Starts the MUSIC sequence to check and correct color image offset.
Note:
After doing SP3811 always to SP3812 to confirm that SP3811 executed correctly.
SP3811 001 is done only at machine installation, or after a drum and cleaning
blade has been replaced in the PCU.
SP3801 001 to 006 is done after developer replacement for one or more PCUs.

001 Devr Setup:All [0~1/1]
002 Devr Setup:Col
003 Devr Setup:K
004 Devr Setup:M
005 Devr Setup:C
006 Devr Setup:Y

3812 DevSetup Execute Display Result of Developer Setup Execution
Do this SP to confirm that SP3811 executed correctly. After execution the machine
displays a "1" to confirm that SP3811 executed correctly for each PCU. The "1111"
display indicates the return value for each PCU: K, M, C, Y

3813 Used Tnr Mode Exe Used Toner Mode Execute
When the machine is printing in full-color mode, the waste toner in the PCUs are
transported to the waste toner bottle for the amount of time specified with SP3813
003 below
001 All Colors
002 K Only
[0~1/1] 0:Off, 1: On
003 Set Op. Time [10~240/1 sec.]

SM 5-95 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

3820 Manual ProCon Execute Process Control Manually
Use this SP to execute process control manually.
3820 001 does potential control only.
3820 002 does potential control and toner density adjustment.
Note:
You must do SP3820 to enable any values you change with SP3531 (Procon
Target).
Use SP3561 to display the resuls of SP3820 execution.
001 Normal ProCon
002 Exe Density Adj
[0~0/1]

3821 ProCon OK? Display Result of Process Control Execution
Use this SP to display the history of process control executions. These SP codes are
used to troubleshoot processing control. For more, see "4.2 Process Control
Troubleshooting" in Section "4. Troubleshooting".
[0~99999999/1]
001 History:Last 006 History:Last 6
002 History:Last 2 007 History:Last 7

3891 Set ProCon Send Set Up Sending Process Control Data to NRS Center
This feature is not presently used. (March 2005)
[0~1/1]

3900 RsetProConSP Reset All Process Control SP Codes
Do this SP to reset all process control related SP codes to their default values.

B132/B200 5-96 SM

Group 4000
4008 Sub Scan Mag Sub Scan Magnification Adjustment
Adjusts the sub-scan magnification by changing the scanner motor speed.
[-10~+10/0.1%]

4010 Sub Scan Reg Sub Scan Registration Adjustment
Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the scanning start timing in the sub-
scan direction.
[-30~+30/0.1 mm]

4011 Main Scan Reg Main Scan Registration Adjustment
Adjusts the side-to-side registration by changing the scanning start timing in the main
scan direction.
Note: This adjustment is done for the ADF with SP6006 (ADF Reg. Adj.).
[-25~+25/0.1 mm]

4012 Set Scale Mask Set Mask for Scale Edge
Sets the blank margin at each side for erasing the original shadow caused by the gap
between the original and the scale. This can be done for both scanning on the
exposure glass (book mode) and the ADF (ADF) for the leading and trailing edges.
001 Book:Sub LEdge
002 Book:Sub TEdge
003 Book:Main:LEdge
004 Book:Main:TEdge
005 ADF:Sub:LEdge
007 ADF:Main:LEdge
008 ADF:Main:TEdge
[0~30/0.1 mm]

4013 Scan Free Run Free Run: Scanner
Performs the scanner free run with the exposure lamp on or off for full-color, full size
(A3 or DLT).
001 Lamp:OFF
002 Lamp:ON
[0~1/1] 0:Off, 1:On

4014 Scan Execute Scan DFU
These SPs enable/disable detection of the scanner at its home position.
001 Enable Enables detection of the scanner at its home position.
002 Disable Disables detection of the scanner at its home position.

SM 5-97 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

4020 Dust Check Set for Dust Check on ADF Exposure Glass
These SP codes adjust the dust check operation at the ADF scanning glass and the
white scanning belt.
Note: Dust that triggers a warning could be removed from the glass by the originals in
the feed path. If the dust is removed by passing originals, this is not detected and the
warning remains on.
001 Dust Detect:On/Off Switches the dust warning on and off. When this SP is on, a
warning is issued if the check detects dust on the ADF scan
glass or the white plate above the scanning glass. Always
clean the ADF scanning glass and white plate before turning
this SP on.
[0~1/1] 0:Off, 1:On
002 Dust Detect:Lvl Adjusts the sensitivity of the check. If you see black streaks in
copies when no warning has been issued, raise the setting to
increase the level of sensitivity. If warnings are issued when
you see no black streaks in copies, lower the setting.
[0~8/1]
003 Dust Reject:Lvl Sets the level for vertical line correction caused by dust. A
high setting can eliminate unwanted vertical lines caused by
dust but it can also thin vertical lines of the original.
[0~4/1]

4205 B/W ADS Lvl Black-and-White ADS Level
This SP sets the background level for black-and-white ADS. ADS mode detects the
background level of the original, also known as the peak white level, and removes
this from the image to make a white background. This setting initializes the SBU at
power on.
[-128~+127/1]

4301 APS Confirm Confirm Correct Operation of APS
This SP confirms and displays the threshold for operation of the APS mode.
[0~255/1]

4303 APS Min Size Set Minimum Size for APS Operation
Sets the minimum size that the will be detected by APS
[0~2/1] 0:No, 1:A5S, 2:A5L

4305 8K/16K Detect 8K/16K Detection
This SP enables the machine to recognize 8K/16K size paper automatically.
[0~1/1] 0: Off, 1: On

B132/B200 5-98 SM

4400 Org Edge Mask Set the Mask for Original
This SP sets the area to be masked during platen (book) mode scanning.
001 Book:Sub:LEdge
002 Book:Sub:TEdge
003 Book:Main:LEdge
004 Book:Main:Tedge
005 ADF:Sub:LEdge
007 ADF:Main:TEdge
008 ADF:Main:TEdge
[0~30/0.1 mm]

4417 IPU Test Pattern Set IPU Test Pattern
Use this SP to select the IPU test pattern to print.
Test Pattern [0~24/1]
0 Scanned Image 13 Grid Pattern CMYK
1 Gradation Main Scan A 14 Color Patch CMYK
2 Gradation Main Scan B 15 Gray Pattern (1)
3 Gradation Main Scan C 16 Gray Pattern (2)
4 Gradation Main Scan D 17 Gray Pattern (3)
5 Gradation Sub Scan 1 18 Shading Pattern
6 Grid Pattern 19 Thin Line Pattern
7 Slant Grid Pattern 20 Scanned + Grid Pattern
8 Gradation RGBCMYK 21 Scanned + Grayscale
9 UCR Pattern 22 Scanned + Color Patch
10 Color Patch 16 (1) 23 Scanned + Slant Grid C
11 Color Patch 16 (2) 24 Scanned + Slant Grid D
12 Color Patch 16 64

4440 Saturation Adj Adjust Color Saturation
This SP adjusts the saturation level for copying.
[0~5/1]
0: High
1: Lowest
2: Lower
3: Default
4: Higher
5: Highest

SM 5-99 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

4501 ACC Target Den ACC Target Notch Density
This SP sets the target density for the ACC adjustment for machines connected with
the Copier Connection Kit. For more see "4.3.1 Color Adjustment for Connected
Copiers".
001 Copy:K:Text
002 Copy:C:Text
003 Copy:M:Text
004 Copy:Y:Text
005 Copy:K:Photo
006 Copy:C:Photo
007 Copy:M:Photo
008 Copy:Y:Photo
[0~50/1]

4505 ACC Cor:Bright ACC Correction: Bright Areas
Sets correction for bright areas for ACC correction. For more see "4.3.1 Color
Adjustment for Connected Copiers".
4506 ACC Cor:Dark ACC Correction: Dark Areas
Sets correction for dark areas for ACC correction.
001 004 Master:K, M, C, Y
005 008 Slave:K, M, C, Y
[-128~+128/1]

4540 Print Coverage Print Coverage Correction
This SP corrects printer coverage of 12 hues (RY, YR, YG, etc. x 4 Colors (K,
C, M, Y) for a total of 48 parameters.
001 004 RY:K, C, M, Y
005 008 YR:K, C, M, Y
009 012 YG:K, C, M, Y
013 016 GY:K, C, M, Y
017 020 GC:K, C, M, Y
021 024 CG:K, C, M, Y
025 028 CB:K, C, M, Y
029 032 BC:K, C, M, Y
033 036 BM:K, C, M, Y
037 040 MB:K, C, M, Y
041 044 MR:K, C, M, Y
045 048 RM:K, C, M, Y
049 052 W:K, C, M, Y
053 056 K:K, C, M, Y
[-128~+128/1]

B132/B200 5-100 SM
These SPs (SP4550~SP4562) allow adjustments for the MTF level, smoothing,
brightness and contrast of the scanning applications used on the document server
(scan-to-email, scan-to-folder).
4550 SApli:TxtPrt Scanner Application: Text (Print)
4551 SApli:TxtOCR1 Scanner Application: Text (OCR)
4552 SApli:TxtOCR2 Scanner Application: Text (OCR: Dropout Color)
4553 SApli:T/P Scanner Application: Text/Photo
4554 SApli:Photo Scanner Application: Photo
4555 SApli:Gray Scanner Application: Grayscale
4558 SApli:Col:T/P Scanner Application: Color Text/Photo
4559 SApli:Col:PPr Scanner Application: Color Photo Paper
4560 SApli:sRGB:T/P Scanner Application: sRGB Text/Photo
4561 SApli:sRGB:PPr Scanner Application: sRGB Color Photo Paper
4562 SApli:Auto Col Scanner Application: Auto Color
005 MTF Lvl:0-15 Sets the MTF level (Modulation Transfer Function)
designed to improve image contrast. Set higher for
stronger effect, lower for weaker effect.
[0~15/1]
006 Smooth:0-7 Use to remove "jaggies" if they appear. Set higher for
smoother.
[0~7/1]
007 Brightness:1-255 Set higher for darker, set lower for lighter.
[1~255/1]
008 Contrast:1-255 Set higher for more contrast, set lower for less
contrast.
[1~255/1]

4600 Display SBU ID Display the ID of the SBU DFU
Use this SP to read the SBU ID (includes VSBCNT_ID). If the ID is abnormal, this
will generate SC144.
001 Board&VSBCNT
002 DAGL

4603 Do AGC Execute AGC DFU
This SP executes automatic gain control (AGC) for HP detection.
001 HP Detect:Enable
002 HP Detect:Disable
[0~1/1] 0:Off, 1:On

4604 Open/Close FGATE Open/Close FGATE DFU
This SP opens and closes scanner FGATE. (FGATE is the laser write signal.)
[0~1/1] 0:Off, 1:On

SM 5-101 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

4609 White Plate:R Standard White Plate Adjustment: Red DFU
4610 White Plate:G Standard White Plate Adjustment: Green DFU
4611 White Plate:B Standard White Plate Adjustmetn: Blue DFU
This SP codes display the reference voltages stored in NVRAM at the factory for
Red, Green, and Blue before the machine was shipped. The SBU acquires these
settings every time the machine is switched on.
[-256~+255/1]

4628 Gain Adj Range:R Gain Adjustment Range: R DFU
4629 Gain Adj Range:G Gain Adjustment Range: G DFU
4630 Gain Adj Range:B Gain Adjustment Range: B DFU
When switched on, these SP display the current range for the gain of RED, GREEN,
and BLUE in the ASCI on the SBU after white level adjustment every time the
machine is switched on.
001 Color
002 B/W
[0~1/1]

4631 Gain Adj Range:R Gain Adjustment Range: R DFU
When switched on, this SP displays the current range for the E (EVEN) or O (ODD)
in the ASCI on the SBU after white level adjustment every time the machine is
switched on.
001 RE
002 RO
[0~1/1]

4632 Gain Adj Range:G Gain Adjustment Range: G DFU
When switched on, this SP displays the current range for E (EVEN) or O (ODD)
gain of GREEN or B/W in the ASCI on the SBU after white level adjustment every
time the machine is switched on.
001 Color:GE
002 Color:GO
005 B/W:GE
006 B/W:GO
[0~1023/1]

4633 Gain Adj Range:B Gain Adjustment Range: B DFU
When switched on, this SP displays the current range for E (EVEN) or O (ODD) gain
of BLUE in the ASCI on the SBU after white level adjustment every time the machine
is switched on.
001 BE
002 BO

4641 White Lvl Loop White Level Loops DFU
Displays the number of loops done color correction for AGC (Automatic Gain
Correction) during white level adjustment.
001 Color
002 B/W
[0~1023/1]

B132/B200 5-102 SM

4646 Scan Auto Error Error Flag for Automatic Adjustment: Scanning DFU
This SP sets the error flag to display as the SBU is updated automatically when the
machine is switched on.
001 Gain
002 K Level
[0x00~0xFFFF]
b7 GAIN_ERR_BO
b6 GAIN_ERR_BE
b5 GAIN_ERR_BK_GO
b4 GAIN_ERR_BK_GE
b3 GAIN_ERR_GO
b2 GAIN_ERR_GE
b1 GAIN_ERR_RO
b0 GAIN_ERR_RE

4647 HW Error Flag Hardware Error Flag Adjustment: Scanning DFU
This SP sets the error flag to confirm machine ON processing when the machine is
switched on.
[0x00~0x3F]

4680 Fact Gain Adj:R Factory Gain Adjustment at Factory: Red DFU
When switched on, this SP displays the setting done at the factory for RED O (ODD)
and E (EVEN) gain in the ASCI on the SBU after white level adjustment every time
the machine is switched on.
001 RE
002 RO
[0~1023/1]

4681 Fact Gain Adj:G Factory Gain Adjustment at Factory: Green DFU
When switched on, this SP displays the setting done at the factory for GREEN and
black-and-white O (ODD) and E (EVEN) gain in the ASCI on the SBU after white
level adjustment every time the machine is switched on.
001 Color:GE
002 Color:GO
005 B/W:GE
006 B/W:GO
[0~1023/1]

4682 Fact Gain Adj:B Factory Gain Adjustment at Factory: Blue DFU
When switched on, this SP displays the setting done at the factory for BLUE O
(ODD) and E (EVEN) gain in the ASCI on the SBU after white level adjustment every
time the machine is switched on.
001 BE
002 BO
[0~1023/1]

4690 White Lvl Peak:R White Level Peak: Red Scan Data DFU
When switched on, these SP codes display E (EVEN) or O (ODD) for the white level
peak RED data after white level detection (AGC) after the machine is switched on.
001 RE
002 RO
[0~255/1]

SM 5-103 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

4691 White Lvl Peak:G White Level Peak: Green Scan Data DFU
peak GREEN or black-and-white data after white level detection (AGC) after the
machine is switched on..
001 Color:GE
002 Color:GO
005 B/W:GE
006 B/W:GO
[0~255/1]

4692 White Lvl Peak:B White Level Peak: Blue Scan Data DFU
peak BLUE data after white level detection (AGC)a fter the machine is switched on..
001 BE
002 BO
[0~255/1]

4693 Black Lvl Scan:R Black Level Scan Value: Red DFU
When switched on, these SP codes display E (EVEN) or O (ODD) for the black level
check done in the SBU for RED after the machine is switched on..
001 REE
002 ROE
003 REO
004 ROO
[0~255/1]

4694 Black Lvl Scan:G Black Level Scan Value: Green DFU
check done in the SBU for GREEN after the machine is switched on..
001 Color:GEE
002 Color:GOE
003 Color:GEO
004 Color:GOO
005 B/W:GEE
006 B/W:GOE
007 B/W:GEO
008 B/W:GOO
[0~255/1]

4695 Black Lvl Scan:B Black Level Scan Value: Blue DFU
check done in the SBU for BLUE after the machine is switched on..
001 BEE
002 BOE
003 BEO
004 BOO
[0~255/1]

B132/B200 5-104 SM

4800 DF Density Adj ADF Density Adjustment
This SP adjusts the white shading parameter for scanning an image with the ADF.
Adjusts the density level if the ID of outputs from the DF and Platen mode are
different.
001 :R [1~200/1]
002 :G [1~200/1]
003 :B [1~200/1]

4902 Disp ACC Data Display ACC Data
This SP outputs the final data read at the end of ACC execution. A zero is returned if
there was an error reading the data.
001 R_DATA1 Photo C Patch Level 1 (8-bit)
002 G_DATA1 Photo M Patch Level 1 (8-bit)
003 B_DATA1 Photo Y Patch Level 1 (8-bit)
004 R_DATA2 Photo C Patch Level 17 (8-bit)
005 G_DATA2 Photo M Patch Level 17 (8-bit)
006 B_DATA2 Photo Y Patch Level 17 (8-bit)
[0~255/1]

4904 Test Scan IPU Test Scanner IPU Board
This SP tests the components of the BICU:
Test 1 performs write and read tests the CPU by conducting a compare check that
reads and writes to each register of the ASIC.
Test 2 performs a check of the image paths and connections and displays the
location of a defect of an error is detected.
001 Test 1
002 Test 2
[0~65535/1]

4905 Select Dithering Select Dithering Type
This SP changes the threshold parameters of error diffusion.
[0~255/1]

4907 SBU Pattern Set SBU Test Pattern
This SP selects the pattern generated by the SBU.
001 Test Pattern [0~4/1]
002 Select Fixed Patt [0~0x3FF/0x3FF]

4918 Man Gamma Adj Manual Printer Gamma Adjustment:
Adjusts the offset data of the printer gamma for black, cyan, magenta, and yellow in
Photo mode. For more, see the last section of Section "3. Replacement and
Adjustment".

4929 Man Scan Gamma Adj Manual Scan Gamma Adjustment
Adjusts the offset data of the printer gamma for black, cyan, magenta, and yellow in
manual scanning mode. For more, see the last section of Section "3. Replacement
and Adjustment".

SM 5-105 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

4932 MainScan Dot Adj Main Scan Dot Position Adjustment
Corrects the left or right side alignment of the red or blue filter on the CCD. For
more, see the last section in Section "3. Replacement and Adjustment".
001 R:Left
002 R:Right
003 B:Left
004 B:Right
[0~9/1]

4954 Read/Restore Std Chart Standard: Read/Restore
Use this SP to calibrate the scanner gamma on each machine connected with the
Copier Connection Kit.
001 Read New Chart Reads the "Standard Color Test Chart" to calibrate
the scanner gamma curve for two machines
connected with the Copier Connection Kit. Do this SP
with the test chart on each connected machine.
002 Recall Prev Chart Restores the scanner gamma to the previous value
(not the factory setting).
004 Set Std Chart DFU

4991 Image Path SW Image Path Switch
Use this SP to use the 10-key pad to enter the number to determine the image path.
001 IPU 0~14/1]
0 DFID input RGB images (upper 8 bits)
1 Synchronous RGB images in DFID
2 Data with shading correction on
3 Data with shading correction off
4 Data before black offset correction
5 Data after black offset correction
6 Shading data
7 Test pattern data (grayscale)
8 RGB image after line interval correction
9 RGB image after dot correction and pre-gamma
10 RGB image after vertiial line correction
11 RGB image after scanner gamma correction
12 RTB image after filtering with MTF
13 RTB image after ADS
14 RGB image after color processing

4992 ProCon ! Unit Select Process Control Unit
This SP selects either the printer or IPU to reflect process control gamma.
Note: This machine is fixed at 0 (Printer) and the setting cannot be changed.
[0~2/1]

B132/B200 5-106 SM

Group 5000
5024 mm/inch Display Selection
Selects the unit of measurement.
After selection, turn the main power switch off and on.
[0~1/1]
0: mm
1: inch

5045 Accounting Counter Counter Method
Selects the counting method if the meter charge mode is enabled with SP5-930-
001.
Note: You can change the setting only one time.
[0 to 1/ 1]
0: Development counter. Shows the total counts for color (Y,M,C) and black (K).
1: Paper counter. Shows the total page counts for: Color Total, Black Total, Color
Copies, Black Copies, Color Prints, Black Prints.

5047 Reverse Paper Display
Determines whether the tray loaded with paper printed on one side is displayed.
[0~1/1]
0: Not displayed
1: Displayed

5051 Toner Refill Detection Display Japan Only

5112 Non-Std. Paper Sel.
Determines whether a non-standard paper size can be input for the universal
cassette trays (Tray 2, Tray 3)
[0~1/1]
0: No
1: Yes. If 1 is selected, the customer will be able to input a non-standard
paper size using the UP mode.

SM 5-107 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

5113 Optional Counter Type
001 Default Optional Counter Type
Selects the type of counter:
0: None
1: Key card (RK3, 4) Japan only
2: Key card down
3: Pre-paid card
4: Coin Lock
5: MF key card
11: Exp Key Card (Add)
12: Exp Key Card (Deduct)
002 External Optional Counter Type
Enables the SDK application. This lets you select a number for the external
device for user access control.
Note: SDK refers to software on an SD card.
[0~3/1]
0: None
1: Expansion Device 1

5118 Disable Copying
Temporarily denies access to the machine. Japan Only
[0~1/1]
0: Release for normal operation
1: Prohibit access to machine

5120 Mode Clear Opt. Counter Removal
Do not change. Japan Only
[0~2/1]
0: Yes. Normal reset
1: Standby. Resets before job start/after completion
2: No. Normally no reset

5121 Counter Up Timing
Determines whether the optional key counter counts up at paper feed-in or at
paper exit. Japan Only
[0~1/1]
0: Feed count
1: No feed count

5126 F Org Size Set F Original Size Selection
Sets the original size that the machine detects for F sizes.
[0~2/1]
0: 8 x 13
1: 8 x 13
2: 8 x 13

B132/B200 5-108 SM
5127 APS Mode
This SP can be used to switch APS (Auto Paper Select) off when a coin lock or
pre-paid key card device is connected to the machine.
[0~1/1]
0: On
1: Off

5128 Code Mode With Key/Card Option Japan Only

5131 Set Paper Size Set Paper Size Handling
Selects the paper size type (for originals and copy paper). (Only needs to be adjusted
if the optional printer controller is installed)
[0~2/1]
0: JP (Japan)
1: NA (North America)
2: EU (Europe)
After changing the value, turn the main power switch off and on.

5150 Bypass Length Setting
Sets up the by-pass tray for long paper.
[0~1/1]
0: Off
1: On. Sets the tray for feeding paper up to 600 mm long.
With this SP selected on, paper jams are not detected in the paper path.

5154 Exit Tray Set
001 Limitless
Allows limitless paper output.
[0~1/1]
0: Off
1: On. Once the initial paper exit is full, another will be selected automatically.
Switch this SP on only in the job queuing mode, i.e. when printing jobs in the order
of selection with the print priority function. Print priority is set in the User Tools
mode (System Settings> General Features> Print Priority> Job Order.)
002 Override
Allows overriding of the setting for SP5154-001.
[0~1/1]
0: Off
1: On
This SP can be set only when on is selected for SP5154-001. Changing this
setting has no effect on the machine when SP5154-001 is off.

SM 5-109 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

5162 App. Switch Method
Controls if the application screen is changed with a hardware switch or a software
switch.
[0~1/1]
0: Soft Key Set
1: Hard Key Set

5169 CE Login
If you will change the printer bit switches, you must log in to service mode with this SP
before you go into the printer SP mode.
[0~1/1]
0: Off. Printer bit switches cannot be adjusted.
1: On. Printer bit switches can be adjusted.

5212 Page Numbering
003 Duplex Printout Left/Right Position Horizontally positions the page numbers
printed on both sides during duplexing.
[10~+10/1 mm]
0 is center, minus is left, + is right.
004 Duplex Printout High/Low Position Vertically positions the page numbers
printed on both sides during duplexing.
[10~+10/1 mm]
0 is center, minus is down, + is up.

5302 Set Time DFU
Sets the time clock for the local time. This setting is done at the factory before
delivery. The setting is GMT expressed in minutes.
[1440~1440/1 min.]
JA: +540 (Tokyo)
NA: -300 (NY)
EU: +6- (Paris)
CH: +480 (Peking)
TW: +480 (Taipei)
AS: +480 (Hong Kong)

B132/B200 5-110 SM

5307 Summer Time
Lets you set the machine to adjust its date and time automatically with the change to
Daylight Savings time in the spring and back to normal time in the fall. This SP lets you
set these items:
- Day and time to go forward automatically in April.
- Day and time to go back automatically in October.
- Set the length of time to go forward and back automatically.
The settings for 002 and 003 are done with 8-digit numbers:
Digits Meaning
1st, 2nd Month. 4: April, 10: October (for months 1 to 9, the first digit of 0 cannot be
input, so the eight-digit setting for 002 or 003 becomes a seven-digit
setting)
3rd Day of the week. 0: Sunday, 1: Monday
4th The number of the week for the day selected at the 3rd digit. If 0 is
selected for Sunday, for example, and the selected Sunday is the start of
the 2nd week, then input a 2 for this digit.
5th, 6th The time when the change occurs (24-hour as hex code).
Example: 00:00 (Midnight) = 00, 01:00 (1 a.m.) = 01, and so on.
7th The number of hours to change the time. 1 hour: 1

8th If the time change is not a whole number (1.5 hours for example), digit 8
should be 3 (30 minutes).
001 Setting Enables/disables the settings for 002 and 003.
[0~1/1]
0: Disable
1: Enable
002 Rule Set
(Start)
The start of summer time.
003 Rule Set
(End)
The end of summer time.

5401 Access Control
This SP stores the settings that limit uses access to SDK application data.
200 SDK1 Unique ID
201 SDK1 Recognition
210 SDK2 Unique ID
220 SDK3 Unique ID
This data can be converted from SAS (VAS) when installed
or uninstalled.

User Code Count Clear 5404
001 User Code Counter Clear Clears all user code counters.
Press [#] to execute.

SM 5-111 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

5501 PM Alarm
Sets the count level for the PM alarm.
[0~9999/1]
0: Alarm disabled
The PM alarm goes off when the print count reaches this value multiplied by
1,000.

5504 Jam Alarm
5505 Error Alarm
5507 Supply Alarm
Japan Only

5508 CC Call Japan Only
001 Jam Remains
002 Continuous Jams
003 Continuous Door Open
Enables/disables initiating a call.
[0~1/1]
0: Disable
1: Enable
004 Low Call Mode Enables/disables the new call specifications designed
to reduce the number of calls.
[0~1/1]
0: Normal mode
1: Reduced mode
011 Jam Detection: Time
Length
Sets the length of time to determine the length of an
unattended paper jam.
[03~30/1]
This setting is enabled only when SP5508-004 is
enabled (set to 1).
012 Jam Detection
Continuous Count
Sets the number of continuous paper jams required to
initiate a call.
[02~10/1]
enabled (set to 1).
013 Door Open: Time Length Sets the length of time the remains opens to determine
when to initiate a call.
[03~30/1]
enabled (set to 1).
021 Jam Operation: Time
Length
Determines what happens when a paper jam is left
unattended.
[0~1/1]
0: Automatic Call
1: Audible Warning at Machine
022 Jam Operation:
Continuous Count
Determines what happens when continuous paper
jams occur.
[0~1/1]
0: Automatic Call
B132/B200 5-112 SM
023 Door Operation: Time
Length
Determines what happens when the front door remains
open.
[0~1/1]
0: Automatic Call

Parts Alarm Level Count Japan Only
001 Normal Sets the parts replacement alarm counter to
sound for the number of copies.
[1~999/1 K]
5513
002 DF Sets the parts replacement alarm counter to
sound for the number of scanned originals.
[1~999/1 K]

5514 Parts Alarm Level Japan Only
001 Normal
002 DF

5610 ACC Factory Setting DFU
004 Recall
005 Overwrite
005 Previoius Setting

5611 2-Col Tnr Ratio Adjust Toner Ratio Between 2 Colors DFU
Adjusts the toner ratio between color pairs: Black, Cyan, Magenta, Green, and Yellow.
001 B-C
002 B-M
003 G-C
004 G-Y
005 R-M
006 R-Y

SM 5-113 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

5801 Memory Clear Memory Clear
Resets NVRAM data to the default settings. Before executing this SP, print an SMC
Report.
001 All Clear Initializes items 2 ~ 15 below.
002 Engine Clear Initializes all registration settings for the engine
and copy process settings.
003 SCS Initializes default system settings, SCS (System
Control Service) settings, operation display
coordinates, and ROM update information.
004 IMH Memory Clear Initializes the image file system.
(IMH: Image Memory Handler)
005 MCS Initializes the automatic delete time setting for
stored documents.
(MCS: Memory Control Service)
006 Copier application Initializes all copier application settings.
007 Fax application Not used.
008 Printer application Initializes the printer defaults, programs
registered, the printer SP bit switches, and the
printer CSS counter.
009 Scanner application Initializes the defaults for the scanner and all the
scanner SP modes.
010 Web Service/ Network application Deletes the Netfile (NFA) management files and
thumbnails, and initializes the Job login ID.
Netfiles: Jobs to be printed from the document
server using a PC and the DeskTopBinder
software
011 NCS Initializes the system defaults and interface
settings (IP addresses also), the
SmartNetMonitor for Admin settings,
WebStatusMonitor settings, and the TELNET
settings.
(NCS: Network Control Service)
014 Clear DCS Setting Initializes the DCS (Delivery Control Service)
settings.
015 Clear UCS Setting Initializes the UCS (User Information Control
Service) settings.
016 MIRS Setting Initializes the MIRS (Machine Information Report
Service) settings.
017 CCS Initializes the CCS (Certification and Charge-
control Service) settings.

5802 Engine Free Run Copier Engine Free Run
Makes a base engine free run
[0~1/1]
0: Disable: Release free run mode
1: Enable: Enable free run mode
Return this setting to off (0) after testing is completed.

B132/B200 5-114 SM

5803 Input Chk Input Check (Mainframe) (!5.6.1)

5804 Output Chk Output Check (!5.6.2)

5810 Cancel Fusing SC Cancel Fusing SC Code
When the machine issues one of the "Level A" SC codes shown below, this
indicates a serious problem in the fusing unit. The machine is disabled and the
operator cannot reset the SC. The machine requires servicing immediately. Use this
SP code to release the machine for servicing.
SC542 SC545 Heating roller thermistor 1
SC547 Zero Cross
SC548 SC550 Heating roller thermistor 2
SC551 Pressure roller thermistor
SC553 SC555 Pressure roller thermistor
SC662 SC565 Hot roller thermistor

5811 Machine No. Setting Displays the machine serial number.

5812 Service Tel. No. Setting
001 Service Inputs the telephone number of the CE (displayed when a
service call condition occurs.)
002 Facsimile Use this to input the fax number of the CE printed on the
Counter Report (UP mode). Not Used
003 Supply Displayed on the initial SP screen.
004 Operation Allows the service center contact telephone number to be
displayed on the initial screen.

SM 5-115 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

5816 Remote Service
001 I/F Setting

Turns the remote diagnostics off and on.
[0~2/1]
0: Remote diagnostics off.
1: Serial (CSS or NRS) remote diagnostics on.
2: Network remote diagnostics.
002 CE Call Lets the customer engineer start or end the remote machine
check with CSS or NRS; to do this, push the center report
key.
003 Function Flag Enables and disables remote diagnosis over the NRS
network.
[0~1/1]
0: Disables remote diagnosis over the network.
1: Enables remote diagnosis over the network.
006 Device
Information Call
Display
Controls if the item for initial setting of the screen for the NRS
device-information notification-call is shown.
[0~1/1]
0: Enabled. Item initial setting not shown.
1: Disable. Item for initial setting shown.
007 SSL Disable Controls if RCG (Remote Communication Gate) confirmation
is done by SSL during an RCG send for the NRS over a
network interface.
[0~1/1]
0: Yes. SSL not used.
1: No. SSL used.
008 RCG Connect
Timeout
Sets the length of time (seconds) for the time-out when the
RCG (Remote Communication Gate) connects during a call
via the NRS network.
[1~90/1 sec.]
009 RCG Write to
Timeout
Sets the length of time (seconds) for the time-out when sent
data is written to the RCG during a call over the NRS
network.
[0~100/1 sec.]
010 RCG Read
Timeout
Sets the length of time (seconds) for the timeout when sent
data is written from the RCG during a call over the NRS
network.
[0~100/1 sec.]
011 Port 80 Enable Controls if permission is given to get access to the SOAP
method over Port 80 on the NRS network.
[0~1/1]
0: No. Access denied
1: Yes. Access granted.

B132/B200 5-116 SM

5816 Remote Service
021 RCG C
Registed
This SP displays the A769 installation end flag.
0: Installation not completed
1: Installation completed
022 RCG C
Registed
Detail
This SP displays the A769 installation status.
0: A768 not registered
1: A768 registered
2: Device registered
023 Connect
Type (N/M)
This SP displays and selects the A769 connection method.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step
0: Internet connection
1: Dial-up connection
061 Cert. Expire
Timing DFU
Proximity of the expiration of the certification.
062 Use Proxy This SP setting determines if the proxy server is used when the
machine communicates with the service center.
063 Proxy Host This SP sets the address of the proxy server used for
communication between A769 -N and the gateway. Use this SP
to set up or display the customer proxy server address. The
address is necessary to set up A769 -N.
Notes:
The address display is limited to 128 characters. Characters
beyond the 128 characters are ignored.
This address is customer information and is not printed in the
SMC report.
064 Proxy Port
Number
This SP sets the port number of the proxy server used for
communication between A769 -N and the gateway. This setting
is necessary to set up A769 -N.
Notes:
This port number is customer information and is not printed
in the SMC report.
065 Proxy User
Name
This SP sets the HTTP proxy certification user name.
Notes:
The length of the name is limited to 31 characters. Any
character beyond the 31
st
character is ignored.
This name is customer information and is not printed in the
SMC report.
066 Proxy
Password
This SP sets the HTTP proxy certification password.
Notes:
The length of the password is limited to 31 characters. Any
character beyond the 31
st
character is ignored.
This name is customer information and is not printed in the
SMC report.
Displays the status of the certification update.
0 The certification used by A769 is set correctly.
1 The certification request (setAuthKey) for update has
been received from the GW URL and certification is
presently being updated.
2 The certification update is completed and the GW URL
is being notified of the successful update.
067 CERT: Up
State
3 The certification update failed, and the GW URL is
being notified of the failed update.
Rev. 05/2007
SM 5-117 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

4 The period of the certification has expired and new
request for an update is being sent to the GW URL.
11 A rescue update for certification has been issued and a
rescue certification setting is in progress for the rescue
GW connection.
12 The rescue certification setting is completed and the
GW URL is being notified of the certification update
request.
13 The notification of the request for certification update
has completed successfully, and the system is waiting
for the certification update request from the rescue GW
URL.
14 The notification of the certification request has been
received from the rescue GW controller, and the
certification is being stored.
15 The certification has been stored, and the GW URL is
being notified of the successful completion of this event.
16 The storing of the certification has failed, and the GW
URL is being notified of the failure of this event.
17 The certification update request has been received from
the GW URL, the GW URL was notified of the results of
the update after it was completed, but an certification
error has been received, and the rescue certification is
being recorded.
18 The rescue certification of No. 17 has been recorded,
and the GW URL is being notified of the failure of the
certification update.
Displays a number code that describes the reason for the
request for update of the certification.
0 Normal. There is no request for certification
update in progress.
1 Request for certification update in progress. The
current certification has expired.
2 An SSL error notification has been issued. Issued
after the certification has expired.
3 Notification of shift from a common authentication
to an individual certification.
4 Notification of a common certification without ID2.
5 Notification that no certification was issued.
068 CERT: Error
6 Notification that GW URL does not exist.
069 CERT: Up
ID
The ID of the request for certification.
083 Firmware
Up Status
Displays the status of the firmware update.
084 Non-HDD
Firm Up
This setting determines if the firmware can be updated, even
without the HDD installed.
0: Not allowed update
1: Allowed update
085 Firm Up
User Check
This SP setting determines if the operator can confirm the
previous version of the firmware before the firmware update
execution. If the option to confirm the previous version is
selected, a notification is sent to the system manager and the
firmware update is done with the firmware files from the URL.
Rev. 05/2007
B132/B200 5-118 SM
086 Firmware
Size
Allows the service technician to confirm the size of the firmware
data files during the firmware update execution.
087 CERT:
Macro
Version
Displays the macro version of the NRS certification.
088 CERT: PAC
Version
Displays the PAC version of the NRS certification.
089 CERT: ID2
Code
Displays ID2 for the NRS certification. Spaces are displayed as
underscores (_). Asteriskes () indicate that no NRS certification
exists.
090 CERT:
Subject
Displays the common name of the NRS certification subject. CN
= the following 17 bytes. Spaces are displayed as underscores
(_). Asterisks () indicate that no DESS exists.
091 CERT:
Serial
Number
Displays serial number for the NRS certification. Asterisks ()
indicate that no DESS exists.
092 CERT:
Issuer
Displays the common name of the issuer of the NRS
certification. CN = the following 30 bytes. Asteriskes () indicate
that no DESS exists.
093 CERT: Valid
Start
Displays the start time of the period for which the current NRS
certification is enabled.
094 CERT: Valid
End
Displays the end time of the period for which the current NRS
certification is enabled.
150 Selection
Country
Select from the list the name of the country where A769 -M is
installed in the machine. After selecting the country, you must
also set the following SP codes for A769 -M:
SP5816-153
SP5816-154
SP5816-161
0: Japan, 1: USA, 2: Canada, 3: UK, 4: Germany, 5: France,
6: Italy, 7: Netherlands, 8: Belgium, 9: Luxembourg, 10: Spain
151 Line Type
Authenticati
on
Judgment
Touch [Execute].
Setting this SP classifies the telephone line where A769 -M is
connected as either dial-up or push type, so A769 -M can
automatically distinguish the number that connects to the
outside line.
The current progress, success, or failure of this execution
can be displayed with SP5816-152.
If the execution succeeded, SP5816-153 will display the
result for confirmation and SP5816-154 will display the
telephone number for the connection to the outside line.
152 Line Type
Judgment
Result
Displays a number to show the result of the execution of
SP5816 151. Here is a list of what the numbers mean.
0: Success
1: In progress (no result yet). Please wait.
2: Line abnormal
3: Cannot detect dial tone automatically
4: Line is disconnected
5: Insufficient electrical power supply
6: Line classification not supported
7: Error because fax transmission in progress ioctl() occurred.
8: Other error occurred
9: Line classification still in progress. Please wait.
Rev. 05/2007
SM 5-119 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

153 Selection
Dial/Push
This SP displays the classification (tone or pulse) of the
telephone line to the access point for A769 -M. The numbered
displayed (0 or 1) is the result of the execution of SP5816 151.
However, this setting can also be changed manually.
[0 to 1/ 0 / 1 /step]
0: Tone Dialing Phone
1: Pulse Dialing Phone
Inside Japan 2 may also be displayed:
0: Tone Dialing Phone
1: Pulse Dialing Phone 10PPS
2: Pulse Dialing Phone 20PPS
154 Outside
Line/Outgoi
ng Number
The SP sets the number that switches to PSTN for the outside
connection for A769 -M in a system that employs a PBX
(internal line).
If the execution of SP5816 151 has succeeded and A769 -M
has connected to the external line, this SP display is
completely blank.
If A769 -M has connected to an internal line, then the
number of the connection to the external line is displayed.
If A769 -M has connected to an external line, a comma is
displayed with the number. The comma is inserted for a 2
sec. Pause.
The number setting for the external line can be entered
manually (including commas).
156 Dial Up
User Name
Use this SP to set a user name for access to remote dial up.
Follow these rules when setting a user name:
Name length: Up to 32 characters
Spaces and # allowed but the entire entry must be enclosed
by double quotation marks ().

157 Dial Up
Password
Use this SP to set a password for access to remote dial up.
Follow these rules when setting a user name:
Name length: Up to 32 characters
Spaces and # allowed but the entire entry must be enclosed
by double quotation marks ().

161 Local Phone
Number
Use this SP to set the telephone number of the line where
A769-M is connected. This number is transmitted to and used
by the Call Center to return calls.
Limit: 24 numbers (numbers only)
162 Connection
Timing
Adjustment:
Incoming
When the Call Center calls out to a A769-M modem, it sends a
repeating ID tone (*#1#). This SP sets the line remains open to
send these ID tones after the number of the A769-M modem is
dialed up and connected.
[0 to 24 / 1 / 1 /step]
The actual amount of time is this setting x 2 sec. For example, if
you set 2 the line will remain open for 4 sec.
163 Access
Point
This is the number of the dial-up access point for A769-M. If no
setting is done for this SP code, then a preset value
(determined by the country selected) is used.
Default: 0
Allowed: Up to 16 alphanumeric characters
Rev. 05/2007
B132/B200 5-120 SM
164 Line
Connecting
This SP sets the connection conditions for the customer. This
setting dedicates the line to A769-M only, or sets the line for
sharing between A769-M and a fax unit.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Sharing Fax
1: No Sharing Fax
Note:
If this setting is changed, the copier must be cycled off and
on.
SP5816 187 determines whether the off-hook button can be
used to interrupt a A769-M transmission in progress to
open the line for fax transaction.
173 Modem
Serial
Number
This SP displays the serial number registered for the A769-M.
174 Retransmiss
ion Limit
Normally, it is best to allow unlimited time for certification and
ID2 update requests, and for the notification that the certification
has been completed. However, A769-M generates charges
based on transmission time for the customer, so a limit is placed
upon the time allowed for these transactions.
If these transactions cannot be completed within the allowed
time, do this SP to cancel the time restriction.
187 FAX TX
Priority
This SP determines whether pushing the off-hook button will
interrupt a A769-M transmission in progress to open the line for
fax transaction. This SP can be used only if SP5816 164 is set
to 0.
[0 or 1/ 0 / - ]
0: Disable, 1: Enable
200 Manual
Polling
Executes the manual polling.
201 Regist:
Status
Displays a number that indicates the status of the NRS service
device.
0: Neither the NRS device nor A769 device are set.
1: The A769 device is being set. Only Box registration is
completed. In this status the A768 unit cannot answer a polling
request.
2: The A769 device is set. In this status the A768 unit cannot
answer a polling request.
3: The NRS device is being set. In this status the A769 device
cannot be set.
4: The NRS module has not started.
202 Letter
Number
Allows entry of the number of the request needed for the A769
device.
203 Confirm
Execute
Executes the inquiry request to the NRS GW URL.
Rev. 05/2007
SM 5-121 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

204 Confirm
Result
Displays a number that indicates the result of the inquiry
executed with SP5816 203.
0: Succeeded
1: Inquiry number error
2: Registration in progress
3: Proxy error (proxy enabled)
4: Proxy error (proxy disabled)
5: Proxy error (Illegal user name or password)
6: Communication error
7: Certification update error
8: Other error
9: Inquiry executing
205 Confirm
Place
Displays the result of the notification sent to the device from the
GW URL in answer to the inquiry request. Displayed only when
the result is registered at the GW URL.
206 Register
Execute
Executes A769 Registration.
207 Register
Result
Displays a number that indicates the registration result.
0: Succeeded
2: Registration in progress
3: Proxy error (proxy enabled)
4: Proxy error (proxy disabled)
5: Proxy error (Illegal user name or password)
6: Communication error
7: Certification update error
8: Other error
9: Registration executing
Displays a number that describes the error code that was
issued when either SP5816-204 or SP5816-207 was executed.
Cause Code Meaning
-11001 Chat parameter error
-11002 Chat execution error
Illegal Modem
Parameter
-11003 Unexpected error
-12002 Inquiry, registration attempted
without acquiring device status.
-12003 Attempted registration without
execution of an inquiry and no
previous registration.
-12004 Attempted setting with illegal
entries for certification and ID2.
-12005 @Remote communication is
prohibited. The device has a
problem with a A769 function.
-12006 After confirmation is completed,
confirmation request was made
again
-12007 Different request number was
used for registration from the
number which was used for
confirmation.
208 Error Code
Operation Error,
Incorrect Setting
-12008 Due to the device was in use,
updating certification was failed.
Rev. 05/2007
B132/B200 5-122 SM
-2385 Attempted dial up overseas
without the correct international
prefix for the telephone number.
-2387 Not supported at the Service
Center
-2389 Database out of service
-2390 Program out of service
-2391 Two registrations for same
device
-2392 Parameter error
-2393 A768 not managed
-2394 Device not managed
-2395 Box ID for A768 is illegal
-2396 Device ID for A768 is illegal
-2397 Incorrect ID2 format
Error Caused by
Response from
GW URL
-2398 Incorrect request number format
209 @Remote
Setting
Clear
Releases the machine from its A769 setup.
250 CommLog
Print
Prints the communication log.

5821 Remote Service Address Japan Only
001 CSS PI Device Code Sets the PI device code. After you change this
setting, you must turn the machine off and on.
002 RCG IP Address Sets the IP address of the RCG (Remote
Communication Gate) destination for call
processing at the remote service center.
[00000000h~FFFFFFFFh/1]

5824 NVRAM Data Upload
Uploads the NVRAM data to an SD card (B140). Push Execute.
Note: When uploading in this SP mode data, the front door must be open.

5825 NVRAM Data Download
Downloads data from an SD card to the NVRAM in the machine. After
downloading is completed, remove the card and turn the machine power off and
on.

5828 Network Setting
050 1284 Compatibility
(Centro)
Enables and disables bi-directional communication
on the parallel connection between the machine and
a computer.
[0~1/1]
0:Off
1: On
Rev. 05/2007
SM 5-123 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

052 ECP (Centro) Disables and enables the ECP feature (1284 Mode)
for data transfer.
[0~1/1]
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
065 Job Spool Setting Switches job spooling spooling on and off.
0: No spooling 1: Spooling enabled
066 Job Spool Clear This SP determines whether the job interrupted at
power off is resumed at the next power on. This SP
operates only when SP5828 065 is set to 1.
1: Resumes printing spooled jog.
0: Clears spooled job.
069 Job Spool Protocol This SP detemines whether job spooling is enabled
or dispabled for each protocol. This is a 8-bit setting.
0 LPR 4 BMLinks (Japan Only)
1 FTP (Not Used) 5 DIPRINT
2 IPP 6 Reserved (Not Used)
3 SMB 7 Reserved (Not Used)
077 IPv4 DNS Server 2
078 IPv4 DNS Server 3
Sets the IPv4 address for a DNS server. This address
can be used among devices that have IPv4 devices
(Ethernet, IPv4 Over 1394, IEEE 802.11b, etc.)
079 Domain Name (Ethernet)
084 Setting List Print Prints a list of the NCS parameter settings.
090 TELNET Operation
Settings
Disables or enables Telnet operation. If this SP is
disabled, the Telnet port is closed.
[0~1/1]
0: Disable
1: Enable
091 Web Operation Disables or enables the Web operation.
[0~1/1]
0: Disable
1: Enable
096 Rendezvous Operation This SP disables/enables Rendezvous operation.
This is a set of protocols that allows a device on an IP
network to automatically recognize and connect with
other devices (such as a printer) on a network. Once
a new device is connected to the network, it can be
used immediately by every computer on the network.
No special setup procedures or configuration settings
are required
1: Enable 0: Disable

5832 HDD Formatting
Enter the SP number for the partition to initialize, then press #. When the
execution ends, cycle the machine off and on.
001 HDD Formatting (All)
002 HDD Formatting (IMH)
003 HDD Formatting (Thumbnail)
004 HDD Formatting (Job Log)
005 HDD Formatting (Printer Fonts)
006 HDD Formatting (User Info.)
Rev. 05/2007
Rev. 05/2007
B132/B200 5-124 SM
007 Mail RX Data
008 Mail TX Log
009 HDD Formatting (Log)
010 HDD Formatting Log
011 HDD Formatting (Ridoc DiskTopBinder)

5833 e-Cabinet Enable
Enables the e-Cabinet function. Then, the user names in the cabinet are enabled
for use with the POP server.
[0~1/1]
0: Disabled
1: Enabled

5836 Capture
001 Capture Function (0:Off 1:On)
With this function disabled, the settings related to the capture feature cannot be
initialized, displayed, or selected.
[0~1/1]
0: Disable
1: Enable
002 Panel Setting
Determines whether each capture related setting can be selected or updated from
the initial system screen.
[0~1/1]
0: Disable
1: Enable
The setting for SP5836-001 has priority.
003 Print Backup Function (0:Off 1:On)
Turns the print backup feature on and off. Default: 0 (Off)
When this feature is on, the print backup features are shown in the initial system
settings. Enabled only when optional File Format Converter (MLB:Media Link
Board) is installed.
[0~1/1]
0: Disable
1: Enable
071 Reduction for Copy Color [0~3/1]
0:1 1:1/2 2:1/3 3:1/4 DFU
072 Reduction for Copy B&W
Text
[0~6/1]
0:1 1:1/2 2:1/3 3:1/4 6:2/3
073 Reduction for Copy B&W
Other
[0~6/1]
0:1 1:1/2 2:1/3 3:1/4 6:2/3
074 Reduction for Printer
Color
[0~3/1]
0:1 1:1/2 2:1/3 3:1/4 DFU
B&W
[0~6/1]
0 1 1:1/2 2:1/3 3:1/4 6:2/3
B&W HQ
[1~5/1]
1:1/2 3:1/4 4:1/6 5:1/8
077 Reduction for Printer Col
1200 dpi
Rev. 05/2007
SM 5-125 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

B&W 1200 dpi
081 Format for Copy Color [0~3/1]
0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,
2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR DFU
082 Format for Copy B&W
Text
[0~3/1]
2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR
083 Format Copy B&W Other [0~3/1]
084 Format for Printer Color [0~3/1]
2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR DFU
085 Format for Printer B&W [0~3/1]
086 Format for Printer B&W
HQ
[0~3/1]
091 Default for JPEG [5~95/1]
Sets the JPEG format default for documents sent to the document management
server with the MLB, with JPEG selected as the format. Enabled only when
optional File Format Converter (MLB: Media Link Board) is installed.
092 High Quality for JPEG Sets the quality level of JPEG images for high quality
sent to the Document Server with the MLB (Media Link
Board).
[5~95/1]
093 Low Quality for JPEG Sets the quality level of JPEG images for low quality
sent to the Document Server with the MLB (Media Link
Board).
[5~95/1]
094 Default Format for
Backup Files

Sets the format of the backup files.
[0~2/1]
0: TIFF
1: JPEG
2: For printing
This feature can be selected only if SP5836-3 is set to
1.
095 Default Resolution for
Backup Files
Sets the resolution conversion ratio for the backup files.
[0~3/1]
0: 1x
1: 1/2x
2: 1/3 x
3: 1/4x
097 Default Compression for
Backup Files
Sets the rate of compression for the backup files.
[0~2/1]
0: Standard
1: Low
2: High
B132/B200 5-126 SM
098 Back Projection Removal

Removes the ghost images that are copied from the
back sides of two-sided originals.
[0~1/1]
0: Disable
1: Enable

5839 IEEE 1394
This SP is displayed only when an IEEE 1394 (firewire) card is installed.
004 Host Name
Enter the name of the device used on the network. Example: RNP0000000000
007 Cycle Master
Enables or disables the cycle master function for the 1394 bus standard.
[0~1/1]
0: Disable (Off)
1: Enable (On)
008 BCR Mode
Determines how BCR (Broadcast Channel Register) operates on the 1394
standard bus when the independent node is in any mode other than IRM.
(NVRAM: 2-bits)
[Always Effective]
009 IRM 1394a Check
Conducts a 1394a check of IRM when the independent node is in any mode
other than IRM.
[0~1/1]
0: Checks whether IRM conforms to 1394a
1: After IRM is checked, if IRM does not conform then independent node
switches to IRM.
010 Unique ID
Lists the ID (Node_Unique_ID) assigned to the device by the system
administrator.
Bit0: Off
Bit1: On
OFF: Does not list the Node_Unique_ID assigned by the system administrator.
Instead, the Source_ID of the GASP header in the ARP is used.
ON: The Node_Unique_ID assigned by the system administrator is used, and
the Source_ID of the GASP header in the ARP is ignored. Also, when the
serial bus is reset, extra bus transactions are opened for the enumeration.
011 Logout
Handles the login request of the login initiator for SBP-2. (1-bit)
Bit0: Off
Bit1: On
OFF: Disable (refuse login). Initiator retry during login. Login refusal on arrival of
login request (standard operation)
ON: Enable (force logout). Initiator retry during login. Login refusal on arrival of
login request, and the initiator forces the login.
012 Login
Rev. 05/2007
SM 5-127 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

Enables or disables the exclusive login feature (SBP-2 related).
Bit0: Off
Bit1: On
OFF: Disables. The exclusive login (LOGIN ORB exclusive it) is ignored.
ON: Enables. Exclusive login is in effect.

013 Login MAX
Sets the maximum number of logins from the initiator (6-bits)
[0~63/1]
0: Reserved
63: Reserved

5840 IEEE 802.11b
006 Channel MAX
Sets the maximum range of the bandwidth for the wireless LAN. This bandwidth
setting varies for different countries.
[1~14/1]
007 Channel MIN
Sets the minimum range of the bandwidth for operation of the wireless LAN. This
bandwidth setting varies for different countries.
[1~14/1]
011 WEP Key Select
Determines how the initiator (SBP-2) handles subsequent login requests.
[0~1/1]
0: If the initiator receives another login request while logging in, the request is
refused.
1: If the initiator receives another login request while logging in, the request is
refused and the initiator logs out.
Note: Displayed only when the wireless LAN card is installed.

5841 Supply Name Setting
Press the User Tools key. These names appear when the user presses the
Inquiry button on the User Tools screen.
001 Toner Name Setting: Black
002 Toner Name Setting: Cyan
002 Toner Name Setting: Yellow
004 Toner Name Setting: Magenta
011 StapleStd1
012 StapleStd2 Standard Staples for B698
013 StapleStd3 Standard Staples for B700/b701
021 StapleBind1
022 StapleBind2 Booklet Staples for B700
023 StapleBind3

Rev. 05/2007
B132/B200 5-128 SM

5842 Net File Analysis Mode Setting DFU
Bit Groups
0 System & other groups (LSB)
1 Capture related
2 Authentication related
3 Address book related
4 Machine management related
5 Output related (printing, delivery)
This is a debugging tool. It sets
the debugging output mode of
each Net File process.
Bit SW 0011 1111
6 Repository related

5844 USB
001 Transfer Rate
Sets the speed for USB data transmission.
[Full Speed]
[Auto Change]
002 Vendor ID
Sets the vendor ID:
Initial Setting: 0x05A Ricoh Company
[0x0000~0xFFFF/1] DFU
003 Product ID
Sets the product ID.
[0x0000~0xFFFF/1] DFU
004 Device Release No.
Sets the device release number of the BCD (binary coded decimal) display.
[0000~9999/1] DFU
Enter as a decimal number. NCS converts the number to hexadecimal number
recognized as the BCD.

5845 Delivery Server
These are delivery server settings.
001 FTP Port No.
[0~65535/1]
002 IP Address
Use this SP to set the Scan Router Server address. The IP address under the
transfer tab can be used with the initial system setting.
[0~FFFFFFFF/1]
006 Delivery Error Display Time
Use this setting to set the length of time that the message is shown when a test
error occurs during document transfer with the NetFile application and an external
device.
[0~999/1]
008 IP Address (Secondary)
Sets the IP address that is given to the computer that is the secondary delivery
server for Scan Router. This SP lets you set only the IP address, and does not
refer to the DNS setting.
009 Delivery Server Model
Rev. 05/2007
SM 5-129 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

Lets you change the model of the delivery server that is registered by the I/O
device.
[0~4/1]
0: Unknown
1: SG1 Provided
2: SG1 Package
3: SG2 Provided
4: SG2 Package
010 Delivery Svr. Capability
Changes the functions that the registered I/O device can do.
[0~255/1]
Bit7 = 1 Comment information exits
Bit6 = 1 Direct specification of mail address possible
Bit5 = 1 Mail RX confirmation setting possible
Bit4 = 1 Address book automatic update function exists
Bit3 = 1 Fax RX delivery function exists
Bit2 = 1 Sender password function exists
Bit1 = 1 Function to link MK-1 user and Sender exists
Bit0 = 1 Sender specification required (if set to 1, Bit6 is set to 0)
011 Delivery Svr.Capability (Ext)
These settings are for future use. They will let you increase the number of
registered devices (in addition to those registered for SP5845 010).
There are eight bits (Bit 0 to Bit 7). All are unused at this time.

5846 UCS Setting
001 Machine ID (Delivery Server)
Displays the unique device ID in use by the delivery server directory. The value is
only displayed and cannot be changed.
This ID is created from the NIC MAC or IEEE 1394 EUI.
The ID is displayed as either 6-byle or 8-byte binary.
6-byte
%02X.%02X.%02X.%02X.%02X.%02X
8-byte
%02X.%02X.%02X.%02X.%02X.%02X.%02X.%02X
002 Machine ID Clear (Delivery Server)
Clears the unique ID of the device used as the name in the file transfer directory.
Execute this SP if the connection of the device to the delivery server is unstable.
After clearing the ID, the ID will be established again automatically by cycling the
machine off and on.
003 Maximum Entries
Changes the maximum number of entries that UCS can handle.
[2000~50000/1]
If a value smaller than the present value is set, the UCS managed data is cleared,
and the data (excluding user code information) is displayed.
006 Delivery Server Retry Timer
Sets the interval for retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire the
delivery server address book.
[0~255/1 s]
0: No retries
007 Delivery Server Retry Times
Rev. 05/2007
B132/B200 5-130 SM
Sets the number of retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire the
delivery server address book.
[0~255/1]
008 Delivery Server Maximum Entries
Lets you set the maximum number of account entries and information about the users
of the delivery server controlled by UCS.
[20000~50000/1]

010 LDAP Search Timeout
Sets the length of the time-out for the search of the LDAP server.
[1~255/1]
047 Initialize Local Address Book
Clears all of the address information from the local address book of a machine
managed with UCS.
048 Initialize Delivery Info.
Push [Execute] to delete all items (this does not include user codes) in the delivery
address book that is controlled by UCS.
049 Initialize LDAP Info.
Push [Execute] to delete all items (this does not include user codes) in the LDAP
address book that is controlled by UCS.
050 Initialize Local Info.
Clears everything (including users codes) in the directory information managed by
UCS. However, the accounts and passwords of the system administrators are not
deleted.
051 Upload All Directory Info.
Uploads all directory information to the IC card.
052 Download All Directory Info.
Downloads all directory information from the IC card.
053 Update Info Clear
Deletes the address book uploaded from the SD card in the slot. Deletes only the
files uploaded for that machine. This feature does not work if the card is write-
protected.
Note: After you do this SP, go out of the SP mode, turn the power off. Do not
remove the SD card until the Power LED stops flashing.
090 Plain Data Forbidden
Lets you to prevent the address from transmission as plain data. This is a security
function that prevents unauthorized access to address book data.
[0~1/1]
0: No check. Address book data not protected.
1: Check. Enables operation of UCS without data from HDD or SC card and
without creating address book information with plain data.
091 FTP Auth. Port Settings
Sets the FTP port to get the delivery server address book that is used in the
individual authorization mode.
[0~65535/1]
094 Encryption Status
Shows the status of the encryption function of the address book on the LDAP
server.
[0~255/1] No default

Rev. 05/2007
SM 5-131 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

Net File Resolution Reduction 5847
5847 1 through 5847 6 changes the default settings of image data sent externally
by the Net File page reference function. [0~2/1]
5847 21 sets the default for JPEG image quality of image files controlled by
NetFile.
NetFile refers to jobs to be printed from the document server with a PC and the
DeskTopBinder software.
001 Rate After Copy Col [0~5/1]
002 Rate for Copy B&W Text [0~6/1]
003 Rate for Copy B&W Other [0~6/1]
004 Rate for Printer Color [0~5/1]
005 Rate for Printer B&W [0~6/1]
006 Rate for Printer B&W HQ [0~6/1]
0: 1x
1: 1/2x
2: 1/3x
3: 1/4x
4: 1/6x
5: 1/8x
6: 2/3x
1

1
: 6: 2/3x applies to 003, 005, 006
only.
Network Quality Default for JPEG 021
Sets the default value for the quality of JPEG images sent as NetFile pages. This
function is available only with the MLB (Media Link Board) option installed.
[5~95/1]

Web Service 5848
5847 2 sets the 4-bit switch assignment for the access control setting. Setting of
0001 has no effect on access and delivery from Scan Router.
5847 100 sets the maximum size of images that can be downloaded. The default is
equal to 1 gigabyte.
001 Access Control. : NetFile (Lower 4 Bits Only)
Bit switch settings.
0000: No access control
0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder. Access and deliveries from Scan Router
have no effect on capture.
002 Access Control. : Repository (Lower 4
Bits)
0000: No access control
0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder.
003 Access Control. : Doc. Svr. Print
(Lower 4 Bits)
004 Access Control. : User Directory
(Lower 4 Bits)
005 Access Control. : Delivery Input
(Lower 4 Bits)
009 Access Control. : Job Control (Lower 4
Bits)
011 Access Control: Device Management
(Lower 4 Bits)
021 Access Control: Delivery (Lower 4
Bits)
022 Access Control: User Administration
(Lower 4 Bits)
041 Access Control: Security Setting
(Lower 4 Bits)
Switches access control on and off.
0000: OFF
100 Repository: Download Image Max.
Size
[1~1024/1 K]
Rev. 05/2007
B132/B200 5-132 SM

5849 Installation Date
Displays or prints the installation date of the machine.
001 Display The Counter Clear Day has been changed to Installation
Date or Inst. Date.
002 Switch to Print Determines whether the installation date is printed on the
printout for the total counter.
[0~1/1]
0: No Print
1: Print

5853 Stamp Data Download
Push [Execute] to download the fixed stamp data from the machine ROM onto the
hard disk. Then these stamps can be used by the system. If this is not done, the
user will not have access to the fixed stamps (Confidential, Secret, etc.).
You must always execute this SP after replacing the HDD or after formatting the
HDD. Always switch the machine off and on after executing this SP.

5856 Remote ROM Update
When set to 1 allows reception of firmware data via the local port (IEEE 1284)
during a remote ROM update. This setting is reset to zero after the machine is
cycled off and on. Allows the technician to upgrade the firmware using a parallel
cable
[0~1/1]
0: Not allowed
1: Allowed

5857 Save Debug Log
001 On/Off (1:ON 0:OFF)
Switches on the debug log feature. The debug log cannot be captured until this
feature is switched on.
[0~1/1]
0: OFF
1: ON
002 Target (2: HDD 3: SD Card)
Selects the destination where the debugging information generated by the event
selected by SP5858 will be stored if an error is generated
[2~3 /1]
2: HDD
3: SD Card
005 Save to HDD
Specifies the decimal key number of the log to be written to the hard disk.
006 Save to SD Card
Specifies the decimal key number of the log to be written to the SD Card.
009 Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4 MB)
Takes the most recent 4 MB of the log written to the hard disk and copies them to the
SD Card.
A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on the SD
Card. Up to 4MB can be copied to an SD Card. 4 MB segments can be copied one by
one to each SD Card.
Rev. 05/2007
SM 5-133 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

010 Copy HDD to SD Card Latest 4 MB Any Key)
Takes the log of the specified key from the log on the hard disk and copies it to the
SD Card.
A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on the SD
Card. Up to 4 MB can be copied to an SD Card. 4 MB segments can be copied one
by one to each SD Card. This SP does not execute if there is no log on the HDD with
no key specified.
011 Erase HDD Debug Data
Erases all debug logs on the HDD
012 Erase SD Card Debug Data
Erases all debug logs on the SD Card. If the card contains only debugging files
generated by an event specified by SP5858, the files are erased when SP5857 010
or 011 is executed.
To enable this SP, the machine must be cycled off and on.
013 Free Space on SD Card
Displays the amount of space available on the SD card.
014 Copy SD to SD (Latest 4MB)
Copies the last 4MB of the log (written directly to the card from shared memory) onto
an SD card.
015 Copy SD to SD (Latest 4MB Any Key)
This SP copies the log on an SD card (the file that contains the information written
directly from shared memory) to a log specified by key number. (5.10)
016 Make HDD Debug
This SP creates a 32 MB file to store a log on the HDD.
017 Make SD Debug
This SP creates a 4 MB file to store a log on an SD card.

Debug Save When 5858
These SPs select the content of the debugging information to be saved to the
destination selected by SP5857 002.
SP5858 3 stores one SC specified by number. Refer to Section 4 for a list of
SC error codes.
001 Engine SC Error
(0:OFF 1:ON)
Stores SC codes generated by copier engine
errors.
[0~1/1]
0: OFF
1: ON
002 Controller SC Error
(0:OFF 1:ON)
Stores SC codes generated by GW controller
errors.
[0~1/1]
0: OFF
1: ON
003 Any SC Error [0~65535/1]
004 Jam (0:OFF 1:ON) Stores jam errors.
[0~1/1]
0: OFF
1: ON

Rev. 05/2007
B132/B200 5-134 SM

5859 Debug Log Save Function
001 Key 1
002 Key 2
003 Key 3
004 Key 4
005 Key 5
006 Key 6
007 Key 7
008 Key 8
009 Key 9
010 Key 10
These SPs allow you to set up to 10 keys for log files for functions that
use common memory on the controller board. (5.10)
[-9999999~9999999/1]

5860 SMTP/POP3/IMAP4
020 Partial Mail Receive Timeout
[1~168/1]
Sets the amount of time to wait before saving a mail that breaks up during
reception. The received mail is discarded if the remaining portion of the mail is not
received during this prescribed time.
021 MDN Response RFC2298 Compliance
Determines whether RFC2298 compliance is switched on for MDN reply mail.
[0~1/1]
0: No
1: Yes
022 SMTP Auth. From Field Replacement
Determines whether the FROM item of the mail header is switched to the
validated account after the SMTP server is validated.
[0~1/1]
0: No. From item not switched.
1: Yes. From item switched.
025 SMTP Auth Direct Sending

5866 E-Mail Alert
001 Notice of E-mail
005 Add Date Field
Not used with this machine.

5870 Common Key Info Writing
Writes to flash ROM the common proof for validating the device for NRS
specifications.
001 Writing
003 Initialize
Note: These SPs are for future use and currently are not used.

Rev. 05/2007
SM 5-135 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

5871 HDD Function Disable
Disables the HDD functions by suppressing all functions that write data to the
HDD. After this SP is executed, the machine must be switched off and on to
enable the setting.
[0~1/1]
0: OFF
1: ON
Note: This SP is intended for use during installation of the Data Overwrite
Security Unit B735 (a new option). For more, see section 1. Installation.

5873 SD Card Apli.
Allows you to move applications from one SD card another. For more, see
"1.16.5 Mergining Applications on One SD Card".
001 Move Exec Executes the move from one SD card to another.
002 Undo Exec This is an undo function. It cancels the previous execution.

5875 SC Auto Reboot
Determines whether the machine reboots automatically when an SC error
occurs.
[0~1/1]
0: The machine reboots automatically when the machine issues an SC error and
logs the SC error code. If the same SC occurs again, the machine does not
reboot.
1: The machine does not reboot when an SC error occurs.
The reboot does not occur for Type A SC codes.

5878 Option Setup Data Overwrite Security (DOS) Setup
Press [Execute] to initialize the Data Overwrite Security option for the copier.
For more, see "1.16 MFP Controller Options" in Section "1. Installation".

5880 ACS High Performance Mode
This SP enables and disables ACS. In the ACS mode the machine raises/lowers
the ITB to print color/black-and-white. If a job contains both full-color and black-
and-white pages, the ITB raises for the color pages and lowers for the black-and-
white pages. ACS reduces wear on the color drums but reduces printing speed
slightly.
0: ACS enabled. The ITB raises/lowers for full-color/black-and-white printing.
1: ACS disabled. The ITB remains in contact with all four drums regardless of
whether the job is for full-color or black-and-white. This setting allows the
machine to print faster than the ACS mode because no time is required for
the raising/lowering of the ITB.

Rev. 05/2007
B132/B200 5-136 SM

5907 Plug & Play Maker/Model Name
Selects the brand name and the production name for Windows Plug & Play. This
information is stored in the NVRAM. If the NVRAM is defective, these names
should be registered again.
After selecting, press the Original Type key and # key at the same time. When
the setting is completed, the beeper sounds five times.

5913 Switchover Permission Time
Print Application Timer 002
Sets the length of time to elapse before allowing another application to take
control of the display when the application currently controlling the display is not
operating because a key has not been pressed.
[3~30/1 s]
Print Application Set
102
[0~1/1/1]

5959 Set Size Set Size
Tray 1 (tandem tray) and the LCT do not have automatic paper size detection. Use
these SP codes to set the paper size for Tray 1 and the optional LCT.
001 Tray 1:Tandem
The following paper sizes can be set. If the A3 DLT kit is not installed, you can only
use settings 0 and 1
0 A4 6 8.5 x 14 SEF
1 8.5 x 11 7 8.5 x 11 SEF
2 A3 SEF 8 B5
3 B4 SEF 9 B5 SEF
4 A4 SEF 10 Custom
5 11 x 17
005 LCT
The LCT accepts three paper sizes. Enter the correct number of the size of the
paper loaded in the LCT:
0 A4 4 8.5 x 11 SEF
1 8.5 x 11 5 B4 SEF
2 B5 6 8.5 x 14 SEF
3 A4 SEF 7 Custom Size

5967 Copy Server: Set Function
Enables and disables the document server. This is a security measure that
prevents image data from being left in the temporary area of the HDD. After
changing this setting, you must switch the main switch off and on to enable the
new setting.[0~1/1]
0: ON
1: OFF

Rev. 05/2007
SM 5-137 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

5974 Cherry Server
Selects which version of the Scan Router application program, Light or Full
(Professional), is installed.
[0 ~ 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Light version (supplied with this machine)
1: Full version (optional)

5979 GBC Unit Set
Set this SP mode to 1 when you install the GBC unit.
0: OFF (Non GBC Unit)
1: ON (Install GBC Unit)

5990 SP Print Mode SMC Print
In the SP mode, press Copy Window to move to the copy screen, select the
paper size, then press Start. Select A4/LT (Sideways) or larger to ensure that all
the information prints. Press SP Window to return to the SP mode, select the
desired print, and press Execute.
001 All (Data List)
002 SP (Mode Data List)
003 User Program Data
004 Logging Data
005 Diagnostic Report
006 Non-Default (Prints only SPs set to values other than defaults.)
007 NIB Summary
008 Capture Log
021 Copier User Program
022 Scanner SP
023 Scanner User Program

Group 6000
6006 ADF Reg Adj ADF Registration Adjustment
001 ADF Main Reg Adj Adjusts the side-to-side registration for the front/back in
ADF mode.
[3~+3/0.1 mm]
003 ADF Sub Reg Adj Adjusts the vertical registration for the front/back in ADF
mode.
[30 ~+30/0.17 mm]
-30 = -5.1 mm
+30 = +5.1 mm
005 ADF Buck Adj:Front Adjusts the roller timing at the skew correction
sensor/entrance roller. A higher setting causes more
buckling.
[12.0~+12/0.25 mm]
-12 = -3.0 mm
+12 = +3.0 mm
006 ADF Buck Adj:Back Adjusts the roller timing at the interval sensor/scanning
Rev. 05/2007
B132/B200 5-138 SM
roller. A higher setting causes more buckling.
[8.0~+8/0.25 mm]
[8.0~+8/0.25 mm]
-8 = -2 mm
+8 = +2 mm
007 ADF TEdge EMargin These settings adjust the erase margin for the trailing
edges for the front/back.
[20~+20/0.5 mm]
-20 = -10 mm
+20 = +10 mm

6007 ADF Input Chk ADF Input Check
Displays signals received from sensors and switches in the ADF. (5.7.1)

6008 ADF Output Chk ADF Output Check
Turns on the ADF electrical components individually for testing. (5.7.2)

6009 ADF Free Run ADF Free Run
This SP does an ADF free run in duplex original mode.
001 Simplex
002 Duplex

6016 ADF OrgSizePrior ADF Original Size Detection Priority
Allows selection of alternate settings for automatic original size detection. (6.4.3)

6017 ADF Mag Adj ADF Magnification Adjustment
001 ADF Sub Mag Adj This changes the magnification by adjusting the speed of
scanning.
[50(5%)~+50(+5%)/0.1%]

6020 ADF Skew Adj ARDF Skew Adjustment at the Scanning Entrance Roller
This SP switches on stopping the scanning entrance roller for all paper sizes.
Normally, the scanning entrance roller stops briefly to correct skew of small paper
sizes in the ADF paper path and for the 2nd side scanning of originals during
duplexing. Setting this SP to "1" sets the ADF to stop the scanning entrance roller for
all paper sizes to correct for skew a second time.
[0~1/1]

6050 Adj Staple Pos Staple Position Adjustment
Adjusts the position of the staples during corner stapling.

6090 LCT Output Chk LCT Output Check
Performs the output check for the optional LCT.
001 LCT Feed Motor
002 LCT Pickup SOL

Rev. 05/2007
SM 5-139 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

6101 Adj Punch Pos 1 Punch Position Adjustment
Adjusts the punch hole positions in the direction of paper feed.
NA: North America
DOM: Japan
EU: Europe
SCAN: Scandinavia
001
2-Hole:DOM
002
3-Hole:NA
003
4-Hole:EU
004
4-Hole:SCAN
005 2-Hole:NA
[-75~+75/0.5 mm]
+ Value: Shifts punch unit in the direction of feed.
- Value: Shift punch unit against direction of feed.
Paper Feed

B132S921.WMF

Rev. 05/2007
B132/B200 5-140 SM

6102 Adj Punch Pos 2 Punch Position Adjustment
Adjusts the punch position perpendicular to the direction of feed.
[-20~+20/0.4 mm]
+ Value: Shifts punch unit toward back of the finisher.
- Value: Shift punch unit toward front of the finisher.
001
2-Hole:DOM
002
3-Hole:NA
003
4-Hole:EU
004
4-Hole:SCAN
005 2-Hole:NA
Paper Feed

B132S922.WMF

6103 Punch Hole Reg 1 Punch Hole Registration Adjustment
This SP corrects punch hole alignment by correcting the skew of each by adjusting
the amount of time the finisher entrance roller remains off while the exit roller of the
machine remains on. This buckles the leading edge of the sheet slightly against the
finisher entrance roller while it remains off.
001 A3 SEF [-500~+500/0.3 mm]
002 B4 SEF + Value:Increases time finisher entrance roller remains off.
003 A4 SEF - Value: Descreases time finisher entrance roller remains off.
004 A4 LEF
005 B5 SEF
006 B5 LEF
007 DLT SEF
008 LG SEF
009 LT SEF
010 LT LEF
011 12" x 18"
012 Custom Size

Rev. 05/2007
SM 5-141 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

6104 Punch Hole Reg 2 Punch Hole Control
This SP determines whether the finisher entrance roller stops to correct skew when
paper enters the finisher.
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEF
004 A4 LEF
005 B5 SEF
006 B5 LEF
007 DLT SEF
008 LG SEF
009 LT SEF
010 LT LEF
011 12" x 18"
012 Custom Size
[0~2/1]
0: No adjustment. Quickly restores the default setting of you
forget what the other settings do.
0: Paper stops for skew correction
1: Paper does not stop
2: Paper stops (same as default)

6105 Fine Adj Staple Fine Adjust Staple Jogger Fence Postion
This SP corrects the distance between the jogger fences and the sides of the stack
on the finisher stapling tray.
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEF
004 A4 LEF
005 B5 SEF
006 B5 LEF
007 DLT SEF
008 LG SEF
009 LT SEF
010 LT LEF
011 12"x18"
012 Custom Size
[-15~+15/0.5 mm]
+ Value: Increases distance between jogger fences and the
sides of the stack.
- Value: Decreases the distance between the jogger fences
and the sides of the stack.

6106 Fine Adj Out Jog Fine Adjust Output Jogger Unit Fences
This SP corrects the distance between the jogger fences and the sides of the stack
when the output jogger unit attached to the side of the machine jogs sheets as they
exit the finisher.
+ Value: Increases distance between jogger fences and the sides of the stack.
- Value: Decreases the distance between the jogger fences and the sides of the
stack.
001 A3 SEF [-15~+15/0.5 mm]
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 LEF
004 B5 LEF
005 DLT SEF [-15~+15/0.5 mm]
006 LT LEF [-15~+15/0.5 mm]
007 Custom [-15~+15/0.5 mm]

Rev. 05/2007
B132/B200 5-142 SM

6107 Interposer Size Paper Size Priority: Cover Interposer
Controls the paper size for the cover interposer tray. Select a paper size and push
[Execute]
001 A3SEF/12x18 [0~1/1]
0: A3 SEF, 1: 12 x 18
002 EU China [0~2/1]
0: 8 x 13, 1: 8 x 13, 2: 8 x 13
003 NA 1 [0~1/1]
0: 8 x 14, 1: 8 x 13
004 NA 2 [0~1/1]
0: LT LEF, 1: 10 x 7
005 NA 3 [0~1/1]
0: LT SEF, 1: 8 x 10
006 EU Taiwan [0~1/1]
0: 8-Kai, 1: DLT
007 EU Taiwan [0~1/1]
0: 16-Kai SEF, 1: LT
008 EU Taiwan [0~1/1]
0: 16-Kai SEF, 1: LT SEF

6108 Adj Fold: 1 Sheet Adjust Fold Position: 1 Sheet Japan Only
001 A3 SEF [-75~+75/0.5 mm]
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEf
004 B5 SEF
005 DLT SEF
006 LG SEF
007 LT SEF
008 12"x18"
009 Custom Size

6109 Adj Corner Staple Adjust Staple Position of Corner Stapler
This SP corrects the stapling position of the corner stapler.
[-3.5~+3.5/0.5 mm]
- Value: Moves stapling position toward the rear of the machine.
+ Value: Shifts the stapling position toward the front of the machine.
NOTE: The paper feed direction must be as shown below.

Rev. 05/2007
SM 5-143 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

6111 Adj Z-Fold 2 Adjust Fold Position: Z-Fold Unit: Fold 2 Japan Only
Adjusts the position of the second fold for the Z-folding unit.

6112 Japan Model Only
NOTE: To adjust the booklet stapling position use SP6126-001 to 009

6113 Book Fold Adj Adjust Booklet Fold Position
This SP corrects the folding postion when paper is stapled and folded.
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEf
004 B5 SEF
005 DLT SEF
006 LG SEF
007 LT SEF
008 12"x18"
009 Custom Size
[-3~+3/0.2 mm]
+ Value: Shifts staple position toward the crease.
- Value: Shifts staple position away from the crease.
Feed O ut

B132S924.WMF

6114 Book Fold Repeat Set Number of Folds
This SP sets the number of times the folding rollers are driven forward and reverse
to sharpen the crease of a folded booket before it exits the folding unit. When set at
the default (0):
The folding blade pushes the center of the stack into the nip of the folding roller.
The folding rollers rotated ccw to crease the booklet, reverse cw, then rotate ccw
again crease the booklet fold twice before feeding to the folding unit exit rollers.
0:2Reps-6:30Reps [0~6/1 reverse/forward feed.]
0: 2 4: 20
1: 5 5: 25
2: 10 6: 30

3: 15

6115 Max Prestack Number of Pre-Stack Sheets
This SP sets the number of sheets sent to the pre-stack tray. With this SP set to the
default (3):
3 sheets are sent to the pre-stack tray.
When the 4th sheet feeds, the 4th sheet and 3 sheets from the pre-stack tray
are sent to the stapling tray together.
Note: You may need to adjust this setting or switch it off when feeding thick or slick
paper.
0:None-3:3Shts [0~3/1 sheet]
0: None
1: 1 sheet
2: 2 sheets
Rev. 05/2007
B132/B200 5-144 SM
3: 3 sheets

6116 Thk Sht Count Thick Sheet Count
This SP sets the number of sheets of normal thickness to count for one thick sheet.
The default (3) counts three sheets of normal thickness for one thick sheet.
[1~3/1]

6117 Allow Tnk Punch Allow Punching of OHP Sheets
This SP allows you to switch on punching of OHP sheets. Normally, OHP sheets
cannot be punched. If this SP is switched on (1), the performance of the finisher cannot
be guaranteed (the sheets may jam).
[0~1/1]

6118 Output Jog On Output Jogger Operation Off/On
This SP switches the jogging operation of the output jogger attached to the side of the
finisher off and on.
[0~1/1] 0: Off, 1: On
Note: After installation of the Output Jogger Unit B703, this SP must be set to "1" for
the jogging motor to operate the jogging fences.

6119 No Z-Fold/Punch Prohibit Z-Folding and Punching Japan Only
Switch Z-folding off and on. Default: 0 (Off)
0:No 1:Yes

6120 Free Run Free Run 1: Post Processing
These SPs set the peripherals list below in the free run mode for testing.
001 Free Run 1 System Free Run Finishers B701/B700, B706
002 Free Run 1 Free Run (Endurance Testing) Finisher B706
003 Free Run 3 Free Run Finishers B760, B468/B469
004 Free Run 4 Shift, Free Run Finisher B706

6121 Input Chk:Fin1 Input Check: Finisher 1 (B700/B701) (5.8.1)
These are the input checks for the 2000-Sheet/3000-Sheet Finishers B700/B701.

6122 Input Chk:Fin2 Input Check: Finisher 2 (B706) (5.9.1)
These are the input checks for the 3000-Sheet Finisher B706.

6123 Output Chk:Fin1 Output Check: Finisher 1 (B700/B701) (5.8.2)
These are the output checks for the 2000-Sheet/3000-Sheet Finishers B700/B701.

6124 Output Chk:Fin3 Output Check: Finisher 3 Japan Only
These are output checks for the 3000-Sheet Finishers B468/B469.
001 Proof JG SOL:
002 Stp JG SOL:
003 End Roll SOL
004 Main M 1
005 Main M 2
Rev. 05/2007
SM 5-145 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

006 Exit M
007 Stapler M
008 Punch M
009 Tray Lift M
010 Jogger M
011 Stp Shift M
012 Feed Out M
013 Shift M
014 Stp Rot M

6125 Output Chk:Fin2 Output Check: Finisher 2 (B706) (5.9.2)

6126 Book Fold Adj
These SPs adjust the position for booklet stapling with the 2000/3000-Sheet Finisher
B700. The initial setting is at "0" and can be adjusted in increments of 0.2 mm
001 A3 SEF:Sub Scan [-3 to +3/0.2 mm]
002 B4 SEF:Sub Scan
003 A4 SEF:Sub Scan
004 B5 SEF:Sub Scan
005 DLT SEF:Sub Scan
006 LG SEF:Sub Scan
007 LT SEF:Sub Scan
008 12"x18":Sub Scan
009 Custom:Sub Scan

6900 ADF Bottom Lift ADF Bottom Lift Plate
This SP setting determines whether the bottom plate lift motor of the of the ARDF
switches on when the original is set in the ARDF original tray, or when the [Start] key is
pressed. The ARDF bottom plate lift motor raises the bottom plate that pushes up the
original tray and raises it to the optimum feed position.
[0~1/1]
0: Bottom plate lifts immediately after originals are set (Default)
1: Bottom plate does not lift until [Start] key is pushed.

Group 7000
7001 Op Time Disp Main Motor Operation Time
Displays the total drum rotation time.

7401 Total SC Counter Total SC Counter
Displays the total number of SCs logged.

SC History
001 Latest
002 Latest 1st
003 Latest 2nd
7403
004 Latest 3rd
Displays the latest 10 SC codes.
Rev. 05/2007
B132/B200 5-146 SM
005 Latest 4th
006 Latest 5th
007 Latest 6th
008 Latest 7th
009 Latest 8th
010 Latest 9th

7502 Total Paper Jam Counter
Displays the total number of copy jams.

7503 Total Original Jam Counter
Displays the total number of copy jams.

7504 Paper Jam Loc Paper Jam Locations - Copier
Displays the list of possible locations where a jam could have occurred. Press the
appropriate key to display the jam count for that location. These jams are caused by
the failure of a sensor to activate.
On Operation Panel Actual Component Name
008 Trans 1 Sn:Late 1st Vertical Transport Sensor
009 Trans 2 Sn:Late 2nd Vertical Transport Sensor
010 Trans 3 Sn:Late 3rd Vertical Transport Sensor
011 Trans 4 Sn:Late 4th Vertical Transport Sensor
012 Relay Sn: Late Relay Senosor
013 Reg Sn:Late Registration Sensor
014 Fusing Ex Sn:Late Fusing Exit Sensor
016 Main Ex Sn:Late Paper Exit Sensor
019 Dup Ent Sn:Late Duplex Entrance Sensor
020 Dup Trans Sn1:Late Duplex Transport Sensor 1
023 Dup Ent Sn:Late Duplex Entrance Sensor
024 LCT Relay LCT Relay Sensor:Late
034 Bypass PE Sn:Off Bypass Paper End Sensor
053 1st Feed Sn:Lag 1st Paper Feed Sensor:Lag
054 2nd Feed Sn:Lag 2nd Paper Feed Sensor:Lag
055 3rd Feed Sn:Lag 3rd Paper Feed Sensor:Lag
056 4th Feed Sn:Lag 4th Paper Feed Sensor:Lag
057 LCT Feed Sn:Lag LCT Paper Feed Sensor
058 Trans 1 Sn:Lag 1st Vertical Transport Sensor:Lag
059 Trans 2 Sn:Lag 2nd Vertical Transport Sensor:Lag
060 Trans 3 Sn:Lag 3rd Vertical Transport Sensor:Lag
061 Trans 4 Sn:Lag 4th Vertical Transport Sensor:Lag
062 Relay Sn:Lag Relay Sensor:Lag
063 Reg Sn:Lag Registration Sensor
064 Fusing Ex Sn:Lag Fusing Exit Sensor:Lag
066 Main Ex Sn:Lag Main Exit Sensor
069 Dup Ent Sn:Lag Duplex Entrance Sensor
071 Dup Trans Sn2:Lag Duplex Transport Sensor 1
Rev. 05/2007
SM 5-147 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

072 Dup Trans Sn3:Lag Duplex Transport Sensor 2
074 LCT Relay Sn:Lag LCT Relay Sensor:Lag
078 Dummy TBelt Sn Dummy Transfer Belt Sensor
084 Bypass Feed Sn Bypass Paper Feed Sensor
098 Paper Type Paper Type
099 Bypass Paper Feed Sn Bypass Paper Feed Sensor

7504 Paper Jam Loc Paper Jam Locations - 3000-Sheet Finisher B468/B469
(Japan Only)
121 Entrance Jam Entrance Sensor
122 Proof Tray Exit Proof Tray Exit Sensor
123 Shift Tray Exit Shift Tray Exit Sensor
124 Stapler Exit Stapler Exit Sensor
125 Exit After Jogging Exit Sensor After Jogging
126 Corner Stapling Corner Stapling: Stapler Unit 1
127 Saddle Stapling Saddle-Stitch Stapler Unit
128 Paper Folding Paper Folding
129 Shift Tray Motor Shift Tray Motor
130 Jog Fence Motor Jogger Fence Motor
131 Shift Roller Motor Shift Roller Motor
132 Stapler Shift M Stapler Shift Motor
133 Stapler M Stapler Motor: Unit 2
134 Folder Plate M Folder Plate Motor
135 Feed Out Belt M Feed Out Belt Motor
136 Paper Punch Motor Paper Punch Motor
137 Z-Folding Z-Fold Jam

7504 Paper Jam Loc Paper Jam Locations - 3000-Sheet Finisher B706
141 Entrance Sn Entrance Sensor
142 Proof Tray Exit Sn Proof Tray Exit Sn
143 Shift Exit Sn Shift Exit Sn
145 Feed Out Feed Out
148 Upper Trans M Upper Transport Motor
150 Jogger Fence Motor Jogger Fence Motor
153 Stapling Motor Stapling Motor
155 Feed Out Belt Motor Feed Out Belt Motor
157 Bad PC Command Command from PC Incorrect
Rev. 05/2007
B132/B200 5-148 SM

7504 Paper Jam Loc Paper Jam Locations - Mail Box B762
161 Vert Trans Sn 1 Vertical Transport Sensor 1

7504 Paper Jam Loc Paper Jam Locations - B704 Cover Interposer
166 Paper Feed Sn Paper Feed Sensor
167 Vert Transport Path Vertical Transport Path
168 BotPlt Pos Sn Bottom Plate Position Sensor

7504 Paper Jam Loc Paper Jam Locations - 3000-Sheet Finisher B701
171 Entrance Trans Entrance Sensor
172 Proof Tray Exit Sn Proof Tray Exit Sn
173 Shift Exit Sn Shift Exit Sensor
174 Stapler Exit Sn Stapler Exit Sensor
175 Belt Feed Out Belt Feed Out
176 Corner Staple Corner Stapling

7504 Paper Jam Loc Paper Jam Locations 3000-Sheet Finisher B700
191 Entrance Sn Entrance Sensor
193 Shift Exit Sn Shift Exit Sensor
195 Belt Feed Out Belt Feed Out
Rev. 05/2007
SM 5-149 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

196 Corner Staple Corner Stapling
197 Saddle Stapling Saddle Stapling

7504 Paper Jam Loc Paper Jam Locations Z-Folding Unit B660 (Japan Only)
211 Paper Feed:Late Paper Feed Sensor: Late
212 Paper Feed:Lag Paper Feed Sensor: Lag
213 Fold Timing Sn:Late Fold Timing Sensor: Late
214 Fold Timing Sn:Lag Fold Timing Sensor: Lag
215 Lead Edge Sn:Late Leading Edge Sensoor:Late
216 Lead Edge Sn:Lag Leading Edge Sensor:Lag
217 Up Stopper Sn:Late Upper Stopper Path Sensor:Late
218 Up Stopper Sn:Lag Upper Stopper Path Sensor:Lag
219 Lower Ex Sn:Late Lower Exit Sensor:Late
220 Lower Ex Sn1:Lag Lower Exit Sensor:Lag
223 Up Ex Sn:Late Upper Exit Sensor:Late
224 Up Ex Sn:Lag Upper Exit Sensor:Lag
225 Paper Fold M Paper Fold Motor
226 Lower Stopper M Lower Stopper Motor Lock
227 Upper Stopper M Upper Stopper Motor Lock

7504 Paper Jam Loc Paper Jam Location All Finishers
230 Fin:No Ex Response Finisher:No Exit Response

7505 Original Jam Det Original Jam Detection ARDF B652
001 At Power On At Power On
003 Separation Sn:Late Separation Sensor:Late
004 Skew Cor Sn:Late Skew Correction Sensor:Late
005 Interval Sn:Late Interval Sensor:Late
Rev. 05/2007
B132/B200 5-150 SM
006 Reg Sn:Late Registration Sensor:Late
007 Exit Sn:Late Exit Sensor:Late
008 Inv Switch Sn:Late Inverter Switchback Sensor:Late
009 Low Inv Sn:Late Lower Inverter Sensor:Late
053 Separation Sn:Lag SeparationsSensor:Lag
054 Skew Cor Sn:Lag Skew Correction Sensor:Lag
055 Interval Sn:Lag Interval Sensor:Lag
056 Reg Sn:Lag Registration Sensor:Lag
057 Exit Sn:Lag Exit Sensor:Lag
058 Inv Switch Sn:Lag Inverter Switchback Sensor:Lag
059 Low Inv Sn:Lag Lower Inverter Sensor:Lag

7506 Jam Count by Paper Size
Displays the total number of jams by paper size.
005 A4 LEF
006 A5 LEF
014 B5 LEF
038 LT LEF
044 HLT LEF
132 A3
133 A4 SEF
134 A5 SEF
141 B4 SEF
142 B5 SEF
160 DLT SEF
164 LG SEF
166 LT SEF
172 HLT SEF
255 Others
Displays the total number of jams by paper size.

7507 Plotter Jam History
001 Latest
002 Latest 1
003 Latest 2
004 Latest 3
005 Latest 4
006 Latest 5
007 Latest 6
008 Latest 7
009 Latest 8
010 Latest 9
Displays the following items for the last 10 copy paper jams: 1) Jam
code, 2) Paper size, 3) Total count when jam occurred, 4) Date of
jam.
The jam codes are listed in the SMC report under SP7504.

Rev. 05/2007
SM 5-151 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

7508 Original Jam History
001 Original Latest
002 Latest 1
003 Latest 2
004 Latest 3
005 Latest 4
006 Latest 5
007 Latest 6
008 Latest 7
009 Latest 8
010 Latest 9
Displays the following items for the Latest 10 original jams: 1)
Jam code, 2) Paper size, 3) Total count when jam occurred,
4) Date of jam.
The jam codes are listed in the SMC report under SP7504.

7617 Parts PM Counter Display
001 Normal Japan Only
002 DF Japan Only

7618 PM Parts Counter Reset Japan Only
001 Normal Push [Execute] to clear the parts replacement alarm counter for the
main machine.
002 DF Push [Execute] to clear the parts replacement alarm counter for the
ADF.

7801 ROM Ver ROM Version Numbers
Displays the ROM version numbers of the main machine and connected
peripheral devices.

7803 PM Counter Display Displays the PM count since the last PM.

7804 PM Counter Reset Resets the PM count.

7807 SC/Jam Counter Reset Push [Start] to reset the SC and jam counters.

7826 MF Error Counter Japan Only
Displays the number of counts requested of the card/key counter.
001 Error Total A request for the count total failed at power on. This error
will occur if the device is installed but disconnected.
002 Error Staple The request for a staple count failed at power on. This error
will occur if the device is installed but disconnected.

7827 MF Error Counter Clear
Press Execute to reset to 0 the values of SP7826. Japan Only

Rev. 5/2007
B132/B200 5-152 SM

Self-Diagnostic Report Details 7832
Push [#] to display a list of error codes. Nothing is displayed if no errors have
occurred.

7834 Coverage Clear
001 Total Average
002 Toner
003 Sheets & Toner
004 Dot:0%-100%
255 All Counts

7835 ACC Counter
001 Copy ACC
002 Printer ACC

7836 Total Memory Size
Displays the contents of the memory on the controller board.

7852 ADF Scan Glass ADF Scan Glass
Displays the count for the number of times the machine has detected dust on the
ARDF scanning glass at the beginning of copy jobs. This SP operates only after
SP4020 001 has been turned on.
001 Dust Counter
002 Clear Counter

7901 Assert Info. . DFU
001 Filename
002 Line No.
003 Value
Used for debugging.

7931 Toner Info:K Toner Information: Black
7932 Toner Info:M Toner Information: Magenta
7933 Toner Info:C Toner Information: Cyan
7934 Toner Info:Y Toner Information: Yellow
Displays detailed information about the toner used in the machine.
001 Model ID
002 Cartridge Ver
003 Brand ID
004 Area ID
005 Production ID
006 Color ID
007 Maintenance ID
008 New
009 Recycle Count
010 Product Date
011 Serial No
012 EDP Code
Rev. 5/2007
SM 5-153 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

013 Toner Remaining
014 Toner End
015 Toner Refill
020 Total Count Start
021 Color Count:Start
022 Total Count End
023 Color Count:End
050 Set Date
051 End Date

7935 MotdrvtimeDisp Motor Drive Time Display
These SPs display the total drive times for each of motor listed below. The 8-digit
display shows the total in minutes.
001 OPCMot:K
002 OPCMot:M
003 OPCMot:C
004 OPCMot:Y
Drum Motors
005 DrvMot:K
006 DrvMot:M
007 DrvMot:C
008 DrvMot:Y
PCU motor (drives all components of PCU other than the drum)
009 Image Trans Mot ITB Motor
010 Paper Trans Mot Paper Feed Motor
011 Fusing Exit Mot Fusing Exit Motor

7936 TtldrvtimeDisp Total Drive Time Display
This SP displays the total drive time of the K drum motor before the last reset.

7937 MotdrvtimeRst Motor Drive Time Reset
These SPs allow you to reset (to zero) the total drive time for each motor listed
below.
001 OPCMot:K
002 OPCMot:M
003 OPCMot:C
004 OPCMot:Y
Drum Motors
005 DrvMot:K
006 DrvMot:M
007 DrvMot:C
008 DrvMot:Y
PCU motor (drives all components of PCU other than the drum)
009 Image Trans Mot ITB Motor
010 Paper Trans Mot Paper Feed Motor
011 Fusing Exit Mot Fusing Exit Motor

7999 Engine Debug Log Switch DFU
Used for design and testing.

Rev. 5/2007
B132/B200 5-154 SM

Group 8000
Group 8 is a new section of the SP Service Table. These new SP counters are
provided for MFP, LP, and Wide Format machines after May 2003 that employ GW
Architecture.
These new SP codes have been created in response to requests by customers,
sales personnel and customer engineers, and R&D staff for a standardized set of
counters that can be used to log more detailed information about machine
operation.
These new SPs are absolutely essential to provide more detailed counters and job
logs to match similar features that are being developed by Ricoh competitors.
Current Status of the SP8xxx Counters
Many of these counters are provided for features that are currently not available,
such as sending color faxes, and so on. However, here are some Group 8 codes
that when used in combination with others, can provide useful information.
SP Numbers What They Do
SP8 211~SP8 216 The number of pages scanned to the document server.
SP8 401~SP8 406 The number of pages printed from the document server
SP8 691~SP8 696 The number of pages sent from the document server
Specifically, the following questions can be answered:
How is the document server actually being used?
What application is using the document server most frequently?
What data in the document server is being reused?

Group 8 Service Table Keys
Many of the SPs in this group are prefixed with a letter that indicates the mode of
operation (the mode of operation is referred to as an application). Before reading
the Group 8 Service Table, make sure that you understand what these prefixes
mean.

PREFIXES WHAT IT MEANS
T: Total: (Grand Total). Grand total of the items counted for all
applications (C, F, P, etc.)..
C: Copy application.
P: Print application.
S: Scan application.
Totals (pages, jobs, etc.) executed for each
application when the job was not stored on the
document server.
Rev. 5/2007
SM 5-155 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

L: Local storage
(document server)
Totals (jobs, pages, etc.) for the document
server. The L: counters work differently case by
case. Sometimes, they count jobs/pages stored
on the document server; this can be in
document server mode (from the document
server window), or from another mode, such as
from a printer driver or by pressing the Store
File button in the Copy mode window.
Sometimes, they include occasions when the
user uses a file that is already on the document
server. Each counter will be discussed case by
case.
O: Other applications
(external network
applications, for
example)
Refers to network applications such as Web
Image Monitor. Utilities developed with the SDK
(Software Development Kit) will also be counted
with this group in the future.

The Group 8 SP codes are limited to 17 characters, forced by the necessity of
displaying them on the small LCDs of printers and faxes that also use these SPs.
Read over the list of abbreviations below and refer to it again if you see the name
of an SP that you do not understand.
ABBREVIATION WHAT IT MEANS
/ By, e.g. T:Jobs/Apl = Total Jobs by Application
> More (2> 2 or more, 4> 4 or more
AddBook Address Book
Apl Application
B/W Black & White
Bk Black
C Cyan
ColCr Color Create
ColMode Color Mode
Comb Combine
Comp Compression
Deliv Delivery
DesApl Designated Application. The application (Copy, Fax, Scan,
Print) used to store the job on the document server, for
example.
Dev Counter Development Count, no. of pages developed.
Dup, Duplex Duplex, printing on both sides
Emul Emulation
FC Full Color
FIN Post-print processing, i.e. finishing (punching, stapling, etc.)
Full Bleed No Margins
GenCopy Generation Copy Mode
GPC Get Print Counter. For jobs 10 pages or less, this counter
does not count up. For jobs larger than 10 pages, this
counter counts up by the number that is in excess of 10
(e.g., for an 11-page job, the counter counts up 11-10 =1)
IFax Internet Fax
ImgEdt Image Edit performed on the original with the copier GUI,
e.g. border removal, adding stamps, page numbers, etc.
K Black (YMCK)
Rev. 5/2007
B132/B200 5-156 SM
ABBREVIATION WHAT IT MEANS
LS Local Storage. Refers to the document server.
LSize Large (paper) Size
Mag Magnification
MC One color (monochrome)
NRS New Remote Service, which allows a service center to
monitor machines remotely. NRS is used overseas, CSS
is used in Japan.
Org Original for scanning
OrgJam Original Jam
Palm 2 Print Job Manager/Desk Top Editor: A pair of utilities that
allows print jobs to be distributed evenly among the printers
on the network, and allows files to moved around,
combined, and converted to different formats.
PC Personal Computer
PGS Pages. A page is the total scanned surface of the original.
Duplex pages count as two pages, and A3 simplex count as
two pages if the A3/DLT counter SP is switched ON.
PJob Print Jobs
Ppr Paper
PrtJam Printer (plotter) Jam
PrtPGS Print Pages
R Red (Toner Remaining). Applies to the wide format model
A2 only. This machine is under development and currently
not available.
Rez Resolution
SC Service Code (Error SC code displayed)
Scn Scan
Sim, Simplex Simplex, printing on 1 side.
S-to-Email Scan-to-E-mail
SMC SMC report printed with SP5990. All of the Group 8
counters are recorded in the SMC report.
Svr Server
TonEnd Toner End
TonSave Toner Save
TXJob Send, Transmission
YMC Yellow, Magenta, Cyan
YMCK Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, BlacK

NOTE: All of the Group 8 SPs are reset with SP5801 1 Memory All Clear, or the
Counter Reset SP7808.

SP8-xxx: Data Log2

8 001 T:Total Jobs
8 002 C:Total Jobs
8 004 P:Total Jobs
8 005 S:Total Jobs
8 006 L:Total Jobs
These SPs count the number of times each
application is used to do a job.
[0~9999999/ 1]
Note: The L: counter is the total number of
times the other applications are used to send a
job to the document server, plus the number of
times a file already on the document server is
used.
Rev. 5/2007
SM 5-157 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

These SPs reveal the number of times an application is used, not the number of
pages processed.
When an application is opened for image input or output, this counts as one job.
Interrupted jobs (paper jams, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
Only jobs executed by the customer are counted. Jobs executed by the customer
engineer using the SP modes are not counted.
When using secure printing (when a password is required to start the print job),
the job is counted at the time when either Delete Data or Specify Output is
specified.
When a copy job on the document server is printed, SP8022 also increments,
and when a print job stored on the document server is printed, SP8024 also
increments.
When an original is both copied and stored on the document server, the C: and
L: counters both increment.
When a print job is stored on the document server, only the L: counter
increments.
When the user presses the Document Server button to store the job on the
document server, only the L: counter increments.
When the user enters document server mode and prints data stored on the
document server, only the L: counter increments.
When an image received from Palm 2 is received and stored, the L: counter
increments.

8 011 T:Jobs/LS
8 012 C:Jobs/LS
8 014 P:Jobs/LS
8 015 S:Jobs/LS
8 016 L:Jobs/LS
8 017 O:Jobs/LS
These SPs count the number of jobs stored to
the document server by each application, to
reveal how local storage is being used for input.
[0~9999999/ 1]
The L: counter counts the number of jobs
stored from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel.

When a scan job is sent to the document server, the S: counter increments.
When you enter document server mode and then scan an original, the L: counter
increments.
When a print job is sent to the document server, the P: counter increments.
When a network application sends data to the document server, the O: counter
increments.
When an image from Palm 2 is stored on the document server, the O: counter
increments.

8 021 T:Pjob/LS
8 022 C:Pjob/LS
8 024 P:Pjob/LS
8 025 S:Pjob/LS
8 026 L:Pjob/LS
8 027 O:Pjob/LS
These SPs reveal how files printed from the
document server were stored on the document
server originally.
[0~9999999/ 1]
stored from within the document server mode
Rev. 5/2007
B132/B200 5-158 SM

When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with another
application, the C: counter increments.
When an application like DeskTopBinder merges a copy job that was stored on
the document server with a print job that was stored on the document server, the
C: and P: counters both increment.
When a job already on the document server is printed with another application,
the L: counter increments.
When a scanner job stored on the document server is printed with another
application, the S: counter increments. If the original was scanned from within
document server mode, then the L: counter increments.
When images stored on the document server by a network application (including
Palm 2), are printed with another application, the O: counter increments.
When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with a network
application (Web Image Monitor, for example), the C: counter increments.

8 031 T:Pjob/DesApl
8 032 C:Pjob/DesApl
8 034 P:Pjob/DesApl
8 035 S:Pjob/DesApl
8 036 L:Pjob/DesApl
8 037 O:Pjob/DesApl
These SPs reveal what applications were used
to output documents from the document server.
[0~9999999/ 1]
printed from within the document server mode

When documents already stored on the document server are printed, the count
for the application that started the print job is incremented.
When the print job is started from a network application (Desk Top Binder, Web
Image Monitor, etc.) the L: counter increments.

8 041 T:TX Jobs/LS
8 042 C:TX Jobs/LS
8 044 P:TX Jobs/LS
8 045 S:TX Jobs/LS
8 046 L:TX Jobs/LS
8 047 O:TX Jobs/LS
These SPs count the applications that
stored files on the document server that
were later accessed for transmission over
the telephone line or over a network
(attached to an e-mail).
[0~9999999/ 1]
Note: Jobs merged for sending are
counted separately.
scanned from within the document server
mode screen at the operation panel.

When a stored copy job is sent from the document server, the C: counter
increments.
When images stored on the document server by a network application or Palm2
are sent as an e-mail, the O: counter increments.

8 051 T:TX Jobs/DesApl
8 052 C:TX Jobs/DesApl
These SPs count the applications used to
send files from the document server over
Rev. 5/2007
SM 5-159 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

8 054 P:TX Jobs/DesApl
8 055 S:TX Jobs/DesApl
8 056 L:TX Jobs/DesApl
8 057 O:TX Jobs/DesApl
the telephone line or over a network
(attached to an e-mail.
[0~9999999/ 1]
sent from within the document server mode

If the send is started from Desk Top Binder or Web Image Monitor, for example,
then the O: counter increments.

T:FIN Jobs [0~9999999/ 1] 8 061
These SPs total the finishing methods. The finishing method is
specified by the application.
C:FIN Jobs [0~9999999/ 1] 8 062
These SPs total finishing methods for copy jobs only. The finishing
method is specified by the application.
P:FIN Jobs [0~9999999/ 1] 8 064
These SPs total finishing methods for print jobs only. The finishing
S:FIN Jobs [0~9999999/ 1] 8 065
These SPs total finishing methods for scan jobs only. The finishing
Note: Finishing features for scan jobs are not available at this time.
L:FIN Jobs [0~9999999/ 1] 8 066
These SPs total finishing methods for jobs output from within the
document server mode screen at the operation panel. The finishing
method is specified from the print window within document server
mode.
O:FIN Jobs [0~9999999/ 1] 8 067
These SPs total finishing methods for jobs executed by an external
application, over the network. The finishing method is specified by
the application.
8 06x 1 Sort Number of jobs started in Sort mode. When a stored
copy job is set for Sort and then stored on the document
server, the L: counter increments. (See SP8 066 1)
8 06x 2 Stack Number of jobs started out of Sort mode.
8 06x 3 Staple Number of jobs started in Staple mode.
8 06x 4 Booklet Number of jobs started in Booklet mode. If the machine
is in staple mode, the Staple counter also increments.
8 06x 5 Z-Fold Number of jobs started In any mode other than the
Booklet mode and set for folding (Z-fold).
8 06x 6 Punch Number of jobs started in Punch mode. When Punch is
set for a print job, the P: counter increments. (See SP8
064 6.)
8 06x 7 Other Reserved. Not used.

Rev. 5/2007
B132/B200 5-160 SM

T:Jobs/PGS [0~9999999/ 1] 8 071
These SPs count the number of jobs broken down by the number of
pages in the job, regardless of which application was used.
C:Jobs/PGS [0~9999999/ 1] 8 072
These SPs count and calculate the number of copy jobs by size
based on the number of pages in the job.
P:Jobs/PGS [0~9999999/ 1] 8 074
These SPs count and calculate the number of print jobs by size
S:Jobs/PGS [0~9999999/ 1] 8 075
These SPs count and calculate the number of scan jobs by size
L:Jobs/PGS [0~9999999/ 1] 8 076
These SPs count and calculate the number of jobs printed from
within the document server mode window at the operation panel, by
the number of pages in the job.
O:Jobs/PGS [0~9999999/ 1] 8 077
These SPs count and calculate the number of Other application
jobs (Web Image Monitor, Palm 2, etc.) by size based on the
number of pages in the job.
8 07x 1 1 Page 8 07x 8 21~50 Pages
8 07x 2 2 Pages 8 07x 9 51~100 Pages
8 07x 3 3 Pages 8 07x 10 101~300 Pages
8 07x 4 4 Pages 8 07x 11 301~500 Pages
8 07x 5 5 Pages 8 07x 12 501~700 Pages
8 07x 6 6~10 Pages 8 07x 13 701~1000 Pages
8 07x 7 11~20 Pages 8 07x 14 1001~ Pages

For example: When a copy job stored on the document server is printed in
document server mode, the appropriate L: counter (SP8076 0xx) increments.
Interrupted jobs (paper jam, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
If a job is paused and re-started, it counts as one job.
If the finisher runs out of staples during a print and staple job, then the job is
counted at the time the error occurs.
For copy jobs (SP 8072) and scan jobs (SP 8075), the total is calculated by
multiplying the number of sets of copies by the number of pages scanned. (One
duplex page counts as 2.)
The first test print and subsequent test prints to adjust settings are added to the
number of pages of the copy job (SP 8072).
When printing the first page of a job from within the document server screen, the
page is counted.

T:S-to-Email Jobs [0~9999999/ 1] 8 131
These SPs count the total number of jobs scanned and attached to
an e-mail, regardless of whether the document server was used or
not.
8 131 1 B/W Count for the number of jobs with black-and-white.
Rev. 5/2007
SM 5-161 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

8 131 2 Color Count for the number of jobs with color.
8 131 3 ACS Count for the number of jobs using ACS mode.
S:S-to-Email Jobs 8 135
These SPs count the number of jobs scanned and attached to an e-
mail, without storing the original on the document server.

These counters count jobs, not pages.
If the job is stored on the document server, after the job is stored it is determined
to be color or black-and-white then counted.
If the job is cancelled during scanning, or if the job is cancelled while the
document is waiting to be sent, the job is not counted.
If the job is cancelled during sending, it may or may not be counted, depending
on what stage of the process had been reached when the job was cancelled.
If several jobs are combined for sending to the Scan Router, Scan-to-Email, or
Scan-to-PC, or if one job is sent to more than one destination. each send is
counted separately. For example, if the same document is sent by Scan-to-Email
as well as Scan-to-PC, then it is counted twice (once for Scan-to-Email and once
for Scan-to-PC).

T:Deliv Jobs/Svr [0~9999999/ 1] 8 141
These SPs count the total number of jobs scanned and sent to a
Scan Router server.
S:Deliv Jobs/Svr 8 145
These SPs count the number of jobs scanned in scanner mode and
sent to a Scan Router server.
The jobs are counted even though the arrival and reception of the jobs at the
Scan Router server cannot be confirmed.
If even one color image is mixed with black-and-white images, then the job is
counted as a Color job.
If the job is cancelled during scanning, or if the job is cancelled while the
document is waiting to be delivered, the job is not counted.
Even if several files are combined for sending, the transmission counts as one
job.
Rev. 5/2007
B132/B200 5-162 SM

T:Deliv Jobs/PC [0~9999999/ 1] 8 151
These SPs count the total number of jobs scanned and sent to a
folder on a PC (Scan-to-PC).
Note: At the present time, 8 151 and 8 155 perform identical
counts.
S:Deliv Jobs/PC 8 155
These SPs count the total number of jobs scanned and sent with
Scan-to-PC.
If the job is cancelled during scanning, it is not counted.
If the job is cancelled while it is waiting to be sent, the job is not counted.
Even if several files are combined for sending, the transmission counts as one
job.

8 191 T:Total Scan PGS
8 192 C:Total Scan PGS
8 195 S:Total Scan PGS
8 196 L:Total Scan PGS
These SPs count the pages scanned by
each application that uses the scanner to
scan images.
[0~9999999/ 1]

SP 8 191 to 8 196 count the number of scanned sides of pages, not the number
of physical pages.
These counters do not count reading user stamp data, or reading color charts to
adjust color.
Previews done with a scanner driver are not counted.
A count is done only after all images of a job have been scanned.
Scans made in SP mode are not counted.
Examples
If 3 B5 pages and 1 A3 page are scanned with the scanner application but not
stored, the S: count is 4.
If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server using
the Store File button in the Copy mode window, the C: count is 6 and the L:
count is 6.
If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied but not stored, the C: count is 6.
If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages, the L: count is 6.
Rev. 5/2007
SM 5-163 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

T:LSize Scan PGS [0~9999999/ 1] 8 201
These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the
scanner for scan and copy jobs.
Note: These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the
User Tools display.
S:LSize Scan PGS [0~9999999/ 1] 8 205
These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the
scanner for scan jobs only
Note: These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the
User Tools display..
8 20x 1 A3/DLT, Larger Counts A3/DLT and larger pages.
8 20x 2 A2, Larger Counts A2 and larger pages.

8 211 T:Scan PGS/LS
8 212 C:Scan PGS/LS
8 215 S:Scan PGS/LS
8 216 L:Scan PGS/LS
These SPs count the number of pages
scanned into the document server .
[0~9999999/ 1]
The L: counter counts the number of pages
stored from within the document server
mode screen at the operation panel, and
with the Store File button from within the
Copy mode screen

Reading user stamp data is not counted.
If a job is cancelled, the pages output as far as the cancellation are counted.
If the scanner application scans and stores 3 B5 sheets and 1 A4 sheet, the S:
count is 4.
If pages are copied but not stored on the document server, these counters do not
change.
If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server, the C:
count is 6 and the L: count is 6.
If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages, the L: count is 6.
B132/B200 5-164 SM

ADF Org Feeds [0~9999999/ 1] 8 221
These SPs count the number of pages fed through the ADF for
front and back side scanning.
8 221 1 Front Number of front sides fed for scanning:
With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously,
the Front side count is the same as the number of pages
fed for either simplex or duplex scanning.
With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously,
the Front side count is the same as the number of pages
fed for duplex front side scanning. (The front side is
determined by which side the user loads face up.)
8 221 2 Back Number of rear sides fed for scanning:
With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously,
the Back count is the same as the number of pages fed
for duplex scanning.
With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously,
the Back count is the same as the number of pages fed
for duplex rear-side scanning.

When 1 sheet is fed for duplex scanning the Front count is 1 and the Back count
is 1.
If a jam occurs during the job, recovery processing is not counted to avoid double
counting. Also, the pages are not counted if the jam occurs before the first sheet
is output.

Scan PGS/Mode [0~9999999/ 1] 8 231
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by each ADF mode
to determine the work load on the ADF.
8 231 1 Large Volume Selectable. Large copy jobs that cannot be
loaded in the ADF at one time.
8 231 2 SADF Selectable. Feeding pages one by one
through the ADF.
8 231 3 Mixed Size Selectable. Select Mixed Sizes on the
operation panel.
8 231 4 Custom Size Selectable. Originals of non-standard size.
8 231 5 Platen Book mode. Raising the ADF and placing the
original directly on the platen.

If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switches
from ADF to Platen mode, the count is done for the last selected mode.
If the user selects Mixed Sizes for copying in the platen mode, the Mixed Size
count is enabled.
In the SADF mode if the user copies 1 page in platen mode and then copies 2
pages with SADF, the Platen count is 1 and the SADF count is 3.
SM 5-165 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

T:Scan PGS/Org [0~9999999/ 1] 8 241
These SPs count the total number of scanned pages by original type
for all jobs, regardless of which application was used.
C:Scan PGS/Org [0~9999999/ 1] 8 242
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for
Copy jobs.
S:Scan PGS/Org [0~9999999/ 1] 8 245
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for
Scan jobs.
L:Scan PGS/Org [0~9999999/ 1] 8 246
These SPs count the number of pages scanned and stored from
within the document server mode screen at the operation panel, and
with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen
8 241 8 242 8 245 8 246
8 24x 1: Text Yes Yes Yes Yes
8 24x 2: Text/Photo Yes Yes Yes Yes
8 24x 3: Photo Yes Yes Yes Yes
8 24x 4: GenCopy, Pale Yes Yes Yes Yes
8 24x 5: Map Yes Yes Yes Yes
8 24x 6: Normal/Detail Yes No No No
8 24x 7: Fine/Super Fine Yes No No No
8 24x 8: Binary Yes No Yes No
8 24x 9: Grayscale Yes No Yes No
8 24x 10: Color Yes No Yes No

If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switches
from ADF to Platen mode, the count is done for the last selected mode.

B132/B200 5-166 SM

8 251 T:Scan PGS/ImgEdt
8 252 C:Scan PGS/ImgEdt
8 254 P:Scan PGS/ImgEdt
8 256 L:Scan PGS/ImgEdt
8 257 O:Scan PGS/ImgEdt
These SPs show how many times Image
Edit features have been selected at the
operation panel for each application. Some
examples of these editing features are:
Erase> Border
Erase> Center
Image Repeat
Centering
Positive/Negative
[0~9999999/ 1]
Note: The count totals the number of times
the edit features have been used. A
detailed breakdown of exactly which
features have been used is not given.

The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel, and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen.

T:Scn PGS/ColCr [0~9999999/ 1] 8 261
These SPs count the total number of scanned pages by the color
processing mode used.
8 261 1 Color Conversion
8 261 2 Color Erase
8 261 3 Background
8 261 4 Other
C:Scn PGS/ColCr [0~9999999/ 1] 8 262
These SPs count the number of pages by the color processing
mode used for Copy jobs only.
8 262 1 Color Conversion
8 262 2 Color Erase
8 262 3 Background
8 262 4 Other

These counters are enabled only for MFP machines that support color. The wide
format machines do not support the Background or Other counters.

8 281 T:Scan PGS/TWAIN
8 285 S:Scan PGS/TWAIN
scanned using a TWAIN driver. These
counters reveal how the TWAIN driver is
used for delivery functions.
[0~9999999/ 1]
Note: At the present time, these counters
perform identical counts.

SM 5-167 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

8 291 T:Scan PGS/Stamp These SPs count the number of pages
stamped with the stamp in the ADF unit.
[0~9999999/ 1]
mode screen at the operation panel, and
with the Store File button from within the
Copy mode screen

8 295 S:Scan PGS/Stamp
8 296 L:Scan PGS/Stamp

T:Scan PGS/Size [0~9999999/ 1] 8 301
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by all
applications. Use these totals to compare original page size
(scanning) and output (printing) page size [SP 8-441].
C:Scan PGS/Size [0~9999999/ 1] 8 302
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the
Copy application. Use these totals to compare original page size
(scanning) and output (printing) page size [SP 8-442].
S:Scan PGS/Size [0~9999999/ 1] 8 305
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the
Scan application. Use these totals to compare original page size
(scanning) and output page size [SP 8-445].
L:Scan PGS/Size [0~9999999/ 1] 8 306
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned and
stored from within the document server mode screen at the
operation panel, and with the Store File button from within the Copy
mode screen. Use these totals to compare original page size
(scanning) and output page size [SP 8-446].
8 30x 1 A3
8 30x 2 A4
8 30x 3 A5
8 30x 4 B4
8 30x 5 B5
8 30x 6 DLT
8 30x 7 LG
8 30x 8 LT
8 30x 9 HLT
8 30x 10 Full Bleed

8 30x 100 A2 Not supported for this printer.
8 30x 101 B3 Not supported for this printer.
8 30x 254 Other (Standard)
8 30x 255 Other (Custom)

B132/B200 5-168 SM

T:Scan PGS/Rez [0~9999999/ 1] 8 311
These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages
scanned by applications that can specify resolution settings.
S:Scan PGS/Rez [0~9999999/ 1] 8 315
These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages
scanned by applications that can specify resolution settings.
Note: At the present time, 8 311 and 8 315 perform identical counts.
8 31x 1 1200dpi ~
8 31x 2 600dpi~1199dpi
8 31x 3 400dpi~599dpi
8 31x 4 200dpi~399dpi
8 31x 5 ~199dpi

Copy resolution settings are fixed so they are not counted.
The Fax application does not allow finely-adjusted resolution settings so no count
is done for the Fax application.

8 381 T:Total PrtPGS
8 382 C:Total PrtPGS
8 384 P:Total PrtPGS
8 385 S:Total PrtPGS
8 386 L:Total PrtPGS
8 387 O:Total PrtPGS
printed by the customer. The counter for
the application used for storing the pages
increments.
[0~9999999/ 1]
mode screen at the operation panel. Pages
stored with the Store File button from
within the Copy mode screen go to the C:
counter.

When the A3/DLT double count function is switched on with SP5104, 1 A3/DLT
page is counted as 2.
When several documents are merged for a print job, the number of pages stored
are counted for the application that stored them.
These counters are used primarily to calculate charges on use of the machine,
so the following pages are not counted as printed pages:
Blank pages in a duplex printing job.
Blank pages inserted as document covers, chapter title sheets, and slip
sheets.
Reports printed to confirm counts.
All reports done in the service mode (service summaries, engine
maintenance reports, etc.)
Test prints for machine image adjustment.
Error notification reports.
Partially printed pages as the result of a copier jam.
SM 5-169 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

LSize PrtPGS [0~9999999/ 1] 8 391
These SPs count pages printed on paper sizes A3/DLT and larger.
Note: In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these
counters are also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy
machine.
8 391 1 A3/DLT, Larger
8 391 2 A2, Larger Not supported with this printer.

8 401 T:PrtPGS/LS
8 402 C:PrtPGS/LS
8 404 P:PrtPGS/LS
8 405 S:PrtPGS/LS
8 406 L:PrtPGS/LS
printed from the document server. The
counter for the application used to print the
pages is incremented.
mode screen at the operation panel.
[0~9999999/ 1]

Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the
L: count.

8 411 Prints/Duplex This SP counts the amount of paper (front/back
counted as 1 page) used for duplex printing. Last
pages printed only on one side are not counted.
[0~9999999/ 1]

B132/B200 5-170 SM

T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb [0~9999999/ 1] 8 421
These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number
of pages processed for printing. This is the total for all applications.
C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb [0~9999999/ 1] 8 422
of pages processed for printing by the copier application.
P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb [0~9999999/ 1] 8 424
of pages processed for printing by the printer application.
S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb [0~9999999/ 1] 8 425
of pages processed for printing by the scanner application.
L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb [0~9999999/ 1] 8 426
of pages processed for printing from within the document server mode
window at the operation panel.
O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb [0~9999999/ 1] 8 427
of pages processed for printing by Other applications
8 42x 1 Simplex> Duplex
8 42x 2 Duplex> Duplex
8 42x 3 Book> Duplex
8 42x 4 Simplex Combine
8 42x 5 Duplex Combine
8 42x 6 2> 2 pages on 1 side (2-Up)
8 42x 10 9> 9 pages on 1 side (9-Up)
8 42x 11 16> 16 pages on 1 side (16-Up)
8 42x 12 Booklet
8 42x 13 Magazine
These counts (SP8 421 to SP8 427) are especially useful for customers who
need to improve their compliance with ISO standards for the reduction of paper
consumption.
Pages that are only partially printed with the n-Up functions are counted as 1
page.
Here is a summary of how the counters work for Booklet and Magazine modes:
Booklet Magazine
Original
Pages
Count Original
Pages
Count
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
3 2 3 2
4 2 4 2
5 3 5 4
6 4 6 4
7 4 7 4
8 4 8 4
SM 5-171 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

T:PrtPGS/ImgEdt [0~9999999/ 1] 8 431
These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three
features below, regardless of which application was used.
C:PrtPGS/ImgEdt [0~9999999/ 1] 8 432
features below with the copy application.
P:PrtPGS/ImgEdt [0~9999999/ 1] 8 434
features below with the print application.
L:PrtPGS/ImgEdt [0~9999999/ 1] 8 436
These SPs count the total number of pages output from within the
document server mode window t the operation panel with the three
features below.
O:PrtPGS/ImgEdt [0~9999999/ 1] 8 437
features below with Other applications.
8 43x 1 Cover/Slip Sheet Total number of covers or slip sheets inserted.
The count for a cover printed on both sides
counts 2.
8 43x 2 Series/Book The number of pages printed in series (one
side) or printed as a book with booklet right/left
pagination.
8 43x 3 User Stamp The number of pages printed where stamps
were applied, including page numbering and
date stamping.
B132/B200 5-172 SM

T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size [0~9999999/ 1] 8 441
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed
by all applications.
C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size [0~9999999/ 1] 8 442
by the copy application.
P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size [0~9999999/ 1] 8 444
by the printer application.
S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size [0~9999999/ 1] 8 445
by the scanner application.
L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size [0~9999999/ 1] 8 446
from within the document server mode window at the operation
panel.
O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size [0~9999999/ 1] 8 447
by Other applications.
8 44x 1 A3
8 44x 2 A4
8 44x 3 A5
8 44x 4 B4
8 44x 5 B5
8 44x 6 DLT
8 44x 7 LG
8 44x 8 LT
8 44x 9 HLT
8 44x 10 Full Bleed

8 44x 100 A2 Not supported with this printer.
8 44x 101 B3 Not supported with this printer.
8 44x 254 Other (Standard)
8 44x 255 Other (Custom)

These counters do not distinguish between LEF and SEF.
SM 5-173 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

PrtPGS/Ppr Tray [0~9999999/ 1] 8 451
These SPs count the number of sheets fed from each paper feed
station.
8 451 1 Bypass Bypass Tray
8 451 2 Tray 1 Copier
8 451 3 Tray 2 Copier
8 451 4 Tray 3 Paper Tray Unit (Option)
8 451 5 Tray 4 Paper Tray Unit (Option)
8 451 6 Tray 5 LCT (Option)
8 451 7 Tray 6 Currently not used.

T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type [0~9999999/ 1] 8 461
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by all
applications.
These counters are not the same as the PM counter. The PM
counter is based on feed timing to accurately measure the
service life of the feed rollers. However, these counts are based
on output timing.
Blank sheets (covers, chapter covers, slip sheets) are also
counted.
During duplex printing, pages printed on both sides count as 1,
and a page printed on one side counts as 1.
C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type [0~9999999/ 1] 8 462
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the
copy application.
P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type [0~9999999/ 1] 8 464
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the
printer application.
L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type [0~9999999/ 1] 8 466
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed from
within the document server mode window at the operation panel.
8 46x 1 Normal
8 46x 2 Recycled
8 46x 3 Special
8 46x 4 Thick
8 46x 5 Normal (Back)
8 46x 6 Thick (Back)
8 46x 7 OHP
8 46x 8 Other

B132/B200 5-174 SM

PrtPGS/Mag [0~9999999/ 1] 8 471
These SPs count by magnification rate the number of pages printed.
8 471 1 ~49%
8 471 2 50%~99%
8 471 3 100%
8 471 4 101%~200%
8 471 5 201% ~
Counts are done for magnification adjusted for pages, not only on the operation
panel but performed remotely with an external network application capable of
performing magnification adjustment as well.
Magnification adjustments done with printer drivers with PC applications such as
Excel are also counted.
Magnification adjustments done for adjustments after they have been stored on
the document server are not counted.
Magnification adjustments performed automatically during Auto Reduce/Enlarge
copying are counted.
The magnification rates of blank cover sheets, slip sheets, etc. are automatically
assigned a rate of 100%.

8 481 1 T:PrtPGS/TonSave
8 484 1 P:PrtPGS/TonSave
printed with the Toner Save feature
switched on.
Note: These SPs return the same results
as this SP is limited to the Print application.
[0~9999999/ 1]

SM 5-175 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

T:PrtPGS/Col Mode [0~9999999/ 1] 8 491
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages output
by the Copy, document server, and Fax applications.
C:PrtPGS/Col Mode [0~9999999/ 1] 8 492
These SPs count by color mode the total output by the Copy
application only
L:PrtPGS/Col Mode [0~9999999/ 1] 8 496
These SPs count by color mode the total output from within the
document server mode window at the operation panel.
8 496 1 B/W
8 496 2 Single Color Color MFP/2-color MFP machines only.
8 496 3 Two Color Color MFP/2-color MFP machines only.
8 496 4 Full Color Color MFP machines only

Notes for SP8 491 to SP8 496
These SPs apply to the Copy, document server, and Fax applications only. They
do not apply to the Print application.
When the ACS feature is used to select the color settings automatically, the
results of the ACS execute is used to increment the appropriate counter.
If a color stamp is selected for printing on a monochrome document, the count is
for B/W.
If the output is black and white even if color print mode was selected, the pages
count as Full Color.
The color mode selected for a document stored on the document server is
counted. (The color selection cannot be changed once the document is stored on
the document server.)

T:PrtPGS/Col Mode [0~9999999/ 1] 8 501
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages printed.
8 501 1 B/W
8 501 2 Single Color Color MFP and 2-Color MFP machines only.
8 501 3 Full Color Color MFP and Color LP machines only.
P:PrtPGS/Col Mode [0~9999999/ 1] 8 504
These SPs count by color mode the number of pages printed with
the Print application.
8 504 1 B/W
8 504 2 Single Color Color MFP and 2-Color MFP machines only.
8 504 3 Full Color Color MFP and Color LP machines only.

NOTE: At the present time, 8 501 and 8 504 perform identical counts, because
they are both limited to the Print application.

B132/B200 5-176 SM

T:PrtPGS/Emul [0~9999999/ 1] 8 511
These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of
pages printed.
P:PrtPGS/Emul [0~9999999/ 1] 8 514
These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of
pages printed.

8 514 1 RPCS
8 514 2 RPDL
8 514 3 PS3
8 514 4 R98
8 514 5 R16
8 514 6 GL/GL2
8 514 7 R55
8 514 8 RTIFF
8 514 9 PDF
8 514 10 PCL5e/5c
8 514 11 PCL XL
8 514 12 IPDL-C

8 514 13 BM-Links Japan Only
8 514 14 Other

SP8 511 and SP8 514 return the same results as they are both limited to the
Print application.
Print jobs output to the document server are not counted.
SM 5-177 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

T:PrtPGS/FIN [0~9999999/ 1] 8 521
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages
printed by all applications.
C:PrtPGS/FIN [0~9999999/ 1] 8 522
printed by the Copy application.
P:PrtPGS/FIN [0~9999999/ 1] 8 524
printed by the Print application.
S:PrtPGS/FIN [0~9999999/ 1] 8 525
printed by the Scanner application.
L:PrtPGS/FIN [0~9999999/ 1] 8 526
printed from within the document server mode window at the
operation panel.
8 52x 1 Sort
8 52x 2 Stack
8 52x 3 Staple
8 52x 4 Booklet
8 52x 5 Z-Fold
8 52x 6 Punch
8 52x 7 Other

Note:
If stapling is selected for finishing and the stack is too large for stapling, the
unstapled pages are still counted.
The counts for staple finishing are based on output to the staple tray, so jam
recoveries are counted.

8 531 1 Staples This SP counts the amount of staples used
by the machine.
[0~9999999/ 1]

B132/B200 5-178 SM

T:Counter [0~9999999/ 1] 8 581
These SPs count the total output broken down by color output,
regardless of the application used. In addition to being displayed in
the SMC Report, these counters are also displayed in the User
Tools display on the copy machine.
Note: These SPs are supported by color MFP and LP machines
only.
MFP Color LP Color Replaced:
8 581 1 Total Yes Yes SP73 1
8 581 2 Total: Full Color Yes Yes SP7003 020
8 581 3 B&W/Single Color Yes Yes SP7003 021
8 581 4 Development: CMY Yes Yes SP7003 10
8 581 5 Development: K Yes Yes SP7003 11
8 581 6 Copy: Color Yes No SP7003 026
8 581 7 Copy: B/W Yes No SP7003 027
8 581 8 Print: Color Yes Yes SP7003 028
8 581 9 Print: B/W Yes Yes SP7003 029
8 581 10 Total: Color Yes Yes SP7003 030
8 581 11 Total: B/W Yes Yes SP7003 023

C:Counter [0~9999999/ 1] 8 582
These SPs count the total output broken down by color output for
the Copy application only.
Note: These SPs are supported by color copy MFP machines only.
These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the User
Tools display on the copy machine.
MFP Color Replaced:
8 582 1 B/W Yes SP7003 2
8 582 2 Single Color Yes SP7003 12
8 582 003 Two Color Yes SP7003 13
8 582 4 Full Color Yes SP7003 4

P:Counter [0~9999999/ 1] 8 584
These SPs count the total output broken down by color output for
the Print application only. These counters are displayed in the SMC
Report, and in the User Tools display on the copy machine.
Note: These SPs are supported by color MFP and LP machines
only.
MFP Color LP Color Replaced:
8 584 1 B/W Yes Yes SP7003 7
8 584 2 Single Color Yes Yes ---
8 584 3 Full Color Yes Yes SP7003 8

SM 5-179 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

L:Counter [0~9999999/ 1] 8 586
These SPs count the total output broken down by color for output
from within the document server mode window at the operation
panel.These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the
User Tools display on the copy machine.
Note: These SPs are supported only by color copy MFP machines
only with the fax application installed.
MFP Color Replaced:
8 586 1 B/W Yes ---
8 586 2 Single Color Yes ---
8 586 3 Two Color Yes ---
8 586 4 Single Color Yes ---

O:Counter [0~9999999/ 1] 8 591
These SPs count the totals for A3/DLT paper use, number of
duplex pages printed, and the number of staples used. These totals
are for Other (O:) applications only.
8 591 1 A3/DLT
8 591 2 Duplex
8 591 3 Staple

T:S-to-Email PGS [0~9999999/ 1] 8 651
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached
to an e-mail for both the Scan and document server applications.
8 651 1 B/W
8 651 2 Color Supported by Color MFP machines only.
S:S-to-Email PGS [0~9999999/ 1] 8 655
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached
to an e-mail for the Scan application only.
8 655 1 B/W
Notes
The count for B/W and Color pages is done after the document is stored on the
HDD. If the job is cancelled before it is stored, the pages are not counted.
If Scan-to-Email is used to send a 10-page document to 5 addresses, the count
is 10 (the pages are sent to the same SMTP server together).
If Scan-to-PC is used to send a 10-page document to 5 folders, the count is 50
(the document is sent to each destination of the SMB/FTP server).
Due to restrictions on some devices, if Scan-to-Email is used to send a 10-page
document to a large number of destinations, the count may be divided and
counted separately. For example, if a 10-page document is sent to 200
addresses, the count is 10 for the first 100 destinations and the count is also 10
for the second 100 destinations, for a total of 20.).

B132/B200 5-180 SM

T:Deliv PGS/Svr [0~9999999/ 1] 8 661
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a
Scan Router server by both Scan and LS applications.
8 661 1 B/W
S:Deliv PGS/Svr [0~9999999/ 1] 8 665
Scan Router server by the Scan application.
8 665 1 B/W
L:Deliv PGS/Svr [0~9999999/ 1] 8 666
Scan Router server by LS applications.
8 666 1 B/W
Notes
The B/W and Color counts are done after the document is stored on the HDD of
the Scan Router server.
If the job is canceled before storage on the Scan Router server finishes, the
counts are not done.
The count is executed even if regardless of confirmation of the arrival at the Scan
Router server.

T:Deliv PGS/PC [0~9999999/ 1] 8 671
folder on a PC (Scan-to-PC) with the Scan and LS applications.
8 671 1 B/W
S:Deliv PGS/PC [0~9999999/ 1] 8 675
These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent with
Scan-to-PC with the Scan application.
8 675 1 B/W

SM 5-181 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

8 691 T:TX PGS/LS
8 692 C:TX PGS/LS
8 694 P:TX PGS/LS
8 695 S:TX PGS/LS
8 696 L:TX PGS/LS
sent from the document server. The
counter for the application that was used to
store the pages is incremented.
[0~9999999/ 1]
mode screen at the operation panel. Pages
stored with the Store File button from
within the Copy mode screen go to the C:
counter.
Notes
Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the
count.
If several documents are merged for sending, the number of pages stored are
counted for the application that stored them.

TX PGS/Port [0~9999999/ 1] 8 701
These SPs count the number of pages sent by the physical port
used to send them. For example, if a 3-page original is sent to 4
destinations via ISDN G4, the count for ISDN (G3, G4) is 12.
8 701 1 PSTN-1
8 701 2 PSTN-2
8 701 3 PSTN-3
8 701 4 ISDN (G3,G4)
8 701 5 Network

T:Scan PGS/Comp [0~9999999/ 1] 8 711
These SPs count the number of compressed pages scanned into the
document server, counted by the formats slisted below.
8 711 1 JPEG/JPEG2000
8 711 2 TIFF (Multi/Single)
8 711 3 PDF
8 711 4 Other

S:Scan PGS/Comp [0~9999999/ 1] 8 715
These SPs count the number of compressed pages scanned by the
scan application, counted by the formats slisted below.
8 715 1 JPEG/JPEG2000
8 715 2 TIFF (Multi/Single)
8 715 3 PDF
8 715 4 Other

B132/B200 5-182 SM

8 741 RX PGS/Port [0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count the number of pages received by the physical port
used to receive them.
8 741 1 PSTN-1
8 741 2 PSTN-2
8 741 3 PSTN-3
8 741 4 ISDN (G3,G4)
8 741 5 Network

8 771 Dev Counter [0~9999999/ 1]
These SPs count the frequency of use (number of rotations of the
development rollers) for black and other color toners.
Note
For machines that do not support color, the Black toner count is the
same as the Total count.
8 771 1 Total All toners (YMCK)
8 771 2 K Black toner
8 771 3 Y Yellow toner
8 771 4 M Magenta toner
8 771 5 C Cyan toner
8 771 6 R Red toner (Wide Format A2 machines only)

8 781 Toner Use Count: Color [0~65 535]
These SPs count the frequency of use (number of rotations of the
development rollers) for black and other color toners.

8 791 1 LS Memory Remain This SP displays the percent of space
available on the document server for
storing documents.
[0~100/ 1]

8 801 Toner Remain [0~100/0/1]
These SPs enable the display of the amount of toner remaining in
steps of 10%.
NOTE: In actuality, the controller is capable of detecting changes in
steps of 1%. However, this SP relies on the detection data from the
Engine (system), which is limited to a detection resolution of 10%
increments.
8 801 1 K Black. Supported by B/W, Color, Wide Format A2,
Wide Format Roll machines.
8 801 2 Y Yellow Color machines only.
8 801 3 M Magenta
8 801 4 C Cyan
8 801 5 R R Wide Format A2 machines only.

Rev. 07/15/2014
SM 5-183 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

8831 Pixel Cover Ave. Average Pixel Coverage
001 Accum. Ave. K
002 Accum. Ave. M
003 Accum. Ave. C
004 Accum. Ave. Y

8841 Pixel Cover Last Average Pixel Coverage
001 Last Page K
002 Last Page M
003 Last Page C
004 Last Page Y

Toner Coverage 0-10% [0~65 535] 8 851
These SPs count the percentage of dot coverage for black other
color toners.

Toner Coverage 11-20% [0~65 535] 8 861
color toners.

Toner Coverage 21-30% [0~65 535] 8 871
color toners.

Toner Coverage 31 -% [0~65 535] 8 881
color toners.

B132/B200 5-184 SM

Pages: Current Toner [0~65 535] 8 891
These SPs count the number of pages for the current set toner.

Machine Status [0~9999999/ 1] 8 941
These SPs count the amount of time the machine spends in each
operation mode. These SPs are useful for customers who need to
investigate machine operation for improvement in their compliance
with ISO Standards.
8 941 1 Operation Time Engine operation time. Does not include
time while controller is saving data to HDD
(while engine is not operating).
8 941 2 Standby Time Engine not operating. Includes time while
controller saves data to HDD. Does not
include time spent in Energy Save, Low
Power, or Off modes.
8 941 3 Energy Save Time Includes time while the machine is
performing background printing.
8 941 4 Low Power Time Includes time in Energy Save mode with
Engine on. Includes time while machine is
performing background printing.
8 941 5 Off Mode Time Includes time while machine is performing
background printing. Does not include time
machine remains powered off with the power
switches.
8 941 6 Down Time/SC Total down time due to SC errors.
8 941 7 Down Time/PrtJam Total down time due to paper jams during
printing.
8 941 8 Down Time/OrgJam Total down time due to original jams during
scanning.
8 941 9 Down Time/TonEnd Total down time due to toner end.

SM 5-185 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

AddBook Register 8 951
These SPs count the number of events when the machine manages data
registration.
8 951 1 User Code User code registrations.
8 951 2 Mail Address Mail address registrations.
8 951 3 Fax Destination Fax destination registrations.
8 951 4 Group Group destination
registrations.
8 951 5 Transfer Request Fax relay destination
registrations for relay TX.
8 951 6 F-Code F-Code box registrations.
[0~9999999/ 1]
8 951 7 Copy Program Copy application registrations
with the Program (job
settings) feature.
8 951 8 Fax Program Fax application registrations
with the Program (job
settings) feature.
8 951 9 Printer Program Printer application
registrations with the
Program (job settings)
feature.
8 951 10 Scanner
Program
Scanner application
registrations with the
Program (job settings)
feature.
[0~255 / 255]

Rev. 05/2005
B132/B200 5-186 SM
Group 9000
System Stop Ctrl Setting 9 405
Setting of the system stop control function.
001 System Stop
Control ON/OFF
Switches the System Stop Control Function ON or OFF.

When this switch is ON:
The machine stops the job when the output of the
temperature/humidity sensor on the K-PCU is 41#C
(105.8#F) or higher.
NOTE: This keeps the temperature of the toner in the
development unit below 50#C (122#F).
[0 - 1/ 1] 0: OFF, 1: ON (default)
002 System Stop
History
Displays whether or not System Stop Control has ever
stopped the machine in the middle of the job.

0 (default): System Stop Control has never stopped the
machine.
1: System Stop Control has stopped the machine one or
more times.

9407 Environ Cntrl
001 Environ Cntrl Enable/Disables the Peltier Unit
[0 ~ 1 / 1]
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
IMPORTANT NOTES:
" As a general rule, keep this SP mode disabled.
Enable this SP mode ONLY WHEN:
1. The temperature in the room is low, and
2. There is condensation on the drum or charge roller, and
3. The images on the printouts are blurry

" To enable the Peltier unit:
1. Set this SP mode to a value of 1, and
2. Turn OFF the AOF function in User Program Mode.
NOTE: There are some environmental conditions that the Peltier unit needs to operate (ex:
humidity of 60% or higher). If the Peltier unit does not operate after you do the above steps, it is
because these conditions are not satisfied.

" When the AOF function is turned OFF, the machine is not in compliance with the Energy Star
requirements.
004 Op Humidity
005 Stop Humidity
006 Op On Time
007 Op Off Time
Factory Use Only.
Do Not Touch In The Field.

Rev. 06/2006
"
SM 5-187 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

5.5.3 PRINTER SERVICE TABLE
Group 1 (Printer)
1001 Bit Switch
001 Bit Switch 1 Settings
Adjusts the bit switch settings. DFU

1003 Clear Setting
Initialize Printer System 001
Initializes settings in the System menu of the user mode.
003 Delete Program

1004 Print Summary
Print Summary
Prints the service summary sheet (a summary of all the controller settings).

1005 Disp. Version Display Version
Displays the version of the controller firmware.

1006 Sample/Locked Print
Enables and disables the document server. When you select 0, the document server is
enabled or disabled in accordance with Copy Service Mode SP5-967. When you select
1, the document server is enabled regardless of Copy Service Mode SP5-967.
0: Link With Doc. Svr. 1: Enable

Data Recall 1101
Recalls a set of gamma settings.
001 Factory
002 Previous
003 Current
004 ACC
This can be either a) the factory setting, b) the previous setting,
or c) the current setting.

Resolution Setting 1102
Selects the printing mode (resolution) for the printer gamma adjustment.
[2400 x 600 Photo] [1800 x 600 Photo]
[600 x 600 Photo] [2400 x 600 Photo]
Touch a key on the display:
[1800 x 600 Text] [600 x 600]

Rev. 06/2006
B132/B200 5-188 SM

Test Page 1103
Prints the test page to check the color balance before and after the gamma adjustment.
001 Color Gray Scale
002 Color Pattern

Gamma Adjustment 1104
Adjusts the printer gamma for the mode selected in the Mode Selection menu.
001 Black: Highlight
002 Black: Shadow
003 Black: Middle
004 Black: IDmax
021 Cyan: Highlight
022 Cyan: Shadow
023 Cyan: Middle
024 Cyan: IDmax
041 Magenta: Highlight
042 Magenta: Shadow
043 Magenta: Middle
044 Magenta: IDmax
061 Yellow: Highlight
062 Yellow: Shadow
063 Yellow: Middle
064 Yellow: IDmax
[ 0 to 30 / 15 / 1/step ]

Save Tone Control Value 1105
Stores the print gamma adjusted with the Gamma Adj. menu item as the current
setting. Before the machine stores the new current setting", it moves the data
currently stored as the current setting to the previous setting memory storage
location.

Toner Limit 1106
Adjusts the maximum toner amount for image development.
001 Toner Limit: Photo [ 100 to 400 / 260 / 1 %/step ]
002 Toner Limit: Text [ 100 to 400 / 190 / 1 %/step ]

Rev. 06/2006
SM 5-189 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

5.5.4 SCANNER SERVICE TABLE
Group 1 (Scanner)
Compression Type] 1004
Selects the compression type for binary picture processing.
[ 1 to 3 /1/step ]
1: MH, 2: MR, 3: MMR

Erase margin] 1005
Creates an erase margin for all edges of the scanned image. If the machine has
scanned the edge of the original, create a margin.
[0 to 5/ 1 mm/step]

1007 Store Priority] [1: Send/2: Store Only/3: Send & Store]
This program specifies how scanned data is processed as default.

1009 Remote Scan Disable
This SP enables and disables remote scanning.
0:Enable 1:Diable

Group 2 (Scanner)
Compression Ratio of Gray Scale 2021
This SP sets the compression ratio of grayscale images.
001 Normal Image
002 High Comp Image
003 Low Comp Image
004 High Lvl2 Comp Image
005 Low Lvl2 Comp Image

Rev. 06/2006
COPIER INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK
B132/B200 5-190 SM

5.6 COPIER INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK
5.6.1 COPIER INPUT CHECK: SP5803
This procedure allows you to test sensors and other components of the machine.
After you select one of the categories below by number, you will see a small 8-bit
table with the number of the bit and its current setting (0 or 1). The bits are
numbered 0 to 7, reading right to left.
1. Enter the SP mode and select SP5803.
2. Enter the number (1 to 13) for the item that you want to check. A small box will
be displayed on the SP mode screen with a series of 0s and 1s.
The meaning of the display is as follows.

Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Setting 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0

3. Check the status of each item against the corresponding bit numbers listed in
the table below.

001 Tray 1
Bit Input 0 1
Bit 7 Rear Side Fence Closed Sensor Tray 1 Off On
Bit 6 Rear Side Fence Open Sensor Tray 1 Off On
Bit 5 Front Side Fence Closed Sensor Tray 1 Off On
Bit 4 Front Side Fence Open Sensor Tray 1 Off On
Bit 3 Paper Near End Sensor Tray 1 Off On
Bit 2 Paper Height Sensor 1 Tray 1
See table
below.
Tandem Tray Paper Height Sensors: 001
100% 50% 30% 10%
Near End 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
Paper Height 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0
Paper Height 2 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0
Paper Height 3 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0
002 Paper Feed 1
Bit Input 0 1
Bit 7 Paper Size Tray 2
See table
below.
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Rev. 06/2006
SM 5-191 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

003 Paper Feed 3
Bit Input 0 1
See table
below.
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Paper Size Table: 002, 003
Size Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3
12"x18" 1 1 1 1 1
A3 1 1 0 0 1
B4 1 0 0 1 1
A4 SEF 0 1 0 0 1
A4 LEF 1 1 0 0 0
B5 SEF 1 0 1 0 1
B5 LEF 0 0 0 1 1
A5 SEF 1 1 1 0 1
A5 LEF 0 1 1 0 1
DLT (11"x17") 1 1 1 0 0
LG (8x14") 1 0 1 1 0
LT SEF (8x11") 1 1 0 1 0
LT LEF 0 1 1 0 0
HLT SEF 0 1 1 1 0
HLT LEF 1 1 1 1 0
F4 (8 " x 13") 1 1 0 1 1
Folio (8 x 13") 0 1 0 1 1
F (8" x 13") 0 1 1 1 1
Executive SEF (7"x10" 1 0 1 0 0
Executive LEF 0 0 1 1 1
8K SEF 0 0 1 1 0
16 SEF 1 0 0 1 0
16 LEF 1 0 1 1 1
004 Paper Feed 4
Bit Input 0 1
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5 Paper Height Sensor Tray 2
Bit 4 Paper Height Sensor Tray 3
See table
below.
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1 Paper Near End Sensor Tray 2
Bit 0 Paper Near End Sensor Tray 3
See table
below.
Paper Height, Near End: 004
100% 50% 30% 10%
Paper Height 0 1 1 0
Near End 0 0 1 1
Rev. 06/2006
B132/B200 5-192 SM
005: Paper Feed 5
Bit Input 0 1
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2 Right Tray Paper Sensor Tray 1 No Paper Paper
Bit 1 Number of Trays Detected 3-Trays 4-Trays
Bit 0
006: Paper Feed 6
Bit Input 0 1
Bit 7 Tray 1 Set Sensor Off On
Bit 6 Rear Fence HP Sensor Right Off On
Bit 5 Right Tray Down Sensor Off On
Bit 4 Rear Fence HP Sensor Tray 1 Off On
Bit 3 Rear Fence Open Senor Right Off On
Bit 2 Rear Fence Return Sensor Tray 1 Off On
Bit 1 Paper End Sensor Right Tray Off On
Bit 0 Right Tray Set Sensor Tray 1 Off On
007: Paper Feed 7
Bit Input 0 1
Bit 7 Paper Feed Sensor Tray 1 On Off
Bit 6
Bit 3 Vertical Transport Sensor Tray 1 On Off
Bit 2
On = Paper present
Off = No paper
008: Paper Feed 8
Bit Input 0 1
Bit 7 Lift Sensor Tray 1 On Off
Bit 6
Bit 3 Paper End Sensor Tray 1 On Off
Bit 2
On: Tray up, No paper
Off: Tray down, paper present

Rev. 06/2006
SM 5-193 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

009: Used Toner Trans
Bit Input 0 1
Bit 7
Bit 6 WasteToner Lock Sensor Off On
Bit 5 Waste Toner Bottle Full Sensor Off On
Bit 4 Waste Toner Bottle Set Sensor Off On
Bit 3 Waste Toner Bottle Near Full Sensor Off On
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
010: Paper Trans 1
Bit Input 0 1
Bit 7 Duplex Transport Sensor 1 Off On
Bit 4 Duplex Inverter Sensor Off On
Bit 3 Duplex Entrance Sensor Off On
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
011: Paper Trans 2
Bit Input 0 1
Bit 7 LCT Relay Sensor Off On
Bit 6 Paper Exit Relay Sensor Off On
Bit 5 Registration Sensor Off On
Bit 4 Guide Plate Position Sensor Off On
Bit 3
Bit 2 Paper Exit Sensor Off On
Bit 1 Paper Exit Relay Sensor Off On
Bit 0 Off On
012: Paper Trans 3
Bit Input 0 1
Bit 7 Copy Tray Full Sensor
Bit 6 Double-Feed Sensor
Bit 5 Accordion Jam Sensor
Bit 4 Fusing Exit Sensor
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0

Rev. 06/2006
B132/B200 5-194 SM
013: Paper Trans 4
Bit Input 0 1
Bit 7 Paper Size Switch 1
See table
below.
Bit 3 Bypass Paper Size Switch Off On
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Bypass paper end sensor: Off: Paper present, On: No paper
Paper Size Table: 013 (Trays 1 to 3, Bit 7 to 4)
Tray Sensor SW
NA EU/Asia
1 2 3 4 5
Postcard (100 x 148 mm) Postcard (100 x 148 mm) L H H H H
5 x 8 SEF A5 SEF L H H H L
8 x 14 SEF 8 x 13 SEF L H H L H
8 x 14 SEF A4 SEF L H L L H
8 x 14 SEF A3 SEF L H L L H
11 x 17 SEF A3 SEF L L L H H
A3 SEF A3 SEF L L H H H
Paper Size Table: 013 (Bypass Tray Bit 3)
Tray Sensor SW
NA EU/Asia
1 2 3 4 5
Postcard (100 x 148 mm) Postcard (100 x 148 mm) L H H H H
8 x 14 SEF 8 x 13 SEF L H H L H
8 x 14 SEF A5 LEF L H L L H
8 x 14 SEF A4 LEF L H L L H
11 x 8 SEF A4 LEF L L L H H
A4 LEF A4 LEF L L H H H
014: Drum Mtr Lock
Bit Input 0 1
Bit 7 Drum Motor Lock Y Off On
Bit 6 Drum Motor Lock M Off On
Bit 5 Drum Motor Lock C Off On
Bit 4 Drum Motor Lock K Off On
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Off: No Lock
On: Locked

Rev. 06/2006
SM 5-195 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

015: PCU Motor Lock
Bit Input 0 1
Bit 7 PCU Motor Lock Y Off On
Bit 6 PCU Motor Lock M Off On
Bit 5 PCU Motor Lock C Off On
Bit 4 PCU Motor Lock K Off On
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Off: No Lock
On: Locked
016: Other Motor Lock
Bit Input 0 1
Bit 7 ITB Drive Motor Lock Off On
Bit 6 PTR Motor Lock Off On
Bit 5 Fusing/Exit Motor Lock Off On
Bit 4 Waste Toner Bottle Collection Motor Lock Off On
Bit 3 Waste Toner Distribution Motor Lock Off On
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Off: No Lock
On: Locked
017: Fan System 1
Bit Input 0 1
Bit 7 Paper Exit Fan Motor Lock Off On
Bit 6 Duplex Fan Motor Front Lock Off On
Bit 5 Duplex Fan Motor Rear Lock Off On
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Off: No Lock
On: Locked
018: Fan System 2
Bit Input 0 1
Bit 7 Fusing Cooling Fan Motor Lock Off On
Bit 6 Fusing Exhaust Fan Motor Lock Off On
Bit 5 Fusing Fan Motor Lock Off On
Bit 4 Peltier Cooling Fan Motor Lock Off On
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Off: No Lock
On: Locked

Rev. 06/2006
B132/B200 5-196 SM
019: Fan System 3
Bit Input 0 1
Bit 7 Controlling Box Cooling Fan Motor 2 Lock Off On
Bit 6 Controlling Box Cooling Fan Motor 1 Lock Off On
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Off: No Lock
On: Locked
020: Hi Volt SC1 (Drum Charge Power Pack)
Bit Input 0 1
Bit 7 High Voltage Output: Y Normal Abnormal
Bit 6 High Voltage Output: M Normal Abnormal
Bit 5 High Voltage Output: C Normal Abnormal
Bit 4 High Voltage Output: K Normal Abnormal
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
021: Hi Volt SC2 (Development Bias Power Pack)
Bit Input 0 1
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
022: Hi Volt SC3 (Transfer Power Pack, Separation Power Pack)
Bit Input 0 1
Bit 3 High Voltage Output: Y
Transfer PP
Normal Abnormal
Bit 2 Paper Separation Separation PP Normal Abnormal
Bit 1
Bit 0

Rev. 06/2006
SM 5-197 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

023: Paper Transfer
Bit Input 0 1
Bit 7 ITB Lift Sensor Separated Contact
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1 ITB Position Sensor 1
Bit 0 ITB Position Sensor 2
See table below.
Bit Table: 023
Bit 1/Bit 0 Function
00 Belt Scale Control
01 Encoder Control
10 Belt or Sensor Defective
11 Belt or Sensor Defective
024: Toner Supply
Bit Input 0 1
Bit 7 Toner End Sensor: Y Off On
Bit 6 Toner End Sensor: M Off On
Bit 5 Toner End Sensor: C Off On
Bit 4 Toner End Sensor: K Off On
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Off: Toner
On: Toner End
025: Fusing Temp Detect
Bit Input 0 1
Bit 7 Pressure Roller Thermostat High Temp Off On
Bit 6 Hot Roller Thermistor High Temp Off On
Bit 5 Heating Roller Temperataure Sensor High Temp Off On
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Off: Temperature within normal range
On: Temperature high, exceeded normal range

Rev. 06/2006
B132/B200 5-198 SM
026: Set Detection
Bit Input 0 1
Bit 7 Key Card Set Off On
Bit 6 Key Count Set Off On
Bit 5 Mechanical Counter B Set Off On
Bit 4 Mechanical Counter FC Set Off On
Bit 3 Fusing Unit Set Off On
Bit 2 Duplex Unit Set Off On
Bit 1 Drawer Set Off On
Bit 0
027: Door
Bit Input 0 1
Bit 7 Front Door Switches Off On
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
028: Peltier Unit
Bit Input 0 1
Bit 7 Peltier Unit Abnormal Off On
Bit 6 Peltier Unit Fan Motor Off On
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0

201: DIP Switches
Bit Input 0 1
Bit 7 DIP-SW7
Bit 6 DIP-SW6
Bit 5 DIP-SW5
Bit 4 DIP-SW4
Bit 3 DIP-SW3
Bit 2 DIP-SW2
Bit 1 DIP-SW1
Bit 0 DIP-SW0

Rev. 06/2006
SM 5-199 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

5.6.2 COPIER OUTPUT CHECK: SP5804
1. Open SP mode 5804.
2. Select the SP number that corresponds to the component you wish to check.
(Refer to the table on the next page.)
3. Press On then press Off to test the selected item.
NOTE: You cannot exit and close this display until you press off to switch off
the output check currently executing. Do not keep an electrical
component switched on for a long time.

5804 Output Chk Output Check
001 Fuse Fan: Front NS 045 Hopper Mtr Fwd
002 Fuse Fan: Front HS 046 P.Pump Drv CL:Y
003 Fuse Fan: Back NS 047 P.Pump Drv CL:M
004 Fuse Fan: Back HS 048 P.Pump Drv CL:C
005 Opt. Fan: Front NS 049 P.Pump Drv CL:K
006 Opt. Fan: Front HS 050 Used Toner Mtr 1
007 Opt. Fan: Back NS 051 Used Toner Mtr 1
008 Opt. Fan: Back HS 052 Chage dc:Y
009 Exit Pipe Fan 053 Chage dc:M
010 Sub Fuse Fan: NS 054 Chage dc:C
011 Sub Fuse Fan: HS 055 Chage dc:K
012 PT Fan: NS 056 Chage ac:Y
014 Dupx Fan: NS 057 Chage ac:M
015 Dupx Fan:Front:NS 058 Chage ac:C
016 Dupx Fan:Front:HS 059 Chage ac:K
017 Dupx Fan:Back:NS 060 Dev dc:Y
018 Dupx Fan:Back:HS 061 Dev dc:M
019 Exit Fan:NS 062 Dev dc:C
021 PCB Box Fan1:NS 063 Dev dc:K
023 PCB Box Fan2:NS 064 Dev ac:Y
025 PSU Fan 1:NS 065 Dev ac:M
026 PSU Fan 1:HS 066 Dev ac:C
027 PSU Fan 2:NS 067 Dev ac:K
028 PSU Fan 2:HS 068 Paper Transfer
029 PT Fan 1:NS 069 Paper Separate dc
030 PT Fan 2:NS 070 Paper Separate ac
031 Pelt. Cool Fan:NS 099 ID Sensor:3c
032 Pelt. Cool Fan:HS 100 ID Sensor: K
033 Potential Sn Fan 101 QL:Y
034 Ozone Fan 102 QL:M
035 PCU Fan:Y 103 QL:C
036 PCU Fan:C 104 QL:K
037 PCU Fan:M 105 LD:Y
038 PCU Fan:K 106 LD:M
039 Pelt. Cooling Fan 107 LD:C
040 Pelt. Cir. Fan 108 LD:K
041 Sub Hopper CL:Y 109 Polygon Mtr
042 Sub Hopper CL:M 110 Feed Mtr 1:Fwd/Nor
043 Sub Hopper CL:C 111 Feed Mtr 1:Fwd/Hi
044 Sub Hopper CL:K 112 Feed Mtr 1:Fwd/Haf

Rev. 06/2006
B132/B200 5-200 SM

5804 Output Chk Output Check
113 Feed Mtr 1:Rev/Nor 155 Dup Inv M:Fwd/Hi
114 Feed Mtr 1:Rev/Haf 156 Dup Inv M:Fwd/Haf
115 Feed Mtr 2:Fwd/Nor 157 DupInvM:Fwd/TS
116 Feed Mtr 2:Fwd/Hi 158 DupTrans M:Fwd/Nor
117 Feed Mtr 2:Fwd/Haf 159 DupTrans M:Fwd/Hi
118 Feed Mtr 2:Rev/Nor 160 DupTrans M:Fwd/Haf
119 Feed Mtr 2:Rev/Haf 161 Dup JG SOL
120 Feed Mtr 3:Fwd/Nor 162 Inv Pos SOL
121 Feed Mtr 3:Fwd/Hi 163 Dup Trans CL
122 Feed Mtr 3:Fwd/Haf 164 Dup Jog M:HP Sn
123 Feed Mtr 3:Rev/Nor 169 Drum Mtr:K
124 Feed Mtr 3:Rev/Haf 170 Drum Mtr:K:Haf
125 Feed Mtr 4:Fwd/Nor 171 Drum Mtr:M
126 Feed Mtr 4:Fwd/Hi 172 Drum Mtr:M:Haf
127 Feed Mtr 4:Fwd/Haf 173 Drum Mtr:C
128 Feed Mtr 4:Rev/Nor 174 Drum Mtr:C:Haf
129 Feed Mtr 4:Rev/Haf 175 Drum Mtr:Y
130 Bypass Feed CL 176 Drum Mtr:Y:Haf
131 Pickup SOL:Tray 1 177 PCU Mtr:K
132 Pickup SOL:Tray 2 178 PCU Mtr:K:Haf
133 Pickup SOL:Tray 3 179 PCU Mtr:M
134 Pickup SOL:Tray 4 180 PCU Mtr:M:Haf
135 Bypass Pickup SOL 181 PCU Mtr:C
136 Rev SOL:Tray 1 182 PCU Mtr:C:Haf
137 Rev SOL:Tray 2 183 PCU Mtr:Y
138 Rev SOL:Tray 3 184 PCU Mtr:Y:Haf
139 Rev SOL:Tray 4 185 ITB Motor
140 Tan Conn Rel SOL 186 ITB Motor:Haf
141 Tan Lock SOL 187 PRT Motor
142 TanShift M:Fwd/Rev 188 PRT Motor:Haf
145 Relay Mtr:Fwd/Nor 189 Fusing/Exit M
146 Relay M:Fwd/Dup 190 Fusing/Exit M:Haf
147 Relay M:Fwd/Haf 191 Fusing/Exit M:1/3
148 Relay M:Rev/Nor 192 ITB Lift M:Fwd
149 Relay M:Rev/Haf 193 ITB Lift M:Rev
150 Reg Mtr:Rev/Haf 194 Jam LED:Fusing
151 Reg Mrt:Half Spd 195 Jam LED:Exit
152 Guide Rel SOL 200 Scanner Fan
153 Exit JG SOL 202 Scanner Lamp
154 Dup Inv M:Fwd/Nor 203 Scanner Motor

Rev. 06/2006
ARDF INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK
SM 5-201 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

5.7 ARDF INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK
5.7.1 ADF INPUT CHECK: SP6007
1. Open SP mode SP6007.
(Refer to the table below.)
3. Press On then press Off to test the selected item. You cannot exit and close
this display until you click Off to switch off the output check currently executing.

Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Data 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0

Group 1
Bit Part/Component Status
7 Registration Sensor 0: Off 1: On
6 Interval Sensor 0: Off 1: On
5 Skew Correction Sensor 0: Off 1: On
4 Separation Sensor 0: Off 1: On
3 Original Set Sensor 0: Off 1: On
2 B5 Detection Sensor 0: Off 1: On
1 A4 Detection Sensor 0: Off 1: On
0 LG Detection Sensor 0: Off 1: On
Group 2
7 APS Start Sensor 0: Off 1: On
6 ARDF Position Sensor 0: Off 1: On
5 Exit Sensor 0: Off 1: On
4 Original Width Sensor 5 0: Off 1: On
Group 3
7 0: Off 1: On
6 0: Off 1: On
5 Lower Inverter Sensor 0: Off 1: On
4 Upper Inverter Sensor 0: Off 1: On
3 Bottom Plate Position Sensor 0: Off 1: On
2 Bottom Plate HP Sensor 0: Off 1: On
1 Pick-Up Roller HP Sensor 0: Off 1: On
0 Feed Cover Sensor 0: Off 1: On

Rev. 06/2006
ARDF INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK
B132/B200 5-202 SM

5.7.2 ADF OUTPUT CHECK: SP6008
1. Open SP mode SP6008.
(Refer to the table below.)
3. Press On then press Off to test the selected item. You cannot exit and close
this display until you click Off to switch off the output check currently executing.

6008 ADF Output Chk ADF Output Check
Turns on the ADF electrical components individually for testing. Select the
component to test, then touch the "ON" button. Besure to touch the "OFF" button
as soon as you hear the component turn on.
001 ADF Feed M:Fwd 007 ADF Bot Inv M:Fwd
002 ADF Feed M:Rev 008 ADF Bot Inv M:Rev
003 ADF Trans M:Fwd 009 ADF Pickup M:Fwd
004 ADF Ext M:Fwd 010 ADF BotPlt M:Rev
005 ADF Top Inv M:Fwd 011 ADF Top Inv SOL
006 ADF Top Inv M:Rev 012 ADF Bot Inv SOL

Rev. 06/2006
FINISHER 1 (B700/B701) INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK
SM 5-203 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

5.8 FINISHER 1 (B700/B701) INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK
5.8.1 INPUT CHECK: FINISHER 1 (B700/B701) SP6121
6121 Input Chk:Fin1 Input Check: Finisher 1 (B700/B701)
These are the input checks for the 2000-Sheet/3000-Sheet Finishers B700/B701.
001 Entrance Sn 026 Punch Full Sn
002 Proof Exit Sn 027 Punch HP Sn
003 Proof Full Sn 028 Punch DIP SW1
004 Up Tray Exit Sn 029 Punch DIP SW2
005 Staple Exit Sn 030 Stack Junc HP Sn
006 Shift Roll HP Sn 031 Stack Present Sn
007 Exit Sn 032 Clamp Roll HP Sn
008 Exit Guide HP Sn 033 Fold Entrance Sn
009 Low Tray Hgt Sn 034 Bot Fence HP Sn
010 Up Tray Hgt Sn 035 Fol Cam HP Sn
011 Up Tray Full Sn 036 Fold Plate HP Sn
012 Stack Roll HP Sn 037 Fold Exit Sn
013 Joggr HP Sn 038 Book Full Sn 1
014 Feed Out HP Sn 039 Book Full Sn 2
015 Stp Tray Ppr Sn 040 BStapler 1 Op
016 Stp Tray HP Sn 041 BStapler 1 In
017 Stp Rotate HP Sn 042 BStaples 1 In
018 Up Tray Limit SW 043 BStapler 2 Op
019 Door Switch 044 BStapler 2 In
020 Corner Stp Op 045 BStaples 2 In
021 Corner Stp 1 046 Up TrayFull:3000
022 Corner Staples 047 Out Jog HP Sn 1
023 Punch HP Sn 048 Out Jog HP Sn 2
024 Punch Unit HP Sn 049 OutJog RetractSn
025 Punch Ppr HP Sn

Rev. 06/2006
FINISHER 1 (B700/B701) INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK
B132/B200 5-204 SM

5.8.2 OUTPUT CHECK FINISHER 1: (B700/B701) SP6123
6123 Output Chk:Fin1 Output Check: Finisher 1 (B700/B701)
These are the output checks for the 2000-Sheet/3000-Sheet Finishers B700/B701.
001 Entrance M 017 Pos Roll SOL
002 Up Trans M 018 Stp Edge Plate SOL
003 Low Trans M 019 Book Press SOL
004 Exit M 020 Stack JG M
005 Pos Roll M 021 Fold Bot Fence M
006 Shift M 022 Book Stp M:Front
007 Exit Guide M 023 Book Stp M:Back
008 Tray Lift M 024 Fold Plate M
009 Stack Roller M 025 Fold Roll M
010 Jogger M 026 Clamp Roll M
011 Feed Out M 027 Punch M
012 Stp Shift M 028 Punch Move M
013 Stp Rot M 029 Reg M
014 Corner Stp M 030 Output Jog M: Front
015 Up JG SOL 031 Output Jog M: Rear
016 Dn JG SOL 032 Output Jog Retract M

Rev. 06/2006
FINISHER 2 (B706) INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK
SM 5-205 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

5.9 FINISHER 2 (B706) INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK
5.9.1 INPUT CHECK FINISHER 2: (B706) SP6122
6122 Input Chk:Fin2 Input Check: Finisher 2 (B706)
001 Entrance Sn 021 Proof Full Sn
002 Proof Exit Sn 022 Staple Rotate HP Sn
003 Shift Exit Sn 023 S Hopper Full Sn
004 Stp Exit Sn 024 PreStack Sn
005 Tray Bot Plt Sn 025 Stack Plate HP
006 Tray Near Bot Sn 026 Exit Guide HP Sn
007 Release HP Sn 027 Stapler Return Sn
008 Jogger HP Sn 028 Stapler Ready Sn
009 Shift HP Sn 029 Stack Plate HP Sn 1
010 Stapler Side HP Sn 030 Stack Plate HP Sn 2
011 Stapler HP Sn 031 Stp Hammer HP Sn
012 Staple Sn 032 Retrun Drv HP Sn
013 Staple Tray Sn 033 Paper Hgt Sn
014 Door Open Sn 034 Tray Limit SW
015 Punch Sn 035 Punch HP Sn 2
016 Punch HP Sn 1 036 Shift Jog Sn
017 Puncout Full Sn 037 Shift Jog HP Sn
018 Paper Hgt Sn:Stp 038 Out Jog Retract Sn
019 Paper Hgt Sn:Shift 039 Emergency Stop SW
020 Cart Detect Sn

Rev. 06/2006
FINISHER 2 (B706) INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK
B132/B200 5-206 SM

5.9.2 OUTPUT CHECK FINISHER 2 (B706) SP6125
6125 Output Chk:Fin2 Output Check: Finisher 2 (B706)
001 Off:Stop 014 Stp Lift M:1 Op
002 Main M:Cont 015 Stp Exit M:Cont
003 Shift Exit M:Cont 016 Open Exit M:Cont
004 Proof SW SOL:Cont 017 Fold Plate M:1 Op
005 Tray Lift M:1 Op 018 PrestackJG SOL:1Op
006 Jogger M:1 Op 019 Guide JG SOL:1 Op
007 Stp M:1 Op Horiz 020 Stp Return:1 Op
008 Stp M:1 Op 021 Fold M:Front:1 Op
009 Punch M:1 Op 022 Fold M:Back:1 Op
010 Stp JG SOL:Cont 023 Return Drv M:1 Op
011 Stp Hammer M:1 Op 024 Return TransM:1Op
012 Feed Out M:1 Op 025 Shift Jog M:1 Op
013 Shift M:1 Op 026 ShiftJogShuntM:1Op

Rev. 06/2006
USING THE DEBUG LOG
SM 5-207 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

5.10 USING THE DEBUG LOG
This machine provides a Save Debug Log feature that allows the Customer
Engineer to save and retrieve error information for analysis.
Every time an error occurs, debug information is recorded in volatile memory but
this information is lost when the machine is switched off and on.
The Save Debug Log feature provides two main features:
! Switching on the debug feature so error information is saved directly to the HDD
for later retrieval.
! Copying the error information from the HDD to an SD card.
When a user is experiencing problems with the machine, follow the procedure
below to set up the machine so the error information is saved automatically to the
HDD.

5.10.1 SWITCHING ON AND SETTING UP SAVE DEBUG LOG
The debug information cannot be saved the until the Save Debug Log function
has been switched on and a target has been selected.
1. Enter the SP mode and switch the Save Debug Log feature on.
! Press ! then use the 10-key pad to enter "#$.
! Press and hold down % for more than 3 seconds.
! Touch Copy SP.
! On the LCD panel, open SP5857.
2. Under 5857 Save Debug Log, touch 1 On/Off.
COPY : SP-5-857-001
Save Debug Log
On/Off (1:ON 0:OFF)
_1_
Initial 0
3. On the control panel keypad, press 1 then press &. This switches the Save
Debug Log feature on.
NOTE: The default setting is 0 (OFF). This feature must be switched on in
order for the debug information to be saved.

Rev. 06/2006
USING THE DEBUG LOG
B132/B200 5-208 SM
4. Next, select the target destination where the debug information will be saved.
Under 5857 Save Debug Log, touch 2 Target, enter 2 with the operation
panel key to select the hard disk as the target destination, then press &.
COPY : SP-5-857-002
Save Debug Log
Target (2:HDD 3:SD Card)
_2_
Initial 2

NOTE: Select 3 SD Card to save the debug information directly to the SD
card if it is inserted in the service slot.
5. Now touch 5858 and specify the events that you want to record in the debug
log. SP5858 (Debug Save When) provides the following items for selection.
1 Engine SC Error
Saves data when an engine-related
SC code is generated.
2 Controller SC Error
Saves debug data when a controller-
related SC Code is generated.
3 Any SC Error
Saves data only for the SC code that
you specify by entering code number.
4 Jam Saves data for jams.
NOTE: More than one event can be selected.
Example 1: To Select Items 1, 2, 4
Touch the appropriate items(s). Press ON for each selection. This example
shows Engine SC Error selected.
COPY : SP-5-858-001
Debug Save When
Engine SC Error
__OFF__ __ON__
Example 2: To Specify an SC Code
Touch 3 Any SC Error, enter the 3-digit SC code number with the control
panel number keys, then press &. This example shows an entry for SC670.
COPY : SP-5-858-001
Debug Save When
Any SC Error
__670
NOTE: For details about SC code numbers, please refer to the SC tables in
Section 4. Troubleshooting.

Rev. 06/2006
USING THE DEBUG LOG
SM 5-209 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

6. Next, select the one or more memory modules for reading and recording debug
information. Touch 5859.
Under 5859 press the appropriate key item for the module that you want to
record.
Enter the appropriate 4-digit number, then press .
NOTE: Refer to the two tables below for the 4-digit numbers to enter for each
key.
The example below shows Key 1 with 2222 entered.
COPY : SP-5-859-001
Debug Save Key No.
Key 1
___2222
The following keys can be set with the corresponding numbers. (The initials in
parentheses indicate the names of the modules.)

4-Digit Entries for Keys 1 to 10
KEY NO. COPY PRINTER SCANNER WEB
1 2222 (SCS)
2 2223 (SRM)
3 256 (IMH)
4 1000 (ECS)
5 1025 (MCS)
6 4848 (COPY) 4400 (GPS) 5375 (Scan) 5682 (NFA)
7 2224 (BICU) 4500 (PDL) 5682 (NFA) 6600 (WebDB)
8 4600 (GPS-PM) 3000 (NCS) 3300 (PTS)
9 2000 (NCS) 2000 (NCS) 6666 (WebSys)
10 2224 (BICU) 2000 (NCS)
NOTE: The default settings for Keys 1 to 10 are all zero (0).
NOTE:
Key to Acronyms
Acronym Meaning Acronym Meaning
ECS Engine Control Service NFA Net File Application
GPS GW Print Service PDL Printer Design Language
GSP-PM GW Print Service Print Module PTS Print Server
IMH Image Memory Handler SCS System Control Service
MCS Memory Control Service SRM System Resource
Management
NCS Network Control Service WebDB Web Document Box
(Document Server)

The machine is now set to record the debugging information automatically on
the HDD (the target selected with SP5857-002) for the events that you selected
SP5858 and the memory modules selected with SP5859.

Rev. 06/2006
USING THE DEBUG LOG
B132/B200 5-210 SM

Please keep the following important points in mind when you are doing this setting:
! Note that the number entries for Keys 1 to 5 are the same for the Copy, Printer,
Scanner, and Web memory modules.
! The initial settings are all zero.
! These settings remain in effect until you change them. Be sure to check all the
settings, especially the settings for Keys 6 to 10. To switch off a key setting,
enter a zero for that key.
! You can select any number of keys from 1 to 10 (or all) by entering the
corresponding 4-digit numbers from the table.
! You cannot mix settings for the groups (COPY, PRINTER, etc.) for 006~010. For
example, if you want to create a PRINTER debug log you must select the
settings from the 9 available selections for the PRINTER column only.
! One area of the disk is reserved to store the debug log. The size of this area is
limited to 4 MB.

5.10.2 RETRIEVING THE DEBUG LOG FROM THE HDD
Retrieve the debug log by copying it from the hard disk to an SD card.
1. Insert the SD card into the service slot of the copier.
2. Enter the SP mode and execute SP5857-009 (Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4
MB)) to write the debugging data to the SD card.
3. After you return to the service center, use a card reader to copy the file and
send it for analysis to Ricoh by email, or just send the SD card by mail.

Rev. 06/2006
USING THE DEBUG LOG
SM 5-211 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

5.10.3 RECORDING ERRORS MANUALLY
Since only SC errors and jams are recorded to the debug log automatically, for any
other errors that occur while the customer engineer is not on site, please instruct
customers to perform the following immediately after occurrence to save the debug
data. Such problems would include a controller or panel freeze.
NOTE: In order to use this feature, the customer engineer must have previously
switched on the Save Debug Feature (SP5857-001) and selected the hard
disk as the save destination (SP5857-002).
1. When the error occurs, on the operation panel, press (Clear Modes).
2. On the control panel, enter 01 then hold down ' for at least 3 sec. until
the machine beeps then release. This saves the debug log to the hard disk for
later retrieval with an SD card by the service representatives.
3. Switch the machine off and on to resume operation.
The debug information for the error is saved on the hard disk so the service
representatives can retrieve it on their next visit by copying it from the HDD to
an SD card.

Rev. 06/2006
USING THE DEBUG LOG
B132/B200 5-212 SM

5.10.4 NEW DEBUG LOG CODES
SP5857-015 Copy SD Card-to-SD Card: Any Desired Key
This SP copies the log on an SD card (the file that contains the information written
directly from shared memory) to a log specified by key number. The copy operation
is executed in the log directory of the SD card inserted in the same slot. (This
function does not copy from one slot to another.) Each SD card can hold up to 4
MB of file data. Unique file names are created for the data during the copy
operation to prevent overwriting files of the same name. This means that log data
from more than one machine can be copied onto the same SC card. This
command does not execute if there is no log on the HDD for the name of the
specified key.

SP5857-016 Create a File on HDD to Store a Log
This SP creates a 32 MB file to store a log on the HDD. However, this is not a
completely empty file. The created file will hold the number 2225 as the SCS key
number and other non-volatile information. Even if this SP is not executed, a file is
created on the HDD when the first log is stored on the HDD, but this operation
takes time. This creates the possibility that the machine may be switched off and
on before the log can be created completely. If you execute this SP to create the
log file beforehand, this will greatly reduce the amount of time required to acquire
the log information and save onto the HDD. With the file already created on the
HDD for the log file, the data only needs to be recorded; a new log file does not
require creation. To create a new log file, execute SP5857-011 to delete the debug
log data from the HDD and then execute this SP (SP5857-016).

SP5857-017 Create a File on SD Card to Store a Log
This SP creates a 4 MB file to store a log on an SD card. However, this is not a
completely empty file. The created file will hold the number 2225 as the SCS key
number and other non-volatile information. Even if this SP is not executed, a file is
created on the SD card when the first log is stored on the SD card, but this
operation takes time. This creates the possibility that the machine may be switched
off and on before the log can be created completely. If you execute this SP to
create the log file beforehand, this will greatly reduce the amount of time required
to acquire the log information and save onto the SD card. With the file already
created on the SD card for the log file, the data only needs to be recorded; a new
log file does not require creation. To create a new log file, execute SP5857-012 to
delete the debug log data from the SD card and then execute this SP (SP5857-
017).

Rev. 06/2006
USER TOOLS
SM 5-213 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

5.11 USER TOOLS
5.11.1 OVERVIEW
This section is a summary of the user tools. Refer to the operators manual for
more details.
1. On the operation panel, press the User Tools button.
2. Press the appropriate key, then access the following items:
! System Settings
! Maintenance
! Copier/Document Server Features
! Printer Features
! Scanner Features
! Inquiry
! Counter

You can use these tools while the machine is operating, during a jam, or even
when a warning is displayed. However, you cannot move to the user screen while
in the SP mode, but you can easily switch between the SP mode screen and the
operation screen by pressing Copy Window.
During machine operation, in the jam mode, or while a warning message is
displayed, the display language can be changed and the counters can be
displayed. However, the counters cannot be printed.

Rev. 06/2006
USER TOOLS
B132/B200 5-214 SM

5.11.2 SYSTEM SETTINGS
Key press: [User Tools]> "System Settings"
System Settings Map
General Features
Panel Tone
Warm Up Notice
Copy Count Display
Function Priority
Print Priority
Function Reset Timer
Interleave Print
Output Copier
Output: Document Server
Output: Printer
ADF Original Table Elevation
Job List Display Time
Tray Paper Settings
Paper Tray Priority: Copier
Paper Tray Priority: Printer
Tray Paper Size: Tray 2
Tray Paper Size: Tray 3
Paper Type: Bypass Tray
Paper Type: Tray 1
Paper Type: Tray 2
Paper Type: Tray 3
Paper Type: LCT
Front Cover Select Tray
Back Cover Select Tray
Slip Sheet Tray
Designation Sheet Tray 1
Designation Sheet Tray 2
Printer Bypass Paper Size
Paper Type Detect
Double Feed Detect

Rev. 06/2006
USER TOOLS
SM 5-215 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

System Settings Map (Continued)
Timer Settings
Auto Off Timer
Energy Saver Timer
Panel Off Timer
System Reset Timer
Copier/Document Server Auto Reset Timer
Printer Auto Reset Timer
Scanner Auto Reset Timer
Set Date
Set Time
Weekly Timer Code
Auto Logout Timer
Weekly Timer: Monday
Weekly Timer: Tuesday
Weekly Timer: Wednesday
Weekly Timer: Thursday
Weekly Timer: Friday
Weekly Timer: Saturday
Weekly Timer: Sunday
Interface Settings
Network
IP Address
Gateway Address
DNS Configuration
DDNS Configuration
Domain Name
WINS Configuration
Effective Protocol
NW Frame Type
SMB Computer Name
SMB Work Group
Ethernet Speed
Ping Command
Permit SNMP V3 Communication
Permit SSL/TLS Communication
Host Name
Machine Name
File Transfer
Delivery Option
SMTP Server
SMTP Authentication
POP Before SMTP
POP3 Setting
Administrator's E-mail Address
E-mail Communication Report
Default User Name/Password (Send)
Program/Change/Delete E-mail Message
Program/Change/Delete Subject
Scanner Recall Interval Time
Number of Scanner Recalls
Auto Specify Sender Name

Rev. 06/2006
USER TOOLS
B132/B200 5-216 SM
System Settings Map (Continued)
Administrator Tools
User Authentication Management
Administrator Authentication Management
Program/Change Administrator
Key Counter Management
External Charge Unit Management
Extended Security
Extend Change Unit Management
Enhanced Extend Change Unit Management
Display Print Counter
Display/Clear/Print Counter Per User
Address Book Management
Address Book: Program/Change/Delete/Delete Group
Address Book: Edit Title
Address Book: Change Order
Print Address Book: Destination List
Address Book: Select Title
Auto Delete File
Delete All Files
Program/Change/Delete LDAP Server
Use LDAP Server
AOF (Always ON)
Service Test Call

5.11.3 MAINTENANCE
Key press: [User Tools]> "Maintenance"
Maintenance Map
Auto Color Calibration
Color Registration

Rev. 06/2006
USER TOOLS
SM 5-217 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

5.11.4 COPIER/DOCUMENT SERVER FEATURES
Key press: [User Tools]> "Copier/Document Server Features"
Copier/Document Server Features Map
General Features
Auto Paper Select Priority
Paper Display
Original Type Display
Original Type Priority
Original Photo Type Priority
Auto Tray Switching
Duplex Mode Priority
Copy Orientation in Duplex Mode
Original Orientation in Duplex Mode
Max. Copy Quantity
Change Initial Mode
Tone: Original Remains
Job End Call
Copy Function Key: F1
Document Server Storage Key: F1
Document Server Print Key 1: F1
Reproduction Ratio
Shortcut R/E 1
Shortcut R/E 2
Shortcut R/E 3
Enlarge 1
Enlarge 2
Enlarge 3
Enlarge 4
Enlarge 5
Priority Setting: Enlarge
Reduce 1
Reduce 2
Reduce 3
Reduce 4
Reduce 5
Reduce 6
Priority Setting: Reduce
Ratio for Create Margin
R/E Priority

Rev. 06/2006
USER TOOLS
B132/B200 5-218 SM
Copier/Document Server Features Map (Continued)
Edit
Front Margin: Left/Right
Back Margin: Left/Right
Front Margin: Top/Bottom
Back Margin: Top/Bottom
1-Sided ! 2-Sided Auto Margin: T to T
1-Sided ! 2-Sided Auto Margin: T to B
Erase Border Width
Erase Original Shadow in Combine
Erase Center Width
Copy Back Cover
Front Cover Copy in Combine
Orientation: Booklet, Magazine
Copy Order in Combine
Image Repeat Separation Line
Double Copies Separation Line
Separation Line in Combine
Stamp
Background Numbering
Size
Density
Stamp Color
Preset Stamp
Stamp Priority
Stamp Language
Stamp Position: COPY
Stamp Position: URGENT
Stamp Position: PRIORITY
Stamp Position: For Your Info.
Stamp Position: PRELIMINARY
Stamp Position: For Internal Use Only
Stamp Position: CONFIDENTIAL
Stamp Position: DRAFT
Stamp Format: COPY
Stamp Format: URGENT
Stamp Format: PRIORITY
Stamp Format: For Your Info.
Stamp Format: PRELIMINARY
Stamp Format: For Internal Use Only
Stamp Format: CONFIDENTIAL
Stamp Format: DRAFT

Rev. 06/2006
USER TOOLS
SM 5-219 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

Copier/Document Server Features Map (Continued)
User Stamp
Program/Delete Stamp
Stamp Position: 1
Stamp Position: 2
Stamp Position: 3
Stamp Position: 4
Stamp Format: 1
Stamp Format: 2
Stamp Format: 3
Stamp Format: 4
Stamp Color: 1
Stamp Color: 2
Stamp Color: 3
Stamp Color: 4
Date Stamp
Format
Font
Stamp Position
Stamp Setting
Size
Superimpose
Stamp Color
Page Numbering
Stamp Format
Font
Size
Duplex Back Page Stamping Position
Page Numbering in Combine
Stamp on Designating Slip Sheet
Stamp Position P1, P2
Stamp Position: 1/5
Stamp Position: -1-, -2-
Stamp Position: P.1, P.2
Stamp Position: 1, 2,
Stamp Position: 1-1, 1-2
Superimpose
Input/Output
Switch to Batch
SADF Auto Reset
Rotate Sort: Auto Paper Continue
Auto Sort
Memory Full Auto Scan Restart
Select Stapling Position (Top Left)
Select Stapling Position (Bottom Left)
Select Stapling Position (Top Right)
Select Stapling Position (Bottom Right)
Select Stack Position
Select Punch Type
Letterhead Setting
Eject Copy Face Up/Down in Glass Mode
Eject Copy Face Up/Down in Bypass Mode
Rev. 06/2006
USER TOOLS
B132/B200 5-220 SM

5.11.5 PRINTER FEATURES
Key press: [User Tools]> "Printer Features"
Printer Features Map
List/Test Print
Multiple Lists
Config. Page
Error Log
Menu List
PCL Config./Font Page
PS Config./Font Page
PDF Config./Font Page
Hex Dump
Maintenance
4 Color Graphic Mode
System
Print Error Report
Auto Continue
Memory Overflow
Job Separation
Memory Usage
Duplex
Copies
Blank Page Print
B&W Page Detect
Spool Image
Reserved Job Waiting
Printer Language
Sub Paper Size
Page Size
Letterhead Setting
Bypass Tray Setting Priority
Edge to Edge Printing
Default Printer Language
Host Intervace
I/O Buffer
I/O Timeout

Rev. 06/2006
USER TOOLS
SM 5-221 B132/B200
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

T
a
b
l
e
s

Printer Features Map (Continued)
PCL Menu
Orientation
Form Lines
Font Source
Font Number
Point Size
Font Pitch
Symbol Set
Courier Font
Extend A4 Width
Append CR to LF
Resolution
PS Menu
Data Format
Resolution
Color Setting
Color Profile

Rev. 06/2006
USER TOOLS
B132/B200 5-222 SM

5.11.6 SCANNER FEATURES
Key press: [User Tools]> "Scanner Features"
Scanner Features Map
Scan Settings
Default Scan Settings
Wait Time for Next Orig.: Exposure Glass
Wait Time for Next Orignals: SADF
Original Setting
Switch to Batch
Mixed Original Sizes Priority
Change Initial Mode
Background Density of ADS (Full Color)
Destination List Settings
Destination List Display Priority 2
Select Title
Send Settings
TWAIN Standby Time
File Type Priority
Compression (Black & White)
Compression (Gray Scale/Full Color)
Print & Delete Scanner Journal
Print Scanner Journal
Max. E-Mail Size
Divide & Send E-Mail
E-Mail Information Language
Store File Priority
Administrator Tools

Rev. 06/2006

GENERAL OVERVIEW
SM 6-1 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

6. DETAILS
6.1 GENERAL OVERVIEW
6.1.1 MAIN MACHINE

M K C Y
B132V102.WMF
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
1
2
3
4
5
6 7
8
9
GENERAL OVERVIEW
B132/B200 6-2 SM

1. Transport Belt (ARDF)
2. Entrance Roller (ARDF)
3. Feed Belt (ARDF)
4. Separation Roller (ARDF)
5. Pick-up Roller (ARDF)
6. Upper Inverter Roller (ARDF)
7. Lower Inverter Roller (ARDF)
8. Development Roller
9. Charge Roller
10. PCU
11. OPC Drum
12. Image Transfer Roller
13. ITB Unit
14. Transfer Belt
15. Registration Roller
16. PTR Roller
17. Grip Roller
18. Feed Sensor (Paper Tray)
19. Feed Roller (Paper Tray)
20. Separation Roller (Paper Tray)
21. Pick-up Roller (Paper Tray)
22. Paper Size Switch (Tray 3)
23. Universal Tray (Tray 3)
26. Tandem Tray (Tray 1)
27. Inverter Exit Roller
28. Inverter Entrance Roller
29. Pressure Roller
30. Hot Roller
31. Exit Roller
32. Heating Roller
33. Exposure Glass (ARDF)

GENERAL OVERVIEW
SM 6-3 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

6.1.2 PAPER PATH: COVER INTERPOSER TRAY

1. Proof Tray
2. Cover Sheet Path
3. Original Path
4. By-pass Tray
5. LCT Feed
6. Vertical Transport Path
7. Duplex Transport Path
8. Finisher Lower Tray (Booklet)
9. Finisher Upper Tray 1 (Shift)

B132V104.WMF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
GENERAL OVERVIEW
B132/B200 6-4 SM

6.1.3 PAPER PATH: 9-BIN MAILBOX

1. Original Paper Path
2. Bypass Feed
3. LCT Feed
5. Junction Gate
(Paper goes up to the mailbox or out to the
finishers proof tray)
6. Selected Trays
7. Turn Gates
8. Mailbox Paper Path
9. Junction Gates
(Two junction gates control the paper path inside
the finisher)

B132V105.WMF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
GENERAL OVERVIEW
SM 6-5 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

6.1.4 DRIVE LAYOUT

1. Scanner Motor
2. PCU Motor K
3. Drum Motor K
4. PCU Motor M
5. Drum Motor M
6. PCU Motor C
7. Drum Motor C
8. PCU Motor Y
9. Drum Motor Y
10. ITB Lift Motor
11. Duplex Inverter Motor
12. Fusing Exit Motor
13. Duplex Transport Motor
14. Paper Feed Motor 3
16. Lower Relay Motor
18. Bypass Feed Motor
19. Registration Motor
20. PTR Motor
21. ITB Drive Motor

B132V106.WMF
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
19
21
20
BOARDS
B132/B200 6-6 SM

6.2 BOARDS
6.2.1 BLOCK DIAGRAM

A
D
F
F
a
n
s

x

6
M
S
c
a
n
n
e
r
X
e
n
o
n

L
a
m
p
L
a
m
p

R
e
g
u
l
a
t
o
r
S
I
O
B
M
S
B
U
C
C
D
S
C
A
N
N
E
R

U
N
I
T
U
p
p
e
r

T
r
a
y

H
e
a
t
e
r
L
o
w
e
r

T
r
a
y

H
e
a
t
e
r
S
c
a
n
n
e
r

H
e
a
t
e
r
T
r
a
n
s
f
e
r

H
e
a
t
e
r
L
C
T

H
e
a
t
e
r
H
E
A
T
E
R
S
A
C

D
r
i
v
e
F
U
S
I
N
G

U
N
I
T
T
h
e
r
m
o
s
t
a
t
s

1
,

2
T
h
e
r
m
o
s
t
a
t

3
,

4
H
o
t

R
o
l
l
e
r
F
u
s
i
n
g

L
a
m
p
H
e
a
t
i
n
g

R
o
l
l
e
r
F
u
s
i
n
g

L
a
m
p
s
T
h
e
r
m
o
s
t
a
t

5
,

6
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

R
o
l
l
e
r
F
u
s
i
n
g

L
a
m
p
A
C

M
a
i
n

S
W
B
r
e
a
k
e
r

S
W
P
S
U
S
W

1
M
I
/
F

O
p
t
i
o
n
s
T
r
a
n
s
f
e
r

P
P

T
1
,

T
2
P
A
P
E
R

T
R
A
N
S
F
E
R

U
N
I
T
D
R
A
W
E
R

U
N
I
T
M
H
V
P
S

D
F
a
n
s
S
O
L
S
o
l
e
n
o
i
d
s
S
t
e
p
p
e
r
M
o
t
o
r
s
D
R
B
M
A
l
l

M
o
t
o
r
s
M
F
a
n
s
S
W

3
S
W

4
S
W

5
S
W

6
F
R
O
N
T

D
O
O
R

S
W
I
T
C
H
E
S
O
P
E
R
A
T
I
O
N

P
A
N
E
L
L
C
D
L
C
D

I
n
v
e
r
t
e
r
G
W

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r
M
o
t
h
e
r

B
o
a
r
d
P
C
B

B
O
X
F
a
n
E
X
P
O
S
U
R
E

U
N
I
T
L
D
B
L
D
L
D
B
L
D
L
D
B
L
D
L
D
B
L
D
M
P
o
l
y
g
o
n
C
N
B
C
L
C
l
u
t
c
h
e
s
P
e
l
t
i
e
r

P
C
B
P
e
l
t
i
e
r

U
n
i
t
H
V
P
S

B
M
F
a
n
s
C
L
C
l
u
t
c
h
e
s
S
O
L
S
o
l
e
n
o
i
d
s
S
T
M
B
A
N
K

U
N
I
T
H
V
P
S

C
T
M
B
D
M
B
M
M
o
t
o
r
s
M
M
M
o
t
o
r
s
M
o
t
o
r
s
P
F
C S
O
L
S
o
l
e
n
o
i
d
sM
M
o
t
o
r
s
S
t
e
p
p
e
r

M
o
t
o
r
s
S
T
M
B
A
N
K

S
W
I
T
C
H
M
F
a
n
s
L
C
T
O
P
T
I
O
N
S
F
I
N
I
S
H
E
R
B
I
C
U
I
O
B
B132D981.WMF
BOARDS
SM 6-7 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

6.2.2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS
BICU (Base Engine and Image Control Unit)
The BICU is the main control board and controls these functions:
Engine sequence control (all sensors, motors, fusing temperature control circuits)
Image processing control (on the IPU)
Scanning control
GW controller interface
Peripheral timing control

GW Controller and Mother Board
The controller board controls all the options. It contains the GW architecture ASICs,
and connects to the BICU and PCI interface. During copying, the mother board
stores compressed data, and controls these items:
Operation panel interface
Key card interface
Storage of SC information in NVRAM.
The controller board also has SD card sockets. These are used for these functions:
Download firmware for updates
Copy optional firmware onto one SD card. (Copied from Slot 3 to Slot 2.)
Hold the firmware for the printer or printer/scanner option. (The firmware is
stored on the SD card in Slot 2.)
Hold the machine system firmware (this is on the SD card in Slot 1, which must
never be removed.

IOB (I/O Control Board)
The I/O control board controls these items:
Input and output ports for all sensors, motors, solenoids
All drivers
High voltage power supply
Analog input signals. Converts analog data to 10-bit digital data. The CPU on the
BICU reads this data.
BOARDS
B132/B200 6-8 SM

SBU (Sensor Board Unit)
The SBU does the following:
Takes the analog signals from the CCD and converts them to digital.
Sends serial data to the BICU.
Sends signals from the main CPU to the SIOB, to control the scanner
components.

SIOB (Scanner I/O Board)
This board controls all the sensors in the scanner unit and the scanner motor. The
CPU controls this board through the interfaces on the SBU and the BICU.

LDB (Laser Diode Drive Board)
This board contains the driver for the laser diodes.

DRB (Driver Board)
This board contains the circuits for the stepper motors that drive the printer engine,
and distributes electrical power to all the other PCBs.

HDD (Hard Disk Drives)
This board stores all the temporary files for job processing and all permanent files
for the document server.

PSU (Power Supply Unit)
Supplies DC to the machine, and contains the AC supply that controls the power to
the fusing lamps.

BOARDS
SM 6-9 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

6.2.3 CONTROLLER BOX VENTILATION

[A]: HDD cooling fan
[B]: Controller box exhaust fan 1
[C]: Controller box exhaust fan 2
Three fans cool the PCBs in the controller box.
The HDD cooling fan [A] pulls cool air into the bottom of the PCB box.
The controller box exhaust fans [B] and [C] pull the hot air out of the top of the
controller box.

B132D968.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
COPY PROCESS OVERVIEW
B132/B200 6-10 SM

6.3 COPY PROCESS OVERVIEW

This machine has four PCUs in a straight line: Y, M, C, K.
The ITB lift motor raises and lowers the ITB unit.
The ITB lift motor raises ITB for full-color copying. The drum of every PCU
contacts the ITB below.
The ITB lift motor lowers the ITB for black-and-white copying. Only the black
PCU (on the far right) contacts the ITB below.
During black-and-white copying, the drums of the other PCUs (Y, M, C) are
separated from the ITB and do not rotate. This reduces wear on the moving parts
of these PCUs during black-and-white copying.
If a job contains black-and-white pages and full-color pages, the action of the ITB
is controlled by SP5880 001. See section 6.12.3

K M C Y

B132D001.WMF
SM 6-11 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

Here is a general description of the copy process in the black PCU. These
mechanisms are identical in each PCU (Y, C, M, K). (Except for
temperature/humidity sensor) See page 6-79.
1. DRUM CHARGE
In the dark, the charge roller gives a negative charge to the drum. The charge
stays on the surface of the drum because the OPC layer has a high electrical
resistance in the dark.

2. EXPOSURE
A xenon lamp exposes the original. Light reflected from the original passes to
the CCD, where it is converted into an analog data signal. This data is
converted to a digital signal, processed, and stored in the memory. At the time
of printing, the data is taken from the memory and sent to the laser diode. For
multi-copy runs, the original is scanned once and stored in a temporary file on
the hard disk.

3. LASER EXPOSURE
The processed image data from the scanned original is taken from the hard
disk and two laser beams send it to the drum. The lasers write an electrostatic
latent image on the drum surface. The amount of charge remaining as a latent
image on the drum depends on the laser beam pulse duration and the laser
power (controlled by the BICU).
K
B132D984.WMF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
B132/B200 6-12 SM

4. DRUM POTENTIAL SENSOR
The drum potential sensor in each PCU detects the drum potential. Changes in
conditions near the drum (heat, humidity, drum condition) change the drum
potential. The machine uses the output from this sensor to adjust the voltages
that are used during auto process control.

5. DEVELOPMENT
The magnetic developer brush of the development roller contacts the latent
image on the drum surface. Toner particles are electrostatically attracted to the
areas of the drum surface where the laser reduced the negative charge on the
drum.

6. IMAGE TRANSFER
The developed toner images are transferred from the drums to the ITB. Rollers
inside the ITB apply a high positive charge to the reverse side of the ITB. This
positive charge pulls the toner particles from the drum to the ITB.

7. QUENCHING
The light from the quenching lamp electrically neutralizes the charge on the
drum surface. After cleaning and quenching, the drum surface is ready for the
next cycle.

8. DRUM CLEANING
First, a soft cleaning brush roller removes toner from the drum. Next, a
lubrication roller, with a lubricant bar behind it, cleans the drum. Finally, an
opposing cleaning blade removes remaining toner.

9. ID SENSORS, MUSIC SENSORS
Two ID sensors and three MUSIC sensors are in a straight line across the ITB.
At fixed intervals, the laser in each PCU writes an ID sensor pattern on each
drum surface (Y, M, C, K). These patterns are transferred to the ITB. The two
ID sensors above the ITB (one for black and one for Y, M, C) measure the light
reflected from each of the four patterns and output this data (Vsp) to the CPU.
This Vsp is used for toner supply control. The MUSIC sensors read a different
set of patterns to make adjustments to the laser main scan start timing, angle of
the 3
rd
mirror, and the drum drive speeds. The MUSIC sensors ensure that the
alignment of the images on the ITB is correct.

10. PAPER TRANSFER AND SEPARATION
A strong negative charge applied to the PTR idle roller repulses the image from
the ITB onto the paper. A paper discharge plate neutralizes the charge on the
paper and ITB. Then the curvature of the feed path allows the paper to
separate from the ITB.

ARDF
SM 6-13 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

6.4 ARDF
6.4.1 OVERVIEW

1. Original Width Sensors (x 5)
2. Entrance Roller
3. Skew Correction Sensor
4. Separation Sensor
5. Separation Roller
6. Feed Belt
7. Pick-up Roller
8. Upper inverter sensor
9. Original Length Sensor 1
12. Original Tray
13. Exit Tray
14. Upper Inverter Roller
15. Lower Inverter Sensor
16. Upper Junction Gate
17. Exit Roller
18. Lower Inverter Roller
19. Exit Sensor
20. Lower Junction Gate
21. Scanning Exit Roller
22. ARDF Transport Belt
23. ARDF Exposure Glass
24. Registration Sensor
25. Scanning Entrance Roller
26. Interval Sensor
27. 1st Transport Roller

Original Separation and Feed. The standard FRR system for paper separation
and feed. (! Handling Paper> Handling Originals> Document Feed> FRR with
Feed Belt
Original Size Detection. The combinations of 3 original length sensors on the
original tray and 5 original width sensors in the paper feed path are used to detect
the size of originals. (! Handling Paper> Handling Originals> Original Size
Detection> Dynamic Original Size Detection)
Duplex Scanning. Two junction gates (16, 20) control the direction of the original
in the paper path for duplex scanning. (!6.4.10)

B132D119.WMF
1
2
5
6
9
10 11
12
13
14
15
16
18 20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
4
3
7
8
19 17
ARDF
B132/B200 6-14 SM

6.4.2 ARDF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
Components View 1: Sensors

1. Original Width Sensors (" to #)
2. Original Width Sensor 1 (for B6 SEF)
3. Interval Sensor
4. Skew Correction Sensor
5. Separation Sensor
6. Feed Cover Open Sensor
7. Bottom Plate Position Sensor
8. Original Length Sensors (x3)
9. Original Set Sensor
10. Upper Inverter Sensor
11. Lower Inverter Sensor
12. Exit Sensor
13. Bottom Plate HP Sensor

B132D106.WMF
1
2
5
6
7
8
11
12
13
14
$
"
%
LG
A4
B5
&
#
10 9
3
4
ARDF
SM 6-15 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

Components View 2: Motors, Sensors, Other

1. Pick-up Motor
2. Pick-up Roller HP Sensor
3. Exit Motor
4. Feed Motor
5. Bottom Plate Lift Motor
6. ARDF Main Board
7. ARDF Position Sensor
8. APS Start Sensor
9. Upper Inverter Motor
10. ARDF Transport Motor
11. Lower Inverter Motor

B132D107.WMF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
ARDF
B132/B200 6-16 SM

ARDF Components View 3: Drive Motors

1. Pick-up Motor
2. Exit Motor
4. Upper Inverter Motor
5. ARDF Transport Motor
6. Lower Inverter Motor
7. Feed Motor

B132D108.WMF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
ARDF
SM 6-17 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

6.4.3 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION

The original size is detected by 5 width sensors and 3 length sensors.
When the leading edge of the
paper passes the skew
correction sensor, the CPU
reads the outputs from the
original width sensors.
[A]: Original width sensor 1
[B]: Original width sensor 2
[C]: Original width sensor 3
[D]: Original width sensor 4
[E]: Original width sensor 5
[F]: B5 length sensor
[G]: A4 length sensor
[H]: LG length sensor

B132D110.WMF
138 mm (5.4")
191.5 mm (7.5")
230 mm (9.1")
263.5 mm (10.4")
288 mm (11.3")
1
2
3
4
5
B5 A4 LGL
318 mm (12.5")
291 mm (11.5")
240 mm (9.5")
R

B132D971.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
[H]
ARDF
B132/B200 6-18 SM

Original Size Detection Table

Original Width
Sensors
Original Length
Sensors
Region
Size (W x L)
1 2 3 4 5 B5 A4 LG NA EU
A3 SEF (297 x 420 mm) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ' '
B4 SEF (257 x 364 mm) 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 x '
A4 SEF (210 x 297 mm) 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 ' '
A4 LEF (297 x 210 mm) 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 ' '
B5 SEF (182 x 257 mm) 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 x '
B5 LEF (257 x 182 mm) 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 x '
A5 SEF (148 x 210 mm)
*1
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
x '
A5 LEF (210 x 148 mm) 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 x '
B6 SEF (128 x 182 mm)
*1

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
x '
B6 LEF (182 x 128 mm)
*1
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
x '
11" x 17" SEF (DLT) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 $ #
11" x 15" SEF 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 $ x
10" x 14" SEF 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ' '
81/2" x 14" SEF (LG) 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 & x
81/2" x 13" SEF (F4) 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 & '
81/4" x 13" SEF 1 1
0 0 0
1 1 1 (&) x
8" x 13" SEF (F) 1 1
0 0 0
1 1 1 (&)
81/2" x 11" SEF (LT) 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 % (
11" x 81/2" LEF (LT) 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 " )
71/4" x 101/2" SEF 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 ' x
101/2" x 71/4" LEF 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
"
x
8" x 10" SEF (F) 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0
%
x
51/2" x 81/2" SEF (HLT) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
81/2" x 51/2" LEF (HLT) 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 ' x
8 K SEF (267 x 390 mm) 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 x #
16 K SEF (195 x 267 mm) 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 x (
16 K LEF (267 x 195 mm) 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 x )

1: Actuated (ON)
0: Not actuated (OFF)
': Yes. Size detected.
x: No. Size not detected.
$
NA: Detected paper size is set with Bit 0 of SP 6016
"
%
&
NA: Detected paper size is set with Bit 3 of SP 6016. (&): This size can be selected with
SP 5126 (the default for this SP is F4).
#
EU: Detected paper size is set with Bit 0 of SP 6016
(
)

ARDF
SM 6-19 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

Changing the Default Selection with SP6016 and SP5126
Some original sizes are almost the same. The machine cannot detect a difference
between these sizes. Because of this, you can force the machine to detect one size
or the other size with SP6016.
2. Select SP6016.
On the screen you will see an 8-digit binary setting bar: 00000000
The default settings are all "0".
In North America, the size recognition is changed with Bits 3 to 0 (other bits
are ignored):

Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
--- --- --- --- 0 = LG SEF 0 = LT SEF 0 = LT LEF 0 = DLT SEF
--- --- --- --- 1 = SP 5126
(default =
F4 SEF)
1 = 8" x 10" SEF 1 = EXE LEF 1 = 11" x 15" SEF

In Europe, the size recognition is changed with Bits 2 to 0 (other bits are
ignored):

Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
--- --- --- --- --- 0 = LT LEF 0 = LT SEF 0 = DLT SEF
--- --- --- --- --- 1 = 16 Kai LEF 1 = 16 Kai SEF 1 = 8 Kai SEF

ARDF
B132/B200 6-20 SM

6.4.4 PICK-UP ROLLER

[A]: Pick-up roller lift motor
[B]: Cam
[C]: Pick-up roller release lever
[D]: Pick-up roller
[E]: Bottom plate position sensor

When there are no originals, the pick-up roller [D] stays up at the home position.
When an original is put on the tray:
Original set sensor ! On ! Pick-up motor [A] ! On.
Cam [B] releases lever [C] then pick-up roller [D] drops onto the paper.
Pick-up roller [D] feeds an original ! feed belt and separation roller.

The pick-up roller lowers when:
An original is put on the tray.
The trailing edge of the original passes the skew correction sensor, if there are
originals in the ARDF entrance for scanning.

The pick-up roller rises when:
The leading edge of the original passes the skew correction sensor
Power is turned on
The feed cover is opened
An original jam occurs

B132D109.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
ARDF
SM 6-21 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

6.4.5 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT

[A]: Bottom plate lift motor
[B]: Lift lever
[C]: Bottom plate HP sensor

When an original is placed on the original tray:
Original set sensor ! On ! pick-up roller drops
Bottom plate position sensor ([E] on the previous page) ! Off.
Motor [A] lifts lever [B] and raises the bottom plate.

When the bottom plate reaches the correct feed height for feeding:
Bottom plate position sensor ([E] on the previous page) ! On ! Stops bottom
plate lift.
Motor [A] stops

During original feeding:
Pick-up roller descends as the top of the stack lowers
The descended pick-up roller ! bottom plate position sensor ([E] on the previous
page) ! Off
Bottom plate lift motor [A] ! On ! motor [A] raises the stack to the correct
height for feeding
Bottom plate position sensor ([E] on the previous page) ! On
Bottom plate lift motor [A] stops

B132D111.WMF
[A] [B]
[C]
ARDF
B132/B200 6-22 SM

6.4.6 ORIGINAL FEED AND SEPARATION

[A]: Pick-up roller
[B]: Feed belt
[C]: Separation roller
[D]: Separation sensor

Because of this mechanism, the machine does not feed more than one sheet at a
time.
(! Handling Paper> Handling Originals> Document Feed> FRR with Feed Belt)

B132D120.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C] [D]
ARDF
SM 6-23 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

6.4.7 ORIGINAL FEED AND SKEW CORRECTION

[A]: Skew correction sensor
[B]: Entrance roller
[C]: Feed roller (Transport Roller 1)
[D]: Interval sensor
[E]: Scanning entrance roller

After pick-up and separation:
Skew correction sensor [A] detects the leading edge of the original
The detection signal stops the entrance roller [B] for a set number of pulses to
buckle the original and correct skew.
If the originals are small (B6, A5, or HLT) (because small sizes skew easily), and
during duplex scanning for all original sizes:
Interval sensor [D] detects the leading edge of the original
Scanning entrance roller [E] is stopped for the set number of pulses to buckle the
original and correct skew.
Important
The roller [E] stops when B6, A5, or HLT paper is fed.
However, you can use SP6020 to make the roller stop for other paper sizes to
correct skew at this position.

B132D120.WMF
[A]
[B]
[E]
[D]
[C]
ARDF
B132/B200 6-24 SM

6.4.8 SLIP DETECTION

[A]: Separation sensor
[B]: Skew correction sensor

These two sensors are used to measure the amount of slippage and to correct for
this.
The machine measures the time it takes for the original to get to the separation
sensor [A] after the [Start] key is pressed.
If the original arrives at the correct time, it feeds normally.
If the original arrives late, the machine enters the slip mode.
In the slip mode, the machine measures the time for the leading edge of the
original to move from the separation sensor to the skew correction sensor [B].
The machine uses this time to adjust the length of time that the entrance roller
stays off to correct skew. This stops feed for enough time for the original to be in
the correct position for feeding.

B132D120.WMF
[A]
[B]
ARDF
SM 6-25 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

6.4.9 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT (ONE-SIDED)

The pick-up roller [1] feeds the original to the feed belt [2] and separation roller [3].
When the skew correction sensor [4] detects the leading edge of the original, it
stops the feed motor for a set number of pulses to stop the entrance roller [5]. This
buckles the leading edge of the original against the entrance roller to correct skew.
The feed motor increases the speed of 1st transport roller [6] to feed the paper
faster and reduce the interval between the original that was just fed and the original
ahead that is now being scanned.
When the interval sensor [7] detects the leading edge of the original approaching
the scanning entrance roller [8], it slows the rotation of the scanning entrance roller
[8]. To this point the rate of feed is high. The interval sensor slows the paper so it
does not collide with the trailing edge of the paper ahead of it in the paper path.
Next, the transport belt [9] pulls the original across the ARDF scanning glass.
The 2nd transport roller [10] feeds the paper to the exit rollers [11]. The exit rollers
feed to paper out onto the original exit table.

B132D120.WMF
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
10
11
ARDF
B132/B200 6-26 SM

6.4.10 DUPLEX SCANNING

1. Side 1 of original $ is scanned, original * waits. Upper junction gate [A] opens
and sends $ to the upper inverter rollers.

2. Original $ feeds past the upper inverter rollers [B] and stops. Upper inverter
junction gate [C] closes. The upper inverter rollers reverse and feed the original
$ into the feed path.

3. Original $ feeds to rollers [D], where skew is corrected. (!6.4.7) Skew is
corrected only for small paper sizes (B6, A5, HLT). Other sizes can be selected
for this function with SP6020.

1
3

B132D112.WMF
1
3
B132D113.WMF
1
3

B132D114.WMF
$
"
[A]
$
*
[B] [C]
$
*
[D]
ARDF
SM 6-27 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

4. Side 2 of original $ is scanned, lower inverter junction gate [A] opens and
directs $ to lower inverter table [B]. Original " feeds.

5. Steps 1, 2, 3 repeat for original ". Lower inverter junction gate [C] and upper
inverter junction gate [D] remain closed. Lower inverter rollers [E] feed original
$ to exit rollers [F]

6. The exit rollers feed original $ to the original exit tray. Original " is corrected
for skew and is scanned. Skew is corrected only for small paper sizes (B6, A5,
HLT). Other sizes can be selected for this function with SP6020.

3
1
2

B132D115.WMF
B132D117.WMF

B132D118.WMF
$
"
[A] [B]
$
"
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
$
"
ARDF
B132/B200 6-28 SM

6.4.11 ARDF JAM DETECTION
Jam Detection Sensor Layout

Seven sensors detect jams in the original path at P1, P2, and P3 (These notations
appear on the operation panel display when a jam occurs):
[A]: Upper Inverter Sensor
[B]: Separation Sensor
[C]: Skew Correction Sensor
[D]: Interval Sensor
[E]: Registration Sensor
[F]: Exit Sensor
[G]: Lower Inverter Sensor

B132D119.WMF
P1
P2
P3
B132D972.WMF
[A]
[B] [C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
ARDF
SM 6-29 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

Jam Detection Table
The following notations are used in the table below:
Orig. late: Leading edge not detected. The original fails to arrive at the sensor
site at the correct time.
Orig. lag: Trailing edge not detected. The original fails to leave the sensor site at
the correct time.

Area Sensor Jam Type
Separation sensor Orig. late
Skew correction sensor Orig. late
Interval sensor Orig. late
Upper inverter sensor Orig. late
Registration sensor Orig. late
Skew correction sensor Orig. lag
Interval sensor Orig. lag
P1
Upper inverter sensor Orig. lag
Exit sensor Orig. late
Lower inverter sensor Orig. late
Registration sensor Orig. lag
P2
Exit sensor Orig. lag
P3 Lower inverter sensor Orig. lag

If a problem occurs in the ARDF, either SC701 or SC705 will be issued. For details
on SCs, please refer to Section 4 of this manual.

SCANNER UNIT
B132/B200 6-30 SM

6.5 SCANNER UNIT
6.5.1 OVERVIEW

1. Scanner HP Sensor
2. ARDF Exposure Glass
3. White Plate
4. Exposure Lamp (Xenon)
5. Exposure Glass
6. APS2 (Org. Length Sensors 1, 2)
7. APS3 (Org. Length Sensor 3)
8. SBU (CCD: 600 dpi)

9. Scanner Motor
10. Scanner Fan Motor - Right
11. Lens Block
12. Polygon Mirror Motor
13. 1st Scanner
14. APS1 (Org. Width Sensors 1, 2)
15. 2nd Scanner
16. Scanner Fan Motor - Left

The light reflected from the original is sent to the CCD:
1st Mirror> 2nd Mirror> 3rd Mirror> Lens Block> CCD
The lens block consists of the scanner lens and SBU (CCD).
The CCD converts the light that was reflected from the original and converts it to
three color analog signals (R, G, B).
The SBU converts the analog signals to digital signals, then sends the digital
signals to the BICU.
NOTE: The lens block is replaced as a unit and requires no adjustment in the field.

B132D101A.WMF
4 3
1
2
7
8
11
6
5
12
14
9
10
13
15
16
SCANNER UNIT
SM 6-31 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

6.5.2 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION

The machine uses five sensors on three APS boards to detect the size of the
original on the exposure glass.
[A]: APS1. (W1 and W2) detects original width
[B]: APS2. (L1 and L2) detects original length
[C]: APS3. (L3) detects original length
[D]: ARDF position sensor. Detects whether the ARDF is open or closed.
[E]: APS start sensor. Triggers automatic paper size detection.

B132D102.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
SCANNER UNIT
B132/B200 6-32 SM

The table shows the sensor output for each paper size.
If an original is on the exposure glass, you can check the sensor output with
SP4301 (APS Confirm).

A4/A3 LT/DLT L3 L2 L1 W1 W2
SP4301
Display
A3 11" x 17" 1 1 1 1 1 000 11111
B4 1 1 1 1 0 000 11110
A4 SEF 81/2" x 11" 0 1 1 0 0 000 01100
8 x 14" 1 1 1 0 0 000 11100
A4 LEF 11" x 81/2" 0 0 0 1 1 000 00011
B5 SEF 0 0 1 0 0 000 00100
B5 LEF 0 0 0 1 0 000 00010
A5 SEF 51/2" x 81/2" 0 0 0 0 0 000 00000
A5 LEF 81/2" x 51/2" 0 0 0 0 0 000 00000

1: On (Paper Detected), 0: Off (Paper Not Detected)
NOTE: If the original is small (such as A5-LEF), all sensors are off and the
machine shows that the original size cannot be detected. However, you
can force the machine to detect A5/HLT in this situation if you adjust
SP4303 (there are settings for A5/HLT SEF and A5/HLT LEF).
W1
W2
L1 L2 L3
B132D973.WMF
SCANNER UNIT
SM 6-33 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

Detection Timing
When the power is on, the APS sensors are always active, but the CPU checks
their signals only after the platen is lowered.
Book Mode
In the Book mode (when the ARDF is open), the CPU checks the APS sensors and
determines the original size after [Start] is pressed.
ARDF Mode
The CPU checks the APS sensors after the platen is lowered.
By-pass Mode
The APS sensors are ignored when copy paper is fed from the by-pass tray, but
the by-pass tray can handle a variety of sizes and orientations. To accomplish this:
The machine always assumes short-edge feed for paper on the by-pass tray.
Width is measured by a sensor inside the by-pass tray.
The bypass tray cannot measure length, so the registration sensor determines
the length of the paper using clock pulses.

SCANNER UNIT
B132/B200 6-34 SM

6.5.3 SCANNER DRIVE

[A]: Scanner motor (a dc stepper motor) drives the 1st and 2nd scanner with wires
and pulleys.
[B]: 1st scanner
[C]: 2nd scanner
[D]: Scanner HP sensor. Stops and reverses the scanner motor when the scanner
reaches the home position. The machine measures distance from home
position by counting scanner motor pulses.

B132D103.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
SCANNER UNIT
SM 6-35 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

6.5.4 SCANNER UNIT FANS AND ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER

[A]: Scanner cooling fan (front)
[B]: Scanner cooling fan (rear)
[C]: Scanner exhaust fan
[D]: Anti-condensation heater (option)
Condensation on the mirrors can cause:
Running, smearing and image borders
Printing completely black or gray pages
Fans
The scanner cooling fans (front, rear) pull cool air into the scanner unit.
The scanner exhaust fan expels hot air from the scanner unit
Anti-condensation heater turns on:
When the main power switch is turned off.
When the operation switch is turned on.
When the machine enters the auto off mode.

B132D104.WMF
[A]
[C]
[D]
[B]
SCANNER UNIT
B132/B200 6-36 SM

6.5.5 DUST DETECTION
Overview
When an original is put on the original feed table of the ARDF, the ARDF exposure
glass is checked for dust.
The dust check is done before the first original is scanned. This is done only once
at the beginning of a job. The check is not done for originals added during a long
scanning job.
The ARDF transport belt turns with no paper fed across the ARDF scanning glass.
The surface (white) of the ARDF transport belt is scanned. The IPU checks if dust
is present.
If dust is detected, the scanner carriage position for ARDF scanning is moved by
0.7 mm.
The next time that dust is detected, the scanning position is moved again by 0.7
mm.
The third time that dust is detected, the scanning position is not moved. An alert
message is displayed but the job does not stop.
Then, at the start of the next job, the procedure starts again, but the scanner
does not go back to home position.

Start
Do dust detection?
SP4020 001 ON
SP4020 001 OFF
Dust Check Processing
NO
YES
Dust detected?
NO
YES
3 turnovers?
NO
YES
Scan Position Movement
Processing
Alert
display
Copying
No alert
display

B132D974.WMF
SCANNER UNIT
SM 6-37 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

What Happens if Dust is Detected?
If dust is detected, the position where the scanner stops below the ARDF exposure
glass to scan the original is moved by 0.7 mm.
The scanning position can be shifted two times in 0.7 mm increments, towards the
scanning reference point at the upper left corner of the exposure glass.

Home Position a
From Book Read Position: 34 mm
Shift Direction: a ! b ! c

If dust is detected after the scanner has been moved two times, an alert is
displayed, but the job does not stop.
Then, at the start of the next job, the scanner stays at position c. But if dust is
detected at c, the scanner goes back to home position (a) and the dust detection
process starts again.

0.7 mm 0.7 mm
a b c
34 mm
B132D975.WMF
Exposure Glass
Scale
SCANNER UNIT
B132/B200 6-38 SM

How is the Dust Detected?
To detect dust on the ARDF exposure glass, the ARDF transport belt turns and the
CCD scans this belt.
The ARDF transport belt has four grooves cut across it in the main scan direction.
These grooves are recessed. Because of this, they are not easily contaminated
with dust, and they are used as reference points during dust detection. Another
part of the belt could have dust on it, and give an incorrect reference.
NOTE: The illustration shows the belt if it were a perfect circle.

To detect dust, the belt turns one time. The IPU (through the CCD) checks for dust.
If a dark spot is detected for 96% of this rotation, the IPU determines that dust is
present on the ARDF exposure glass.

B132D976.WMF
34 mm
4 mm
Belt Circumference: 136 mm
SCANNER UNIT
SM 6-39 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

The Effects of SP Mode Settings on Dust Detection
The settings of some SP codes control how dust detection is done.
SP4020 001. Switches the dust warning on and off (default: off). When this SP is
on, a warning is issued if the check detects dust on the ARDF scan glass or the
white plate above the scanning glass. Always clean the ARDF scanning glass
and white plate before turning this SP on.
SP4020 002. Adjusts the sensitivity of the check. If you see black streaks in
copies when no warning has been issued, raise the setting to increase the level
of sensitivity. If warnings are issued when you see no black streaks in copies,
lower the setting.
SP4020 003. Sets the level for vertical line correction caused by dust. A high
setting can eliminate unwanted vertical lines caused by dust but it can also thin
out.
SP7852. Displays the count for the number of times the machine has detected
dust on the ARDF scanning glass at the beginning of copy jobs. This SP
operates only after SP4020 001 has been turned on.

NOTE: Dust that triggers a warning could be removed from the glass by the
originals in the feed path. If the dust is removed by passing originals, this is
not detected and the warning remains on.

IMAGE PROCESSING
B132/B200 6-40 SM
6.6 IMAGE PROCESSING
6.6.1 OVERVIEW

PC Card
DSP
ASIC:
GATEX
ASIC:
SGATEX
AD Micon
GASTM
Around CPU
CPU
Flash
SRAM
Line Correction
Image Separation
Original Selection
ACS
ACC
RGB Image Processing :
- Shading Compensation
- Scan Line Correction
- Dot Correction
- Pre-RGB Correction
- Picture Element Correction
- RGB Scanner Correction
- Filtering
- ADS
- UCR
- Saturation/Hue Correction
Color Correction
Main Scan Mag.
Sub Scan Interval Correction
Digitization
Mask
Compression
Decompression
Printer Gamma Correction
Gradation Processing
Exposure I/F
P
C
I

I
/
F
YCMK Image Processing
ARDF
LVDS rsv.
Lamp, Motor, Sensor
Scanner Control
CCD
Analog
AD Conversion
LVDS drv.
SBU
Fusing
ID Sensors
Temp/Humidity
CPU Bus
XDF_FGATE
IPU (BICU)
UART
I
2
C
ID Chip VGAVD1 VGAVD2
Sync.
Serial
GW
Controller
Controller
Options
Operation
Panel
64-bit
PCI Bus
: ASIC Chips
ARIES
ORION DFID
LIBRA
VSBCNT
UBIC
IOB
B132D982.WMF
IMAGE PROCESSING
SM 6-41 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

6.6.2 SBU (SENSOR BOARD UNIT)
SBU
The VPU (Video Processor Unit) does the following functions:
Black level correction
White level correction
Gradation calibration
ADS control (Background Density)
Creating the SBU test pattern

Operation Summary
The signals from the 3-line CCD, one line for each color (R, G, B) and 2 analog
signals per line (ODD, EVEN), are sampled by the ASIC and converted to digital
signals in the 10-bit A/D converter. This is the first phase of processing the data
scanned from the original.

Storing Operation Settings
The controller stores the SBU settings. These values must be restored after the
lens block is replaced:

SP4008 001 Sub Scan Mag Sub Scan Magnification Adjustment
SP4010 001 Sub Scan Reg Sub Scan Registration Adjustment
SP4011 001 Main Scan Reg Main Scan Registration Adjustment

Also, before lens block replacement, enter the SP mode and note the settings of
SP4800 001 to 003 (ARDF density adjustments for R, G, B). After lens block
replacement, do some copy samples with the ARDF, then check the copies. If the
copies have background, change SP4800 001 to 003 to their previous settings, or
adjust until the background is acceptable. These SP codes are also used to adjust
the ARDF scanning density, if the scanning densities of the ARDF and the platen
mode are not the same.

SBU Test Mode
There are two SP codes to create a test pattern which can be used as a diagnostic
tool to troubleshoot problems in the SBU:
SP4907 001 SBU Pattern - Test Pattern
SP4907 002 SBU Pattern - Select Fixed Pattern
To print the pattern:
Select the pattern to print.
Touch "Copy Window" then press the Start key twice.

IMAGE PROCESSING
B132/B200 6-42 SM

6.6.3 IPU (IMAGE PROCESSING UNIT)
The IPU does the following:
Controls the scanner
Processes the image signals from the SBU and sends them over the PCI bus to
the controller memory
Receives the image processing signals sent over the PCI bus from the controller
memory, processes them, then outputs them to the VGAVD.
Outputs the control signals for the ARDF
Controls the relay of power and signals

Image processing, ADS correction, and line width correction are done on the BICU
board for all the digital data sent from the SBU. Finally, the processed data is sent
to the printer as digital signals (2 bits/pixel).

LASER UNIT
SM 6-43 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

6.7 LASER UNIT
6.7.1 OVERVIEW

NOTE: LSDB = Laser Synchronization Detection Board
1. WTL Lens (C)
2. WTL Lens (Y)
3. Dual-Layer f Lens (C, Y)
4. LSDB (Y Front)
5. LSDB (C Front)
6. LD Unit (C)
7. LD Unit (Y)
8. LD Unit (K)
9. LD Unit (M)
10. LSDB (M Rear)
11. LSDB (K Rear)
12. Dual-Layer f Lens (M, K)
13. WTL Lens (M)
14. WTL Lens (K)
15. LSDB (K Front)
16. LSDB (M Front)
17. LSDB (C Rear)
18. LSDB (Y Rear)

LD Units 4, One two-beam LD unit for each color (C, M,
Y, K)
Line Scan Mechanism Main scanning with polygon mirror
Image Position Correction MUSIC sensor patterns read from ITB with
MUSIC sensors
K M C Y
B132D002.WMF
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
1
2
3
4 5
6
7 8
9
K Y
M
C
Y
C M
K
M
K Y C
LASER UNIT
B132/B200 6-44 SM

6.7.2 LD UNIT
There is an LD unit for each color, and each LD unit uses a two-beam system. A
photo diode (PD) in each LD unit detects the light emitted from the LD unit. The
output of the PD is fed back to the LD control board. The LD control board uses
this information to control the amount of light to make sure that it remains at the
correct level.
Dual Beam Writing
In each LD unit, two beams move across the drum in the main scan direction.
The use of two beams does the following:
Lets the machine print quickly
Reduces the number of turns of the polygon mirror for a page, which gives the
motor a longer life.
Reduces the amount of noise from the motor.
The beam pitch is fixed at 600 dpi and is not adjustable.
LD Safety Switches
To ensure the safety of customers and customer engineers, two switches inside
the cover prevent the laser beams from switching on accidentally. When the front
cover is open, the 5V line connecting each LD driver on the LD control board is
disconnected.

PSU : Power Supply Unit
BICU : Base-engine Image-processing Control Unit
LDB : LD Drive Board (included in the LD Unit)
Front Door Switch Unit
(Upper Left)
+5 V
BICU
PSU
LD Driver IC (Y)
LDB (Y)
SW 2 SW 3
CN123-3
CN123-4
CN325-A1
CN325-A2
CN2-14 (Y)
CN2-15 (Y)
LD Driver IC (C)
LDB (C)
CN325-B1
CN325-B2
LD Driver IC (M)
LDB (M)
CN324-A1
CN324-A2
LD Driver IC (K)
LDB (K)
CN324-B1
CN324-B2
CN300-3
CN300-4
CN301-1
CN301-2
CN2-14 (C)
CN2-15 (C)
CN2-14 (M)
CN2-15 (M)
CN2-14 (K)
CN2-15 (K)
LD 1 (Y) LD 2 (Y)
LD 1 (C) LD 2 (C)
LD 1 (M) LD 2 (M)
LD 1 (K) LD 2 (K)
SW3

B132D900.WMF
LASER UNIT
SM 6-45 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

6.7.3 OPTICAL PATHS

1. WTL Lens (Y)
2. WTL Lens (C)
3. Dual-layer f Lens (C, Y)
4. Polygon Mirror Motor
5. Dual-layer f Lens (M, K)
6. WTL Lens (M)
7. WTL Lens (K)
8. Dust-shield Glass

K M C Y
B132D001.WMF
1
2
3
4 5 6 7
8
9
10
11

$
"
%
LASER UNIT
B132/B200 6-46 SM

Optical Path
All four latent images (C, M, Y, K) are written at approximately the same time. The
laser diode turn-on times for each color are timed with drum rotation and paper
feed. Refer to the illustration on the previous page. The optical path for each color
is as follows:

Cylindrical lens (laser beam correction in each LD unit) (Not shown)

Polygon mirror (main scanning line) 4

F lens (dot position correction) 3

1st Mirror
$

WTL lens (surface distortion correction) 2

2nd Mirror
"

3rd Mirror
%

Dust-shield Glass 10

Drum

Each f lens has two layers. Because of this, it can correct both beams from the LD
units. Each WTL lens corrects for image distortion.
The polygon mirror turns at high speed. The laser beams are reflected from the
polygon mirror to a pair of mirrors (upper and lower), then to one more mirror and
out to the drum through the dust-shield glass. The polygon mirror has six faces.
The polygon mirror motor rotates at 33,307 rpm for full-color and for black-and-
white copying.
Important: Because of its high rotation speed, the mirror continues to turn for
about 3 minutes after the machine is turned off. Allow enough time for the mirror to
stop before you start to remove the polygon motor.

LASER UNIT
SM 6-47 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

6.7.4 IMAGE POSITION CORRECTION (MUSIC)
What does MUSIC do?
MUSIC is the Mirror Unit for Skew and Interval Correction. Three MUSIC sensors
above the ITB read three MUSIC sensor patterns made by the machine on the ITB.
The machine uses the results to adjust:
The machine adjusts the start timing for the laser at the start of the main scan.
This adjusts the main scan. If skew is detected in the main scan direction, the
machine adjusts the angles of the 3
rd
mirrors (C, M, and Y only).
The speed of the drum motors to correct the intervals between the patterns. This
adjusts the sub scan.
If the vertical alignment of the patterns is not correct, or if the intervals are not
correct, this causes color registration errors.
The MUSIC adjustment is done for each color (Y, M, C, K).
When is MUSIC done?
Normally, MUSIC executes automatically:
Immediately after the machine is turned on or returns from an energy save mode.
At the start of a job, if the temperature in the laser exposure unit changed since
the end of the job by the amount set with SP2153 012 (Default: 1.5 C)
If the cover is open for longer than the time set with SP2153 015 (Default: 8 min.)
After process control (enable/disable with SP2153 002).
Every 100 pages during a long color job (you can change the interval with
SP2153 010) if the temperature in the laser exposure unit has changed since the
end of the most recent MUSIC adjustment by the amount set with SP2153 012
(Default: 1.5
o
C)
Forced MUSIC (manually by the user or a technician)
User Tools Maintenance Color Registration
SP 2111 001
Important
Immediately after the machine is turned on, MUSIC requires time to complete
processing. But you can do a black-and-white job immediately.
If a job is started before the MUSIC process has completed, a message ("Now
Self Checking") will appear on the operation panel display.
The job will not be done until the MUSIC process is finished. Wait for MUSIC to
complete.

LASER UNIT
B132/B200 6-48 SM
Location of the MUSIC Sensors

The sensors [A] are below the ITB.
A roller [B] opposite the sensors pushes the transfer belt against the sensors. This
makes sure that the sensors read the patterns accurately.

B132D301.WMF
[A]
[B]
LASER UNIT
SM 6-49 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

How is MUSIC Done?

[A]: Rear MUSIC sensor
[B]: Center MUSIC sensor
[C]: Front MUSIC sensor
[D]: Main scan MUSIC patterns
[E]: Sub scan MUSIC patterns
The MUSIC sensors [A], [B], and [C] read the
MUSIC patterns from the ITB.
The main scan MUSIC sensor pattern [D]
consists of patches for each color (M, C, Y)
beside the black (K) color patch.
The sub scan MUSIC sensor pattern [E] consists
of patches for each color (M, C, Y) above a black
(K) patch.

This diagram shows a close-up view of the main-
scan test pattern.
K is the reference, and the positions of CMY are
adjusted with reference to the K pattern.
The CMY patterns are vertical (shown in grey in
the diagram), but the K pattern overlaps the CMY
patterns as shown.
The MUSIC sensor response is measured. The
output is the lowest when the K pattern fully
overlaps the color pattern (the dotted lines in the
diagram cross at this point). This is the Actual
position as shown in the diagram. But there is a
Target value in the machines software (an
example is shown on the diagram; this is not the
real target, it is just an example to explain the
process). The machine compares the Actual and
Target values, and adjusts the laser timing in
response to the results of this comparison.
Skew is also measured in the main scan direction
using the patterns at the left and right of the ITB. If
skew is detected, the machine adjusts the angle of
the 3
rd
mirrors.

Y
K
M
K
C
K
M
C
Y

B132D969.WMF

B132D969A.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
Target
Actual
Sensor Output
Vertical Position
in Test Pattern
LASER UNIT
B132/B200 6-50 SM

This diagram shows a close-up view of the sub-scan test pattern.
K is the reference, and the positions of CMY are adjusted with reference to the K
pattern.
The CMY patterns are at constant intervals, but the K pattern overlaps the CMY
patterns as shown.
The MUSIC sensor response is measured. The output is the lowest when the K
pattern fully overlaps the color pattern (the dotted lines in the diagram cross at this
point). This is the Actual position as shown in the diagram. But there is a Target
value in the machines software (an example is shown on the diagram; this is not
the real target, it is just an example to explain the process). The machine compares
the Actual and Target values, and adjusts the main motor speed in response to
the results of this comparison.
B132D970A.WMF
Target
Actual
Sensor Output
Vertical Position in
the Test Pattern
LASER UNIT
SM 6-51 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

3rd Mirror Position Adjustment

1. 3rd Mirror (Y)
2. 3rd Mirror (C)
3. 3rd Mirror (M)
4. Mirror Adjustment Motors ($"%)
5. Temperature Sensors

Each color Yellow [1], Cyan [2], Magenta [3] has a mirror. The machine uses the
mirror motors ($"%) to adjust the position of each mirror to correct color
registration errors on the ITB in the main scan direction. Color registration errors
occur if all four color-toner images do not cover each other exactly on the ITB.
The 3rd mirror for black (K) does not have an adjustment motor. (The position of
black toner on the ITB is used as a reference point to adjust the positions of the
other colors.)
Exposure Unit Temperature Sensors
There are temperature sensors [5] near the f lenses to monitor the temperature
inside the exposure unit.
The f lenses are made of plastic. The magnification ratio of plastic lenses may
vary slightly with temperature. The CPU uses the feedback from these temperature
sensors to adjust the mirror positions during MUSIC calibration. This corrects color
registration errors on the ITB.

B132D003.WMF
1
2
4
$
"
%
3
5
PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS (PCU)
B132/B200 6-52 SM

6.8 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS (PCU)
6.8.1 OVERVIEW OF TANDEM PCU UNITS

1. Laser Unit
2. Development Unit (Y)
3. Drum (Y)
4. Development Unit (C)
5. Drum (C)
6. Development Unit (M)
7. Drum (M)
8. Development Unit (K)
9. Drum (K)
10. ITB

Four PCUs $ " % & (Y, C, M, K) are arranged in tandem. There is one PCU for
each color. The image that is developed on the drum transfers to the ITB (10). All
four colors transfer during the same rotation of the ITB. Then the color images
transfer to the paper. The color images are transferred from the PCUs to the ITB in
the order Y, C, M, K.
Each PCU contains identical components. The only difference is that the K PCU
has a temperature sensor that is used to correct process control parameters
(charge roller voltage, for example).

:
K M C
Y
B132D001.WMF
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
10
$ " % &
SM 6-53 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

6.8.2 AROUND THE DRUM

1. Developer Cartridge
2. Development Roller
3. Potential Sensor
4. Charge Roller Cleaning Roller
5. Charge Roller
6. Cleaning Blade
7. Lubricant Bar
8. Lubricant Brush Roller
9. Cleaning Brush Roller
10. Waste Toner Collection Coil
11. Quenching Lamp (QL)
12. Drum
13. TD Sensor
14. Developer Augers

Drum dimensions 60 mm
Drum drive Drum motor. An independent drum motor for each PCU
drives the drum for each color.
Drum charge Charge roller method with charge cleaning roller
Drum cleaning Cleaning brush roller and cleaning blade mounted
opposite to direction of drum rotation
Waste toner Transported away from the drum by a waste toner
collection coil.

NOTE: The drum unit does not contain an ID sensor.

B132D977.WMF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
14
12
13
B132/B200 6-54 SM

Drum Drive

[A]: Drum motor
[B]: Drum motor coupling
[C]: Drum shaft

Each PCU (Y, C, M, K) has an independent drum motor.
The drum motor [A] rotates the drum motor coupling [B] and drum motor shaft [C].
During black-and-white copying and printing, only the black drum (K) rotates. The
other color drums (Y, M, C) do not rotate.
The drum shaft must be locked with a special tool attached to the front end of the
shaft in order to remove the drum motor. The special tool is attached to the
bottom of the PCU stand. For more, please refer to Section "3. Removal and
Replacement".

B132D204.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
SM 6-55 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

Drum Charge

[A]: Drum
[B]: Charge roller
[C]: Charge roller cleaning roller
The charger roller [B] above the drum [A] charges the drum.
The charge roller cleaning roller [C] touches the charge roller and cleans it.
A gear on the rear of the drum shaft turns the charge roller in the opposite
direction of the drum.
The gap between drum and charge roller is 0.05 mm.
The charge roller is the same length as the drum to ensure an even charge along
the entire length of the drum.
The charge roller receives its charge from the charge roller power pack. The
power pack is connected at a receptacle attached to the rear end of the charge
roller shaft.

B132D204.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
B132/B200 6-56 SM

Drum Cleaning

Each drum unit has a cleaning brush roller [A] and a cleaning blade [F] to remove
toner from the drum after image transfer.
[A]: Cleaning brush roller
Turns counter-clockwise, brushes unused toner from the drum surface, and
pushes the toner into a well where it is caught by the waste toner coil
[B]: Waste toner coil
The rotation of this spiral coil moves the waste toner away from the drum
toward the waste toner port
[C]: Waste toner port
The toner is moved away from this port to the waste toner collection bottle.
(!6.10)
[D]: Lubricant brush roller
To improve the efficiency of cleaning, the rotating lubricant brush roller
lubricates the surface of the drum.
[E]: Lubricant bar
Provides the lubricant transferred to the drum surface by the lubricant brush
roller.
[F]: Cleaning blade
A counter blade in direct contact with the drum surface, gently scrapes away
remaining toner from the surface of the drum after the lubricant brush roller
cleaning and lubrication.

B132D203.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
SM 6-57 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

Drum Ventilation

A Peltier unit [A] on the right side of the copier dries air before it is sent through a
common duct [B] to the PCUs. This prevents condensation around the drums.
The polarity of this Peltier is set so the left side [C] is the cold side and the right [D]
is the hot side.
The Peltier intake fan [E] pulls air into the machine. The air passes through the cold
side where the moisture condenses and drains into a small reservoir [F]. The four
PCU fan motors $, ", %, & (Y, M, C, K). pull the dried air from the common duct
into the PCUs to keep dry the air around the drums.
The moisture is absorbed by an absorbent pad (not shown) below the Peltier unit.
The hot laminated plates on the right side of the Peltier unit evaporate the moisture.
The Peltier circulation fan [G] sends the hot air out of the machine.

B132D214.WMF
$
"
%
&
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
B132/B200 6-58 SM

The temperature/humidity sensor in the black PCU detects the relative humidity
inside the machine.
When the relative humidity stays at 60% for 10 minutes:
1) The Peltier unit turns ON.
2) The Peltier circulation fan and PCU fans turn on together and run at half-
speed.
3) The Peltier cooling fan turns on and runs at full speed.
The operation changes when the relative humidity goes below 50% for 5 minutes:
1) The Peltier unit turns OFF.
2) The Peltier circulation fan turns OFF.
When the humidity stays below 50% for another 5 minutes:
1) The Peltier cooling fan turns OFF.
2) The PCU fans turn OFF.

SM 6-59 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

Ozone Ventilation

The ozone fan [A] pulls air from around the drums through the ozone filter [B] and
then expels the filtered air from the machine.

B132D962.WMF
[A]
[B]
B132/B200 6-60 SM

6.8.3 DEVELOPMENT UNIT
Overview

[A]: Developer Cartridge
[B]: Developer Augers
[C]: Development Roller
[D]: TD Sensor

Development method Dual-component development
Agitation Two augers
Development unit drive PCU motor, 1 motor for each PCU (Y, C, M, K)
Development bias Development bias power pack

B132D211.WMF
[A]
[C]
[B]
[D]
SM 6-61 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

Development Unit Operation

[A]: Developer Cartridge
[B]: Developer Augers
[C]: Development Roller
[D]: Doctor Blade
[E]: Development Bias Terminal
Each PCU is supplied by a separate developer cartridge [A] (Y, C, M, K). When a
new developer cartridge is installed and the tape is removed, all the developer falls
into the development unit, across the full width of the development unit. Toner is
supplied through a small square port at the front of the development unit (see
section 6.9).
Two development augers [B] cross-mix the toner from the toner cartridge with the
developer and then send the mixture to the development roller.
The magnetic development roller [C] pulls the developer-toner mixture onto its
surface as it rotates.
Near the top of the development unit, the doctor blade [D] cuts and smoothes the
developer-toner mixture to the correct thickness.
The bias from the development bias power pack is applied to the development bias
terminal [E] that is attached to the shaft of the development roller

B132D212.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
B132/B200 6-62 SM

Development, PCU Unit Drive

[A]: PCU Motor
A motor and timing belt behind each PCU drives all the rollers in the PCU.
(The drum is driven by the drum motor.)
[B]: Timing Belt
[C]: Development Augers
[D]: Development Roller
[E]: Cleaning Brush Roller
[F]: Lubricant Brush Roller

B132D213.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
TONER SUPPLY
SM 6-63 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

6.9 TONER SUPPLY
6.9.1 OVERVIEW
Each PCU has a toner supply unit.

1. Toner Cartridge (STC)
2. Flexible Tubing
3. Toner Pump
4. Toner Pump Clutch
5. Sub Hopper
6. Sub Hopper Clutch
7. Toner End Sensor

Toner supply: Sub hopper, sub hopper clutch
Toner transport: Toner pump, toner pump clutch
Toner container Soft Toner Cartridge (STC), sides collapse
automatically as toner is pumped from each cartridge
Toner level detection Toner end sensor
Toner cartridge ID Built-in chip identifies color and type of cartridge, to
prevent installation at incorrect location.

B132D906.BMP
1
2
3 4
5
6
7
TONER SUPPLY
B132/B200 6-64 SM

1. Toner Cartridge (STC)
Four toner cartridges are set in the toner hopper. They are inserted left to right
in this order Y, C, M, K.
2. Flexible Tubing
A flexible tube connects the toner cartridge to the toner pump.
3. Toner Pump
Consists of a rotor mounted on a drive shaft that creates a vacuum between
itself and the toner cartridge. The rotor is idle until it is engaged by the toner
pump clutch.
4. Toner Pump Clutch
The toner pump clutch is driven by the toner hopper motor. This clutch engages
the drive shaft and rotor of the toner pump when more toner is needed.
5. Sub Hopper
Receives the toner from the toner pump. The sub hopper functions as a
reserve tank for the development unit.
6. Sub Hopper Clutch
The sub hopper clutch is driven by the toner hopper motor. Engages the toner
supply auger in the sub hopper to send the toner from the sub hopper into the
development unit below.
7. Toner End Sensor
This sensor is on the sub hopper, and detects toner end. The number of pages
that can be printed is based on page count or pixel count, whichever limit is
exceeded first.
8. Toner Hopper Motor
The toner hopper motor is on the right side of the toner hopper. This motor
drives all the toner pump clutches and sub hopper clutches in each toner
hopper (Y, M, C, K).

TONER SUPPLY
SM 6-65 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

6.9.2 TONER SUPPLY MECHANISM

The toner pump [A] pulls toner into the sub hopper [B] from the toner cartridge [C],
through the flexible tube [D]. The toner hopper motor controls the mechanism,
through the toner pump clutch [E].
Toner cartridge ! sub hopper
The toner pump supplies toner to the sub hopper. If the toner end sensor [K] output
detects "No Toner", the toner pump switches on for 2 seconds, and pumps toner
from the toner cartridge to the sub hopper.
Sub hopper ! development unit
Based on the toner coverage of the previous print (detected by the TD sensor) the
machine determines how much toner was consumed, compares it with the amount
remaining, and then switches on the toner supply clutch for the correct time to
increase the amount of toner in the development unit.
The toner supply augers [F] move toner from the hopper [G] into the development
unit [H]. The toner hopper motor [I] controls the mechanism through the toner
supply clutch [J].

B132D216.WMF

B132D217.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
[H]
[I]
[J]
[K]
TONER SUPPLY
B132/B200 6-66 SM

6.9.3 TONER CARTRIDGE

[A]: Shutter pin
[B]: Toner supply port plug
[C]: Toner supply port
[D]: ID chip
Each toner cartridge is installed in a bin of the toner hopper.
When the bin door is closed, a shutter pin [A] forces open a plug [B]. This opens
the toner supply port [C] and toner can flow from the cartridge.
When the cartridge is removed from the machine, the plug [B] moves to its original
position and covers the toner supply port of the toner cartridge. This prevents toner
leakage from the bottom of the STC when the STC is removed.
The sides of a toner cartridge gradually collapse as toner is pulled out of the
cartridge by the toner pump.
The built-in ID chip [D] near the toner supply port holds information about the color
and type of toner, the location of the factory where it was produced, and other
information.
B132D219.WMF

B132D218.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
Collapsible Sides
TONER SUPPLY
SM 6-67 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

An STC must be set with its color ID label [A] facing out.
If an STC is inserted with its label facing into the machine, this will cause a "Toner
Cartridge Setting Error".
Important
At elevations 1,000 meters (3,280 ft.) above sea level, the toner cartridge packs
may expand due to the difference in air pressure, preventing them from being
installed in their bins.
After approximately 24 hours, the cartridges should shrink to normal size.
If the customer cannot wait for the STCs to collapse naturally, the STC Air
Release Kit is available as a service part. For more, contact your technical
supervisor.

B132I108A.WMF
[A]
TONER SUPPLY
B132/B200 6-68 SM

6.9.4 TONER END SENSORS
The toner end sensors are below the sub hoppers for each color
[A]: K (Black)
[B]: M (Magenta)
[C]: C (Cyan)
[D]: Y (Yellow)
The toner end sensor monitors the amount of toner in the sub hopper and issues
the near-end alert when toner runs low in the sub hopper.
Toner near-end
When a toner end sensor detects no toner in a sub hopper, the toner supply clutch
in that sub hopper engages and operates the toner pump for 2 seconds to supply
more toner from the STC to the sub hopper.
If the toner end sensor cannot detect toner in a sub hopper after 10 consecutive
readings, this triggers the toner near-end alert (this number of readings can be
adjusted with SP3411 007 (K) and SP3411 008 (Color)).

B132D217A.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
TONER SUPPLY
SM 6-69 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

Toner end
After a toner near-end alert is output, the number of pages that can be printed until
toner end is determined by the amount of toner that remains in the sub hopper.
After the toner near-end alert has been issued, the toner end alert is issued by one
of two counters, whichever goes over the limit first:
Page count. After the near-end alert, the number of pages that can be printed is
based on page count regardless of coverage. The default is 600 (this can be
adjusted with SP3411 003~004). Up to 10 A4 pages at 5% coverage can be
printed (SP 3411 001-002).
Pixel count (coverage). The number of pages that can be printed is determined
by a calculation of the coverage (30 A4 pages at 100% coverage). The default
setting can be adjusted with SP3411 005~006.
Important
The number of pages that actually print after the toner near-end alert is displayed
varies with paper size and amount of coverage on each page.
Toner End Recovery
After a new cartridge is installed, the machine supplies toner from the new
cartridge to the sub hopper. If the toner end sensor detects that toner was supplied,
the machine goes out of the toner end condition.
WASTE TONER COLLECTION
B132/B200 6-70 SM

6.10 WASTE TONER COLLECTION
6.10.1 WASTE TONER PATH

[A]: Waste Toner Collection Coils
$ PCU (Y)
" PCU (C)
% PCU (M)
& PCU (K)
# ITB Unit
( PTR Unit
[B]: Horizontal Waste Toner Transport Coil
[C]: Vertical Waste Toner Transport Coil
[D]: Diagonal Waste Toner Transport Coil
[E]: Waste Toner Bottle Transport Coil
[F]: Waste Toner Distribution Coil

B132D215.WMF
$
"
%
& #
(
[B]
[C]
[D]
[A]
[E]
[F]
SM 6-71 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

[A]: Waste Toner Collection Coils
Six waste toner collection coils (1 for each PCU and 1 each for the ITB and
transfer roller) transport waste toner away from these components after
cleaning. The PCU motors drive coils $ to &. The PTR motor drives coils #
and (.
$ PCU (Y)
" PCU (C)
% PCU (M)
& PCU (K)
# ITB Unit
( PTR Unit
[B]: Horizontal Waste Toner Transport Coil
Driven by the PTR motor, this transports waste toner from the PCU waste
toner collection coils to the vertical waste toner transport coil.
[C]: Vertical Waste Toner Transport Coil
Driven by a parallel vertical shaft connected to the waste toner bottle transport
motor, this transports waste toner from the horizontal waste toner collection
coil to the central collection point above the waste toner bottle.
[D]: Diagonal Waste Toner Transport Coil
Driven by the PTR motor, this transports waste toner from the ITB unit and
PTR unit waste toner collection coils to the central collection point above the
waste toner bottle.
[E]: Waste Toner Bottle Transport Coil
Driven by the waste toner bottle transport motor, this transports waste toner
from the central collection point to entrance of the waste toner bottle.
[F]: Waste Toner Bottle Distribution Coil
This coil at the top of the waste toner bottle is driven by the waste toner bottle
near full motor. The coil distributes the waste toner evenly across the length of
the waste toner bottle.

B132/B200 6-72 SM

6.10.2 WASTE TONER UNIT MOTORS

[A]: Waste Toner Transport Motor
Drives the waste toner bottle transport coil [C] and the vertical waste toner
transport coil [D].
[B]: Waste Toner Distribution Motor
Drives the waste toner bottle distribution coil [E]. This motor does not
constantly turn.

B132D220.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
SM 6-73 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

6.10.3 WASTE TONER COLLECTION UNIT SENSORS

Four sensors in the waste toner system monitor the operation of waste toner
collection and trigger an alert on the operation panel or issue an SC code.
[A]: Waste Toner Bottle Set Sensor
[B]: Waste Toner Bottle Near-Full Sensor
[C]: Waste Toner Bottle Full Sensor
[Located on the PTR Motor Bracket]: Waste Toner Lock Sensor

Waste Toner Bottle Set Sensor
This sensor [A] detects the position of the waste toner bottle, and checks if it is set
correctly. When the waste toner bottle is set in the machine, the bottle pushes the
feeler of this sensor away from the sensor and turns the sensor on.
The machine issues SC487 if the waste toner bottle is not installed or if it is not
installed correctly.
B132D221.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
B132/B200 6-74 SM

Waste Toner Bottle Near-Full Sensor
When the level of the waste toner rises high enough:
The pressure of the top of the stack of waste toner pushes a piece of silicone
rubber, then the film pushes a feeler into the gap of the sensor [B].
The blocked sensor signals the machine that the waste toner bottle is nearly full.
The machine issues a near-full alert and switches off the waste toner distribution
motor.
Waste Toner Bottle Full Sensor
Monitors the level of the waste toner in the waste toner bottle. Signals an alert
when the pressure of the waste toner releases the bottle full sensor [C].
After the alert is issued, the machine can print up to 100 additional copies. After
100 copies, the machine issues SC484.
Waste Toner Lock Sensor
This sensor is located on the PTR motor bracket. It detects when the waste toner
bottle transport coil locks and stops rotating because of clogged toner in the waste
toner transport path. The machine issues SC488 if there is no change 3 seconds
after the lock occurs.
Waste Toner Bottle Transport Motor
If the waste toner bottle transport motor does not turn for 600 ms, the motor control
board sends a motor lock signal to the CPU and the machine issues SC485.
PROCESS CONTROL
SM 6-75 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

6.11 PROCESS CONTROL
6.11.1 OVERVIEW
In this machine, there are two processes.
Potential control. Adjusts the image creation process (charge, development
bias, and LD power) to achieve the target toner coverage. During potential
control several series of patterns are created at prescribed times. The potential
sensor and ID sensor read these patterns. The readings of these sensors are
used to determine the development capacity (development gamma), and then
adjust the conditions around the drum to reproduce the best possible images.
Potential control also puts the machine in the best possible condition to begin
toner supply control.
Toner supply control. Detects the amount of toner applied to ID sensor patterns
between pages and adjusts the amount of toner supplied to the development unit
to maintain consistency in the amount of toner.

NOTE: MUSIC (Mirror Unit Skew Interval Correction) done to correct the horizontal
and vertical skewing of the print images on the ITB is not part of process
control.
PROCESS CONTROL
B132/B200 6-76 SM
6.11.2 COMPONENTS USED DURING PROCESS CONTROL
Potential Sensor

There is a potential sensor in each PCU above the surface of the drum.
Each potential sensor consists of a probe and small power pack. A drawer
connector connects the probe and the power pack as shown above.
The potential sensor measures the potential of the drum immediately after it is
charged by the charge roller. It also measures a series of patterns (undeveloped
latent images) exposed on the drum by the laser diodes:
A detector in the center of a very small window measures the strength of the
electrostatic charge on the drum surface. The strengths of the charges vary,
depending on the surface potential of the drum.
A feedback circuit applies voltage to the probe until the strength of this charge
equals (offsets) the strength of the charge on the drum.

B132D901.WMF
Copier PCU
Potential
Sensor Probe
Drum Surface Potential
-900V (Max.)
Transfer Roller
1.5 kV (Normal Use)
5 kV (Transfer)
Development Roller
Range: -350 to -800 dc
def. = -500V
Potential Sensor PP
Max. Output: -1000V
Charge Roller
Drawer
Connector
PROCESS CONTROL
SM 6-77 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

ID Sensors

There are two ID sensors above the surface of the ITB:
The black ID sensor ! (rear) detects the black ID sensor pattern (K).
The color ID sensor " (front) detects the three color ID sensor patterns (M, C, Y).

The black ID sensor is a direct reflection sensor.
The color ID sensor is a combination of a direct reflection sensor and a diffused
reflection sensor. This combination of a direct reflection sensor pair and an
additional diffused reflection sensor achieves more accurate readings for M, C, Y
colors.

40 mm
40 mm
Y M C
K
150 mm
B132D902.WMF
B132D904.BMP
B132D903.BMP
Black ID Sensor Color ID Sensor
Rear
Front
ITB (Image Transfer Belt)
!
"
PROCESS CONTROL
B132/B200 6-78 SM
During process control, the creation of the patterns is timed so the Magenta, Cyan
and Yellow patterns are transferred to the ITB at approximately the same time. The
color ID sensor # then reads the color ID sensor patterns in the order M, C, Y.
Note that the K pattern is read by the black ID sensor $ at approximately the same
time the Magenta pattern is being read.
These ID sensors read the following patterns from the ITB:
10-grade patterns (x4) during process control
16-grade patterns (x4) during process control gamma correction
ID sensor patterns (x4) at 10 page (and other intervals) for toner supply control

PROCESS CONTROL
SM 6-79 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

TD Sensor

There is a TD sensor [A] below the development unit of each PCU.
The TD sensor directly measures the amount of toner in the developer/toner
mixture. Unlike previous machines, this TD sensor is not in direct contact with the
developer/toner mixture.
Vt is the output voltage of the TD sensor. When Vt goes high, toner is added to the
developer to bring Vt back to the Vtref value.

Temperature/Humidity Sensors
Two temperature/humidity sensors are used for process control. One is in the black
PCU, and one is below the waste toner bottle.
Temperature/humidity sensor PCU K
This sensor is in the black PCU (the last PCU on the right).
The output of this sensor is used to:
Set the level of the ac charge applied to the charge roller of each PCU
Set the length of time the agitator in the development unit rotates to mix the
developer and toner.
Controls the Peltier unit
Bottom temperature/humidity sensor
This sensor is below the waste toner bottle.
The output of this sensor is used to control the amount of current applied to the ITB
and paper transfer roller. It is also used to correct the fusing idling temperature.

B132D905.BMP
[A]
PROCESS CONTROL
B132/B200 6-80 SM

List of Process Control Acronyms
The potential control phase of process control involves many adjustments. Here is
list of acronyms used in the descriptions of process control adjustments.

Acronym Description
Cdc Charge dc bias
Vb Development charge bias
Vb%
1
Development charge bias after Vr (residual potential) adjustment
Vd Drum potential after the drum is charged by the charge roller.
Vd%
1
Drum potential after Vr (residual potential) adjustment
Vdhome The electrical potential of the drum after a fixed dc bias (dc 700V) is applied by
the drum charge roller.
Vdp Development potential (Vb Vpl). This is the ability to attract toner to the drum.
Vk Development start voltage (checks the developer at the beginning of process
control to determine whether it has deteriorated)
Vl Light potential. Development potential of areas on the drum exposed by the
laser diodes. Maximum laser power has been applied to the diodes.
Vpl Electrical potential after laser exposure, with 24/63 of maximum laser power
(power is controlled with PWM).
Vpl%
1
Electrical potential (Vpl) after Vr (residual potential) adjustment
Vpp Charge ac bias.
Vr Residual potential
Vsg_dif Vsg after checking the bare surface of the ITB by the diffused reflection sensor.
Vsg ID sensor output after reading bare surface of the ITB
Vsg_reg Vsg after checking the bare surface of the ITB by the direct reflection ID sensor.
Vsp ID sensor output from the most recent ID sensor pattern.
Vt TD sensor output at the present time.
Vtcnt Gain value calculated during TD sensor initialization. This is used to adjust the
Vt (TD sensor output). A large gain increases Vt, and a small gain decreases it.
The result of this calculation is also used to calibrate Vt during TD sensor
initialization.
Vtref Target output of the TD sensor. The machine always tries to adjust the toner
WT% in the developer to bring Vt closer to Vtref.
1
Adjustment done for each color Y, M, C, K

PROCESS CONTROL
SM 6-81 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

Important SP Codes Related to Process Control
This table lists the SP codes that are associated with the most important elements
of process control. For more, please refer to Section "5. Service Tables".

SP3501 001
Potential Control
Type Selection
Initial Range
Target Effect in
Process Control
0: Auto 1: Fixed
Charge
Charge dc bias Cdc SP3576 SP2201 700V 450 to 950V Potential control
Charge ac bias Vpp SP3577 SP2202 2.2 kV 1.8 to 2.4 kV,
2.2 kHz
Prevention of
abnormal images
Exposure
PM (LD power) Ldp SP3581 SP2211 0 117 to +127 Potential control
Development
Development bias Vb SP3575 SP2212 500 V 300 to 800 V Potential control

PROCESS CONTROL
B132/B200 6-82 SM
6.11.3 POTENTIAL CONTROL
When is Potential Control Done?
1. Initial process control self-check. The process control self-check is done
automatically after the machine is turned on, if the pressure roller thermistor
detects that the fusing temperature is below 100C (adjust this temp with
SP3554 001).
NOTE: The initial process control self-check is not done when the machine is
turned on with the front door open.
2. At the end of every job, if the number of pages since the previous
process control is more than the value of SP3551.
There are separate counters for black-and-white and color pages.
Black-and-white: After 250 pages (adjust with SP3551 001)
Color: After 200 pages (adjust with SP3551 002)
Either SP code can be set to "0", which disables this feature.
3. Before ACC (Automatic Color Calibration) The process control self-check is
done after touching [Execute] on the operation panel to start ACC and just
before the ACC pattern prints. However, this operation can be changed with
SP3501 004:

0 Process control self-check is not done before the ACC pattern prints.
1 A partial self-check (only potential control) is done before the ACC pattern prints.
This takes about 24 seconds.
2 The full process control self-check (potential control and toner density control) is
done before the ACC pattern prints (default). This takes between 24 seconds and
180 seconds.
4. Immediately after initialization of the TD sensor. The process control self-
check is done automatically every time a TD sensor is initialized.
Done after SP3801 001-006 is executed (after replacing the developer).
Done after SP3811 is executed (at machine installation, or after replacing
developer). See section 3.5.7 for details on the SPs to do after you replace a
part.
5. Potential control process control self-check. This is done with SP3820 001.
6. Potential control and toner density adjustment process control self-check.
This is done with SP3820 002. This SP must be done manually when the drum
is replaced without replacing the developer at the same time.

PROCESS CONTROL
SM 6-83 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

What is Done During Potential Control?
Refer to 11 x 17 Point to Point sheets for larger view of this diagram.

Pre-Processing
Sensor Check
Potential Control
(Toner Application
Control)
TD Sensor Output
Calibration
Process Control
Gamma Correction
Adjust Vsg
Create 10-Gradation Pattern Potential Sensor Pattern
ID Sensor Reads D eveloped
Pattern on the ITB
Calculate Potential Calculate Toner Amount
Calculate Development Gamma
Calculate Development Potential to Acquire
Targeted Maximum Amount of Toner
Refer to Pointer Table
Get Target Vd
for Charge Roller
Get Target Vpl
for Laser Power
Get Target Vb
for Dev. Bias
Adjust Vd
Adjust Vpl
D eterm ine Settings to C reate
Im age
Drum Charge
DC
Development
Bias DC
LD Power
(PM)
C reate 16-G radation Pattern
ID Sensor Reads Pattern
LD Exposure Value Curve
Plotted
Change Amount of Toner
Calculate LD Gamma Curve
Update Process Control Gamma Table
Potential Control Process Flow Relating SC Codes
*Adjusted for each color (Y, M, C, K)
SC436 to 439: Potential Sensor Error :vd
SC316 to 319: AC Bias Charge Adjustment Error
SC497: Temperature and Humidity Sensor Error
SC497: Temperature and Humidity Sensor Error
SC400: ID Sensor Error 1: Calibration
SC418: LED Error during Vsg Adjustment
SC410 to 413: ID Sensor Error 2 to 5: Development Gamma
SC414 to 417: ID Sensor Error 6 to 9: Development Start Voltage
Update Toner Supply Control
Parameters (During Copy Interval
Process Control Self-Check)
Determine Target Toner Amount Based
Using Development Gamma
Lower
Development
Gamma
Raise
Development
Gamma
Raises the
target setting
of the copy
interval
pattern, and
increases toner
concentration
Lowers the
target setting
of the copy
interval
pattern, and
decreaes toner
concentration
-or-
SC432 to 435: Potential Sensor Error 1 to 4: Vr
SC420 to 423: Potential Sensor Error 1 to 4: Vd Adjustment
SC424 to 427: Potential Sensor Error 5 to 8: Vl Adjustment
SC410 to 413: ID Sensor Error 2 to 5: Development Gamma
SC414 to 417: ID Sensor Error 6 to 9: Development Start Voltage
ID Sensor Detects Potential Sensor Detects
Temperature/Humidity
Sensor Detects
Detect VdHome
Adjust AC Charge
(Charge Roller)
Agitate Developer
Adjust Vsg
Potential Sensor Reads
Unexposed Pattern on Drum
ID Sensor Reads Developed
Pattern on the ITB
Adjust for Residual Potential, Calibrate Vr
Vd* Vb* Vpl*
Adjust Vd Adjust Vpl
ID Sensor Reads Pattern
TD Sensor Detects
Vtcnt/Vtref Calibration
2
1
3
4
5
6 7
8
9
B132D988.WMF
PROCESS CONTROL
B132/B200 6-84 SM
First, a check confirms that all the PCU units are set correctly.
NOTE: Please keep in mind that all the readings and calculations described below
are done in each of the four PCUs. For simplicity, however, the discussions
are limited to what occurs in a single PCU.
! Detect Vdhome
A charge of 700V is applied to the drum. The potential sensor detects the
potential of the drum and checks if the potential sensor, drum, and charge roller are
functioning normally.
If the charge is within the range 700V to 500V, the drum is functioning normally.
Potential Sensor Calibration Errors

SC Codes SP3821 Procon OK? For More Details:
SC436~SC439 15~17 See "Process Control Troubleshooting" in

" Adjust AC Charge
The machine finds the current that is necessary for the optimum AC charge (Vpp).
The optimum charge depends on the ambient temperature and humidity. The
optimum charge for each temperature and humidity range is set with SP2204 (ACC
Charge Correction).
Insufficient charge causes white spotting and too much charge causes toner to film
on the surface of the drum.
This check ensures that the average value of Vpp after 20 samplings is Vpp > 2.8
kV.
AC Charge Errors
SC316~SC319 31~32 See "Process Control Troubleshooting" in

' Adjust Vsg
Before the gradated patterns are read, the strength of the ID sensor output (LED
PWM) is adjusted to bring the value of Vsg_reg to the specified value.
An abnormal condition is detected when:
Before Vsg adjustment begins, Vsg_reg < 0.5V
After Vsg adjustment, Vsg_reg cannot be adjusted to 4.00.2V
ID Sensor Errors
SC400, SC418 21~23 See "Process Control Troubleshooting" in

PROCESS CONTROL
SM 6-85 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

( Calculate Development Gamma
The laser diodes write a 10-grade potential sensor pattern on each drum. To make
the different densities, the machine changes the PWM duty of the laser diodes.
At this step, the development gamma (development capacity) is measured. The
necessary potentials are calculated. Next, the target values (necessary potentials)
for Vd (charge potential), Vb (development bias), and Vpl (drum potential after
exposure) are retrieved from the Potential Reference Table.
At this time:
Development gamma must be in the range 0.3 to 6.0 V
Development start voltage (Vk) must be in the range 150 to 150 V. This
development start voltage is used to indicate whether the developer has
deteriorated. However, this is only a rough measurement that can be affected by
ambient conditions and the condition of other electrical components.
ID Sensor Pattern Detection Errors
SC410~SC413 55~56, 59
SC414~SC417 57~58
See "Process Control Troubleshooting" in

) Adjust for Residual Potential
The laser unit fires at full power (PM = +127, PWM = 63) to compensate for a
possible high residual potential on the drum. Next, the amount of residual potential
is detected, and the charge is adjusted to achieve the target potential.
The detected Vr must be less than 200V.
Vr (Residual Potential) Errors
SC432~SC435 62 See "Process Control Troubleshooting" in

* Adjust Vd
This step adjusts Cdc, the charge applied to adjust dc bias target Vd%. Vd% is the
targeted bias after Vr (residual potential correction).
The targeted potential of Vd% must be within 5V.
Vd (Development Bias) Errors

B132D925.WMF
PROCESS CONTROL
B132/B200 6-86 SM
+ Adjust Vpl
The LD power is adjusted in order to get to the target Vpl% (the Vpl value after
correction for Vr)
After correction for Vr, the value of Vpl% must be within 5V.
Vpl (LD Power) Adjust Errors

, Vtref/Vtcnt Calibration
Vtref calibration: Calibrates Vtref to the value of Vt
Vtcnt calibration: If Vt is not within the range of 2 to 3 V, Vtcnt is changed to
bring it within this range.
This lets the machine use the results of the process control calculations to get the
correct toner amount.
There is no check for abnormal conditions at this step.

- Process Control Gamma Correction
The following adjustments are done, based on the development gamma correction,
to achieve the target values (Vd%, Vl%, Vb%)
To adjust Vd% (drum bias), the voltage of the charge roller is raised.
To adjust Vl% (laser power), the input current of the laser diodes (Ild) is raised.
To adjust Vb. (development bias), the charge on the development roller is
increased.
At this time:
Development gamma must be in the range 0.3 to 6.0.
Development start voltage must be in the range 150 to 150 V.
Potential Control Errors
SC Codes For More Details:
SC410~SC417 See "Process Control Troubleshooting" in Section "4. Troubleshooting".

PROCESS CONTROL
SM 6-87 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

6.11.4 TONER SUPPLY CONTROL
Overview
The toner supply method can be selected with SP3301 001-004.
0: Fixed supply mode (used for testing only; do not use this mode except
during some troubleshooting procedures as described in section 4)
1: PID (Proportional Integral Differentiation) control mode (default)
This section describes only PID control because only PID control is used in the
field.
PID control uses inputs from pixel count, and from the TD and ID sensors. If the TD
or ID sensor is broken, the machine uses PID control with inputs from pixel count
only.
The following three functions comprise toner supply control for this machine.
1. At the end of every job (at the same time as potential control)
This is done if the number of pages since the previous toner supply control is more
than the number that is set with SP 3551.

Black-and-white After 250 pages (adjustable with SP3551 001)
Full color After 200 pages (adjustable with SP3551 002)

Using the development gamma that was calculated during potential control, the
machine determines the target amount of toner (M/A):
Low development gamma: Raises the target image density of the sensor
pattern and increases the toner concentration.
High development gamma: Lowers the target image density of the sensor
pattern and decreases the toner concentration.
PROCESS CONTROL
B132/B200 6-88 SM

2. Page interval process control (Vsp detection between pages)
This function operates only when SP3042 001 (Vtref correction) is set to "ON"
(default). The Vsp ID sensor pattern is created between the page images on the
ITB (Default: Every 10 pages). This interval can be adjusted with SP3171.

[A]: ID Sensor K
[B]: ID Sensor Y, C, M
See Section 6.12.9 for the actual locations of the ID sensors.
The toner M/A is calculated from this sensor pattern after every 10th page:

Target M/A K Toner Uses the setting of SP3161 001.
Y, M, C Toner Uses the settings of SP3531 002 to 004

Toner supply is based on Vt - Vtref
If the pattern is too dark (too much toner):
! Vtref is increased ! Toner supply amount decreases
If the pattern is too light (not enough toner):
! Vtref is reduced ! Toner supply amount increases
Also, the TD sensor detection is done for every page:
If Vt < Vtref, the toner supply amount is lowered.
If Vt > Vtref, the toner supply amount is raised.

Y C
M
K
B132D919.WMF
Image Area
Image Area
Image Area
[A]
[B]
Rear
Front
Belt Rotation
PROCESS CONTROL
SM 6-89 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

Toner Supply Operation Flow

Page Interval Process Control
(SP3042 001 Vtref Calibration Mode ON)
Create ID Sensor Patterns
Read ID Sensor Patterns
Determine Amount of Toner
Compare Reading with Threshold Range for
Toner Adjustment Between Pages
Correct Light Dark
No Action Lower Vtref Raise Vtref
Toner Supply Control Method:
PID Control
GAVD
dpi
Start Print Job
Get Pixel Count TD Sensor Reads
Calculate Image
Coverage
Get Vtref
Toner Supply Time Conversion
(Sub Hopper Clutch ON Time)
Calculate Amount of
Toner
Supply Amount
(Pixel Ratio)
Supply Amount
(Vt Ratio)
Result of Toner Amount Calculation
Toner Supply
(Sub Hopper ClutchON)

B132D921.WMF
IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSFER
B132/B200 6-90 SM

6.12 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSFER
6.12.1 OVERVIEW

1. Image Transfer Rollers
(! Y," C,' M,( K)
2. ITB
3. Transfer Power Pack
4. ITB Drive Roller
5. ID/MUSIC Sensor Roller
6. Belt Pressure Roller
7. Lubricant Bar
8. PTR Cleaning Blade
9. PTR Waste Toner Collection Coil
10. Paper Transfer Roller Cleaning Brush
11. PTR (Paper Transfer Roller)
12. ITB Bias Roller
13. ITB Waste Toner Collection Coil
14. ITB Cleaning Brush Roller
15. ITB Cleaning Blade

B132D301.WMF
10
11
12
13
14
15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 9
! " ' (
SM 6-91 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

1. Image Transfer Rollers (! Y," C,' M,( K)
The positive charge applied by the transfer power pack to these sponge rollers
(one for each PCU) pulls the developed images from the drums down onto the
ITB.
2. ITB
Receives the toner images from the four drums and holds them until they are
transferred to paper. During a full-color job, all the drums (Y, C, M, K) are in
contact with the ITB. During a black-and-white job, the ITB is lowered and the Y,
C, M drums separate from the ITB and only the black (K) drum contacts the ITB.
3. Transfer Power Pack
Applies the positive bias to the image transfer rollers to pull the developed
toner images off the drums and onto the ITB. Also applies a negative bias to
the ITB bias roller to push the images off the ITB and onto the paper.
4. ITB Drive Roller
The ITB drive motor turns this roller, which drives the ITB belt.
5. ID/MUSIC Sensor Roller
This idle roller is directly opposite the two ID sensors and three MUSIC sensors.
It ensures that the belt is positioned correctly close to the sensors for accurate
readings of the ID sensor patterns and MUSIC patterns on the ITB.
6. Belt Pressure Roller
Presses down on the ITB and paper to hold them in place as they enter the nip
between the PTR and PTR idle roller (this is where the images are transferred
from the ITB to paper).
7. Lubricant Bar
Lubricates the PTR to facilitate cleaning.
8. PTR Cleaning Blade
Removes residual toner on the PTR after the PTR cleaning brush roller cleans
the PTR.
9. PTR Waste Toner Collection Coil
Toner removed from the PTR by the PTR cleaning brush roller and PTR
cleaning blade falls into the rotating coils. It is then moved to the transverse
waste toner collection coil and finally to the waste toner bottle.
10. Paper Transfer Roller Cleaning Brush
Removes residual toner from the PTR after the image is transferred from the
ITB to paper.

B132/B200 6-92 SM

11. PTR (Paper Transfer Roller)
Provides pressure when the ITB and paper pass between this roller and the
PTR below during image transfer from ITB to paper.
12. ITB Bias Roller
The transfer power pack applies a negative charge to this roller to push the
negatively-charged toner image from the ITB to the paper.
13. ITB Waste Toner Collection Coil
Toner removed from the ITB by the cleaning brush roller and ITB cleaning
blade falls into the rotating coils. It is then moved to the transverse waste toner
collection coil and finally to the waste toner bottle.
14. ITB Cleaning Brush Roller
Removes residual toner from the ITB after the image is transferred from the ITB
to paper.
15. ITB Cleaning Blade
Removes residual toner from the belt after the ITB cleaning brush roller cleans
the belt.

SM 6-93 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

6.12.2 ITB DRIVE

[A]: ITB drive motor
[B]: ITB drive roller
[C]: ITB

The ITB drive motor [A] drives the ITB drive roller [B]. All the other rollers inside the
ITB are idle rollers.

B132D307.WMF
[A]
[C]
[B]
B132/B200 6-94 SM

6.12.3 ITB LIFT

[A]: ITB lift motor
[B]: ITB lift cam
[C]: ITB lift sensor
[D]: ITB
[E]: Black print position
[F]: Full-color print position

The ITB lift motor [A] (a stepper motor) turns the ITB lift cam [B]. This cam lifts and
lowers the ITB [C]. The operation of the ITB lift motor is controlled by the ITB lift
sensor [D].
When the machine is turned on, the ITB stays at position [E]. The Y, C, M drums
are separated from the ITB.
When Full Color Mode is Selected:
The motor turns the cam until the actuator goes into the ITB lift sensor.
The motor stops.
The raised cam holds the ITB at position [F]. All drums (Y, C, M, K) contact the
ITB.
The machine automatically adjusts the paper feed timing for full color copying
with all the drums.
While the Y, M, C drums are separated from the ITB, they do not turn. This
reduces wear on these drums while they are not being used.

B132D310.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[F]
[E]
SM 6-95 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

When Black-and-White Mode is Selected:
The motor turns the cam until the actuator goes out of the ITB lift sensor.
The motor stops.
With the left side of the ITB down, only the black (K) drum contacts the ITB.
The machine automatically adjusts paper feed timing for black-and-white copying
with only one drum.
The ITB stays down until the next full-color job starts

When ACS Mode is Selected:
If the job has color pages and black-and-white pages, the ITB operation is
controlled by SP 5880 001.
The default is 0 (low productivity). In this mode, the ITB changes position each
time the page type changes. This makes printing slower, but decreases wear on
the color PCUs.
If you set the SP to 1, then the belt will not move away from the color PCUs if a
black-and-white page is next. This makes printing faster, but increases wear on
the color PCUs.
B132/B200 6-96 SM

6.12.4 TRANSFER POWER PACK

[A]: Transfer power pack
[B]: ITB transfer roller terminals !, ", ', (
[C]: Image transfer rollers $, #, /, 0
[D]: ITB
[E]: ITB bias roller terminal
[F]: ITB bias roller

To transfer the images from drum to ITB:
The transfer power pack [A] supplies a positive charge (1 kV 24 to 30 A) to the
image transfer roller terminals [B] !, ", ', (.
The four terminals charge the image transfer rollers [C] $, #, /, 0 which
transfer the charge to the back of the ITB [D].
The positively charged ITB pulls the negatively charged toner off the drums and
onto the ITB.
To transfer the images from ITB to paper:
The transfer power pack [A] supplies a negative charge to the ITB bias roller
terminal [E].
The terminal applies the negative charge to the ITB bias roller [F].
The high negative charge of the ITB bias roller is applied to the back of the ITB.
This repulses the low negative charge of the toner, forcing the images onto the
paper.
NOTE
The transfer power pack supplies the positive charge for image transfer to the
ITB and the negative charge for image transfer from the ITB to paper.
A temperature/humidity sensor under the waste toner bottle motor controls the
amount of the charge applied to the image transfer and ITB bias rollers.

B132D309.WMF
!
"
'
(
$
#
/
0
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
SM 6-97 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

6.12.5 PAPER TRANSFER AND SEPARATION

This machine employs a repulsive force bias system to transfer the image on the
ITB to paper.
The transfer power pack [A] applies a negative bias to the ITB bias roller [B].
The negative bias from the back side of the ITB applies a repulsive force to the
toner on the ITB surface. This repulsive force pushes the toner from the ITB
surface onto the paper.
The PTR [E] is grounded and provides pressure to the back side of the paper
during paper transfer.
This system has two advantages:
The moisture in the paper has no effect on the repulsive bias from the front side
of the paper.
Because the bias is applied from the front side of the paper, the bias can be
applied more effectively, regardless of the level of humidity around the paper.
After the image has been transferred to the paper:
The paper discharge plate [C] (connected to the separation power pack) applies
an ac charge to neutralize the charges on the paper and the ITB.
Next, curvature separation at [D] separates the paper from the belt when the ITB
makes its abrupt turn toward the top of the machine for the next copy cycle.

P . P

B132D304.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
B132/B200 6-98 SM

6.12.6 PTR CLEANING

[A]: PTR brush cleaning roller
[B]: PTR
[C]: PTR cleaning blade
[D]: PTR lubricant bar
[E]: PTR waste toner collection coil
[F]: PTR motor

The brush cleaning roller [A], driven by the PTR motor [F], removes toner from the
PTR [B] because these rollers rotate in opposite directions.
The PTR cleaning blade [C] removes toner that remains after brush cleaning.
The PTR lubricant bar [D] lubricates the surface of the PTR to facilitate cleaning.
The removed toner falls into the PTR waste toner collection coil [E]. The coils move
the toner to the transverse waste toner collection coil at the back of the machine,
and this coil sends the waste toner to the waste toner bottle.

B132D303.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
SM 6-99 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

6.12.7 ITB CLEANING

[A]: ITB brush cleaning roller
[B]: ITB
[C]: ITB cleaning blade
[D]: Brush roller cleaning roller
[E]: Waste toner collection coil

The PTR motor (16.12.6) rotates the ITB brush cleaning roller [A] against the
bottom of the ITB [B] while it passes above.
The ITB cleaning blade [C] removes toner that remains on the belt after the brush
roller cleaning.
The brush roller cleaning roller [D] removes toner from the rotating brush roller.
Toner removed from the ITB falls into the rotating waste toner collection coil [E].
The coil moves the toner to the transverse waste toner collection coil at the back of
the machine. This coil sends the waste toner to the waste toner bottle.
There is no lubricant bar.

B132D306.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
B132/B200 6-100 SM

6.12.8 ITB SPEED CONTROL

[A]: MUSIC sensors !, ", '
ID Sensor K (, ID Sensor Y, M, C ) (16.7.4, 6.11.3)
[B]: ITB position sensor 1
[C]: ITB position sensor 2
[D]: ITB encoder strip
For full color and black-and-white printing on plain paper, and for thin paper, the
ITB speed is 282 mm/s.
For OHPs, and Thick Paper 1 and 2, the speed is 141 mm/s (1/2 speed).
NOTE: For OHPs, the fusing unit line speed is 100 mm/s (1/3 speed). (16.14.1)
The machine uses three MUSIC sensors [A] to control the speed of the drum motor
to prevent color registration errors during full color printing. (See section 6.7.4.)
There are two ITB position sensors Sensor 1 [B] and Sensor 2 [C] above the
encoder strip scale [D] on the rear edge of the ITB.
ITB position sensor 1 monitors the belt speed. The CPU uses this information to
adjust the speed of the belt to account for eccentricity of the image transfer roller,
differences in the thickness of the belt, belt slippage, and the load placed on the
ITB by friction between the rollers at paper transfer.
ITB position sensor 2, located 20 mm from sensor 1, ensures that the number of
gradations on the edge of the ITB in this 20 mm gap remain constant. This
detects stretching or shrinking of the belt, and the ITB drive motor speed is
adjusted to compensate.

B132D308.WMF
!
'
[A]
[D]
[B]
[C]
"
)
(
SM 6-101 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

6.12.9 ITB VENTILATION

The image transfer fan [A] draws in cool air and blows it across the top of the
drawer unit to cool the ITB.

B132D967.WMF
[A]
PAPER FEED
B132/B200 6-102 SM

6.13 PAPER FEED
6.13.1 OVERVIEW

1. Tandem Tray (Tray 1)
2. Left Tray Paper Sensor
7. Upper Relay Roller
8. Registration Roller
9. Double-Feed Sensor
11. Double Feed Detection LED
12. By-pass Tray
13. Relay Sensor
14. Lower Relay Roller
15. Pick Up Roller
16. Feed Roller
17. Grip Roller
18. Paper Feed Sensor

NOTE: Items (15)~(19) use the standard FRR feed system, which is used for
Trays 1, 2, and 3. This machine uses motor on/off time (not clutches) to
control paper feed.

B132D600A.WMF
1
2
3
4
5
11
12
14
15
16
13
17
6
9
10
7
8
18
19
PAPER FEED
SM 6-103 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

Tray Capacities
The machine has four paper trays:
Tandem LCT (Tray 1). 1550 + 1550 sheets
Universal Tray (Tray 2) 550 sheets
Universal Tray (Tray 3) 550 sheets
By-pass feed tray. 100 sheets.
Built-in Feed Stations
Paper feed and separation. Standard FRR system with a torque limiter for
paper separation and feed. Each tray has an independent stepper motor to drive
its paper feed mechanisms. ! Handling Paper> Paper Feed Methods>
Forward and Reverse Roller (FRR)
Tray lift motors. Provided for each tray, easily disengage when a tray is
removed and engage once again when the tray is re-installed. In trays 2 and 3,
the lift of the motors on the bottom plates is also used for paper near-end
detection.
Tandem tray paper end. A sensor near the top of the right rail detects paper
near end and another sensor under the bottom tray detects paper end after the
last sheet is fed. Three paper height sensors, on the left rail, are actuated as the
actuator rises with the bottom plate. The combinations of actuating and de-
actuating these sensors as the plate rises are used to detect the paper supply
display on the operation panel.
Paper size detection. For the tandem tray (Tray 1), an SP setting is required
(SP 5959 001). For the universal trays (Tray 2, 3), there is size detection switch
on each tray.
Vertical Transport. A grip roller at each feed station feeds the paper into the
vertical paper path.
Heaters. There are two anti-condensation heaters for the built-in paper feed
stations.
By-pass Feed
Capacity: 100 sheets.
Paper feed and separation: Standard FRR system with a torque limiter for
paper separation and feed. By-pass tray motor and clutch.
Paper end detection: Photointerrupter and feeler.
Size detection: Side fence is used for width detection, registration sensor pulse
count is used for length detection.
Thick paper feed: The by-pass feed clutch switches on twice.
Paper Registration
Paper is guided to the registration roller from five sources: the 3 built-in paper
trays, 1 by-pass tray, and 1 duplex tray.
There is a mylar strip over the entire length of the registration roller.
Jam Removal
Pulling out a paper tray releases the pressure on the rollers, making it easy to
remove paper jams.
PAPER FEED
B132/B200 6-104 SM

6.13.2 DRIVE

An independent paper feed motor [A] drives the rollers in each tray. The motor also
drives grip rollers [B], which pull the paper out of the tray. This mechanism is
identical for each tray.
A vertical transport sensor [C] at each feed station detects paper jams.
The paper feed motors of each tray drive the vertical transport rollers, opposite to
each feed station (not shown).
The lower relay motor [D] drives the lower relay roller [E], halfway between trays 1
and 2. The lower relay roller is added here because the paper path is very long.
The upper relay roller [F] feeds each sheet to the registration roller. The by-pass
feed motor (not shown) drives the upper relay roller [F].
The relay sensor [G], at the top of the vertical transport path, triggers the start of
image exposure on the OPC drum, and detects jams in the paper path.
The transport guide plate [H] swings against the side of the machine and locks in
place.

B132D923.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[G]
[F]
[D]
[E]
[H]
PAPER FEED
SM 6-105 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

6.13.3 TRAY AND PAPER LIFT MECHANISM TRAY 2,3
Bottom Plate Lift

Tray lift operates in this order:
[A]: Tray lift motor switches on
[B]: Coupling rotates
[C]: Pin locks coupling at shaft
[D]: Shaft rotates
[E]: Lift arm raised by the rotation of the shaft
[F]: Bottom plate pushed up by lift arm

NOTE: The universal trays (Tray 2, Tray 3) each have a paper near end sensor
inside the lift motor assembly. The sensor measures the angle of the lift
shaft. There are four possible readings from this sensor, to indicate four
levels of remaining paper.

B132D610.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
PAPER FEED
B132/B200 6-106 SM

Lift Sensor

Tray lift motor ! on, pick-up solenoid [A] ! on, pick-up roller [B] lowers.
When the top sheet of paper reaches the proper paper feed level, actuator [C] on
the pick-up roller support [D] activates the tray lift sensor [E], and the lift motor
stops.
After several paper feeds, the paper level gradually lowers and the lift sensor de-
activates. Next, the lift motor turns on again until the lift sensor once again
activates.
When the tray is pulled out of the feed unit, coupling [F] disengages pin [G] on
shaft [H], and the tray bottom plate [I] drops by its own weight.

B132D934.WMF
B132D935.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D] [E]
[F]
[G]
[H]
[I]
PAPER FEED
SM 6-107 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

6.13.4 PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION MECHANISM
Feed and Separation at Standby: No Paper Present

While waiting for the first sheet to feed and between sheets, the feed roller [A] must
not rotate. However, the grip roller [B] must turn, so that any paper coming up the
vertical transport path can continue to feed. To do this, the paper feed motor [C]
rotates in reverse. The feed roller cannot turn because of a one-way clutch. The
separation roller [D] is free to rotate in the direction shown by the arrow, because
the separation roller solenoid is off.
When the feed motor reverses:

Feed roller [A] ! No rotation
Separation roller [D] ! Free to rotate
Grip roller [B] ! Rotates
The feed motor cannot be replaced easily. Because of this, an assembly is
available as a spare part.
B132D936.WMF
[C]
[B]
[D]
[A]
PAPER FEED
B132/B200 6-108 SM

Paper Feed and Separation

If a paper feed station is not selected, its separation roller solenoid [A] stays off and
the separation roller [B] can turn freely.
When the paper feed station is selected and the start key is pressed, the following
mechanisms activate:
Separation roller solenoid [A] ! separation roller [B] contacts feed roller [E]
Pick-up solenoid [C] ! pick-up roller [F] lowers to contact the paper
Paper feed motor [D] ! turns feed roller [E] ! turns pick-up roller [F] via gear
[G]
When the paper feed sensor [H] detects the leading edge of the paper:
Pick-up solenoid [C] switches off, and pick-up roller [F] lifts.
The feed roller [E] then feeds the sheet to the registration roller.
Note the three one-way clutches [I]: One for the grip roller, one for the feed roller,
and one for the gear [G], which drives the pickup roller.
When the feed motor rotates forward:

Feed roller ! Rotates
Separation
roller
! Rotates in accordance with the FRR principle
! Handling Paper> Paper Feed Methods> Forward and
Reverse Roller (FRR)
Grip roller ! Rotates

B132D937.WMFF
[D]
[A]
[C]
[I]
[F]
[B]
[E]
[H]
[G]
PAPER FEED
SM 6-109 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

Separation Roller Release Mechanism

Normally, the separation roller [A] and feed roller [B] are not in contact. However,
when the feed station is selected, the separation roller solenoid [C] pushes the
separation roller against the feed roller.
This mechanism has advantages:
When the paper feed motor turns on, the separation roller rotates. If the
separation roller is away from the feed roller, it reduces the load on the paper
feed motor and drive mechanism, and it also reduces wear to the rubber surface
of the separation roller caused by friction between the separation roller and the
feed roller.
After a job, paper sometimes remains between the feed and separation rollers. If
the paper tray is pulled out of the machine, this paper might be torn if the two
rollers do not separate.
The operator can easily pull out jammed paper between the feed and separation
rollers if the separation roller is away from the feed roller.
Normally, the feed and separation roller separate when the separation roller
solenoid switches off.
However, if the rollers stick together after paper passes between them, the
separation roller could rotate the feed roller in reverse before the motor and
solenoid switch off. To prevent this, if the feed roller starts to reverse, a small brake
arm [D] on the feed roller shaft rotates down, strikes a stopper, and drives the feed
roller forward slightly to separate it from the separation roller below.
The rollers are composed of rubber and may stick occasionally. This mechanism
prevents excessive wear on the rollers.
B132D938.WMF

B132D939.WMF
[D]
[A]
[C]
[B]
PAPER FEED
B132/B200 6-110 SM

6.13.5 PAPER NEAR-END AND PAPER END TRAYS 2 AND 3

The paper near end sensor is in the lift motor assembly. It can detect four levels of
remaining paper. F
The paper end sensor [A] receives light reflected from the paper below [B] until the
last sheet has been fed. Then, paper end is detected.

For more, see 1 6.13.3.
B132D940.WMF
[A]
[B]
PAPER FEED
SM 6-111 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

6.13.6 PAPER SIZE DETECTION
Tandem Tray (Tray 1)
The tandem tray does not have paper size switches. Every time the paper size is
changed by moving the front and back fences, you must enter the selected paper
size with SP5959-001.
Universal Cassettes (Tray 2, 3)

The output from the switch depends on the position of the dial (see the table on the
following page)
The paper size switch [A] detects the paper size with 5 microswitches. The actuator
plate [B], attached to the rear of the paper tray, actuates the paper size switch, and
the side fence [C] changes position.

B132D616.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
PAPER FEED
B132/B200 6-112 SM
Paper Size Switch Output

Paper Size Switch
12" x 18" SEF 12" x 18" 11111
A3 SEF 297 x 420 mm 11001
B4 SEF 257 x 394 mm 10011
A4 SEF 210 x 297 mm 01001
A4 LEF 210 x 297 mm 11000
B5 SEF 182 x 257 mm 10101
B5 LEF 182 x 257 mm 00011
A5 SEF 148 x 210 mm 11101
A5 LEF 148 x 210 mm 01101
DLT 11" x 17" 11100
LG SEF 8" x 14" 10110
LT SEF 8" x 11" 11010
LT LEF 8" x 11" 01100
HLT SEF 5" x 8 " 01110
HLT LEF 5" x 8 " 11110
F4 8" x 13" 11011
Folio 8" x 13" 01011
F 8" x 13" 01111
Executive LEF 7" x 10 " 10100
Executive SEF 7" x 10 " 00111
8-Kai 267 x 390 mm 00110
16-Kai LEF 267 x 195 mm 10010
16-Kai SEF 195 x 267 mm 10111
0: OFF (Sensor Output HIGH)
1: ON (Sensor Output LOW)
If the user does not put the fences at the correct position, a jam can occur.
To use a paper size that is not in this table, select the size with this user tool:
System Settings> Tray Paper Size. If the paper size is not the same as the setting,
a jam can occur. Note that SP 5112 must be set to enabled or non-standard sizes
cannot be selected for trays 2 and 3.

PAPER FEED
SM 6-113 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

6.13.7 PAPER TRAY HEATERS

Two heaters, one below the tandem tray [A] and one below the bottom tray [B],
prevent condensation around the feed rollers and keep paper dry.
This tray heater turns on automatically:
When the main power switch is turned off
When the machine enters auto off mode
NOTE: These tray heaters are not connected before the machine is shipped from
the factory. The heaters are installed in the machine but their connection is
optional. If the trays are needed, you must connect them at machine installation or
at any time after installation. For more see Section "1. Installation".
B132D608A.WMF
[A]
[B]
PAPER FEED
B132/B200 6-114 SM

6.13.8 TANDEM TRAY TRAY 1
Overview

The left tray [A] and right tray [B] each hold 1,550 sheets. Paper feeds from the
right tray. When the paper in the right tray runs out, paper in the left tray is
automatically pushed into the right tray and paper feed resumes.
Normally, both the right and the left trays are joined together. However, if there is
no paper in the left tray during copying, the left tray can be pulled out to load paper
without interrupting the copy job in progress. The right tray remains in the machine
and paper feed continues.

B132D942.WMF
[A]
[B]
PAPER FEED
SM 6-115 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

Connecting the Left and Right Sides of the Tray

When there is paper in the left tray, lock lever [A] in the left tray catches the pin [B]
in the right tray.
During copying if there is no paper in the left tray:
Right tray lock solenoid [C] turns on, which releases lock lever [A].
The left tray can be pulled out to load paper, even while paper is feeding from the
right tray.
When the tandem tray is drawn out fully while the machine is not copying,
projection [D] pushes up lock lever [A] so both trays separate. This makes paper
loading easier.

B132D943.WMF
B132D944.WMF
B132D945.WMF
[D]
[A]
[C]
[B]
[A]
PAPER FEED
B132/B200 6-116 SM

Paper Lift/Remaining Paper Detection
The machine detects when the 1st tray has been placed in the machine by
monitoring the tray set signal through the connector.

When the machine detects that the tray is in the machine, the right tray paper
sensor [A] (under the tray) checks immediately whether there is paper in the right
tandem tray.
NOTE: This immediate detection saves time. If sensor [1] was not present and the
tray was empty, the bottom plate would have to lift until the 1st tray lift paper end
sensor (at the top of the tray) detected that there was no paper.
The lift operation begins as soon as paper is detected:
1st tray Lift motor [2] ! Coupling gear [3] ! Pin [4] on the lift shaft [5] ! Wires [6]
! Slots at the ends of the tray support rods [7], [8] ! Tray bottom plate [9].
The tray goes up until both of the following occur:
The paper pushes up the pick-up roller and the lift sensor is activated
The paper end sensor at the top of the tray is deactivated.

B132D946.WMF
6
2
3
1
4
8
9
5
7
6
PAPER FEED
SM 6-117 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

Paper remaining: The amount of paper remaining in the tray is detected by which
combination of the three paper height sensors [1] !, ", ' are actuated by the
actuator on the left rail as the bottom plate rises.
With the actuator below paper height sensor ! (the bottom sensor), no sensor is
actuated and the display indicates the tray is full.
When the actuator passes paper height sensor, the display indicates 50% of the
paper supply remaining.
When the actuator passes paper height sensor " (the middle sensor), the
display indicates 30% of the paper supply remaining.
When the actuator passes paper height sensor ' (the top sensor), the display
does not change. This prevents the signal from returning to the off state, which
would indicate 100% of the paper remaining (the same state as when the sensor
is below paper sensor 1.
Paper near-end: Detected when the actuator [2] on the right rail activates the
paper near end sensor [3]. When the actuator passes this sensor, the display
indicates 10% of the paper supply remaining.
Paper end: After the last sheet feeds, the right tray paper sensor [4] below the
bottom of the tray actuates and signals paper end. When paper runs out in the right
tray, the stack must be moved across from the left tray. To do that, the tray must
first be lowered. The 1st tray lift motor [5] reverses until actuator [2] activates the
right tray down sensor [6].
When removing the tray manually, if paper is still present, the tray lowers under its
own weight as follows:
Coupling [7] separates from pin [8] " Tray bottom plate [9] moves down.
Damper [10] lets the tray bottom plate drop slowly.
B132D947.WMF
5
7
4
9
10
2
6
8
!
"
'
3
1
PAPER FEED
B132/B200 6-118 SM

Fence Drive

The side fences [A] of the right tray open only when paper in the left tray goes to
the right tray.
The side fence solenoids [B] turn on and open the side fences. The side fences
move out until the open sensors [C] activate.
After the stack has been moved into the right tray: The side fence solenoids turn off
and the side fences close. The side fences move in until the close sensors [D]
activate. Next, the LCD prompts the operator to set paper in the left side of the
tandem tray.

B132D948.WMF
[B]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[A]
[A]
[C]
[D]
PAPER FEED
SM 6-119 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

Rear Fence Drive

Left tray paper sensor [A] detects paper, right tray paper sensor does not detect
paper:
Rear fence motor [B] (a dc motor in the left tray) turns on and rotates counter-
clockwise
Rear fence motor drives rear fence against the paper stack, paper stack moves
toward right tray
As soon as rear fence starts to move, left ray lock solenoid 2 turns on and locks
lever 3 to hold the left tray in place
Rear fence [C] pushes the paper stack completely into the right tray.
Rear fence return sensor [D] detects the actuator on the rear fence
Motor [B] stops, reverses, and turns clockwise
Rear fence moves back to the left tray until rear fence HP sensor [E] detects the
actuator.
HP sensor turns the rear fence motor off.
As soon as rear fence stops moving, left tray lock solenoid 2 turns off and
releases lever 3 to unlock the left tray.

B132D949.WMF
B132D950.WMF
[E]
[A]
[D]
[C]
[B]
!
"
PAPER FEED
B132/B200 6-120 SM

Tray Side-to-side Positioning

When the feed tray is set in the paper feed unit, the side-to-side positioning plate
[A] presses the feed tray against the stopper [B].
By moving the positioning plate, the tray position can be changed to adjust the
side-to-side registration.

B132D951.WMF
B132D952.WMF
[A]
[B]
PAPER FEED
SM 6-121 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

6.13.9 TRAY POSITIONING MECHANISM TRAYS 1 TO 3

When the tray is placed in the paper feed unit, the lock lever [A] drops behind the
lock plate [B] on the support bracket to lock the tray in the proper position.

B132D953.WMF
[A]
[B]
PAPER FEED
B132/B200 6-122 SM

6.13.10 BY-PASS TRAY
By-pass Feed and Separation

The by-pass tray [A] opens from the right side of the machine.
Bypass Tray Operation Sequence:
Bypass feed motor [B]! By-pass feed clutch [C]! Pick-up roller [D] Pick-up
solenoid (see the next page)! Feed roller [E] and separation roller [F]
The by-pass tray uses the standard FRR feed system. (! Handling Paper>
Paper Feed Methods> Forward and Reverse Roller (FRR) or By-pass Feed
Tray)
NOTE: The direction of feed in the by-pass tray is opposite from that of the other
paper trays, so their parts (with the exception of the separation roller) are
not interchangeable.

B132D954.WMF

B132D603.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
PAPER FEED
SM 6-123 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

By-pass Tray Paper End Detection

When the paper runs out, the paper end feeler [A] drops through the cutout in the
by-pass paper end sensor [B].

B132D604.WMF
[A]
[B]
PAPER FEED
B132/B200 6-124 SM

By-pass Paper Size Detection

Paper Width
When the front fence [A] and rear fence [B] are moved to the sides of the paper in
the bypass tray:
The metal actuator [C] moves to a position on the sensor strip [D].
The machine reads the position of the actuator on the strip to determine the
paper size.
Paper Length
Paper length is determined with pulse counts read from the registration sensor.
NOTE: Use SP1007 to check the size of the paper detected in the by-pass tray if
paper is skewing during feeding.
B132D602.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
PAPER FEED
SM 6-125 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

The operator can specify non-standard paper sizes for feeding from the by-pass
tray. The size must be within the range shown in the illustration.

NOTE:
Use SP1905 to adjust the by-pass feed clutch operation if thick paper often jams
at the registration roller. For more, see 5. Service Tables.
Use SP5150 to enable paper length up to 600 mm (23.6").

B132D955.WMF
148~457 mm (5.8" ~ 17.9")
100 ~ 305 mm (3.9" x 12")
PAPER FEED
B132/B200 6-126 SM

6.13.11 PAPER REGISTRATION
Overview

The registration rollers [A] and registration sensor [B] handle paper fed from six
sources:
[C]: Tandem tray and two universal trays
[D]: Duplex unit
[E]: By-pass tray
The by-pass tray feeds paper directly to the registration rollers.
The grip rollers [F] feed paper from the trays into the vertical transport path to the
registration rollers.
The upper relay roller [G] feeds all paper exiting the vertical transport path. It also
feeds paper from the duplex unit and LCT.

B132D941.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
PAPER FEED
SM 6-127 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

Paper Registration Drive

The registration motor [A] stops when the registration sensor [B] detects the paper
at the registration rollers [C].
Because the paper is still feeding, the paper buckles against the registration rollers
and corrects skew.
NOTE: Use SP1003 to adjust the registration motor timing for each paper feed
station or the duplex tray. For details see 5. Service Tables.

Two mylars $ and # at the registration rollers
collect dust from the paper and other rollers to
reduce the amount of paper dust in the paper feed
path after the registration rollers.

B132D607.WMF

B132D940.BMP
[A]
[B]
[C]
PAPER FEED
B132/B200 6-128 SM

Jam Removal at Paper Registration

If a paper misfeed occurs between the vertical transport rollers and the registration
rollers, the next sheet is already on its way up from the paper tray. The paper in the
feed path must be stopped to avoid paper jams.
When a jam occurs, a guide plate falls open to divert paper into the duplex tray.
When the registration sensor signals that a jam has occurred at the registration
rollers:
Guide plate solenoid [A] turns on and raises lever [B].
Lock lever [C] on the guide plate releases pin [D] on the rear side frame
The guide plate [E] falls open. The open plate diverts paper from the feed path
below into the duplex tray.
As soon as the guide plate opens, actuator [F] on the guide plate activates the
guide plate position sensor [G]
The operator must remove the paper jammed in the feed path, remove the diverted
paper in the duplex tray, and close the guide plate.
To prevent the guide plate from being left open, copying is disabled and a caution
is displayed on the LCD panel as long as the guide plate remains open with the
guide plate sensor activated.

B132D617.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[G]
[G]
[F]
[F]
PAPER FEED
SM 6-129 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

6.13.12 PAPER TYPE AND DOUBLE-FEED DETECTION

[A]: Registration Rollers
[B]: Double-Feed Sensor 1 (LED)
[C]: Double-Feed Sensor 2 (Receptor)

After skew correction at the registration rollers, a pair of sensors checks the
translucence of each sheet. This function makes sure that each sheet of paper fed
is of the same type and also detects double-feeds. If a sheet of a different type or a
double-feed is detected, the machine stops the job and a copy jam error message
is shown.
After buckle adjustment, double-feed sensor 1 [B] (an LED) emits light that passes
through the sheet above. The light is received by double-feed sensor 2 [C].

B132D941.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
PAPER FEED
B132/B200 6-130 SM

The amount of light received by the double-feed sensor is referred to a lookup table
that stores the values of the translucence of paper types.
Paper type check. If the amount of light measured is within the range of
translucence for the paper selected for the copy job, no action is taken. If the
value is out of range, the machine stops the job.
Double-feed check. The translucence of the paper at the registration roller is
compared to the reading of the previous sheet. If the translucence of the sheet at
the registration rollers is less than that of the previous sheet (greater opacity), the
CPU determines that a double-feed has occurred and stops the job.
In either case, after the job halts, the sheets must be cleared, just as if a jam
occurred at the registration rollers.
SP1110 001-012 enables/disables double-feed and paper type detection for the
paper feed sources (trays 1 to 3, the LCT, and bypass tray). For more, see
Section 5. Service Tables.
You can also switch these features on and with User Tool settings:
[User Tools/Counter]> System Settings> Tray Paper Setting> Next (3 times)>
Double Feed Detect/Paper Type Detect> Off (or On)> for Bypass Tray; Tray 1, 2,
3; or LCT.

PAPER FEED
SM 6-131 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

Paper Types
The machine can distinguish between the following paper types using the output
from the double-feed sensors.

Paper Type Selection
(UP Mode)
Paper Weight Range
g/m
2

Translucence
OHP --- HIGH
Tracing Paper ---
Thin Paper 14 to 19 lb Bond
52 to 71 g/m
2

Normal 19 to 33 lb Bond
72 to 126 g/m
2

Thick Paper 1 33 to 41 lb Bond
127 to 156 g/m
2

Thick Paper 2 41 to 68 lb Bond
157 to 256 g/m
2

LOW

The paper type selection is reset during the following:
When the machine is switched off and on, the paper type setting for the bypass
tray is reset. The paper type settings for other trays are not reset.
When the tray is set, or LCT cover is set
When using bypass feed (paper set in the bypass tray)
After a double-feed error and the paper has been removed
When the paper type setting is changed.
UP Mode Settings
The operator can select either "Paper Type Detection" or "Double-Feed Detection"
in the Operator Tools (UP) mode for each paper feed station (default: ON).
Neither paper type recognition nor double-feed detection operates when feeding
paper shorter than 160 mm from the from the bypass tray.
Paper type detection operates only for paper types that are available for this
feature ("None", "Recycled", "Tracing Paper", or "OHP") is selected. For example,
this function cannot operate for these paper type selections: Reused, Color Paper,
Adhesive Labels, Tab Paper.
For slip sheet mode, the tray that contains the slip sheets must be set to OFF with
the user tools for Paper Type Detection" or "Double-Feed Detection".

FUSING, PAPER EXIT
B132/B200 6-132 SM

6.14 FUSING, PAPER EXIT
6.14.1 OVERVIEW

1. Cleaning Roller Fusing Belt
Lubrication Roller
2. Fusing Lamp (x1 Hot Roller)
3. Thermistor (Hot Roller)
4. Thermostat (Hot Roller)
5. Fusing Belt
6. Heating Roller (28.5)
7. Fusing Lamps (x2 Heating Roller)
8. Thermostat (Heating Roller)
9. Heating Roller Temperature Sensor
10. Thermostat (Pressure Roller)
11. Thermistor (Pressure Roller)
12. Fusing Lamp (x1 Pressure Roller)
13. Pressure Roller (50)
14. Pressure Roller Cleaning Roller Felt
15. Accordion Jam Sensor
16. Fusing Exit Sensor
17. Pressure Roller Strippers
18. Fusing Belt Strippers
19. Hot Roller (52)
20. Fusing Belt Lubrication Roller

Fusing Lamps
Hot Roller ! 350W
Heating Roller " ' 590W
Pressure Roller ( 350W

B132D401.WMF
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
1
2
3
4 5
6 7
13
!
12
8
9
10
11
"
'
(
FUSING, PAPER EXIT
SM 6-133 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

The fusing belt system applies heat to the belt at three points: the hot roller, the
heating roller, and the pressure roller. This allows the use of smaller rollers and
conserves space. As less pressure is necessary during fusing, less torque is
required.
The fusing belt, composed of silicone and Teflon layers, applies heat directly to
fuse the toner to the paper.
The heating roller is an aluminum roller with two fusing lamps (590W + 590W). It
applies heat to the fusing belt after it passes the hot roller, and maintains the
heat of the fusing belt while the machine is in standby mode.
The pressure roller has a metal core to provide rigidity, and is covered with
Teflon to prevent toner from adhering to its surface. It applies heat with one
fusing lamp (350W) to maintain the temperature of the fusing belt while the
machine is in standby mode.
The accordion jam sensor detects accordion jams where the paper exits at the
nip between the hot roller and pressure roller.
The fusing exit sensor detects jams at the fusing exit by confirming that paper
arrives the fusing exit at the correct time.
The hot roller is a solid rubber roller with one fusing lamp (350W) that heats and
drives the fusing belt. Maintains the temperature of the fusing belt while the
machine is in the standby mode.
The fusing/exit motor speed depends on the paper type, as shown in the table
below.
Paper Type Selection
(User Tools)
Paper Weight Range
g/m
2

Line Speed
Thin 14 to 19 lb Bond
52 to 71 g/m
2

282 mm/s
Normal 19 to 33 lb Bond
72 to 126 g/m
2

282 mm/s
Thick 1 33 to 41 lb Bond
127 to 156 g/m
2

141 mm/s
Thick 2 41 to 68 lb Bond
157 to 256 g/m
2

141 mm/s
OHP --- 100 mm/s

THERMISTORS, THERMOSTATS
B132/B200 6-134 SM

6.15 THERMISTORS, THERMOSTATS

1. Hot Roller Thermistor
2. Hot Roller Thermostats
3. Heating Roller Thermostats
4. Pressure Roller Thermistor
5. Heating Roller Temperature Sensor
6. Pressure Roller Thermostats
7. Heating Roller Thermistor

Each roller in the fusing unit has one thermistor and two thermostats.

B132D402.WMF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SM 6-135 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

6.15.1 FUSING UNIT DRIVE

[A]: Fusing/exit motor
[B]: Idle roller
[C]: Hot roller
[D]: Fusing belt
[E]: Heating roller
[F]: Pressure roller

The fusing/exit motor [A] drives the fusing unit.
Fusing exit motor [A]> Idle Roller [B]> Hot Roller [C]> Fusing Belt [D], Heating
Roller [E], Pressure Roller [F].

B132D404.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
B132/B200 6-136 SM

6.15.2 LUBRICATION AND CLEANING

[A]: Fusing belt lubrication roller
[B]: Fusing belt
[C]: Hot roller
[D]: Cleaning roller fusing belt lubrication roller
[E]: Pressure roller cleaning felt roller
[F]: Pressure roller
The fusing unit uses two lubrication rollers saturated with silicone oil to prevent
toner and paper dust from clinging to the fusing belt.
The fusing belt lubrication roller [A], contacts the fusing belt [B] above the hot roller
[C]. This lubrication roller applies a very thin coat of silicone oil to the fusing belt
where the belt contacts the roller.
A cleaning roller [D] cleans the surface of the fusing belt lubrication roller.
The cleaning felt roller [E] cleans the surface of the pressure roller [F].

B132D401.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
SM 6-137 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

Stripper Retraction

The pawls of the fusing belt strippers [A] and pressure roller strippers [B] touch the
surfaces of the fusing belt and pressure roller during normal operation.
These strippers are held in place with small springs. If paper does not separate
from the fusing belt at [C], for example, the point of the stripper separates the
paper from the fusing belt.
The strippers retract immediately under the slightest pressure [D] if an accordion
jam occurs. This prevents the points of the strippers from damaging the surfaces of
the fusing belt or the pressure roller if a jam occurs where the paper emerges from
the nip of the hot roller and pressure roller.
The accordion jam sensor [E] checks for jams around the fusing unit strippers
when:
The machine is turned on
The front door is opened and closed

B132D980.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
B132/B200 6-138 SM
6.15.3 FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL
Basic Temperature Control
The fusing unit has four fusing lamps: one in the hot roller (350W), two in the
heating roller (590W x2), and one in the pressure roller (350W).
The heating roller is the main source of heat to the fusing belt for fusing.
The hot roller provides additional heat for fusing.
The pressure roller maintains the temperature of the fusing belt while the
machine is in standby mode.
The feedback from these thermistors controls the fusing temperature.
Heating roller A temperature sensor located at the center and a thermistor at
the front end of the heating roller.
Hot roller A thermistor located at the front end of the hot roller.
Pressure roller A thermistor located at the center of the pressure roller.

SM 6-139 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

Temperature Control Graph

Heating Roller Temperature
Hot Roller Temperature
Pressure Roller Temperature

This table shows how temperature control is done in the different operation modes.
Heating Roller Hot Roller Pressure Roller Mode
C F C F C F
Plain Paper B&W 175 (175) 347 (347) 160 (120) 320 (248)
FC 175 (175) 347 (347) 160 (120) 320 (248)
Thick Paper 1 B&W 175 (175) 347 (347) 160 (120) 320 (248)
FC 175 (175) 347 (347) 160 (120) 320 (248)
Thick Paper 2 B&W 180 356 160 (120) 320 (248)
FC 180 356 160 (120) 320 (248)
OHP B&W 170 338 100 212
FC 170 338 100 212
Thin Paper B&W 160 (160) 320 (320) 150 (120) 302 (248)
FC 160 (160) 320 (320) 150 (120) 302 (248)
Idling Start 160 320
Ready (machine ready;
lamps on, rollers turning)
180 356

165 329
Standby (between jobs) 177 351 145 269.6 152 306
Low Power Mode -185 -333 -50 -90 -60 -108 Energy
Save
Off Mode Off Off Off

Notes:
The parentheses indicate the temperatures for duplexing. Example: 150 (120)
120C during duplexing.
If a part of the table is blank, it means that the lamp is not used. For example, the
hot roller lamp is only used during standby (between jobs).

B132D131.WMF
CPM Down
Power ON Idling Start Machine Ready Job Start Job End
Standby Standby
B132/B200 6-140 SM
Correction for Machine Internal Temperature
If the temperature inside the machine is less than 20 C, all target fusing
temperatures are increased by 5 C.
If the temperature inside the machine is more than 20 C, the standby temperature
is decreased by 5 C.
The temperature inside the machine is measured with the temperature sensor that
is near the waste toner bottle.

Copy Speed Reduction (CPM Down Mode)
During copying, the target temperature is 175 C (plain paper).
If the room temperature is low (less than 10 C), the fusing unit temperature can
become low as well.
To compensate for this, copy speed is reduced, as explained below.
After 20 copies, if the fusing unit temperature is 165 C or less, the copier goes into
1st CPM Down Mode. At this time, the copy speed decreases to 55 cpm (black-
and-white) and 30 cpm (color).
After 10 more copies, if the fusing unit temperature is less than 165 C, the copier
goes into 2nd CPM Down Mode. At this time, the copy speed decreases to 45
cpm (black-and-white) and 25 cpm (color).
If the fusing temperature increases to 175 C, the copier speed goes back up one
level (to 1st CPM Down Mode, or to full copying speed).
SM 6-141 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

6.15.4 FUSING UNIT VENTILATION

[A]: Fusing unit
[B]: Heat sink
[C]: Fusing cooling fan
[D]: Fusing exhaust fan
Heat rising from the fusing unit [A] collects around a heat sink [B]. The heat sink
contains pipes with water that help to cool the hot air.
The fusing cooling fan [C] pulls cool air into the machine and blows it over the heat
sink. The fusing exhaust fan [D] pulls the heated air away from the heat sink and
expels it through a vent.

B132D964.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
DUPLEX UNIT
B132/B200 6-142 SM

6.16 DUPLEX UNIT
6.16.1 OVERVIEW

1. Relay Sensor
2. Inverter Entrance Roller
3. Reverse Trigger Roller
4. Jogger Fences
5. Duplex Transport Sensor 3
6. Duplex Transport Rollers 3, 4
7. Duplex Transport Roller 2
9. Duplex Transport Roller 1
11. Duplex Inverter Sensor
12. Inverter Exit Roller
13. Duplex Junction Gate

For one-sided printing, pages are fed out face-down (default). For face-down
output, the inverter junction gate sends the page to the inverter, and the inverter
inverts the page.
If the operator selected duplex mode, the inverter inverts the page, then the duplex
junction gate directs the page into the duplex unit. The duplex unit feeds the page
back to the machine to print on the second side.

B132D501.WMF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 9
10
11
12
13
Rev. 10/2007
DUPLEX UNIT
SM 6-143 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

6.16.2 DUPLEX DRIVE

Fusing/exit motor [1] ! Timing belt [2] ! Inverter entrance roller [3]
Duplex inverter motor [4] ! Timing belt ! Transport rollers 1, 2 [5] + duplex
positioning roller [6]
Duplex Inverter motor [4] ! Inverter exit roller [7]
Duplex transport motor [8] ! Timing belt ! transport rollers 3, 4 [9]
Duplex transport clutch [10]:
Stops transport rollers 1, 2 [5] during interleaving !Allows the sheet in front to
be fed out of the duplex unit by motor [8] and rollers [9].
Controlled by the duplex inverter sensor [11]

B132D505.WMF
B132D956.WMF
[5] [9]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[6]
[9]
[7]
[8]
[5]
[10]
[11]
DUPLEX UNIT
B132/B200 6-144 SM

6.16.3 INVERTER OPERATION

Inverter Feed-in and Jogging
Just after the main switch is turned on:
Jogger motor [A] (a stepper motor) moves the jogger fences [B] to home position
(determined by the duplex jogger HP sensor [C]).
When the Start key is pressed:
Motor [A] positions fences [B] 12 mm away from the selected paper size to wait
for the paper.
Inverter entrance roller [D] feeds paper to the jogger section ! The paper
pushes down the junction gate [E].
After the paper passes through the gate:
Motor [A] moves the jogger fences [B] in to square the paper. This happens
every page.
Next, the jogger fences move back to the previous position (12 mm away from
the paper)

B132D506.WMF

B132D507.WMF
[D]
[E]
[A]
[B]
[C]
DUPLEX UNIT
SM 6-145 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

Inverter Feed-out

[A]: Reverse trigger roller solenoid
[B]: Reverse trigger roller
[C]: Reverse roller
[D]: Paper
[E]: Inverter exit roller
[F]: Relay sensor

After jogging, each page is fed back as follows:
Solenoid [A] pushes down roller [B].
Roller [B] contacts roller [C], catching the paper between the two rollers.
Roller [C] always turns counter-clockwise, and feeds the paper [D] backwards to
roller [E].
When the leading edge of the paper, now caught by roller [E], passes sensor [F],
solenoid [A] switches off and roller [B] returns to its home position.

B132D957.WMF

B132D508.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[F]
DUPLEX UNIT
B132/B200 6-146 SM

6.16.4 DUPLEX TRAY FEED

[A]: Junction gate solenoid
[B]: Duplex junction gate
[C]: Transport rollers 1, 2, 3, 4
[D]: Duplex transport sensors 1, 2, 3
After inversion:
If duplex mode is not selected, the duplex junction gate solenoid [A] does not
switch on to open the duplex junction gate [B]. The paper goes to the output tray
or finisher face down.
If duplex mode is selected, after the paper leaves the inverter, the solenoid [A]
switches on and opens the junction gate [B]. The paper goes down to the duplex
tray.

B132D958.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
DUPLEX UNIT
SM 6-147 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

6.16.5 DUPLEX INTERLEAVE FEED
The number of sheets that can be processed at a time depends on the size of the
paper. The table below shows the order of page processing for a 14-page job. Odd
numbers are the front sides of the pages, even numbers are the back sides.

Order of Page Processing 4
Scanning Order 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
A4/LT LEF or
smaller
*1

1 3 5 2 7 4 9 6 11 8 13 10 12 14
Longer than
A4/LT(LEF)
*2

1 3 2 5 4 7 6 9 8 11 10 13 12 14

*1
: 3 pages can be interleave processed at once.
*2
: Only 2 pages can be interleave processed at once.

The following diagrams show where the 7 sheets are located at every step during a
14-page duplex print job with A4/LT LEF paper (three pages can be in the feed
path at once).

1. First 3 sheets 567 fed.
1) 1st sheet, front page printed (pg. 1)
2) 2nd sheet, front page printed (pg. 3)
3) 3rd sheet, front page printed (pg. 5)

2. 1st, 2nd, 3rd sheet fed to duplex tray
and inverter table.
3. 4th sheet feeds.

B132D959.WMF

B132D960.WMF
DUPLEX UNIT
B132/B200 6-148 SM

4. 1st sheet, back page printed (pg. 2)

5. 4th sheet feeds, front page printed
(pg.7)
6. 1st sheet exits (pp. 1, 2)
7. 4th sheet feeds to duplex tray.
8. 2nd sheet, back page printed (pg.
4)
9. 5th sheet feeds.

10. 2nd sheet exits.
11. 5th sheet, back page printed (pg.
9), feeds to duplex tray.
12. 3rd sheet, back page printed (pg. 6)
13. 6th sheet, front page printed (pg.
11)
14. 4th sheet, back page, (pg. 8), 7th
sheet front page (pg. 13) copied in
order, the process above repeats.

B132D961.WMF

B132D963.WMF

B132D978.WMF
DUPLEX UNIT
SM 6-149 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

6.16.6 DUPLEX UNIT VENTILATION

[A]: Duplex Fan Motor
[B]: Rear Duplex Fan
[C]: Front Duplex Fan

The duplex fan [A] draws cool air into the duplex unit.
The rear duplex fan [B] and front duplex fan [C] expel the heated air through vents
on the left side of the machine.

B132D965.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
PAPER EXIT
B132/B200 6-150 SM

6.17 PAPER EXIT
6.17.1 FACE UP EXIT MECHANISM

[A]: Inverter Junction Gate Solenoid
[B]: Inverter Junction Gate
[C]: Exit Sensor

When the inverter is used (duplex mode, or face-down output):
Inverter junction gate solenoid [A] ! Off
Inverter junction gate [B] ! Open !
Paper goes down to the inverter "

When the inverter is not used (face-up output, or when paper was fed from the
bypass tray):
Inverter junction gate solenoid [A] ! On
Inverter junction gate ' ! Closed
Paper goes up to the output tray (
The exit sensor [C] detects the leading and trailing edge of each sheet as it feeds
out and triggers a jam if the paper is late or stops.

B132D504.WMF
[B]
[A]
!
"
'
(
[C]
PAPER EXIT
SM 6-151 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

6.17.2 DE-CURL MECHANISM

[A]: Heat Pipe Roller
[B]: Exit Rollers
[C]: Heat Pipe Roller Fins
[D]: Cooling Pipe Fan
Immediately after paper leaves the fusing unit, it passes between the heat pipe
roller [A] and the exit rollers [B].
The heat pipe roller absorbs heat from the paper.
Fins [C] attached to the front end of the heat pipe roller conduct heat away from the
heat pipe roller.
The cooling pipe fan [D] draws in cool air and blows it through the fins to dissipate
the heat conducted away from the heat pipe roller.

B132D503.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
PAPER EXIT
B132/B200 6-152 SM

6.17.3 PAPER EXIT COOLING

The paper exit fan [A] draws hot air from the paper exit area and expels it through a
vent on the left side of the machine.

B132D966.WMF
[A]
PAPER EXIT
SM 6-153 B132/B200
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d

D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
s

6.17.4 ENERGY SAVER MODES

When the machine is not being used, the energy saver function reduces power
consumption by decreasing the fusing temperature.
This machine has three types of energy saver mode as follows.
1) Panel-off mode (operation panel off, fusing lamps on)
2) Low power mode (fusing lamps go to a lower temperature)
3) Auto off mode (fusing lamps turn off)

Stand-by Mode
Auto Off Mode
(Sleep Mode, if printer/scanner
installed)
Key Operation
Energy Saver Key ON
-or-
Panel Off Timer (10 s to 999 s / Default: 60 s)
Panel-Off Mode
Low Power Mode
Energy Saver Timer
(1min. to 240 min. / Default: 15 min.)
Return Time Less Than 10s
Operation Panel Key Pushed
Platen Cover Open / Closed
Original Set in ADF, Paper Set in Bypass
Return Time Less Than 4 minutes
Off Mode
Off Stand-by Mode
Printer Data in After Printing
Operation Sw. Off
-or-
Auto Off Timer
(1 min. to 240 min. / Default: 90 min.)
Operation Sw. Off
-or-
Auto Off Timer
Operation Sw. Off
-or-
Auto Off Timer
Return Time Less Than 8 minutes
Operation Switch Pushed
Platen Cover Open / Closed
Original Set in ADF

B132D933.WMF
PAPER EXIT
B132/B200 6-154 SM

These modes are controlled by the following user tools.
Panel off timer: User Tools System Settings Timer Settings Panel Off
Timer (default 60 seconds). Maximum recovery time: 10 seconds
Low power mode timer: User Tools System Settings Timer Settings
Energy Saver Timer (default 15 minutes). Maximum recovery time: 4
minutes
Auto off timer: User Tools System Settings Timer Settings Auto Off
Timer (default 90 minutes). Maximum recovery time: 8 minutes
If the printer and scanner are installed, the machine uses Sleep Mode
instead of Auto Off mode. This is the same as Auto Off Mode, but if a print
job comes in, the printer wakes up to print the data. But if you wish to make
copies, first press the operation switch.

SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
SM 7-1 B132/B200
S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

SPECIFICATIONS
1. MAINFRAME
1.1 COPYING
Configuration Console
Dimensions (w x d x h) (no ARDF) 750 x 850 x 1050 mm (29.5 x 33.5 x 41.3 in.)
Weight (with ARDF) Less than 298 kg (655.6 lb.)
Original Scanning Flatbed with moving 3-line CCD array, image scanning
Copy Process 4-drum dry electrostatic transfer system with internal
transfer belt
Development Dry dual-component magnetic brush development
Fusing Oil-less belt fusing system
B132 Full color 45 cpm
Monochrome 60 cpm
Engine Speed
Monochrome 60 cpm
Monochrome 60 cpm
Duplex Copy Speed
(Single-Sided to Double-Sided)
B200 Full color 55 cpm (45 cpm w/ADF 1-to-1)
Monochrome 60 cpm
B132 Duplex Copy Speed
(Double -Sided to Double-Sided)
B200
Full color 28 cpm or higher
Monochrome 42 cpm or higher
Warm-Up Time 300 sec.
First Copy Full color 7.5 sec.
Monochrome 6.5 sec.
Original Types Sheet, book, object
Max. Original Size A3/11 x 17
Resolution Scanning 600 dpi 10-bit
Copying 600 dpi 6-bit
Printing 600 dpi 4-bit
Max. Image Size 297 x 600 mm (11.7 x 23.6)
Magnification NA 7 Reduction, 5 Enlargement
93%, 85%, 78%, 73%, 65%, 50%, 25%,
121%, 129%, 155%, 200%, 400%
EU, Asia 93%, 82%, 75%, 71%, 65%, 50%, 25%,
115%, 122%, 141%, 200%, 400%
Zoom 25% to 400%
Tray 1 (Tandem tray) 3,100 1,550 x 2
Tray 2 (Universal cassette) 550
Tray 3 (Universal cassette) 550
Bypass tray 100
Max. Capacity (Copier only) 4,300
Paper Capacity (80 g/m
2
or 20 lb.)
Max. Capacity (with LCT) 8,300 LCT: 4,000
Rev. 09/2005
SPECIFICATIONS
B132/B200 7-2 SM

NA 11" x 17", 8" x 14" SEF,
8" x 11" LEF/SEF
Original Size Detection (Book Mode)
EU, Asia A3/A4 SEF, B4 SEF, A4/B5 LEF/SEF,
8 " x 13" SEF (8K, 16K available with SP
mode)
NA 11" x 17", 10" x 14", 8 x 14" SEF
8" x 11", 5" x 8" SEF/LEF
7" x 10", A3 SEF
A4 SEF/LEF
Original Size Detection (ARDF)
EU, Asia A3, B4 SEF
A4, B5, A5, B6 SEF/LEF
8" x 13", 8K SEF
16K SEF
Paper Sizes For more, see "Paper Sizes"
Tray 1 (Tandem tray) 52.3 127.9 g/m
2

14 34 lb. bond
Tray 2 (Universal cassette) 52.3 127.9 g/m
2

14 34 lb. bond
Tray 3 (Universal cassette) 52.3 127.9 g/m
2

14 34 lb. bond
(up to 163 g/m
2
, 44 lb.
index/ 60 lb.)
Bypass 52.3 256 g/m
2

14 68.5 lb. bond
Paper Weight
Duplex mode 64 127.9 g/m
2

17 34 lb. bond
Output Capacity 500 sheet (A4, 8" x 11") With Copy Tray B756
NA 120V 20A 60 Hz Power
EU, Asia 220-240V 10A 50-60 Hz
NA Less than 1920 W Max. Power Consumption
EU, Asia Less than 1920 W
NA Electric counter, mechanical counter x2 Counter
EU, Asia Electric counter, mechanical counter x1
Counterfeit Prevention Bill recognition, invisible marking function

Rev. 09/2005
SPECIFICATIONS
SM 7-3 B132/B200
S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

Paper Sizes
Tandem Tray
1100 sheet x2
2nd & 3rd Tray
550 sheet
each
LCT
1000 sheet
Bypass
100 sheet
Paper
Size
Direction Measurement NA EU
Asia
NA EU
Asia
NA EU
Asia
NA EU
Asia
D
u
p
l
e
x

A3 SEF 297 x 420
mm
OP_T OP_T A_AD A_AA X X A_WD A_WD
B4 SEF 257 x 364
mm
OP_T OP_T A_AD A_AA OP_L OP_L #_S #_S
A4 LEF 297 x 210
mm
A A A_AD A_AD A A #_S #_S
A4 SEF 210 x 297
mm
OP_T OP_T A_AD A_AD OP_L OP_L #_S A_WD
B5 LEF 257 x 182
mm
X X A_AD A_AD A A #_S #_S
B5 SEF 182 x 257
mm
X X A_AD A_AD X X #_S #_S
A5 LEF 210 x 148
mm
X X UP UP X X #_S #_S
A5 SEF 148 x 210
mm
X X UP A_AD X X #_S A_WD
B6 SEF 128 x 182
mm
X X X X X X #_S #_S X
A6 SEF 105 x 148
mm
X X X X X X #_S #_S X
DLT SEF 11 x 17" OP_T OP_T A_AD A_AD X X A_WD #_S
LG SEF 8!" x 14 OP_T OP_T A_AD A_AD OP_L OP_L A_WD #_S
LT LEF 11 x 8!" A A A_AD A_AD A A #_S #_S
LT SEF 8!" x 11 OP_T OP_T A_AD A_AD OP_L OP_L #_S #_S
HLT LEF 8!" x 5!" X X A_AD A_AD X X X X
HLT SEF 5!" x 8!" X X A_AD A_AD X X A_WD #_S
Foolscap SEF 8!" x 13 X X A_AD A_AD X X #_S #_S
Folio SEF 8" x 13 X X A_AD A_AD X X #_S #_S
F SEF 8 x 13 X X A_AD A_AD X X #_S #_S
Executive LEF 10!" x 7" X X A_AD A_AD X X #_S #_S
Executive SEF 7" x 10!" X X A_AD A_AD X X #_S #_S
8K SEF 267 x 390
mm
X X A_AD A_AD X X #_M #_M
16K LEF 267 x 195
mm
16K SEF 195 x 267
mm
A3 Wide SEF 12 x 18 X X A_AD A_AD X X #_S #_S
Table Key
SEF: Short Edge Feed
LEF: Long Edge Feed
A Paper size to be set in copier
A_AD Paper size detected automatically
A_WD Paper size detected by width
OP_T Paper size set in Tray 1 with A3 / 11x17 B331 installed.
OP_L Paper size set in LCT B473 with 8 1/2x14 Paper Size Tray B474 installed.
#_S Paper size setting is required. Press [#] key then select paper size from the list on touch
panel
#_M Paper size setting is required. To press [#] then enter actual paper size of paper
manually.
X NG

!
!
Rev. 07/2005
SPECIFICATIONS
B132/B200 7-4 SM

1.2 PRINTING
CPU Intel Celeron LV 733 MHz
RAM 1384 MB (shared with copying, scanning)
HDD 320 GB (80 GB x 4)
PDL RPCS, PCL5c, PCL6
Print Resolution (max.) 600 x 600 dpi (4-bit)
Standard 48 PCL fonts Fonts
Option With PS3, 136 Adobe PostScript Type 1 fonts
Connectivity
Option Ethernet RJ-45, 10-BaseT, 100BaseTX, USB 2.0

Host interface
Options*
1
IEEE1284 ECP, IEEE1394 (FireWire),
IEEE802.11b (Wireless LAN), Bluetooth
Network Protocol TCP IP, IPX/SPX, SMB (NetBEUI*
2
, NetBIOS over
TCP/IP), AppleTalk (auto switching)
Private MIB Ricoh original

MIB support
Standard MIB MIB-II (RFC1213), HostResource (RFC1514),
PrinterMib (RFC1759)
Network, Operating Systems Windows 95, 98SE, NT 4.0, 2000, Me, XP, Server
2003
NetWare 3.12, 3.2, 4.1, 4.11, 5.0, 5.1, 6
Unix, Sun Solaris, HP-UX, SCO Open Server, Red
Hat Linux, IBM AIX, Mac OS 8.6 to 9.2x, OS X 10.1
or later
*
1
Only 1 option can be installed at a time.
*
2
Smart Device Monitor for Client is necessary for NetBEUI.

SPECIFICATIONS
SM 7-5 B132/B200
S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

1.3 SCANNER
Optical resolution 100, 150, 200 (default), 300, 400, 600 dpi
Scanning speed TBA
Max. scan area 297 x 432 mm (11.7" x 17")
Exposure glass Supported (conforms with copier specifications) Auto scan size detection
ARDF Supported (conforms with copier specifications)
Standard A3, A4 SEF, A4 LEF, A5 SEF/LEF, B4, B5 SEF,
B5 LEF, 11" x 17" SEF, 8" x 14" SEF, 8" x 13"
SEF, 8" x 11" SEF/LEF, 5 " x 8" SEF/LEF
Min. 10 x 10 mm (0.04" x 0.04")
Original size
Customized
Max. 297 x 432 mm (11.7" x 17")
Compression Method BW Binary: TIFF MH, MR, MMR
Grayscale/Full Color: JPEG
Interface support 10/100BaseTX, IEEE802.11b (Wireless LAN), IEEE1394 (FireWire)
Default BW Text
Supported BW OCR, BW Text-Photo, BW Photo, Grayscale,
FC Photo, FC Text Photo
Scan mod
Options*
1
Auto Color Selection, sRGB Photo, sRGB Text
Photo
Image Density Auto Density Selection, Manual Setting (7 levels)
Image Rotation TBA
SADF/Batch mode Supported
Mixed size originals Supported
*
1
File Format Converter (MLB) is necessary.

SPECIFICATIONS
B132/B200 7-6 SM

2. ARDF B652
Dimensions (w x d x h) 680 x 560 x 180 mm (26.8 x 22 x 7.1 in.)
Weight Less than 19.5 kg (42.9 lb.)
Power consumption Less than 59 W
Noise Less than 71 db
Stack capacity 100 sheets
Simplex A3, A4, A5, B5, B6
5" x 8", 8" x 11", 8" x 14", 11" x 17"
Original size
Duplex A3, A4, A5, B4, B5
5" x 8", 8" x 11", 8" x 14", 11" x 17"
Simplex 40 128 g/m2
11 34 lb. bond
Original weight
Duplex 52 128 g/m2
14 34 lb. bond
NA 11" x 17", 10" x 14", 8 x 14" SEF
8" x 11", 5" x 8" SEF/LEF
7" x 10", A3 SEF
A4 SEF/LEF
Auto Original Size
Detection
EU, Asia A3, B4 SEF
A4, B5, A5, B6 SEF/LEF
8" x 13", 8K SEF
16K SEF
Original set position Face-up, left-rear corner
Special original setting Batch, mixed sizes
Full color 45 cpm Feeding speed
Black 60 cpm
Power source From copier

SPECIFICATIONS
SM 7-7 B132/B200
S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

3. OPTIONAL PERIPHERALS
3.1 LARGE CAPACITY TRAY B473
Installation of the LCT Adapter B699 is necessary for the LCT.
Stand-alone 314 x 458 x 659 mm (12.4 x 18 x 25.9 in. ) Dimension (w x d x h)
With LG/B4 Option 462 x 458 x 659 mm (18.2 x 18 x 25.9 in.))
Standalone Less than 20 kg (44 lb.) Weight
With LG/B4 Option Less than 27 kg (59.4 lb.)
Power Consumption Less than 50 W
Noise Less than 74dB
Paper Size A4, B5, 11x 8 LEF
Paper Weight 52 - 128g/m
14 lb 34 lb Bond
Paper Capacity (80 g/m
2
or 20 lb. bond) 4,000 sheets**
2,500 sheets*
Paper Weight 50 - 128g/m
14 lb 34 lb Bond

3.2 8 X 14" PAPER SIZE TRAY B474
This is the option for the LCT B473 that allows it to accept LG size paper.

Paper Size 8 1/2x14, 8 1/2x11, A4, B4 SEF
Paper Weight 52 - 128g/m 14 lb 34 lb Bond

SPECIFICATIONS
B132/B200 7-8 SM

3.3 9-BIN MAILBOX B762
The mailbox can be installed on top of the 2000-Sheet Finisher B700, the 3000-
Sheet Finisher B701, or the 3000-Sheet Finisher B706.

Dimension (w x d x h) 540 x 600 x 660 mm (21.3 x 23.6 x 26 in.)
Weight Less than 15 kg (33 lb.)
Noise Less than 74 dB
Number of Bins 9 bins
Stack Capacity of each Bin 100 sheets*
Paper Size
A5. A4, A3
5" x 8", 8" x11, 8" x14", 11"x17"
Paper Weight
52 - 128g/m
14 lb 34 lb Bond

3.4 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY B704
The cover interposer tray can be used with the 2000-Sheet Finisher B700, 3000-
Sheet Finisher B701, 3000-Sheet Finisher B706. The interposer tray is installed
between the copier and the finisher. The interposer tray and the Mailbox B762
cannot be installed together.

Dimension (w x d x h) 500 x 600 x 600 mm (19.7 x 23.6 x 23.6 in.)
Weight Less than 12 Kg (26.4 lb.)
Stack Capability* 200 Sheets
Paper Size A5-A3, 5" x 8" - 11" x 17"
Paper Weight 64 g/m-216 g/m
17 lb. Bond- 58 lb. Index, 80 lb Cover
Original Set Position Center
Normal Feed Face-up Original Set
Booklet Feed Face-down

SPECIFICATIONS
SM 7-9 B132/B200
S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

3.5 3000-SHEET FINISHER B706
This finisher is compatible with other copiers without special items. However, this
copier requires installation of the Finisher Adapter B698 on this finisher.
Finisher
Weight Less than 65 kg (143 lb.)
Power Consumption Less than 100W
Noise Less than 75 dB
Configuration Console type attached base-unit with Finisher Adapter
Power Source From base-unit
500 sheets A4, 8" x 11" or smaller Proof Tray Stack Capacity*
250 sheets B4, 8" x 14" or larger
Paper Size A6 SEF-A3 SEF
5 " x8 "- 11x17
14 lb Bond- 68 lb Bond / 140 lb Index / 90 lb Cover
3000 sheets A4 LEF, B5 LEF, 8x11 LEF
1500 sheets A3, A4, B4, B5 SEF
11x17, 8x14, 8 x 11
SEF
500 sheets A5 LEF, 5x8 1/2 LEF
Shift Tray Stack Capacity*
100 sheets A5 SEF, 5x8 SEF
Paper Size A5 - A3 SEF
5x8- 11x17
Staples
Paper Size B5-A3, 8 1/2x11-11x17
Paper Weight 64 g/m-84 g/m, 17 lb Bond-20 lb Bond
Staple Position Top, Bottom, 2 Staple, Top-slant
Staple Replenishment Cartridge exchange / 5000 pins per cartridge
Stack Capacity with Stapler
Paper Size Pages/Set Sets
10-100 pages 200-30 sets

A4, B5
8"x11"
2-9 pages 150 sets
10-50 pages 150-30 sets

A3, B4, 11" x 17",
8" x 14"
2-9 pages 150 sets

SPECIFICATIONS
B132/B200 7-10 SM

3.6 PUNCH UNIT B531
This punch unit is for the 3000-Sheet Finisher B706. The Punch Units A821 and
Output Jogger Unit B513 are also available for this B706.
NA 2/3 holes
EU 2/4 holes
Punch Unit Types
Scandinavia 4 holes
NA 2 hole 10,000 sheets
NA 3 hole 15,000 sheets
EU 2 hole 40,000 sheets
EU 4 hole 15,000 sheets
Punch Waste Hopper Capacity
Scandinavia 4 hole 15,000 sheets
Paper Weight 52 g/m-127.9 g/m
14 lb Bond 34 lb Bond
SEF A6 - A3, 5" x 8" - 8"x11 NA 2-holes
LEF A5 - A4, 5" x 8", 8"x11
SEF A3, B4, 11x17 NA 3-holes
LEF A4, B5, 8"x 11
SEF A6 - A3, 5"x8" - 11x17 EU 2-holes
LEF A5 - A4, 5" x 8", 8" x 11
SEF A3, B4, 11 x 17 EU 4-holes
LEF A4, B5, 8" x 11
SEF B6 - A3, 5" x 8" - 11 x 17
Paper Size
Scandinavia 4-holes
LEF A5 - A4, 5" x 8", 8" x 11

SPECIFICATIONS
SM 7-11 B132/B200
S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

This finisher provides corner stapling only.
Finisher
Dimension (w x d x h) 657 x 613 x 960 mm
Weight
Less than 54 kg
Less than 56 kg with Punch Unit
Configuration Console type attached base-unit
Stack Capacity*
250 sheets A4, 8 1/2x11 or smaller
50 sheets B4, 8 1/2x14 or larger
Paper Size
A5-A3 SEF, A6 SEF, A6 SEF
5 1/2x8 1/2-11x17SEF, 12x18 SEF
Proof Tray
Paper Weight
52 g/m-163 g/m
3,000 sheets A4 LEF, " x11 LEF "
1,500 sheets A3 SEF, A4 SEF, B4 SEF, B5, 11x17
SEF, 8 x14 SEF, 8 x 11 SEF,
12x18 SEF
500 sheets A5 LEF**
Stack Capacity*
100 sheets A5 SEF, B6 SEF, A6 SEF,
5 x 8,SEF
Paper Size
A5 - A3 SEF, A6 SEF, B6 SEF, 5 x 8- 11x17 SEF,
12 x 18 SEF
Shift Tray
Paper Weight
52 g/m-256 g/m
Staples
Paper Size
B5-A3
8 1/2x11-11x17, 12x18
Paper Weight
64 g/m-90 g/m
17 lb Bond-28 lb Bond
50 sheets A4, " x11 or smaller Same Paper Size
30 sheets B4, " x14" or larger
Stapling
Capacity
Mixed Paper Size 30 sheets A4 LEF + A3 SEF,
B5 LEF + B4 SEF,
8" x11 LEF + 11 x17 SEF

SPECIFICATIONS
B132/B200 7-12 SM

Staple Replenishment Cartridge exchange / 5000 pins per cartridge
Paper Size Pages/Set Sets
20-50 pages 150-60 sets
A4 LEF, 8 1/2x11 LEF
2-19 pages 150 sets
15-50 pages 100-30 sets
A4 SEF, B5, 8 /12x11 SEF
2-14 pages 100 sets
15-30 pages 100-33 sets
Stapled Stack Capacity
(same size)
Others
2-14 pages 100 sets
Stapled Stack Capacity
(mixed sizes)
A4 LEF & A3 SEF, B5 LEF
& B4 SEF, 8 1/2x11 LEF &
11 x17 SEF
2-30 pages 50 set

SPECIFICATIONS
SM 7-13 B132/B200
S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

This finisher provides booklet as well as corner stapling. Equipped with two trays,
the upper tray holds stapled and shifted copies, and the lower tray holds booklet
stapled and folded copies.
Finisher
Dimension W x D x H 657 x 613 x 960 mm (25.9 x 24.1 x 37.8")
Weight
Less than 63 kg (138.6 lb.) (no punch unit)
Less than 65 kg (143 lb.) (with punch unit)
Configuration Console type attached base-unit
Stack Capacity*
250 sheets A4, 8 1/2x11 or smaller
50 sheets B4, 8 1/2x14 or larger
Paper Size
A5-A3 SEF, A6 SEF, A6 LEF
5" x8" to11 x 17 SEF, 12x18 SEF
Proof Tray
Paper Weight
52 g/m-163 g/m
2,000
sheets
A4 LEF, 8 1/2x11 LEF
1,000
sheets
A3 SEF, A4 SEF, B4 SEF, B5
11x17 SEF, 8" x14 SEF, 8" x
11 SEF,
12x18 SEF
500 sheets A5 LEF
Stack Capacity*
100 sheets
A5 SEF, B6 SEF, A6 SEF, 5" x8"
SEF
Paper Size
A5 - A3 SEF, A6 SEF, B6 SEF
5" x8" to 11 x 17 SEF, 12 x 18 SEF
Shift Tray
Paper Weight
52 g/m-256 g/m
Staple
Paper Size B5-A3, 8 1/2x11-11x17, 12x18
Paper Weight 64 g/m-90 g/m, 17 lb Bond-28 lb Bond
50 sheets A4, 8" x 11 or smaller Same Paper Size
30 sheets B4, 8" x 14 or larger
Mixed Paper Size 30 sheets A4 LEF & A3 SEF, B5 LEF & B4
SEF, 8"x11 LEF & 11 x17 SEF
Staples Capacity*
Booklet Stapling 15 sheets A4 SEF, A3 SEF, B5 SEF, B4 SEF,
8 1/2x11 SEF, 8 1/2x14 SEF,
11x17 SEF, 12x18 SEF

SPECIFICATIONS
B132/B200 7-14 SM

Corner staple 5,000 staples per
cartridge
Staple Replenishment
Booklet staple 2,000 staples per
cartridge
13-50 pages A4 LEF, 8 1/2x11 LEF
2-12 pages
10-50 pages A4 SEF, B5, 8 /12x11 SEF
2-9 pages
10-30 pages
Same Size
Others
2-9 pages
Corner Staple
Capacity
Mixed Size A4 LEF + A3 SEF
B5 LEF + B4 SEF
8 1/2x11 LEF + 11 x17 SEF
2-30 pages
2-5 pages
6-10 pages
Booklet Staple
Capacity
A4 SEF, A3 SEF, B5 SEF, B4 SEF
8 1/2x11 SEF, 8 1/2x14 SEF, 11x17 SEF
12x18 SEF
11-15 pages

B700/B701 Paper Specifications
Plain Paper Paper Type Paper Size
Copier
PPC
Used
Paper
Recycled
Paper
Colored
Paper
Translucent
Blueprint
A3 SEF
!

! ! "
B4 SEF
! " ! ! "
A4 SEF
! " ! ! "
A4 LEF
# " # # "
B5 SEF
! " ! ! "
B5 LEF
# " # # "
A5 SEF
$

A5 LEF
$

B6 SEF
"

B6 LEF
"

12" x 18" SEF
!

! !

11" x 17" SEF
!

! ! "
8" x 14"
!

! ! "
8" x 11" SEF
!

! ! "
8" x 11" LEF
#

# # "
5" x 8"
$

$

5" x 8"
$

$

#
Corner stapling, Shift, YES
!
Booklet stapling/folding, Shift, YES
$
Shift ONLY
"
Shift NO
Not available

SPECIFICATIONS
SM 7-15 B132/B200
S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

3.9 PUNCH UNIT B702
This punch unit is designed for use with the 2000-Sheet Stapler B700 (both corner
and booklet stapling) and 3000-Sheet Stapler B701 (corner stapling only).
NA 2/3 hole switchable
EU 2/4 holes switchable
Available Punch Units
Scandinavia 4 holes
NA 2-hole Up to 5,000 sheets
NA 3-hole Up to 5,000 sheets
EU 2-hole Up to 14,000 sheets
EU 4-hole Up to 7,000 sheets
Punch Waste Replenishment
Scandinavia 4-hole Up to 7,000 sheets
Paper Weight 52 g/m-163 g/m, 14 lb Bond 43 lb Bond / 90 lb Index / 60
lb Cover
SEF A5 to A3, 5" x8" to 11x17 NA 2-hole
LEF A5 - A4, 5" x 8" , 8" x 11
SEF A3, B4, 11x17 NA 3-hole
LEF A4, B5, 8" x 11
SEF A5 - A3, 5" x 8" to 11 x 17 EU 2-hole
LEF A5 to A4, 5" x 8", 8" x 11
SEF A3, B4, 11x17 EU 4-hole
LEF A4, B5, 8" x 11
SEF A5 to A3, 5" x 8" to 11 x 17
Paper Sizes
Scandinavia 4-hole
LEF A5 - A4, 5" x8", 8" x 11

SPECIFICATIONS
B132/B200 7-16 SM

3.10 A3/11" X 17" TRAY B331
This option is installed in Tray 1 (tandem tray) of the copier so Tray 1 can feed
larger paper. Tray 1 normally feeds LT or A4 only.
Weight 11 kg (24.2 lb.)
Paper Size
A3 SEF, B4 SEF, A4
11x17 SEF, 8" x 14 SEF, 8" x 11
Paper Capacity 1,000 Sheets

3.11 COPY TRAY B476
The copy tray is installed receive copies when the copier is used without a finisher.
Weight 640 g (1.4 lb.)
500 Sheets A4, 8 x 11
Paper Capacity
250 Sheets A3, 11x 17

SPECIFICATIONS
SM 7-17 B132/B200
S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

4. MACHINE CONFIGURATION
This is a list of the peripheral devices that can be installed with the copier.
No. Model Name Comments
1 B132/ B200 Copier Main machine
2 B756 Copy Tray Attached to main machine
3 B473 LCT Paper bank
4 B699 LCT Adapter Required for LCT
5 B474 81/2" x 14"/B4 Paper Size Tray LCT Option
6 B706 3000-Sheet Finisher No saddle-stitching (100-sheet stapling)
7 B698 Finisher Adapter Replacement motor for B706
8 B531/A821 Punch Unit For B706 only
9 B513 Output Jogger Unit For B706 only.
10 B704 Cover Interposer Tray For B700, B701, B706
11 B762 Mail Box For B700, B701 only
12 B701 3000-Sheet Finisher No saddle-stitching, Tray x1, 50-sheet stapling
13 B702 Punch Unit For B700, B701
14 B700 2000-Sheet Finisher Saddle-stitching, Trays x2, 50-sheet stapling
15 B703 Output Jogger Unit For B700, B701
16 B331 A3 /11"x17" Paper Size Tray For Tandem Tray (Tray 1)
17 B452 Key Counter Bracket
18 B498 Key Card Bracket
19 B499 Tab Sheet Holder

B132I116.WMF
11
13
14
3
4
5
9
2
1
6
7
8
10
12
15
16
17, 18
19
SPECIFICATIONS
B132/B200 7-18 SM

4.1 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
4.2 COPIER
No. Component Function
CIRCUIT BREAKER
CB1 Circuit Breaker Breaks the main power supply to the machine if there is an
overload or short circuit.
COUNTERS
TC1 Total Counter - FC The mechanical counter for full color printing.
TC2 Total Counter - K The mechanical counter for black-and-white printing.
HEATERS
H1 Lower Tray Heater Keeps paper dry. Provided with machine, connection is
optional.
H2 Anti-condensation
Heater Scanner
(Option)
Prevents the formation of condensation in the scanner unit.
H3 Anti-condensation
Heater Transfer
This options removes moisture from the air around the paper
transfer unit.
H4 Upper Tray Heater Keeps paper dry. Provided with machine, connection is
optional.
HARD DISKS
HDD1 HDD 1 The HDDs hold temporary files spooled for processing and
also store permanent files for the document server
application.
HDD2 HDD 2 2nd HDD in a set of 4.
HDD3 HDD 3 3rd HDD in a set of 4.
HDD4 HDD 4 4th HDD in a set of 4.
LAMPS
L1 Exposure Lamp Projects high intensity light on the original for exposure.
L2 Heating Roller Fusing
Lamp 1
590W fusing lamp in the heating roller.
L3 Heating Roller Fusing
Lamp 2
590W fusing lamp in the heating roller.
L4 Hot Roller Fusing
Lamp
350W fusing lamp inside the hot roller.
L5 Pressure Roller Fusing
Lamp
350W fusing lamp inside the pressure roller.

SPECIFICATIONS
SM 7-19 B132/B200
S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

MOTORS
M1 Scanner Motor Drives the scanner unit
M2 Lower Relay Motor Drives the lower relay roller of the relay unit at the
vertical transport section.
M3 Paper Feed Motor - Tray 1 Drives the paper feed roller and grip roller of tray 1
(tandem tray).
(bottom tray).
(middle tray).
M6 Waste Toner Distribution
Motor
Drives the coil that spans the top of the waste toner
bottle.
M7 Lift Motor - Tray 2 Switches on and drives a shaft and coupling that
raises a lift arm against the bottom plate under the
paper stack in tray 2
M8 Lift Motor - Tray 3 Drives a shaft and coupling that raises a lift arm
against the bottom plate under the paper stack in tray
3.
M9 Lift Motor - Tray 1 Drives pulleys and cables that lift the bottom plate of
tray 1 (tandem tray) until the top of the paper stack
reaches the correct height for feeding.
M10 Rear Fence Motor - Tray 1 Switches on when the right paper tray sensor of the
tandem paper tray unit detects paper out and the left
paper tray sensor detects paper present.
M11 ITB Lift Motor Rotates the cam that raises and lowers the ITB belt.
M12 Ozone Fan Motor Draws air from around the drums and through the
ozone filter.
M13 Fusing Fan Motor Cools the fusing unit.
M14 Fusing Cooling Fan Motor Draws cool air into the fusing unit through a vent and
past a heat sink mounted above the fusing unit.
M15 Fusing Exhaust Fan Motor Draws the hot air away from the heat sink mounted
above the fusing unit and expels the hot air through a
vent
M16 Fusing/Exit Motor Drives the fusing unit and paper exit.
M17 PTR Motor Drives the paper transfer roller (PTR).
M18 Bypass Feed Motor Drives the upper relay roller that feeds each sheet to
the registration roller.
M19 Duplex Jogger Motor Moves the jogger fences in the duplex unit.
M20 Duplex Unit Fan Motor Cools the duplex unit.
M21 Duplex Transport Motor Drives transport rollers 3, 4 in the duplex unit.
M22 Duplex Inverter Motor Feeds paper to the jogger section.
M23 Registration Motor Rotates the registration roller.
M24 Image Transfer Fan Motor Cools the upper area of the transfer unit where the
PCUs contact the ITB.
M25 Pipe Cooling Fan Motor Pulls in air draws it over the fins attached to the front
end of the heat pipe roller.
M26 Paper Transport Fan Motor -
Rear
1 of 2 vacuum fans that produce suction to kepp
paper on the transport belt.
M27 Paper Transport Fan Motor -
Front
1 of 2 vacuum fans that produce suction to kepp
paper on the transport belt.
M28 Paper Exit Fan Motor Draws hot air from around the paper exit area and
expels it from the left side of the machine.
SPECIFICATIONS
B132/B200 7-20 SM
M29 Front Duplex Fan Motor Draws hot air out of the duplex unit.
M30 Rear Duplex Fan Motor Draws hot air out of the duplex unit.
M31 ID Sensor Dust Fan Motor Blows air around the ID sensors to prevent dust from
collecting.
M32 Peltier Cooling Fan Motor Draws dehumidified air out of the Peltier unit and
sends it through a duct to the four PCU cooling fans.
M33 Peltier Circulation Fan Motor Draws that passes below the Peltier unit to cool it.
M34 Laser Unit Cooling Fan Motor -
Front
Draws cool air into the machine.
M35 Laser Unit Cooing Fan Motor -
Rear
Expels hot air from the machine on the left side.
M36 PCU Motor - M Drives all the rollers in the Magenta PCU.
M37 PCU Motor - K Drives all the rollers in the Black PCU.
M38 PCU Motor - Y Drives all the rollers in the Yellow PCU.
M39 PCU Motor - C Drives all the rollers in the Cyan PCU.
M40 Controller Box Exhaust Fan
Motor 2
1 of 2 fans that cool the printed circuit boards at the
back of the machine.
M41 Controller Box Exhaust Fan
Motor 1
1 of 2 fans that cool the printed circuit boards at the
back of the machine.
M42 Drum Motor - Y Drives the drum in the Yellow PCU.
M43 Drum Motor - C Drives the drum in the Cyan PCU.
M44 Drum Motor - M Drives the drum in the Magenta PCU.
M45 Drum Motor - K Drives the drum in the Black PCU.
M46 ITB Drive Motor Rotates the image transfer roller that drives the ITB.
M47 3rd Mirror Motor - M Fine adjusts the position of the 3rd mirror of the
optics for M (magenta) during MUSIC adjustment.
M48 Polygon Mirror Motor Rotates the polygon mirror in the laser optics unit
M49 3rd Mirror Motor - Y Fine adjusts the position of the 3rd mirror of the
optics for Y (Yellow) during MUSIC adjustment.
M50 3rd Mirror Motor - C Fine adjusts the position of the 3rd mirror of the
optics for C (Cyan) during MUSIC adjustment.
M51 Toner Hopper Motor Drives the toner pump clutch and sub hopper clutch
of each PCU.
M52 PCU Fan Motor - Y Cools the Yellow PCU.
M53 PCU Fan Motor - C Cools the Cyan PCU.
M54 PCU Fan Motor - M Cools the Magenta PCU
M55 PCU Fan Motor - K Cools the Black PCU.
M56 Scanner Unit Fan Motor - Rear
Left
Cools the left, rear corner of the SIOB.
M57 Scanner Unit Fan Motor - Rear
Center
Cools the rear, center area of the SIOB.
M58 Scanner Unit Fan Motor -
Front Left
Cools the front, left area of the SIOB.
M59 Scanner Unit Fan Motor -
Right
Exhausts warm air from the SIOB area.
M60 Waste Toner Collection Bottle
Motor
Drives the waste toner bottle transport coil that
moves the toner from the central collection point into
the waste toner bottle.
M61 Hard Drive Cooling Fan Motor Cools the hard drive array

SPECIFICATIONS
SM 7-21 B132/B200
S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

MECHANICAL CLUTCHES
MC1 Bypass Feed Clutch Engages and operates the pick-up roller at the bypass
feed tray.
MC2 Toner Pump Clutch - M Engages the and drives the Magenta toner pump to pull
toner from the Magenta STC.
MC3 Toner Supply Clutch - M Engages the toner supply coils in the sub hopper of the
Magenta PCU to send toner to the development unit
below.
MC4 Toner Pump Clutch - K Engages the and drives the Black toner pump to pull
toner from the Black STC.
MC5 Toner Supply Clutch - K Engages the toner supply coils in the sub hopper of the
Black PCU to send toner to the development unit below.
MC6 Toner Pump Clutch - Y Engages the drive shaft and rotor of the Yellow toner
pump to pull toner from the Yellow STC when more
toner is needed.
MC7 Toner Supply Clutch - Y Engages the toner supply coils in the sub hopper of the
Yellow PCU to send toner to the development unit
below.
MC8 Toner Pump Clutch - C Engages the and drives the Cyan toner pump to pull
toner from the Cyan STC.
MC9 Toner Supply Clutch - C Engages the toner supply coils in the sub hopper of the
Cyan PCU to send toner to the development unit below.

SPECIFICATIONS
B132/B200 7-22 SM

PCBs
PCB1 PFC (Paper Feed Control) Controls paper feed.
PCB2 AC Drive Board Controls the power supply to the fusing lamps,
heaters, and PSU.
PCB3 PSU (Power Supply Unit) Supplies DC current to the machine and contains
the AC drive that controls the fusing lamp power
supply.
PCB4 DRB (Drive Board) Contains the circuits for the stepping motors that
drive the printer engine, and distributes electrical
power to all other PCBs.
PCB5 IOB (Input/Output Board) The I/O control board controls 1) Input and output
ports for all sensors, motors, solenoids of the
engine, 2) drivers, 3) high voltage power supply
for PWM, and 4) analog input signals.
PCB6 Power Pack: Development
Bias
Supplies the voltage for the bias applied to the
developer in the PCUs by the development rollers.
PCB7 Power Pack: Charge

Supplies the voltage for the charge applied to the
OPC drums by the charge roller.
PCB8 Power Pack: Transfer Supplies charge to 1) the four image transfer
rollers that pull the toner images from the four
from the four drums (Y, M, C, K), and 2) to the
paper transfer roller that pulls the image off the
ITB onto paper.
PCB9 Power Pack - Separation Supplies the dc/ac charges for paper separation.
PCB10 DMB (Drum Motor Board) Controls the motors that drive the OPC drums.
PCB11 TMB (Transfer Motor Board) Controls the motor that drives the ITB.
PCB12 Potential Sensor Board Processes data from the Y, M, C, K, potential
sensors.
PCB13 PPB (Peltier Board) Controls the operation of the Peltier unit.
PCB14 CNB (Connector Board) Sorts and routes signals to electrical components.
PCB15 IDCB - C1 One of two ID control boards at the base of the
Cyan STC. The CPU reads the board to confirm
that the correct STC is inserted into the correct
bin.
PCB16 IDCB - M1 One of two ID control boards at the base of the
Magenta STC. The CPU reads the board to
confirm that the correct STC is inserted into the
correct bin.
PCB17 IDCB - K1 One of two ID control boards at the base of the
Black STC. The CPU reads the board to confirm
bin.
PCB18 IDCB - Y1 One of two ID control boards at the base of the
Yellow STC. The CPU reads the board to confirm
bin.
PCB19 SBU (Sensor Board Unit) Contains the CCD. Converts CCD analog signals
to digital signals.
PCB20 SIOB (Scanner Interface
Board)
Controls all the sensors in the scanner unit and
controls the carriage drive stepping motors.
PCB21 Lamp Regulator Converts the ac power input to a stable, high
frequency ac output to the exposure lamp.

SPECIFICATIONS
SM 7-23 B132/B200
S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

PCB22 BICU Performs: 1) Engine sequence control (all
sensors, motors, fusing temperature monitoring
circuits), 2) Scanning control, 3) Exposure control,
3) Image processing control, 4) GW controller I/F,
5) Peripheral timing control
LD 1 (2/2) Laser Diode 1, 2nd of a pair, 1 of 8. PCB23
LD 1 (1/2) Laser Diode 1, 1st of a pair, 1 of 8.
PCB27 LSDB - K Front Front Laser Synchronization Detector Board for
Laser Diode 4.
PCB28 LSDB - M Front Front Laser Synchronization Detector Board for
Laser Diode 3.
PCB29 LSDB - C Front Front Laser Synchronization Detector Board for
Laser Diode 2.
PCB30 LSDB - Y Front Front Laser Synchronization Detector Board for
Laser Diode 1.
PCB31 LSDB - Y Rear Rear Laser Synchronization Detector Board for
Laser Diode 1.
PCB32 LSDB - C Rear Rear Laser Synchronization Detector Board for
Laser Diode 2.
PCB33 LSDB - M Rear Rear Laser Synchronization Detector Board for
Laser Diode 3.
PCB34 LSDB - K Rear Rear Laser Synchronization Detector Board for
Laser Diode 4.
PCB35 Controller Board Incorporates the GW architecture, and connects
to the BICU and PCI I/F. All the options for the
printer are controlled by this board.
PCB36 Mother Board Interfaces the controller and the BICU.
PCB37 RAPI EXT Board Interface the copy connector and EFI controller.
PCB38 OPU (Operation Panel Unit) Controls the operation panel.
PCB39 PI Board Interfaces the IPU and RDS.

SPECIFICATIONS
B132/B200 7-24 SM

QUENCHING LAMPS
QL1 Quenching Lamp - K Eliminates electrical charge and neutralizes the surface of
the drum in the Black PCU.
QL2 Quenching Lamp - C Eliminates electrical charge and neutralizes the surface of
the drum in the Cyan PCU.
QL3 Quenching Lamp - M Eliminates electrical charge and neutralizes the surface of
the drum in the Magenta PCU.
QL4 Quenching Lamp - Y Eliminates electrical charge and neutralizes the surface of
the drum in the Yellow PCU.

SENSORS
S1 ID Sensor - Black Reads 1) light reflected from the bare surface of the
ITB, and 2) reads light reflected from the black ID
sensor patterns on the ITB.
S2 ID Sensor - Color Reads 1) light reflected from the bare surface of the
ITB, and 2) reads light reflected from the color ID
sensor patterns on the ITB. This sensor has one
additional receptor to collect diffuse light reflected
from color toner to improve calculation of the toner
density.
S3 ITB Lift Sensor This sensor switches the ITB lift motor off when the
ITB comes into contact the drums of the four PCUs.
S4 MUSIC Sensor - Center Reads the center MUSIC pattern. This feedback is
used to control the MUSIC process to correct color
registration errors.
S5 MUSIC Sensor - Front Reads the front MUSIC pattern. This feedback is
S6 MUSIC Sensor - Rear Reads the Rear MUSIC pattern. This feedback is
S7 Paper Feed Sensor - Tray 2 Detects the leading edge of each sheet of paper
from the pickup roller of tray (middle tray) and
switches off the pickup roller solenoid so the pick
up roller lifts.
S8 Vertical Transport Sensor -
Tray 2
Detects the leading edge and trailing edge of each
sheet fed from tray 2 and signals a jam if the edges
do not pass at the prescribed time.
S9 Paper End Sensor - Tray 2 Receives light reflected from the paper until the last
sheet is fed from tray 2 (middle tray), then signals
paper end.
S10 Lift Sensor - Tray 2 Detects when the pick" up roller (pushed up by the
top of the paper stack in the right side of the
tandem tray) has reached the correct height for
paper feed and then switches off the tray 2 (middle
tray) lift motor.
from the pickup roller of tray 3 (bottom tray) and
up roller lifts.

SPECIFICATIONS
SM 7-25 B132/B200
S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

Tray 3
sheet fed from tray 3 and signals a jam if the edges
do not pass at the prescribed time.
S13 Paper End Sensor - Tray 3 Receives light reflected from the paper until the last
sheet is fed from tray 3 (bottom tray), then signals
paper end.
paper feed and then switches off the tray 3 (bottom
tray) lift motor.
S15 Bottom
Temperature/Humidity
Sensor
Near the waste toner bottle. Detects ambient
temperature and humidity and then this output is
used to control the amount of current applied to the
paper transfer roller and ITB when the image is
transferred to paper. Also used to correct the fusing
temperature, and to extend the fusing unit idle time
at low room temperatures.
S16 Waste Toner Bottle Set
Sensor
Detects the position of the waste toner bottle and
confirms whether it is set correctly.
S17 Waste Toner Bottle Near-Full
Sensor
When the level of the waste toner rises high enough
to move the actuator of this sensor out of its normal
position, the sensor signals the machine that the
waste toner bottle is nearly full.
S18 Waste Toner Bottle Full
Sensor
Signals an alert when the waste toner bottle is full.
from the pickup roller of tray 1 (tandem tray) and
up roller lifts.
Tray 1
sheet fed from tray 1, 2, and 3 and signals a jam if
the edges do not pass at the prescribed time.
S21 Paper End Sensor - Tray 1 Detects when the last sheet is fed from tray 1.
paper feed and then switches off the tray 1 (tandem
tray) lift motor.
S23 Paper Near End Sensor -
Tray 2
Detects the near end condition for tray 2 (middle
tray, a universal cassette).
Tray 3
Detects the near end condition for tray 3 (middle
tray, a universal cassette).
S25 Front Side Fence Open
Sensor
Detects the actuator on the front side fence after it
has reached the open position in the tandem tray.
S26 Front Side Fence Closed
Sensor
Detects the actuator on the front side fence after it
has reached the closed position in the tandem tray.
S27 Rear Side Fence Open
Sensor
Detects the actuator on the rear side fence after it
has reached the open position in the tandem tray.
S28 Rear Side Fence Closed
Sensor
Detects the actuator on the rear side fence after it
has reached the closed position in the tandem tray.
S29 Right Tray Down Sensor Detects the bottom plate of the right tray and
switches off the tray 1 lift motor and stops the
bottom plate.
SPECIFICATIONS
B132/B200 7-26 SM
Tray 1
Signals 10% paper remaining when the actuator on
the right rail of the right tray in the tandem tray
passes.
S31 Paper Height Sensor Signals 100% paper remaining until activated.
Signals 50% paper remaining when the actuator on
the left rail of the right tray in the tandem tray
passes.
S32 Paper Height Sensor Signals 30% paper remaining when the actuator on
the left rail of the right tray in the tandem tray
passes.
S33 Paper Height Sensor When near end sensor 1 on right rail of the right
tray of the tandem tray is actuated, and paper
height sensor 3 has detected the passing of the
actuator on the left rail, then the near end sensor
signals 10% paper remaining.
S34 Right Tray Paper Sensor Detects paper in the right side of the tandem paper
tray.
S35 Rear Fence HP Sensor Detects the actuator on the rear fence in the
tandem tray and switches off the rear fence motor.
S36 Rear Fence Return Sensor Detects the actuator on the rear fence in the
tandem tray and reverses the rear fence motor.
S37 Left Tray Paper Sensor Detects the presence of paper in the left tray of the
tandem tray.
S38 Heating Roller Temperature
Sensor
Monitors the surface temperature of the heating
roller and breaks the circuits to the fusing lamps if
the heating roller overheats.
S39 Waste Toner Lock Sensor Signals an alert if the waste toner collection coil
locks and stops rotating.
S40 Duplex Transport Sensor 1 The feeler of this sensor detects the leading edge
and trailing edge of each sheet as it passes from
the jogger unit above and into the horizontal feed
path of the duplex unit below. Signals a jam if the
paper does not arrive at or reach the sensor
location at the prescribed time.
S41 Duplex Inverter Sensor 1) Detects the leading edge of the paper at the
inverter exit roller, signals to switch off the duplex
transport clutch and retracts the reverse trigger
roller, and 2) Controls the operation of the duplex
transport clutch.
S42 Duplex Entrance Sensor Detects paper jams at the entrance of the duplex
unit.
S43 Duplex Transport Sensor 3 Detects the leading edge and trailing edge of each
sheet as it passes from the jogger unit above
through the horizontal feed path of the duplex unit
below. Signals a jam if the paper does not arrive at
or reach the sensor location at the prescribed time.
S44 Duplex Transport Sensor 2 Detects the leading edge and trailing edge of each
sheets as it passes from the jogger unit above and
into the horizontal feed path of the duplex unit
below. Signals a jam if the paper does not arrive at
or reach the sensor location at the prescribed time.
S45 Duplex Jogger HP Sensor At power on, detects the actuators on the jogger
fences of the duplex unit, switches off the jogger
motor and stops the fences at their home positions.

SPECIFICATIONS
SM 7-27 B132/B200
S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

S46 Double-Feed Detection
Sensor
Receives the light emitted from the double" feed
detection LED and reflected from the surface of
each sheet in the paper path. Signals an error if the
thickness of the paper is not the same as the
previous sheet.
S47 Guide Plate Position Sensor
S48 Relay Sensor Detects jams at the top of the vertical paper path.
S49 Registration Sensor Detects the leading edge of the paper and switches
off the registration motor and stops the registration
roller briefly but long enough to correct buckle the
paper.
S50 Paper Exit Sensor Detects the leading and trailing edge of each sheet
at the paper exit slot to check timing and detect
jams.
S51 Bypass Paper Sensor Detects the presence of paper in the bypass tray.
S52 Bypass Paper End Sensor Signals paper out when the last sheet feeds from
the bypass tray.
S53 Bypass Paper Size Sensor Reads the positions of the side fences (manually
adjusted) to detect the width of the paper in the
bypass tray. (Paper length is read with pulse counts
from the registration sensor.)
S54 Paper Exit Relay Sensor Detects paper jams at the paper exit if the paper
does not arrive or leave the machine at the
prescribed time.
S55 Copy Tray Full Sensor
(Option)
Detects when the Copy Paper Tray B75 is full and
temporarily pauses printing so the operator can
remove the stack from the tray and continue.
S56 TD Sensor - M Monitors the amount of toner in the developer/toner
mixture in the development unit of the Magenta
PCU.
S57 TD Sensor - K Monitors the amount of toner in the developer/toner
mixture in the development unit of the Black PCU.
S58 Temperature/Humidity
Sensor - PCU K
The temperature and humidity readings of this
sensor are referenced to a lookup table stored in
the ROM to 1) Correct the charge roller voltage 2)
Adjust the operation of the Peltier unit, and 3) Set
the length of time the agitators in the development
unit rotate to mix the toner and developer.
S59 TD Sensor - Y Monitors the amount of toner in the developer/toner
mixture in the development unit of the Yellow PCU.
S60 TD Sensor - C Monitors the amount of toner in the developer/toner
mixture in the development unit of the Cyan PCU.
S61 ITB Position Sensor 2 Reads the encoder film strip on the front edge of
the ITB and sends the sub scan scale signal to the
CPU.
S62 ITB Position Sensor 1 Reads the encoder film strip on the front edge of
the ITB and sends the main scan scale signal to the
CPU.
S63 Potential Sensor - K Reads the potential sensor pattern from the surface
of the drum in the black PCU.
S64 Potential Sensor - M Reads the potential sensor pattern from the surface
of the drum in the magenta PCU.
S65 Potential Sensor - C Reads the potential sensor pattern from the surface
of the drum in the cyan PCU.
SPECIFICATIONS
B132/B200 7-28 SM
S66 Potential Sensor - Y Reads the potential sensor pattern from the surface
of the drum in the yellow PCU.
S67 Temperature Sensor -
Optics 1
1 of 2 sensors (located near the left f-theta lens)
that monitors the temperature in the optics unit. The
results are used in the MUSIC process.
S68 Temperature Sensor -
Optics 2
1 of 2 sensors (located near the right f-theta lens)
that monitors the temperature in the optics unit.
The results are used in the MUSIC process.
S69 Toner End Sensor - M Detects toner end for magenta toner.
S70 Toner End Sensor - K Detects toner end for black toner.
S71 Toner End Sensor - Y Detects toner end for yellow toner.
S72 Toner End Sensor - C Detects toner end for cyan toner.
S73 Scanner HP Sensor Detects the home position of the scanner.
S74 Original Width Sensors APS1 (a board) holds two original width sensors
under the exposure glass. The detection
combinations of these sensors determine the width
of the original on the exposure glass positioned for
LEF.
S75 Original Length Sensors - 1 APS2 (a board) holds two original length sensors
combinations of these sensors determine the
length of the original on the exposure glass
positioned for SEF.
S76 Original Length Sensor -2 APS3 (a board) holds one original length sensor
combination of this sensor and other sensors
determine the length of the original on the exposure
glass positioned for SEF.
S77 Accordion Jam Sensor Detects jams at the fusing exit by confirming that
paper arrives at the prescribed time.
S78 Fusing Exit Sensor Detects jams at the fusing exit by confirming that
paper leaves at the prescribed time.
S79 LCT Relay Sensor Confirms whether the LCT is set correctly.

LEDs
LED1 Double-Feed Detection LED Emits light which is reflected from the paper to the
double" feed detection sensor to test the
translucence of each sheet for double-feed
detection.
LED2 Accordion Jam Sensor (LED) Flashes to show the user which lever to release to
remove a paper jam from the fusing rollers.
LED3 Fusing Exit Sensor (LED) Flashes to show the user which lever to release to
remove a paper jam from the fusing unit.

SPECIFICATIONS
SM 7-29 B132/B200
S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

SOLENOIDS
SOL1 Pick" up Solenoid
- Tray 2
Switches on when the tray 2 (middle tray) lift motor switches
on. This solenoid lowers the pickup roller of tray 3.
SOL2 Separation Roller
Solenoid - Tray 2
When tray 2 (middle tray) is selected as the paper source,
this solenoid energizes and brings the separation roller in
contact with the feed roller until the leading edge of the sheet
feeds to the paper feed sensor.
SOL3 Pick" up Solenoid
- Tray 3
Switches on when the tray 3 (bottom tray) lift motor switches
Solenoid - Tray 3
When tray 3 (bottom tray) is selected as the paper source,
SOL5 Pick" up Solenoid -
Tray 1
Switches on when the tray 1 (tandem tray) lift motor switches
Solenoid - Tray 1
When tray 1 (tandem tray) is selected as the paper source,
SOL7 Front Side Fence
Solenoid -Tray 1
When the right tray paper sensor in the tandem tray signals
paper out, and the left tray paper sensor signals paper
present, this energizes this solenoid which pulls open the
front side fence until the front side fence open sensor detects
the actuator of the front side fence and switches off the
solenoid, leaving it locked in the open position, to allow the
rear fence to push the paper stack from the left tray into the
right tray.
SOL8 Rear Side Fence
Solenoid - Tray 1
When the right tray paper sensor in the tandem tray signals
paper out, and the left tray paper sensor signals paper
present, this energizes this solenoid which pulls open the
rear side fence until the rear side fence open sensor detects
the actuator of the rear side fence and switches off the
solenoid, leaving it locked in the open position, to allow rear
fence to push the paper stack from the left tray into the right
tray.
SOL9 Right Tray Lock
Solenoid - Tray 1
Releases the lock lever when the left tray paper sensor in the
tandem tray signals that there is no paper in the left tray .
SOL10 Left Tray Lock
Solenoid - Tray 1
When the rear fence motor in the tandem tray switches on,
this energizes the left tray lock solenoid. This locks the left
tray so it does not move while the rear fence pushes the
stack from the left tray to the right tray.
SOL11 Duplex Junction
Gate Solenoid
Controls the opening and closing of the duplex junction gate
at the mouth of the inverter unit.
SOL12 Positioning Roller
Solenoid
After a sheet has been aligned by the fences of the duplex
unit, this solenoid energizes and pushes down the positioning
roller (a sponge roller).
SOL13 Guide Plate
Solenoid
Energizes when a jam occurs between the vertical transport
rollers and registration roller to force the guide plate open
and divert paper fed from below into the duplex tray.
SOL14 Inverter Junction
Gate Solenoid
Operates the inverter junction gate. The inverter injunction
gate turns paper into the path to the inverter unit below where
it is 1) inverted for face" down output or 2) inverted for 2nd
side printing.
SPECIFICATIONS
B132/B200 7-30 SM
SOL15 Bypass Pick" up
Solenoid
Switches on and lowers the pick" up roller to the top of the
stack in the bypass tray

SWITCHES
SW1 Lower Front Door
Switch
Detects whether the front door is open or closed.
SW2 Main Power Switch Switches the machine off and on.
SW3 Upper Front Door
Switches (x5)
Detect whether the front door is open or closed.
SW4 Paper Size Switch
- Tray 2
The switch detects the position of the dial (set manually), and
signals the paper size with a simple 5" digit binary code.
SW5 Paper Size Switch
- Tray 3
The switch detects the position of the dial (set manually), and
signals the paper size with a simple 5" digit binary code.

THERMISTORS
TH1 Heating Roller
Thermistor
Monitors the end of the heating roller and breaks the circuit to
the heating lamps if a lamp overheats.
TH2 Hot Roller
Thermistor
Detects and monitors the temperature of the hot roller for
fusing temperature control.
TH3 Pressure Roller
Thermistor
Detects the temperature of the hot roller for fusing
temperature control.
THERMOSTATS
TS1 Pressure Roller
Thermostat 1
Monitors the temperature of the pressure roller and cuts the
circuit if the pressure roller fusing lamp overheats.
TS2 Pressure Roller
Thermostat 2
Monitors the temperature of the pressure roller and cuts the
circuit if the pressure roller fusing lamp overheats.
TS3 Thermostat 1 Monitors the temperature of the fusing belt nd cuts the circuit
if the fusing unit overheats.

SPECIFICATIONS
SM 7-31 B132/B200
S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

5. ARDF
No. Component
Function
MOTORS
M01 Feed Motor Drives the feed belt, and the separation, pick-up, and transport as
far as the 1st transport roller.
M02 Transport Motor Controls the original scanning speed.
M03 Exit Motor Feeds paper out of the ARDF and onto the original exit table.
M04 Upper Inverter
Motor
Controls the rotation of the upper inverter roller that feeds the
original in and out of the upper inverter path.
M05 Lower Inverter
Motor
Controls the rotation of the lower inverter roller that feeds the
original in and out of the lower inverter path.
M06 Pick-up Motor Raises and lowers the pick-up roller.
M07 Bottom Plate Lift
Motor
Raises and lowers the bottom under the original stack.
PCB
PCB01 ARDF Main Board Controls the ARDF and communicates with the main copier boards.
SENSORS
S01 Original Width
Sensor 2
Detects paper wider than 191.5 mm (7.5 in.) measured from the
reference point.
S02 Original Width
Sensor 3
Detects paper wider than 230 mm (9.1 in.) measured from the
reference point.
S03 Original Width
Sensor 4
Detects paper wider than 263.5 mm (10.4 in.) measured from the
reference point.
S04 Original Width
Sensor 5
reference point.
S05 Original Width
Sensor 1
reference point.
S06 Original Set
Sensor
Detects whether an original is on the table.
S07 Bottom Plate HP
Sensor
Detects whether the bottom plate is in the down position or not.
S08 Feed Cover
Sensor
Detects whether the feed cover is open or not.
S09 Bottom Plate
Position Sensor
Detects when the original is at the correct position for feeding.
S10 Upper Inverter
Sensor
Detects leading and trailing edge of the paper as it enters and
leaves the upper path of the inverter.
S11 LG Detection
Sensor
Detects paper longer than 318 mm (12.5 in.) on the original table.
S12 A4 Detection
Sensor
S13 B5 Detection
Sensor
S14 Interval Sensor Adjusts the timing of the original transport speed to the original
scanning speed after the original feeds. During duplex scanning, or
if original is small (B6, A5, or HLT) the interval sensor detects the
leading edge of the original and delays the pre-scanning motor for
the prescribed number of pulses to buckle the original and correct
skew.

SPECIFICATIONS
B132/B200 7-32 SM

No. Component
Function
S15 Skew Correction Sensor After pick-up and separation, the skew correction sensor
detects the leading edge of the original. This signal slows
the rotation of the entrance roller for a prescribed number of
pulses to buckle the original and correct skew.
S16 Separation Sensor Detects the separation of the original.
S17 Exit Sensor Detects the leading and trailing edges of paper feed out to
the original table and detects misfeeds. Also signals when
to stop the scanning belt.
S18 Registration Sensor Detects the leading edge and trailing edges of the original to
detects jams and stops the original at the ADF exposure
glass to correct buckle.
S19 Pick-up Roller HP Sensor Detects whether the pick-up roller is up or not.
S20 Lower inverter sensor Detects the original in the path of the lower inverter before it
feeds to the inverter rollers for 2nd side scanning, or feeds
to the exit rollers for exit.
S21 ARDF Position Sensor Detects whether the ARDF unit is up or down for scanning
on the main exposure glass (book mode).
S22 APS Start Sensor Signals the CPU when the DF is opened and closed (for
platen mode) so that the original size sensors in the copier
can check the original size.
SOLENOIDS
SOL01 Upper Inverter Solenoid Opens and closes the upper junction gate at the entrance of
the upper inverter path. During simplex scanning, closes the
upper inverter path so the original exits straight to the exit
tray. During duplex scanning, opens to allow the original to
enter the upper inverter path and closes to direct it once
again into the feed path for 2nd side scanning.
SOL02 Lower Inverter Solenoid Opens and closes the lower junction gate. During duplex
scanning opens after the 2nd side is scanned to direct the
original into the lower inverter path while the next sheet is
fed to the upper inverter path above, then closes to direct
the original out onto the original exit tray.

B473
LARGE CAPACITY TRAY

SM i B473
LARGE CAPACITY TRAY B473
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ............................................1
1.1 EXTERNAL COVERS .................................................................................. 1
1.2 PICK-UP/FEED/SEPARATION ROLLERS................................................... 2
1.3 PICK-UP SOLENOID ................................................................................... 3
1.4 PAPER END SENSOR, UPPER COVER SWITCHES................................. 4
1.5 TRAY MOTOR.............................................................................................. 5
1.6 PAPER STACK SENSOR ............................................................................ 5
1.7 PAPER SIZE ADJUSTMENT ....................................................................... 6
2. DETAILS...........................................................................................7
2.1 OVERVIEW.................................................................................................. 7
2.1.1 LCT MAIN COMPONENTS ................................................................. 7
2.1.2 LCT DRIVE LAYOUT........................................................................... 9
2.2 PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION............................................................ 10
2.2.1 STARTING PAPER FEED................................................................. 10
2.2.2 FEED AND SEPARATION ................................................................ 11
2.3 PAPER LIFT............................................................................................... 12
2.4 PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION................................................................... 14
2.5 PAPER END DETECTION......................................................................... 15

EXTERNAL COVERS
SM 1 B473
L
a
r
g
e

C
a
p
a
c
i
t
y

T
r
a
y

B
4
7
3

1.1 EXTERNAL COVERS

[A]: Transport cover
[B]: Transport cover hinge ( x 1)
[C]: Rear cover ( x 4)
[D]: Top cover ( x 1)
[E]: Right cover ( x 2)
[F]: Front cover ( x 3)

B473R001.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
PICK-UP/FEED/SEPARATION ROLLERS
B473 2 SM
1.2 PICK-UP/FEED/SEPARATION ROLLERS

[A]: Open the transport cover
[B]: Bracket cover ( x 2)
[C]: Pick-up roller ( x 1)
[D]: Feed roller ( x 1)
[E]: Separation roller ( x 1)

B473R002.WMF
B473R003.WMF
[C]
[D]
[E]
[B]
[A]
PICK-UP SOLENOID
SM 3 B473
L
a
r
g
e

C
a
p
a
c
i
t
y

T
r
a
y

B
4
7
3

1.3 PICK-UP SOLENOID

Rear cover ( x 4)
Open the transport cover ( 1.2)
Bracket cover ( 1.2)
[A]: Pick-up solenoid ( x 2, x 1)

B473R004.WMF
[A]
PAPER END SENSOR, UPPER COVER SWITCHES
B473 4 SM
1.4 PAPER END SENSOR, UPPER COVER SWITCHES

Open the top cover.
Right cover ( 1.1)
[A]: Paper end sensor ( x 1)
[B]: Upper cover switches 1, 2 ( x 2)

B473R005.WMF
B473R006.WMF
[A]
[B]
TRAY MOTOR
SM 5 B473
L
a
r
g
e

C
a
p
a
c
i
t
y

T
r
a
y

B
4
7
3

1.5 TRAY MOTOR

Rear cover ( 1.1)
[A]: Tray motor ( x 2, x 1)

1.6 PAPER STACK SENSOR

Disconnect the LCT from the machine
[A]: Sensor cover ( x 1)
[B]: Paper stack sensor ( x 1)

B473R007.WMF
B473R008.WMF
[A]
[B]
[A]
PAPER SIZE ADJUSTMENT
B473 6 SM
1.7 PAPER SIZE ADJUSTMENT

The side fences [A] can be adjusted for A4 Sideways, B5 Sideways, or LT
sideways at the top [B] and bottom brackets [C].
After changing the side fences to accept another paper size, you must execute
SP5959 005 (Paper Type Tray 4) and select the paper size of the side fence
positions. For details, see SP5959 in section 5. Service Tables of the B064/B065
manual.

B473R109.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
OVERVIEW
SM 7 B473
L
a
r
g
e

C
a
p
a
c
i
t
y

T
r
a
y

B
4
7
3

2. DETAILS
2.1 OVERVIEW
2.1.1 LCT MAIN COMPONENTS

2. Transport Roller
3. Feed Sensor
4. Feed Roller
5. Lift Sensor
6. Pick-up Roller
7. Paper End Sensor
8. Paper Near End Sensor
9. Paper Height Sensor 1
11. Paper Tray
13. Paper Tray Motor
14. Low Limit Sensor
15. Tray Drive Belt
16. Feed Motor
17. Stack Sensor
B473D001.WMF
2
3
4
5 6 7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
17
1
16
15
OVERVIEW
B473 8 SM

Pick-up, Separation, Feed. Non-contact, maintenance free FRR sysem. (
Handling Paper> Paper Feed Methods> Forward and Reverse Roller (FRR))
Tray Lift. Tray lift motor and timing belt raise and lower the paper tray.
Paper Size Detection. The side fences cannot be adjusted by customers. The
paper size must be entered with SP5959 005. For details, see SP5959 in section 4.
Service Tables.
Paper Height Detection. A feeler and four photointerrupters are used.
Paper End Detection. A reflective sensor on the upper stay detects paper end.

OVERVIEW
SM 9 B473
L
a
r
g
e

C
a
p
a
c
i
t
y

T
r
a
y

B
4
7
3

2.1.2 LCT DRIVE LAYOUT

1. Pick-up Roller
3. Transport Rollers
4. Feed Roller
5. Feed Motor
6. Tray Motor
7. Tray Lift Shaft
8. Tray Drive Belt

B473D003.WMF
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION
B473 10 SM
2.2 PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION
A standard FRR system is used. It consists of the pick-up, feed, and separation
rollers.

2.2.1 STARTING PAPER FEED

The feed motor [A] drives the transport rollers [B].
The separation roller [C], which is free to rotate in the direction indicated by the
arrow, remains at rest.

B473D004.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION
SM 11 B473
L
a
r
g
e

C
a
p
a
c
i
t
y

T
r
a
y

B
4
7
3

2.2.2 FEED AND SEPARATION

The feed motor [A] switches on, then the pick-up solenoid [B] switches on and
transfers drive to the paper feed roller [C] and pick-up roller [D].
The rotating pick-up roller lowers and feeds the first sheet when it contacts the top
of the stack.
The separation roller [E], in contact with the feed roller, only allows one sheet out of
the tray.
As soon as the paper feed sensor (not shown) detects the leading edge of the
paper, it switches off the pick-up solenoid which raises the pick-up roller. The feed
roller feeds the sheet to the registration roller.
This process is repeated for each sheet.

B473D005.WMF
[A]
[B] [C]
[D] [E]
PAPER LIFT
B473 12 SM
2.3 PAPER LIFT

Tray motor [A] Gear [B] Shaft [C] Tray belts [D] raise and lower the paper
tray [E].
After paper is set in the LCT and the upper cover is closed, if the paper height
sensor [F] is not activated, the tray motor lowers the tray and stops. When the
paper height sensor activates, the tray motor lifts the tray.
After several sheets have been fed, the paper level lowers, the actuator [G]
activates the lift sensor [H], and switches on the motor again. The motor raises
stack until the actuator de-activates the lift sensor.
This cycle repeats to maintain the correct height of the stack until the end of the
job.

B473D006.WMF
B473D158.WMF
[G]
[H]
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
PAPER LIFT
SM 13 B473
L
a
r
g
e

C
a
p
a
c
i
t
y

T
r
a
y

B
4
7
3

Pressing the tray down button [A] reverses the rotation of the tray motor [B] and
lowers the tray [C].
The tray lowers until the stack sensor [D] detects the top of the stack and stops the
tray motor.
This mechanism lowers the tray by 5 cm, which gives the user enough space to
add 500 sheets of paper.
If the down switch is then pressed again, the bottom plate moves down once
again by 5 cm. This allows the customer to replenish paper in convenient
amounts and at the same position.
A lower limit sensor [E] (triggered by an actuator on the bottom of the tray) is also
provided to stop the tray motor if the stack sensor should fail.

Summary
The tray raises when:
The main power switch is turned on
When the lift sensor switches on during copying
The top cover is closed and the lift sensor switches on

The tray lowers when:
The tray down button is pressed.
The paper end sensor signals that there is no paper in the tray.

B473D108.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION
B473 14 SM
2.4 PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION

As paper is consumed from the top of the stack [A], the paper tray rises and the
actuator [B] attached to the tray passes through paper height sensor 3 [C], paper
height sensor 2 [D], and paper height sensor 1 [E] until the actuator reaches the
paper near end sensor [F].
The operation panel displays a message for each paper height until the actuator
reaches the near-end sensor, then a message warns the user that the tray is nearly
empty.
The table summarizes the relation between sensor detection and the number of
sheets remaining in the stack.

Sensors
Sheet Remaining Bars
*1

Near-end P.Height 1 P.Height 2 P.Height 3
75 1
1500 2
2500 3
3500 4
*1
: The number of vertical bars in the paper height display on the operation panel.
: Actuator blocking the sensor gap.
: Sensor gap is open

B473D006.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
PAPER END DETECTION
SM 15 B473
L
a
r
g
e

C
a
p
a
c
i
t
y

T
r
a
y

B
4
7
3

2.5 PAPER END DETECTION

The paper end sensor [A] monitors the light reflected by each sheet on top of the
stack.
When the last sheet feeds, the cutout [B] is exposed, and the paper end sensor
receives no reflected light from below because there is no paper and this signals
paper end.

B473D111.WMF
[A]
[B]

B700/B701
2000/3000 SHEET FINISHER

SM i B700
B700
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.1 BASIC PROCEDURES ................................................................................ 1
1.1.1 COVERS ............................................................................................. 1
1.1.2 UPPER TRAY, END FENCE............................................................... 2
1.2 UPPER TRAY LIMIT SENSOR, LIMIT SWITCH.......................................... 4
1.3 POSITIONING ROLLER............................................................................... 5
1.4 PROOF TRAY EXIT SENSOR..................................................................... 6
1.5 UPPER TRAY HEIGHT SENSORS 1, 2....................................................... 7
1.6 EXIT GUIDE PLATE, UPPER TRAY EXIT SENSOR................................... 8
1.7 PROOF TRAY FULL SENSOR .................................................................... 9
1.8 FINISHER ENTRANCE SENSOR.............................................................. 10
1.9 PRE-STACK TRAY EXIT SENSOR ........................................................... 11
1.10 FOLD UNIT EXIT SENSOR...................................................................... 12
1.11 FOLD ADJUSTMENTS (B700 ONLY) ...................................................... 13
1.11.1 FOLDING HORIZONTAL SKEW ADJUSTMENT............................ 13
1.11.2 FOLD VERTICAL SKEW ADJUSTMENT........................................ 16
1.12 CORNER STAPLER................................................................................. 17
1.13 FOLD UNIT............................................................................................... 18
1.14 FOLD UNIT ENTRANCE SENSOR.......................................................... 20
1.15 STACK PRESENT SENSOR.................................................................... 21
1.16 BOOKLET STAPLER, BOOKLET STAPLER MOTOR............................. 22
1.16.1 BOOKLET STAPLER ...................................................................... 22
1.16.2 BOOKLET STAPLER MOTOR........................................................ 23
2. DETAILS.........................................................................................24
2.1 GENERAL LAYOUT................................................................................... 24
2.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS................................................................... 26
2.2.1 UPPER AREA B700/B701................................................................. 26
2.2.2 LOWER AREA B700/B701................................................................ 27
2.2.3 PUNCH UNIT B702 ........................................................................... 28
2.2.4 STACKER/STAPLER - B700/B701.................................................... 29
2.2.5 B700 FOLD UNIT .............................................................................. 30
2.2.6 SUMMARY OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS................................. 31
2.3 DRIVE LAYOUT ......................................................................................... 36
2.4 JUNCTION GATES .................................................................................... 37
Proof Mode ............................................................................................ 37
Shift Mode.............................................................................................. 37
Staple Mode........................................................................................... 37
2.5 PRE-STACKING......................................................................................... 38
2.6 UPPER TRAY............................................................................................. 40
2.7 LOWER TRAY (B700 ONLY) ..................................................................... 42

B700 ii SM
2.8 CORNER STAPLING................................................................................. 44
2.8.1 STACKING AND JOGGING.............................................................. 44
2.8.2 STAPLER MOVEMENT..................................................................... 46
2.8.3 CORNER STAPLING ........................................................................ 48
2.9 BOOKLET STAPLING (B700 ONLY) ......................................................... 49
2.9.1 BOOKLET PRESSURE MECHANISM.............................................. 49
2.9.2 BOOKLET STAPLING AND FOLDING.............................................. 50
Overview................................................................................................ 50
Booklet Stapling and Folding Mechanisms ............................................ 56
2.10 UPPER TRAY OUTPUT........................................................................... 59
2.10.1 FEED OUT ...................................................................................... 59
2.10.2 FEED OUT STACKING................................................................... 61
2.11 PUNCH UNIT B702 (FOR B700/B701) .................................................... 62
2.11.1 OVERVIEW OF OPERATION......................................................... 62
2.11.2 PUNCH MECHANISMS................................................................... 65
Paper Position Detection ....................................................................... 65
Punch Unit Movement............................................................................ 66
Punch Selection and Firing.................................................................... 67
2.11.3 PUNCH HOPPER MECHANISM..................................................... 68
2.12 FINISHER JAM DETECTION.................................................................... 69

What This Manual Contains
This manual describes two finishers, the 2000-Sheet Finisher Booklet (B700) and
3000-Sheet Finisher (B701):
Replacement and Adjustment
Details
For details about installation, preventive maintenance, troubleshooting, and
specifications please refer to the Service Manual for the Venus-C1a/C1b (Machine
Code: B132/B181/B200.
2000-Sheet Booklet Finisher B700
This finisher is equipped with three trays: a proof tray on top of the finisher, an
upper (shift) tray, and a lower tray for booklets.
This finisher is equipped with two trays: a proof tray on top of the finisher and the
upper (shift) tray. This finisher does corner stapling only. It does not have the lower
tray of the B700 for stapled and folded booklets.
NOTE: The descriptions in this manual apply to both finishers. Where differences
between these to finisher exist, you will see the notations "B700 only" or
"B701 only".

BASIC PROCEDURES

SM 1 B700/B701
2
0
0
0
/
3
0
0
0

S
h
e
e
t

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r

B
7
0
0
/
B
7
0
1

1.1 BASIC PROCEDURES
1.1.1 COVERS

[A]: Small Upper Cover ( x1). Open the front door, remove the screw, then
remove the cover.
[B]: Upper Cover ( x2)
[C]: Front Door Bracket ( x1)
[D]: Front Door
[E]: Front Left Side Cover ( x2)
[F]: Cover
[G]: Paper Exit Cover ( x2)
[H]: Rear Cover ( x2)

B700R101.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
[H]
BASIC PROCEDURES
B700/B701 2 SM

1.1.2 UPPER TRAY, END FENCE

1. Remove the rear cover. (w1.1.1)
2. To lower the upper tray:
Support the tray [A] with your right hand.
Pull gear [B] toward you J to release.
Slowly lower the tray until it stops.

B700R114.WMF
[A]
[B]
BASIC PROCEDURES

SM 3 B700/B701
2
0
0
0
/
3
0
0
0

S
h
e
e
t

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r

B
7
0
0
/
B
7
0
1

[A]: Front Side Cover ( x1)
[B]: Rear Side Cover ( x1)
[C]: Upper Tray ( x1)
[D]: Tray Bracket ( x4, x1 shoulder
screw J)
[E]: End Fence ( x3)

B700R115.WMF

B700R116.WMF
[A]
[B] [D]
[C]
J
[E]
[E]
UPPER TRAY LIMIT SENSOR, LIMIT SWITCH
B700/B701 4 SM

1.2 UPPER TRAY LIMIT SENSOR, LIMIT SWITCH

Remove:
Front door, front left side cover, rear cover, upper cover (w1.1.1)
End fence (w1.1.2)
[A]: Upper tray exit mechanism ( x4, x3)
[B]: Upper tray limit sensor ( x1, x1)
[C]: Upper tray limit switch ( x2)

B700R117.WMF

B700R118.WMF
[C]
[B]
[A]
POSITIONING ROLLER

SM 5 B700/B701
2
0
0
0
/
3
0
0
0

S
h
e
e
t

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r

B
7
0
0
/
B
7
0
1

1.3 POSITIONING ROLLER

[A]: Open the front door.
[B]: Pull out the stapling unit.
[C]: Positioning roller ( x1, timing belt x1)

B700R103.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
PROOF TRAY EXIT SENSOR
B700/B701 6 SM

1.4 PROOF TRAY EXIT SENSOR

Remove small upper cover (w1.1.1)
[A]: Proof Tray Exit Sensor Bracket ( x1)
[B]: Proof Tray Exit Sensor (S10) ( x1)

B700R107.WMF
[A]
[B]
UPPER TRAY HEIGHT SENSORS 1, 2

SM 7 B700/B701
2
0
0
0
/
3
0
0
0

S
h
e
e
t

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r

B
7
0
0
/
B
7
0
1

1.5 UPPER TRAY HEIGHT SENSORS 1, 2

Remove small upper cover, upper cover (w1.1.1)
[A]: Upper Tray Paper Height Sensor Bracket ( x1)
[B]: Upper Tray Paper Height Sensor Staple Mode (S08) ( x1)
[C]: Upper Tray Paper Height Sensor Non-Staple Mode (S09) ( x1)

B700R108.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
EXIT GUIDE PLATE, UPPER TRAY EXIT SENSOR
B700/B701 8 SM

1.6 EXIT GUIDE PLATE, UPPER TRAY EXIT SENSOR
Remove:
Rear cover (w1.1.1)
Upper covers (w1.1.1)
Front door (w1.1.1)
Cover (w1.1.1)
Paper exit cover (w1.1.1)

[A]: Inner cover ( x2)

[B]: Exit guide plate
J x1
Link and spring
x1
0 x1
[C]: Upper tray exit sensor (S6)
( x1)

B700R109.WMF

B700R110.WMF
[A]
J

0
[B]
[C]
PROOF TRAY FULL SENSOR

SM 9 B700/B701
2
0
0
0
/
3
0
0
0

S
h
e
e
t

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r

B
7
0
0
/
B
7
0
1

1.7 PROOF TRAY FULL SENSOR

Remove the exit guide plate. (w1.6)
[A]: Guide plate. Disconnect at J,
[B]: Sensor bracket ( x1)
[C]: Proof tray full sensor (S11) ( x1)

B700R111.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
J
FINISHER ENTRANCE SENSOR
B700/B701 10 SM

1.8 FINISHER ENTRANCE SENSOR

Disconnect the finisher if it is connected to the copier.
Disconnect the cover interposer if it is installed.
[A]: Sensor bracket ( x1)
[B]: Finisher entrance sensor (S1) ( x1)

B700R133.WMF
[A]
[B]
PRE-STACK TRAY EXIT SENSOR

SM 11 B700/B701
2
0
0
0
/
3
0
0
0

S
h
e
e
t

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r

B
7
0
0
/
B
7
0
1

1.9 PRE-STACK TRAY EXIT SENSOR

Disconnect the finisher if it is connected to the copier.
[A]: Sensor bracket
[B]: Pre-stack tray exit sensor (S2)

B700R102.WMF
[A]
[B]
FOLD UNIT EXIT SENSOR
B700/B701 12 SM

1.10 FOLD UNIT EXIT SENSOR
Pull out the stapler tray.
[A]: Fold unit vertical guide plate

[B]: Fold unit inner cover
( x2, Spring pin x1)

[C]: Fold unit upper cover ( x1)
[D]: Paper clamp mechanism ( x4)
[E]: Fold unit exit sensor bracket ( x1)
[F]: Fold unit exit sensor (S31) ( x1)

B700R121.WMF

B700R125.WMF

B700R126.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
FOLD ADJUSTMENTS (B700 ONLY)

SM 13 B700/B701
2
0
0
0
/
3
0
0
0

S
h
e
e
t

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r

B
7
0
0
/
B
7
0
1

1.11 FOLD ADJUSTMENTS (B700 ONLY)
1.11.1 FOLDING HORIZONTAL SKEW ADJUSTMENT

Important
The fold unit is adjusted for optimum performance before the finisher is shipped
from the factory. Do this adjustment only if the edges of folded booklets are not
even.
1. Switch the copier on and enter the SP mode.
2. Europe, Asia: Use SP 6113 001 (this is for A3 paper).
North America: Use SP 6113 005 (this is for DLT paper).
NOTE: If the original setting of SP6113 001 or 005 is not 0, then you must do
the vertical skew adjustment (w1.11.2) after you finish this horizontal
skew procedure.
3. Use the 10-key pad to input "-2" (mm) for the SP value.
NOTE: (Press [/#] to enter the minus sign.)
4. Press [#] then exit the SP mode.
5. Open the front door and pull the stapler unit [A] out of the finisher.
6. Open the guide plate [B].
7. Loosen the adjustment screw [C] and then tighten until it stops. (Do not over
tighten.)
8. Remove the lock screw [D].
9. Raise the tip [E] of the adjustment screw very slightly and allow it to descend
under its own weight.

B700R802.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
B700/B701 14 SM

10. Push the stapler unit into the finisher and close the front door.
11. Do a folding test.
Switch the copier on.
Put one page of A3 or DLT paper in the ARDF.
On the copier operation panel, select booklet stapling.
Press [Start]. One sheet is folded.
12. Remove the sheet from the lower tray.
13. Hold the folded sheet with the creased side pointing down and face-up (the
same way that it came out of the finisher).
14. Referring to the diagram, determine if the skew is + [A] or [B].

B700R901.WMF
[A]
[B]

SM 15 B700/B701
2
0
0
0
/
3
0
0
0

S
h
e
e
t

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r

B
7
0
0
/
B
7
0
1

15. Open the front door of the finisher and pull the stapler unit [A] out.
16. Open the guide plate [B].
17. Turn the adjustment screw [C] to correct the amount of skew you measured
from the test sheet.
For + skew ([A] on the previous page), turn the adjustment screw
(clockwise).
For skew ([B] on the previous page), turn the adjustment screw to the
left (counter-clockwise).
Every click in the +/ direction adjusts the fold position by 0.1 mm by moving
the bottom fence [D]
18. Raise the tip of the adjustment screw [C] and allow it to lower under its own
weight.
19. Attach and tighten the lock screw [E].
20. Push the stapler unit into the machine, close the front door, then turn the copier
on.
21. Europe, Asia: Do SP 6113 001 (this is for A3 paper).
North America: Do SP 6113 005 (this is for DLT paper).
22. Reset it to "0".
23. Do the test again.
24. If the result is satisfactory, this completes the adjustment.
-or-
If some skew remains, repeat this adjustment.
NOTE: After doing this adjustment, adjust for vertical skew, if necessary.
(w1.11.2).

B700R130A.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
B700/B701 16 SM

1.11.2 FOLD VERTICAL SKEW ADJUSTMENT
Important
The fold unit is adjusted for optimum performance before the finisher is shipped
from the factory. Do this adjustment only if the edges of folded booklets are not
even.
1. Switch the copier on.
2. Do a folding test.
Switch the copier on.
Put one page of A3 or DLT paper in the ARDF.
On the copier operation panel, select booklet stapling.
Press [Start]. One sheet is folded.
3. Hold the folded sheet with the creased
side pointing down, and face-up (the
same way that it came out of the
finisher).
4. Referring to the diagram, determine if
the skew is positive [A] or negative [B].
5. Measure the amount of skew.
6. Enter the SP mode
Europe, Asia: Use SP 6113 001 (this is for A3 paper).
North America: Use SP 6113 005 (this is for DLT paper).
7. Enter one-half the measured amount of skew.
Example: If the measure amount of skew is -1.2 mm, enter -0.6 mm
NOTE: The range for measurement is 3.0 mm to +3.0 mm in 0.2 mm steps for
every notch adjustment.
8. Exit the SP mode and do the test again (steps 2 to 5).
9. Repeat this procedure until the skew is corrected.
The illustration below shows the effects of +/- adjustment with SP6113. (The
vertical arrows show the direction of paper feed.)

B700R902.WMF
B700R135.WMF
[A]
[B]
CORNER STAPLER

SM 17 B700/B701
2
0
0
0
/
3
0
0
0

S
h
e
e
t

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r

B
7
0
0
/
B
7
0
1

1.12 CORNER STAPLER

Pull out the stapler unit
[A]: Inner cover ( x3)
[B]: Stapler unit holder ( x1)
[C]: Corner stapler (M20) ( x1)

B700R112.WMF

B700R113.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
FOLD UNIT
B700/B701 18 SM

1.13 FOLD UNIT

Remove the back cover (w1.1.1)

CAUTION: The stapler unit is heavy.

[A]: Ground screw ( x1)
[B]: Harness ( x6, x6)
[C]: Stapler unit ( x4)

B700R119.WMF

B700R801.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
FOLD UNIT

SM 19 B700/B701
2
0
0
0
/
3
0
0
0

S
h
e
e
t

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r

B
7
0
0
/
B
7
0
1

Important: Support the fold unit with your hand to prevent it from falling.

CAUTION: The fold unit is heavy.

[A]: Folding unit ( x4, x2, x6)
If you have replaced the folding unit:
1. Read the DIP SW settings on the decal [B] attached to the back of the new
folding unit.
2. Check the DIP SW settings on the main board [C] of the finisher.
3. If these settings are different, change these settings to match settings printed
on the seal attached to the folding unit.
NOTE: Set DIP switches 1 to 4 (the switch set on the right). Do not touch the
other DIP switches.

B700R124.WMF

B700R134.WMF
[B]
[C]
[A]
FOLD UNIT ENTRANCE SENSOR
B700/B701 20 SM

1.14 FOLD UNIT ENTRANCE SENSOR

Pull out the stapler unit.
[A]: Fold unit entrance sensor bracket ( x2)
[B]: Fold unit entrance sensor (S26) ( x1, x1)

B700R132.WMF
[B]
[A]
STACK PRESENT SENSOR

SM 21 B700/B701
2
0
0
0
/
3
0
0
0

S
h
e
e
t

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r

B
7
0
0
/
B
7
0
1

1.15 STACK PRESENT SENSOR

Important: If you intend to correct the horizontal and vertical skew for the fold unit
at the same time, do those adjustments first, then replace the sensor. (w1.11.1,
1.11.2)
Remove the stapler unit (w1.13)
[A]: Guide plate.
[B]: Stay ( x4)
[C]: Left plate ( x4)
[D]: Sensor bracket ( x1)
[E]: Stack present sensor (S32) ( x1)

B700R121.WMF

B700R122.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
BOOKLET STAPLER, BOOKLET STAPLER MOTOR
B700/B701 22 SM

1.16 BOOKLET STAPLER, BOOKLET STAPLER MOTOR
1.16.1 BOOKLET STAPLER

Pull out the stapler unit.
[A]: Harness cover ( x2)
[B]: Booklet stapler support stay ( x4, x2, x4)
[C]: Stapler ( x4)

B700R903.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
BOOKLET STAPLER, BOOKLET STAPLER MOTOR

SM 23 B700/B701
2
0
0
0
/
3
0
0
0

S
h
e
e
t

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r

B
7
0
0
/
B
7
0
1

1.16.2 BOOKLET STAPLER MOTOR
Remove the stapler unit. (w1.13)
1. Remove:
[A]: Stay ( x4).
[B]: Left plate ( x4).

2. Remove:
[C]: Harness cover ( x2)
[D]: Booklet stapler support stay
( x4, x2, x4)
[E]: Booklet stapler ( x4)
[F]: Booklet stapler motor ( x2, x1)

To Reattach the Booklet Stapler Motor
3. Reattach the booklet stapler motor.
Important: Do not tighten the screws.

4. Attach the special tool [G] and reattach
the booklet stapler stay.
NOTE: This tool is included with the
stapler spare part.
5. Turn the gear [H] with your finger until it
stops.
6. Tighten the screws to attach to the
booklet stapler motor.
7. Remove the stay again and remove the
special tool.
8. Reattach the booklet stapler stay.
9. Push the stapler unit into the machine.

B700R122A.WMF

B700R123.WMF

B700R131.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
[H]
GENERAL LAYOUT
B700/B701 24 SM

2. DETAILS
2.1 GENERAL LAYOUT

1. Proof Tray Junction Gate
2. Punch Unit
3. Stapler Junction Gate
4. Pre-Stack Junction Gate
5. Pre-Stack Tray
6. Corner Stapler (M20)
7. Lower Tray (Booklet)*
1

8. Folder Rollers*
1

9. Folder Plate*
1

10. Booklet Stapler*
1

11. Upper Tray (Shift)
12. Proof Tray

*
1
B700 Only
B700D101.WMF
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
GENERAL LAYOUT

SM 25 B700/B701
2
0
0
0
/
3
0
0
0

S
h
e
e
t

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r

B
7
0
0
/
B
7
0
1

Paper direction
The operation of the proof tray and stapler junction gates direct the flow of the
paper once it enters the finisher:

Proof Junction Gate Stapler Junction Gate Paper Feeds
Closed Closed Paper feeds straight through
Open Closed Paper feeds to the proof tray
Closed Open Paper feds to the staple tray

Proof tray
Copies are sent to the proof tray (12) when neither sorting nor stapling are selected
for the job.
Upper tray
The upper tray (11) receives copies that are sorted and shifted and also receives
copies that have been corner stapled. Corner stapling is provided on both the B700
and the B701.
Pre-stack tray
The pre-stack tray has a switchback mechanism to increase the productivity of
stapling. (w2.5) Pre-stacking is done for corner stapling in the B700/B701 and for
booklet stapling in the B700.
Lower tray
The lower tray (7) receives copies that have been center folded and stapled
(booklet stapling). Booklet stapling is not provided on the B701.

ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
B700/B701 26 SM

2.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
2.2.1 UPPER AREA B700/B701

1. Upper/Proof Exit Motor (M4)
2. Stapling Tray Junction Gate Solenoid (SOL2)
3. Upper Transport Motor (M2)
4. Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor (S7)
5. Proof Tray Exit Sensor (S10)
6. Proof Tray Full Sensor (S11)
7. Finisher Entrance Sensor (S1)
8. Upper Tray Paper Height Sensor (S9) (Non-
Staple Mode)
9. Upper Tray Limit Sensor (S12)
10. Upper Tray Limit Switch (SW2)
11. Stacking Roller HP Sensor (S13)
12. Stacking Sponge Roller Motor (M10)
13. Upper Tray Exit Sensor (S6)
14. Upper Tray Paper Height Sensor (S8)
(Staple Mode)
15. Shift Roller HP Sensor (S5)
16. Shift Roller Motor (M18)
17. Exit Guide Plate Motor (M19)
18. Proof Junction Gate Solenoid (SOL1)

B700D201.WMF
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
1
2
3 4
5
6
7
8
9

SM 27 B700/B701
2
0
0
0
/
3
0
0
0

S
h
e
e
t

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r

B
7
0
0
/
B
7
0
1

2.2.2 LOWER AREA B700/B701

1. Upper Tray Lift Motor (M21)
2. Lower Transport Motor (M3)
3. Entrance Motor (M1)
4. Front Door Safety Switch (SW1)
5. Pre-Stack Tray Exit Sensor (S2)
6. Stapling Edge Pressure Plate Solenoid
(SOL4)
7. Positioning Roller Solenoid (SOL3)
8. Positioning Roller Motor (M14)
9. Lower Tray Full Sensor Front (S34)*
1

10. Lower Tray Full Sensor Rear (S33)*
1

11. Main Board (PCB1)
12. Upper Tray Full Sensor (S20) *
2

13. Upper Tray Full Sensor (S19)
14. Booklet Stapler Board (PCB2)*
1

15. Booklet Pressure Roller Solenoid (SOL5) *
1

*
1
B700 Only
*
2
B701 Only

B700D202.WMF
12
13
14
15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10
11
B700/B701 28 SM

2.2.3 PUNCH UNIT B702

1. Punch Encoder Sensor (S24)
2. Punch Drive Motor (M24)
3. Punch HP Sensor (S24)
4. Punch Unit Board (PCB3)
5. Paper position sensor slide motor (M7)
6. Paper Position Slide HP Sensor (S22)
7. Paper Position Sensor (S3)
8. Punch Hopper Full Sensor (S4)
9. Punch Movement HP Sensor (S21)
10. Punch Movement Motor (M9)

B700D203A.WMF
1
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2
3

SM 29 B700/B701
2
0
0
0
/
3
0
0
0

S
h
e
e
t

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r

B
7
0
0
/
B
7
0
1

2.2.4 STACKER/STAPLER - B700/B701

1. Stack Present Sensor (S32)*
1

2. Stack Junction Gate HP Sensor (S27)*
1

3. Stack Feed Out Belt HP Sensor (S16)
4. Feed Out Belt Motor (M5)
5. Booklet Stapler EH185R Rear (M23)*
1

6. Booklet Stapler EH185R Front (M22)*
1

7. Jogger Fence Motor (M15)
8. Jogger Fence HP Sensor (S15)
9. Corner Stapler Movement Motor (M6)
10. Stapling Tray Paper Sensor (S14)
11. Corner Stapler EH530 (M20)
12. Corner Stapler Rotation Motor (M13)
13. Corner Stapler HP Sensor (S17)
14. Stapler Rotation HP Sensor (S18)
15. Stack Junction Gate Motor (M17) *
1

*
1
B700 Only

B700D204.WMF
11
12
13
14
15
1
2
3
4
7
8
9
10
5
6
B700/B701 30 SM

2.2.5 B700 FOLD UNIT

1. Clamp Roller HP Sensor (S25)
2. Fold Roller Motor (M12)
3. Fold Plate Motor (M11)
4. Fold Plate HP Sensor (S29)
5. Fold Unit Bottom Fence Lift Motor (M16)
6. Fold Cam HP Sensor (S30)
7. Fold Bottom Fence HP Sensor (S28)
8. Fold Unit Entrance Sensor (S26)
9. Clamp Roller Retraction Motor (M8)
10. Fold Unit Exit Sensor (S31)

B700D205.WMF
B700 only
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

SM 31 B700/B701
2
0
0
0
/
3
0
0
0

S
h
e
e
t

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r

B
7
0
0
/
B
7
0
1

2.2.6 SUMMARY OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
Here is a general summary of all the electrical components of the B700/B701
finishers.
NOTE: In the table below a number that appears in bold text (M8, etc.) denotes a
component that is on the 2000/3000 Sheet Finisher B700 only.

Boards (PCB)
PCB1 Main Board The main board that controls the finisher
PCB2 Booklet Stapler Board A separate board that controls booklet finishing.
PCB3 Punch Unit Board The board that controls the punch unit.
Motors
M1 Finisher Entrance Motor Drives 1) the finisher entrance rollers, 2) and the punch
waste transport belt of the punch unit.
M2 Upper Transport Motor Drives the paper feed rollers that feed paper 1) to the proof
tray, 2) straight-through to the upper tray, 3) the pre-stack
tray entrance roller.
M3 Lower Transport Motor Drives paper feed rollers forward and reverse in the pre-stack
tray for the switchback, and drives the other rollers in the
lower transport area.
M4 Upper/Proof Tray Exit
Motor
Drives 1) proof tray exit rollers, 2) extension and retraction of
the stacking sponge roller, 3) upper tray exit rollers.
M5 Feed Out Belt Motor
Drives the feed out belt that moves the stapled stacks out of
the stapling tray after stapling.
M6 Corner Stapler
Movement Motor
Moves the corner stapler horizontally on a steel rod to
position the stapler at the stapling position at 1) the front, 2)
the rear (straight stapling), 3) the rear (diagonal stapling), or
4) the front and rear for double stapling.
M7 Paper Position Sensor
Slide Motor
Drives the movement of the paper position slide that holds
the paper position sensor (S3) that detects the position of the
paper.
M8 Clamp Roller Retraction
Motor
Drives a large cam that alternately clamps and unclamps the
clamp retraction roller, the idle roller of the clamp roller pair.
When these rollers are clamped, they are part of the paper
feed path and feed the stack toward the bottom fence of the
fold unit. When the idle roller is retracted, the stacks falls a
very short distance (3 mm) onto the fold unit bottom fence
below. These rollers remain unclamped while the bottom
fence positions the stack for folding and while the stack is
folded by the fold rollers.
M9 Punch Movement Motor Drives the front/back movement of the punch unit to position
it correctly for stapling the paper below.
M10 Stacking Sponge Roller
Motor
Rotates the stacking roller that drags each sheet back
against the end fence to jog the bottom of each sheet after
feed out to the upper tray.
M11 Fold Plate Motor Drives the fold plate that pushes the center of the stack into
the nip of the fold rollers to start the fold.
M12 Fold Roller Motor Rotates forward and drives the fold rollers that fold the stack
and feed it out of the fold unit, reverses to feed the fold once
more into the fold unit, and then rotates forward again to feed
the fold out of the fold unit.
B700/B701 32 SM
M13 Corner Stapler Rotation
Motor
Swivels the corner stapler and positions it so the staple fires
at an oblique angle at the rear corner of the paper stack.
M14 Positioning Roller Motor Drives the positioning roller in the stapling tray.
M15 Jogger Fence Motor Drives the jogger fences in the stapling tray to jog both sides
of the stack before stapling.
M16 Fold Unit Bottom Fence
Lift Motor
Raises the bottom fence and stops when the center of the
vertical stack is opposite the edge of the horizontal fold
blade. The distance for raising the blade is prescribed as
one-half the size of the paper selected for the job. For large
paper, (A3, B4) the bottom fence first lowers the stack 10 mm
below the fold position, and then raises it to the fold position.
M17 Stack Junction Gate
Motor
Drives the large cam that operates the stack junction gate at
the top of the stapling tray. When this gate is open, it directs
the ascending stack to the upper tray if it has been corner
stapled, or if it is closed the gate turns the booklet stapled
stack down so it falls onto the bottom fence of the folding
unit.
M18 Shift Roller Motor Drives the shift roller that operates in shift mode to stagger
document sets as they feed out to the upper tray (making
them easier to separate).
M19 Exit Guide Plate Motor Drives the mechanism that raises and lowers the exit guide
plate.
M20 Corner Stapler EH530 This is the roving corner stapler, mounted on a steel rail that
staples 1) at the front, 2) at the rear (straight staple), 3) at the
rear (diagonal staple), and 4) font and rear (two staples).
M21 Upper Tray Lift Motor Raises and lowers the upper tray during feed out to keep the
tray at the optimum height until it is full.
M22 Booklet Stapler
EH185R: Front
Booklet stapler. Staples paper stacks in the center before
they are folded.
M23 Booklet Stapler
EH185R: Rear
Booklet stapler. Staples paper stacks in the center before
they are folded.
M24 Punch Drive Motor Fires the punches that punch the holes in the paper.
Sensors
S1 Finisher Entrance
Sensor
Provides two functions: (1) Detects paper entering the
finisher from the copier, and (2) Signals a jam if it detects
paper at the entrance when the copier is switched on.
S2 Pre-stack Tray Exit
Sensor
Detects 1) paper fed from the pre-stack tray to the stapling
tray, and detects 2) paper in the pre-stack when the copier is
switched on. (This sensor performs no timing function. The
entire flow of paper through the pre-stacking mechanism is
controlled by motor pulse counts.)
S3 Paper Position Sensor The photosensor that detects the edge of the paper and
sends this information to the punch unit board where it is
used to position the punch for punching the holes in the
paper.
S4 Punch Hopper Full
Sensor
1) A photosensor that detects and signals that the punch
hopper is filled with punch waste and needs emptying, and 2)
confirms the presence of the punch hopper and signals an
error if it is missing or not installed completely.
S5 Shift Roller HP Sensor
Located near the shift roller motor, controls the front-to-back
movement of the shift roller as shifts paper during straight-
through feed.
S6 Upper Tray Exit Sensor
A flat, photo sensor located inside the guide plate, detects
the leading edge and trailing edge of the paper as it feeds out
to the upper tray during straight-through jobs (with and

SM 33 B700/B701
2
0
0
0
/
3
0
0
0

S
h
e
e
t

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r

B
7
0
0
/
B
7
0
1

without stapling). When paper is fed to the upper tray, at the
paper output slot this sensor signals an error when it detects
(1) paper has failed to leave the paper exit (lag error), (2)
detects paper has failed to arrive at the paper exit (late error),
(3) detects paper is in the exit slot when the machine is
turned on.
S7 Exit Guide Plate HP
Sensor
Controls the vertical movement of the control exit guide . The
guide plate is in the home position when the guide plate is
down and the actuator interrupts the sensor gap.
S8 Upper Tray Paper
Height Sensor (Staple
Mode)
This is the upper sensor of the upper/lower paper height
sensor pair that controls the lift of the upper tray. This sensor
detects the paper height of the stack in the upper tray when
the copier is operating in the staple mode.
S9 Upper Tray Paper
Height Sensor (Non-
Staple Mode)
This is the lower sensor of the upper/lower paper height
sensor pair that controls the lift of the upper tray. When the
machine is switched on, the upper tray rises until the actuator
on the tray triggers this sensor to switch off the upper tray lift
motor.
S10 Proof Tray Exit Sensor
This sensor detects and times the feeding of paper to the
proof tray. It also detects whether paper is present at the
proof tray exit when the copier is switched on.
S11 Proof Tray Full Sensor
The top of the stack in the proof tray increases until it nudges
the feeler of this sensor. The sensor then signals that the
proof tray is full and the job halts until some paper is removed
from the proof tray.
S12 Upper Tray Limit Sensor This sensor controls the position of the upper tray 1) during
straight-through feed out, 2) during shift feed out, 3) when the
machine is turned on. The machine obeys the signal of
whichever sensor is actuated first.
An actuator attached to an arm triggers this sensor. The tip of
the same arm depresses the upper tray limit switch If the
sensor fails, the tip of the arm will activate the upper tray limit
microswitch (SW2) and stop the lift of the upper tray.
Note: When the machine is turned on, the upper tray position
is controlled by either this sensor or the upper tray paper
height sensor (S9).
S13 Stacking Roller HP
Sensor
Controls the forward and back motion of the stacking roller (a
sponge roller) located at the output slot of the upper tray. The
sponge roller drags each ejected sheet back against the end
fence of the upper tray to keep the bottom of the stack
aligned.
S14 Stapling Tray Paper
Sensor
A photo sensor that detects whether paper is in the stapling
tray. When this sensor detects paper, the bottom fence motor
raises or lowers the bottom fence to position the selected
paper size for booklet stapling.
S15 Jogger Fence HP
Sensor
Detects the home position of the jogger fences. When the
actuator on the jogger fence interrupts this sensor, the jogger
fence is in its home position and the jogger fence motor
(M15) stops.
S16 Stack Feed-Out Belt HP
Sensor
Controls the position of the stack feed-out pawl on the stack
feed-out belt. Once the actuator on the feed belt nudges the
feeler of this sensor near the top of the stapling unit, the feed
out belt motor (M5) remains on for the time prescribed to
position the pawl at the home position to catch the next stack.
S17 Corner Stapler HP Located at the front the stapling tray and mounted above the
B700/B701 34 SM
Sensor steel rod where the corner stapler travels, this sensor detects
the home position of the corner stapler. The corner stapler is
in its home position when the actuator on the corner stapler
unit interrupts this sensor.
S18 Stapler Rotation HP
Sensor
Controls the angle of the position of the corner stapler during
oblique stapling.
S19 Upper Tray Full Sensor
(B700/B701)
B700: When the actuator on the side of the upper fence
enters the gap of this sensor, the sensor signals that the
upper tray is at its lowest position (full) and stops the job.
B701: One of two upper tray full sensors. This is the higher
tray full sensor for A3 and other heavy paper. The other
upper tray full sensor (20) is for lighter paper.
S20 Upper Tray Full Sensor
(B701 only)
B700: This sensor is not used on the booklet finisher. There
is only one upper tray full sensor (S18).
B701: One of two upper tray full sensors. This is the lower
tray full sensor for A4 and smaller paper. The other upper
tray full sensor (19) is for larger paper.
S21 Punch Unit HP Sensor Switches off the punch movement motor when the punch unit
returns to its home position. Pulse counts determine where
the punch unit pauses for punching and reversing.
S22 Paper Position Side HP
Sensor
Controls the movement of the paper position detection unit.
Switches on when the horizontal detection unit is at the home
position (HP is the reference point).
S23 Punch HP Sensor Detects the home position of the punch unit and controls the
vertical movement of the punches when they fire.
S24 Punch Encoder Sensor When the punch mode is selected for the job (2-hole, 3-hole,
etc.), the machine controls the operation of the punch drive
(M24) motor which drives a small encoder shaped like a
notched wheel. This wheel is rotated forward and reverse
precisely to select which punches are moved up and down
during the punch stroke.
S25 Clamp Roller HP Sensor Controls the movement of the clamp retraction roller (the idle
roller of the clamp roller pair).
S26 Fold Unit Entrance
Sensor
Detects 1) the leading edge of the stack during booklet
stapling, and 2) also used to signal an alarm if a paper is
detected at the entrance of the fold unit when the copier is
turned on.
S27 Stack Junction Gate HP
Sensor
Controls the opening and closing of the stack junction gate.
Switches on when the stack junction gate is open and at the
home position.
S28 Fold Bottom Fence HP
Sensor
Controls the movement of the bottom fence in the folding unit
using pulse counts based on the size of the paper selected
for the job to position the stack correctly for feeding.
S29 Fold Plate HP Sensor
Along with the fold plate cam HP sensor (S30) this sensor
controls the movement of the fold plate . The fold plate has
arrived at the home position when the edge of the plate
enters the gap of this sensor.
S30 Fold Plate Cam HP
Sensor
Along with the fold plate HP sensor (S29), this sensor
controls the movement of the fold plate. The actuator
mounted on the end of the roller that drives the folder plate
forward and back makes three full rotations, i.e. the actuator
passes the sensor gap twice and stops on the 3rd rotation
and reverses. This accounts for the left and right movement
of fold plate.
S31 Fold Unit Exit Sensor 1) Detects the folded edge of the stack as it feeds out from
the nip of the fold rollers, stops the rollers, and reverses them

SM 35 B700/B701
2
0
0
0
/
3
0
0
0

S
h
e
e
t

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r

B
7
0
0
/
B
7
0
1

so the fold feeds back into the nip, 2) when the folded booklet
finally emerges from the nip of the fold rollers, detects the
leading and trailing edge of the booklet to make sure that it
feeds out correctly.
S32 Stack Present Sensor This sensor determines whether a there is paper at the turn
junction gate when the machine is turned on. If a stack is
present, this triggers a jam alert. (This sensor performs no
dynamic function such as pulse counting, etc. It only detects
whether paper is at the top of the folding unit when power its
turned on.)
S33 Lower Tray Full Sensor -
Rear
This rear sensor is the lower sensor of the lower tray full
sensor pair. Two actuators are attached to the actuator arm
that touches the top of stapled and folded booklets as they
feed out. The on/off combinations of the two sensors are
used to detect when the tray is full and stop the job. (The
lower tray is stationary. At tray full, the job halts until booklets
are removed from the lower tray.)
S34 Lower Tray Full Sensor -
Front
This front sensor is the higher sensor of the lower tray full
sensor pair. Two actuators are attached to the actuator arm
that touches the top of stapled and folded booklets as they
feed out. The on/off combinations of the two sensors are
used to detect when the tray is full and stop the job. (The
lower tray is stationary. At tray full, the job halts until booklets
are removed from the lower tray.)
Solenoids
SOL1 Proof Junction Gate
Solenoid
Opens and closes the proof tray junction gate. When the
solenoid switches on, it opens the gate and paper is diverted
to the proof tray. When this gate is closed, the paper goes
straight to the upper tray. I
SOL2 Stapling Tray Junction
Gate Solenoid
Directs paper to the stapling tray. When this solenoid is on,
paper feeds straight through. When this solenoid is off, paper
feeds to the stapler tray below.
SOL3 Positioning Roller
Solenoid
Engages the stapler transport motor and the positioning roller
of the stapling tray. The positioning roller pushes each sheet
down against the bottom fence to align the bottom the stack
for stapling. (The jogger fences align the sides.)
SOL4 Stapling Edge Pressure
Plate Solenoid
Operates the pressure plate of the stapling unit. The pressure
plate presses down the edge of stack in the stapling tray so it
is tight for stapling.
SOL5 Booklet Pressure Roller
Solenoid
When the paper stack in the stapling tray feeds to the folding
unit, this solenoid turns on and operates the roller that
pushes on the surface of the stack to flatten it.
Switches
SW1 Front Door Safety
Switch
The safety switch that cuts the dc power when the front door
is opened.
SW2 Upper Tray Limit SW A micro-switch that cuts the power to the upper tray lift motor
when the upper tray reaches its upper limit. This switch
duplicates the function of the upper tray limit sensor (S12)
and stops the upper tray if S12 fails.

DRIVE LAYOUT
B700/B701 36 SM

2.3 DRIVE LAYOUT

1. Upper Transport Motor (M2)
2. Upper/Proof Exit Motor (M4)
3. Upper Tray Lift Motor (M21)
4. Feed-Out Belt Motor (M5)
5. Fold Roller Motor*
1
(M12)
6. Folder Plate Motor
*1
(M11)
7. Positioning Roller Motor (M14)
8. Lower Transport Motor (M3)
9. Entrance Motor (M1)

*
1
B700 Only

B700D206.WMF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
JUNCTION GATES

SM 37 B700/B701
2
0
0
0
/
3
0
0
0

S
h
e
e
t

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r

B
7
0
0
/
B
7
0
1

2.4 JUNCTION GATES
The positions of the proof tray and staple tray junction gates determine the
direction of paper feed after paper enters the finisher.

Proof Mode
[A]: Proof tray junction gate opens.
[B]: Staple tray junction gate remains
closed.
The proof tray junction gate directs paper
to the proof tray above.

Shift Mode
[A]: Proof tray junction gate remains
closed.
[B]: Staple tray junction gate remains
closed.
With both junction gates closed, the paper
goes to the upper tray.

Staple Mode
[A]: Proof tray junction gate remains
closed.
[B]: Staple tray junction gate opens
The staple tray junction gate directs the
paper to the staple tray below for jogging
and stapling.

B700D301.WMF

B700D302.WMF

B700D303.WMF
[A]
[B]
[A]
[B]
[A] [B]
PRE-STACKING
B700/B701 38 SM

2.5 PRE-STACKING

This example describes what happens to Set 2 during the feed and stapling cycle
of sets that contain three pages.
[A]: While the Set 1 is being stapled in the staple tray [1], the 1st sheet of Set 2 [2]
feeds to the pre-stack tray, and the 2nd sheet of Set 2 [3] enters the finisher.
[B]: The pre-stack junction gate opens and the 1st sheet of Set 2 [4] switches back
to the top of the pre-stack tray as the 2nd sheet of Set 2 [5] starts to descend.
[C]: As the 2nd sheet of Set 2 continues to descend, the 1st sheet of Set 2 is fed
from the pre-stack tray. At this time the leading edges [6] of both sheets are
even.
[D]: The trailing edges of the 1st and 2nd sheets of Set 2 pass the junction gate [7]
as the 3rd sheet of Set 2 [8] enters the finisher.

B700D992.WMF
[A] [B] [C] [D]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PRE-STACKING

SM 39 B700/B701
2
0
0
0
/
3
0
0
0

S
h
e
e
t

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r

B
7
0
0
/
B
7
0
1

[E]: The 1st and 2nd sheets of Set 2 [9] switch back together into the top of the
pre-stack and wait for the 3rd of Set 2 sheet to arrive.
[F]: The stapling of Set 1 in the staple tray [10] is completed.
[G]: Set 1 [11] exits the staple tray.
[H]: The three sheets of Set 2 [12] feed together into the stapler tray for stapling.

Pre-stacking is only done for A4, B5, and LT paper.
In one-staple mode, one sheet goes to the pre-stacking tray. Then two sheets go to
the stapler tray at the same time.
In two-staple mode and booklet mode, three sheets go to the pre-stacking tray.
Then four sheets go to the stapler tray at the same time.

B700D993.WMF
[E] [F] [G] [H]
9
10
11
12
UPPER TRAY
B700/B701 40 SM

2.6 UPPER TRAY

[A]: Upper Tray Lift Motor
[B]: Upper Feeler
[C]: Upper Tray Paper Height Sensor 1 (Staple Mode)
[D]: Upper Tray Paper Height Sensor 2 (Non-Staple Mode)
[E]: Lower Feeler
[F]: Upper Tray Limit Sensor
[G]: Upper Tray Limit Switch
[H]: Upper Tray Full Sensors

Important
The B700 (shown above) has only one upper tray full sensor (the higher sensor
at [H])
The B701 has two upper tray full sensors (the upper and lower sensor at [H]). On
the B701 the upper sensor detects tray full for heavier paper (A3, DLT, B4, LG,
12 x 18), and the lower sensor detects tray full for lighter paper (A4, LT, etc.).
The tray full capacity is 2,000 sheets (B700) for A4, LT and 3,000 sheets (B701)
for A4, LT.

B700D108.WMF
[A]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
[B]
[H]
UPPER TRAY

SM 41 B700/B701
2
0
0
0
/
3
0
0
0

S
h
e
e
t

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r

B
7
0
0
/
B
7
0
1

Five sensors and one switch control the operation of the upper tray lift motor [A].
Upper Tray Raising and Lowering

Sensors, Switch Action Operation Mode
[C] [D] [F] [G]
Standby
(Non-Staple Mode)
OFF OFF Stops the lift motor is at the standby position
when the actuator of the upper feeler
deactivates sensor [C] (when it is between
sensors [C] and [D]).
Note: Sensor [F] and switch [G] are used as
backup if sensor [C] fails or if the upper tray is
not attached.
Straight Through ON
Shift ON
Non-staple mode operation: During
operation, tray lift is controlled only by sensor
[F]. When the actuator leaves sensor [F], the
tray lowers until the actuator reactivates sensor
[F].
Standby
(Staple Mode)
ON
Standby: The upper tray stops and waits for
the paper output when the actuator activates
sensor [C]. [D] is not used for staple mode
Staple Mode Operation:
The upper tray lowers the prescribed
distance immediately after the stack exits.
The upper tray rises until the actuator
activates sensor [C] and stops the tray lift
motor (and the tray) to wait for the next set.
Sensor [F] and switch [G] are used as
backup if sensor [C] fails.

Tray Full
B700 When the actuator on the tray activates the upper tray full sensor [H] the tray lift
motor [A] switches off. Operation resumes after some copies are removed from
the tray. Upper Tray Capacity: 2,000 sheets (A4, LT)
B701 The operation of the upper tray full sensor is the same as the B700. Capacity:
1,500 sheets for A3, B4 or other large paper.
An additional upper tray full sensor (below sensor [H]) allows more sheets to stack
on the upper tray. Capacity: 3,000 sheets (A4, LT)

LOWER TRAY (B700 ONLY)
B700/B701 42 SM

2.7 LOWER TRAY (B700 ONLY)

The lower tray sensor actuator arm [A] rests on the top of the stack of stapled
booklets as they are output to the lower tray. A flap depressor [B] keeps the open
ends of the booklets down.
The front lower tray full sensor (S34) [C] and rear lower tray full sensor (S33) [D]
detect when the lower tray is full of booklets.
Important
The front lower tray full sensor is mounted higher than the rear lower tray full
sensor.
The lower tray is stationary. When it becomes full, the stapling and folding job
stops until booklets are removed from the tray.
If the lower tray is not installed (this is detected if the front and rear sensors
remain OFF), the machine will not operate in the booklet staple and fold mode.
When booklet mode is selected, the tray full message appears on the operation
panel.
The combinations of the two actuators and two sensors as the actuator arm rises
determines the number of booklets that the lower tray can hold before the job stops.

B700D358.WMF
O Full 1
O Full 2
O Full 3
O Ready
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
LOWER TRAY (B700 ONLY)

SM 43 B700/B701
2
0
0
0
/
3
0
0
0

S
h
e
e
t

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r

B
7
0
0
/
B
7
0
1

The tray full detection depends on the size of the paper and the number of sheets
in one stapled and folded booklet.
In the table below, the conditions (O Ready O Full 1, O Full 2 O Full 3: See the
illustration on the previous page) refer to the states of the sensors described on the
previous page.
Condition Front Sensor Rear Sensor
Ready ON OFF
Full 1 ON ON
Full 2 OFF ON
Full 3 (or lower tray not installed) OFF OFF
In the tables below:
"Sht" denotes "sheets in a stack".
"Cnt" denotes "Count" (see below for an explanation).
After a booklet is feed out, the fold roller motor stops the exit roller. The machine
then monitors the tray full sensors every 100 ms. The machine checks for a certain
condition, based on the size of the paper and the number of sheets in the booklet.
An example is shown below. Tell the operators that the number of sheets that the
lower tray can hold will vary greatly.
Lower Tray Full Condition Table
A3 (DLT)
1 Sht 2 Sht 3 Sht 4 Sht 5 Sht 6 Sht 7 Sth 8 Sht 9 Sht
Full 1 3 Cnt
Full 2 5 Cnt 15 Cnt
Full 3 7 Cnt 13 Cnt 4 Cnt 2 Cnt 2 Cnt 2 Cnt

A4 (LT)
1 Sht 2 Sht 3 Sht 4 Sht 5 Sht 6 Sht 7 Sth 8 Sht 9 Sht
Full1 16 Cnt
Full 2 10 Cnt 10 Cnt 15 Cnt 20 Cnt 15 Cnt 10 Cnt 8 Cnt 8 Cnt
Full 3
Examples
After the copier makes a booklet with 1 sheet of A3/DLT paper, the machine
checks every 100 ms for the Full 1 condition. If the Full 1 condition occurs 3 times
(shaded block in the table above), the machine detects that the tray is full.
After the copier makes a booklet with 5 sheets of A4/LT paper, the machine checks
every 100 ms for the Full 2 condition. If the Full 2 condition occurs 20 times
(shaded block in the table above), the machine detects that the tray is full.
CORNER STAPLING
B700/B701 44 SM

2.8 CORNER STAPLING
2.8.1 STACKING AND JOGGING

[A]: Jogger Fence Motor (M15)
[B]: Jogger Fences
[C]: Positioning Roller
[D]: Jogger Fence HP Sensor (S15)
[E]: Stapling Edge Pressure Plate Solenoid (SOL4)
[F]: Pressure Plate

B700D102.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
CORNER STAPLING

SM 45 B700/B701
2
0
0
0
/
3
0
0
0

S
h
e
e
t

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r

B
7
0
0
/
B
7
0
1

At the beginning of the job, the jogger fence motor (M15) [A] switches on and
moves the jogger fences [B] to the standby position (7.5 mm from the sides of the
selected paper size).
When each sheet passes the pre-stack tray exit sensor (S2) and enters the
stapling tray:
The jogger fence motor switches on and moves the jogger fences to within 5.5
mm of the sides of the selected paper size.
The positioning roller solenoid (SOL3) switches on for the time prescribed for the
paper size. This pushes the positioning roller [C] onto the sheet and pushes it
down onto bottom fence. This aligns the edge of the stack.
Next, the jogger fence motor:
Switches on again and moves the jogger fences to within 2.6 mm of the sides of
the stack to align the sides of the stack.
Reverses and moves the fences to the standby position (7.5 mm away for the
sides) and waits for the next sheet.
The jogger fence HP sensor [D] switches off the jogger motor at the end of the
job.
After the last sheet feeds:
The stapling edge pressure plate solenoid [E] (SOL4) switches on and pushes
the pressure plate [F] onto the stack to press down the edge for stapling.
The corner stapler staples the stack.

CORNER STAPLING
B700/B701 46 SM

2.8.2 STAPLER MOVEMENT

[A]: Stapler Movement Motor
[B]: Stapler
[C]: Stapler Rotation Motor

B700D103.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
CORNER STAPLING

SM 47 B700/B701
2
0
0
0
/
3
0
0
0

S
h
e
e
t

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r

B
7
0
0
/
B
7
0
1

The stapler performs horizontal and rotational movement in each of the four staple
modes:
Front 1 staple
Rear 1 staple
Rear diagonal staple
Rear/Front 2 staples.
The stapler movement motor [A] drives a timing belt that moves stapler [B] left and
right on its stainless steel rail.
The stapler rotation motor [C] rotates the stapler into position for diagonal stapling
at the rear.
The stapler movement motor switches on and moves the stapler the standby
stapling position. (This is the stapling position for the paper size selected for the
job.)
The stapler movement motor switches off and the stapler waits for the signal to
fire (or swivel and for diagonal stapling).
If the stack is to be stapled at two positions:
The stapler movement motor moves the stapler to the front position and staples
the front.
The stapler movement motor moves the stapler to the rear and the stapler
staples the rear.
If the stack will be stapled at the rear with a diagonal staple, the staple moves to
the rear. When it is time for stapling, the rotation motor rotates the stapler to the
correct angle and holds the stapler in that position while the stapler fires.
The stapling positions can be fine adjusted with SP6109.

CORNER STAPLING
B700/B701 48 SM

2.8.3 CORNER STAPLING

Staple firing is driven by the stapler motor [A] inside the stapler unit. The stapler
hammer [B] fires the stapler [C].
The cartridge set sensor [D] detects the cartridge at the correct position.
The staple end sensor [E] detects the staple end condition.

B468D015.WMF

B700D304.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
BOOKLET STAPLING (B700 ONLY)

SM 49 B700/B701
2
0
0
0
/
3
0
0
0

S
h
e
e
t

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r

B
7
0
0
/
B
7
0
1

2.9 BOOKLET STAPLING (B700 ONLY)
2.9.1 BOOKLET PRESSURE MECHANISM

[A]: Booklet Pressure Roller Solenoid (SOL5)
[B]: Booklet Pressure Roller Arm
[C]: Booklet Pressure Roller

As soon as the edges are aligned by the positioning roller and the jogger fences,
the stack feed out belt moves.
In booklet mode, immediately after the edges are aligned by the positioning roller
and jogger fences, the booklet pressure solenoid switches on and the booklet
pressure roller presses down on the stack until booklet stapling is finished. This
prevents the stack from shifting during stapling.

B700D305.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
B700/B701 50 SM

2.9.2 BOOKLET STAPLING AND FOLDING
Overview

1. Leading Edge Pressure Roller
2. Stack Present Sensor (S32)
3. Feed Out Belt Pawl 1
4. Booklet Staplers x2 (M22, M23)
5. Stack Feed Out Belt HP Sensor (S16)
6. Feed Out Belt Pawl 2
7. Positioning Roller
8. Booklet Pressure Roller (Rear)
9. Jogger Fences x2
10. Pre-Stack Exit Roller
11. Pressure Plate
12. Stapling Tray Bottom Fence
13. Corner Stapler (M20)
14. Stapling Tray Paper Sensor (S14)
15. Feed Out Belt
16. Fold Unit Bottom Fence
17. Fold Bottom Fence HP Sensor (S28)
18. Fold Unit Entrance Sensor (S26)
19. Fold Unit Exit Rollers x2
20. Fold Unit Exit Sensor (S31)
21. Fold Rollers x2
22. Clamp Rollers x2
23. Stack Junction Gate
24. Stack Transport Roller

B700D910.BMP
11
12
13
14 15
16
17
18
19
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
20
21
22
1
23
24

SM 51 B700/B701
2
0
0
0
/
3
0
0
0

S
h
e
e
t

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r

B
7
0
0
/
B
7
0
1

1
The last sheet of the stack [1] enters the stapling tray. The jogger fences [2] jog the
last sheet into position (based on the width of the selected paper size) and then
retract and stop 1 mm away from the sides of the stack.
2
The pressure plate [3] and booklet pressure roller [4] press down on the sheet. The
stack feed out belt switches on and the pawl [5] on the feed out belt catches the
bottom of the stack and raises it. The stapling tray sensor [6] detects the trailing
edge of the paper stack.
3
The feed out belt [7] raises the stack to the prescribed stapling position and stops.
The jogger fences move to the sides of the stack and the booklet staplers [8] staple
the stack.

B700D912.BMP
1 2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
B700/B701 52 SM

4
The jogger fences remain 1 mm away from the sides of the stack. The feed out belt
[1] raises the stack until the top of the stack is 10 mm past the leading edge
pressure roller [2] and stops. The leading edge pressure roller descends and
applies pressure to the top of the stack. The stack junction gate [3] (normally open)
closes. The pressure roller [4] and pressure plate [5] retract.
5
The feed out belt [6], transport rollers [7], [8], and clamp rollers [9] rotate and feed
the stack past the closed stack junction, over the top and down toward the bottom
fence [10]. At the same time, the fold unit bottom fence descends from its home
position and stops 10 mm below the fold position.
6
The rollers feed the leading edge of the stack to within 3 mm of the stack stopper of
the bottom fence [13]. The fold unit entrance sensor [11] detects the stack and
opens the clamp rollers [12]. The stack drops 3 mm onto the fold unit bottom fence
[13]. At this time, the first sheet [14] of the next stack feeds to the stapling tray.

B700D913.BMP
4 5 6
10
11
12
13
14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

SM 53 B700/B701
2
0
0
0
/
3
0
0
0

S
h
e
e
t

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r

B
7
0
0
/
B
7
0
1

7
The bottom fence [1] raises the stack to the prescribed fold position [2].
8
The fold plate [3] moves to the left and advances 1/3 its maximum horizontal stroke
and exerts 20 kg (44 lb.) of pressure at the fold rollers [4].
9
With the fold plate pushing the stack into nip of the fold rollers [5], the fold rollers
begin to rotate and fold the stack as it feeds out.

B700D914.BMP
7 8 9
1
2
3
4
5
B700/B701 54 SM

10
When the fold rollers [1] feed the stack 10 mm past the nip, the fold plate retracts
until it no longer touches the stack. The fold unit exit sensor [2] detects the folded
edge of the stack and stops the fold rollers.
11
The rotation of the fold rollers [4] reverses and feeds the folded edge back until
only 3 mm of the fold [5] remains at the nip.
12
The fold rollers [6] rotate forward once again feed out. The fold unit exit sensor [7]
once again detects the edge of the fold.
NOTE: You can do SP6114 to increase the sharpness of the fold. The number of
forward and reverse feeds can be set in the range of 2 to 30. The machine
repeats Steps 11 and 12. For more, please refer to Section "5 Service
Tables*.

B700D915.BMP
10 11 12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

SM 55 B700/B701
2
0
0
0
/
3
0
0
0

S
h
e
e
t

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r

B
7
0
0
/
B
7
0
1

13
With the feed of the stack halted, the fold plate [1] retracts. The fold plate HP
sensor (not shown) detects the fold plate and stops it at its home position.
14
The fold rollers [2] and fold unit exit rollers [3] begin to rotate together and feed out
the folded booklet to the lower tray.
15
Once the trailing edge of the stack passes the fold unit exit sensor [4], the clamp
rollers [5] close to be ready to feed the next stack. The fold unit bottom fence [6]
descends. The bottom fence HP sensor [7] stops the bottom fence when it detects
the actuator on the bottom fence.

B700D916.BMP
13 14 15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
B700/B701 56 SM

Booklet Stapling and Folding Mechanisms

Booklet Stapler
[A]: Feed Out Belt Pawl. Raises the stack to stapling position.
[B]: Booklet Stapler EH185R Rear
[C]: Booklet Stapler EH185R Front
Stack Junction Gate
[D]: Stack Junction Gate Motor. Drives a timing belt and stack junction gate cam.
[E]: Stack Junction Gate Cam. Opens and closes the stack junction gate.
[F]: Stack Junction Gate. The stack junction gate motor and stack junction gate
cam close the stack junction gate. The feed out belt pawl raises the stapled
stack and sends it over the top and down to the fold unit.
[G]: Leading Edge Pressure Roller. Presses down on the leading edge of the stack
after booklet stapling.

B700D104.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]

SM 57 B700/B701
2
0
0
0
/
3
0
0
0

S
h
e
e
t

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r

B
7
0
0
/
B
7
0
1

Clamp Roller
[A]: Fold Roller Motor. Drives the stationary clamp drive roller J as well as the fold
rollers (see next page).
[B]: Clamp Rollers.
J Clamp Roller Drive. Rotated by the fold roller motor, this stationary roller
feeds the stack down with the retracting roller closed.
Clamp Roller Retracting. Opened and closed by the retraction motor [C].
[C]: Clamp Roller Retraction Motor. Operates the clamp roller cam that retracts the
retracting clamp roller. The clamp rollers feed the stack to within 3 mm of the
bottom fence when closed and then open to drop the stack onto the bottom
fence.
[D]: Clamp Roller HP Sensor. Controls the rotation of the clamp roller retraction
motor and cam that open and close the retracting clamp roller.
[E]: Clamp Roller Cam. Forces open the spring loaded retracting clamp roller.
Bottom Fence
[F]: Bottom Fence. Raises the booklet stapled stack to the fold position.
[G]: Bottom Fence HP Sensor. Detects the actuator on the bottom fence and stops
it at the home position after folding.
[H]: Bottom Fence Lift Motor. Raises the bottom fence and stapled stack to the
fold position prescribed for the paper size.

B700D105.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
[H]
J

B700/B701 58 SM

Fold Plate
[A]: Bottom Fence Stack Stoppers. Catches the stack after it is released by the
clamp rollers.
[B]: Fold Plate Motor. Drives the timing belt and gears that move the fold plate.
[C]: Fold Plate Cam. Controls the movement of the fold plate to the left (into the
nip of the fold rollers) and right (toward the fold plate home position).
[D]: Fold Plate HP Sensor. Controls operation of the fold plate motor.
[E]: Fold Plate. Moves left and pushes the stack into the nip of the fold rollers and
then moves right to retract.
Fold Rollers
[F]: Fold Roller Motor. Drives forward to feed out the stack at the fold and then
reverses to feed the fold in to sharpen the crease, and then drives forward
again to feed out the folded stack. This reverse/forward cycle is done once.
NOTE: This cycle can be repeated by changing the setting of SP6114.
[G]: Fold Rollers. Driven by the fold roller motor, this roller pair feeds out the stack
at its fold, reverses to feed in the stack to, and then feeds forward again
(assisted by the fold unit exit rollers not shown) to feed out the stack to the
lower tray.

B700D106.WMF

B700D107.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
UPPER TRAY OUTPUT

SM 59 B700/B701
2
0
0
0
/
3
0
0
0

S
h
e
e
t

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r

B
7
0
0
/
B
7
0
1

2.10 UPPER TRAY OUTPUT
2.10.1 FEED OUT

[A]: Feed Out Belt Motor
[B]: Stack Feed-Out Belt
[C]: Pawl
[D]: Exit Rollers
[E]: Exit Guide Plate Motor
[F]: Exit Guide Plate
[G]: Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor
[H]: Upper Tray

B700D109.WMF

B700D110.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
[H]
UPPER TRAY OUTPUT
B700/B701 60 SM

After the stack is stapled, the feed out belt motor [A] switches on and drives the
feed out belt [B].
The a pawl [C] attached to the feed out belt catches on the stack and lifts the stack
toward the feed out slot.
The exit guide plate [F] remains open as the stack emerges at a prescribed
distance away from the exit roller.
Next, the exit guide plate closes and the exit roller feeds the stack out.
The opening and closing of the exit guide plate is controlled by the rising and falling
of a link driven by a rotating cam attached to the shaft of the exit guide plate motor
[E].
The feed out belt motor stops 300 ms to prevent the stapled stack from rising too
high.
Next, the feed out belt motor switches on again, then the pawl actuates its home
position sensor and switches off the motor.
There are two output pawls on the feed out belt to improve the productivity of the
feed out operation.

UPPER TRAY OUTPUT

SM 61 B700/B701
2
0
0
0
/
3
0
0
0

S
h
e
e
t

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r

B
7
0
0
/
B
7
0
1

2.10.2 FEED OUT STACKING

Upper/proof exit motor [A] drives feed roller [B] and stacking sponge roller [C].
Stacking sponge roller motor [D] moves the sponge roller forward and back with
link [E].
The position of the stacking sponge roller [C] is controlled by the stacking sponge
roller motor which is switched on and off by the stacking roller HP sensor [F].

B700D359.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
PUNCH UNIT B702 (FOR B700/B701)
B700/B701 62 SM

2.11 PUNCH UNIT B702 (FOR B700/B701)
2.11.1 OVERVIEW OF OPERATION

Skew Correction Before Punching
This punch unit corrects for paper skew and then positions the punch unit to punch
holes at the correct position. Each sheet is punched one at a time.
Paper feeds out of the copier. The finisher entrance sensor [A] detects the leading
edge of the sheet.
The finisher entrance roller [B] stops rotating briefly while the copier exit rollers
continue to rotate. This buckles the paper against the finisher entrance roller to
correct skew. The finisher entrance roller [C] starts to rotate again and feeds the
sheet into the finisher.
These SP codes adjust the skew operation in the punch unit:
SP6103. This SP corrects the punch hole alignment. To do this, it corrects the
skew of each sheet by adjusting the amount of time the finisher entrance roller
remains off while the exit roller of the machine remains on. For more, see
Section "5. Service Tables".
SP6104. This SP determines whether the finisher entrance roller stops to correct
skew when paper enters the finisher. You can use this SP to disable the skew
correction. For more, see Section "5. Service Tables".
B700D351.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]

SM 63 B700/B701
2
0
0
0
/
3
0
0
0

S
h
e
e
t

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r

B
7
0
0
/
B
7
0
1

Punch Unit Position Correction
These operations (skew correction before punching, and punch unit position
correction) increase the accuracy of the punch alignment.
O The trailing edge of the sheet passes the finisher entrance sensor [A].
The paper position slide unit [B] moves the paper position sensor [C] forward to
the edge of the paper.
The paper position sensor detects the position of the paper edge and sends
this information to the punch unit board. The machine uses the detected
position of the paper edge to calculate the correct position for punching.
The upper transport motor switches on and rotates the feed rollers [D] the
prescribed distance to position the paper under the punch unit.
O Using the result of the position calculation, the punch unit control board moves
the punch unit [E] to the adjusted punch position.
The paper position slide unit and its paper sensor, move back to the paper
position slide home position sensor [F], and the punch unit fires the punches to
make the holes.
O The feed rollers [G] feed the punched paper out of the punch unit and into the
paper path.

B700D352.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
O O O
B700/B701 64 SM

These SP codes adjust the punch hole alignment:
SP6101 Adjusts the punch positions in the direction of paper feed.
SP6102 Adjusts the punch position perpendicular to the direction of feed.
For more, see Section "5. Service Tables".

B700D360.WMF
SP6102 SP6101

SM 65 B700/B701
2
0
0
0
/
3
0
0
0

S
h
e
e
t

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r

B
7
0
0
/
B
7
0
1

2.11.2 PUNCH MECHANISMS
Paper Position Detection

[A]: Finisher Entrance Motor (M1)
[B]: Finisher Entrance Roller
[C]: Finisher Entrance Sensor (S1)
[D]: Paper Position Sensor Slide Motor (M7)
[E]: Paper Position Sensor (S27)
[F]: Paper Position Sensor Slide HP Sensor (S22)

The finisher entrance motor (M1) [A] drives the finisher entrance rollers [B] that
feed paper from the copier into the finisher. The finisher entrance sensor (S1) [C]
detects paper when it enters the finisher, and detects paper jams.
The paper position slide sensor motor (M7) [D] extends and retracts the paper
position slide that holds the paper position sensor (S27) [E]. The paper position
sensor detects the position of the paper edge. The detected position of the paper is
used to calculate and position the punch unit for punching.
The paper position slide HP sensor (S22) [F] detects the paper position slide when
it retracts and stops the paper position slide motor so the slide stops at its home
position.

B700D353.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
B700/B701 66 SM

Punch Unit Movement

[A]: Punch Movement Motor (M9)
[B]: Punch Movement HP Sensor (S21)
[C]: Punch Drive Motor (M24)

The punch movement motor (M9) [A] extends and retracts the punch unit to
position it at the correct position for punching.
The punch movement HP sensor (S21) [B] detects the position when it retracts,
switches off the punch position movement motor, and stops the punch unit at its
home position.
The punch drive motor (M24) [C] fires the punches that punch holes in the paper
below.

B700D354.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]

SM 67 B700/B701
2
0
0
0
/
3
0
0
0

S
h
e
e
t

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r

B
7
0
0
/
B
7
0
1

Punch Selection and Firing

[A]: Punch Drive Motor (M24)
[B]: Punch Encoder Wheel
[C]: Punch Encoder Sensor (S24)
[D]: Punch HP Sensor (S23)

The punch drive motor (M24) [A] turns
the small, notched encoder wheel [B]
through the gap in the punch encoder
sensor [C] (S24). The sensor output is
used to control the punch timing.
The timing for 2-hole punching [E] is
different from 3-hole punching [F].
When the punch unit is at the punching
position, the punch motor turns until the
encoder detects the starting position for
2-hole or 3-hole punching.
This is the 1 position in the diagrams
(the top diagram is for 2-hole punching,
and the bottom diagram is for 3-hole
punching).
Then, the punch drive motor turns
counter-clockwise to the 2 position. This
movement punches the holes in the
paper.
Then, the punch drive motor turns
clockwise to the 1 position, to be ready
for the next sheet of paper.

1 2

B700D355.WMF
1 2

B700D356.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
B700/B701 68 SM

2.11.3 PUNCH HOPPER MECHANISM

[A]: Finisher Entrance Motor (M1)
[B]: Punch Waste Belt
[C]: Punch Waste Hopper
[D]: Punch Hopper Full Sensor (S4)

The finisher entrance motor (M1) [A] drives the timing belt and gears that rotate the
punch waste belt [B].
The punchouts fall from the punch unit onto the belt. The belt moves the punchouts
to the front and dumps them in the punch waste hopper [C].
The punch hopper full sensor [D]:
Signals that the hopper is full when it detects the top of the stack of punchouts
that have collected in the hopper.
It also detects when the punch hopper is set properly.

B700D357.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
FINISHER JAM DETECTION

SM 69 B700/B701
2
0
0
0
/
3
0
0
0

S
h
e
e
t

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r

B
7
0
0
/
B
7
0
1

2.12 FINISHER JAM DETECTION

Display Mode Jam What It Means
Finisher
entrance
sensor late
After main machine exit sensor goes OFF,
finisher entrance sensor does not go ON even
after enough time to feed 450 mm.
R1 to R3
Proof
Shift
Staple
Finisher
entrance
sensor lag
After finisher entrance sensor goes ON, it does
not go OFF after enough time to feed a sheet 1.5
times its length has elapsed.
Proof exit
sensor late
After finisher entrance sensor goes ON, proof
exit sensor does not go ON even after enough
time to feed 450 mm.
R3 Proof
Proof exit
sensor lag
After finisher entrance sensor goes OFF, proof
exit sensor does not go OFF even after enough
time to feed 450 mm.
Upper tray exit
sensor late
After finisher entrance sensor goes ON, upper
tray exit sensor does not go ON even after
enough time to feed 485 mm.
R4 Shift
Upper tray exit
sensor lag
After finisher entrance sensor goes OFF, upper
tray exit sensor does not go OFF even after
R8 to R12
R1 to R4
R5 to R7
B700D996.WMF
FINISHER JAM DETECTION
B700/B701 70 SM
Display Mode Jam What It Means
Pre-stack tray
exit sensor lag
After finisher entrance sensor goes ON, pre-
stack tray exit sensor does not go ON even after
R5 to R7 Staple
Pre-stack tray
exit sensor late
After finisher entrance sensor goes ON, pre-
stack tray exit sensor does not go OFF even after
Fold unit
entrance
sensor late
(S26)
The fold unit entrance sensor goes not go ON
after enough time has elapsed to feed 1.5 times
the length of the stack after the leading edge of
the stack reaches the stack present sensor
(S32).
Fold unit exit
sensor late
(S31)
The fold unit exit sensor does not go ON after
enough time has elapsed for the stack to feed 1.5
times its length from the fold position.
R8 to
R12
Booklet
Staple
(B700
Only)
Fold unit exit
sensor lag
(S31)
After the fold unit exit sensor goes ON, it does
not go OFF after enough time has elapsed to
feed 442.9 mm.

B704
COVER INTERPOSER TRAY

SM i B704
COVER INTERPOSER TRAY B704
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.1 EXTERNAL COVERS .................................................................................. 1
1.2 FEED UNIT AND PICK-UP ROLLER........................................................... 2
1.3 FEED BELT.................................................................................................. 3
1.4 GUIDE PLATE ADJUSTMENT..................................................................... 4
1.5 MAIN BOARD............................................................................................... 5
1.6 MOTOR REPLACEMENT ............................................................................ 6
1.6.1 VERTICAL TRANSPORT MOTOR...................................................... 6
1.6.2 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT MOTOR .......................................................... 6
1.6.3 FEED MOTOR, TRANSPORT MOTOR .............................................. 7
2. DETAILS...........................................................................................8
2.1 OVERVIEW.................................................................................................. 8
2.1.1 MAIN LAYOUT .................................................................................... 8
2.1.2 DRIVE LAYOUT .................................................................................. 9
2.1.3 PAPER SIZE DETECTION................................................................ 10
2.1.4 PAPER PATH.................................................................................... 13
2.2 PAPER FEED............................................................................................. 14
Power On............................................................................................... 14
Paper Separation and Feed................................................................... 14
Bottom Tray Lift ..................................................................................... 14
Paper Near-end ..................................................................................... 14
Paper End.............................................................................................. 14
EXTERNAL COVERS
SM 1 B704
C
o
v
e
r

I
n
t
e
r
p
o
s
e
r

T
r
a
y

B
7
0
4

1.1 EXTERNAL COVERS

[B]: Upper front cover ( x 2)
NOTE: To remove the upper front cover, screw [C] must be removed.
[D]: Rear upper cover ( x 2)
[E]: Slip sheet tray ( x 2, x 1)
[F]: Rear middle cover ( x 2)

B470R001.WMF
[A]
[B]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[C]
FEED UNIT AND PICK-UP ROLLER
B704 2 SM
1.2 FEED UNIT AND PICK-UP ROLLER

[A]: Feed unit
The unit is spring loaded. Push it to the right to release it, then lift it out.
[B]: Pick-up roller ( x 2, bushings x 2)

B470R002.WMF
B470R003.WMF
[A]
[B]
FEED BELT
SM 3 B704
C
o
v
e
r

I
n
t
e
r
p
o
s
e
r

T
r
a
y

B
7
0
4

1.3 FEED BELT

Feed unit ( 1.2)
[A]: Pick-up roller unit.
Pull the unit away from the bushings in the direction of the arrow.
[B]: Feed belt holder
Hold the feed belt holder by the sides, then lift up to separate from the
holder.
Pull slowly to avoid losing the springs.
[C]: Feed belt.

Re-assembly
1. Position the pick-up roller unit [A] and feed belt holder [B] as shown above.
2. On the rear side, slide out the bushing, and rotate [D] until its flat side is parallel
with [E], then snap it on.
3. On the front side, rotate [F] until its flat side is parallel with [D], then snap it on.
Viewed from the bottom, the plates must be aligned.

B470R005.WMF
B470R004.WMF
[A]
[B]
[D]
[E]
[C]
[F]
GUIDE PLATE ADJUSTMENT
B704 4 SM
1.4 GUIDE PLATE ADJUSTMENT

Adjust the guide plate if the holes punched in the covers or slip sheets are not
correctly aligned with holes punched in the other sheets.
1. Open the feed cover.
2. Loosen the screw [A].
3. Push the table [B] left or right to change its position, then tighten the screw.
NOTE: If you want to see the scale [C], you must remove the rear cover and
the support tray.

B470R151.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
MAIN BOARD
SM 5 B704
C
o
v
e
r

I
n
t
e
r
p
o
s
e
r

T
r
a
y

B
7
0
4

1.5 MAIN BOARD

Open the top cover.
Rear cover ( x 1)
[A]: Main board ( x 9, x 4)

NOTE: All DIP switch settings on the main board of the cover sheet unit should be
set to OFF.

B470R101.WMF
[A]
MOTOR REPLACEMENT
B704 6 SM
1.6 MOTOR REPLACEMENT
1.6.1 VERTICAL TRANSPORT MOTOR

Open the top cover.
Rear middle cover ( x 1) ( 1.1)
[A]: Motor bracket ( x 1, harness x 1, x 2, timing belt x 1)
[B]: Motor ( x 2)

1.6.2 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT MOTOR

Rear upper cover ( 1.1)
[A]: Bottom plate lift motor (harness x 2, x 1, x 2)

B470R102.WMF

B470R104.WMF
[A]
[B]
[A]
MOTOR REPLACEMENT
SM 7 B704
C
o
v
e
r

I
n
t
e
r
p
o
s
e
r

T
r
a
y

B
7
0
4

1.6.3 FEED MOTOR, TRANSPORT MOTOR

Rear upper cover ( 1.1)
NOTE: When removing the feed gear and transport gear, hold one hand under the
gear to catch the pin as it falls from the hole in the shaft.

[A]: Feed gear ( x 1, pin x 1, timing belt x 1, bushing x 1)
[B]: Transport gear ( x 1, pin x 1, timing belt x 1, bushing x 1)
[C]: Motor bracket (harness x 5, x 4)
[D]: Feed motor ( x 1, x 2)
[E]: Transport motor ( x 1, x 2)

B470R105.WMF

B470R103.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
OVERVIEW
B704 8 SM
2. DETAILS
2.1 OVERVIEW
2.1.1 MAIN LAYOUT

1. Support tray
2. Slip sheet tray
3. Pick-up roller
4. Feed belt
5. Separation roller
6. Grip roller

B470D001.WMF
6
5
1 2 3 4
OVERVIEW
SM 9 B704
C
o
v
e
r

I
n
t
e
r
p
o
s
e
r

T
r
a
y

B
7
0
4

2.1.2 DRIVE LAYOUT

1. Pick-up Roller
2. Feed Belt
4. Feed Motor
5. Transport Motor
6. Timing Belt
7. Vertical Transport Motor

B470D003.WMF
4
6
7
5
3
1
2
OVERVIEW
B704 10 SM
2.1.3 PAPER SIZE DETECTION
The width sensors [A] (S1, S2, S3) and length sensors [B] (S4, S5, S6) detect the
width and length of the original on the interposer feed tray.

S3
P5
S4
S5
S6
DLT SEF
S2 S1
P4 P3 P2 P1
8 K SEF
LG
10"x14"
B4 SEF
F4
A4 SEF
LT SEF
US EXE SEF 16 K SEF
8"x10"
B5 SEF
HLT SEF
A5 SEF
A3 SEF
A5 LEF
LT LEF
16 K LEF
US EXE LEF
B5 LEF
HLT LEF

B470D901.WMF
OVERVIEW
SM 11 B704
C
o
v
e
r

I
n
t
e
r
p
o
s
e
r

T
r
a
y

B
7
0
4

The table below lists the sensor output for each paper size.
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6
A3 0 1 1 1 1 1
B4 1 1 0 1 1 1
A4 SEF 1 0 0 1 1 0
A4 LEF 0 1 1 0 0 0
B5 SEF 0 0 0 1 0 0
B5 LEF 1 1 0 0 0 0
A5 SEF 0 0 0 0 0 0
A5 LEF 1 0 0 0 0 0
11" x 17" 1 1 1 1 1 1
10" x 14" SEF 1 1 0 1 1 1
81/2" x 14" 1 0 0 1 1 1
81/2" x 13" 1 0 0 1 1 1
81/2" x 11" 1 0 0 1 0 0
11" x 81/2" 1 1 1 0 0 0
8" x 10" 1 0 0 1 0 0
51/2" x 81/2" 0 0 0 0 0 0
81/2" x 51/2" 1 0 0 0 0 0
71/2" x 101/2"
(US Exec.)
0 0 0 1 0 0
101/2" x 71/2"
(US Exec.)
1 1 1 0 0 0
8 K 1 1 1 1 1 1
16 K SEF 1 0 0 1 0 0
16 K LEF 1 1 1 0 0 0

The cover interposer tray detects all the paper sizes listed above. However, there
are some limitations on the display of the correct paper size.
North America Europe/Asia
B4 SEF 257 x 364 mm Displays 10x14
*1

B5 SEF 182 x 257 Displays US Exec.
*1

A5 SEF 148 x 210 Displays HLT SEF
*1

A5 LEF 210 x 148 Displays HLT LEF
*1

DLT SEF 11" x 17" Displays 8K LEF
*2

LG SEF 81/2" x 14" Displays F4 SEF
*2

LT SEF 81/2" x 11" Displays 16 K SEF
*2

LT LEF 11" x 81/2" Displays 16 K LEF
*2

*1
: Cannot be corrected.
*2
: B064 series: Can be corrected with SP5959 006 (Paper Size Cover Sheet).
B140 series: Can be corrected with SP5158

OVERVIEW
B704 12 SM
B064 series: Paper Size Detection
North America
Execute SP5959 006 and enter the correct number for the size of the paper loaded
for feeding from the cover interposer tray.

Loaded Display (Default)
To Select for
Display
Enter
81/2" x 13" 81/2" x 14" 81/2" x 13" 165
101/2" x 71/2" 81/2" x 11" 101/2" x 71/2" 173
8" x 10" 81/2" x 11" 8" x 10" 171

Europe/Asia
Execute SP5959 006 and enter the correct number for the size of the paper loaded
for feeding from the cover interposer tray.

Loaded Display (Default)
To Select for
Display
Enter
11" x 17" 8 K 11" x 17" 160
81/2" x 11" 16 K SEF 81/2" x 11" 166
11" x 81/2" 16 K LEF 11" x 81/2" 38
81/4" x 13" 81/2" x 13" SEF 81/4" x 13" 168

B070/B071, B140 series: Paper Size Detection
Some paper sizes are almost the same and cannot be detected as different sizes
by the sensors. To select the sizes that are detected, use SP 5158.

OVERVIEW
SM 13 B704
C
o
v
e
r

I
n
t
e
r
p
o
s
e
r

T
r
a
y

B
7
0
4

2.1.4 PAPER PATH

1. Pick-up Roller
2. Feed Belt
4. Grip Roller
5. Transport Roller 1

The paper feeds from the tray, to the feed belt, then to the grip roller and down into
the paper path to the finisher below.

B470D006.WMF
6
5
4
1 2 3
PAPER FEED
B704 14 SM
2.2 PAPER FEED

Power On
When paper is placed on the tray, the paper set sensor [A] in the tray actuates and
switches on the bottom plate lift motor [B]. The top of the stack raises the pick-up
roller unit until the actuator on this unit actuates the pick-up roller position sensor
[C] and switches the motor off.

Paper Separation and Feed
The pick-up roller [D] picks up the original, and the feed belt [E] feeds the sheet to
the grip roller. The separation roller [F] reverses if more than one sheet is fed

Bottom Tray Lift
As sheets feed from the top of the stack:
The pick-up roller unit descends until the actuator on the pick-up roller unit drops
out of the pick-up roller position sensor [C].
The bottom plate lift motor switches on to raise the stack until the actuator enters
the pick-up roller unit position sensor again and switches the motor off.
This repeats until the end of the job or until paper runs out.

Paper Near-end
Near-end is detected when the actuator [G] on the bottom plate enters the near-
end sensor [H].

Paper End
After the last sheet feeds the paper set sensor [A] goes off and signals paper out.

B470D005.WMF
[H]
[C]
[B]
[A]
[E]
[D]
[F]
[G]

B706
3000-SHEET FINISHER

SM i B706
3000-SHEET FINISHER B706
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INSTALLATION................................................................................1
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE........................................................2
3.1 DOOR AND COVER REPLACEMENT......................................................... 3
Front Door................................................................................................ 3
Left Inner Cover ....................................................................................... 3
Inner Cover .............................................................................................. 3
Side Table and Upper Tray...................................................................... 4
Left Covers .............................................................................................. 5
Rear Cover and Top Cover...................................................................... 5
Shift Tray ................................................................................................. 5
3.2 ROLLERS..................................................................................................... 6
3.2.1 SHIFT POSITIONING ROLLER .......................................................... 6
3.2.2 POSITIONING ROLLER...................................................................... 7
3.2.3 ALIGNMENT BRUSH ROLLER........................................................... 8
3.3 STACK FEED-OUT BELT ............................................................................ 9
3.4 JOGGER FENCE....................................................................................... 10
3.5 SENSORS.................................................................................................. 11
3.5.1 STACK HEIGHT 1, 2 AND EXIT GUIDE OPEN SENSOR................ 11
Stack Height Sensors 1 and 2 ............................................................... 11
Exit Guide Open Sensor ........................................................................ 11
3.5.2 UPPER TRAY PAPER LIMIT AND EXIT SENSOR........................... 12
Upper Tray Paper Limit Sensor ............................................................. 12
Upper Tray Exit Sensor.......................................................................... 12
3.5.3 SHIFT TRAY EXIT SENSOR............................................................. 13
3.5.4 ENTRANCE AND STAPLER TRAY ENTRANCE SENSORS ........... 14
Entrance Sensor .................................................................................... 14
Stapler Tray Entrance Sensor................................................................ 14
3.5.5 PRE-STACK PAPER SENSOR......................................................... 15
3.5.6 STAPLE WASTE HOPPER SENSOR............................................... 16
3.5.7 STAPLER ROTATION HP AND STAPLER RETURN
SENSORS......................................................................................... 17
3.6 STAPLER................................................................................................... 18
3.7 SHIFT TRAY MOTOR................................................................................ 19
3.7.1 STACKING ROLLER/ROLLER DRAG MOTORS,
RETURN HP SENSOR...................................................................... 20
3.8 Z-FOLD JOGGER UNIT............................................................................. 23
3.8.1 Z-FOLD JOGGER UNIT COVER....................................................... 23
3.8.2 Z-FOLD JOGGER UNIT .................................................................... 24
3.8.3 JOGGER TOP FENCE MOTOR........................................................ 25

B706 ii SM
3.8.4 JOGGER BOTTOM FENCE MOTOR................................................ 26
3.9 PUNCH UNIT B531 (OPTION) ................................................................... 27
3.9.1 PUNCH POSITION ADJUSTMENT................................................... 27
Front to Rear Adjustment....................................................................... 27
Right to Left Adjustment......................................................................... 27
3.10 JOGGER UNIT B513 (OPTION)............................................................... 28
3.10.1 JOGGER UNIT................................................................................ 28
3.10.2 JOGGER UNIT PCB........................................................................ 29
3.10.3 JOGGER UNIT MOTOR.................................................................. 30
4. TROUBLESHOOTING ...................................................................31
5. SERVICE TABLES.........................................................................32
5.1 DIP SWITCHES.......................................................................................... 32
5.2 TEST POINTS............................................................................................ 32
5.3 FUSES ....................................................................................................... 32
6. DETAILS.........................................................................................33
6.1 TRAY AND STAPLER JUNCTION GATE .................................................. 33
6.2 PAPER PRE-STACKING ........................................................................... 34
6.3 JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING ..................................................... 35
6.4 STAPLER UNIT MOVEMENT .................................................................... 36
Side-to-Side........................................................................................... 36
Rotation (1) ............................................................................................ 37
Rotation (2) ............................................................................................ 37
6.5 STAPLER................................................................................................... 38
6.6 FEED-OUT................................................................................................. 40
6.7 PAPER EXIT STACKING........................................................................... 41
6.8 SHIFT TRAY............................................................................................... 42
6.8.1 OVERVIEW....................................................................................... 42
Stand-by Mode ...................................................................................... 42
6.8.2 SHIFT TRAY UP/DOWN MOVEMENT.............................................. 43
Sort/Stack Mode (Shift Mode)................................................................ 43
Staple Mode........................................................................................... 43
6.8.3 SHIFT TRAY LOWER LIMIT DETECTION........................................ 44
6.9 SHIFT TRAY SIDE-TO-SIDE MOVEMENT................................................ 45
6.10 STAPLING Z-FOLDED PAPER................................................................ 46
6.11 JAM CONDITIONS................................................................................... 47
6.12 PUNCH UNIT B531 (OPTION) ................................................................. 48
6.12.1 PUNCH UNIT DRIVE....................................................................... 48
6.12.2 PUNCH WASTE COLLECTION ...................................................... 49
6.13 JOGGER UNIT B513 (OPTION)............................................................... 50
6.13.1 JOGGER UNIT MECHANICAL LAYOUT ........................................ 50
6.13.2 JOGGER UNIT DRIVE.................................................................... 51
7. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION...........................................52
7.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT .................................................... 52
7.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION............................................ 53
7.3 DRIVE LAYOUT ......................................................................................... 56
INSTALLATION
SM 1 B706
3
0
0
0
-
S
h
e
e
t

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r

B
7
0
6

1. INSTALLATION
For details about installing the 3000 Sheet Finisher B706, please refer to the
instructions you received with the instructions or the 1. Installation in the main
machine service manual.

B706 2 SM
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
For details about the 3000 Sheet Finisher B706 PM table, please refer to Section
2. Preventive Maintenance in the main Service Manual.
SM 3 B706
3
0
0
0
-
S
h
e
e
t

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r

B
7
0
6

3.1 DOOR AND COVER REPLACEMENT

Front Door
1. Remove the front door screw [A] ( x 1).
2. Remove the front door [B].

Left Inner Cover
1. Remove the front door.
2. Remove the left inner cover [C] ( x 1).

Inner Cover
1. Remove the inner cover [D] ( x 3).

B706R502.WMF
B706R505.WMF
[D]
[B]
[A]
[C]
B706 4 SM
Side Table and Upper Tray

1. Remove the side table [A] ( x 2). Slide to the right to remove it.
2. Click the release lever [B] and remove the upper tray [C].

B706R503.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
SM 5 B706
3
0
0
0
-
S
h
e
e
t

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r

B
7
0
6

Left Covers
1. Remove the left upper panel [A].
2. Remove the left upper cover [B] ( x 2, x 2).
3. Remove the door and left inner cover. (See Front Door and Left Inner Cover
Replacement.)
4. Remove the rear cover [F] ( x 2).
5. Remove the left lower cover [C] ( x 4).

Rear Cover and Top Cover
1. Remove the upper tray. (See Side Table and Upper Tray.)
2. Remove the step screws [D] ( x 2).
3. Remove the top cover [E] ( x 2). Slide to the right to remove.
4. Remove the rear cover [F] ( x 2).

Shift Tray
1. If you need to lower the shift tray, support the bottom of the tray with your hand,
then pull the gear toward you [G] to release the tray and lower it.
2. Remove the shift tray [H] ( x 4).
3. Remove the shift tray rear cover [I] and front cover [J] ( x 1 each).
B706R504.WMF

B706R501.WMF
[E]
[G]
[A]
[B]
[C]
[F]
[H]
[I]
[J]
[D]
B706 6 SM
3.2 ROLLERS
3.2.1 SHIFT POSITIONING ROLLER

1. Above the shift tray, pull the roller mount [A] out.
2. Remove the rollers [B] and [C] ( x 1 each)

B706R522.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
SM 7 B706
3
0
0
0
-
S
h
e
e
t

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r

B
7
0
6

3.2.2 POSITIONING ROLLER

2. Remove the snap ring [A].
3. Release the rubber belt [B].
4. Replace the positioning roller [C].

B706R506.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
B706 8 SM
3.2.3 ALIGNMENT BRUSH ROLLER

1. Open the front door and pull out the staple unit.
2. Remove the rear cover.
3. Remove the main board and all connectors ( x 8).
4. Remove the screw [A] and tension spring [B] for the tension bracket [C], and
release the tension of the timing belt.
5. Remove the pulley [D] and bushing [E] ( x 2).
6. Remove the inner cover [F] ( x 1).
7. Open the guide [G], then remove the alignment brush roller assembly [H] ( x 1).
8. Remove the alignment brush roller [I] ( x 1, bushing x 1 front/back).

B706R507.WMF
B706R508.WMF
[B]
[C]
[E]
[D]
[F]
[G]
[A]
[H]
[I]
SM 9 B706
3
0
0
0
-
S
h
e
e
t

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r

B
7
0
6

3.3 STACK FEED-OUT BELT

2. Pull out the jogger and stapler unit.
3. Remove the inner cover [A] ( x 2).
4. Remove the sensor bracket [B] ( x 1, x 1, clamp x 1).
5. Remove the front guide [C] ( x 1, spring x 1).
NOTE: When re-installing, make sure that the flat end of the shaft is against
the plate.
6. Remove the front panel [D] from the stays ( x 6).
7. Remove the old belt [E] from the bottom, center, then the top.
NOTE: 1) Make sure the ribbed side of the new belt and pawl [F] are facing down.
2) Make sure the new belt is engaged at all three rollers.

B706R523.WMF
B706R524.WMF
[B] [C]
[A]
[D]
[E]
[F]
B706 10 SM
3.4 JOGGER FENCE

2. Pull out the jogger and stapler unit.
3. Push both fences to the center.
4. Remove the left jogger fence [A] ( x 1)
5. Remove the right jogger fence [B] ( x 1).
NOTE: If the screws are difficult to remove or re-attach, remove the jogger
fence belt and spring plate.

B706R525.WMF
[B] [A]
SM 11 B706
3
0
0
0
-
S
h
e
e
t

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r

B
7
0
6

3.5 SENSORS
3.5.1 STACK HEIGHT 1, 2 AND EXIT GUIDE OPEN SENSOR

Stack Height Sensors 1 and 2
1. Remove the top cover. (w 3.1)
2. Remove the left upper panel and left upper cover ( x 2, x 2).
3. Remove the protector plate [A] ( x 1).
4. Remove the sensor feeler [B] ( x 1).
5. Remove the sensor bracket [C] ( x 1).
6. Replace the stack height sensor 1 [D] ( x 1) or 2 [E] ( x 1).

Exit Guide Open Sensor
1. Remove the sensor bracket [F] ( x 1).
2. Replace the exit guide open sensor [G] ( x 1).

B706R509.WMF
[G]
[F]
[C]
[E]
[D]
[B]
[A]
B706 12 SM
3.5.2 UPPER TRAY PAPER LIMIT AND EXIT SENSOR

Upper Tray Paper Limit Sensor
1. Remove the top cover.
2. Remove the sensor cover [A] ( x 2).
3. Remove the sensor bracket [B] ( x 1).
4. Replace the upper tray paper limit sensor [C] ( x 1).

Upper Tray Exit Sensor
5. Remove the sensor bracket [D] ( x 1).
6. Replace the upper tray exit sensor [E] ( x 1).

B706R510.WMF
[C]
[A]
[D]
[E]
[B]
SM 13 B706
3
0
0
0
-
S
h
e
e
t

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r

B
7
0
6

3.5.3 SHIFT TRAY EXIT SENSOR

1. Remove the top cover.
3. Remove the inner cover.
4. Release the upper exit guide springs [A] (x 2).
5. Disconnect the link [B] from the cam ( x 1).
6. Remove the upper exit guide [C] ( x 1, x 1).
7. Remove the guide stay [D] ( x 2).
8. Replace the shift tray exit sensor [E] ( x 1, x 1).

B706R512.WMF
B706R511.WMF
[D]
[A]
[C]
[A]
[E]
[B]
B706 14 SM
3.5.4 ENTRANCE AND STAPLER TRAY ENTRANCE SENSORS

Entrance Sensor
1. Disconnect the finisher from the copier.
2. Remove the sensor bracket [A] ( x 1).
3. Replace the entrance sensor [B] ( x 1, x 1).

Stapler Tray Entrance Sensor
2. Remove the sensor bracket [C] ( x 1).
3. Replace the stapler tray entrance sensor [D] ( x 1, x 1).

B706R513.WMF

B706R514.WMF
[B]
[A]
[D]
[C]
SM 15 B706
3
0
0
0
-
S
h
e
e
t

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r

B
7
0
6

3.5.5 PRE-STACK PAPER SENSOR

1. Remove the rear cover.
2. Remove the main board [A] ( x 8, x all).
3. Release the guide [B] ( x 2).
5. Remove the left vertical transport guide [C].
6. Remove the middle vertical transport guide [D] ( x 1).
7. Replace the pre-stack paper sensor [E] ( x 1).
B706R521.WMF
B706R515.WMF
B706R516.WMF
[A]
[E]
[D]
[C]
[B]
B706 16 SM
3.5.6 STAPLE WASTE HOPPER SENSOR

1. Open the front door, pull out the stapler unit, then remove the rear cover.
2. Remove the rear cover ( x 2).
3. Remove the staple waste hopper [A] ( x 1).
4. Remove the hopper holder [B] ( x 2).
5. Replace the staple waste hopper sensor [C] ( x 1).

B706R517.WMF
[B]
[A]
[C]
SM 17 B706
3
0
0
0
-
S
h
e
e
t

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r

B
7
0
6

3.5.7 STAPLER ROTATION HP AND STAPLER RETURN SENSORS

1. Remove the stapler unit. (See next page.)
2. Remove the stapler mount bracket [A] ( x 4, springs x 2).
3. Replace the stapler rotation HP sensor [B] ( x 1).
4. Replace the stapler return sensor [C] ( x 1).

B706R519.WMF
[A]
[C]
[B]
B706 18 SM
3.6 STAPLER

1. Open the front door and pull out the staple tray.
2. Remove the stapler unit harness cover [A].
3. Remove the stapler cover [B] ( x 1, x 2).
4. Lift the stapler off of the pegs [C].

B706R518.WMF
[A]
[C]
[B]
SM 19 B706
3
0
0
0
-
S
h
e
e
t

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r

B
7
0
6

3.7 SHIFT TRAY MOTOR

1. Remove the front door and rear cover (w 3.1).
2. Shift motor [A] ( x 2, x 3)

B706R531.WMF
[A]
B706 20 SM
3.7.1 STACKING ROLLER/ROLLER DRAG MOTORS, RETURN HP
SENSOR

1. Do the procedures to remove the front door and all covers, with the exception
of the left lower cover and top cover (labeled [C]: and [E]).
NOTE: Be sure to lower the shift tray by pulling the gear toward you. The shift
tray must be down.
2. Remove the shift tray motor. (w 3.7)
3. Remove the left stay [A] ( x 3).
4. Unhook the stay at top [B].
5. Remove the shift tray mounting plate [C] ( x 2).

B706R526.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
SM 21 B706
3
0
0
0
-
S
h
e
e
t

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r

B
7
0
6

6. Remove the end fence [A] and plate [B] ( x 2).
7. Disengage the end fence races [C] from the rollers [D] behind the fence.
8. Remove the upper stay [E] ( x 4).
9. Remove the lower stay [F] ( x 4).
10. Remove the cover [G] ( x 4).
11. Remove the stacking roller/drag motor stay [H] ( x 3, x 4).
NOTE: Make sure the motor and sensor connectors are disconnected before
removing.

B706R527.WMF

B706R528.WMF
[A]
[E]
[F]
[C] [D] [B]
[G]
[H]
B706 22 SM

12. Remove the stacking motor bracket [A] (bushing x 1, x 1).
13. Remove the stacking motor [B] ( x 2).
14. Remove the roller drag motor bracket [C] ( x 2).
15. Remove return HP sensor [D].
16. Remove the roller drag motor [E] ( x 1).

B706R530.WMF

B706R529.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
SM 23 B706
3
0
0
0
-
S
h
e
e
t

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r

B
7
0
6

3.8 Z-FOLD JOGGER UNIT
3.8.1 Z-FOLD JOGGER UNIT COVER

2. Pull out the stapler tray unit [A].
3. Remove the Z-fold jogger unit cover [B] ( x 2).

B706R101.WMF
[A]
[B]
B706 24 SM
3.8.2 Z-FOLD JOGGER UNIT

1. Open the front door and pull out the stapler tray unit.
2. Remove the Z-fold jogger unit cover ( x 2).
3. Remove the Z-fold jogger unit [A] ( x 4, x 4, x 2).

B706R103.WMF
[A]
SM 25 B706
3
0
0
0
-
S
h
e
e
t

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r

B
7
0
6

3.8.3 JOGGER TOP FENCE MOTOR

2. Remove the Z-fold jogger unit cover ( x 2).
3. Remove the motor bracket [A] ( x 2, timing belt x 1).
4. Remove the jogger top fence motor [B] ( x 2, x 1, x 1).

B706R102.WMF
[A] [B]
B706 26 SM
3.8.4 JOGGER BOTTOM FENCE MOTOR

2. Remove the jogger bottom fence motor [A] ( x 2, timing belt x 1, x 1, x 1).

B706R104.WMF
[A]
SM 27 B706
3
0
0
0
-
S
h
e
e
t

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r

B
7
0
6

3.9 PUNCH UNIT B531 (OPTION)
3.9.1 PUNCH POSITION ADJUSTMENT

The position of the punched holes can be adjusted in two ways.

Front to Rear Adjustment
Three spacers [A] are provided with the punch unit for manual adjustment of the
hole position in the main scan direction:
2 mm (x 1)
1 mm (x 2)

NOTE: One spacer was installed at installation and the remaining spacers were
fastened with a screw to the rear frame of the finisher under the rear cover
and slightly above the lock bar.

Right to Left Adjustment
The position of the punched holes can be adjusted right to left in the sub scan
direction with SP6-113 Punch Hole Position Adjustment. The position can be
adjusted in the range 7.5 mm in 0.5 mm steps. The default setting is 0.
Press the key to toggle the selection. A +VE value shifts the punch holes left
toward the edge of the paper, and a -VE value shifts the holes right away from the
edge.

B531R101.WMF
[A]
B706 28 SM
3.10 JOGGER UNIT B513 (OPTION)
3.10.1 JOGGER UNIT

1. Remove the jogger unit cover [A] ( x 2).
2. Remove the jogger unit [B] ( x 2, x 1).

B513I002.WMF
B513R003.WMF
[A]
[B]
SM 29 B706
3
0
0
0
-
S
h
e
e
t

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r

B
7
0
6

3.10.2 JOGGER UNIT PCB

1. Remove the jogger unit from the finisher. (w 3.10.1)
2. Remove the jogger unit control PCB [A] ( x 2, x 3)

B513R001.WMF
[A]
B706 30 SM
3.10.3 JOGGER UNIT MOTOR

1. Remove the jogger unit from the finisher. (w 3.10.1)
2. Remove the shift jogger motor [A] ( x 2, x 1).
3. Remove the shift jogger lift motor [B ] ( x 2, x 1).

B513R002.WMF
[A]
[B]
TROUBLESHOOTING
SM 31 B706
3
0
0
0
-
S
h
e
e
t

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r

B
7
0
6

4. TROUBLESHOOTING
If the machine logs an SC code in the display of the operation panel, see Section
4 Troubleshooting of the Service Manual. Section 4 contains a complete list of all
service codes and how to troubleshoot the problem.

SERVICE TABLES
B706 32 SM
5. SERVICE TABLES
For details about 3000-Sheet Finisher B706 SP codes, please refer to 5. Service
Tables in the main machine service manual.

5.1 DIP SWITCHES
DPS100
1 2 3 4
Description
0 0 0 0 Default
0 0 1 0 Free run: A4 LEF, staple mode
0 0 0 1 Free run: staple and tray shift

NOTE: Do not use any other settings.

5.2 TEST POINTS
No. Label Monitored Signal
TP100 (5V) +5 V
TP101 (GND) Ground
TP102 (RXD) RXD
TP103 (TXD) TXD

5.3 FUSES
No. Function
FU100 Protects 24 V.

DETAILS
SM 33 B706
3
0
0
0
-
S
h
e
e
t

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r

B
7
0
6

6. DETAILS
6.1 TRAY AND STAPLER JUNCTION GATE

Depending on the finishing mode, the copies are directed up, straight through, or
down by the combinations of open and closed junction gates.

Selected Operation Mode
Solenoid/Gate
Upper Tray Sort/Stack Staple
[A] Stapler junction gate solenoid Off Off ON
[B] Stapler junction gate Closed Closed OPEN
[C] Tray junction gate solenoid ON Off Off
[D] Tray junction gate OPEN Closed Closed
B706D506.WMF
B706D505.WMF
B706D507.WMF
Upper Tray Mode
[B]
[D]
[C]
[A]
Sort/Stack Mode
[D]
[C]
[A]
[B]
Staple Mode
[B]
[D]
[C]
[A]
DETAILS
B706 34 SM
6.2 PAPER PRE-STACKING

This mechanism improves productivity in staple mode. It is only used when copying
on A4, LT, or B5 (all LEF).
During stapling, the copier has to wait. This mechanism reduces the wait by
holding the first two sheets of a job while the previous job is still being stapled. It
only works during the second and subsequent sets of a multi-set copy job.
The pre-stack junction gate solenoid [A] turns on 120 mm after the 1st sheet of
paper turns on the entrance sensor, and this directs the sheet to the pre-stack tray
[B]. (This sheet cannot be fed to the stapler yet, because the first set is still being
stapled.) The pre-stack paper stopper solenoid [C] turns on 350 mm after the 1st
sheet turns on the entrance sensor. The pre-stack paper stopper [D] then stops the
paper.
The pre-stack junction gate solenoid turns off 230 mm after the trailing edge of the
1st sheet passes through the entrance sensor, and the 2nd sheet is sent to the
paper guide [E]. The pre-stack paper stopper is released about 40 mm after the
2nd sheet turns on the pre-stack stopper sensor [F], and the two sheets of copy
paper are sent to the stapler tray. All sheets after the 2nd sheet go to the stapler
tray via the paper guide [E].

B706D000.WMF
[F]
[E]
[A]
[B]
[D]
[C]
DETAILS
SM 35 B706
3
0
0
0
-
S
h
e
e
t

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r

B
7
0
6

6.3 JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING

In the staple mode, as every sheet of paper arrives in the jogger unit, it is vertically
and horizontally aligned, then the staple edge is pressed flat to ensure the edge of
the stack is aligned correctly for stapling.
Vertical Paper Alignment: About 60 ms after the trailing edge of the copy passes
the staple tray entrance sensor [A], the positioning roller motor [B] is energized to
push the positioning roller [C] into contact with the paper. The positioning roller and
alignment brush roller [D] rotate to push the paper back and align the trailing edge
of the paper against the stack stopper [E].
Horizontal Paper Alignment: When the print key is pressed, the jogger motor [F]
turns on and the jogger fences [G] move to the wait position about 7.2 mm wider
than the selected paper size on both sides. When the trailing edge of the paper
passes the staple unit entrance sensor, the jogger motor moves the jogger fences
3.7 mm towards the paper. Next, the jogger motor turns on again for 3.5 mm for the
horizontal paper alignment then goes back to the wait position.
Paper Stack Correction: After the paper is aligned in the stapler tray, the left [J],
center [K], and right [L] stack plate motors switch on briefly and drive the front stack,
center stack, and rear stack plates against the edge of the stack to flatten the edge
completely against the staple tray for stapling. When the next copy paper turns on
the stapler entrance sensor, the stack plate motor turns on and returns to its home
position. The home position is detected by stack plate HP sensor [M].

B706D508.WMF
[C]
[A]
[E]
[B]
[D]
[G]
[F]
[I]
[J]
[K]
[L]
[M]
DETAILS
B706 36 SM
6.4 STAPLER UNIT MOVEMENT

Side-to-Side
The stapler motor [A] moves the stapler [B] from side to side. After the start key is
pressed, the stapler moves from its home position to the stapling position.
If two-staple-position mode is selected, for the first stack the stapler moves to the
rear stapling position first, staples, moves to the front position, staples and waits at
the front. For the second stack, the stapler staples the front corner first, then moves
to the rear corner and staples.
NOTE: For continuous stapling jobs, the corners are stapled rear then front for the
odd number stacks and stapled front then rear for even number stacks.

After the job is completed, the stapler returns to its home position. This is detected
by the stapler HP sensor [C].

B706D513.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
DETAILS
SM 37 B706
3
0
0
0
-
S
h
e
e
t

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r

B
7
0
6

Rotation (1)
In the oblique staple position mode, the stapler rotation motor [A] rotates the
stapler units [B] 45 to counterclockwise after it moves to the stapling position.

Rotation (2)
When the staple end condition arises, the stapler motor moves the stapler to the
front and the stapler rotation motor rotates the stapler unit to clockwise to remove
the staple cartridge [C]. This allows the user to add new staples.
Once the staples have been installed, and the front door closed, the stapler unit
returns to its home position. As the stapler unit is returning to the home position,
the stapler return sensor [D] is activated, the return solenoid [E] turns on and it
assists the guide roller [F] to return to its guide (this guide directs the stapler during
rotation).

B706D514.WMF
B706D515.WMF

B706D523.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[F]
[E]
DETAILS
B706 38 SM
6.5 STAPLER

When the aligned copies are brought to the stapling position by the positioning
roller and jogger fences, the staple hammer motor [A] starts stapling.
During stapling, the stapler trims off the excess length [B] of the staples by lowering
the cutter [C]. This excess length depends on the number of copies in the set; there
will be very little for a stack containing 100 sheets. The staple waste drops into the
tray [D] in the stapler. When the stapler unit returns to its home position, the tray
hits the shaft [E] and the tray opens. The staple waste drops into the staple waste
hopper [F]. When the staple waste hopper is full, the actuator on its base activates
the staple waste hopper sensor [G]. An SC737 (Full Finisher Staple Waste Hopper)
is displayed.
B706D516.WMF
B706D521.WMF
B706D522.WMF
[G]
[F]
[E]
[D]
[E]
[A]
[C]
[B]
DETAILS
SM 39 B706
3
0
0
0
-
S
h
e
e
t

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r

B
7
0
6

The stapler has a staple end sensor [A], cartridge set sensor [B] and staple
hammer HP sensor [C].
When a staple end or no cartridge condition is detected, a message is displayed
advising the operator to install a staple cartridge. If this condition is detected during
a copy job, the indication will appear, and the copy job will stop.
The staple cartridge has a clinch area [D] where jammed staples collect. The
operator can remove the jammed staples from the clinch area by pressing in the
releases [E] on both sides, then lowering the bracket lever [F].

B706D518.WMF
B706D517.WMF
[B]
[C]
[A]
[D]
[E]
[F]
DETAILS
B706 40 SM
6.6 FEED-OUT

After the copies have been stapled, the stack feed-out motor [A] starts. The pawl
[B] on the stack feed-out belt [C] transports the set of stapled copies up and feeds
it to the shift tray exit roller [D]. When stapling starts, the exit guide motor [E] opens
the upper exit guide [F], which includes the upper shift tray exit roller [G], in order to
feed out the leading edge of the copy set smoothly. The exit guide motor turns on
again a certain time after stapling is complete, and the upper exit guide plate is
lowered. Then the shift tray exit roller takes over the stack feed-out.
The on-off timing of the exit guide motor is detected by the exit guide open sensor
[H].
The stack-feed-out motor turns off when the pawl actuates the stack feed-out belt
home position sensor [I].

B706D512.WMF
B706D519.WMF
[B]
[C]
[D] [G]
[I]
[A]
[F]
[H]
[E]
DETAILS
SM 41 B706
3
0
0
0
-
S
h
e
e
t

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r

B
7
0
6

6.7 PAPER EXIT STACKING

The stacking roller assembly [A] is fastened to a plate [B] on a shaft by a spring [C].
The cam [D], in contact with the bottom of the plate, is connected to the stacking
roller drag motor [E] via a timing belt.
The stacking roller drag motor and timing belt rotate the cam against the bottom of
the plate to move the rollers forward and back with each sheet ejected onto the
shift tray.
The stacking roller motor [F] drives the shaft [G] that rotates the stacking rollers
counter-clockwise as the rollers move back. The simultaneous rotation and
backward movement of the roller assembly pulls each sheet back toward the copier
to align the edges of the stack on the shift tray.
The actuator [H] is mounted on the cam and rotating with both rotating clockwise)
and detects the roller assembly home position when the actuator leaves the gap of
the return drive HP sensor [I] and signals the machine that the rollers are at the
home position. The machine uses this information to control paper feed timing and
confirm that the mechanism is operating correctly. The cam and actuator make one
complete rotation for every sheet fed out of the machine onto the shift tray.

B706D524.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
[H] [I]
DETAILS
B706 42 SM
6.8 SHIFT TRAY
6.8.1 OVERVIEW

The shift tray lift motor [A] controls the vertical position of the shift tray [B] through
gears and timing belts [C].

Stand-by Mode
After the main switch is turned on, or when the stack is removed from the tray, the
end of the feeler on the tray falls and its actuator [D] rotates up into staple mode
HP sensor 2 [E] (S7) and switches it on. This switches on the lift motor, which
raises the tray until the tray pushes the actuator out of the sensor [E]. Then, the lift
motor stops the shift tray; this is the home position (the actuator [D] is between the
two sensors [E] and [F].
The shift tray upper limit switch (SW1) prevents the drive gear from being damaged
if staple mode HP sensor 2 [E] fails. In case of a failure, when the shift tray pushes
up the actuator [G] and positioning rollers, the switch will cut the power to the shift
tray lift motor.

B706D010.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
DETAILS
SM 43 B706
3
0
0
0
-
S
h
e
e
t

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r

B
7
0
6

6.8.2 SHIFT TRAY UP/DOWN MOVEMENT

Sort/Stack Mode (Shift Mode)
The shift tray moves to home position, which is when the actuator [F] has just
exited the shift mode home position sensor [G] (S12). During feed-out, the tray is
lowered automatically at prescribed intervals; sensor [D] (S7) is ignored. When the
stack is removed from the tray, the end of the feeler [E] between the arms of the
stacking roller falls, and its actuator [F] enters sensor [G] (S12) and switches it on.
This switches on the lift motor [A], which raises the tray until the actuator leaves the
sensor. Then, the lift motor stops the tray; this is the home position.
In sort/stack mode, if S12 fails when the tray is being lifted, the shift tray upper limit
switch (SW1) prevents the drive gear from being damaged.

Staple Mode
The shift tray moves to home position, which is when the actuator [B] is between
the staple mode home position sensors [C] and [D]. During feed-out, the shift tray
is lowered automatically at prescribed intervals. When the stack is removed from
the tray, the tray returns to the home position for stand-by mode. (w 6.8.1)
B706D010.WMF
[B]
[C]
[D]
[F]
[G]
[A]
[E]
DETAILS
B706 44 SM
6.8.3 SHIFT TRAY LOWER LIMIT DETECTION

This machine has two shift tray lower limit sensors: shift lower limit sensor [A] (S9)
for large paper (B4 and larger) and shift lower limit sensor [B] (S11) for small paper
(smaller than B4).
NOTE: Sensor [C] (S10) is not used.
When the actuator [D] enters sensor [A] while using large paper (about 1500
sheets are on the tray), a message will be displayed and copying will stop.
When the actuator [D] enters sensor [B] while using small paper (about 3,000
sheets are on the tray), a message will be displayed and copying will stop.

B706D010.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
DETAILS
SM 45 B706
3
0
0
0
-
S
h
e
e
t

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r

B
7
0
6

6.9 SHIFT TRAY SIDE-TO-SIDE MOVEMENT

In sort/stack mode, the shift tray [A] moves from side to side to separate the sets of
copies.
The horizontal position of the shift tray is controlled by the shift motor [B] and shift
gear disk [C]. After one set of copies is made and delivered to the shift tray, the
shift motor turns on, driving the shift gear disk and the shaft [D]. The end fence [E]
is positioned by the shaft, creating the side-to-side movement.
When the shift gear disk has rotated 180 degrees (when the shift tray is fully shifted
across), the cut-out in the shift gear disk turns on the shift tray half-turn sensor [F]
and the shift motor stops. The next set of copies is then delivered. The motor turns
on, repeating the same process and moving the tray back to the previous position.
B706D520.WMF
[F]
[C]
[A]
[E]
[D]
[B]
DETAILS
B706 46 SM
6.10 STAPLING Z-FOLDED PAPER

Here is the operation sequence for jogging and stapling Z-folded sheets:
J The lower jogger fence lifts to receive the Z-folded sheets.
The top fence moves down, to the horizontal position.
A sheet of paper goes into the stapler tray.
0 The positioning roller turns when each sheet is fed to the stapler tray.
Each sheet is fed down against the lower jogger fence to align the bottom edge.
After the set number of sheets come in, the jogger top-fence motor switches on and
lowers the top fence against the top of the stack. This aligns the stack for stapling.
The bottom fence motor lowers the aligned stack to the stapling position.
The stapler staples the stack.

B706D004.WMF

B706D005.WMF

DETAILS
SM 47 B706
3
0
0
0
-
S
h
e
e
t

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r

B
7
0
6

6.11 JAM CONDITIONS
1. The entrance sensor does not turn on when the copier has fed paper 426 mm
after the copier exit sensor turned off.
2. The entrance sensor does not turn off when the upper transport motor has fed
paper 1.5 times the papers length after it turned on.
3. The upper tray exit sensor does not turn on when the upper transport motor
has fed paper 574 mm after the entrance sensor turned on.
4. The upper tray exit sensor does not turn off when the upper transport motor
has fed paper 1.5 times the papers length after it turned on.
5. In sort/stack mode, the shift tray exit sensor does not turn on when the upper
transport motor has fed paper 733 mm after the entrance sensor turned on.
6. In sort/stack mode, the shift tray exit sensor does not turn off when the upper
transport motor has fed paper 1.5 times the papers length after it turned on.
7. In staple mode, the stapler tray entrance sensor does not turn on when the
upper and lower transport motor have fed paper 835 mm after the entrance
sensor turned on.
8. In staple mode, the stapler tray entrance sensor does not turn off when the
upper transport motor has fed paper 1.5 times the papers length after it turned
on.
9. In staple mode, the stapler tray paper sensor does not turn off within 250
pulses of the stack feed-out motor after it started.
10. In staple mode, the shift tray exit sensor does not turn off within 1,260 ms after
the stack feed-out motor started.

DETAILS
B706 48 SM
6.12 PUNCH UNIT B531 (OPTION)
6.12.1 PUNCH UNIT DRIVE

The punch unit makes 2 or 3 holes at the trailing edge of the paper. The number of
holes depends on a selection made on the operation panel.
The cam [A] has 2 punches on one side and 3 punches on the other, and is turned
by the punch motor [B]. The punch motor turns on immediately after the trailing
edge of the paper passes the entrance sensor. The punches on the cam rotate
downward and punch holes in the paper.
After punching a sheet of paper, the cam returns to home position and stops.
Home position depends on whether 2 holes or 3 holes are being made, so there
are two punch HP sensors. Punch HP sensor 1 [C] is used when 2-hole punching
is selected, and punch HP sensor 2 [D] is used when 3-hole punching is selected.
When the cut-out [E] enters the slot of the punch HP in use (sensor 1 or 2-hole
punching or sensor 2 for 3/4-hole punching) the motor stops.
The knob (not shown) on the front end of the punch unit can be turned in either
direction to clear paper jammed in the punch unit.

B531D102.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
DETAILS
SM 49 B706
3
0
0
0
-
S
h
e
e
t

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r

B
7
0
6

6.12.2 PUNCH WASTE COLLECTION

Punch waste is collected in the punch waste hopper [A] positioned under the punch
unit.
When the level of the punch waste in the hopper rises as far as the hole [B] in the
hopper, the punch waste sensor [C] turns on, stops the job, and triggers a
message on the operation to indicate that the hopper is full and must be removed
and emptied.
The job resumes automatically after the hopper is emptied and returned to the
finisher.
The punch waste hopper sensor also functions as the hopper set sensor. When the
hopper is not in the finisher, or if it is not inserted completely, the spring loaded
sensor arm rotates up and to the right with the punch waste sensor away from the
hole in the hopper holder and a message is displayed. The message in this case is
the same as the hopper full message.

B531D103.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
DETAILS
B706 50 SM
6.13 JOGGER UNIT B513 (OPTION)
6.13.1 JOGGER UNIT MECHANICAL LAYOUT

1. Shift Jogger Fence Lift Motor
2. Shift Jogger Motor Timing Belt
3. Shift Jogger Motor
4. Shift Jogger Fence Timing Belt
5. Shift Jogger Fences
6. Shift Jogger HP Sensor
7. Shift Jogger Lift HP Sensor

B513D003.WMF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
DETAILS
SM 51 B706
3
0
0
0
-
S
h
e
e
t

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r

B
7
0
6

6.13.2 JOGGER UNIT DRIVE

At prescribed intervals, the jogger motor [A] switches on and drives the jogger
timing belt [B], gear [C] and jogger fence timing belt [D] which drives the shift
jogger fences [E] against the sides of the stack to align its edges.
At the end of the job, the jogger fence lift motor [F] switches on and raises the
fences until the actuator [G] leaves the slot of the shift jogger fence lift HP sensor
[H] and shuts off the shift jogger fence lift motor.
At the same time, the jogger motor reverses and drives the fences away from the
sides of the stack until the actuator [I] deactivates the shift jogger fence HP sensor
[J] and switches off the jogger motor.
The jogger fences remain up in the standby position until the next job starts.

B513D002.WMF
[F]
[G]
[H]
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[I]
[J]
OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
B706 52 SM
7. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
7.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT

1. Upper Tray
2. Middle Transport Rollers
3. Upper Tray Exit Roller
4. Upper Transport Rollers
5. Tray Junction Gate
6. Stapler Junction Gate
7. Entrance Rollers
8. Punch Unit
9. Pre-stack Junction Gate
10. Punch Waste Hopper
11. Pre-stack Tray
12. Stack Plate
13. Staple Waste Hopper
14. Stapler
15. Alignment Brush Roller
17. Stack Feed-out Belt
18. Shift Tray Drive Belt
19. Lower Transport Rollers
20. Shift Tray
21. Shift Tray Exit Roller
22. Jogger Top Fence
23. Jogger Bottm Fence
B706V900.WMF
10
9
15
14
3
11
12
13
16
17
18
20
19
21
4
7
8
1 2 5
6
22
23
SM 53 B706
3
0
0
0
-
S
h
e
e
t

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r

B
7
0
6

7.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Symbol Name Function
Motors
M01 Shift Tray Exit Drives the exit roller for the shift tray.
M02 Shift Tray Lift Moves the shift tray up or down.
M03 Exit Guide Opens and closes the upper exit guide.
M04 Lower Transport
Drives the lower transport rollers, the positioning
roller and the alignment brush roller
M05 Shift Moves the shift tray from side to side.
M06 Positioning Roller
Moves the positioning roller into contact with the
paper.
M07 Stacking Roller Drag Moves the stacking roller in and out.
M08 Stacking Roller Rotates the stacking roller.
M09 Jogger Moves the jogger fences.
M10 Stack Feed-Out Belt Drives the stack feed-out belt.
M11 Stack Plate - Center Presses down the center of the edge for stapling.
M12 Stapler Moves the staple unit from side to side.
M13 Stack Plate Front
Presses down the front corner of the edge for
stapling.
M14 Stack Plate Rear
Presses down the rear corner of the edge for
stapling.
M15 Stapler Rotation Rotates the stapler 45 degrees for oblique stapling.
M16 Staple Hammer Drives the staple hammer.
M17 Punch
Drives the punch shaft and roller. Punch Unit B531
(option).
M18 Upper Transport
Drives the entrance rollers, the middle and upper
transport rollers, and upper tray exit roller.
M19 Shift Jogger
Drives the shift jogger fences against the sides of
the sheets to align the stack, then reverses to return
them to the home position. Jogger Unit B513
(option).
M20 Shift Jogger Lift
Raises the shift jogger fences after aligning the
stack, then reverses and lowers them when
returning to the home position. Jogger Unit B513
(option).
M21 Jogger Top Fence Moves the top jogger fence.
M22 Jogger Bottom Fence Moves the bottom jogger fence.
BOARDS
PCB
Main Controls the finisher and communicates with the
copier.
PCB Stapler Controls the stapler unit.
PCB
Punch Passes signals between the punch unit and the
finisher main board. Punch Unit B531 (option).
PCB Jogger Controls the shift/jogger unit B513 (option).
B706 54 SM

SENSORS
S01
Entrance Detects the copy paper entering the finisher and
checks for misfeeds.
S02 Upper Tray Exit Checks for misfeeds at the upper tray.
S03 Upper Tray Limit
Detects when the paper stack height in the upper
tray is at its upper limit.
S04 Shift Tray Exit Checks for misfeeds at the shift tray exit.
S05 Exit Guide Open Detects whether the guide plate is opened or not.
S06 Staple Mode HP 1
Detects the shift tray home position for standby
mode and for staple mode.
S07 Staple Mode HP 2
Detects the shift tray home position for standby
mode and for staple mode.
S09
Shift Lower Limit Large
Paper
Detects the lower limit for the shift tray when large
paper sizes are being used
S10 Shift Tray Lower Limit 2 Not used.
S11 Shift Tray Lower Limit 3 Detects when the shift tray is at its lower limit.
S12 Shift Mode HP
Detects the shift tray home position in sort/stack
mode.
S13 Stacking Roller HP Detects when the stacking roller is at home position.
S14 Shift Tray Half-Turn
Detects whether the shift tray is at either the front or
home HP.
S15 Pre-Stack Tray Paper
Determines when to turn off the pre-stack paper
stopper solenoid.
S16 Stapler Tray Exit Detects jams at the staple tray exit.
S17 Positioning Roller HP Detects the home position of the positioning roller.
S18 Stack Feed-Out Belt HP Detects the home position of the stack feed-out belt.
S19 Stapler Tray Paper Detects the copy paper in the stapler tray.
S20 Jogger HP Detects the home position of the shift jogger fences.
S21 Stack Plate - Center HP Detects the home position of the center stack plate.
S22 Stack Plate Front Detects the home position of the front stack plate.
S23 Stack Plate Rear Detects the home position of the rear stack plate.
S24 Stapler HP
Detects the home position of the staple unit for side-
to-side movement.
S25 Stapler Rotation HP
Detects the home position of the stapler unit for 45-
degree rotation.
S26 Stapler Return Detects the on timing of the stapler return solenoid.
S27 Staple Waste Hopper Detects when the staple waste hopper is full.
S28 Punch Waste Hopper
Detects when the punch waste hopper is full and
detects when the punch tray is set. Punch Unit
B531 (option).
S29 Punch HP 1
Detects the cam home position for the 2-hole
punch. Punch Unit B531 (option).
S30 Punch HP 2
Detects the cam home position for 3/4 punch.
Punch Unit B531 (option).
S31 Shift Jogger HP
Detects the home position of the jogger unit arms
during paper alignment. Jogger Unit B513 (option).
SM 55 B706
3
0
0
0
-
S
h
e
e
t

F
i
n
i
s
h
e
r

B
7
0
6

SENSORS
S32 Shift Jogger Lift HP
Detects the when both shift jogger fences are at the
lowered position and ready to move against the
sides of the stack. Jogger Unit B513 (option).
S33 Top Fence HP
Detects the top fence home position for Z-fold
paper staple mode.
S34 Bottom Fence HP
Detects the bottom fence home position for Z-fold
paper staple mode.
SOLENOIDS
SOL1
(Upper) Tray Junction
Gate
Drives the tray junction gate.
SOL2 Stapler Junction Gate Drives the stapler junction gate.
SOL3 Pre-Stack Junction Gate Drives the pre-stack junction gate.
SOL4 Pre-stack Paper Stopper Drives the stopper pawl of the pre-stacking tray.
SOL5 Stapler Return
Positions the stapler correctly on its return from the
staple supply point.
SWITCHES
SW1 Shift Tray Upper Limit
Cuts the power to the shift tray lift motor when the
shift tray position is at its upper limit.
SW2 Front Door Safety Cuts the dc power when the front door is opened.
SW3 Emergency Stop
Switches the current job off and on to allow time for
the operator to remove paper from the shift tray.

B706 56 SM
7.3 DRIVE LAYOUT

1. Upper Transport Roller 2
2. Upper Tray Exit Roller
3. Lower Transport Roller 2
4. Shift Tray Lift Motor
5. Shift Tray Exit Motor
6. Shift Tray Exit Roller
7. Shift Tray
8. Shift Motor
9. Staple Tray Exit Roller
12. Lower Transport Motor
13. Lower Transport Rollers 2
16. Entrance Roller 2
17. Entrance Roller
18. Upper Transport Roller 1
19. Upper Transport Motor
20. Stack Feed-out Motor
21. Jogger Motor
22. Jogger Fence
23. Stack Plate Motor
24. Stapler Motor
25. Stack Feed-out Belt
26. Stapler Rotation Motor

B706V504.WMF
B706V503.WMF
10
13
12
14
15
17
16
18
19
11
9 8
7
1 2 3 4 5
6
25
23
26
24
22
21
20

B762
9-BIN MAILBOX

SM i B762

9-BIN MAILBOX B762
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.1 COVERS AND TRAYS................................................................................. 1
1.2 SENSORS.................................................................................................... 2
1.3 MAIN MOTOR AND CONTROL BOARD ..................................................... 3
2. DETAILS...........................................................................................4
2.1 OVERVIEW.................................................................................................. 4
2.1.1 MAIN COMPONENT LAYOUT............................................................ 4
2.1.2 DRIVE LAYOUT .................................................................................. 5
2.1.3 PAPER PATH...................................................................................... 6
2.2 BASIC OPERATION..................................................................................... 7
2.2.1 PAPER PATH...................................................................................... 7
2.3 OVERFLOW DETECTION ........................................................................... 8
2.3.1 OVERVIEW......................................................................................... 8
2.3.2 DETECTION TIMING .......................................................................... 9
2.4 PAPER MISFEED DETECTION TIMING................................................... 10
2.4.1 A4 SIDEWAYS (LEF) 1ST BIN TRAY........................................... 10
2.4.2 A4 SIDEWAYS (LEF) 2ND ~ 9TH BIN TRAY ............................... 10
COVERS AND TRAYS
SM 1 B762
9
-
B
i
n

M
a
i
l
b
o
x

B
7
6
2


CAUTION
Switch the machine off and unplug the machine before starting and
procedure in this section.

1.1 COVERS AND TRAYS

[A]: Trays
Grip each tray by the front and lift out.
[B]: Front cover ( x 2)
[C]: Rear cover ( x 3)
[D]: Top cover

B471R001.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
SENSORS
B762 2 SM
1.2 SENSORS

Remove the tray ( 1.1)
[A]: Bin cover
[B]: Tray sensor ( x 1)
[C]: Tray overflow sensor ( x 1)
[D]: Vertical transport sensor ( x 1)
Raise the pawl, then grip the bottom of the sensor to remove.

B471R003.WMF
B471R104.WMF
[B]
[C]
[D]
[A]
MAIN MOTOR AND CONTROL BOARD
SM 3 B762
9
-
B
i
n

M
a
i
l
b
o
x

B
7
6
2

1.3 MAIN MOTOR AND CONTROL BOARD

Rear cover ( 1.1)
[A]: Control board ( x 3, x 17)
[B]: Main motor bracket (main motor x 1, x 2)
[C]: Timing belt
[D]: Main motor ( x 1)

B471R002.WMF
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
OVERVIEW
B762 4 SM
2. DETAILS
2.1 OVERVIEW
2.1.1 MAIN COMPONENT LAYOUT

1. Bins (x 9)
2. Vertical Transport Rollers (x 5)
3. Turn Gates (x 8)
4. Exit Rollers (x 9)

The trays are 1 to 9 (bottom to top). The numbers are clearly marked on the side of
the unit. The top tray does not require a turn gate. When the top tray is selected for
output, all turn gates remain closed, leaving only the top bin open.

B471D003.WMF
1
2
4
3
OVERVIEW
SM 5 B762
9
-
B
i
n

M
a
i
l
b
o
x

B
7
6
2

2.1.2 DRIVE LAYOUT

1. Main Motor
2. Main Timing Belt
3. Timing Belt

B471D002.WMF
1
2
3
OVERVIEW
B762 6 SM
2.1.3 PAPER PATH

1. Original Paper Path
3. LCT Feed
4. Selected Trays
5. Turn Gates
6. Mailbox Paper Path
7. Junction Gate (paper goes either
up to the mailbox or out to the
finishers proof tray)

The solenoid for the junction gate (7) is part of the mailbox.
B471D970.WMF
1
4
5
6
7
2
3
BASIC OPERATION
SM 7 B762
9
-
B
i
n

M
a
i
l
b
o
x

B
7
6
2

2.2 BASIC OPERATION
2.2.1 PAPER PATH

The unit is mounted on top the finisher and connected to the finisher by a 14-pin
connector. When the leading edge of the paper passes and activates the entrance
sensor of the finisher, the mailbox main motor switches on and the mailbox vertical
transport rollers [A] begin to turn. The exit roller [B] feeds the paper out to the
selected tray [C].
A solenoid [D] opens and closes the junction gate [E]. When a solenoid switches
on, the gate opens and directs to the paper to the tray.
NOTE: When the top tray (bin 9) is selected, all solenoids are off and closed,
allowing the paper to pass to the top tray (bin 9 does not require a
solenoid).
When the last sheet is fed out, it switches off the vertical transport sensor, and both
the mailbox main motor and the junction gate solenoid of the selected bin switch
off. The mailbox normally feeds paper at 372 mm/s, about the same speed as the
finisher. (The finisher speed is 370 mm/s.)

B471D004.WMF
B471D105.WMF
[D]
[E]
[A]
[B]
[C]
OVERFLOW DETECTION
B762 8 SM
2.3 OVERFLOW DETECTION
2.3.1 OVERVIEW

An overflow sensor [A] and actuator [B] are above the exit of each paper tray. The
actuator, mounted on a swivel arm, remains in contact with the top of the stack.
The actuator rises as the stack becomes higher until it activates the sensor. Then,
a tray full message appears on the operation panel and the job halts. If the paper is
removed before the tray is full, the job continues.

B471D005.WMF
[A]
[B]
OVERFLOW DETECTION
SM 9 B762
9
-
B
i
n

M
a
i
l
b
o
x

B
7
6
2

2.3.2 DETECTION TIMING

When the mailbox exit sensor goes high for the prescribed time (T), the machine
determines that the tray is full. The value of T is calculated, regardless of paper
size, as follows:
T (s) = (60/s x max. size ppm) x 3 s
After the tray full sensor switches on, if it remains on for the feeding of eight
additional sheets, then this notifies the machine that the tray is full.
T is calculated as shown below. For example, for a minimum ppm of 12 prints
(regardless of paper size), the value T is 15 s. Then, if the sensor detects paper for
15 s or more, the machine stops the copy job.

Full (High)
Not Full (Low)
Between Sheets
Paper
Length
Paper
Length
Paper
Length
Full
B471D010.WMF
PAPER MISFEED DETECTION TIMING
B762 10 SM
2.4 PAPER MISFEED DETECTION TIMING
2.4.1 A4 SIDEWAYS (LEF) 1ST BIN TRAY

2.4.2 A4 SIDEWAYS (LEF) 2ND ~ 9TH BIN TRAY

Main Motor
(Main Unit)
Exit Sensor
Main Motor
(Mailbox)
Turn Gate
(SOL 1)
J1
*1
*1: Time required for A4 LEF
B471D011.WMF
Main Motor
(Main Unit)
Exit Sensor
Main Motor
(Mailbox)
Turn Gate
(SOL 2)
J1
*1
*1: Time required for A4 Sideways (LEF)
*2: Feed to 9th Tray: All SOLs OFF.
Vertical Transport
Sensor *1
J2
J3
B471D012.WMF
PAPER MISFEED DETECTION TIMING
SM 11 B762
9
-
B
i
n

M
a
i
l
b
o
x

B
7
6
2

J1 Timing: After the leading edge of the sheet activates the mailbox exit sensor,
a misfeed is detected if the sensor does not switch off within:
X+0.5 s
Where X = The amount of time prescribed for the paper size to pass
the sensor. (X = 1.74 s for A4 Sideways for example)

J2 Timing: After the mailbox paper exit sensor is activated, the machine
determines that the paper has not yet fed and detects a misfeed if the
vertical transport sensor does not activate within the time prescribed
for the paper size (1.94 s for A4 paper, for example)

J3 Timing: After the vertical transport sensor is activated, a misfeed is detected if
the vertical transport sensor does not turn off within:
X+0.52 s
Where X = The amount of time prescribed for the paper size to pass
the sensor. (X = 2.26 s for A4 Sideways for example)

Af 3260C PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Af 3260C PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Af 3260C PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

B132/B200

LCT (B473), LCT ADAPTER (B699)

MFP CONTROLLER OPTIONS

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

BOOKLET STAPLING (B700 ONLY)

You might also like